Flow Computer

Manual Guide
Volume 1
System Architecture and Installation
Firmware Revisions 22.71/26.71
Turbine / Positive Displacemen
Liquid Flow Metering Systems with Meter Factor Linearization
Volume 2C Basic Operation

Volume 3C Configuration and
Advanced Operation
Volume 4C Modbus Database

Addresses and
Index Numbers
Volume 5
Technical Bulletins
Warranty & Licences
Manual Guide
Effective May 1999

About Our Company
Omni Flow Computers, Inc. is the worlds leading manufacturer and supplier of
panel-mount custody transfer flow computers and controllers. Our mission is to
Measure the Difference! continue to achieve higher levels of customer and user satisfaction by applying
the basic company values: our people, our products and productivity.
Omni flow computers - Our products have become the international flow computing standard. Omni
Our products are currently Flow Computers pursues a policy of product development and continuous
being used world-wide at:
improvement. As a result, our flow computers are considered the brain and
Offshore oil and gas
production facilities
cash register of liquid and gas flow metering systems.
Crude oil, refined Our staff is knowledgeable and professional. They represent the energy,
products, LPG, NGL and intelligence and strength of our company, adding value to our products and
gas transmission lines
services. With the customer and user in mind, we are committed to quality in
Storage, truck and
marine loading/offloading everything we do, devoting our efforts to deliver workmanship of high caliber.
terminals Teamwork with uncompromising integrity is our lifestyle.
Refineries;
petrochemical and
cogeneration plants.
Contacting Our Corporate Headquarters
"
Omni Flow Computers, Inc.
10701 Corporate Drive, Suite 300
Stafford, Texas 77477 USA
#
Phone: 281-240-6161
Fax: 281-240-6162
World-wide Web Site:

http://www.omniflow.com
E-mail Addresses:
!$" techsupport@omniflow.com
info@omniflow.com
Getting User Support

Technical and sales support is available world-wide through our corporate or
authorized representative offices. If you require user support, please contact the
location nearest you (see insert) or our corporate offices. Our staff and
representatives will enthusiastically work with you to ensure the sound operation
of your flow computer.
ALL.71+ ! 05/99 xi
Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 User Manual Manual Guide
About the Flow Computer Applications

Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 Flow Computers are integrable into the majority of
liquid and gas flow measurement and control systems. The current firmware
revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers are:
20.71/24.71: Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering
Systems with K Factor Linearization (US/metric units)
21.71/25.71: Orifice/Differential Pressure Liquid Flow Metering Systems
(US/metric units)
22.71/26.71: Turbine/Positive Displacement Liquid Flow Metering Systems
with Meter Factor Linearization (US/metric units)
23.71/27.71: Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems (US/metric units)
About the User Manual

This manual applies to .71+ firmware revisions of Omni 6000 and Omni 3000
Flow Computers. It is structured into 5 volumes and is the principal part of your
flow computer documentation.
Target Audience
As a users reference guide, this manual is intended for a sophisticated audience
with knowledge of liquid and gas flow measurement technology. Different user
levels of technical know-how are considered in this manual. You need not be an
expert to operate the flow computer or use certain portions of this manual.
However, some flow computer features require a certain degree of expertise
and/or advanced knowledge of liquid and gas flow instrumentation and electronic
measurement. In general, each volume is directed towards the following users:
Volume 1. System Architecture and Installation
Installers
System/Project Managers
Engineers/Programmers
Advanced Operators
Operators
Volume 2. Basic Operation
All Users
Volume 3. Configuration and Advanced Operation
Advanced Operators
Volume 4. Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers
Advanced Operators
Volume 5. Technical Bulletins
Users with different levels of expertise.
xii ALL.71+ ! 05/99

Manual Structure
The User Manual comprises 5 volumes; each contained in separate binding for
easy manipulation. You will find a detailed table of contents at the beginning of
each volume.
Volume 1. System Architecture and Installation

Volume 1 is generic to all applications and considers both US and metric units.
This volume describes:
Basic hardware/software features
Installation practices
Calibration procedures
Flow computer specifications
Volume 2. Basic Operation

User Reference This volume is application specific and is available in four separate versions (one
Documentation - The User for each application revision). It covers the essential and routine tasks and
Manual is structured into procedures that may be performed by the flow computer operator. Both US and
five volumes. Volumes 1
and 5 are generic to all flow metric units are considered.
computer application
revisions. Volumes 2, 3 and
General computer-related features are described, such as:
4 are application specific. Overview of keypad functions
These have four versions
each, published in separate Adjusting the display
documents; i.e., one per Clearing and viewing alarms
application revision per
volume. You will receive the Computer totalizing
version that corresponds to Printing and customizing reports
your application revision.
The volumes respective to The application-related topics may include:
each application revision
are: Batching operations
Revision 20/24.71: Proving functions
Volume #s 2a, 3a, 4a PID control functions
Revision 21/25.71:
Audit trail
Volume #s 2b, 3b, 4b
Revision 22/26.71:
Other application specific functions
Volume #s 2c, 3c, 4c Depending on your application, some of these topics may not be included in your
Revision 23/27.71: specific documentation. An index of display variables and corresponding key
Volume #s 2d, 3d, 4d
press sequences that are specific to your application are listed at the end of
For example, if your flow
computer application
each version of this volume.
revision is 20/24.71, you will
be supplied with Volumes
2a, 3a & 4a, along with
Volume 3. Configuration and Advanced Operation
Volumes 1 & 5. Volume 3 is intended for the advanced user. It refers to application specific
topics and is available in four separate versions (one for each application
revision). This volume covers:
Application overview
Flow computer configuration data entry
User-programmable functions
Modbus Protocol implementation
Flow equations and algorithms
ALL.71+ ! 05/99 xiii

Database Addresses and Index Numbers

Volume 4. Modbus
Volume 4 is intended for the system programmer (advanced user). It comprises
a descriptive list of database point assignments in numerical order, within our
firmware. This volume is application specific, for which there is one version per
application revision.
Volume 5. Technical Bulletins

Manual Updates and Volume 5 includes technical bulletins that contain important complementary
Technical Bulletins - information about your flow computer hardware and software. Each bulletin
Volume 5 of the User covers a topic that may be generic to all applications or specific to a particular
Manual is a compendium of
Technical Bulletins. They revision. They include product updates, theoretical descriptions, technical
contain updates to the user specifications, procedures, and other information of interest.
manual. You can view and
print updates from our This is the most dynamic and current volume. Technical bulletins may be added
website: to this volume after its publication. You can view and print these bulletins from
http://www.omniflow.com our website.
Conventions Used in this Manual

Typographical Several typographical conventions have been established as standard reference
Conventions - These are to highlight information that may be important to the reader. These will allow you
standard graphical/text to quickly identify distinct types of information.
elements used to denote
types of information. For
your convenience, a few
conventions were
CONVENTION USED DESCRIPTION
established in the manuals
layout design. These Sidebar Notes / InfoTips Sidebar notes or InfoTips consist of concise
highlight important information of interest which is enclosed in a gray-
Example: shaded box placed on the left margin of a page.
information of interest to the
reader and are easily These refer to topics that are either next to them, or
INFO - Sidebar notes are used to
caught by the eye. highlight important information in on the same or facing page. It is highly
a concise manner. recommended that you read them.
Keys / Keypress Keys on the flow computer keypad are denoted with
Sequences brackets and bold face characters (e.g.: the up
arrow key is denoted as [%]). The actual function of
Example: the key as it is labeled on the keypad is what
appears between brackets. Keypress sequences
[Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n]
that are executed from the flow computer keypad are
expressed in a series of keys separated by a space
(as shown in the example).
Screen Displays
Sample screens that correspond to the flow
Example: computer display appear surrounded by a dark gray
border with the text in bold face characters and
Use Up/Down Arrows mono-spaced font. The flow computer display is
To Adjust Contrast; actually 4 lines by 20 characters. Screens that are
Left, Right Arrows more than 4 lines must be scrolled to reveal the text
To Adjust Backlight shown in the manual.
xiv ALL.71+ ! 05/99

CONVENTION USED DESCRIPTION
Headings
Sequential heading numbering is used to categorize
Example: topics within each volume of the User Manual. The
highest heading level is a chapter, which is divided
2. Chapter Heading into sections, which are likewise subdivided into
subsections. Among other benefits, this facilitates
2.3. Section Heading
information organization and cross-referencing.
2.3.1. Subsection Heading
Figure Captions Figure captions are numbered in sequence as they

Example: appear in each chapter. The first number identifies
the chapter, followed by the sequence number and
Fig. 2-3. Figure No. 3 of title of the illustration.
Chapter 2
Page Numbers Page numbering restarts at the beginning of every

chapter and technical bulletin. Page numbers are
Example: preceded by the chapter number followed by a
hyphen. Technical bulletins only indicate the page
2-8
number of that bulletin. Page numbers are located
on the outside margin in the footer of each page.
Application Revision and The contents of Volume 1 and Volume 5 are

Effective Publication Date common to all application revisions and are denoted
as All.71. Content of Volumes 2, 3 and 4 are
Examples: application specific and are identified with the
All.71 ! 03/98 application number. These identifiers are included
on every page in the inside margin of the footer,
20/24.71 ! 03/98
opposite the page number. The publication/effective
21/25.71 ! 03/98 date of the manual follows the application
22/26.71 ! 03/98 identification. The date is expressed as month/year
(e.g.: March 1998 is 03/98).
23/27.71 ! 03/98
Trademark References
The following are trademarks of Omni Flow Computers, Inc.:
Omni 3000
Omni 6000
OmniCom
Other brand, product and company names that appear in this manual are
trademarks of their respective owners.
ALL.71+ ! 05/99 xv
Copyright Information and Modifications Policy

This manual is copyright protected. All rights reserved. No part of this manual
may be used or reproduced in any form, or stored in any database or retrieval
system, without prior written consent of Omni Flow Computers, Inc., Stafford,
Texas, USA. Making copies of any part of this manual for any purpose other than
your own personal use is a violation of United States copyright laws and
international treaty provisions.
Omni Flow Computers, Inc., in conformance with its policy of product
development and improvement, may make any necessary changes to this
document without notice.
Warranty, Licenses and Product Registration

Product warranty and licenses for use of Omni flow computer firmware and of
!
OmniCom Configuration PC Software are included in the first pages of each
Volume of this manual. We require that you read this information before using
your Omni flow computer and the supplied software and documentation.
If you have not done so already, please complete and return to us the product
registration form included with your flow computer. We need this information for
Important! warranty purposes, to render you technical support and serve you in future
upgrades. Registered users will also receive important updates and information
about their flow computer and metering system.
Copyright 1991-1999 by Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
xvi ALL.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 1
User Manual
System Architecture
and Installation
Effective May 1999

Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 User Manual Contents of Volume 1
1. Overview of Hardware and Software Features..................................................... 1-1

1.1. Introduction .......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2. Operators Panel .................................................................................................. 1-2
1.2.1. LCD Display ..........................................................................................................1-2
1.2.2. Electromechanical Totalizers.................................................................................1-2
1.2.3. Diagnostic and Program LEDs...............................................................................1-2
1.2.4. Active Alarm LED..................................................................................................1-2
1.2.5. Alpha Shift LED.....................................................................................................1-2
1.2.6. Operator Keypad ...................................................................................................1-2
1.3. Passive Backplane Mother Board....................................................................... 1-4
1.4. Back Panel Terminal Module............................................................................... 1-6
1.4.1. Back Panel Terminations.......................................................................................1-6
1.4.2. Extended Back Panel ............................................................................................1-7
1.5. Central Processor Module................................................................................... 1-8
1.6. Input/Output (I/O) Modules .................................................................................. 1-9
1.6.1. Photo-Optical Isolation ........................................................................................ 1-10
1.6.2. Digital I/O Modules.............................................................................................. 1-11
1.6.3. Serial Communication Modules ........................................................................... 1-12
1.6.4. Process I/O Combination Modules....................................................................... 1-16
1.7. Operating Power ................................................................................................ 1-17
1.8. Firmware and Software...................................................................................... 1-19
1.8.1. Interrupt-Driven CPU........................................................................................... 1-19
1.8.2. Cycle Time.......................................................................................................... 1-19
1.8.3. On-line Diagnostics and Calibration..................................................................... 1-19
1.8.4. PC Communications Interface ............................................................................. 1-19
1.8.5. OmniCom Configuration PC Software ............................................................... 1-20
1.8.6. Year 2000 Compliance ........................................................................................ 1-20
1.9. Initializing Your Flow Computer ........................................................................ 1-21
ii ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1 System Architecture and Installation
2. Process Input/Output Combination Module Setup ............................................. 2-1

2.1. Introduction...........................................................................................................2-1
2.2. Features of the I/O Combo Modules....................................................................2-1
2.2.1. Setting the Address of the Combo Modules........................................................... 2-2
2.2.2. Hardware Analog Configuration Jumpers .............................................................. 2-2
2.2.3. Process I/O Combo Module Addresses Versus Physical I/O Points ...................... 2-2
2.2.4. Assigning Specific Signal Inputs ........................................................................... 2-3
2.2.5. Sample Omni Flow Computer Configuration Charts .............................................. 2-4
2.3. The A and B Combo I/O Modules ........................................................................2-6
2.3.1. A and B Combo Module Non-Selectable or Selectable Address ............................ 2-7
2.3.2. The A Type Combo I/O Module............................................................................. 2-8
2.3.3. The B Type Combo I/O Module........................................................................... 2-10
2.4. The E/D and E Combo Modules.........................................................................2-11
2.4.1. The E/D Type Combo I/O Module ....................................................................... 2-11
2.4.2. The E Type Combo I/O Module........................................................................... 2-12
2.5. The H Type Combo I/O Module..........................................................................2-13
2.6. The HV Type Combo I/O Module .......................................................................2-15
2.7. The SV Type Combo I/O Module........................................................................2-16
3. Mounting and Power Options ................................................................................ 3-1

3.1. Mechanical Installation.........................................................................................3-1
3.1.1. Panel Mounting..................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2. Nema 4 / 4X Configurations .................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.3. Nema 7 Specification............................................................................................ 3-2
3.2. Input Power...........................................................................................................3-4
3.2.1. AC Power ............................................................................................................. 3-4
3.2.2. DC Power ............................................................................................................. 3-4
3.2.3. Safety Considerations ........................................................................................... 3-4
3.3. Power Terminals...................................................................................................3-5
3.3.1. CE Equipment Power Terminals ........................................................................... 3-5
3.3.2. Extended Back Panel Power Terminals ................................................................ 3-6
3.4. Power Supply Module Switching Regulator .......................................................3-8
ALL.71+ w 05/99 iii

4. Connecting to Flowmeters..................................................................................... 4-1

4.1. Turbine Flowmeter (A or B Combo Module) ....................................................... 4-1
4.2. Wiring Flowmeter Signals to E Type Combo Modules ...................................... 4-2
4.3. Faure Herman Turbine Meters (E Combo Module).......................................... 4-3
4.4. Pulse Fidelity and Integrity Checking with E Type Combo Modules ................ 4-4
5. Connecting to Transducers and Transmitters ..................................................... 5-1

5.1. Wiring the Input Transducers.............................................................................. 5-1
5.2. Wiring of a Dry C Type Contact......................................................................... 5-2
5.3. Wiring RTD Probes .............................................................................................. 5-3
5.4. Wiring Densitometers .......................................................................................... 5-4
5.4.1. Wiring Densitometer Signals to an E/D Type Combo Module ................................5-4
5.4.2. Solartron Densitometers......................................................................................5-4
5.4.3. Sarasota Densitometers ......................................................................................5-6
5.4.4. UGC Densitometers ............................................................................................5-8
5.5. Wiring of Honeywell ST3000 Transmitters .................................................... 5-10
5.6. Wiring Micro Motion Transmitters.................................................................. 5-11
5.6.1. Connecting Micro Motion RFT9739 Transmitter to A Type or E Type Process
I/O Combination Modules .................................................................................... 5-11
5.6.2. Connecting Micro Motion RFT 9739 via RS-485 Serial Communications........... 5-12
5.6.3. Connecting Micro Motion RFT9739 via Serial RS-232-C to 485 Converter ........ 5-13
6. Connecting Analog Outputs and Miscellaneous I/O Including Provers............. 6-1

6.1. Analog Outputs .................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2. Digital Inputs/Outputs .......................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1. Wiring a Digital Point as an Input or an Output ......................................................6-2
6.2.2. Connecting Various Digital I/O Devices .................................................................6-4
6.3. Provers ................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.3.1. Connecting Pipe Prover Detector Switches............................................................6-5
6.3.2. Interfacing to a Brooks Compact Prover..............................................................6-5
6.3.3. Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooks Compact Prover ............................6-6
iv ALL.71+ w 05/99
7. Connecting to Serial Devices................................................................................. 7-1

7.1. Serial Port Connection Options...........................................................................7-1
7.2. Connecting to Printers .........................................................................................7-2
7.2.1. Connecting to a Dedicated Printer (Port 1) ............................................................ 7-2
7.2.2. Connecting to a Shared Printer (Port 1) ................................................................ 7-3
7.2.3. Print Sharing Problems ......................................................................................... 7-3
7.3. Connecting to a Personal Computer and Modem ..............................................7-4
7.4. Peer-to-Peer Communications and Multi-drop Modes .......................................7-6
7.4.1. Peer-to-Peer RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop Mode ................................................... 7-6
7.4.2. Peer-to-Peer via RS-232-C Communications ........................................................ 7-7
7.4.3. Keying the Modem or Radio Transmitter Carrier in Multi-drop Applications ........... 7-7
7.4.4. RS-485 Four-wire Multi-drop Mode ....................................................................... 7-8
7.5. Connecting to a SCADA Device...........................................................................7-9
7.6. Interfacing the Fourth Serial Port to an Allen-Bradley KE Module ...............7-10
8. Diagnostic and Calibration Features .................................................................... 8-1

8.1. Introduction...........................................................................................................8-1
8.2. Calibrating in the Diagnostic Mode .....................................................................8-2
8.2.1. Entering The Diagnostic Mode .............................................................................. 8-2
8.2.2. Display Groups in the Diagnostic Mode................................................................. 8-3
8.2.3. Leaving The Diagnostic Mode............................................................................... 8-3
8.3. Calibration Instructions........................................................................................8-4
8.3.1. Calibrating A Voltage or Current Analog Input....................................................... 8-4
8.3.2. Calibrating an RTD Input Channel......................................................................... 8-5
8.3.3. Calibrating a 4 to 20 mA Digital to Analog Output ................................................. 8-7
8.3.4. Verifying the Operation of the Digital I/O Points .................................................... 8-8
ALL.71+ w 05/99 v
9. Flow Computer Specifications .............................................................................. 9-1

9.1. Environmental ...................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2. Electrical............................................................................................................... 9-1
9.3. Microprocessor CPU............................................................................................ 9-1
9.4. Backplane............................................................................................................. 9-2
9.5. Process Input/Output Combo Modules .............................................................. 9-2
9.6. Flowmeter Pulse Inputs ....................................................................................... 9-2
9.7. Detector Switch Inputs ........................................................................................ 9-3
9.8. Detector Switch Inputs of E Combo Module ...................................................... 9-3
9.9. Analog Inputs ....................................................................................................... 9-3
9.10. RTD Inputs............................................................................................................ 9-3
9.11. Analog Outputs .................................................................................................... 9-4
9.12. Control Outputs/Status Inputs ............................................................................ 9-4
9.13. Multi-bus Serial I/O Interface ............................................................................... 9-5
9.13.1. RS-232 Compatible ...............................................................................................9-5
9.13.2. RS-485..................................................................................................................9-5
9.14. Operator Keypad.................................................................................................. 9-5
9.15. LCD Display .......................................................................................................... 9-5
9.16. Electromechanical Counters............................................................................... 9-6
9.17. Operating Mode Indicator LEDs.......................................................................... 9-6
9.18. Security................................................................................................................. 9-6
vi ALL.71+ w 05/99
Figures of Volume 1
Fig. 1-1. Features of the Operator Front Panel ................................................................................ 1-3
Fig. 1-2. Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 3000 ..................................................................... 1-4
Fig. 1-3. Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 6000 ..................................................................... 1-5
Fig. 1-4. Back Panel Terminations Omni 6000 and Omni 3000........................................................ 1-6
Fig. 1-5. Extended Back Panel - Omni 6000 (left); Omni 3000 (right) .............................................. 1-7
Fig. 1-6. Central Processor Module - Jumper Settings ..................................................................... 1-8
Fig. 1-7. Matching the I/O Modules to the Back Panel Terminations ................................................ 1-9
Fig. 1-8. Photo-optical Isolation - How It Works ............................................................................. 1-10
Fig. 1-9. Digital I/O Module Model # 6011 - Jumper Settings ......................................................... 1-11
Fig. 1-10. RS-232/485 Module #68-6205 Showing Selection Jumpers and LED Indicators .............. 1-12
Fig. 1-11. Layout of Jumper Blocks Showing RS-232/485 Formats.................................................. 1-13
Fig. 1-12. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232/485 Module #68-6205 ................................................. 1-14
Fig. 1-13. Dual RS-232 Serial I/O Module Model - Jumper Settings................................................. 1-15
Fig. 1-14. Power Supply Module Model # 68-6118........................................................................... 1-18
Fig. 2-1. Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 3000.............................................................. 2-4
Fig. 2-2. Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 6000.............................................................. 2-5
Fig. 2-3. The A and B Combo I/O Module - Configuration Jumpers ................................................. 2-6
Fig. 2-4. A and B Combo Module - Non-Selectable / Selectable Address......................................... 2-7
Fig. 2-5. A Type Combo Module - Flow Pulse Jumper Settings (Channel 3 or Channel 4) ............... 2-8
Fig. 2-6. A Type Combo Module - Analog Input Jumper Settings..................................................... 2-9
Fig. 2-7. B Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings - Frequency Densitometer Setup .................... 2-10
Fig. 2-8. E/D Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings.................................................................... 2-11
Fig. 2-9. E Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings ....................................................................... 2-12
Fig. 2-10. H Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings ....................................................................... 2-13
Fig. 2-11. HV Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings..................................................................... 2-15
Fig. 2-12. Omni Multivariable Interface (SV Type Combo) Module Model 68-6203 - Jumper
Settings ........................................................................................................................... 2-16
Fig. 3-1. Panel Mounting - Omni 6000 (upper), Omni 3000 (lower) .................................................. 3-1
Fig. 3-2. Input Power Terminals - Omni 3000 (upper), Omni 6000 (lower) ....................................... 3-5
Fig. 3-3. Input Power Terminals - Extended Back Panel (Omni 6000 only) ...................................... 3-6
Fig. 3-4. Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 6000)................................................ 3-7
Fig. 3-5. Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 3000)................................................ 3-7
Fig. 3-6. Power Supply Module Model 68-6118................................................................................ 3-8
ALL.71+ w 05/99 vii

Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 User Manual Figures of Volume 1
Fig. 4-1. Connecting to a Turbine Pre-amp (A or B Combo Modules) ...............................................4-1

Fig. 4-2. Wiring to Turbine Pre-Amps (E Type Combo Modules Only)..............................................4-2
Fig. 4-3. Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using Omni 24 VDC .....................................................4-3
Fig. 4-4. Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using External 24 VDC...............................................4-3
Fig. 4-5. Connecting Dual Coil Turbines for Pulse Fidelity Checking ................................................4-4
Fig. 5-1. Wiring the 4-20 mA Inputs (Input Channels 1 & 2 shown)...................................................5-1
Fig. 5-2. Wiring for Dry C Type Contact ...........................................................................................5-2
Fig. 5-3. Wiring a 4-Wire RTD Temperature Probe ..........................................................................5-3
Fig. 5-4. Wiring a Solartron Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a B Type I/O Combo Module ...5-4
Fig. 5-5. Wiring a Solartron Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a B Type I/O Combo
Module...............................................................................................................................5-5
Fig. 5-6. Wiring a Sarasota Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a B Type I/O Combo Module....5-6
Fig. 5-7. Wiring a Sarasota Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a B Type I/O Combo
Module...............................................................................................................................5-7
Fig. 5-8. Wiring a UGC Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a B Type I/O Combo Module..........5-8
Fig. 5-9. Wiring a UGC Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a B Type I/O Combo Module .....5-9
Fig. 5-10. Wiring of a Honeywell Smart Transmitter ...................................................................... 5-10
Fig. 5-11. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter.............. 5-11
Fig. 5-12. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter Via
Two-wire RS-485 Communications (Serial I/O Module #68-6205) .................................... 5-12
Fig. 6-1. Wiring Devices to the Flow Computers Analog Outputs.....................................................6-1
Fig. 6-2. Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Input .............................................................................6-2
Fig. 6-3. Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Output ..........................................................................6-3
Fig. 6-4. Connecting Digital I/O Devices to the Flow Computer ........................................................6-4
Fig. 6-5. Wiring to a Brooks Compact Prover ................................................................................6-5
Fig. 6-6. Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooks Compact Prover ........................................6-6
Fig. 7-1. Connecting a Printer to Serial Port #1 of the Flow Computer..............................................7-2
Fig. 7-2. Connecting Several Flow Computers to a Shared Printer...................................................7-3
Fig. 7-3. Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB25 Female Connector (Using Port #2 as an
example)............................................................................................................................7-4
Fig. 7-4. Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB9 Female Connector .....................................7-5
Fig. 7-5. Connecting Port #2 to a Modem.........................................................................................7-5
Fig. 7-6. Wiring of Several Flow Computers using the Peer-to-Peer Feature via RS-485
Communications in Two-wire Multi-drop Mode ...................................................................7-6
Fig. 7-7. Wiring of Several Flow Computers in the Peer-to-Peer Mode using RS-232-C
Communications. ...............................................................................................................7-7
viii ALL.71+ w 05/99

Fig. 7-8. Wiring of Multiple Flow Computers to a PLC Device Via RS-485 Communications in
Four-wire Multi-drop Mode................................................................................................. 7-8
Fig. 7-9. Typical Wiring of Port #3 to a SCADA Device via Modem ................................................. 7-9
Fig. 7-10. Wiring Serial Port #4 to Allen-Bradley KE Communications Module.............................. 7-10
Fig. 8-1. Figure Showing Calibration of RTD Input Channel............................................................. 8-6
ALL.71+ w 05/99 ix
1. Overview of Hardware and Software

Features
1.1. Introduction
BASIC FEATURES - Omni Omni 3000 and Omni 6000 Flow Computers are reliable, easy to use,
flow computers are uniquely versatile measurement instruments. They are factory-programmed for
applicable to liquid and gas
flow measurement, control
single or multiple meter run configurations to measure crude oils, refined
and communication systems, products, NGLs, LPGs, ethylene, propylene, natural gas, and specialty gases.
and custody transfer Measurement of other flowing products can also be provided.
operations. Its basic features
are: Extensive communications capability enables the Omni 6000 to be used in a
q 32-bit processing with variety of Master/Slave configurations for high-speed data transfer applications,
math co-processor for and as a large communication submaster. The flow computer can also be
fast, multi-tasking hardware configured as a medium-size Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) with
execution
significant digital I/O capability.
q 500 msec calculation
cycle Your Omni Flow Computer connects to various sensors monitoring pipeline flow
q Plug-in, assignable digital, in your transmission, petrochemical or process measurement application. It
serial and combination I/O
modules
calculates, displays and prints data that will be used for operational or billing
q Point-to-point digital
functions.
transmitter interface
The computer is configured to match your piping system requirements. Its non-
q 14-bit A/Ds, temperature
restrictive bus design permits any combination of inputs and outputs to meet
trimmed
q No I/O multiplexers, no
most metering, flow and valve control, and communication requirements.
potentiometers Plug-in modules furnish the input and output channels as needed and provide
q Photo-optical Isolation of an assurance of maximum product life by higher accuracy measurement
each I/O point
technologies such as meter pulse fidelity checking, and Rosemount and
q Meter pulse fidelity
checking Honeywell digital transmitter interface modules. Up to 4 serial ports in some
q Optional Honeywell and models are available for printing reports and other communications tasks. All
Rosemount digital I/O modules are quality tested and temperature trimmed to optimize the 14-bit
transmitter interface analog resolution, and burned-in before shipment for field installation.
modules
q Dual LEDs indicate
active/fused digital I/O
q Selectable digital I/O,
individually fused
q Standard, field-proven
firmware no need for
custom programming
q User-configurable control
logic
q Up to 4 flow/pressure
control loops
q User-configurable
variables for displays and
reports
(Continues)
ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-1

Chapter 1 Overview of Hardware and Software Features
1.2. Operators Panel

BASIC FEATURES - The operators panel shown (Fig. 1-1) is standard for all applications and is
(Continued) used to display and enter all data. All data can also be accessed via any of the
q Data archive and report serial ports.
storage
q Modbus peer-to-peer
communications to
38.4kbps for PLC/DCS 1.2.1. LCD Display
q Real-time dial-up for
The 4-line by 20-alpha-numeric character, back-lit Liquid Crystal Display is
diagnostics
updated every 200 ms. It displays all messages and system variables in English
q International testing
q Includes OmniCom
language engineering units. Backlighting and display viewing angle are
configuration software adjustable from the keypad (press [Setup] then [Display] and follow the
q Three year warranty displayed instructions).
1.2.2. Electromechanical Totalizers

Three non-resetable, 6-digit electromechanical counters are included on the
front panel for non-volatile backup totalizing. They can be programmed to count
gross, net, mass or energy units at any rate up to 10 counts per second.
1.2.3. Diagnostic and Program LEDs

These dual-color LEDs indicate when the user is in the Diagnostic Mode
calibrating the I/O modules, or when in the Program Mode changing the
configuration of the computer. The LEDs change from green to red after a valid
password is requested and entered. The computer is in the normal Display
Mode when neither of these LEDs are on.
1.2.4. Active Alarm LED

New unacknowledged alarms cause this LED to glow red. This changes to
green as soon as the alarm is acknowledged by pressing the [Cancel/Ack] key
on the keypad.
1.2.5. Alpha Shift LED

INFO - Pressing the [Alpha This LED glows green to show that the next key only will be shifted. A red LED
Shift] key twice will put the indicates that the shift lock is on.
shift lock on. The shift lock is
canceled by pressing one
more time or automatically
after the [Display/Enter] key 1.2.6. Operator Keypad
is pressed.
Control of the flow computer is via the 34-button alphanumeric membrane
Help System - These
keypad, with tactile domes and audio feedback. Through the keypad you have
computers are equipped with the capability to configure your system, access and modify calibration data on-
a powerful context-sensitive line, and view or print process data. Configuration data can also be entered
help system. Press the remotely by serial port and is stored in battery backed-up CMOS SRAM
[Help] key (bottom right)
memory. Passwords and an internal program inhibit switch provide tamper-
twice to activate the help
displays. Cancel the help proof security.
screens by pressing the
[Prog] key.
1-2 ALL.71+ w 05/99

DIAGNOSTIC LED LCD DISPLAY

Glows green when in the Is 4 lines by 20
Diagnostic Mode. Glows characters. Backlight and
red when a valid viewing angle are
password is entered. adjustable via the keypad.
Flowrate BBL/Hr
FT-101 1550.5
PROGRAM LED Cumulative BBLS THREE 6-DIGIT,
Glows green when in the ELECTROMECHANICAL
FT-101 234510 COUNTERS
Program Mode. Glows red
when a valid password is These non-resetable
entered. counters are assigned via
the keypad.
Total A Total B Total C
DIAG/PROG KEY
000682 009456 023975 ACTIVE ALARM LED
Used to access
Diagnostic and Program Glows red when a new
Modes. Diagnostic Active Alarm alarm occurs. Glows
green when an
Program Alpha Shift acknowledged alarm
ARROW KEYS exists.
Used to move the cursor
and scroll displays. Also Diag Alpha
used as software zero Prog Shift ALPHA SHIFT LED
and as span control Net Energy
Glows green for a single
Gross Mass SG/API Control
during calibration. character shift. Glows red
A B C D E F when the shift lock is on.
& % 7 8 9 /
OPERATOR KEYPAD Temp Press Density D.P. Orifice Meter

Has 34 keys, domed G H I J K L THREE-FUNCTION KEYS
membrane with tactile # $ 4 5 6 * These activate process
and audio feedback. variable or alpha-numeric
Time Counts Factor Preset Batch Analysis
character functions.
M N O P Q R
: 1 2 3 =
SPACE/CLEAR /
CANCEL/ACK KEY Print Prove Status Alarms Product Setup DISPLAY/ENTER / HELP
Used to clear data and S T U V W X KEY
insert spaces in the ; , 0 . - + Used to enter a key press
Program Mode. It is also sequence and to access
Cancel / Ack Input Output Help
used to cancel key press the Help System.
Space Y Z Display
sequences and, in the
Clear ( ) Enter
Display Mode,
acknowledge alarms.
Fig. 1-1. Features of the Operator Front Panel
ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-3

1.3. Passive Backplane Mother Board

INFO - Passive backplane Mounted on the passive backplane are DIN standard connectors which are
simply means that no active bussed in two sections. The front section is a high performance, 16-bit bus
circuitry is contained on it.
The active circuitry is
which accepts the Central Processor Module. The Omni 6000 computer has 3
contained on the modules other connectors available in this section to accept memory expansion and
that plug into it. future product enhancements.
The rear 8-bit I/O bus section comprises 10 connectors on the Omni 6000 and 4
on the Omni 3000, which can accept any type of optically isolated I/O module
manufactured by Omni. The rearmost connector on both computers accepts the
system AC/DC power supply module. Dual ribbon cable assemblies (Omni
6000) and a single ribbon cable (Omni 3000) connect the I/O connectors on the
backplane to the back panel terminals. (See Fig. 1-2 below and Fig. 1-3 on
facing page.)
CAUTION!
These units have an integral
cabinet latching mechanism
which first must be
disengaged by lifting the
bezel upwards, before
withdrawing the unit from the
case.
Fig. 1-2. Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 3000
1-4 ALL.71+ w 05/99

CAUTION!
cabinet latching mechanism
which first must be
disengaged by lifting the
bezel upwards, before
withdrawing the unit from the
case.
Fig. 1-3. Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 6000
ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-5

1.4. Back Panel Terminal Module

The AC receptacle of the Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 back panel is a power line
filter with a separate AC fuse holder. The AC power is contained on a separate
four-conductor cable which plugs into the power supply. The power supply used
with this version is a Model 68-6118; no physical fuses (see 1.7. Operating
Power).
1.4.1. Back Panel Terminations

The Omni 6000 terminal blocks are identified TB1 through TB10 with terminals
marked 1 through 12 for each block. These provide 120 circuit paths to the
passive backplane. The DC terminals are on TB11.
The Omni 3000 terminal blocks are identified as TB1 through TB4, with
terminals marked 1 through 12 for each block. These provide 48 circuit paths to
the passive backplane. The DC terminal is on TB5.
Back Panel Fuses - All DC

fuses are 3 amp fast-blow
manufactured by Littlefuse,
Model 225.003. All AC fuses
are amp slow-blow
Model 229.500.
Fig. 1-4. Back Panel Terminations Omni 6000 and Omni 3000
1-6 ALL.71+ w 05/99

1.4.2. Extended Back Panel

Several flow computer mounting options are available with the extended back
panel. Screw type terminals are provided for AC and DC power. Extended 64-
conductor ribbon cables and the AC cables are provided with a standard length
of 5 feet.
For the Omni 6000 (dimensions: 3 x 18), this panel incorporates all the
terminal blocks TB1 through TB10, with terminals marked 1 through 12. In
addition to the terminal blocks, extra DC (fused), return and shield terminals are
provided for TB1 through TB8.
The Omni 3000 extended back panel (dimensions: 3 x 8) also incorporates
all the terminal blocks TB1 through TB4, with terminals marked 1 through 12. In
addition to the terminal blocks, extra DC (fused), return and shield terminals are
provided for TB1 and TB2.
Extended Back Panel

AC/DC Fuses - All DC fuses
are amp fast-blow
Model 225.250. The AC fuse
is amp slow-blow
Model 239.500. The fuse for
the back panels AC
receptacle is a 5x20mm,
amp slow-blow.
Fig. 1-5. Extended Back Panel - Omni 6000 (left); Omni 3000 (right)
ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-7

1.5. Central Processor Module

This module contains the Motorola 16/32-bit microprocessor operating at 16
MHz, a maximum of 512 kbytes of SRAM memory, 1 Mbyte of EPROM
program memory, math coprocessor and time of day clock. Positions U3 and
U4 on the Central Processor Module contain the program EPROMs. The
hardware real-time clock will continue to operate even when power loss to the
computer occurs. Time of power failure is logged and printed when the power is
restored.
CAUTION! Math
Processor
Central Program Program Archive
POTENTIAL FOR DATA Processor EPROM RAM RAM
LOSS!
RAM Battery Backup -
Omni flow computers leave
the factory with a fully
charged Ni-Cd battery as
RAM power backup. RAM
data, including user
configuration and I/O Backup
calibration data, may be lost Batttery
if the flow computer is
disconnected from external
power for more than 30 days.
Observe caution when
storing the flow computer
without power being applied EPROM Size
for extended periods of time. 1 OR 4 Meg Bit System Watchdog
The RAM back-up battery is Select 4 Meg J3 In = Enabled
rechargeable and will be fully As Shown J3 Out = Disabled
charged after power has J1 J2 (Always Enabled)
been applied for 24 hours. J3
Fig. 1-6. Central Processor Module - Jumper Settings
1-8 ALL.71+ w 05/99

1.6. Input/Output (I/O) Modules

Omni flow computers utilize an I/O bus system. All I/O is modular and plug-in
for easy field maintenance and replacement. I/O circuitry is also photo-optically
isolated from all field wiring which makes it relatively immune to electrical noise
and prevents damage to the electronics.
Your Omni Flow Computer has a combination of 3 types of I/O modules:
o Digital I/O Modules
o Serial I/O Modules
o Process I/O Combo Modules
A and B Type Combo Modules
E and E/D Type Combo Modules
H Type Combo Modules
Almost any combination of I/O mix can be accommodated in the flow computer.
The only limitations are the number of I/O connectors (4 on Omni 3000, 10 on
Omni 6000) and the number of wires connecting them to the back panel field
wiring terminals (48 for Omni 3000, 120 for Omni 6000).
Your Omni Flow Computer has a standard order in which the modules are
plugged-in (Fig. 1-7; also see Fig. 1-2 and Fig. 1-3). This provides a standard
termination layout.
INFO - Mother board
connectors do not have a
specific address. These are
pre-established at the
factory. Each Omni Flow
Computer will be supplied
with a termination diagram
Omni 6000 Omni 3000
indicating these settings. TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4 TB5 TB1 TB2
1 1
Serial I/O 1 & 2
Serial I/O 3 & 4
Serial I/O 1 & 2

Digital I/O 1 - 12
Digital I/O 13-24
Combo I/O # 1
Digital I/O 1-12
12 12
13 13
Combo I/O # 6
Combo I/O # 5
Combo I/O # 2
Combo I/O # 2
Combo I/O # 4
Combo I/O # 3
Combo I/O # 1
24 24
TB6 TB7 TB8 TB9 TB10 TB3 TB4
Fig. 1-7. Matching the I/O Modules to the Back Panel Terminations
ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-9

1.6.1. Photo-Optical Isolation

Photo-Optical Isolation - The microprocessor circuitry is isolated via photo-optical devices from all field
Transducer signals are wiring to prevent accidental damage to the electronics, including that caused by
converted by the LED into
high frequency pulses of
static electricity. Photo-optical isolation also inhibits electrical noise from
light. These are sensed by inducing measurement errors. Independent isolation of each process input
the photo-transistor which provides high common-mode rejection, allowing the user greater freedom when
passes the signal to the flow wiring transmitter loops. Furthermore, it minimizes ground loop effects and
computer. isolates and protects your flow computer from pipeline EMI and transients.
Note that no electrical
connection exists between
the transducers and the
computer circuits.
Pipeline Opto Coupler IC Isolated

Transducer Transducer
Signals That Signals
May Pass On Passed On
Damaging To Sensitive
Transient Computer
LED Photo Circuits
Noise Transistor
Fig. 1-8. Photo-optical Isolation - How It Works
1-10 ALL.71+ w 05/99

1.6.2. Digital I/O Modules

INFO - Some Digital I/O Digital I/O modules provide discrete inputs and outputs to control provers,
modules have 12 samplers, injection pumps, motor operated valves (MOVs) and to provide remote
replaceable fuses; one fuse
totalizing. Each digital module provides 12 digital I/O points with each point able
for each I/O point. Other
modules have electronic to be configured as either an input or output. The Omni 3000 normally has one
fuses that trip when digital I/O module. Whereas, the 6000 can have a maximum of two digital
overloaded and modules, resulting in 24 digital I/O points. The digital I/O module normally
automatically reset when occupies I/O Slots 1 and 2 on the Omni 6000 backplane, and I/O Slot 1 on Omni
the fault condition is
removed. 3000.
Address jumpers on the digital I/O module are used to configure the module as
either module D1 or D2. Digital I/Os 1 through 12 are allocated to module D1
and 13 through 24 are allocated to D2.
JP1 In = Dig. 1 Rising Edge Trigger

Interrupt Request (IRQ) JP2 In = Dig. 1 Falling Edge Trigger
Select Jumpers for JP3 In = Dig. 2 Rising Edge Trigger
Pipe Prover Detector JP4 In = Dig. 2 Falling Edge Trigger
(Non-Double Chronometry)
NOTE: If D2 remove all jumpers
Module Address
Jumper
Select D1 Select D2
Green LED On
Point Active
I/O Point LEDs - Each

digital I/O point has 2 LEDs. I/O Point
One LED illuminates green F3 F2 F1 #01
when the I/O point is active Dual (Red/Green)
Fuse Blown LED
and the other illuminates
green or red when a fault F6 F5 F4
condition exists. The fault
LED illuminates green when
F9 F8 F7 Red On = Sourcing
an input over voltage Current
condition exists. An output Green On = Sinking
short circuit causes the fault Current
Individual Fuses F12 F11 F10
LED to illuminate red. for Each I/O Point
#12
Digital I/O Point

LED Indicators
Fig. 1-9. Digital I/O Module # 6011 Jumper Settings
IRQ, (Interrupt request) jumpers are provided on digital I/O modules for
interfacing to pipe prover detector switches. This feature applies only to liquid
measurement applications.
These jumpers are only used to configure digital I/O point 1 or digital I/O point 2
on module D1. All IRQ jumpers should be removed from D2 if a D2 module is
installed.
ALL.71+ ! 05/99 1-11

1.6.3. Serial Communication Modules
RS-232/485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205

INFO - Up to 12 flow Serial I/O Module # 68-6205 is capable of handling two communications ports
computers and/or other Each serial communication port is individually optically isolated for maximum
compatible serial devices can
be multi-dropped using
common-mode and noise rejection. Although providing RS-232C signal levels,
Omnis proprietary RS-232-C the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share one serial link.
serial port. Thirty-two Communication parameters such as baud rate, stop bits and parity settings are
devices may be connected software selectable.
when using the RS-485
mode. Typically, one serial In addition to RS-232, jumper selections have been provided on each port to
I/O module is used on the allow selection of RS-485 format. With this option, a total of two RS-485 ports
Omni 3000, providing two
ports. A maximum of two
are available on each module.
serial modules can be
installed in the Omni 6000,
providing four ports.
Multivariable Transmitting
Devices - In addition to the
Serial I/O Module # 68-6205,
the flow computer must also
have an SV Module to
communicate with Address Selection
multivariable transmitters. Jumpers
This serial module is
jumpered to IRQ 3 when Address S1
used in combination with an Selected
SV Module. Without an SV
Module, the jumper is placed
at IRQ 2. The SV Module
can only be used with this
Address S2
serial module (68-6205) and
Selected
is not compatible with the
Serial I/O Module # 68-6005.
For more information, see
Technical Bulletin # TB-
980503. LED Indicators
IRQ 2 Selected
Port #2 (4) Port #1 (3)

Jumpers Jumpers
Fig. 1-10. RS-232/485 Module #68-6205 Showing Selection Jumpers and

LED Indicators
1-12 ALL.71+ w 05/99

The RS-232/485 Module has been designed so that RS-232 or RS-485

communications standards can be selected by placement of 16-pin resistor
networks into the correct blocks. The following diagrams show the locations of
blocks JB4, JB5, JB6 for Port #1, and JB1, JB2, JB3 for Port #2 for each
format.
RS-232
JB1 or JB4 JB2 or JB5 JB3 or JB6
RS-485 RS-485 2-WIRE
RS-485
TERMINATED
RS-485 2-WIRE TERMINATED RS-485 2-WIRE NON-TERMINATED

JB1 or JB4 JB2 or JB5 JB3 or JB6 JB1 or JB4 JB2 or JB5 JB3 or JB6
Terminated/Non-
terminated RS-485 - The
RS-232/485
RS-485 devices located at NON-TERMINATED
each extreme end of an RS- RS-485
RS-232 RS-232/485 4-WIRE RS-232 RS-232/485 4-WIRE
485 run should be TERMINATED
terminated. Note that the
device located at an extreme
end may or may not be an
Omni Flow Computer.

RS-232/485
RS-485 2-WIRE NON-TERMINATED RS-485 2-WIRE
RS-232 RS-485
RS-232 TERMINATED
Fig. 1-11. Layout of Jumper Blocks Showing RS-232/485 Formats
ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-13

Omni 6000
(Omni 3000)
Terminal RS-485 RS-485
RS-232-C
TB3 (TB2) 2-Wire 4-Wire
1 TX B TX-B
2 TERM
Note: Users of Micro First
Motion RFT 9739 devices 3 RX RX-A
connected the peer-to-peer Serial
port (Port #2) of the Omni, Port 4 GND GND GND
please note that the resistor
5 RTS A TX-A
networks should be
positioned for 2-wire RS-485 6 RDY RX-B
and that Terminal (A) from
the RFT 9739 should be 7 TX B TX-B
wired to Omni 7 and (B) from
the RFT must be wired to 8 TERM
Terminal 11.
Second 9 RX RX-A
Serial
Port 10 GND GND GND
11 RTS A TX-A
12 RDY RX-B
Fig. 1-12. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232/485 Module #68-6205
1-14 ALL.71+ w 05/99

Dual RS-232-Compatible Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005

INFO - Up to 12 flow Dual channel serial communication modules can be installed providing two RS-
computers can be multi- 232-C ports. Each serial communication port is individually optically isolated for
dropped to one RS-232C
serial device. Typically, one
maximum common-mode and noise rejection. Although providing RS-232C
serial I/O module is used on signal levels, the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share
the Omni 3000, providing two one RS-232 device. Communication parameters such as baud rate, stop bits
ports. A maximum of two and parity settings are software selectable.
serial modules can be
installed in the Omni 6000,
providing four ports.
Serial Ports 1 & 2

Use the S1 Module
S1
Setting
Serial Ports 3 & 4

Use the S0 Module
S0
Setting
RTS Out
Chan. B
TX Out
RTS Out
Chan. A
TX Out
LED Indicators
RX In
Chan. A
RDY In
RX In
Chan. B
RDY In
Fig. 1-13. Dual RS-232 Serial I/O Module Model - Jumper Settings
Serial Port Assignments

The first port can be configured as a Modbus protocol port. It can also be
configured as a printer port. The printer can be shared between multiple flow
computers. Reports can be printed on a daily, batch end, timed interval or on
demand basis. A reprint function provides backup should you experience printer
problems at any time. Customized report templates are input using the
OmniCom Configuration PC Software.
The second, third, and fourth ports are independent Modbus protocol channels.
The complete database of the flow computer is available for upload and
download. The OmniCom configuration program provided by Omni can use any
of these ports.
The fourth RS-232C can also be set up to communicate with Allen-Bradley PLC
devices.
ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-15

1.6.4. Process I/O Combination Modules

Meter runs utilize plug-in modules which include all necessary analog/digital
(A/D) converters and control circuitry. User selection of process I/O is available
with combo cards that can be a mix of meter pulse, frequency densitometer,
4-20 mA, 4-wire 100 ohm RTD inputs, and 4-20 mA outputs.
All process measurements such as temperature, pressure, density, and flow are
input via these process I/O combo modules. Each module will handle 4 inputs
of a variety of signal types and provides one or two 4-20 mA analog outputs
(except the SV Module which has six 4-20 mA outputs).
Seven types of combo I/O modules are available: A, B, E, E/D, H, HV and SV.
All modules accept analog and pulse frequency type inputs, except for the H
and HV Modules which interface digitally with Honeywell Smart Transmitters,
and the SV Module which interfaces serially with RS-485 compatible
multivariable transmitters.
The A and B Types use identical I/O boards. Likewise, the E and E/D Modules
are also identical, except for the position of a configuration jumper which
selects the type and address of each module.
INFO - The flow computer Each of the combo modules installed must have a different identity i.e., you
allocates the physical I/O cannot have two or more modules of the same type and address. Valid IDs are:
point numbers according to
the module IDs, not the
A1 through A6, B1 through B6, E/D-1 through E/D-6, E1 through E6, H1 through
position occupied on the H6, and SV1 through SV2. Only one HV Module can be installed.
backplane.
Modules are plugged into DIN type connectors on the passive backplane. Each
backplane connector has 12 circuits which connect to the back panel terminal
strips via ribbon cables. Combo I/O modules are plugged into the backplane
starting at I/O Position #5 (Omni 6000) or I/O Position #3 (Omni 3000) and
working towards Position #10 (Omni 6000) or Position #4 (Omni 3000). The
preferred order is lowest number A Type to highest number H Type, them SV
and HV Modules.
The following chapter deals in more detail with process I/O combo modules and
includes illustrations and jumper settings. (See Chapter 2 Process I/O Combo
Module Setup.)
1-16 ALL.71+ w 05/99

1.7. Operating Power

Operating Power - The Omni flow computers can be AC or DC powered.
indicated power is maximum
and includes the power used When AC powered, 120 VAC 50 Watts is applied to the AC plug. For powering
by transmitter loops, etc. It transmitter loops when AC powered, approximately 500 mA at 24 VDC is
will vary depending on the available from the DC terminal block. The flow computer can be special ordered
number of modules installed,
the number of current loops for operation on 220-250 VAC supplies. This requires a modified power supply
and any digital output loads unit and a different cord set. AC power to the unit is fused by a 0.5 Amp (5x20
connected. mm) slow-blow fuse located in the AC power receptacle.
To DC power the flow computer, apply 18 to 30 VDC, 50 Watts to the DC
terminal block. DC power into or out of the back panel DC power terminals is
CAUTION! fused by a 3 Amp, 2 AG fast-blow fuse located on the back panel next to the
POTENTIAL FOR DATA DC power terminals.
LOSS!
RAM Battery Backup - All analog and digital circuits within the flow computer are powered from a 5-
Omni flow computers leave volt switching regulator located on the power supply module. This is located in
the factory with a fully the rear most connector on the computer backplane. The DC power which
charged Ni-Cd battery as supplies the switching regulator either comes directly from the DC terminals on
the back panel of the flow computer (18-30 VDC) or by rectifying the output of
configuration and I/O the integral 120 VAC (240 VAC) to 20 VAC transformer. Regulated 5-volt power
calibration data, may be lost is monitored by a 3-4 second shutdown circuit located on the power supply
if the flow computer is module. When power is applied to the computer there will be a delay of 3 to 4
disconnected from external
power for more than 30 days.
seconds before the unit powers up.
Observe caution when A recommended maximum of 500 mA of transducer loop power is available
without power being applied with a fully loaded Omni system of 6 combo I/O modules, 2 digital I/O modules
for extended periods of time. and 2 dual serial I/O modules. The Omni must be DC powered if this 500 mA
The RAM back-up battery is limit is to be exceeded.
rechargeable and will be fully
charged after power has The maximum system configuration of the Omni is 24 process inputs, 12
been applied for 24 hours. process outputs, 24 digital I/O points, and 4 serial I/O channels dissipates
approximately 24 Watts. This causes an internal temperature of 15F (8.33C)
over the ambient. The unit should not be mounted in a cabinet or panel where
the ambient inside the cabinet will exceed 110F (43.33C).
ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-17

CAUTION
The Power Low and +5 v
Adjust are factory
adjustments that require the
use of special equipment.
DO NOT attempt to adjust.
AC Connector
Fig. 1-14. Power Supply Module Model # 68-6118
1-18 ALL.71+ w 05/99

1.8. Firmware and Software

Omni flow computers are supplied with pre-programmed firmware and PC
configuration software which permit a single unit to perform a great diversity of
combined flow measurement tasks, such as:
o Multiple Meter Run Totalizing, Batching, Proving, and Data Archiving
o Flow and Sampler Control
o Direct Interface to Gas Chromatographs and Smart/Multivariable
Transmitters
o Selectable Communications Protocols to Directly Interface to DCS, PLC
and SCADA Host Systems
The flow computer database numbers thousands of data points and provides
the tightest communications coupling yet between SCADA and the metering
system.
1.8.1. Interrupt-Driven CPU

This is a very important aspect to firmware. It provides for a multi-tasking
environment in which priority tasks can be undertaken concurrently with
unrelated activity. This provides for high-speed digital signals to be output at the
same time as measurement computations and serial communications to a
printer or host computer, without degradation in speed or tasking.
All custody transfer measurement programs are stored in EPROM or Flash
Memory. This prevents damage due to electrical noise, or tampering with the
integrity of calculation specifications. SRAM programming can also be
accommodated.
1.8.2. Cycle Time

All time-critical measurement functions are performed by the flow computer
every 500 msec. This provides greater accuracy of measurement calculations
and permits a faster response by pipeline operations in critical control functions,
such as opening or closing valves.
1.8.3. On-line Diagnostics and Calibration

Extensive diagnostic software is built into the system which allows the
technician to locally or remotely debug a possible problem without interrupting
on-line measurement. Calibration of analog signals is performed through the
keypad and software. The system has only two potentiometers, both of which
are on the power supply and are factory set and need no adjustment.
1.8.4. PC Communications Interface

The wide use of PCs and video display units makes it possible to provide
software for off-line/on-line access to measurement, configuration and
calibration data. Collection of historical reports, including alarms, interval
reports of any time sequence, liquid batch and prove reports, and full remote
technical intervention capabilities are also provided.
ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-19

1.8.5. OmniCom Configuration PC Software

INFO - Full details about the On-line or off-line configuration of your Omni Flow Computer is possible using
OmniCom configuration an IBM PC compatible running the OmniCom program supplied with your flow
program are documented in
Appendix C.
computer. This powerful software allows you to copy, modify and save to disk
entire configurations. The program also allows you to print customized reports
by inputting report templates that are uploaded to the flow computer.
1.8.6. Year 2000 Compliance

INFO - The current firmware Omni flow computer firmware has been tested in conformance to Year 2000
has been fully tested and requirements. It will accurately process time- and date-related data after
assured to be in
conformance to Year 2000
December 31st, 1999. Software and hardware designed to be used before,
requirements. For more during and after the calendar year 2000 will operate appropriately relating to
information, please contact date information. All calculating and logic of time-related data will produce the
our technical support staff. expected results for all valid date values within the application.
1-20 ALL.71+ w 05/99

1.9. Initializing Your Flow Computer

A processor reset signal is automatically generated when:
CAUTION!
1) Power is applied.
POTENTIAL FOR DATA
LOSS! 2) The processor reset switch at the rear of the front panel is toggled.
RAM Battery Backup - 3) The watchdog timer fails to be reset by firmware every 100 milliseconds.
Omni flow computers leave
the factory with a fully The flow computer will perform a diagnostic check of all program and random-
access memory whenever any of the above events occur.
data, including user The program is stored with a checksum in Non-volatile Read-only Memory. The
configuration and I/O
calibration data, may be lost
program alarms if the calculated checksum differs from the stored checksum.
if the flow computer is The most obvious cause of such a problem would be a bent pin on a program
disconnected from external memory chip. The validity of all data stored in RAM memory is checked next.
power for more than 30 days. This data includes totalizers, configuration data and historical data. Any
problems here will cause the computer to initialize the RAM and display the
without power being applied following message:
for extended periods of time.
The RAM back-up battery is
rechargeable and will be fully RAM Data Invalid
charged after power has Reconfigure System
been applied for 24 hours. Using OMNI as
Initial Password
If due to the RAM area in the computer not agreeing with the checksum area,
the computer will display the following message:
RAM & Calibrate Data

Invalid, Reconfigure
& Re-calibrate Using
OMNI as Password
Assuming that the EPROM memory and RAM memory are valid, the flow
computer then checks the software configuration against the installed I/O
modules and displays a screen similar to the following:
INFO - For information on
adjusting module Module S-Ware H-Ware
configuration settings, see A-1 Y Y
Volume 3.
B-1 Y N
D-1 Y Y
S-1 N Y
Revision No. 023.70
EPROM Checksum 1B36
A N in the hardware column indicates that a module has been removed since
the software was configured. A N in the software column indicates that a
module has been added. In either case you should make the columns agree by
adding or removing modules or re-configuring the software.
ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-21

2. Process Input/Output Combination

Module Setup
INFO - User selection of

process I/O is available with
combo cards that can be a
mix of meter pulse, frequency
2.1. Introduction
densitometer, 4-20mA, 4- All process measurement signals are input via the process I/O combination (or
wire 100 ohm RTD inputs,
and fused 4-20mA outputs.
combo) modules plugged into the backplane of the computer. There currently
are 7 types of combo modules available: A, B, E, E/D, H, HV, and SV Types.
Combo Module Input
The 7 types of modules are actually manufactured using only 4 types of printed
Features - The input circuit modules. The first can be configured as either an A or B Module; the
characteristics of each second is used for an E or E/D Module; the third printed circuit is used for an H
combo module are as follows or HV Type Module; and the fourth for an SV Module.
(see table on right):
A Type: Each input can be
1-5v; 4-20mA. Inputs #1
and #2 also accept RTD.
Inputs #3 and #4 also
2.2. Features of the I/O Combo Modules
accept flow pulse signals. Each combo module (except the SV Module) will handle 4 inputs of a variety of
B Type: Inputs #1, #2 & #3 signal types and provides one or two 4-20 mA analog outputs. The SV Module
can be 1-5v; 4-20mA.
Inputs #1 and #2 also
has two ports and six 4-20 mA analog outputs. Only the E Combo Module has
accept RTD. Input #3 also Level A pulse fidelity checking and double chronometry proving capabilities.
accepts flow pulses and The input/output capabilities and some of the features of the combo modules
Input #4 is fixed as a are expressed in the following table.
frequency density input.
E/D Type: Inputs #1 and #2
can be 1-5v; 4-20mA and
RTD. Inputs #3 and #4
are frequency density.
INPUT/OUTPUT CAPABILITIES AND FEATURES OF EACH I/O COMBO MODULE T YPE
E Type: Inputs #1 and #2 DOUBLE
can be 1-5v; 4-20mA and ANALOG LEVEL A CHRONO-
TYPE INPUT #1 INPUT #2 INPUT #3 INPUT #4
RTD. Inputs #3 and #4 OUTPUTS FIDELITY METRY
accept flow pulses. PROVING
H Type: All inputs are Two
Honeywell DE Protocol. A 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD 1-5v; 4-20mA; Flow Pulses No No
4-20mA
HV Type: All inputs are
1-5v; 4-20mA Frequency One
Honeywell Multivariable B 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD No No
Flow Pulse Density 4-20mA
DE Protocol.
SV Type: Each port (#1 and Two
E/D 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD Frequency Density No No
#2) is capable of RS-485 4-20mA
multi-drop to various Two
multivariable transmitters. E 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD Flow Pulses Yes Yes
4-20mA
Two
H Honeywell DE Protocol No No
4-20mA
Two
HV Honeywell Multivariable DE Protocol No No
4-20mA
PORT #1 PORT #2
Six
SV RS-485 Multi-drop to Various Multivariable Transmitters No No
4-20mA
ALL.71+ w 05/99 2-1

Chapter 2 Process Input/Output Combination Module Setup
2.2.1. Setting the Address of the Combo Modules

Jumpers are provided on each combo module which allow the user to select the
address needed to access the module. Changing the software functions of the
module is also done by moving the appropriate jumper; i.e., A or B Type, E or
E/D Type.
2.2.2. Hardware Analog Configuration Jumpers

Other jumpers are provided on each module which select the correct hardware
analog configuration for the type of signal that each input channel will accept.
This allows the same basic hardware module to accept signals such as 4-20
mA, 1-5 VDC, 100 ohm RTD probes and voltage or current pulses from a
turbine, PD meter or digital densitometer.
2.2.3. Process I/O Combo Module Addresses Versus

Physical I/O Points
A flow computer will usually have several combo modules installed depending
IMPORTANT! on the number of flowmeter runs to be measured. If for example, 2 A Type, 2 B
Combo I/O modules are Type, 1 E/D Type and 1 E Type Modules were installed, they would normally be
sorted alphabetically and by numbered A1, A2, B1, B2, E/D1 and E1. Other address combinations are
low- to-high address. Adding acceptable (e.g.: A2, A3, B1, B4, E/D2 & E2 ) as long as each has a unique
or removing cards may
change the existing sort if the identity. In the above example where 6 modules (A1, A2, B1, B2, E/D1 & E1)
Check I/O function is are installed, the physical I/O points are mapped as follows. (Note that E/D
executed. modules come before the E modules!)
To standardize, Omni recommends that combo modules should always be
installed starting with the lowest number A Type Module in I/O Slot #5 (Slot #3
in Omni 3000) as shown, with additional modules being installed in ascending
order towards Slot #10 (Slot #4 in Omni 3000).
PROCESS I/O COMBO MODULE ADDRESSES VERSUS PHYSICAL I/O POINTS

M ODULE IDENTITY INPUTS OUTPUTS BACKPLANE POSITION PHYSICAL TERMINALS
A1 1-4 1&2 Slot 5 TB5 1-12
A2 5-8 3&4 Slot 6 TB6 1-12
B1 9-12 5 Slot 7 TB7 1-12
B2 13-16 6 Slot 8 TB8 1-12
E/D1 17-20 7&8 Slot 9 TB9 1-12
E1 21-24 9 & 10 Slot 10 TB10 1-12
2-2 ALL.71+ w 05/99

2.2.4. Assigning Specific Signal Inputs

The Omni factory pre-assigns the physical I/O points of each flow computer
based on information supplied at time of order. This configuration information is
stored in battery backed-up static CMOS RAM. If you wish to change or add to
these assignments, refer to the section Program Setup in Volume 3, Chapter
2 Flow Computer Configuration and follow these basic rules:
1) Digital densitometer signals can only be assigned to the fourth channel of
each B Type Combo Module, or the third and fourth channel of each E/D
Module.
2) RTD signals can only be assigned to the first or second channel of each
A, B, E/D or E combo module. Whenever possible, avoid using the
second RTD excitation current source of an A Type Combo Module as
this makes the second 4-20 mA output on that module inaccessable.
3) Pulse signals from flowmeters can be assigned only to the 3rd channel of
each combo module and/or the 4th channel of each A Combo Module and
E Combo Module (E/D Combo Modules excepted).
4) Pulse signals to be used for Pulse Fidelity Checking must be connected
to the 3rd and 4th channel of an E Combo Module with the third channel
assigned as the flow input.
5) Use the 3rd and 4th input channels of an E Combo Module for double
chronometry proving.
INFO - The message I/O 1) Physical I/O points may be assigned to more than one variable (i.e.,
Type Mismatch is common temperature or pressure sensors) but variable types cannot be
displayed if you try to assign
the same physical I/O point
mixed (i.e., the same physical point cannot be assigned to temperature
to more than one type of and pressure, for example)
variable.
ALL.71+ w 05/99 2-3

2.2.5. Sample Omni Flow Computer Configuration

Charts
The charts (below and facing page) are examples of the configuration chart
supplied with your flow computer. It shows the type of combo modules installed,
the assigned process variables, the I/O point numbers and the jumper settings
for each input channel. To avoid confusion, we recommend that you plan any
changes to the physical I/O setup on such a chart before making any changes.
Fig. 2-1. Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 3000
2-4 ALL.71+ w 05/99

CUSTOMER________________________ P.O.#____________
S.O.#_______
SOFTWARE________________________ COMPUTER
S/N__________________
MODEL #_________________________
TAG#__________________________
Fig. 2-2. Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 6000
ALL.71+ w 05/99 2-5

2.3. The A and B Combo I/O Modules

All I/O signals of the combo module are converted to the form of high frequency
pulse trains (0 to 25 kHz). These pulse trains are passed through opto-couplers
providing electrical isolation.
All 4 process inputs can accept analog input voltages which are first buffered
with a 1 megohm input buffer and then converted to pulse frequencies using
precision voltage-to-frequency converters. With 2 averaged 500 millisecond
samples, analog conversion resolution is 14 binary bits. Linearity is typically
0.01% and the temperature coefficient is trimmed to better than 15
PPM/F. Current inputs such as 4-20 mA are converted to 1-5 VDC by
jumpering-in a 250 ohm shunt resistor.
The conversion gain of Input Channels 1 and 2 can also be increased by a
factor of 10, allowing low level RTD signals (0.20 - 0.55 VDC) to be accepted.
Input Channels 3 and 4 can also be jumpered to accept pulse signals (0-12
kHz). In this case, the input stage is configured as Schmitt Trigger, whose
threshold is 3.5 VDC and hysteresis 0.5 VDC. The voltage-to-frequency
converter is bypassed in this mode. Input Channel 4 can also be jumpered for
AC coupling and a 1-volt trigger threshold, making it suitable for interfacing to
Solartron type densitometers.
Analog Outputs #1 and #2 are obtained in the reverse fashion. A software-
controlled pulse train (100 Hz to 5.0 kHz) is passed through opto-couplers and
converted to a current using precision frequency-to-current converters.
Resolution of these outputs is approximately 12 binary bits. The second analog
output is not available when the module is jumpered as a B Type.
Channel #4 Pulse
Input Threshold
AC / DC Coupling
A/B Module Type Channel # 4 Input
Select Jumper
Input Channel #4
Input Channel #3
Input Channel #2
Input Channel #1
Module Address
Jumpers
2nd. RTD Excitation Source
or Input Type Select
2nd Digital-Analog Output Jumpers
Fig. 2-3. The A and B Combo I/O Module - Configuration Jumpers
2-6 ALL.71+ w 05/99

Two RTD excitation current sources (3.45 mA) are available on the combo
module. The second RTD excitation source will not be available if the second 4-
20 mA analog output is in use (see setting of JP12). This is a function of the
number of circuits available from the back panel terminal to each combo
module. On a B Type module the second analog output is not available,
therefore this second RTD excitation source is always available.
2.3.1. A and B Combo Module Non-Selectable or

Selectable Address
The Combo Type A or B Module can either have a non-selectable address or a
selectable Address.
The non-selectable address type is featured in older versions of the Omni Flow
Computer. The address is programmed into the Programmable Array Logic
(PAL) integrated circuit and is factory set. The module address can only be
changed by replacing the PAL chip.
The selectable type address is featured in current versions of the Omni.
Normally, it is preset at the factory, however it allows the user to change the
address simply by selecting the correct type and address on the selection
jumpers.
Non-Selectable Address
Selectable Address
TYPE B SELECT ONLY
COMBO ADDRESS SELECT

(A0 SHOWN)
Fig. 2-4. A and B Combo Module - Non-Selectable / Selectable Address
ALL.71+ w 05/99 2-7

2.3.2. The A Type Combo I/O Module

INFO - The second analog The A Type Module is the most common configuration. It accepts 4 process
output is not available in inputs and provides two 4-20 mA analog outputs. Each module is connected to
cases where JP12 is used to
select the second RTD
the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables. The actual
excitation current source. terminal block used depends upon which backplane connector (TB?) the module is
You may be able to avoid plugged into.
using the second RTD
excitation source and save A Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments
losing an analog output by
using an unused excitation TB? Terminal 1 Input Channel #1 (1-5v, 4-20mA, RTD)
source on another combo TB? Terminal 2 Input Channel #1 (Isolated Signal Return)
module. TB? Terminal 3 Input Channel #2 (1-5v, 4-20mA, RTD)
TB? Terminal 4 Input Channel #2 (Isolated Signal Return)
TB? Terminal 5 Input Channel #3 (1-5v, 4-20mA, Flowmeter Pulses)
TB? Terminal 7 Input Channel #4 (1-5v, 4-20mA, Flowmeter Pulses)
TB? Terminal 9 RTD Excitation Current Source #1
TB? Terminal 10 Signal Return Terminals 9, 11 & 12 (Internally connected to DC power return)
TB? Terminal 11 Analog Output #1 (4-20mA)
TB? Terminal 12 Analog Output #2 (4-20mA) or RTD Excitation Current Source #2 (See
JP12 Setting)
Chan 4 Threshold
JP11 JP11 In = 3.5 VDC Out = 1.2 VDC
Select P
(Pulse Type 4-20mA Jumper Out
Input - Channel (Pulse Type Input)
3 or 4)
JP11
Select Module Type

JPB Out = A Type
Address Select
(Address #2 Shown)
JP12
Module A0 A1 A2
#1 Out Out Out
#2 In Out Out RTD2 D/A2
#3 Out In Out
JP12 In D/A2
#4 In In Out
Position
#5 Out Out In
#6 In Out In JP13 In DC
Coupled Position
Fig. 2-5. A Type Combo Module - Flow Pulse Jumper Settings (Channel 3
or Channel 4)
2-8 ALL.71+ w 05/99

JP11
Select A
(Analog Type)
Input
JP11
4-20 mA Jumper In
(Remove for
1-5VDC Input)
JP13 In DC Coupled
Position for Preamp
Turbine Meter Input Configured for Configured for Configured for
(Channel 4) RTD Input 4-20 mA Input 1-5 VDC Input
Fig. 2-6. A Type Combo Module - Analog Input Jumper Settings
ALL.71+ w 05/99 2-9

2.3.3. The B Type Combo I/O Module

INFO - You will need either a The B Type Combo Module also handles 4 process inputs but Input Channel 4
B Type Combo Module or is now used to measure the periodic time of a digital densitometer. The module
E/D Type Combo Module
when using digital
always has Input Channel 4 jumpered as a frequency input. Signal coupling can
densitometers connected to be AC or DC with trigger threshold adjustable for 1.5 or 3.5 Vpp sensitivity.
the flow computer. Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the
With a B Type Combo ribbon cables. The actual terminal block used depends upon which backplane
Module, Analog Output #2 is connector (TB?) the module is plugged into.
never available because the
periodic time function uses
the internal timer counter that B Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments
is normally used to generate
the second analog output. TB? Terminal 1 Input Channel #1 (1-5v, 4-20mA, RTD)
TB? Terminal 3 Input Channel #2 (1-5v, 4-20mA, RTD)
TB? Terminal 5 Input Channel #3 (1-5v, 4-20mA, DC Coupled Flowmeter Pulses)
TB? Terminal 7 Input Channel #4 (AC Coupled Densitometer Frequency)
TB? Terminal 10 Signal Return Terminals 9, 11 & 12 (Internally connected to DC power return)
TB? Terminal 11 Analog Output #1 (4-20mA)
Channel 4 Threshold
JP11 JP11 Out = 1.2 VDC (Solartron
& Sarasota)
Select P JP11 In = 3.5 VDC (UGC)
(Pulse Type
Input)
JP11
Select Module Type

JPB Out = A Type
Address Select
(Address #2 Shown)
JP12
Module A0 A1 A2
#1 Out Out Out
#2 In Out Out RTD2 D/A2
#3 Out In Out
#4 In In Out JP12 In RTD2 Pulse (Frequency) Type
#5 Out Out In Position Densitometer Requires AC
#6 In Out In Coupling - Channel 4
Fig. 2-7. B Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings - Frequency

Densitometer Setup
2-10 ALL.71+ w 05/99

2.4. The E/D and E Combo Modules

The hardware of E/D and E Combo Modules are similar to that of the A and B
Modules (discussed previously) except that these modules provide 2 analog
input channels which can be configured by jumpers for 1-5 volt, 4-20 mA or 4-
wire RTDs, and 2 pulse input channels which can be used to input flowmeter
pulses or densitometer frequency signals. Two 4-20 mA analog outputs are
always available on these modules. The module hardware can also be
configured by the application software to provide Level A Pulse Fidelity
Checking on the two pulse input channels.
2.4.1. The E/D Type Combo I/O Module

The E/D Type Combo Module is simply an E Combo Module with the JPD
jumper in place. Input Channels 1 and 2 are analog input channels which can
be configured by jumpers for 1-5 volt, 4-20 mA, or 4-wire RTDs. Input Channels
3 and 4 are always configured to measure periodic time and accept pulse
signals from digital densitometers. Each module is connected to the back panel
terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables. The actual terminal numbers
used depend upon which backplane connector (TB?) the module is plugged into.
E/D Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments

TB? Terminal 5 Input Channel #3 (AC or DC Coupled Digital Densitometer Pulses) *
TB? Terminal 6 Input Channel #4 (AC or DC Coupled Digital Densitometer Pulses) *
TB? Terminal 7 Not Used
TB? Terminal 8 RTD Excitation Current Source #2 *
TB? Terminal 10 Signal Return for signals marked (*) (Internally connected to DC power return)
TB? Terminal 11 Analog Output #1 (4-20mA) *
Input Threshold Select

JP8 and JP1
In = +3.5 Volt DC / Out = +1.2 Volt DC JP8 THRES JP5 JP6
JP3 JP4
Select Module Type RTD 4-20 RTD 4-20

JPD In = E/D Module INPUT 1 INPUT 1
JP5 JP6
JP8 THRES RTD 4-20

JP1 THRES INPUT 2
JP2 JP7
AC DC AC AC DC AC
INPUT 4 INPUT 3
Address Select
(Address #2 Shown) JP5 JP6
Module A0 A1 A2
JP2 RTD 4-20
#1 Out Out Out
INPUT 2
#2 In Out Out JP7
#3 Out In Out AC DC AC
#4 In In Out INPUT 4 AC DC AC 4-20 mA
AC Coupling INPUT 3 DC Coupling Selected
#5 Out Out In
Select Select
#6 In Out In
Fig. 2-8. E/D Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings
ALL.71+ w 05/99 2-11

2.4.2. The E Type Combo I/O Module

The E Type Combo Module is simply an E/D Combo Module with the JPD
jumper out. Double chronometry timers are provided in this module
configuration, allowing either pulse train to be proved. Input Channels 1 and 2
are analog input channels which can be configured by jumpers for 1-5 volt, 4-20
mA, or 4-wire RTDs. Input Channels 3 and 4 are always configured to accept
flowmeter pulses. Both RTD excitation current sources are also always
available. Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12
wires on the ribbon cables. The actual terminal numbers used depend upon
which backplane connector (TB?) the module is plugged into.
E COMBO MODULE BACK PANEL T ERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS

TB? Terminal 5 Input Channel #3 (AC or DC Coupled Flowmeter Pulses) *
TB? Terminal 6 Input Channel #4 (AC or DC Coupled Flowmeter Pulses) *
TB? Terminal 7 Double Chronometry Detector Switch In (Active Low) *
TB? Terminal 10 Signal Return for signals marked (*) (Internally connected to DC power
return)
Input Threshold Select

JP8 and JP1
In = +3.5 Volt DC / Out = +1.0 Volt DC JP8 THRES JP5 JP6
JP3 JP4
Select Module Type RTD 4-20 RTD 4-20

JPD Out = E Module INPUT 1 INPUT 1
JP5 JP6
JP8 THRES RTD 4-20

JP1 THRES INPUT 2
JP2 JP7
AC DC AC AC DC AC
INPUT 4 INPUT 3
Address Select
(Address #2 Shown) JP5 JP6
Module A0 A1 A2
JP2 RTD 4-20
#1 Out Out Out
INPUT 2
#2 In Out Out JP7
#3 Out In Out AC DC AC
#4 In In Out INPUT 4 AC DC AC 4-20 mA
AC Coupling INPUT 3 DC Coupling Selected
#5 Out Out In
Select Select
#6 In Out In
Fig. 2-9. E Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings
2-12 ALL.71+ w 05/99

2.5. The H Type Combo I/O Module

The H Type Combo Module is a special module which is used to communicate
using the Honeywell DE Protocol with 4 Honeywell Smart Transmitters. It
operates on a point-to-point basis. Honeywell Model ST3000 temperature,
pressure and differential pressure transmitters can be used. Transmitters
operating in the analog mode are automatically given a wake-up pulse and
switched into the DE Mode, as soon as they are connected and assigned a
meter run function. Two analog outputs are always available on this module.
Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the
ribbon cables. The actual terminal numbers used depend upon which backplane
connector (TB?) the module is plugged into.
H Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments

TB? Terminal 1 Input Channel #1 (Transmitter Positive Terminal)
TB? Terminal 2 Input Channel #1 (Transmitter Negative Terminal)
return)
Module Address
Jumpers
Green LED
Indicates Any
Activity
Red LED Indicates

OMNI is
Transmitting
Transmitter Loop
Status LEDs
Fig. 2-10. H Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings
ALL.71+ w 05/99 2-13

Four sets of LED indicators show the status of each transmitter loop. The red
LED flashes when the flow computer is transmitting data to the transmitter, such
as a change of range, etc. The green LED shows that data is being received by
a channel. Note that each communication channel uses 2 wires and operates in
the half duplex/simplex mode which means that the green LED shows the flow
computers transmissions also. Each transducer is operated in the 6-byte
broadcast mode. In this mode, the process variable is updated approximately
every 300 msec. The database of the transducer is compared against the flow
computers database every 1 or 2 minutes, depending on the type of transducer.
Any changes to the transducer database which will affect the integrity of the
measured variable must be made via the flow computer.
These entries are:
o Transducer Zero (Lower Range Value)
o Transducer Full Scale (Upper Range Value)
o Transducer Damping Code (Filter Time Constant)
o Transducer Tag Name
The flow computer will not allow any other devices to alter these variables.
Should they be altered, by the Honeywell Smart Field Communicator (SFC) for
example, they will be restored to their original value as shown in the flow
computer (transducer tag name excepted).
2-14 ALL.71+ w 05/99

2.6. The HV Type Combo I/O Module

The HV Type Combo Module is simply an H Module with the JP1, JP2 and JP3
address jumpers in the right-most setting (Address 15). The HV Combo Module
is used to communicate with Honeywell SMV3000 multivariable transmitters
via the DE Protocol. Operation of the LEDs is similar to the normal H Module.
Since only one multivariable transmitter is needed per meter run and since
there are a maximum of four meter runs, there will never be a need for more
then one HV Combo I/O Module.
Two analog outputs are always available on this module. Each module is
connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables.
The actual terminal numbers used depend upon which backplane connector
(TB?) module is plugged into.
HV Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments

return)
Module Address
Jumpers
Green LED
Indicates Any
Activity
Red LED Indicates

OMNI is
Transmitting
Transmitter Loop
Status LEDs
Fig. 2-11. HV Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings
ALL.71+ w 05/99 2-15

2.7. The SV Type Combo I/O Module

The SV I/O Combo Module has two RS-485 serial ports which are used to
communicate with devices such as Rosemount 3095 multivariable transmitters
via the Modbus Protocol. Dual LEDs on each port provide status of the
communications. The module also has six 4-20 mA outputs.
SV Modules and Other
Combo Module Types - SV Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments
The flow computer can
handle only two SV Modules TB? Terminal 1 Port #1 B (RS-485)
and three other A, B, E/D, E TB? Terminal 2 Port #1 A (RS-485)
or H I/O Combo Modules. An TB? Terminal 3 Port #2 B (RS-485)
HV module can also be
TB? Terminal 4 Port #2 A (RS-485)
installed in lieu of one of
these I/O combo modules. TB? Terminal 5 Signal Return for D/A Outputs signals marked (*)
TB? Terminal 6 Signal Return for D/A Outputs signals marked (*)
Jumper In = 1st MV Module MV Address

Jumper Out = 2 nd MV Module Selection Jumpers
IRQ 2 Always Selected
LED Indicators
PORT 1 (3)
PORT 2 (4)
RTS Always Selected Transmitting (TX)/Ready-to-

Send (RTS) LEDs Red
Receiving LEDs Green
Both Jumpers In = Port Terminated
Both Jumpers Out = Port Unterminated
MV RS-485
Termination Jumpers
Fig. 2-12. Omni Multivariable Interface (SV Type Combo) Module Model
68-6203 - Jumper Settings
2-16 ALL.71+ w 05/99

3. Mounting and Power Options
3.1. Mechanical Installation

Omni offers a variety of enclosure options which can all be customized based
on customer specified requirements:
q Panel Mounting
q NEMA 4/4X
q NEMA 7
3.1.1. Panel Mounting

Panel Mounting - Panels A panel with the correct size cut out as dimensioned below is required. Panels
less than 1/8 inch thick can should be a minimum of 1/8 inch thick. Use the two keyed nuts and clamping
be used but will require that
the rear of the computer be
bars provided to mount the flow computer to the panel.
supported.
CAUTION!
latching mechanism which
first must be disengaged by
lifting the bezel upwards
before withdrawing the unit
from the case.
IMPORTANT!
The maximum length of the
ribbon cable that connects
the keypad to the CPU
module is 18 inches. The
operation of the Central
Processor Module (CPU) will
be significantly affected if
this length is exceeded.
Fig. 3-1. Panel Mounting - Omni 6000 (upper), Omni 3000 (lower)
ALL.71+ w 05/99 3-1

Chapter 3 Mounting and Power Options
3.1.2. Nema 4 / 4X Configurations

Both the NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X are weather-proof enclosures. The NEMA 4 is
a standard steel enclosure, whereas the NEMA 4X is a stainless steel
enclosure. Both Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 flow computers can be mounted
inside the NEMAs on a sturdy swing frame. The NEMAs also include a 5 x 3
viewing window with a lexan plate to allow easy viewing. Custom enclosures
are available.
NEMA 4 / 4X FOR OMNI 6000 / 3000

Dimensions Weight Compliance
q NEMA 4, -12 & -13

24 in x 24 in x 12 in 80 lbs q UL 50, Type 4
(610 mm x 610 mm x 305 (36 kg) q CSA Enclosure 4
mm) q IEC 529, IP66
3.1.3. Nema 7 Specification

The NEMA 7 is an explosion-proof enclosure which allows switch or pushbutton
options for manipulating the contained flow computer. The viewing window is
sustained by a 3 circular glass thick. Both the Omni 6000 and Omni 3000
flow computers can be mounted in the NEMA 7 with minimal specification
variances. Custom enclosures are available.
NEMA 7 FOR OMNI 6000
120 lbs q NEC

(54 kg) Division 1 & 2
12 in x 18 in x 9 in Class I; Groups B, C & D
(305 mm x 457 mm x 203 Class II; Groups E, F & G
mm) Class III
q IEC
Zone 0 & 1
Groups IIC, IIB & IIA
NEMA 7 FOR OMNI 3000
12 in x 12 in x 8 in 110 lbs q NEC

(305 mm x 305 mm x 203 (50 kg) Division 1 & 2
mm) Class I; Groups B, C & D
Class II; Groups E, F & G
Class III
q IEC
Zone 0 & 1
Groups IIC, IIB & IIA
3-2 ALL.71+ w 05/99

3.2. Input Power

INFO - A recommended The Omni Flow Computer can be AC or DC powered.
maximum of 500mA of
transducer loop power is
available with a fully loaded
system of 6 combo I/O
3.2.1. AC Power
modules, 2 digital I/O
modules and 2 dual serial
When AC powered, 120 VAC, 50 Watts is applied to the AC terminal block.
I/O modules. The computer Approximately 500 mA at 24 VDC is always available from the DC terminal
must be DC powered if this block to drive transducer loops, pre-amplifiers, and digital I/O loads when the
500 mA limit is to be unit is powered by AC.
exceeded.
The flow computer can be special ordered for operation on 220-250 VAC
supplies. This requires a modified power supply unit and a different cord set.
CAUTION!
POTENTIAL FOR DATA 3.2.2. DC Power
LOSS!
RAM Battery Backup - When DC powered, 18 to 30 volts at 24 Watts is applied to the DC terminal
Omni flow computers leave block (this wattage figure does not include power sourced from the digital output
the factory with a fully terminals).
configuration and I/O 3.2.3. Safety Considerations
calibration data, may be lost
if the flow computer is To ensure continued protection against fire, the AC fuse must always be
disconnected from external replaced with a 0.5 amp (5x20 mm) slow blow fuse. The DC fuse must be
power for more than 30 days. replaced by a 3 amp, 2 AG fast blow.
storing the flow computer Power should be connected via a suitable power disconnect switch certified as
without power being applied
for extended periods of time.
being safe for the area (for grounding requirements, see sidebar note on facing
The RAM back-up battery is page).
rechargeable and will be fully
charged after power has
been applied for 24 hours.
ENVIRONMENTAL - The
maximum system
configuration of 24 process
inputs, 12 process outputs,
24 digital I/O points and 4
serial I/O channels dissipates
approximately 24 Watts. This
causes an internal
temperature rise of 15F over
the ambient. The unit should
not be mounted in a cabinet
or panel where the ambient
inside the cabinet will exceed
110F.
ALL.71+ w 05/99 3-3

3.3. Power Terminals
3.3.1. CE Equipment Power Terminals

In this current version of the Omni 3000 and Omni 6000 back panel the AC
receptacle is a power line filter with a separate AC fuse holder. The AC power is
connected via a separate 4-wire conductor cable which plugs into the power
supply. The DC terminal is on TB 11 (for Omni 6000) and on TB5 (for Omni
3000).
The power supply used with this version is a Model 68-6118; no fuses.
Back Panel Fuses - All DC

fuses are 3 amp, fast-blow
Model 225.003,
manufactured by Littlefuse.
All AC fuses are amp,
slow-blow Model 229.500,
manufactured by Littlefuse
Earth Ground
Requirements -To minimize
the effects of electrical
transients, the outer case of
the flow computer should be
connected to a high quality
earth ground using the
grounding stud located on
the back of the unit (see Fig.
3-2).
Connect the shields of all
wiring to the same grounding
stud. To eliminate earth loop
currents, shields should be
left unconnected and taped
back at the other end.
Fig. 3-2. Input Power Terminals - Omni 3000 (upper), Omni 6000 (lower)
3-4 ALL.71+ w 05/99

3.3.2. Extended Back Panel Power Terminals

Several mounting options are now available with the Omni 6000 flow computer
by requesting the Extended Back Panel Termination option. This panel
incorporates all the terminal blocks of Versions 2 and 3, TB1 through TB10 with
terminals marked 1 through 12. Screw type terminals are provided for AC and
DC power. In addition to TB1 through TB10, extra DC (fused), return and shield
terminals are provided for TB1 through TB8. Extended 64-conductor ribbon
cables and the AC cables are provided with a standard length of 5 feet.
Amp
Extended Back Panel

Fuses - All DC fuses are
amp fast-blow manufactured
by Littlefuse, Model 225.250.
The main DC fuse is 3 amp.
The AC fuse is amp slow-
blow manufactured by
Littlefuse, Model 239.500.
The fuse for the back panels
AC receptacle is a 5x20mm,
amp slow-blow.
amp
3 Amp
Fig. 3-3. Input Power Terminals - Extended Back Panel (Omni 6000 only)
ALL.71+ w 05/99 3-5

Fig. 3-4. Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 6000)
Fig. 3-5. Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 3000)
3-6 ALL.71+ w 05/99

3.4. Power Supply Module Switching

Regulator
All analog and digital circuits within the flow computer are powered from a 5-
volt switching regulator located on the power supply module. This is located in
the rear most connector on the computer backplane.
The DC power which supplies the switching regulator either comes directly from
the DC terminals on the back panel of the flow computer (18-30 VDC) or by
rectifying the output of the integral 120 VAC (240 VAC) to 20 VAC transformer.
DC power into or out of the back panel DC power terminals is fused by a 3
Amp, 2 AG fuse located on the back panel next to the DC power terminals.
Regulated 5-volt power is monitored by a 3 to 4 second shutdown circuit located
on the power supply module. When power is applied to the computer there will
be a delay of 3 to 4 seconds before the unit powers up.
CAUTION
The Power Low and +5 v
Adjust on the Power Supply
Module are factory
adjustments that require the
use of special equipment.
DO NOT attempt to adjust
Fig. 3-6. Power Supply Module Model 68-6118
ALL.71+ w 05/99 3-7

4. Connecting to Flowmeters
4.1. Turbine Flowmeter (A or B Combo

Module)
Input Channels 3 and 4 can be independently jumpered to accept pulse signals.
Channel 3 on the A and B Combo Modules and Channel 4 on the A Combo
Module can be used to input turbine or positive displacement flowmeters. The
input threshold is 3.5 volts; hysteresis 1/2 volt.
Fig. 4-1. Connecting to a Turbine Pre-amp (A or B Combo Modules)
ALL.71+ w 05/99 4-1

Chapter 4 Connecting to Flowmeters
4.2. Wiring Flowmeter Signals to E Type

Combo Modules
Input Channels 3 and 4 of each E Type Combo Module are used to input
signals from turbine or PD flowmeters. Both channels share a common signal
return at the Omni terminals. Input threshold can be jumpered for +1 or +3.5
volt. Input coupling can be AC or DC (see Chapter 2). Hysteresis is
approximately 0.5 volt.
Fig. 4-2. Wiring to Turbine Pre-Amps (E Type Combo Modules Only)
4-2 ALL.71+ w 05/99

4.3. Faure Herman Turbine Meters (E

Combo Module)
Faure Herman Turbine Meters are used in liquid applications only. For these
flowmeters, high threshold jumpers JP1 and JP8 on the E Type Combo Module
must be installed.
Fig. 4-3. Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using Omni 24 VDC
Fig. 4-4. Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using External 24 VDC
ALL.71+ w 05/99 4-3

Chapter 4 Connecting to Flowmeters
4.4. Pulse Fidelity and Integrity Checking

with E Type Combo Modules
A flowmeter with dual channel out-of-phase outputs can be connected as
shown. The flow computer can be configured to continuously compare the
signals for frequency and sequence on a pulse-to-pulse basis, and alarm and
log any differences. (See Volume 5, Technical Bulletin TB-970901 for more
information on Pulse Fidelity Checking.)
Fig. 4-5. Connecting Dual Coil Turbines for Pulse Fidelity Checking
4-4 ALL.71+ w 05/99

5. Connecting to Transducers and

Transmitters
5.1. Wiring the Input Transducers

Because of the high density of connections on the back panel terminal, it is
recommended that wiring to the terminals be made with 18-22 gauge wire
wherever possible. Transducers should be wired using twisted pairs of 18 gauge
shielded wire. The shields should be connected together and grounded at the
flow computer end. To prevent ground loops, shields should be taped back and
insulated at the transducer end.
Each of the 4-20 mA process input channels are individually optically isolated.
The transducer may be connected in series with either the power or return line
of the transducer current loop. The figure shown below shows a transducer
wired in the power leg of the loop.
Fig. 5-1. Wiring the 4-20 mA Inputs (Input Channels 1 & 2 shown)
ALL.71+ w 05/99 5-1

Chapter 5 Connecting to Transducers and Transmitters
5.2. Wiring of a Dry C Type Contact

Certain types of flowmeter photo-pulsers produce a low frequency contact pulse
output (typical 1 pulse per barrel). To accommodate these low frequencies, they
can be wired to any pulse input on A or E Type Combo Modules, as shown
below.
Fig. 5-2. Wiring for Dry C Type Contact
5-2 ALL.71+ w 05/99

5.3. Wiring RTD Probes

INFO - Each A or B Type Channels 1 and 2 of each combo I/O module can be jumpered to accept a
Combo Module always has 1 signal from a 100 ohm RTD probe. The flow computer can be configured for the
RTD excitation current
source available at Terminal
DIN 43-760 curve (= 0.00385) or the American curve (=0.00392). The probe
9. A second source is always is wired in a 4-wire configuration as shown below.
available on B Types at
Terminal 12.
TIP - The excitation current

source for an RTD need not
come from the same combo
module from which the signal
is input. You will need to
recalibrate the input channel
if you choose to use an
excitation source from
another combo module.
Fig. 5-3. Wiring a 4-Wire RTD Temperature Probe
ALL.71+ w 05/99 5-3

5.4. Wiring Densitometers
5.4.1. Wiring Densitometer Signals to an E/D Type

Combo Module
INFO - Because the density Two independent densitometers with RTD probes can be wired directly to an
pulse signal can be a small E/D type combo module. For example, Solartron and UGC densitometers
AC signal with a large DC
offset, you must select AC
can be wired to the same E/D Type Module.
coupling and low trigger
threshold for the combo
module channel used; i.e.: on 5.4.2. Solartron Densitometers
the B Type Combo Modules,
JP13 in the AC position and Connecting to a Solartron Digital Densitometer actually involves two devices:
JP11 out; on E/D Combo the densitometer current pulse signal and the densitometer 4-wire RTD probe
Modules, JP2 and JP7 in the
AC positions and JP1 and
attached to the vibrating tube. The pulse signal is connected to Channel 4 of a
JP8 out. B Type Combo Module. The RTD is connected to Channel 1 or Channel 2. The
Input impedance will be device can be connected with or without safety barriers, depending on the
10kohms; 1.5Vpp is required needs of the application.
from the densitometer to
reliably trigger the input.
INFO - When configuring the

flow computer, select the
DIN curve for this RTD
temperature point.
Fig. 5-4. Wiring a Solartron Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a B

Type I/O Combo Module
5-4 ALL.71+ w 05/99

NOTICE!
Diagrams shown are based
on published manufacturers,
data. Omni accepts no
responsibility for wiring or
installation of equipment in a
hazardous area. Equipment
must always be installed in
compliance with local and
national safety standards.
Fig. 5-5. Wiring a Solartron Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a

B Type I/O Combo Module
ALL.71+ w 05/99 5-5

5.4.3. Sarasota Densitometers

INFO - Because the density The Sarasota Densitometer provides a voltage pulse signal representing
pulse signal can be a small density and also a 4-wire 100 ohm RTD probe monitoring the temperature of
AC signal with a large DC
offset, you must select AC
the device. The pulse signal is connected to Channel 4 of a B Type Combo
coupling and low trigger Module. The RTD is connected to Channel 1 or Channel 2 of any module. The
threshold for the combo device can be connected with or without safety barriers, depending on the
module channel used; i.e.: on needs of the application.
the B Type Combo Modules,
JP13 in the AC position and
JP11 out; on E/D Combo
Modules, JP2 and JP7 in the
AC positions and JP1 and
JP8 out.
Input impedance will be
10kohms; 1.5Vpp is required
from the densitometer to
reliably trigger the input.
INFO - When configuring the

flow computer, select the
DIN curve for this RTD
temperature point.
Fig. 5-6. Wiring a Sarasota Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a B

5-6 ALL.71+ w 05/99

NOTICE!
Fig. 5-7. Wiring a Sarasota Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a B

ALL.71+ w 05/99 5-7

5.4.4. UGC Densitometers

INFO - Because the density The UGC Densitometer output provides an open collector transistor that
pulse signal is a large DC requires an external pull-up resistor to 24 volts DC. The densitometer provides
pulse signal with little or no
DC offset, you must select
a 24 volt DC pulse output in the range of 1 to 2 kHz. The pulse signal is
DC coupling with normal connected to Channel 4 of a B Type Combo Module and can be connected with
trigger threshold for the or without safety barriers, depending on the application requirements.
combo module channel used;
i.e.: on the B Type Combo
Modules, JP13 in the DC
position and JP11 in; on E/D
Combo Modules, JP2 and
JP7 in the DC positions and
JP1 and JP8 in.
Input impedance will be
1Mohms; <3.0Vfor low level
and >4V.0 for high level is
required from the
densitometer to reliably
trigger the input.
Fig. 5-8. Wiring a UGC Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a B Type

I/O Combo Module
5-8 ALL.71+ w 05/99

NOTICE!
Fig. 5-9. Wiring a UGC Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a B

ALL.71+ w 05/99 5-9

5.5. Wiring of Honeywell ST3000

Transmitters
Up to four Honeywell Smart Transmitters can be wired to each H Type Combo
I/O Module. Loop power is provided by the combo module. No external power is
required.
Fig. 5-10. Wiring of a Honeywell Smart Transmitter
5-10 ALL.71+ w 05/99

5.6. Wiring Micro Motion Transmitters
5.6.1. Connecting Micro Motion RFT9739 Transmitter

to A Type or E Type Process I/O Combination
Modules
The frequency/pulse output that represents the volume flow from the RFT9739
Transmitter can be wired directly into either Frequency Channel 3 or 4 on A
Type or E Type Combo Modules. (See Technical Bulletin TB-980401.)
Fig. 5-11. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter
ALL.71+ w 05/99 5-11

5.6.2. Connecting Micro Motion RFT 9739 via RS-485

Serial Communications
Serial communication via RS-485 can be accomplished using the Peer-to-Peer
Mode via Omni Serial Port #2 of the RS-232-C/485 Serial Module # 68-6205,
with selection jumpers in the RS-485 position. (See Technical Bulletin TB-
980401.)
OMNI BACK PANEL TERMINALS

SERIAL PORT #2 (PEER-TO-PEER)
RS-485 MODE SELECTED
7 (B)
10
11 (A)
Fig. 5-12. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof)

Transmitter Via Two-wire RS-485 Communications (Serial I/O Module #68-
6205)
5-12 ALL.71+ w 05/99

5.6.3. Connecting Micro Motion RFT9739 via Serial

RS-232-C to 485 Converter
Serial communication via RS-485 can also be accomplished utilizing the Peer-
to-Peer Mode via RS-232-C. (See Technical Bulletin TB-980401.)
Fig. 5-13. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof)

Transmitter Via Serial RS-485 Converter
ALL.71+ w 05/99 5-13

6. Connecting Analog Outputs and

Miscellaneous I/O Including Provers
6.1. Analog Outputs

Analog outputs are available for remote terminal units, flow controllers, and
recording devices. The analog outputs source 4-20 mA into a load wired to the
DC power return. Maximum load resistance is 1000 ohms at 25 VDC. Digital-to-
Analog conversion is accomplished with a 12-bit binary resolution.
Two outputs are available on each A Type Combo Module. One output is
available on each B Type Combo Module.
To calibrate, each of the outputs is set to 4.00 and 20.00 mA and the software
zero and span adjusted while in the Diagnostic Mode (described later). Any
value between 2.5 and 23.0 mA may be output.
Each output is assigned via the keypad or serial link to one of the many
variables available (see Volume 3).
Fig. 6-1. Wiring Devices to the Flow Computers Analog Outputs
ALL.71+ w 05/99 6-1

Chapter 6 Connecting Analog Outputs and Miscellaneous I/O Including Provers
6.2. Digital Inputs/Outputs
6.2.1. Wiring a Digital Point as an Input or an Output

Digital I/O modules handle 12 digital points. Each point can be independently
configured as either an input or output via the keypad or via a serial port.
The power and returns for all digital I/O signals are common with the DC power
terminals. Digital output loads are connected between the I/O terminal and DC
power return. An approximate total load of 500 mA per module (per 12 points) is
allowed although an individual point can handle 200 mA. Voltages applied to
I/O points used as inputs must not exceed the DC supply voltage at the DC
terminal, or the protective fuse for that point on the digital I/O module may
blow.
Fig. 6-2. Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Input
6-2 ALL.71+ w 05/99

Fig. 6-3. Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Output
ALL.71+ w 05/99 6-3

6.2.2. Connecting Various Digital I/O Devices

On the Omni 6000, Digital I/O Module #1, handling points 1 through 12, is
plugged into the backplane connector marked I/O Module #1. This in turn is
connected to Terminal Strip TB1-1 through 12. Digital I/O Module #2, handling
points 13 through 24, is plugged into the backplane connector marked I/O
Module #2 which is connected to Terminal Strip TB2-1 through 12. The Omni
3000 has only one digital I/O module which is connected to Terminal TB1-1
through 12 on the back panel.
The diagram below shows the typical wiring required to interface to other
devices, such as: switches, relays, provers, programmable logic controllers,
among other devices.
Fig. 6-4. Connecting Digital I/O Devices to the Flow Computer
6-4 ALL.71+ w 05/99

6.3. Provers
6.3.1. Connecting Pipe Prover Detector Switches

INFO - The prover detector Pipe prover detector switches are the only I/O signal that must be connected to
switch signal activates an a specific I/O point. They must be wired as shown in Fig. 6-4 to Digital I/O
interrupt request into the
computer. Jumpers JP1 and
Point #1, and the point assigned to Boolean 1700 in the software configuration
JP2 on the digital I/O module (see Volume 3). This is because Digital I/O Point #1 is internally jumpered to
(Fig. 1-5) control which edge cause a high priority interrupt of the computer used to start and stop prover
of the signal will cause the counting. Digital I/O Point #1 can still be used as a normal I/O point if pipe
interrupt. Pulse counting
should start when the sphere
proving is not needed.
first activates the detector
switch. Install JP1 in cases
where the detector switchs 6.3.2. Interfacing to a Brooks Compact Prover
normally opened contacts are
used (Fig. 1-9). Install JP2 in The Omni Flow Computer interfaces to the basic Brooks Compact Prover Skid
cases where the detector Electronics (the Brooks Control Box is not used). The control interface involves
switchs normally closed
contacts are used.
one digital output to control the piston launch, a digital input point to monitor the
position of the piston, and a detector switch signal shared between each meter
run to be proved.
Note: When using double
chronometry proving, the Compact provers use the Pulse Interpolation Method of measuring the
detector switch input is on flowmeter counts between the detector switches. The interpolation method
Terminal 7 of an E Type requires that the detector switches activate high speed hardware timers on the
Combo I/O Module. Omnis combo I/O module. The detector switch signals called first and final
pickoff by Brooks are connected to the Detector Switch input of each E Type
Combo Module installed in the flow computer.
The following diagram shows the complete installation, including 4-20 mA
signals representing the temperature and pressure of the prover tube as well as
the nitrogen plenum chamber. The 12-volt DC power supply is user supplied.
Fig. 6-5. Wiring to a Brooks Compact Prover
ALL.71+ w 05/99 6-5

6.3.3. Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooks

Compact Prover
The plenum chamber pressure is used as a spring to close the poppet valve of
the piston and cause the piston to be moved forward by the flowing liquid. The
pressure required to close the poppet valve varies with pipeline pressure. Too
high a plenum pressure causes the piston to be pushed downstream by this
excess pressure and can lead to inaccurate provings.
The Omni Flow Computer can monitor the plenum pressure and line pressure,
and automatically charge or vent nitrogen from the plenum chamber.
Before commencing a proving run, the Omni Flow Computer checks the
plenum pressure versus the required pressure and activates either the charge
or vent solenoid valve. The pressures will be matched within some user
entered deadband percent. The Omni activates the solenoids via low voltage
relays (not shown).
An additional enhancement shown is a pressure switch signaling low nitrogen
bottle pressure. In this case, the prove attempt would be aborted if it became
impossible to achieve the correct plenum pressure.
Fig. 6-6. Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooks Compact Prover
6-6 ALL.71+ w 05/99

7. Connecting to Serial Devices
7.1. Serial Port Connection Options

INFO - Up to 12 flow The total number of serial communication ports depends on the number of dual
computers and/or other port serial I/O modules installed. The Omni 6000 accepts 2 serial I/O modules;
the Omni 3000 accepts 1. Two optional serial communication I/O modules are
Omnis proprietary RS-232-C available with your flow computer (see Chapter 1): the RS-232-C (compatible)
serial port. Thirty-two Model #68-6005, and the RS-232-C/485 Model #68-6205. The older Model #68-
devices may be connected 6005 is only capable of RS-232 compatible serial communications. The newer
when using the RS-485
Model #68-6205 is capable of either RS-232 or RS-485 communications via a
mode. Typically, one serial
I/O module is used on the selection jumper.
Omni 3000, providing two
ports. A maximum of two When jumpered for RS-232, the characteristics and functionality of this module
serial modules can be is identical to that of the older RS-232-C module, providing 2 optically isolated
installed in the Omni 6000, RS-232-C serial ports which can operate from 0.3 to 38.4 kbps. These ports are
providing four ports. used for printers, personal computers, and SCADA devices. Although the output
voltage levels are compatible with the RS-232 standard, the output is actually
RS-485 Communications
tristated when not sending data. This allows the transmit output from multiple
with an RS-232-C Serial I/O flow computers to be bussed. A terminating resistor is provided at the back
Module #68-6005 - When panel connections to pull down the transmitter signal to a mark (-9V). Hence, a
connecting to RS-485 serial short jumper is required in many cases from TX (Out) to Term.
devices using Serial I/O
Module #68-6005, a RS-232- RS-485 communications allows interconnecting multiple flow computers,
to-485 Converter device must programmable logic controllers, multivariable transmitters, and other serial
be used.
devices in either four-wire multi-drop mode or peer-to-peer two-wire multi-drop
mode.
Multivariable Transmitting
Devices - In addition to the
have an SV Module to
communicate with RS-485
compatible multivariable
transmitters. This serial
module must be jumpered to
IRQ 3 when used in
combination with an SV
Module. Without an SV
Module, the jumper must be
placed at IRQ 2. The SV
Module can only be used with
this serial module (68-6205)
and is not compatible with
the Serial I/O Module # 68-
6005. For more information,
see Technical Bulletin # TB-
980303.
ALL.71+ w 05/99 7-1

Chapter 7 Connecting to Serial Devices
7.2. Connecting to Printers
7.2.1. Connecting to a Dedicated Printer (Port 1)

INFO - The speed that data The following diagram shows the Omni Flow Computer connected to a
can be accepted by the dedicated printer. The hardware handshake wire connected to Pin 20 of the
printer depends on the size
of the input buffer (if any)
DB25 connector is optional, as the computer can be made to insert null
and the print mode (draft or characters after each carriage return to match the computer data transmission
near letter quality). Typical rate to the printer speed.
printers provide about 120
printed characters/second.
TIP - Most printers default to

the draft mode. Leave it there
for maximum performance.
Because of impact printer
limitations, no speed
improvement is obtained by
selecting baud rates over
2.4kbps.
Fig. 7-1. Connecting a Printer to Serial Port #1 of the Flow Computer
7-2 ALL.71+ w 05/99

7.2.2. Connecting to a Shared Printer (Port 1)

Up to 12 Omni flow computers can share a printer. They are connected as
shown. One flow computer is assigned as the master and manages all traffic to
the printer. Each computer monitors the data transmitted to the printer by
having its TX terminal jumpered to its RX terminal. Resident firmware ensures
that only one computer will attempt to access the printer at any one time.
INFO - Note that only 1

terminating pull-down resistor
is jumpered in place.
Fig. 7-2. Connecting Several Flow Computers to a Shared Printer
7.2.3. Print Sharing Problems

Note: Refer to Volume 3, Most problems associated with printer sharing show up as garbled reports or
Chapter 2 for Printer locked up printers. This is usually caused by one or more computers sending
Settings.
data to the printer at the same time. Check your wiring to the figure above and
consult the following checklist if you experience problems:
1) Check that all computers are set to the same baud rate, stop bits, and
parity settings as the printer.
2) All computers must have the Transmitter Key Delay set to zero (0).
3) One and only one computer must have its Printer Priority Number set to
1. All computers must have a different priority number.
4) Some printers provide jumpers or switches which set the polarity of the
Printer Ready signal on Pin 20. This signal must be positive when the
printer is ready.
5) When not using the Printer Ready signal (Pin 20), ensure that you have
entered enough NULs to prevent overrunning the printer buffer.
ALL.71+ w 05/99 7-3

7.3. Connecting to a Personal Computer and

Modem
Note: Ports #1 and #2 (Ports #3 and #4* of an Omni 6000) can provide access to the
* Depending upon whether computers database using a Modbus protocol interface. This port is usually
a printer or Allen-Bradley connected to a PC running the OmniCom configuration software. Up to 12
PLC is used.
Omni flow computers can be connected to 1 PC. The Modbus protocol includes
an address field which ensures that only 1 unit will transmit at a time.

Fig. 7-3. Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB25 Female

Connector (Using Port #2 as an example)
7-4 ALL.71+ w 05/99


Fig. 7-4. Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB9 Female

Connector
Fig. 7-5. Connecting Port #2 to a Modem
ALL.71+ w 05/99 7-5

7.4. Peer-to-Peer Communications and Multi-

drop Modes
Peer-to-Peer Serial Port #2 can also be configured by the application software to act as a
Communications - The peer-to-peer Modbus master port. This is a half duplex/simplex link which
peer-to-peer communication
feature allows you to multi-
allows any Omni Flow Computer to communicate with any other flow computer
drop up to 32 flow computers or Modbus slave device. That data link can operate at up to 38.4 kbps and uses
and other devices in RS-485 a proprietary token passing scheme. Interconnecting multiple flow computers
serial communications mode, and or multiple serial devices can be accomplished via RS-232-Compatible or
and up to 12 using RS-232-C RS-485 communications.
communications.
Peer-to-Peer Redundancy 7.4.1. Peer-to-Peer RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop Mode

Schemes - Redundancy
schemes allows for The diagram below shows the wiring requirements for multi-dropping two or
uninterrupted measurement more flow computers via RS-485 in two-wire mode. This option is available only
and control functionality by with the Omni Serial I/O Module #68-6205. (See Technical Bulletin #TB-
interconnecting two
identically equipped and
980401.)
configured flow computers
(see Technical Bulletin TB-
980402).

OmniCom and Peer-to-
UP TO 32 FLOW COMPUTERS
Peer - The OmniCom
Configuration PC Software
package supplied with your
Omni Flow Computer cannot B
be used on Serial Port #2
when it is being used as a
peer-to-peer link.
GND
RS-485 TWO-WIRE RS-485 TWO-WIRE RS-485 TWO-WIRE RS-485 TWO-WIRE

TERMINATED NON-TERMINATED NON-TERMINATED NON-TERMINATED
Fig. 7-6. Wiring of Several Flow Computers using the Peer-to-Peer

Feature via RS-485 Communications in Two-wire Multi-drop
Mode
7-6 ALL.71+ w 05/99

7.4.2. Peer-to-Peer via RS-232-C Communications

The diagram below shows the wiring requirements for multi-dropping two or
more flow computers in RS-232 C (compatible) mode. When multi-dropping two
or more flow computers with other serial devices via the RS-232-C mode, an
RS-232-to-RS-485 standard converter may be required. (See Technical
Bulletin #TB-980401.)
Fig. 7-7. Wiring of Several Flow Computers in the Peer-to-Peer Mode

using RS-232-C Communications.
7.4.3. Keying the Modem or Radio Transmitter Carrier

in Multi-drop Applications
Note: Refer to Volume 3, Use the RTS signal to key the modem or radio transmitter carrier in a multi-drop
Chapter 2 Flow Computer application. A delay between activating the RTS signal and actually sending
Configuration.
data is provided to allow for carrier acquisition at the remote end. This delay
can be selected as 0.0 msec, 50 msec, 100 msec, or 150 msec.
ALL.71+ w 05/99 7-7

7.4.4. RS-485 Four-wire Multi-drop Mode

The diagram below shows the wiring requirements for multi-dropping two or
more flow computers via RS-485 in four-wire mode to a third party PLC type
device. Note that in the wiring example shown below, the PLC acts as a master
and can communicate with either flow computer. A four-wire wiring system does
not allow communications between slaves; i.e., data can only be transferred
between master and slaves. The RS-485 option is available only with the Omni
Serial I/O Module #68-6205.
UP TO 32 RS-485 DEVICES
SLAVE SLAVE
MASTER
TX-B PLC DEVICE
RX
RX-A
TX
TX-A
RX-B RS-485
RS-485 FOUR-WIRE RS-485 FOUR-WIRE
Fig. 7-8. Wiring of Multiple Flow Computers to a PLC Device Via RS-485
Communications in Four-wire Multi-drop Mode
7-8 ALL.71+ w 05/99

7.5. Connecting to a SCADA Device

When using an Omni 6000 with 2 serial I/O modules installed, a second
Modbus port (Physical Port #3 used as an example) can provide access to the
computers database. This port can also be connected to a PC or any SCADA
device either directly, via modem, or via radio link.
Fig. 7-9. Typical Wiring of Port #3 to a SCADA Device via Modem
ALL.71+ w 05/99 7-9

7.6. Interfacing the Fourth Serial Port to an

Allen-Bradley KE Module
Port #4 is available on Omni flow computers with the second serial module
fitted. This port can be selected to communicate with Allen-Bradley devices
using DF1 full duplex or half duplex protocol, or set up for Modbus devices. The
example below assumes that the Allen-Bradley Protocol has been selected.
Fig. 7-10. Wiring Serial Port #4 to Allen-Bradley KE Communications

Module
7-10 ALL.71+ w 05/99

8. Diagnostic and Calibration Features
8.1. Introduction
In the diagnostic mode you can verify that the I/O modules and transducers are
working and are calibrated to specification.
The actual process transducers used may provide a variety of signal types,
ranging from voltage or current pulses of various levels, to linear analog signals
such as 4-20 mA., 1-5V, 0-1V or RTD elements. In the case of pulse inputs, the
input module provides amplification and/or level shifting, Schmitt triggering and
opto-isolation.
When analog signals are used the input module provides all signal conditioning,
opto-isolation, and converts the analog signal to a high frequency pulse train, in
the range of 0 - 20 kHz. By using a precision voltage to frequency converter,
typical linearity of +/-0.01 % is obtained.
Certain diagnostic displays are always available while in the Display Mode. For
example pressing [Input] then [Display] will display the raw frequency input
from each process input point. The up/down arrow keys can be used to scroll
through all inputs. A typical display shows:
INFO - When viewing an
analog input point, the Input % Freq/Period
frequency displayed #1 2530
approximates 1000Hz/mA.
When viewing a turbine or Input % /Freq/Period
photo pulsar signal, the #2 3021
display is the actual input
frequency.
Pressing [Output] [Status] [Display] shows the current percentage output for
each of the digital to analog 4-20 mA outputs.
INFO - 0.0% corresponds to
4mA. 100.0% corresponds to Analog Output %
20mA. #1 55.79
Analog Output %
#2 34.10
ALL.71+ w 05/99 8-1

Chapter 8 Diagnostic and Calibration Features
Important timing information is available by pressing [Time] then [Display] and

then scrolling down using the down arrow. The displays are as follows:
Power Applied
Time: 09:10:30
Date: 01/21/91
Power Last Lost

Time: 10:25:21
Date: 01/20/91
The previous two displays of power lost and power applied allow the user to
estimate the amount of product flow which may be unaccounted for in the event
of a power failure.
Scrolling down further displays:
Main Task Timing-Sec

20 mS Task 00.00
50 mS Task 00.00
100mS Task 00.01
500mS Task 00.04
Background 00.02
This timing information refers to various main application tasks that run within
the computer. The information may be useful to Omni in the event of a
problem.
8.2. Calibrating in the Diagnostic Mode

INFO - The Diagnostic LED In the Diagnostic Mode the user selects a specific process variable to calibrate
glows red after a valid or view. The display shows the input channel and combo module used for the
password has been asked for
and entered.
variable. Calibration override values can be input and the input signals can be
viewed simultaneously as engineering values % span, input voltage and
current. Analog outputs and digital I/O points can also be viewed and
manipulated.
8.2.1. Entering The Diagnostic Mode

To enter the diagnostic mode proceed as follows press the [Alpha Shift] key,
then the [Diag] key.
INFO - The Select The front panel diagnostic LED will glow green and the following will be
Input/Output screen must displayed on the first three lines of the LCD Display:
be displayed when making a
new selection while in the
Diagnostic Mode. Return to Select Input/Output
this screen by pressing the
[Diag] key once.
to Calibrate,
Press "Diag" to Exit
8-2 ALL.71+ w 05/99

The fourth line of the display is used to show the users selection. The user can
choose to calibrate or view any analog input or output, or manipulate any set of
digital I/O points.
8.2.2. Display Groups in the Diagnostic Mode

INFO - Each input channel of To display an input or output variable to calibrate, select from the following
each combo module has had display groups and associated key presses or select the I/O number if known,
its temperature coefficient
trimmed to 10 ppm/F. To
(usually supplied on a separate sheet).
avoid temperature gradient
effects and for best results,
always allow the internal
temperature of the computer
DISPLAY VARIABLES VALID KEY PRESSES
to stabilize before making
your final calibration
All of the following key presses are valid in the Diagnostic Mode. To enter
adjustments. the Diagnostic Mode, these key presses must be preceded by the [Alpha
Shift] [Diag] keys.
Input Channels (n = 1 through 24) [Input] or [Input] [n]
Meter Temperature (n = 1 through 4) [Temp] or [Temp] [Meter] [n]
Meter Pressure (n = 1 through 4) [Press] or [Press] [Meter] [n]
Meter Density (n = 1 through 4) [Density] or [Dens] [Meter] [n]
Meter Density Temp (n = 1 through 4) [Density][Temp] or [Density][Temp][Meter][n]
Meter Dens Pressure (n = 1 through 4) [Density][Press] or [Density][Press][Meter][n]
Prover Temperature (Left, Right) [Prove} [Temp]
Prover Pressure (Left, Right) [Prove} [Temp]
Output Channels (n = 1 through 24) [Output] [n]
Digital I/O (n = 1 or 2) [Status] [n]
8.2.3. Leaving The Diagnostic Mode

Once you are done viewing and/or modifying the calibration settings, press
[Diag] to return to the selection screen below:
Select Input/Output
to Calibrate,
Press the [Diag] key again to return to the Display Mode (Diagnostic LED will
turn off).
ALL.71+ w 05/99 8-3

8.3. Calibration Instructions
8.3.1. Calibrating A Voltage or Current Analog Input

Note: You can also calibrate While the above display is shown select the input variable to calibrate. For
the input and output of your example to calibrate Meter Run #1 Temperature, press [Meter] [1] [Temp] (or
choice by entering the
number of that input or
the input # if known). The display shows:
output; e.g.: Press [Input]
[1] [Enter]; press [Output]
[4] [Enter]. With this method
Select Input/Output
you can calibrate the inputs to Calibrate,
and outputs to the computer Press "Diag" to Exit
without having them Meter 1 Temp
assigned to any I/O point
numbers.
Other key press combinations work. [Temp] [Meter] [1] means the same to the
computer as [Meter] [1] [Temp]. Pressing [Temp] without a meter number
allows all of the temperatures to be scrolled through and calibrated.
Now enter the selection by pressing [Display] and the following is displayed:
Temperature #1
Input# & Module 1-a1
Override 60.0
Calibrate Input ? _
INFO - Unless previously The display shows the process variable name, the input channel number and
entered, a request for a valid combo module used. This example shows Temperature Meter Run #1
password is made at this
point.
connected to Channel 1 of Combo Module A1.
The calibrate override value Before calibrating an input the user should enter a Cal Override value to be
entered will be substituted for used in all calculations in place of the live value.
all process variables
assigned to this physical I/O Answer [Y] to the 'Calibrate Input ?' question and the following is displayed:
point when the user answers
[Y] to Calibrate Input ?. It is
automatically removed when Meter 1 27.5
the user presses the [Diag]
key to exit or make a new % Value 50.00
selection. Input Volts 3.000
mA Value 12.00
8-4 ALL.71+ w 05/99

To calibrate the input channel follow these instructions:

INFO - Each input channel of 1) Disconnect the transducer signal and replace it with a stable current or
each combo module has had voltage source capable of inputting 4.000 to 20.000 mA or 1.000 to
trimmed to 10 ppm/F. To
5.000 V signal.
avoid temperature gradient 2) Set the input signal to 4.000 mA or 1.000 V as applicable.
effects and for best results,
always allow the internal 3) Using the Up/Down arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads
to stabilize before making
4.000 mA / 1.000 V.
your final calibration 4) Set the input signal to 20.000 mA or 5.000 V as applicable.
adjustments.
5) Using the Left/Right arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads
20.000 mA / 5.000 V.
INFO - The [ ]/[ ] keys are
used as a software Zero 6) Recheck step 2) No further adjustment is normally needed if the Zero is
potentiometer.
adjusted at exactly 4.0 mA.
Adjustments made when the
Shift LED is on are 7) Disconnect the calibrator signal and reconnect the transducer signal.
approximately ten times more
sensitive. 8) Press the [Diag] key to return to the selection screen.
Holding the arrow keys
longer than two seconds
speeds up the rate of Select Input/Output
adjustment. to Calibrate,
TIP - The Span adjustment
has no effect at 4mA or 1v.
Always adjust the Zero first
at exactly 4mA or 1v.
8.3.2. Calibrating an RTD Input Channel
Leaving the Diagnostic While the above screen is being displayed select a process variable which is
Mode - In the Select
Input/Output screen, press
assigned as an RTD probe input. For example, assuming a pulse type
the [Diag] key to return to the densitometer is installed, pressing [Meter] [1] [Density] [Temp] (or the input #
Display Mode (Diagnostic if known), selects the input channel used to process Meter Run #1's
LED will turn off). Densitometer integral RTD. Other key press combinations will work, and
[Density] [Meter] [1] [Temp] all mean the same. Pressing [Density] [Temp]
allows the user to scroll through all density temperature channels.
Now enter the selection by pressing [Display] and the following is displayed:
Dens #1 Temperature
Input# & Module 2-B1
Cal Overide 60.0
Calibrate Input ? _
ALL.71+ w 05/99 8-5

Enter the Calibrate Override value and answer [Y] to the 'Calibrate Input ?'
question and a screen similar to the following is displayed:
Dens#1 Deg.F 65.0

% Value 60.00
Resistance Value
Ohms 100.00
To Calibrate an RTD input channel proceed as follows :

INFO - Each input channel of 1) Disconnect the RTD probe and connect precision decade resistance box.
each combo module has had capable of inputting 25.00 to 150.00 Ohms as shown below.
trimmed to 10 ppm/F. To 2) Set the decade box to 25.00 Ohms.
avoid temperature gradient
effects and for best results, 3) Using the Up/Down arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads
always allow the internal 25.00 Ohms.
to stabilize before making 4) Set the decade box to 150.00 Ohms.
your final calibration
adjustments. 5) Using the Left/Right arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads
150.00 Ohms.
INFO - Installing the decade 6) Recheck step 2). No further adjustment is normally needed if the Zero is
box at the actual RTD probe adjusted at exactly 25 Ohms.
location provides maximum
accuracy, but can be 7) Disconnect the decade box and reconnect the RTD probe.
inconvenient. The errors
introduced by installing the 8) Press the [Diag] key to return to the selection screen.
decade box at the back panel
terminals of the flow
computer are approximately Select Input/Output
0.01% per 100 ohms of field to Calibrate,
wiring resistance.
TIP - The Span adjustment

has no effect at 4mA or 1v.
Always adjust the Zero first
at exactly 4mA or 1v.
Leaving the Diagnostic

Mode - In the Select
Input/Output screen, press
the [Diag] key to return to the
Display Mode (Diagnostic
LED will turn off).
Fig. 8-1. Figure Showing Calibration of RTD Input Channel
8-6 ALL.71+ w 05/99

8.3.3. Calibrating a 4 to 20 mA Digital to Analog Output

Each of the analog outputs can be calibrated by monitoring the loop current with
an accurate milliamp meter and setting the output current to 4.00 mA and 20.00
mA. For example to calibrate Analog Output #1 proceed as follows:
While the 'Select Input/Output' screen is displayed, press [Output] [1]
[Display]. The display shows:
Analog Output #1
0%=4mA, 100%=20mA
Override % 0.00
Calibrate Output ? _
Answer [Y] to the 'Calibrate Output ?' question and the display shows:
CAUTION!
At this point, the analog
output reflects the value of
Analog Output #1
the currently displayed 0%=4mA, 100%=20mA
override, not the assigned Override % 0.00
variable. The user must Override Now Active
ensure that any equipment
using the output signal will
not cause an unsafe
condition to arise or cause To calibrate the output channel follow these steps:
erroneous results to be
generated.
1) Connect an accurate milliamp meter in series with the load.
2) Input 0.00 % (4.00 mA) as the output override.
3) Using the Up/Down arrow keys adjust the output current until the milliamp
meter indicates 4.00 mA.
4) Input 100.00 % (20.00 mA) as the output override.
5) Using the Left/Right arrow key adjust the output current until the milliamp
meter indicates 20.00 mA.
6) Repeat steps 2) through 5) until no further improvement can be obtained.
7) Remove the milliamp meter and reconnect the load.
8) Press the [Diag] key to return to the selection screen.
Mode - In the Select Select Input/Output
Input/Output screen, press to Calibrate,
'Display Mode' (Diagnostic Press "Diag" to Exit
LED will turn off).
ALL.71+ w 05/99 8-7

8.3.4. Verifying the Operation of the Digital I/O Points

The digital I/O points can be manipulated as a group by pressing [Status] [1]
for digital points 1 through 12 or [Status] [2] for digital points 13 through 24.
Pressing [Status] will allow the user to scroll to either group. Press [Display]
and a screen similar to the following is displayed:
Digital#1 I/O Points

Input 001011001011
Overide 101010101010
Force To Output ? _
The second line shows the status of the I/O points frozen at the time that the
CAUTION! screen was displayed. The points are numbered left to right (1 to 12) with a '0'
After answering [Y], the indicating that a point is off and a '1' indicating that a point is on. The third line
digital outputs will reflect the shows the override bit values that will be forced to the output port when the user
value of the currently
answers [Y] to the 'Force To Output ?' question. A screen similar to the
displayed override, not the
assigned variable. The user following is displayed:
must ensure that any
equipment using the output
signal will not cause an Digital#1 I/O Points
unsafe condition to arise or Input 101110001101
cause erroneous results to Overide 101010101010
be generated.
Override Now Active
INFO - To avoid a hardware The override '1's and '0's can be changed at any time while the 'Override Now
conflict, only points that have Active' line is displayed. The input status displayed on the second line should
been assigned as outputs will
accept an override of 1; i.e.,
always agree with the green LEDs on the edge of the digital I/O module. Red
entering a 1 at an input LEDs lit indicate blown fuses on the digital I/O module.
position will be ignored and
displayed as a 0. Outputs on this I/O module that are assigned as totalizer outputs will stop
counting while the 'Override Now Active' line is displayed. Pulses to be output
are accumulated and are output at the maximum allowed rate as soon as the
[Diag] key is pressed.
Press [Diag] to return to the selection screen below:
Mode - In the Select Select Input/Output
Input/Output screen, press to Calibrate,
Display Mode (Diagnostic Press "Diag" to Exit
LED will turn off).
8-8 ALL.71+ w 05/99

9. Flow Computer Specifications
9.1. Environmental
Operating Temperature : q -15C to +65C
NOTICE! Storage Temperature : q -20C to +75C
Omni Flow Computers, Inc., Relative Humidity : q 80% non-condensing maximum
pursuant to a policy of
product development and
improvement, may make any
necessary changes to these
specifications without notice.
9.2. Electrical
Supply Voltage : q 120 VAC, 50-500 Hz; or 18-30 VDC, 10-20
Watts (excluding transducer loops)
q Optional: 220-250 VAC, 50-500 Hz; or 18-
30 VDC, 10-20 Watts (excluding transducer
loops)
Transducer Output Power : q 24 VDC at 400 mA+ for most
configurations (when AC powered)
Isolation : q All analog inputs and outputs are optically
isolated from computer logic supply
q Maximum common mode voltage on any
input or output is 250 VDC to chassis
ground.
9.3. Microprocessor CPU

Type : q Motorola MC68HC000FN16
q Clock Speed: 16 MHz, 0 wait state;
Throughput 4,000,000 instructions/sec
Coprocessor : q Motorola MC68HC881/82FN16B
q Clock Speed: 16 MHz; Throughput 50,000
floating point operations/sec
EPROM Memory : q 1 Mbyte. expandable to 2 Mbytes max.
RAM Memory : q 512 bytes standard; Expandable to 1
Mbytes max.
Real Time Clock : q Battery backed-up, time of day;
programmable interval down to 1 msec
q Maintains time during power loss
q Reports downtime on power-up
Logic Voltage : q 5 VDC
Over-voltage Protection : q Crowbar on power supply fires at 6.25 VDC
approx.
Transient Protection : q Transorbs on power supply module
RAM Memory Battery Backup : q 3.6 VDC Ni-Cad; rechargeable
Typical Memory Backup Period : q 30-60 days (with power removed)
ALL.71+ w 05/99 9-1

Chapter 9 Flow Computer Specifications
9.4. Backplane
Type : q Passive; configured with plug-in DIN
NOTICE! connectors
Omni Flow Computers, Inc., Number of I/O Module Slots : q Omni 3000: 4 slots
pursuant to a policy of q Omni 6000: 10 slots
specifications without notice. 9.5. Process Input/Output Combo Modules
ANALOG ADDITIONAL
TYPE INPUT #1 INPUT #2 INPUT #3 INPUT #4
OUTPUTS FEATURES
Two
A 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD 1-5v; 4-20mA; Flow Pulses Pipe Proving
4-20mA
1-5v; 4-20mA Frequency One

B 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD Pipe Proving
Flow Pulse Density 4-20mA
Two
E/D 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD Frequency Density
4-20mA
Pipe Proving
Two
E 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD Flow Pulses Double Chron. Proving
4-20mA Level A Pulse Fidelity
Two
H Honeywell DE Protocol
4-20mA
Two
HV Honeywell Multivariable DE Protocol
4-20mA
PORT #1 PORT #2
Six
SV RS-485 Multi-drop to Various Multivariable Transmitters
4-20mA
9.6. Flowmeter Pulse Inputs

Input Frequency : q DC to 15 kHz.
Positive Going Trigger Threshold : q +4.0 Volts
Negative Going Trigger Threshold : q +2.0 Volts
Input impedance : q 1 M Ohm
Configuration : q Differential input (E module inputs are
single ended referenced to DC ret.)
Common Mode Voltage : q 250 VDC to chassis ground
Pulse Fidelity Check : q Channels are continuously compared for
frequency and sequence.
E Module Only : q Complete failure of either A or B channel
will not effect totalizing
q Simultaneous noise pulses are rejected
with 85% certainty
9-2 ALL.71+ w 05/99

9.7. Detector Switch Inputs

NOTICE! Input Type : q Voltage
Omni Flow Computers, Inc.,
Gating Transition : q Application of voltage starts and stops
product development and proves.
improvement, may make any Minimum Time Pulse High : q 1 msec
specifications without notice. Minimum Time Pulse Low : q 2 seconds
Input Impedance : q 4.7 k Ohms
Input On Voltage : q >10 V On, <4 VDC+ Off (referenced to DC
Power Return)
Debounce : q 2 sec in Software
9.8. Detector Switch Inputs of E Combo

Module
(Double Chronometry)
q Driven by open collector transistor or Normally Open

switch.
q Debounce capacitor may be needed with switch type
detectors.
9.9. Analog Inputs

Input Type : q 4 - 20 mA or 1-5 V
Input Impedance : q 1 MegOhm (250 Ohms) (4-20 mA range
selected by installing shunt resistor)
Resolution : q 14 Binary Bits, w/ 500 msec sample
Linearity : q 0.020% F.S. typical 1 Digit
Temperature Drift : q Less than 15 ppm/OF
9.10. RTD Inputs

RTD Configuration : q 4-wire Bridge
RTD Resistance : q 100 Ohm @ 32F
Excitation Current : q 3.45 mA Nominal
Maximum Field Wiring Resistance : q 1k Ohm per wire
Resolution : q 0.008 Ohms
Temperature Drift : q Less than 15 ppm/F
Linearity : q 0.020% F.S. typical 1 Digit
ALL.71+ w 05/99 9-3

9.11. Analog Outputs

Resolution : q 12 Binary Bits
NOTICE! Output : q Current source 4-20 mA (referenced to
Omni Flow Computers, Inc., transducer power return terminal)
pursuant to a policy of Common Mode : q 250 Volts to chassis ground
improvement, may make any Max./Min. Working Loop Voltage : q 30 VDC to 18 VDC
necessary changes to these Loop Resistance : q 900 Ohm with 24 VDC Power
q 1.2 k Ohm with 30 VDC Power
Update Rate : q Each 500 milliseconds
9.12. Control Outputs/Status Inputs

(12 per module)
Configuration : q Open emitter Darlington transistor source
(Referenced to transducer power return
terminal)
Current Capacity : q 100 mA max., 500 mA per module
Output Voltage : q +DC - 1 V Nominal
Common Mode : q 250 Volts to chassis ground
Input Impedance : q 4.7 k Ohms in series with 2 LEDs
Input Voltage : q Input voltages > 8 to < DC voltage at back
panel DC terminal block, typically 24 VDC,
will be recognized as on
q Input voltages < +2 V will be recognized as
off
LEDs : q Operating and Fuse Indicators on each
channel
Scan Rate : q Outputs may be pulsed at 50Hz Maximum
9-4 ALL.71+ w 05/99

9.13. Multi-bus Serial I/O Interface
9.13.1. RS-232 Compatible

(2 per Module)
Serial Data Output Voltage : q 7.5 Volts typical
Recommended Load Impedance : q 1.5 k Ohm
Short Circuit Current : q 10 mA limited
Input Low Threshold : q Vl = -3.0 Volts
Input High Threshold : q Vh = +3.0 Volts
Baud Rate : q Software selectable
q Range 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 k bps
Common Mode Voltage : q 250 Volts to chassis ground
LEDs : q Indicator LEDs for each channel input,
output and handshaking signals
9.13.2. RS-485
(2 per Module)
Serial Data Output Voltage : q 5 Volts differential driver
Recommended Load Impedance : q 120 Ohm
Short Circuit Current : q 20 mA
Input Low Threshold : q 0.8 Volts
Baud Rate : q Software selectable
q Range 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 k bps
Common Mode Voltage : q 250 Volts to chassis ground
LEDs : q Indicator LEDs for each channel input,
output and handshaking signals
9.14. Operator Keypad

Keypad Characteristics : q 34-key, domed membrane, with tactile and
audio feedback
Material : q Autotex 2 Hard coat Polyester Film
Data Entry Lockout : q Internal switch and software passwords
Key Debounce : q Software controlled
9.15. LCD Display

Display : q 4 lines of 20 Characters
q 5 x 8 Dot Matrix
Character Height : q 4.75 mm
Display Data : q Alphanumeric, 80 characters
Backlight : q Green/Yellow LED
q Viewing angle, contrast and backlight
controlled from keypad
ALL.71+ w 05/99 9-5

9.16. Electromechanical Counters

Quantity : q Three, with programmable function
NOTICE! Display : q 6-digit, non-resetable
Omni Flow Computers, Inc., Character Height : q 5 mm
product development and Maximum Count Rate : q 10 counts per second
9.17. Operating Mode Indicator LEDs
Quantity : q Four
Dual Color : q Red/Green
Indication : q Active Alarm LED
Green: to indicate acknowledged existing
alarm
Red: to indicate new, unacknowledged,
existing alarm
q Diagnostic LED
Green: to indicate Diagnostic or
Calibration Mode is active
Red: to indicate password is active
q Program LED
Green: to indicate Program or
Configuration Mode is active
Red: to indicate password is active
q Alpha Shift LED
Green: to indicate Alpha Shift Lock
Mode is active
Red: to indicate alpha shift next key only
9.18. Security
Hardware : q Optional lock on housing and internal
keyboard program lockout
Software : q Multi-level password control
9-6 ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 2C
User Manual
Basic Operation
Turbine / Positive Displacement

Liquid Flow Metering Systems
with Meter Factor Linearization
Effective May 1999

1. Basic Operating Features ...................................................................................... 1-1

1.1. Overview of the Keypad Functions..................................................................... 1-1
1.2. Operating Modes.................................................................................................. 1-2
1.2.1. Display Mode ........................................................................................................1-2
1.2.2. Keypad Program Mode..........................................................................................1-2
1.2.3. Diagnostic and Calibration Mode ...........................................................................1-2
1.2.4. Field Entry Mode ...................................................................................................1-2
1.3. Special Keys......................................................................................................... 1-4
1.3.1. Display/Enter (Help) Key .......................................................................................1-4
1.3.2. Up/Down Arrow Keys []/[] .................................................................................1-4
1.3.3. Left/Right Arrow Keys []/[]................................................................................1-4
1.3.4. Alpha Shift Key and LED .......................................................................................1-4
1.3.5. Program/Diagnostic Key [Prog/Diag] .....................................................................1-5
1.3.6. Space/Clear (Cancel/Ack) Key ..............................................................................1-5
1.4. Adjusting the Display........................................................................................... 1-5
1.5. Clearing and Viewing Alarms .............................................................................. 1-6
1.5.1. Acknowledging (Clearing) Alarms ..........................................................................1-6
1.5.2. Viewing Active and Historical Alarms.....................................................................1-6
1.5.3. Alarm Conditions Caused by Static Discharges .....................................................1-6
1.6. Computer Totalizing............................................................................................. 1-6
2. PID Control Functions............................................................................................ 2-1

2.1. Overview of PID Control Functions..................................................................... 2-1
2.2. PID Control Displays ............................................................................................ 2-2
2.3. Changing the PID Control Operating Mode........................................................ 2-3
2.3.1. Manual Valve Control ............................................................................................2-3
2.3.2. Automatic Valve Control........................................................................................2-3
2.3.3. Local Setpoint Select.............................................................................................2-4
2.3.4. Remote Setpoint Select.........................................................................................2-4
2.3.5. Changing the Secondary Variable Setpoint............................................................2-4
2.4. PID Control Remote Setpoint .............................................................................. 2-4
2.5. Using the PID Startup and Shutdown Ramping Functions ............................... 2-5
2.6. Startup Ramp/Shutdown Ramp/Minimum Output Percent................................ 2-5
2.7. PID Control Tuning .............................................................................................. 2-6
2.7.1. Estimating The Required Controller Gain For Each Process Loop .........................2-6
2.7.2. Estimating The Repeats / Minutes And Fine Tuning The Gain ...............................2-7
ii 22/26.71+ w 05/99
Volume 2c Basic Operation
3. Computer Batching Operations............................................................................. 3-1

3.1. Introduction...........................................................................................................3-1
3.2. Batch Status .........................................................................................................3-1
3.3. Batch Schedule Stack..........................................................................................3-2
3.3.1. Empty Batch Schedule Stacks .............................................................................. 3-2
3.3.2. Manually Editing the Batch Schedule Stack .......................................................... 3-2
3.4. Ending a Batch .....................................................................................................3-3
3.4.1. Using the Product Change Strobes to End a Batch ............................................... 3-3
3.4.2. Manually Ending a Batch from the Keypad............................................................ 3-3
3.5. Recalculate and Reprint a Previous Batch Ticket..............................................3-4
3.6. Batch Preset Counters.........................................................................................3-5
3.6.1. Batch Preset Flags................................................................................................ 3-5
3.6.2. Batch Warning Flags ............................................................................................ 3-5
3.7. Adjusting the Size of a Batch ..............................................................................3-5
3.8. Automatic Batch Changes Based on Product Interface Detection ...................3-6
4. Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change.............................................................. 4-1

4.1. Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change Alarm Flag.........................................4-1
4.2. Delayed Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change Alarm Flag ..........................4-1
4.3. Determining the Gravity Rate of Change Limits .................................................4-2
5. Meter Factors .......................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1. Entering a Base Meter Factor Curve ...................................................................5-1
5.2. Changing Meter Factors.......................................................................................5-2
5.3. Changing Meter Factors for the Running Product .............................................5-3
6. Proving Functions................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1. Full-Sized Provers (Unidirectional and Bi-directional) .......................................6-1
6.2. Brooks Compact Prover.......................................................................................6-2
6.2.1. Proving Reports for Brooks Compact Provers ...................................................... 6-3
6.3. Other Proving Reports .........................................................................................6-3
6.4. Official and Unofficial Prove Results...................................................................6-4
22/26.71+ w 05/99 iii

7. Printed Reports....................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1. Fixed Format Reports .......................................................................................... 7-1
7.2. Default Report Templates and Custom Reports ................................................ 7-2
7.3. Printing Reports ................................................................................................... 7-2
7.4. Audit Trail ............................................................................................................. 7-3
7.4.1. Audit Trail Report ..................................................................................................7-3
7.4.2. Modbus Port Passwords and the Audit Trail Report .............................................7-4
8. Index of Display Variables ..................................................................................... 8-1
Figures of Volume 2
Fig. 1-1. Flow Computer Front Panel Keypad....................................................................................1-1
Fig. 1-2. Block Diagram Showing the Keypad and Display Modes .....................................................1-3
Fig. 2-1. Typical PID Control Application - Single Loop .....................................................................2-1
iv 22/26.71+ w 05/99
1. Basic Operating Features
1.1. Overview of the Keypad Functions

INFO - Within the document Thirty-four keys are available. Eight special function keys and twenty-six
the following convention is dedicated to the alphanumeric characters A through Z, 0 through 9 and various
used to describe various key
press sequences: Individual
punctuation and math symbols.
keys are shown in bold The [Display/Enter] key, located at the bottom right, deserves special mention.
enclosed in brackets and
separated by a space. This key is always used to execute a sequence of key presses. It is not unlike
Although not always that the Enter key of a personal computer. Except when entering numbers in a
indicated, it is assumed for field, the maximum number of keys that can be used in a key press sequence is
the rest of this document that four (not counting the [Display/Enter] key).
the [Display/Enter] key is
used at the end of every key
press sequence to enter a
command.
Fig. 1-1. Flow Computer Front Panel Keypad
22/26.71+ w 05/99 1-1

Chapter 1 Basic Operating Features
Key words such as Density, Mass and Temp appear over each of the
alphanumeric keys. These key words indicate what data will be accessed when
included in a key press sequence. Pressing [Net] [Meter] [1] for instance will
display net flow rates and total accumulations for Meter Run #1. Pressing the
[Net] key causes net flow rates and total accumulations for all active meter runs
to be displayed. In many instances, the computer attempts to recognize similar
key press sequences as meaning the same thing; i.e., [Meter] [1] [Net] and
[Net] [Meter] [1] all cause the net volume data for Meter Run #1 to be
displayed. In most cases, more data is available on a subject than can be
displayed on four lines. The [ ]/[ ] (up/down) arrow keys allow you to scroll
through multiple screens.
1.2. Operating Modes

Keyboard operation and data displayed in the LCD display depends on which of
the 3 major display and entry modes are selected.
1.2.1. Display Mode

This is the normal mode of operation. Live meter run data is displayed and
updated every 200 msec. Data cannot be changed while in this mode.
1.2.2. Keypad Program Mode

Configuration data needed by the flow computer can be viewed and changed
via the keypad while in this mode. When the Program Mode is entered by
pressing the [Prog] key, the Program LED glows green. This changes to red
when a valid password is entered.
1.2.3. Diagnostic and Calibration Mode

The diagnostic and calibration features of the computer are accessed by
pressing the [Alpha Shift] [Diag] keys. This mode allows you to check and
adjust the calibration of each input and output point. The Diagnostic LED
glows green until a valid password is entered.
1.2.4. Field Entry Mode

You are in this mode whenever the data entry cursor is visible, which is anytime
the user is entering a number or password while in the Program Mode or
Diagnostic Mode.
1-2 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Fig. 1-2. Block Diagram Showing the Keypad and Display Modes
22/26.71+ w 05/99 1-3

1.3. Special Keys
1.3.1. Display/Enter (Help) Key

This key is located bottom-right on the keypad. Pressing once while in the Field
Entry Mode will store the data entered in the field to memory. Pressing twice
within one second will cause the context-sensitive Help to be displayed. The
Help displays contain useful information regarding available variable
assignments and selections. When in other modes, use it at the end of a
keypress sequence to enter the command.
1.3.2. Up/Down Arrow Keys [ ]/[ ]

These keys are located top-center on the keypad.
When in the Display Mode, the [ ]/[ ] keys are used to scroll through data
relevant to a particular selection.
When in the Program Mode, they are used to scroll through data and position
the cursor on data to be viewed or changed.
In the Diagnostic Mode, The up/down arrow keys are initially used to position
the cursor within the field of data being changed. Once you select an input or
output to calibrate or adjust, the up/down arrow keys are used as a software
zero potentiometer.
1.3.3. Left/Right Arrow Keys [ ]/[ ]

These keys are located top-center on the keypad; to the left and right
respectively of the Up/Down Arrow Keys.
The [ ]/[ ] keys have no effect while in the Display Mode. When in Program
Mode, they are used to position the cursor within a data field.
In the Diagnostic Mode, they are initially used to position the cursor within the
field of data to be changed. Once you select an input or output to calibrate or
adjust, the left/right arrow keys are used as software span potentiometer.
1.3.4. Alpha Shift Key and LED

This key is located top-right on the keypad.
Pressing the [Alpha Shift] key while in the Field Entry Mode causes the Alpha
Shift LED above the key to glow green, indicating that the next valid key press
will be interpreted as its shifted value. The Alpha Shift LED is then turned off
automatically when the next valid key is pressed.
Pressing the [Alpha Shift] key twice causes the Alpha Shift LED to glow red
and the shift lock to be active. All valid keys are interpreted as their shifted
value until the [Alpha Shift] key is pressed or the [Display/Enter] key is
pressed.
When in the Calibrate Mode, zero and span adjustments made via the arrow
keys are approximately ten times more sensitive when the Alpha Shift LED is
on.
1-4 22/26.71+ w 05/99

1.3.5. Program/Diagnostic Key [Prog/Diag]

This key is located top-left on the keypad.
While in the Display Mode, pressing this key changes the operating mode to
either the Program or Diagnostic Mode, depending on whether the Alpha Shift
LED is on. When in other modes, it cancels the current entry and goes back
one menu level, eventually returning to the Display Mode.
1.3.6. Space/Clear (Cancel/Ack) Key

This key is located bottom-left on the keypad.
Static Discharges - It has Pressing this key while in the Display Mode acknowledges any new alarms that
been found that applications occur. The Active Alarm LED will also change from red to green indicating an
of electrostatic discharges
may cause the Active Alarm
alarm condition exists but has been acknowledged.
LED to glow red. Pressing
When in the Field Entry Mode, unshifted, it causes the current variable field
the [Space/Clear] key will
acknowledge the alarm and being changed to be cleared, leaving the cursor at the beginning of the field
turn off the red alarm light. awaiting new data to be entered. With the Alpha Shift LED illuminated, it
causes the key to be interpreted as a space or blank.
When in all other modes, it cancels the current key press sequence by flushing
the key input buffer.
1.4. Adjusting the Display

Once the computer is mounted in its panel you may need to adjust the viewing
angle and backlight intensity of the LCD display for optimum performance. You
may need to re-adjust the brightness setting of the display should the computer
be subjected to transient electrical interference.
While in the Display Mode (Program LED and Diagnostic LED off), press
[Setup] [Display] and follow the displayed instructions:
Use Up/Down Arrows

To Adjust Contrast;
Left, Right Arrows
To Adjust Backlight
22/26.71+ w 05/99 1-5

1.5. Clearing and Viewing Alarms

TIP - Alarm flags are latched
while the red LED is on. To
avoid missing intermittent 1.5.1. Acknowledging (Clearing) Alarms
alarms, always press
[Alarms] [Display] to view New alarms cause the Active Alarm LED to glow red. Pressing the
alarms before pressing [Cancel/Ack] key (bottom left), or setting Boolean Point 1712 via a digital I/O
[Cancel/Ack]. point or via a Modbus command, will acknowledge the alarm and cause the
Active Alarm LED to change to green. The LED will go off when the alarm
condition clears.
1.5.2. Viewing Active and Historical Alarms

To view all active alarms, press [Alarms] [Display] and use the [ ]/[ ] arrow
keys to scroll through all active alarms.
Active Alarms
Temperature #1 Hi Hi
Pressure #2 Low
Prove Temp (L) Hi Hi
Prove Temp (R) Hi Hi
The last 500 time-tagged alarms that have occurred are always available for
printing (see Historical Alarm Snapshot Report in this chapter).
1.5.3. Alarm Conditions Caused by Static Discharges

It has been found that applications of electrostatic discharges may cause the
Active Alarm LED to glow red. Pressing the [Space/Clear] key will acknowledge
the alarm and turn off the red alarm light.
1.6. Computer Totalizing

Two types of totalizers are provided: 1) Three front panel electromechanical
and non-resetable; and 2) Software totalizers maintained in computer memory.
The electromechanical totalizers can be programmed to count in any units via
the Miscellaneous Setup Menu (Volume 3). The batch and daily based software
totalizers are automatically printed, saved and reset at the end of each batch or
the beginning of each contract day. Daily flow or time weighted averages are
also printed, saved and reset at the end of each day. Batch flow weighted
averages are also available in liquid application flow computers. Software
cumulative totalizers are also provided and can only be reset via the Password
Maintenance Menu (Volume 3). View the software totalizers by pressing
[Gross], [Net] or [Mass]. Pressing [Meter] [n] [Gross], [Net] or [Mass] will
display the software totalizer(s) for Meter Run n.
1-6 22/26.71+ w 05/99

2. PID Control Functions
2.1. Overview of PID Control Functions

Four independent control loops are available. Each loop is capable of
controlling a primary variable (usually flow rate) with a secondary override
variable (usually meter back pressure or delivery pressure).
The primary and secondary set points can be adjusted locally via the keypad
and remotely via a communication link. In addition, the primary set point can be
adjusted via an analog input to the computer.
Contact closures can be used to initiate the startup and shutdown ramp function
which limits the control output slew rate during startup and shutdown conditions.
A high or low 'error select' function causes automatic override control by the
secondary variable in cases where it is necessary either to maintain a minimum
secondary process value or limit the secondary process maximum value.
Local manual control of the control output and bumpless transfer between
automatic and manual control is incorporated.
Fig. 2-1. Typical PID Control Application - Single Loop
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-1

Chapter 2 PID Control Functions
2.2. PID Control Displays

INFO - Select PID Loop 1 While in the Display Mode press [Control] [n] [Display]. Press the Up/Down
through 4 by entering n as arrow keys to display the following screens:
1, 2, 3 or 4.
Screen #1
PID #1 VALVE STATUS

Open 50.00
Indicates which parameter is Auto/Manual Auto
being controlled; primary or Primary Controlling
secondary
Screen #2
PID #1 PRIMARY
Measurement 20.00
Shows actual primary set
point being used in Setpoint 20.00
engineering units
Screen #3
PID #1 SECONDARY
Measurement 20.00
Shows actual secondary set
point being used in Setpoint 20.00
engineering units
Screen #4
INFO - Data such as set
points or operating mode
cannot be changed while in PID #1 SET POINT
the Display Mode. Source is Local
Remote S.P. Input
Value is 20.00
2-2 22/26.71+ w 05/99

2.3. Changing the PID Control Operating

Mode
INFO - Select PID Loop 1 Press [Prog] [Control] [n] to display the following screen:
through 4 by entering n as
1, 2, 3 or 4.
To access the next two
screens you must enter the
PID#1 OPERATING MODE
[Y] to select Manual Valve or Manual Valve(Y/N) N
Local Setpoint even if a Y is Local Set.Pt(Y/N) N
already displayed. Sec Set.Pt 750.0
To cancel the Manual Mode
or Local Setpoint Mode, enter
[N].
2.3.1. Manual Valve Control

To change to manual valve control enter [Y] at the 'Manual Valve (Y/N)' prompt
and the following screen is displayed:
PID #1 MANUAL VALVE

Primary Variable Up/Down Arrow to Adj
(Measurement in engineering Measurement 20.00
units)
Open % 50.00
The switch from Auto to Manual is bumpless. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to
open or close the valve. Press [Prog] once to return to the previous screen.
Notice you are now in Manual

PID#1 OPERATING MODE
Valve Control Manual Valve (Y/N) Y
Local Set.Pt(Y/N) N
Sec Set.Pt 750.0
2.3.2. Automatic Valve Control

To change from manual to automatic valve control, enter [N] at the 'Manual
Valve (Y/N)' prompt. The switch to automatic is bumpless if local setpoint is
selected.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-3

2.3.3. Local Setpoint Select

Enter [Y] at the 'Local Set. Pt. (Y/N)' prompt and the following screen is
displayed:
PID#1 LOCAL SETPOINT

Primary Variable Up/Down Arrow to Adj
(Measurement in engineering Measurement 20.00
units) Setpoint 20.00
The switch from Remote to Local is bumpless. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to
increase or decrease the setpoint. Press [Prog] once to return to the previous
screen.
Notice you are now in

Automatic with Local Valve PID#1 OPERATING MODE
Control Manual Valve(Y/N) N
Local Set.Pt(Y/N) Y
Change the setpoint of the
Sec Set.Pt 750.0
secondary variable here
2.3.4. Remote Setpoint Select

To change from local setpoint to remote setpoint, enter [N] at the 'Local Set.
Pt.(Y/N)' prompt. The switch to remote setpoint may not be bumpless,
depending upon the remote set point source.
2.3.5. Changing the Secondary Variable Setpoint

Move the cursor to the bottom line of the above display, press [Clear] and then
enter the new setpoint.
2.4. PID Control Remote Setpoint

As described above, the PID control loop can be configured to accept either a
IMPORTANT! local setpoint or a remote setpoint value for the primary variable. The remote
You must assign a remote setpoint is derived from an analog input (usually 4-20 mA). This input is scaled
setpoint input even if one will in engineering units and would usually come from another device such as an
not be used. The 4-20mA RTU. High/Low limits are applied to the remote setpoint signal to eliminate
scaling of this input
determines the scaling of the possible problems of over or under speeding a turbine meter (see Volume 1,
primary controlled variable. Chapter 8 for more details).
2-4 22/26.71+ w 05/99

2.5. Using the PID Startup and Shutdown

Ramping Functions
These functions are enabled when a startup and/or shutdown ramp rate
between 0 and 99 percent is entered (see section PID Setup in Volume 3,
Chapter 2).
Commands are provided to Start the valve ramping open, Shutdown to the
minimum percent open valve or Stop the flow by closing the valve
immediately once it has been ramped to the minimum percent open.
These commands are accessed using the keypad by pressing [Prog] [Batch]
[Meter] [n], which will display the following:
Mtr1 Batch Start Y ?

Shutdown to Min% ?
Batch Stop ?
Print & Reset ?
2.6. Startup Ramp/Shutdown Ramp/Minimum

Output Percent
Inputs are provided for startup/shutdown ramp rates and minimum output %
settings. When these startup/shutdown ramp rates are applied the control
output, movements will be limited to the stated % movement per second (see
Volume 3). On receipt of a shutdown signal, the output will ramp to the
minimum output % for topoff purposes.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-5

2.7. PID Control Tuning

Individual control of gain and integral action are provided for both the primary
IMPORTANT! and secondary control loops. Tune the primary variable loop first by setting the
PID Control Tuning - The secondary setpoint high or low enough to stop the secondary control loop from
primary variable must be taking control. Adjust the primary gain and integral repeats per minutes for
tuned first. When tuning the stable control. Reset the primary and secondary set points to allow control on
primary variable loop, you
must set the secondary the secondary variable without interference from the primary variable. Adjust
setpoint high or low enough the secondary gain and integral repeats per minute for stable control of the
to the point where it will not secondary variable.
take control. Otherwise, the
PID loop will become very
unstable and virtually
impossible to tune. Adjust the 2.7.1. Estimating The Required Controller Gain For
primary gain and integral Each Process Loop
repeats per minute until you
achieve stable control. Each process loop will exhibit a gain function. A change in control valve output
Likewise, when tuning the
secondary setpoint, the
will produce a corresponding change in each of the process variables. The ratio
primary must be set so it of these changes represents the gain of the loop (For example: If a 10 %
cannot interfere. Once you change in control output causes a 10% change in the process variable, the loop
have achieved stable control gain is 1.0. If a 10 % change in control output causes a 20 % change in process
of both loops, you can then
variable, the loop gain is 2.0). To provide stable control the gain of each loop
enter the setpoints
established for each loop at with the controller included must be less than 1.0. In practice the controller gain
normal operating conditions. is usually adjusted so that the total loop gain is between 0.6 and 0.9.
Unfortunately the gain of each loop can vary with operating conditions. For
example: A butterfly control valve may have a higher gain when almost closed
to when it is almost fully open. This means that in many cases the controller
gain must be set low so that stable control is achieved over the required range
of control.
To estimate the gain of each loop proceed as follows for the required range of
operating conditions:
(1) In manual, adjust the control output for required flowing conditions and
note process variable values.
(2) Make a known percentage step change of output (i.e., from 20% to 22%
equals a 10% change).
(3) Note the percentage change of each process variable (i.e., 100 m3/hr to
110 m3/hr equals a 10% change).
INFO - The primary gain (1) Primary Gain Estimate = 0.75 / (Primary Loop Gain).
interacts with the secondary
gain. The actual secondary (2) Secondary Gain = 0.75 / (Secondary Loop Gain x Primary Gain
gain factor is the product of Estimate).
the primary gain and
secondary gain factors.
2-6 22/26.71+ w 05/99

2.7.2. Estimating The Repeats / Minutes And Fine

Tuning The Gain
(1) Set the 'repeats / minute' to 40 for both primary and secondary loops.
(2) Adjust set points so that only the primary (sec) loop is trying to control.
(3) While controlling the primary (sec) variable, increase the primary (sec)
gain until some controlled oscillation is observed.
(4) Set the primary (sec) 'repeats/minute' to equal 0.75 / (Period of the
oscillation in minutes).
(5) Set the primary (sec) gain to 75% of the value needed to make the loop
oscillate.
(6) Repeat (2) through (5) for the secondary variable loop.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-7

3. Computer Batching Operations
3.1. Introduction
A complete set of software batch totalizers and flow weighted averages are also
provided in addition to the daily and cumulative totalizers. These totalizers and
averages can be printed, saved and reset automatically, based on the number
of barrels or cubic meters delivered, change of product or on demand. The
Omni flow computer can keep track of 4 independent meter runs running any
combination of 8 different products. Flowmeter runs can be combined and
treated as a station. The batch totalizers and batch flow weighted averages are
printed, saved and reset at the end of each batch. The next batch starts
automatically when the pulses from the flowmeter exceed the meter active
threshold frequency. Pulses received up to that point which do not exceed the
threshold frequency are still included in the new batch, but the batch start time
and date are not captured until the threshold is exceeded.
3.2. Batch Status

The batch status appears on the Status Report and is defined as either:
o In Progress ------- Batch is in progress with the meter active.
o Suspended ------- Batch is in progress with the meter not active.
o Batch Ended ----- Batch End has been received, meter not active.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 3-1

Chapter 3 Computer Batching Operations
3.3. Batch Schedule Stack

When running independent products on each meter run, each flowmeter run has
a batch schedule stack which stores the setup information for up to 5 future
batches. The setup information is popped off the appropriate stack by the
computer at the beginning of each batch. When all meter runs are running the
same product, the individual meter run batch schedule stacks are combined and
organized to store up to the next 23 future station batches.
3.3.1. Empty Batch Schedule Stacks

TIP - When ending a batch The flow computer will use the batch setup data for the batch last completed if
with flow occurring, the meters batch schedule stack is empty at the beginning of a new next batch.
remember that the next batch
will start immediately after
you end the current one. You
should check that the batch 3.3.2. Manually Editing the Batch Schedule Stack
schedule contains the correct
setup information for that Pressing [Prog] [Batch] [Setup] or [Prog] [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Setup]
batch. displays the screen similar to that shown below. The screen shows information
regarding the current running batch. The 16 character batch ID number appears
on all reports and can be edited at any time during a batch. The starting size of
the batch in net barrels is used to determine the value of the batch preset
counter. It can be changed at any time during a batch and the batch preset
counter will be adjusted accordingly.
MTR #1 CURRENT BATCH

ID: Butane 5010
Running Product 1
Size BBl 100
By using the [ ]/[ ] keys you can scroll through and modify any one of the 6
batch setups (in Independent Batch Stack) and 24 (in Common Batch Stack) in
the Batch Schedule Stack.
M1:1 I=Ins D=Del ?

ID: EP-001-021-BUT
Product to Run? 0
Size BBl 0
The number on the left on Line 1 is the flowmeter run number and stack
position; i.e., M2:1 will be the next batch setup run for Meter #2, M2:2 the next
and so on. Batch setups can be inserted before the displayed position or the
displayed setup and can be deleted by entering I or D on Line 1. Press
[Prog] twice to return to the Display Mode.
3-2 22/26.71+ w 05/99

3.4. Ending a Batch

A batch in progress is ended by setting the appropriate End Batch Flag in the
computers database. This can be done manually from the keypad, on a timed
basis, through a digital I/O point or via a Modbus command.
3.4.1. Using the Product Change Strobes to End a

Batch
Batches can be ended and products changed by using the Product Change
Strobes (Boolean 1707 and 1747 through 1750). Setting any of these Boolean
commands, either through a digital input or writing it through a Modbus port,
will cause the flow computer to:
(1) End the batch in progress and print a batch report.
(2) Determine what the next product to run will be by decoding the binary
coded Product Select Input flags (Booleans 1743 through 1746).
(3) Write the number of the selected product into the next batch stack
position.
(4) Pop the batch setup off the stack and start a new batch.
3.4.2. Manually Ending a Batch from the Keypad

Press the [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n] or [Prog] [Meter] [n] [Batch] keys and a
screen similar to the following will be displayed:
METER #1 BATCH
Print & Reset ?
Pressing [Prog] [Batch] and [Enter] (i.e., not specifying a meter run) will
display the following:
STATION BATCH
Print & Reset ?
Enter [Y] to the Print & Reset ? question and enter your password when
requested. The batch will be ended immediately and a Batch Report printed out.
The above displays will vary if the PID ramping functions are enabled (see the
following section).
22/26.71+ w 05/99 3-3

3.5. Recalculate and Reprint a Previous

Batch Ticket
Recalculating a Previous To recalculate and reprint a previous batch, you must do the following:
Batch - For more information
on this topic, see Technical
Bulletin TB-980202 (1) Press [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n] [Enter] (n = meter run number).
Recalculating a Previous The Omni LCD screen will display:
Batch within the Flow
Computer included in
Volume 5.
METER #1 BATCH
Print & Reset ?
Select Prev# Batch 1
Enter API60 .0
Enter SG60 .0000
Enter %S&W .00
Recalculate&Print?
(2) Select which previous batch you wish to recalculate. The Omni stores
the last 4 completed batches numbered as:
1 = last batch completed

to
4 = oldest batch completed.
(3) Press [ ] to scroll down to Select Prev # Batch and enter a number
between 1 and 4, depending upon which batch is to be recalculated. The
flow computer moves the selected previous batch data to the previous
batch data points within the database (see explanation in Technical
Bulletin TB-980202)
(4) Enter Password when requested. Scroll to either Enter API60 or
Enter SG60. Type in a valid value and press [Enter].
(5) Scroll to Recalculate & Print?. Press [Y] and then [Enter].
At this time the flow computer will recalculate the batch data and send the
report to the printer and the Historical Batch Report Buffer in RAM memory.
The default batch report shows the batch number as XXXXXX-XX where the
number ahead of the - is the batch number and the number after the - is the
number of times that the batch has been recalculated.
3-4 22/26.71+ w 05/99

3.6. Batch Preset Counters

INFO - In order to activate Independent batch preset counters are provided for each meter run when in the
the batch preset counter you Independent Batch Stack Mode. Each batch preset counter is pre-loaded with
must have entered a batch
size other than zero before
the batch size taken from the appropriate batch schedule stack. The counter is
the batch started (i.e., automatically reduced by the meter runs net flow. Press [Batch] [Preset]
starting with a batch size of [Meter] [n] or [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Preset] to see the current value of the
zero disables the preset counter for a particular meter run:
counter feature). Batch
presets can be selected for
gross, net or mass units (see
Configuring the Meter Meter#1 Batch Preset
Station in Volume 3, barrels 49978
Chapter 2).
Mtr#1 Preset Warning
barrels 100
3.6.1. Batch Preset Flags

The batch preset flags are Boolean variables within the database which are
automatically set whenever the appropriate batch preset counter reaches zero.
They are available for use in programmable Boolean equations and digital I/O
functions.
3.6.2. Batch Warning Flags

The batch warning flags are Booleans within the database which are
automatically set whenever the appropriate batch preset counter is equal or less
than the programmed batch warning value. It is available for use in
programmable Boolean equations and digital I/O functions.
3.7. Adjusting the Size of a Batch

INFO - The batch preset The size of a running batch may change several times during the progress of
counter can be selected for the batch. This is usually due to product take-off or injection upstream of the
gross, net or mass units (see
Configuring the Meter
metering station. While in the Display Mode, press [Prog] and then [Batch]
Station in Volume 3, [Preset] [Meter] [n] or [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Preset]. This will show the
Chapter 2). following screen.
ADJUST #1 BATCH SIZE

Enter Amount to
Adjust 0
Size Now 100000
Press [Clear] and enter the number of barrels/cubic meters (lbs or kgs) that you
wish to add to the size of the batch. Enter a minus number to reduce the size of
the batch.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 3-5

3.8. Automatic Batch Changes Based on

Product Interface Detection
Automatic batch changes can be made by the computer by monitoring the rate
of change of the products specific gravity/density during the final moments of a
batch. For example, a Boolean point can be programmed to be active whenever
the specific gravity rate of change flag is set and the batch warning flag is set.
This Boolean can then be used to cause a batch end command. Specific
gravity disturbances which may occur during the batch will be alarmed but will
not be used to end a batch unless the batch warning flag has been reached.
3-6 22/26.71+ w 05/99

4. Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change
4.1. Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change

Alarm Flag
SG & Dens - Delta The specific gravity/density rate of change alarm flag is a flag within the
Specific Gravity (SG) refers database which is set whenever the rate of change of the station gravity/density
to U.S. customary units and
is measured per barrel. Delta
with respect to flow (SG or Dens see sidebar) exceeds the preset limit. It is
Density (Dens) refers to used to detect a change in flowing product and is available for use in
metric units and is measured programmable Boolean equations and digital I/O functions.
in kilograms per cubic meter.
The SG (or Dens) function
is the smallest difference in
specific gravity (or density) 4.2. Delayed Specific Gravity/Density Rate of
between two products that
will form the product Change Alarm Flag
interface.
In many cases the densitometer or gravitometer used to detect the product
interface is mounted many Bbls (m3 or liter3) ahead of the valve manifold used
to cut the product and end the batch. A second gravity/density rate of change
flag which is delayed by the amount of line pack Bbls or m3 provides an
accurate indication of when the interface reaches the actual valve manifold.
Next Interface Due

Barrels 156
The 'Next Interface Due' counter shows the number of Bbls or m3 of line pack
remaining before the leading edge of the product interface reaches the valve
manifold. A minus number indicates that the leading edge has passed. Up to
three interfaces can be tracked between the interface detector and the valve
manifold.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 4-1

Chapter 4 Specific Gravity Rate of Change
4.3. Determining the Gravity Rate of Change

Limits
SG & Dens - Delta To accurately detect the product interface it is important to set the gravity rate
Specific Gravity (SG) refers of change limits correctly. This limit is expressed as change in Specific Gravity
to U.S. customary units and
is measured per barrel. Delta
per Net Bbl or m3 (SG/Bbl or Dens/m3 see sidebar) and as such is flow rate
Density (Dens) refers to independent. Too small a limit will cause minor disturbances to be detected and
metric units and is measured too large will cause the interface to be missed.
per cubic meter. The SG (or
Dens) function is the For example: A pipeline runs ISO-Butane (0.565), N-Butane (0.585) and
smallest difference in Propane (0.507). The smallest SG in this case is 0.585 minus 0.565, which
specific gravity (or density) equals 0.020 SG units. It was observed that once an interface was detected,
between two products that
will form the product
40 barrels passed before the specific gravity stabilized at the new gravity. The
interface. actual gravity rate of change limit for this example is calculated as:
0.020 / 40 = 0.0005 ( SG/Bbl)
To allow for a longer interface or a smaller SG we selected is

0.0002 (SG/Bbl). To enter this value, press [Prog] [Meter] [Enter]. Scroll down
to 'Grav Change' and enter .0002.
Meter Station
Grav Change .0002
Line Pack 250
4-2 22/26.71+ w 05/99

5. Meter Factors
5.1. Entering a Base Meter Factor Curve

Under the product area enter the necessary data for the basic Meter Factor
Curve for up to 4 meters. Enter the date of the curve and the 12 meter factors
and associated flow rates from the lowest to the highest flow rate. If a curve is
not required use only Meter Factor #1.
To do this you must edit the product file information by pressing [Prog]. Then
press [Product] [Enter] to scroll through all 16 sets of product data. Pressing
[Product] [n] [Enter] (where n = 1 to 8) will allow you to go directly to data for
a specific product number. A display similar to the following can be scrolled
through:
PRODUCT #5
Name CRUDE
Table Select 0
Override API 35
Override SG .8498
Density Factor A/B A
M1 MF Date 09/26/97
M1 MF #1 1.0099
M1 FLW#1 1000.0
Move the cursor to the appropriate meter factor, press [Clear] and re-enter the
required meter factor. Note that only numbers greater than 0.8000 and less than
1.2001 are allowed.
Each product data field can handle 4 meter runs with 12 different meter factors
and associated flow rates.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 5-1

Chapter 5 Meter Factors
5.2. Changing Meter Factors

To do this you must edit the product file information by pressing [Prog]. Then
press [Product] [Enter] to scroll through all 8 sets of product data. Pressing
[Product] [n] [Enter], where n is 1 to 8, will allow you to go directly to data for
a specific product number. A display similar to the following can be scrolled
through:
PRODUCT #5
Name PROPANE
Table Select 2
Override API 150.9
Override Dens .5010
M.F. #1 1.0099
M.F. #2 1.0034
M.F. #3 1.0023
M.F. #4 .9995
Move the cursor to the appropriate meter factor, press [Clear] and re-enter the
required meter factor. Note that only numbers greater than 0.8000 and less than
1.2001 are allowed.
5-2 22/26.71+ w 05/99

5.3. Changing Meter Factors for the Running

Product
Enter the Program Mode by pressing [Prog]. Then press [Meter] [n] [Factor]
[Enter] to go directly to the meter factor for Flowmeter n (n = 1, 2, 3 or 4).
Meter Run #1
Base MF 1.0000
Press [Clear] and then enter the required meter factor.
Flow Meter #1
Meter Factor 1.0050
Note that only numbers greater than 0.8000 and less then 1.2001 are allowed
as meter factors.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 5-3

6. Proving Functions
6.1. Full-Sized Provers (Unidirectional and

Bi-directional)
Proving functions are accessed via the Program Mode. Press [Prog] [Prove]
[Enter] and the following selection menu is displayed:
* Prover Operation *
Trial Report (Y/N)
Trial Prove Mtr"n" _
Prove Meter "n"
Abort Prove ? (Y)
For a single 'Trial Prove', enter the meter number to be proved on the 2nd line.
To disable a trial prove report, enter [Y] on line one. For a prove sequence
enter the number of the meter to be proved on the 3rd line. To abort a prove in
progress enter [Y] on the 4th line. After making your entry the flow computer will
automatically return you to the Display Mode and select the 'Prove Counts
Display':
Counts 0
Prove Run 1
Meter Selected 2
Check Temp Stability
The bottom line of this display shows the current status of the prover. As the
th
prove sequence proceeds the 4 line is updated with the current status:
Ball Launched Fwd.

1st Detector Switch
In Flight Forward
2nd Detector Switch
Over Travel Forward
Ball Launched
Reverse
1st Detector Switch
In Flight Reverse
2nd Detector Switch
Over Travel Reverse
22/26.71+ w 05/99 6-1

Chapter 6 Proving Functions
The 'Prove Run' number on line 2 increments as each run is completed.

Assuming a successful prove the 4th line indicates:
Prove Completed
When the required number of consecutive runs within the run deviation limits
are accumulated, the run data are averaged and the prove calculations are
performed. The resultant meter factor is compared against the meter factor at
base flow rate interpolated from the meters base curve and the average of last
n factors, and if it is within acceptable limits, can be automatically
implemented.
6.2. Brooks Compact Prover

Proving functions are accessed the same as with full sized provers; via the
Program Mode. Press [Prog] [Prove] [Enter] and the following selection menu
is displayed:
*PROVER OPERATION*
Invar Rod Deg.F 75.5
Trial Report (Y/N)
Trial Prove Mtr"n"
Prove Meter "n"
Abort Prove ? (Y)
An additional entry is included for a Brooks prover (Invar Rod temperature). The
invar rod is part of the detector switch mechanism of the prover and is usually
close to ambient temperature. Enter the correct temperature to enable the
computer to correct for any thermal expansion.
For a single 'Trial Prove' enter the meter number to be proved on the 3rd line.
For a prove sequence enter the number of the meter to be proved on the 4th
line. To abort a prove in progress press the down arrow and enter [Y] on the 5th
line.
After making your entry the flow computer will automatically return you to the
Display Mode and select the 'Prove Counts Display' :
Counts 0
Prove Run 1
Meter Selected 2
Check Temp Stability
6-2 22/26.71+ w 05/99

As with the full sized prover the bottom line of this display shows the current
status of the prover. Two additional status states will appear.
Check Plenum Press
While the computer is checking for temperature stability it is also checking and
adjusting the plenum chamber pressure. The status line above will only show if
the plenum pressure is still not within the selected dead band by the time the
temperature is stable.
Piston Downstream
This status display occurs while the prover is returning the piston to the
upstream position ready to launch.
Use the arrow keys to scroll down the display. A second screen is relevant to
the pulse interpolation method of accumulating prove pulse counts.
Prove Counts 1034

Tdvol 2.234122
Tdfmp 2.202312
Piston Downstream
The 1st line shows the integer counts. Tdvol is the time between detectors and
Tdfmp is the time between the 1st flowmeter pulse after each of the detectors.
A pass report is printed at the end of each set of passes.
6.2.1. Proving Reports for Brooks Compact Provers

As the compact prove sequence progresses the flow computer will print the
Pass Summary Report. This report is printed for each sequence of passes that
comprise a prove sequence. The number of passes made per run is selectable
from 1 to 25 (see Prover Setup in Volume 3. Note: an entry of 1 will disable
this report).
On completion of a successful prove a Meter Proving Report will be printed.
This report is user configurable via the OmniCom configuration program.
6.3. Other Proving Reports

The following reports are also available with this application:
o Prove Abort Report
o Meter Proving Report For Master Meter Method
22/26.71+ w 05/99 6-3

Chapter 6 Proving Functions
6.4. Official and Unofficial Prove Results

Prove reports are generated after a successful prove and can be either official
or unofficial. Official reports result from the implementation of a meter factor.
Unofficial reports do not have a meter factor implemented.
A meter factor can be implemented automatically based on the configuration
settings in the Prover Setup within the flow computer. When the Prove Report
is printed, it is indicated as official.
The operator has the option to implement a meter factor within the time range
also specified in the Prover Setup. An unofficial Prove Report will be printed
and when the operator selects to implement the meter factor, subsequently the
same report will be printed but indicating it as official.
6-4 22/26.71+ w 05/99

7. Printed Reports
-
7.1. Fixed Format Reports

Several reports use a fixed format (i.e., cannot be changed by the user). These
are described below:
q Status Report Shows general information on current active
flowmeters, batch status (In progress /
Suspended / Ended), current running
products, batch ID string, current alarms and
future batch information.
q Historical Alarm Report Date and time tags of the last 500 alarms,
when they occurred and are cleared. Meter
run specific alarms also snapshot the gross
volume and mass totalizers. Meter factor
changes are also recorded here.
Audit Trail Report - Up to q Audit Trail Report Date and time tags of up to the last 150
150 previous data entry changes to the flow computer database made
changes can be printed when
the Audit Trail is
via the local keypad. Changes made via
requested. Modbus port will also be recorded if the
password feature is being used on that port.
q Product File Report Shows information related to the product
setup of the flow computer. For
turbine/positive displacement liquid flow
computers, this data includes product name,
meter factors, override gravities/densities and
the equation or standard to be used for each
product.
q Config Data Report Lists most configuration settings currently in
the flow computer.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 7-1

Chapter 7 Printed Reports
7.2. Default Report Templates and Custom

Reports
The following reports are user-configurable via the OmniCom configuration
program.
Snapshot Report
Batch Report
Daily Report
Prove Report
7.3. Printing Reports

INFO - Entering a number A Snapshot Report can be printed by pressing [Print] [Enter] and can also be
between 1 and 500 at the printed automatically on timed intervals (see 9. Print Setup in Chapter 9).
Hist Alarm ? line will
cause many previous Other printed reports are accessed from the Program Mode. Press [Prog]
alarms to be printed. When
requesting reports, such as
[Print] [Enter] and the following selection menu will be displayed:
previous daily, batch or
prover reports, you must
enter a number between 1 *PRINT REPORT MENU*
and 8; 1 refers to the last
Snapshot Report ?
report generated and 8
refers to the oldest report. Previous Snapshot?
Status Report ?(Y)
Prev. Batch (1-8)
Prev. Daily (1-8)
Prev. Prove (1-8)
Hist Alarm ?
Audit Trail ? (Y)
Arch Starts
# of Arc Days
Product File ?(Y)
Config Report ?(Y)
Move the cursor to the report required and enter [Y] or the number of the
historical report you wish to print ([1] refers to the latest, [2] refers to the next to
latest etc. Press [Prog] twice to return to the Display Mode.
7-2 22/26.71+ ! 05/99

7.4. Audit Trail
7.4.1. Audit Trail Report

A fixed format report provides an audit trail of changes made to the flow
computer database. The number of changes that can be reported depends on
the type of changes made. The last 150 items are recorded. Each record
consists of a unique event number, time & date tag, database index number for
the variable changed and the new and old value of the variable, The starting
index number and the number of points changed is recorded when changes are
made remotely via a Modbus port, using OmniCom for instance.
Index Number Note1: PIPELINE COMPANY NAME

Password entries are
recorded in this field. A three- Audit Trail Report Page: 1
digit code signifies the Date: xx/xx/xx Time: xx:xx:xx Computer ID: REV2271
password source and level of
the password entered. These Event Time Date Index Old Value/ New Value/
password codes are No. Number1 # of Points Serial Port
indicated in the table on the xxx xx:xx:xx xx/xx/xx xxxxx x.xxxxxxxxxxx x.xxxxxxxxxxx
following page. xxx xx:xx:xx xx/xx/xx xxxxx x.xxxxxxxxxxx x.xxxxxxxxxxx
xxx xx:xx:xx xx/xx/xx xxxxx x.xxxxxxxxxxx x.xxxxxxxxxxx
22/26.71+ w 05/99 7-3

Chapter 7 Printed Reports
7.4.2. Modbus Port Passwords and the Audit Trail

Report
The Audit Trail Report is stored within the flow computer and is used to
document and time and date stamp changes made to the flow computer
database, either via the local keypad or via password protected serial port
access. The report is formatted in columns as shown above:
PASSWORD CODES
Privileged Level Password entered at the Level A Password entered via Serial Port
100 300
keypad #3
Level 1 Password entered at local keypad Level B Password entered via Serial Port
101 301
#3
Level 2 Password entered at local keypad Level C Password entered via Serial Port
102 302
#3
Serial Port #2 Level A Password entered Level A Password entered via Serial Port
103 400
at local keypad #4
Serial Port #3 Level A Password entered Level B Password entered via Serial Port
104 401
at local keypad #4
Serial Port #4 Level A Password entered Level C Password entered via Serial Port
105 402
at local keypad #4
Level A Password entered via Serial Port
106 Model # Omni 3000 / Omni 6000 500
#1
Level B Password entered via Serial Port
107 Reset All Totals 501
#1
Level 1A Password entered at local Level C Password entered via Serial Port
108 502
keypad #1
Level A Password entered via Serial Port Serial Port #1 Level A Password entered
200 503
#2 at local keypad
Level B Password entered via Serial Port
201
#2
Level C Password entered via Serial Port
202
#2
7-4 22/26.71+ w 05/99

8. Index of Display Variables
Index of Display Variables DISPLAY VARIABLES VALID KEY PRESSES

-These lists contain variable
groups and corresponding
key press sequences needed
Flow Rates and Totalizers
to display them. In most Batch Totalizers are displayed by including the [Batch] key before the key presses
cases, the sequence can be shown below:
reversed (i.e.: [Temp]
[Meter] [n] is the same as Daily & Cumulative Uncorrected Gross (IV) [Gross] or [Gross] [Meter] [n]
[Meter] [n] [Temp]). In all Batch Uncorrected Gross (IV) [Batch] [Gross] or [Batch] [Gross] [Meter] [n]
cases, the [Display/Enter]
key (keypad bottom right) Daily & Cumulative Corrected Net (GSV)
must be pressed to enter the Daily & Cumul. S&W Corrected Net (NSV) [Net] or [Net] [Meter] [n]
command. Some variables
may not be displayed based Batch Corrected Net
on the application or the Batch S&W Corrected Net (NSV) [Batch] [Net] or [Batch] [Net] [Meter] [n]
physical I/O assignments.
Daily & Cumulative Corrected Net (GSV) [Net] or [Net] [Meter] [n]
Daily & Cumul. S&W Corrected Net (NSV) [Net] [Net] or [Net] [Net] [Meter] [n]
Batch Corrected Net [Batch] [Net] or [Batch] [Net] [Meter] [n]
Batch S&W Corrected Net (NSV) [Batch] [Net] [Net]
Daily & Cumulative Mass [Mass] or [Mass] [Meter] [n]
Batch Mass [Batch] [Mass] or [Batch] [Mass] [Meter] [n]
[Net] or [Net] [Meter] [n] or

Total @ Second Reference Temperature
[Batch] [Net] or [Batch] [Net] [Meter] [n]
Current Instantaneous Values

Batch Flow Weighted Averages are displayed by including the [Batch] key before the
key presses shown below:
Meter Temperatures [Temp] or [Temp] [Meter] [n]
Meter Pressures [Press] or [Press] [Meter] [n]
Density [Density] or [Density] [Meter] [n]
Unfactored Density [Density] [Meter] [n]
API Gravity & API @ Reference [SG/API] or [SG/API] [Meter] [n]
Specific Gravity & SG @ Reference [SG/API] or [SG/API] [Meter] [n]
Densitometer Temperatures [Density] [Temp] or [Density] [Temp] [Meter] [n]
Densitometer Pressures [Density] [Press] or [Density] [Press] [Meter] [n]
Prover Temperatures [Prove] [Temp]
Prove Pressures & Plenum Pressure [Prove] [Press]
Prover Density [Prove] [Density]
Prover Density Temperature [Prove] [Density] [Temp]
Prover Density Pressure [Prove] [Density] [Press]
Auxiliary Inputs 1-4 [Analysis] [Input]
22/26.71+ w 05/99 8-1

Chapter 8 Index of Display Variables
Calculation Factors
Batch Flow Weighted Averages are displayed by including the [Batch] key before the
key presses shown below.
[Temp] [Factor] or [Temp] [Factor] [Meter] [n] or
Volume Correction Factors (VCF)
[Batch] [Temp] [Factor] [n]
[Press] [Factor] or [Press] [Factor] [Meter] [n] or

Pressure Correction Factors (CPL)
[Batch] [Press] [Factor] [n]
[Batch] [n] [Meter] [Factor] or

Batch Flow Weighted Avg. Meter Factors
[Meter] [n] [Factor] [Batch] or
[Factor] [Batch] [Meter] [n] or
Other Factors and Intermediate Calculation factors

Meter Factors & K Factors [Factor] or [Meter] [n] [Factor]
[Density] [Factor] or [Density][Factor] [Meter] [n]

Pycnometer Factors
or [Meter] [n] [Density][Factor]
[Density] [Factor] or [Density][Factor] [Meter] [n]

Solartron / Sarasota / UGC Factors
or [Meter] [n] [Density][Factor]
Equilibrium Pressure / A, B & F Factors [Press] [Factor] [Meter] [n]
Alarm Information
Active Alarms [Alarms]
Transducer High/Low Alarm Limits [Meter] or [Meter] [n]
Product Information
Current Running Product [Product]
Product Number and Name [Product] [n]

Override API & SG Gravity
Meter Factors Calculation Mode Note: n = 1 to 8
Prover Sequence Information

Prove Counts & Run Number
Meter Selected to Prove
Current Prover Status
Tdvol & Tdfmp Timers [Counts] or [Prove] [Counts]
Batch Schedule Stack & Presets

Batch ID Character String
Running Product Number [Batch] [Setup] or [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Setup]
Batch Preset Counters &

Interface Due Line Pack Counter [Batch] [Preset] or [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Preset]
8-2 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Miscellaneous Displays
Current Time & Date
Power Last Applied Time & Date
Power Last Lost Time & Date
Task Timing Display [Time]
Display of Raw Input Signals [Input]
Display of Raw Output Signals [Output] [Status]
Hardware Inventory / Software Version [Status]
Honeywell Module Status [Input] [Status]
PID Control Displays

Primary Setpoint Source Local/Remote
Remote Setpoint Value
Primary Measurement & Setpoint
Secondary Measurement & Setpoint
Valve Open % & Auto/Manual Status [Control] [n]
User-Configurable Displays
Up to eight additional displays can be programmed by the user (See Volume 3 for
more details).
22/26.71+ w 05/99 8-3

Volume 3C
User Manual
Configuration and
Advanced Operation

Effective May 1999

1. Overview of Firmware Revisions 22.71/26.71....................................................... 1-1

1.1. Number of Meter Runs - Type of Flowmeters..................................................... 1-1
1.2. Product Configuration ......................................................................................... 1-2
1.3. Configurable Sensors per Meter Run ................................................................. 1-2
1.4. Configurable Sensors per Prover ....................................................................... 1-2
1.5. Temperature ......................................................................................................... 1-2
1.6. Densitometers ...................................................................................................... 1-2
1.7. Station Capability ................................................................................................. 1-2
1.8. Auxiliary Inputs .................................................................................................... 1-2
1.9. Number of products - Information Stored/Product ............................................ 1-2
1.10. Type of Products Measured ................................................................................ 1-3
1.11. Batching and Interface Detection ....................................................................... 1-3
1.12. Auto Proving Features......................................................................................... 1-3
1.13. Retroactive Meter Factors and Override Gravity ............................................... 1-3
1.14. Retroactive Density Correction Factor ............................................................... 1-3
1.15. Meter Factor Linearizing Curves......................................................................... 1-4
1.16. PID Control Functions ......................................................................................... 1-4
1.17. Flow Weighted Averages ..................................................................................... 1-4
1.18. User-Programmable Digital I/O............................................................................ 1-4
1.19. User-Programmable Logic Functions................................................................. 1-4
1.20. User-Programmable Alarm Functions ................................................................ 1-4
1.21. User-Programmable Variables ............................................................................ 1-4
1.22. User Display Setups............................................................................................. 1-5
1.23. User Report Templates ........................................................................................ 1-5
1.24. Serial Communication Links ............................................................................... 1-5
1.25. Peer-to-Peer Communications ............................................................................ 1-5
1.26. Archive Data ......................................................................................................... 1-5
1.27. OmniCom Software Communications Package............................................... 1-5
1.28. OmniView Operator Interface Software Package ............................................ 1-5
ii 22/26.71+ w 05/99
Volume 3c Configuration and Advanced Operation
2. Flow Computer Configuration ............................................................................... 2-1

2.1. Introduction...........................................................................................................2-1
2.2. Configuring with the Keypad in Program Mode .................................................2-1
2.2.1. Entering the Program Mode .................................................................................. 2-1
2.2.2. Changing Data...................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2.3. Menu Selection Method ........................................................................................ 2-2
2.2.4. Random Access Method ....................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.5. Passwords ............................................................................................................ 2-3
2.3. Getting Help ..........................................................................................................2-4
2.4. Program Inhibit Switch.........................................................................................2-4
2.5. Configuring the Physical Inputs / Outputs..........................................................2-5
2.5.1. Miscellaneous Configuration (Misc. Setup Menu) .................................................. 2-5
2.5.2. Physical I/O Points not Available for Configuration ............................................... 2-6
2.5.3. Password Maintenance Settings............................................................................ 2-6
2.5.4. Entries Requiring a Valid Privileged Password ...................................................... 2-7
2.5.5. Module Settings .................................................................................................... 2-7
2.5.6. Meter Station Settings........................................................................................... 2-8
2.5.7. Meter Run Settings ............................................................................................. 2-10
2.5.8. Prover Settings ................................................................................................... 2-12
2.5.9. PID Control Settings ........................................................................................... 2-13
2.5.10. Analog Output Settings ....................................................................................... 2-14
2.5.11. Front Panel Counter Settings .............................................................................. 2-15
2.5.12. Programmable Boolean Statements.................................................................... 2-16
2.5.13. Programmable Variable Statements.................................................................... 2-18
2.5.14. User Display Settings.......................................................................................... 2-20
2.5.15. Digital I/O Point Settings..................................................................................... 2-22
2.5.16. Serial Input / Output Settings ............................................................................. 2-24
2.5.17. Custom Modbus Data Packet Settings .............................................................. 2-26
2.5.18. Programmable Logic Controller Setup ................................................................ 2-27
2.5.19. Archive File Setup .............................................................................................. 2-27
2.5.20. Peer-to-Peer Communications Settings .............................................................. 2-28
2.6. Setting Up the Time and Date ............................................................................2-33
2.6.1. Accessing the Time/Date Setup Submenu .......................................................... 2-33
2.6.2. Time and Date Settings ...................................................................................... 2-33
22/26.71+ w 05/99 iii

2.7. Configuring the Meter Station ........................................................................... 2-34

2.7.1. Accessing the Station Setup Submenu ................................................................ 2-34
2.7.2. Meter Station Settings ......................................................................................... 2-34
2.8. Configuring Meter Runs..................................................................................... 2-37
2.8.1. Accessing the Meter Run Setup Submenu........................................................... 2-37
2.8.2. Meter Run Settings.............................................................................................. 2-37
2.9. Configuring Temperature .................................................................................. 2-40
2.9.1. Accessing the Temperature Setup Submenu ....................................................... 2-40
2.9.2. Station and Meter Run Temperature Settings ...................................................... 2-40
2.9.3. Station and Meter Run Density Temperature Settings ......................................... 2-41
2.9.4. Prover Temperature Settings............................................................................... 2-42
2.9.5. Prover Density Temperature Settings .................................................................. 2-43
2.10. Configuring Pressure......................................................................................... 2-44
2.10.1. Accessing the Pressure Setup Submenu ............................................................. 2-44
2.10.2. Station and Meter Run Pressure Settings ............................................................ 2-44
2.10.3. Station and Meter Run Density Pressure Settings................................................ 2-45
2.10.4. Prover Pressure Settings..................................................................................... 2-46
2.10.5. Prover Density Pressure Settings ........................................................................ 2-47
2.11. Configuring Meter Relative Density / API Relative Density ............................. 2-48
2.11.1. Accessing the Gravity/Density Setup Submenu ................................................... 2-48
2.11.2. Meter Relative Density / Density Settings ............................................................ 2-48
2.12. Configuring PID Control Outputs ...................................................................... 2-51
2.12.1. Accessing the PID Control Setup Submenu......................................................... 2-51
2.12.2. PID Control Output Settings ................................................................................ 2-51
2.13. Configuring Provers........................................................................................... 2-53
2.13.1. Accessing the Prover Setup Submenu................................................................. 2-53
2.13.2. Prover Settings.................................................................................................... 2-53
2.14. Configuring Products ........................................................................................ 2-57
2.14.1. Accessing the Product Setup Submenu ............................................................... 2-57
2.14.2. Product Settings .................................................................................................. 2-57
2.15. Configuring Batches .......................................................................................... 2-67
2.16. Configuring Miscellaneous Factors .................................................................. 2-68
2.16.1. Accessing the Factor Setup Submenu ................................................................. 2-68
2.16.2. Factor Settings .................................................................................................... 2-68
iv 22/26.71+ w 05/99
2.17. Configuring Printers...........................................................................................2-69

2.17.1. Accessing the Printer Setup Submenu ................................................................ 2-69
2.17.2. Printer Settings ................................................................................................... 2-69
3. User-Programmable Functions.............................................................................. 3-1

3.1. Introduction...........................................................................................................3-1
3.2. User-Programmable Boolean Flags and Statements .........................................3-1
3.2.1. What is a Boolean?............................................................................................... 3-1
3.2.2. Sign (+, -) of Analog or Calculated Variables (5001 8999) ................................ 3-3
3.2.3. Boolean Statements and Functions....................................................................... 3-3
3.2.4. How the Digital I/O Assignments are Configured................................................... 3-8
3.3. User Programmable Variables and Statements................................................3-10
3.3.1. Variable Statements and Mathematical Operators Allowed ................................. 3-10
3.3.2. Using Boolean Variables in Variable Statements................................................. 3-12
3.3.3. Entering Values Directly into the User Variables ................................................. 3-13
3.3.4. Using the Variable Expression as a Prompt......................................................... 3-13
3.3.5. Password Level Needed to Change the Value of a User Variable........................ 3-13
3.3.6. Using Variables in Boolean Expressions ............................................................. 3-14
3.4. User Configurable Display Screens ..................................................................3-15
4. Flow Equations and Algorithms for US Customary Units (Revision 22.71+)..... 4-1
4.1. Liquid Flow Rate for Flowmeters.........................................................................4-1
4.1.1. Volumetric Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions Qv (Bbls/hr)..................................... 4-1
4.1.2. Volumetric Flow Rate at Base Conditions Qb (Bbls/hr)......................................... 4-1
4.1.3. Mass Flow Rate Qm (KLbs/hr).............................................................................. 4-1
4.1.4. Nomenclature ....................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2. Correction Factors for Liquid Flow .....................................................................4-3
4.2.1. Meter Factor in Use MF....................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.2. Volume Correction Factor VCF............................................................................ 4-4
4.2.3. Correction Factor for Pressure on Liquid CPL...................................................... 4-5
4.2.4. Correction Factor for Sediment and Water Content CS&W ................................. 4-5
22/26.71+ w 05/99 v
4.3. Densities and Other Properties of Liquids ......................................................... 4-6

4.3.1. Flowing Density f for Crude Oil and Refined Products ........................................4-6
4.3.2. Density of Ethane, Propane and C3+ Mixes ..........................................................4-6
4.3.3. Density and Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Calculated from Live Digital
Densitometer Output Frequency............................................................................4-7
4.4. Recalculation of Batch Ticket ........................................................................... 4-11
4.4.1. Recalculated Gross Standard Volume GSVRecalc (Bbls)................................... 4-11
4.4.2. Recalculated Net Standard Volume ..................................................................... 4-11
4.4.3. Factored Gross Volume FGV (Bbls)................................................................... 4-12
4.4.4. Net Weight Delivered NWD ............................................................................... 4-12
4.5. Liquid Flow Rate for Provers............................................................................. 4-13
4.5.1. Prove Gross Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions (Bbls/hr) ....................................... 4-13
4.5.2. Prove Flow Rate using Pulse Interpolation Method.............................................. 4-13
4.5.3. Nomenclature...................................................................................................... 4-14
4.5.4. Meter Factors for Provers.................................................................................... 4-15
4.6. Calculations for PID Control.............................................................................. 4-18
4.6.1. Primary Variable Error % ep ............................................................................... 4-18
4.6.2. Secondary Variable Error % es........................................................................... 4-18
4.6.3. Control Output % C0 (Before Startup Limit Function).......................................... 4-18
4.6.4. Integral Error e................................................................................................. 4-19
5. Flow Equations and Algorithms for SI (Metric) Units (Revision 26.71+)............ 5-1
5.1. Liquid Flow Rate for Flowmeters ........................................................................ 5-1
3
5.1.1. Volumetric Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions Qv (m /hr) .......................................5-1
3
5.1.2. Volumetric Flow Rate at Base Conditions Qb (m /hr) ...........................................5-1
5.1.3. Mass Flow Rate Qm (Ton/hr) ...............................................................................5-1
5.1.4. Nomenclature........................................................................................................5-2
5.2. Correction Factors for Liquid Flow..................................................................... 5-3
5.2.1. Meter Factor in Use MF .......................................................................................5-3
5.2.2. Volume Correction Factor VCF ............................................................................5-4
5.2.3. Correction Factor for Pressure on Liquid CPL ......................................................5-5
vi 22/26.71+ w 05/99
5.3. Densities and Other Properties of Liquids..........................................................5-6

5.3.1. Flowing Density f for Crude Oil and Refined Products ........................................ 5-6
5.3.2. Density of Ethane, Propane and C3+ Mixes .......................................................... 5-6
5.3.3. Density and Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Calculated from Live Digital
Densitometer Output Frequency ........................................................................... 5-7
5.4. Liquid Flow Rate for Provers .............................................................................5-11
5.4.1. Prove Gross Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions (m3/hr) ......................................... 5-11
5.4.2. Nomenclature ..................................................................................................... 5-11
5.4.3. Meter Factors for Provers ................................................................................... 5-12
5.5. Calculations for PID Control ..............................................................................5-15
5.5.1. Primary Variable Error % ep............................................................................... 5-15
5.5.2. Secondary Variable Error % es .......................................................................... 5-15
5.5.3. Control Output % C0 (Before Startup Limit Function) ......................................... 5-15
5.5.4. Integral Error e ................................................................................................ 5-16
Figures of Volume 3
Fig. 1-1. Typical Configuration Using Helical Turbine, Positive Displacement Flowmeters ................. 1-1
Fig. 2-1. Figure Showing Program Inhibit Switch................................................................................ 2-4
Fig. 3-1. Figure Showing Automatic Four-Meter Flow Zone Thresholds.............................................. 3-6
Fig. 3-2. Figure Showing Four-Meter Run Valve Switching ................................................................ 3-7
Fig. 3-3. Keypad Layout - A through Z Keys..................................................................................... 3-16
22/26.71+ w 05/99 vii

1. Overview of Firmware Revisions 22.71/26.71

(with Meter Factor Linearization)
1.1. Number of Meter Runs - Type of

Flowmeters
Minimum 1 run, Maximum 4 runs - Turbine, Positive Displacement Flowmeters.
'Level A' dual channel 'Pulse Fidelity' checking can be performed on all 4 meter
runs.
Fig. 1-1. Typical Configuration Using Helical Turbine, Positive

Displacement Flowmeters
22/26.71+ w 05/99 1-1

Chapter 1 Overview of Firmware Revision 22.71/26.71
1.2. Product Configuration

Parallel runs measuring the same product or independent runs with different
products.
1.3. Configurable Sensors per Meter Run

Meter Pulses, meter temperature and pressure, meter density, density
temperature and pressure.
1.4. Configurable Sensors per Prover

Prover inlet and outlet temperature and pressure, prover densitometer any type
(analog or digital pulse type such as Solartron, Sarasota or UGC).
1.5. Temperature
Each temperature sensor can be individually selected to be a 4-20mA, 4-wire
DIN curve RTD or 4-wire American curve RTD.
1.6. Densitometers
Can be configured for any combination or mix of individual or shared
densitometers of any type (analog or digital pulse type such as Solartron,
Sarasota or UGC). The maximum number that can be connected is five. Each
analog density can be specified as flowing or reference conditions.
1.7. Station Capability

Meter runs may be combined or subtracted in any mode to provide station flow
rates and totalizers.
1.8. Auxiliary Inputs

Four auxiliary inputs are provided for miscellaneous sensors (for example:
BS&W, Viscosity monitors, etc.) and can be individually selected to be a 4-
20mA, 4-wire DIN curve RTD or 4-wire American curve RTD.
1.9. Number of products - Information

Stored/Product
Data for eight products is stored including: product name, meter factors,
gravity/density overrides and calculation mode to be used by each flowmeter
running the product.
1-2 22/26.71+ w 05/99

1.10. Type of Products Measured

Crude oil, refined products, NGLs using API 2540, LPGs using GPA TP16 and
API Tables 6, 23 and 54 are also provided.
1.11. Batching and Interface Detection

Six batch setups per meter run can be programmed with alphanumeric batch ID
tag, product number to run and expected size of batch.
Individual meter run batch preset down counters provide 'batch end warning'
and 'batch end reached' alarms.
Batches can be ended manually or automatically on size of batch, change of
product, beginning of new day, day of the week or day of the month.
Product interface detection is achieved using a station interface detector
densitometer mounted ahead of the meter runs. Line pack count-down
counters allow up to three product interfaces to be tracked between the
interface detector gravitometer and the valve manifold allowing pre-emptive
product cuts.
1.12. Auto Proving Features

Fully automated proving to API chapter 12. User configured for Uni-, Bi-
directional and compact provers with optional inlet and outlet temperature and
pressure sensors. Both up-stream and downstream water draw volume inputs
are available. Plenum chamber pressure on a Brooks prover is also input as an
analog and controlled by the computer. Master meter proving is also featured.
Provings can be triggered on change of flow rate versus last known prove for
each meter or on the amount of flow which has occurred since the last prove.
Proves can also be triggered by a meter being shut in for more than a specified
amount of time.
1.13. Retroactive Meter Factors and Override

Gravity
Meter factors and override product gravity can be applied retroactively for a
selectable number of barrels at any time during a batch. Meter factors
determined by a prove can be automatically implemented from that point or
retroactively to the beginning of the batch.
1.14. Retroactive Density Correction Factor

Density correction factors can be applied retroactively for a selectable number
of barrels at any time during a batch.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 1-3

Chapter 1 Overview of Firmware Revision 22.71/26.71
1.15. Meter Factor Linearizing Curves

Variations in flowmeter performance due to viscosity and flow rate are corrected
by the use of twelve-point meter factor versus flow rate curves. Curves are
provided for each meter measuring each product.
1.16. PID Control Functions

Four independent control loops are provided for control of a primary variable
with either high or low override control by a secondary variable. Contact closure
inputs are activated to provide a startup and shutdown ramp function for each
control loop if needed. Primary setpoint can be adjusted via an analog input, a
keypad entry or communication link. Control loops are not dedicated and may
be cascaded. Data is processed every 500 msec.
1.17. Flow Weighted Averages

Flow weighted averages are calculated for all input variables and correction
factors based on hourly, daily totals and running batch totals.
1.18. User-Programmable Digital I/O

Each I/O point is individually configurable as either an input or output with
variable 'Delay On' and 'Delay Off'. Pulse widths are adjustable when used as
auxiliary totalizer outputs or sampler outputs.
1.19. User-Programmable Logic Functions

Sixty-four logic statements can be user programmed to control meter run
switching, prover loop and provide user auxiliary control functions.
1.20. User-Programmable Alarm Functions

Sixteen of the programmable logic statements described above can be used to
contain custom text messages which can be displayed, logged and printed.
1.21. User-Programmable Variables

Sixty-four user variables can be programmed to manipulate data for display and
printing or remote access via a communication port. Typical uses include,
special units conversions, customer averaging algorithms for leak detection,
special limit checking and control functions. The programmable variable
statements can also be used to type cast data of one type to another (i.e.,
change a floating point variable to an integer type so that a PLC or DCS system
can make use of it).
1-4 22/26.71+ w 05/99

1.22. User Display Setups

The user may specify eight key press combinations which recall display
screens. Each user display screen can show four variables each with a
descriptive tag defined by the user.
1.23. User Report Templates

Using OmniCom the user can generate custom report templates or edit existing
templates. These are uploaded into the flow computer. Custom templates for
the snapshot, batch end, daily and prove reports can be defined.
1.24. Serial Communication Links

Up to four serial data links are available for communications with other devices
such as printers, SCADA systems, PLCs and other Omni Flow Computers.
Ports communicate using a superset of the Modbus protocol (ASCII or RTU).
Printer data is ASCII data.
1.25. Peer-to-Peer Communications

Omni flow computers can be user configured to communicate with each other
as equal peers. Groups of data variables can be exchanged or broadcast
between other flow computers. Multiple flow computers can share resources
such as a PLC.
1.26. Archive Data

Two types of data archiving are possible in the flow computer. 1) Formatted
ASCII text using custom report templates, 2) Raw Data using archive records
and files.
1.27. OmniCom Software Communications

Package
OmniCom software is provided with each flow computer, and allows the user
to configure the computer on-line or off-line using a personal computer.
1.28. OmniView Operator Interface Software

Package
A Man-Machine Interface package for the Omni Flow Computer is also
available as an option.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 1-5

2. Flow Computer Configuration
2.1. Introduction
Configuration data is stored in the computer's battery backed-up RAM memory
which will retain its data for at least 1 to 2 months with no power applied.
Configuration data can be entered using one of three methods:
1) Configure off-line using the OmniCom PC configuration program and

then uploading all data at once.
2) Configure on-line using the OmniCom PC configuration program which
uploads each change as it is entered.
3) Enter configuration data via the front panel keypad using the Program
Mode.
Methods 1) and 2) require an IBM compatible PC running the OmniCom

Configuration Software and are described in Volume 5 and in OmniCom Help.
Method 3) is described here.
2.2. Configuring with the Keypad in Program

Mode
2.2.1. Entering the Program Mode

INFO - Key presses are While in the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The front panel Program LED
denoted in bold face between above the key will glow green and the following selection menu will be
brackets; e.g.: the enter key
appears in this manual as
displayed on the first three lines of the LCD display.
[Enter].
Press Keys to Select
th Group Entry, or
The 4 line of the display is
used to show the user key Press "Prog" to Exit
presses.
2.2.2. Changing Data

Data can be accessed using a sequential list of menu prompts or in a random
access manner by going directly to a specific group of entries.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-1

Chapter 2 Flow Computer Configuration
2.2.3. Menu Selection Method

INFO - Characters in [ ]
refer to key presses. *** SETUP MENU ***
Misc Configuration _
TIP - It is best to use the
Time/Date Setup
menu selection method when Station Setup
programming an application Meter Run Setup
for the first time as every Temperature Setup
possible option and variable
will be prompted. Once a Pressure Setup
computer is in operation and Grav/Density Setup
you become familiar with the PID Control Setup
application you can decide to
use the faster Random
Prover Setup
Access Method described on Product Setup
the facing page. Batch Preset Setup
While in the Program Mode Batch Sequence
(program LED on) press Factor Setup
[Setup] [Enter]. A menu
similar to the following will be Printer Setup
displayed.
Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to the appropriate
entry and press [Enter] to access a particular submenu. The first menu, 'Misc
Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the
number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer;
i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for
configuration data unless a transducer has been defined.
2.2.4. Random Access Method

In addition to the Setup Menu, the data is also presented in related groups such
as Temperature, Pressure, Meter, etc. You press the group key of your choice
to get to a data area. By specifying a meter run before or after a group you go
directly to the data for that group and that group only.
Once a group is selected use the 'Up/Down' arrow keys to step to a specific data
entry within the group. You can view data and, assuming a valid password has
been entered, change its value as required. If an error is made, press [Clear],
re-enter the correct data and press [Enter] to enter the new value. The cursor
will automatically step to the next data item in that group unless that would
cause a total change of screen (i.e., you can always verify your entry). A list of
data groups and associated key presses is listed later in this chapter.
Example:
Pressing [Temp] will allow you access to temperature data for all meter runs.
Pressing [Meter] [1] [Temp] or [Temp] [Meter] [1] will allow access to only
Meter Run #1 temperature data. For example, pressing [Meter] [1] [Temp] will
display the following until the [Enter] key is pressed.
Press Keys to Select

Group Entry, or
Press "Prog" to Exit
th
The 4 line of the display is
used to show the user key
presses.
Meter 1 Temp
2-2 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Pressing the [Enter] key will display a screen similar to this:
TEMPERATURE #1 Deg.F
Low Limit 30.0
High Limit 125.0
Override 60.0
2.2.5. Passwords
INFO - Most entry groups Except when changing transducer high/low alarm limits, a password is usually
occupy multiple screens so asked for when changing the configuration data within the computer.
be sure to use the [ ]/[ ] to
scroll and see all data. The flow computer has independent password protection of the following:
o Local Keypad Access / Modbus Port #1 (selectable)
(Physical Serial Port #1)
o Modbus Port #2 - (Physical Serial Port #2)
Local Keypad Access

Three password levels are provided:
q Privileged Level Allows complete access to all entries within the flow
computer including keypad passwords 1, 1A and 2
below. The initial privileged password for each
Modbus port is selected via this password level.
q Level 1 This level allows technician access to most entries
within the flow computer with the exception of I/O
Points assignments, programmable variables and
Boolean statements and passwords other than
Keypad Level 1.
q Level 1A This level allows technician access to the following
entries only:
Meter Factors
K Factors
Densitometer Correction Factors (Pycnometer
Factor)
q Level 2 Allows access to the operator type entries. These
entries include:
Transducer Manual Overrides
Product Gravity Overrides
Prover Operations
Batching Operations
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-3

Changing Passwords at the Keypad

INFO - Characters in [ ] 1) At the keypad press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter].
refer to key presses.
2) With the cursor blinking on 'Misc Configuration', press [Enter].
3) With the cursor blinking on 'Password Main?', press [Enter].
4) Enter the Privileged Level Password (up to 6 Characters) and press
[Enter].
5) The Level 1, 1A and Level 2 passwords can now be viewed and changed
if required.
INFO - See Technical 1) Scroll down to access each of the Modbus serial port 'Level A'
Bulletin TB-960701 in passwords. These are labeled Serial 1 (if Modbus Protocol is selected),
Volume 5 for setting Level B 'Serial 2', Serial 3', and 'Serial 4' corresponding to the physical port
and Level C passwords using numbering for Modbus Ports 1, 2, 3 and 4.
OmniCom.
Note: Level B and Level C

passwords for each Modbus
2.3. Getting Help
port cannot be viewed or Context sensitive help is available for most data entries. Help is summoned by
changed from the keypad.
pressing the [Display/Enter] key twice ([Help] key) with the cursor on the data
field in question. Help screens are frequently more than 1 full screen so always
INFO - The Help System is use the [ ]/[ ] keys to scroll in case there is more. Press [Prog] or [Enter]
not limited to just the once to exit the help system and return to your original screen.
Program Mode. Context
sensitive help is available in
all modes of operation.
2.4. Program Inhibit Switch
A 'Program Inhibit Switch' mounted behind the front panel prevents
unauthorized changing of data when in the 'Inhibit' position. Most data can be
viewed while the switch is in the program inhibit position, but any attempt to
alter data will be ignored and cause 'PROGRAM LOCKOUT' to be displayed on
the bottom line of the LCD display.
The inner enclosure of the flow computer can be locked or sealed within the
outer enclosure blocking access to the 'Program Inhibit Switch'.
CAUTION!
first must be disengaged by
from the case.
Fig. 2-1. Figure Showing Program Inhibit Switch
2-4 22/26.71+ w 05/99

2.5. Configuring the Physical Inputs /

Outputs
Tip - It is best to use the The Omni Flow Computer can accept many I/O modules and be configured to
Menu Selection Method (see match just about any combination of measurement transmitters. Configuring the
2.2.3) when programming an
application for the first time
physical I/O means setting up the number of meter runs, what types of
as every possible option and transducers are to be used and to which physical I/O points they are connected.
variable will be prompted.
Once a computer is in
operation and you become 2.5.1. Miscellaneous Configuration (Misc. Setup Menu)
familiar with the application
you can decide to use the The physical I/O configuration of the flow computer is changed by entering the
faster Random Access
Method (see 2.2.4).
Misc. Setup menu while the 'Select Group Entry' screen is displayed (see
2.2.1. Entering the Program Mode).
INFO - Characters in [ ]
refer to key presses. Press Keys to Select
Group Entry, or
Press "Prog" to Exit
INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Setup
Configuration', should always
be completed first as these
entries specify the number
and type of input and output Press [Setup] then [Enter] and the following selection menu will be displayed:
devices connected to the flow
computer. You are advised to
complete all entries under *** SETUP MENU ***
this menu before proceeding. Misc Configuration _
Only transducers that have Time/Date Setup
been assigned to physical
Station Setup
I/O points will be available for
further configuration (i.e., the
menus following the 'Misc
Configuration' menu do not The cursor automatically appears at the Misc Configuration option. Press
ask for or accept [Enter] and the following selection menu will be displayed:
configuration data unless a
transducer has been
defined). (See 2.5.2.) *** Misc. Setup ***
Password Maint?(Y)
Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station?(Y)
Config Meter n
Config Prove ? (Y)
Config PID ? n
Config D/A Outn
Front Pnl Counters
Program Booleans ?
Program Variables?
User Display ? n
Config Digitaln
Serial I/O n
Peer/Peer Comm(Y)?
Custom Packet n
Archive File n
PLC Group n
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-5

2.5.2. Physical I/O Points not Available for

Configuration
Configuration parameter groups are only prompted as needed. Meter runs and
transducers which are not assigned to a physical I/O point will not be available
for configuration. In these cases the following message will be displayed:
If this message is displayed Variable Selected is

check the I/O point Not Assigned to a
assignment for the variable.
Physical I/O Point
2.5.3. Password Maintenance Settings

INFO - Characters in { } Password maintenance settings can only be entered via the Omni front panel
refer to password levels. keypad. Enter [Y] at Password Maint ? of the Misc Setup menu to open the
Characters in [ ] refer to key
presses.
following entries:
{PL} Privileged _______________

TIP - Use the blank lines
provided next to each Enter the privileged password to allow you to view and change all configuration data including
configuration option to write other passwords.
down the corresponding
settings you entered in the {PL} Level 1 _______________
flow computer. Enter the Level 1 password to allow entry of all configuration data except entries which determine
Some of these entries may the physical I/O personality of the computer.
not appear on the display or
in OmniCom. Depending on {PL} Level 1A _______________
the various configuration
settings of your specific Enter the Level 1A password to allow entry of Meter factors, K Factors and Density Correction
metering system, only those Factors only.
configuration options which
are applicable will be {PL} Level 2 _______________
displayed. Enter the Level 2 password which is required for operator type entries such as gravity overrides
and meter factors.
Note: In the privileged

password area all passwords {PL} Serial Port #1 Password _______________
are legible upon entering the Enter the Serial Port password. All data in the Modbus database except passwords can be read
correct privileged password. via the serial ports. These passwords allow writes to the Modbus database. Password protection
In all other cases when can be disabled by entering a blank field as a password.
requested for a password,
upon entering the password, {PL} Lockout Switch Active? (Serial Port #1) _______________
the Omni will display all Enter [N] for the lockout switch to be inactive for this serial port.
entered characters as
asterisk. Enter [Y] for the lockout switch to be active for this serial port.
{PL} Serial Port #2 Password _______________

Enter the Serial Port #2 Password.
{PL} Lockout Switch Active? (Serial Port #2) _______________


2-6 22/26.71+ w 05/99

2.5.4. Entries Requiring a Valid Privileged Password

INFO - Characters in { } The following entries display only when a Valid Privileged Password is entered:
refer to password levels.
presses. {PL} Model Number (0=3000, 1=6000) _______________
This entry is used by the OmniCom configuration software to determine the maximum I/O
TIP - Use the blank lines capability of the computer.
provided next to each
configuration option to write {PL} Re-configure Archive _______________
down the corresponding Enter [Y] to re-configure archive records definition. Enter [N] when finished.
settings you entered in the
flow computer.
{PL} Archive Run (Y/N) _______________
Some of these entries may
not appear on the display or Enter [Y] to start the archive running.
in OmniCom. Depending on
the various configuration {PL} Reset All Totalizers ? (Y/N) _______________
settings of your specific Reset All Ram and Reset Totalizers will only display after the privileged password has been
metering system, only those entered. will clear to zero all internal totalizers. You can change totalizer decimal place settings
configuration options which after entering [Y]. The three electromechanical totalizers on the front of the computer cannot be
are applicable will be zeroed.
displayed.
{PL} Reset All RAM ? (Y/N) _______________
Resetting all RAM will clear all configuration data, calibration data and totalizers. This means that
CAUTION! all configuration data will have to be re-entered.
If you change the number or

{PL} Input Calibrate Default ? _______________
type of installed I/O modules,
you must perform the Check Entering a [Y] here will set all the analog input calibration constants used to scale zero and span
Modules Function to inform settings to the default value. This will require you to re calibrate all the inputs. You can also do
the computer that you wish to this on a channel by channel basis by entering the input channel number.
use the new hardware
configuration. {PL} D/A Calibrate Default ? _______________
Entering a [Y] here will set all the analog output calibration constants used to scale zero and span
settings to the default value. This will require you to re-calibrate all the outputs. You can also do
this on a channel by channel basis by entering the output channel number.
2.5.5. Module Settings

Enter [Y] at Check Modules ? of the Misc Setup menu and a screen similar
to the following will display:
MODULE S-WARE H-WARE

A-1 Y Y
B-1 Y Y
E/D-1 Y Y
E-1 Y Y
H-1 Y Y
D-2 Y Y
S-2 Y Y
Update S-Ware ?
{PL} Update S-Ware ? (Y) _______________

A table is displayed showing all of the physically installed I/O modules verses the I/O modules
recognized by the software (see display example above). You must answer the 'Update Software'
question entering [Y] whenever you change the number or type of installed modules. The available
I/O point numbers are allocated to each module at this time according to the type and number of
each module (see Chapter 2 for more information).
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-7

2.5.6. Meter Station Settings

INFO - The number of Enter [Y] at Config Station ? of the Misc Setup menu to open the following
process variable I/O points entries:
available depends on the
number of combo modules
installed (see Chapter 2 in {PL} Station Configured As: _______________
Volume 1 for more
information). Point numbers Station Totals and Flows Defined As: Define which meter runs will be included in the station flow
range from 01 through 24. rates and totalizers. Meter data can be added or subtracted.
Assign [0] to invalidate the Example: Entering [1] [+] [2] [-] [3] [-] [4] defines the station flows and totals as the result of
assigning of a variable. Meter Runs #1 and #2 added together, subtracted by the flows of Meters #3 and #4.
Enter [0] for no station totalizers.
I/O Type Mismatch - The
computer will not let you {PL} Density I/O Point Number _______________
assign the same I/O point # Enter the I/O point number that corresponds to the station density or gravity input used as the
to incompatible transducer product interface detector. Digital densitometers can be corrected for temperature and pressure
types; i.e., an I/O point effects using the station pressure and temperature points. Digital pulse densitometers can only be
th
cannot be assigned as a assigned I/O point numbers corresponding to the 4 input channel of a B Type Combo Module, or
temperature input for Meter Channels 3 or 4 of an E/D Type Combo Module.
Run #1 and a pressure input
for Meter Run #2. If the I/O Densitometer Tag _______________
Type Mismatch message is
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density transducer on the LCD display.
displayed, recheck the I/O.
Densitometer Type _______________
Shared Transducers - Enter the densitometer type:
Enter the same I/O point to 0 = No density type selected
share transducers between 1 = 4-20mA output signal linear with API gravity units (many API devices are actually designed
meter runs. to drive non-linear API chart recorders; they are usually linear with relative density units)
2 = 4-20mA output signal linear with relative density (SG) units
Correcting a Mistake - 3 = 4-20mA output signal linear with grs/cc density
Enter an I/O point # of [0] to 4 = Solartron digital pulse
cancel an incorrectly entered 5 = Sarasota digital pulse
I/O point #, then enter the 6 = UGC digital pulse.
correct number.
{PL} Density Temperature I/O Point Number _______________
Assigning I/O Point #99 - Enter the I/O point number to which the temperature sensor used to compensate the station
This indicates that the densitometer is connected.
associated variable will be When a digital densitometer is used as the station transducer, it can be corrected for temperature
available for display and be effects by assigning a temperature I/O point.
used in all calculations, but
will not be obtained via a live For the station product interface densitometer, enter a meter run temperature sensor in cases
input. The variable value is where a separate temperature transmitter is not available.
st
usually downloaded into the RTD probes should be assigned to the 1 channel on any type of combo module. RTD probes can
nd
flow computer database via a also be assigned to the 2 channel of B Type combo modules.
communication port or via a
user variable statement. Density Temperature Tag _______________
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density temperature transducer on the LCD
display.
Density Temperature Type _______________

Enter the densitometer temperature transmitter type:
0 = RTD probes that follow the DIN curve and = 0.0385
1 = RTD probes that follow the American curve and = 0. 0392
2 = Honeywell smart transmitter connected to an H combo module or a transducer with a 4-
20mA linear output
2-8 22/26.71+ w 05/99

{PL} Density Pressure I/O Point Number _______________

Enter the I/O point number to which the pressure transmitter used to compensate the station
INFO - Characters in { }
digital densitometers is connected.
Characters in [ ] refer to key When a digital densitometer is used as the product interface detector, it can be corrected for
presses. pressure effects by assigning a station pressure point.
If a separate pressure transmitter is not available, enter a meter pressure transmitter I/O point.
Density Pressure Tag _______________
configuration option to write Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density pressure transducer on the LCD
down the corresponding display.
flow computer.
Some of these entries may Auxiliary Input Assignment
{PL} Auxiliary Input #1 I/O Point Number _______________
settings of your specific Enter the physical I/O point number to which this auxiliary input is connected. Auxiliary Inputs can
metering system, only those be used to enter S&W, viscosity and other miscellaneous variables.
are applicable will be Auxiliary Input #1 Tag _______________
displayed. Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this transducer on the LCD display.
Auxiliary Input #1 Type _______________

INFO - The number of Enter the Auxiliary Input Type:
process variable I/O points 0 = RTD probes that follow the DIN curve and = 0.0385
available depends on the
number of combo modules
installed (see Chapter 2 in 2 = Transducer with a 4-20mA linear output or Honeywell smart transmitter connected to an H
Volume 1 for more combo module
information). Point numbers
range from 01 through 24. {PL} Auxiliary Input #2 I/O Point Number _______________
Assign [0] to invalidate the
assigning of a variable. Auxiliary Input #2 Tag _______________
I/O Type Mismatch - The Auxiliary Input #2 Type _______________

computer will not let you
assign the same I/O point #
to incompatible transducer
{PL} Auxiliary Input #3 I/O Point Number _______________
types; i.e., an I/O point
cannot be assigned as a
Auxiliary Input #3 Tag _______________
temperature input for Meter Auxiliary Input #3 Type _______________
Run #1 and a pressure input
for Meter Run #2. If the I/O
Type Mismatch message is {PL} Auxiliary Input #4 I/O Point Number _______________
displayed, recheck the I/O.
Auxiliary Input #4 Tag _______________
Shared Transducers -
Enter the same I/O point to
Auxiliary Input #4 Type _______________
share transducers between
meter runs.
Correcting a Mistake -
Enter an I/O point # of [0] to
cancel an incorrectly entered
I/O point #, then enter the
correct number.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-9

2.5.7. Meter Run Settings

Config Meter Runs - Enter [1], [2], [3] or [4] at Config Meter "n" of the Misc Setup menu to open
Physical I/O information for the following entries:
up to 4 meter runs can be
entered. Transducers that Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
are not assigned an I/O point
will not be available for {PL} Flow I/O Point Number _______ _______ _______ _______
display or further
Enter the number of the I/O point used to input the flow signal for each meter run. Flowmeter
configuration. rd th
pulse inputs can only be assigned to the 3 input channel of any combo module and 4 input
channel of A Type combo modules. When working with compact provers using pulse interpolation,
rd th
you must assign each of the flowmeter pulse signals to the 3 or 4 channel of an E Type combo
Assigning I/O Point #99 - module.
This indicates that the
associated variable will be Flow Transmitter Tag _______ _______ _______ _______
available for display and be Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this flowmeter on the LCD display.
used in all calculations, but
will not be obtained via a live {PL} Dual Pulse Fidelity Check? _______ _______ _______ _______
input. The variable value is
usually downloaded into the Enter [Y] to enable 'Level A' pulse fidelity and security checking for this meter run (API MPMS
rd
flow computer database via a Chapter 5, Section 5). The 'Flow I/O Point' entered above must correspond to the 3 input channel
communication port or via a of an E Combo Module. The flowmeter pulses are physically wired to Input Channels 3 and 4 of
user variable statement. the E Combo Module. Enter [N] to disable dual pulse fidelity checking.
{PL} Temperature I/O Point # _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the I/O point number used to input the temperature signal for each meter run. Duplicate I/O
assignments are allowed when a sensor is shared by more than one meter run.
{PL} Temperature Transducer Tag _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this temperature transducer on the LCD display.
{PL} Temperature Transducer Type_______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the Temperature Transmitter Type:
20mA linear output
{PL} Pressure I/O Point # _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the I/O point number used to input the pressure signal for each meter run. Duplicate I/O
assignments are allowed when a sensor is shared by more than one meter run.
Pressure Transducer Tag _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this pressure transducer on the LCD display.
{PL} Density I/O Point # _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the I/O point number used to input the density signal for each meter run. Duplicate I/O
assignments are allowed when a densitometer is shared by more than one meter run. Digital pulse
th
densitometers can only be assigned I/O point numbers corresponding to the 4 input channel of a
rd th
'B' Type Combo Module or the 3 and 4 input channels of an E/D Combo Module.
{PL} Densitometer Tag _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density transducer on the LCD display.
2-10 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4

INFO - Characters in { } {PL} Densitometer Type _______ _______ _______ _______
Enter the Densitometer Type:
presses. 0 = No density type selected
1 = 4-20mA output signal linear with API gravity units (many API devices are actually designed
to drive non-linear API chart recorders; they are usually linear with relative density units)
2 = 4-20mA output signal linear with relative density (SG) units
configuration option to write 3 = 4-20mA output signal linear with grs/cc density
down the corresponding 4 = Solartron digital pulse
settings you entered in the 5 = Sarasota digital pulse
flow computer. 6 = UGC digital pulse.
not appear on the display or {PL} Flowing/Reference Conditions_______ _______ _______ _______
in OmniCom. Depending on This entry applies only if you selected a 4-20mA type densitometer in the previous entry Specify if
the various configuration the density transducer signal represents density at:
settings of your specific
metering system, only those 0 = Flowing temperature and pressure
configuration options which 1 = Reference temperature and pressure
are applicable will be
displayed. {PL} Density Temp I/O Point # _______ _______ _______ _______
Enter the I/O point number used to input the signal applied to compensate for temperature effects
at the densitometer for each meter run.
If the densitometer has no temperature sensor fitted, enter the same I/O point assignment as the
meter run temperature sensor.
{PL} Density Temperature Tag _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density temperature transducer on the LCD
display.
{PL} Density Temperature Type _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the Densitometer Temperature Transmitter Type:
20mA linear output
{PL} Density Pressure I/O Point # _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the I/O point number used to input the signal applied to compensate for pressure effects at
the densitometer for each meter run.
If the densitometer has no pressure sensor fitted, enter the same I/O point assignment as the
meter run pressure sensor.
{PL} Density Pressure Tag _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density pressure transducer on the LCD
display.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-11

2.5.8. Prover Settings

INFO - Characters in { } Enter [Y] at Config Prove ? of the Misc Setup menu to open the following
refer to password levels. entries:
presses.
Inlet Outlet
TIP - Use the blank lines {PL} Prover Temperature I/O Point Number __________ __________
configuration option to write Enter the I/O point number used to input the prover inlet/outlet temperature signal. Inlet and outlet
down the corresponding temperature sensor readings are averaged to determine the actual prover temperature.
settings you entered in the To use the meter run temperature, enter [0] for both inlet and outlet.
flow computer. If there is only one temperature sensor, enter [0] for outlet or enter the same number for both
Some of these entries may prover inlet and outlet.
in OmniCom. Depending on {PL} Prover Temperature Transducer Tag __________ __________
the various configuration Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this temperature transducer on the LCD display.
metering system, only those {PL} Prover Temperature Transmitter Type __________ __________
are applicable will be Enter the Prover Temperature Transmitter Type:
displayed. 0 = RTD probes that follow the DIN curve and = 0.0385
Configuring the Prover - 20mA linear output
When an input and output
transducer signal is available, {PL} Prover Pressure I/O Point Number __________ __________
the computer uses the
average of both signals. Enter the I/O point number used to input the prover inlet/outlet pressure signal. Inlet and outlet
Otherwise, it uses the signal pressure sensor readings are averaged to determine the actual prover pressure.
from the available transducer. To use the meter run pressure, enter [0] for both inlet and outlet.
The pressure or temperature If there is only one pressure sensor, enter [0] for outlet or enter the same number for both prover
of the meter run being proved inlet and outlet.
will be used to compensate
the prover if neither left or {PL} Prover Pressure Transducer Tag __________ __________
right transducer is assigned
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this pressure transducer on the LCD display.
to an I/O point #.
{PL} Prover Plenum Pressure I/O Point Number _______________

Applies only when a Brooks compact prover is specified. Enter the I/O point number used to input
the compact prover plenum pressure sensor input.
{PL} Prover Plenum Pressure Tag _______________

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this plenum pressure transducer on the LCD
display.
2-12 22/26.71+ w 05/99

2.5.9. PID Control Settings

Proportional Integral Enter [1], [2], [3] or [4] at Config PID ? "n" of the Misc Setup menu to open
Derivative (PID) -- For the following entries:
practical reasons we refer to
PID Control Loops in this Loop #1 Loop #2 Loop #3 Loop #4
manual. However, your flow
computer actually performs {PL} Assign Primary Variable _______ _______ _______ _______
the Proportional Integral (PI) Enter the database index number of the primary variable in the PID loop (see the sidebar).
function and does not apply
the derivative term. The Remarks ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________
addition of the derivative term Enter a remark in this 16-character field to identify the function of each variable assignment.
would greatly complicate
tuning of the control loop and {PL} Primary Action (F/R) _______ _______ _______ _______
besides is not normally
Enter [F] (forward action) if the value of the primary variable increases as the controller output %
applicable to the types of flow
increases. Enter [R] (reverse action) if the value of the primary variable decreases as the controller
and pressure control used in
output % increases.
pipelines.
{PL} Remote Setpoint I/O Point # _______ _______ _______ _______
Enter the I/O point number that the remote set point analog signal is connected to (01-24). Assign
Valid Assignments - Any
this point to 99 in cases where the set point will be downloaded via a communication port. Enter
32-bit integer or floating point
[0] if you will not be using a remote setpoint.
variable within the database
can be assigned to be the
{PL} Assign Secondary Variable _______ _______ _______ _______
primary or secondary
controlled variable (see Enter the database index number of the secondary variable in the PID loop (see the sidebar).
Volume 4 for a complete
listing of database addresses
Remarks ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________
and index numbers). Enter a remark in this 16-character field to identify the function of each variable assignment.
{PL} Secondary Action (F/R) _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter [F] (forward action) if the value of the primary variable increases as the controller output %
increases. Enter [R] (reverse action) if the value of the primary variable decreases as the controller
output % increases.
{PL} Error Select (L/H) _______ _______ _______ _______

This entry determines the circumstances under which the primary or secondary variables are
controlled. Enter [L] for low or [H] for high error select, according to the following modes:
MODE #1 MODE #2
Are both primary and secondary actions Are both primary and secondary actions
forward? forward?
yes no yes no
Enter [L] for Low yes Is secondary Enter [H] for High Is secondary
Error Select action forward? Error Select action forward?
no no
Enter [H] for High Enter [L] for Low
Error Select Error Select
Mode #1: The controller will attempt to control the primary variable but will switch to controlling
the secondary variable, should the controller be trying to drive the secondary variable ABOVE its
setpoint. An example of this mode would be controlling flow rate (primary) while not exceeding a
MAXIMUM delivery pressure (secondary).
Mode #2: The controller will attempt to control primary variable but will switch to controlling the
secondary variable, should the controller be trying to drive the secondary variable BELOW its
setpoint. An example of this mode would be controlling flow rate (primary) while not dropping
below a MINIMUM pressure value (secondary).
{PL} Startup Mode (L/M) _______ _______ _______ _______

This entry determines how the computer handles a system reset such as a momentary loss of
power. Enter [L] (Last) to cause the PID loop to stay in the operating mode it was last in before the
system reset. Enter [M] (Manual) to cause the PID loop to startup with the PID loop in manual
control mode and with the valve open % as it was before the system reset.
{PL} PID Tag _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter an 8-character tag name to identify the PID controller output signal on the LCD display.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-13

2.5.10. Analog Output Settings

INFO - Characters in { } Press [n] [Enter] at Config D/A Out "n" of the Misc Setup menu to open the
refer to password levels. following entries (n = Analog Output #1 through #12):
presses. Assign @ 4mA @ 20mA
TIP - Use the blank lines {L1} Analog Output #1 _________ _________ _________
provided next to each Under Assign, enter the database index number of the variable that will be assigned to the
configuration option to write digital-to-analog output points.
Under at 4mA and at 20mA, enter the required scaling parameters in engineering units at 4mA
and 20mA (e.g.: For Meter #1 Net Flow Rate assign 7102. Typical scaling might be 4mA=0.0
flow computer.
bbls/hr and 20mA=1000.0 bbls/hr).
not appear on the display or Remark _______________________________
Enter a remark in this 16-character field which identifies and documents the function of each
digital-to-analog output.
metering system, only those
configuration options which {L1} Analog Output #2 _________ _________ _________
displayed.
{L1} Remark _______________________________
{L1} Analog Output #3 _________ _________ _________

{L1} Remark _______________________________
{L1} Analog Output #4 _________ _________ _________

{L1} Remark _______________________________
{L1} Analog Output #5 _________ _________ _________

{L1} Remark _______________________________
{L1} Analog Output #6 _________ _________ _________

{L1} Remark _______________________________
{L1} Analog Output #7 _________ _________ _________

{L1} Remark _______________________________
{L1} Analog Output #8 _________ _________ _________

{L1} Remark _______________________________
{L1} Analog Output #9 _________ _________ _________

{L1} Remark _______________________________
{L1} Analog Output #10 _________ _________ _________

{L1} Remark _______________________________
{L1} Analog Output #11 _________ _________ _________

{L1} Remark _______________________________
{L1} Analog Output #12 _________ _________ _________

{L1} Remark _______________________________
2-14 22/26.71+ w 05/99

2.5.11. Front Panel Counter Settings

Enter [Y] at Front Pnl Counters of the Misc Setup menu to open the
following entries:
Counter A Counter B Counter C
{L1} Assign Front Panel Counter _________ _________ _________

Enter the database index number of the accumulator variable that will be output to this
electromechanical counter.
3
The unit of measure is the same as that shown on the LCD for the totalizer (i.e., barrels, klbs, m ,
etc.) The maximum count rate is limited to 10 counts per second. Count rates higher than 10
pulses per second will cause the computer to remember how many counts did not get output and
continue to output after the flow stops until all buffered counts are output.
{L1} Remarks _________ _________ _________

Enter a remark in this 16-character field which identifies and documents the function of each front
panel counter.
{L1} Pulses/Unit _________ _________ _________

Enter the number of pulses per unit (volume, mass, energy).
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-15

2.5.12. Programmable Boolean Statements

Program Booleans - These Enter [Y] at Program Booleans ? of the Misc Setup menu to open the
64 Boolean statements are following entries:
evaluated every 100 msec
starting at Point 1025 Boolean Point 10xx Equation or Statement Comment or Remark
continuing through 1088.
Each statement can contain {PL} 25: _______________________ _______________________
up to 3 Boolean variables,
optionally preceded by the {PL} 26: _______________________ _______________________
slash (/) denoting the NOT
Function and separated by a {PL} 27: _______________________ _______________________
valid Boolean operator:
Operator Symbol {PL} 28: _______________________ _______________________
NOT /
AND &
{PL} 29: _______________________ _______________________
OR + {PL} 30: _______________________ _______________________
EXOR *
EQUAL = {PL} 31: _______________________ _______________________
IF )
GOTO G {PL} 32: _______________________ _______________________
MOVE :
COMPARE %
{PL} 33: _______________________ _______________________
INDIRECT {PL} 34: _______________________ _______________________
E.g.: 1025 1002&/1003
Boolean 1025 is true when {PL} 35: _______________________ _______________________
point 1002 is true AND point
1003 is NOT true. {PL} 36: _______________________ _______________________
Note: Points 1002 and 1003
in this example reflect the {PL} 37: _______________________ _______________________
status of Physical Digital I/O
Points 2 and 3.
{PL} 38: _______________________ _______________________
There are no limitations as to {PL} 39: _______________________ _______________________
what Boolean points can be
used in a statement. {PL} 40: _______________________ _______________________
Statements can contain the
results from other {PL} 41: _______________________ _______________________
statements.
E.g.: 1026 /1025+1105 {PL} 42: _______________________ _______________________
Boolean 1026 is true when
Boolean 1025 is NOT true
{PL} 43: _______________________ _______________________
OR Point 1105 is true. {PL} 44: _______________________ _______________________
Using the = operator, the
result of a statement can {PL} 45: _______________________ _______________________
initiate a command.
E.g.: 1027 1719=1026 {PL} 46: _______________________ _______________________
Request a Snapshot Report
when Boolean 1026 is true. {PL} 47: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 48: _______________________ _______________________
Note: See Volume 4 for
detailed list of Booleans and {PL} 49: _______________________ _______________________
Status Commands.
{PL} 50: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 51: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 52: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 53: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 54: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 55: _______________________ _______________________
2-16 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Boolean Point 10xx Equation or Statement Comment or Remark

TIP - Use the blank lines {PL} 56: _______________________ _______________________
configuration option to write {PL} 57: _______________________ _______________________
settings you entered in the {PL} 58: _______________________ _______________________
flow computer.
{PL} 59: _______________________ _______________________
Program Booleans - These {PL} 60: _______________________ _______________________
64 Boolean statements are
evaluated every 100 msec {PL} 61: _______________________ _______________________
starting at Point 1025
continuing through 1088. {PL} 62: _______________________ _______________________
Each statement can contain
up to 3 Boolean variables, {PL} 63: _______________________ _______________________
optionally preceded by the
slash (/) denoting the NOT {PL} 64: _______________________ _______________________
Function and separated by a
valid Boolean operator: {PL} 65: _______________________ _______________________
Operator Symbol
NOT / {PL} 66: _______________________ _______________________
AND &
{PL} 67: _______________________ _______________________
OR +
EXOR * {PL} 68: _______________________ _______________________
EQUAL =
IF ) {PL} 69: _______________________ _______________________
GOTO G
MOVE : {PL} 70: _______________________ _______________________
COMPARE %
INDIRECT
{PL} 71: _______________________ _______________________
E.g.: 1025 1002&/1003 {PL} 72: _______________________ _______________________
point 1002 is true AND point {PL} 73: _______________________ _______________________
1003 is NOT true.
Note: Points 1002 and 1003 {PL} 74: _______________________ _______________________
in this example reflect the
status of Physical Digital I/O {PL} 75: _______________________ _______________________
Points 2 and 3.
{PL} 76: _______________________ _______________________
There are no limitations as to
what Boolean points can be {PL} 77: _______________________ _______________________
used in a statement.
Statements can contain the {PL} 78: _______________________ _______________________
results from other
statements. {PL} 79: _______________________ _______________________
E.g.: 1026 /1025+1105
{PL} 80: _______________________ _______________________
Boolean 1025 is NOT true
OR Point 1105 is true.
{PL} 81: _______________________ _______________________
Using the = operator, the {PL} 82: _______________________ _______________________
result of a statement can
initiate a command. {PL} 83: _______________________ _______________________
E.g.: 1027 1719=1026
Request a Snapshot Report {PL} 84: _______________________ _______________________
when Boolean 1026 is true.
{PL} 85: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 86: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 87: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 88: _______________________ _______________________
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-17

2.5.13. Programmable Variable Statements

Programmable Variables - Enter [Y] at Program Variables ? of the Misc Setup menu to open the
These 64 variable statements following entries:
are evaluated every 500
msec starting at the
statement that determines Prog Variable 70xx Equation or Statement Comment or Remark
the value of Points 7025
through 7088. Each {PL} 25: _______________________ _______________________
statement can contain up to 3
variables or constants. {PL} 26: _______________________ _______________________
Variables can be optionally
preceded by the $ symbol {PL} 27: _______________________ _______________________
denoting the ABSOLUTE
value of the variable is to be {PL} 28: _______________________ _______________________
used. Constants are
identified by placing a # {PL} 29: _______________________ _______________________
symbol ahead of the number.
These and other operators {PL} 30: _______________________ _______________________
are:
Operator Symbol {PL} 31: _______________________ _______________________
ABSOLUTE $ {PL} 32: _______________________ _______________________
CONSTANT #
POWER & {PL} 33: _______________________ _______________________
MULTIPLY *
{PL} 34: _______________________ _______________________
DIVIDE /
ADD + {PL} 35: _______________________ _______________________
SUBTRACT -
EQUAL = {PL} 36: _______________________ _______________________
IF )
{PL} 37: _______________________ _______________________
GOTO G
MOVE : {PL} 38: _______________________ _______________________
COMPARE %
INDIRECT
{PL} 39: _______________________ _______________________
The order of precedence is: {PL} 40: _______________________ _______________________
1) ABSOLUTE
2) POWER {PL} 41: _______________________ _______________________
3) MULTIPLY/DIVIDE
4) ADD/SUBTRACT {PL} 42: _______________________ _______________________
In cases where operators {PL} 43: _______________________ _______________________
have the same precedence,
statements are evaluated left {PL} 44: _______________________ _______________________
to right.
E.g.: The value of floating {PL} 45: _______________________ _______________________
point variable 7035 is defined
as: {PL} 46: _______________________ _______________________
7035:7027&#0.5*7026
The power operator is {PL} 47: _______________________ _______________________
evaluated first (the value of
Point 7035 is set equal to the
{PL} 48: _______________________ _______________________
square root of the number
contained in Point 7027) and
{PL} 49: _______________________ _______________________
the result is multiplied by the
{PL} 50: _______________________ _______________________
number stored in variable
7026. Note that statements {PL} 51: _______________________ _______________________
can contain the results of
other statements. (See {PL} 52: _______________________ _______________________
OmniCom Help for more
information by pressing [F1] {PL} 53: _______________________ _______________________
on your PC keyboard in the
Configure Variable {PL} 54: _______________________ _______________________
Statement menu.)
{PL} 55: _______________________ _______________________
2-18 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Prog Variable 70xx Equation or Statement Comment or Remark

TIP - Use the blank lines {PL} 56: _______________________ _______________________
configuration option to write {PL} 57: _______________________ _______________________
settings you enter in the flow {PL} 58: _______________________ _______________________
computer.
{PL} 59: _______________________ _______________________
Note: See Volume 4 for {PL} 60: _______________________ _______________________

detailed list of Booleans and
Status Commands {PL} 61: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 62: _______________________ _______________________
Valid Numeric Variables - {PL} 63: _______________________ _______________________
These are any long integer or
floating point number within {PL} 64: _______________________ _______________________
the database (Points 5000-
8999), including Boolean {PL} 65: _______________________ _______________________
variables. For the purpose
of evaluation, Boolean {PL} 66: _______________________ _______________________
variables have the value of
1.0 if they are True and 0.0 if {PL} 67: _______________________ _______________________
they are False.
{PL} 68: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 69: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 70: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 71: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 72: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 73: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 74: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 75: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 76: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 77: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 78: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 79: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 80: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 81: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 82: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 83: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 84: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 85: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 86: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 87: _______________________ _______________________
{PL} 88: _______________________ _______________________
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-19

2.5.14. User Display Settings

Valid Index Number Enter 1 through 8 for the selected user display at User Display ? n of the
Assignments - Any 32-bit Misc Setup menu to open the following password Level 1 {L1} entries:
integer or floating point
variable within the database
can be assigned to be viewed
via a user display (see User Display #1 Key Press Sequence [ ][ ][ ][ ]
Volume 4 for a complete Using the keys marked A through Z, enter the sequence of key presses needed to recall the
listing). selected user display (see the side bar for details). A maximum of 4 keys are allowed. User key
press sequences take priority over any existing resident key press sequences.
Valid Key Press
Sequences - You may select
1st Variable Tag _______________
a sequence of up to 4 key Enter an 8-character tag name used to identify the display variable on the LCD display.
presses to recall each
display. This does not count 1st Variable Index Number _______________
the [Display/Enter] key Enter the database index number of the variable that you want to appear on the LCD display. Each
press which must be used to variable within the flow computer database is assigned an index number or address. Any Boolean
signal the end of the integer or floating point variable within the database can be displayed.
sequence. Each key is
identified by the red A 1st Variable Decimal Point Position _______________
through Z character on each
Enter the number of digits to the right of the decimal point for the variable. Valid entries are 0
valid key.
through 7. The computer will display each variable using the display resolution that you have
Valid keys are listed below selected, except in cases where the number is too large or too small. In either case, the flow
[A] - also labeled [Gross] computer will adjust the decimal position or default to scientific display mode.
[B] - also labeled [Net]
[C] - also labeled [Mass] Tag Index # Decimal Points
[D] - also labeled [Energy] nd
[E] - also labeled [S.G./API]
2 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
[F] - also labeled [Control] rd
[G] - also labeled [Temp]
3 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
[H] - also labeled [Press]
4th Variable ____________ ________ ____________
[I] - also labeled [Density]
[J] - also labeled [D.P.]
[K] - also labeled [Orifice]
[L] - also labeled [Meter] User Display #2 Key Press Sequence [ ][ ][ ][ ]
[M] - also labeled [Time]
[N] - also labeled [Counts] Tag Index # Decimal Points
[O] - also labeled [Factor] st
1 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
[P] - also labeled [Preset]
nd
[Q] - also labeled [Batch] 2 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
[R] - also labeled [Analysis]
rd
[S] - also labeled [Print] 3 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
[T] - also labeled [Prove]
th
[U] - also labeled [Status] 4 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
[V] - also labeled [Alarms]
[W] - also labeled [Product]
[X] - also labeled [Setup]
[Y] - also labeled [Input]
User Display #3 Key Press Sequence [ ][ ][ ][ ]
[Z] - also labeled [Output] Tag Index # Decimal Points
The [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] (Up/ st
Down/Left/Right arrow) keys 1 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
and the [Prog], [Alpha nd
Shift] and [Clear] keys 2 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
cannot be used in a key rd
press sequence. 3 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
Note: The A through Z th
4 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
keys are used simply to
identify key presses. The
[Alpha Shift] key does not
need to be used when
recalling user displays.
2-20 22/26.71+ w 05/99


Valid Index Number Tag Index # Decimal Points
Assignments - Any 32-bit st
integer or floating point
1 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
variable within the database nd
can be assigned to be viewed
2 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
via a user display (see rd
3 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
Volume 4 for a complete
listing). 4th Variable ____________ ________ ____________
Valid Key Press
Sequences - You may select User Display #5 Key Press Sequence [ ][ ][ ][ ]
a sequence of up to 4 key
presses to recall each Tag Index # Decimal Points
display. This does not count st
the [Display/Enter] key 1 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
press which must be used to nd
signal the end of the 2 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
sequence. Each key is
identified by the red A 3rd Variable ____________ ________ ____________
through Z character on each th
valid key. 4 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
Valid keys are listed below
[A] - also labeled [Gross]
[B] - also labeled [Net]
[C] - also labeled [Mass]
Tag Index # Decimal Points
[D] - also labeled [Energy]
[E] - also labeled [S.G./API] 1st Variable ____________ ________ ____________
[F] - also labeled [Control]
[G] - also labeled [Temp] 2nd Variable ____________ ________ ____________
[H] - also labeled [Press]
rd
[I] - also labeled [Density] 3 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
[J] - also labeled [D.P.]
[K] - also labeled [Orifice] 4th Variable ____________ ________ ____________
[L] - also labeled [Meter]
[M] - also labeled [Time]
[N] - also labeled [Counts] User Display #7 Key Press Sequence [ ][ ][ ][ ]
[O] - also labeled [Factor]
[P] - also labeled [Preset] Tag Index # Decimal Points
[Q] - also labeled [Batch] st
[R] - also labeled [Analysis] 1 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
[S] - also labeled [Print] nd
[T] - also labeled [Prove] 2 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
[U] - also labeled [Status] rd
[V] - also labeled [Alarms] 3 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
[W] - also labeled [Product] th
[X] - also labeled [Setup]
4 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
[Y] - also labeled [Input]
[Z] - also labeled [Output]
The [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] (Up/ User Display #8 Key Press Sequence [ ][ ][ ][ ]
Down/Left/Right arrow) keys
and the [Prog], [Alpha Tag Index # Decimal Points
Shift] and [Clear] keys st
1 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
cannot be used in a key
nd
press sequence. 2 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
3rd Variable ____________ ________ ____________
th
4 Variable ____________ ________ ____________
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-21

2.5.15. Digital I/O Point Settings

TIP - Use the blank lines Enter 1 through 24 for the selected digital I/O Point at Config Digital n of
provided next to each the Misc Setup menu to open the following password Level 1 {L1} entries:
configuration option to write
down the corresponding Assign Pulse Width Pulse/Unit or Delay On Delay Off
flow computer.
Some of these entries may Digital I/O #1 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
in OmniCom. Depending on Remark _______________
metering system, only those Digital I/O #2 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Remark _______________
displayed.
Digital I/O #3 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Config Digital n - Assign Remark _______________
each physical I/O point to a
Modbus address of a
Boolean variable. There are Digital I/O #4 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
no limitations as to what
Boolean points can be Remark _______________
assigned to physical I/O
points. Enter [0] (zero) for
Modbus control. Digital I/O #5 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Remark _______________
Assigning as Pulse
Outputs - Meter and Station
Accumulators may be output Digital I/O #6 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
in the form of pulses.
Remark _______________
Pulse Width - Pulse width is
measured using 10msec
ticks; i.e., 100 = 1 second. Digital I/O #7 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Remark _______________
Pulse per Unit - Pulse per
unit entry can be used to
provide unit conversion (e.g.: Digital I/O #8 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
entering 4.2 pulses per barrel
will give 1 pulse every 10 Remark _______________
gallons as there are 42
gallons in a barrel). The units
of volume, mass and energy Digital I/O #9 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
flow are the same as is
displayed on the LCD. Remark _______________
Assigning as Control Digital I/O #10 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Output - Any internal alarm
or Boolean can be output. Remark _______________
Digital I/O #11 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Remark _______________
Digital I/O #12 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Remark _______________
2-22 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Assign Pulse Width Pulse/Unit or Delay On Delay Off

Delay On/Off - Used to delay
or stretch a control output. Digital I/O #13 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
The delay is measured using
100msec ticks; i.e., 10 = 1 Remark _______________
second.
Digital I/O #14 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Assigning as Status or
Command Inputs - Remark _______________
Switches, etc., can be used
to trigger events within the
flow computer, such as end a Digital I/O #15 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
batch or start a prove
sequence (see the facing Remark _______________
page for more details).
1700 Dummy Boolean -

Digital I/O #16 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Assign all physical I/O points
which will be used only in
Remark _______________
Boolean statements for
sequencing or control to Digital I/O #17 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
1700. This sets up the points
as an input only. Remark _______________
Note: See Volume 4 for
valid assignments. Digital I/O #18 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Remark _______________
Digital I/O #19 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Remark _______________
Digital I/O #20 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Remark _______________
Digital I/O #21 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Remark _______________
Digital I/O #22 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Remark _______________
Digital I/O #23 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Remark _______________
Digital I/O #24 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Remark _______________
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-23

2.5.16. Serial Input / Output Settings

Baud Rates Available - Enter [1], [2], [3] or [4] at Serial I/O n of the Misc Setup menu to open the
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, following entries:
9600, 19200, 38400.
Port #1 Port #2 Port #3 Port #4
Data Bits - 7 or 8 - 7 for
ASCII Modbus, 8 for RTU {L1} Baud Rate _______ _______ _______ _______
Modbus.
{L1} Number of Stop Bits _______ _______ _______ _______
Stop Bits - 0, 1 or 2.
{L1} Number of Data Bits _______ _______ _______ _______
Parity Bit - Odd, Even,
None. {L1} Parity Bit (Even/Odd/None) _______ _______ _______ _______
Transmitter Carrier Key {L1} Transmit Carrier Key Delay _______ _______ _______ _______
Delay - Delays are
approximate only. 0=msec, Enter one of the following options:
1=50msec, 2=100msec, 0 = 0 msec delay 2 = 100 msec delay
3=150msec. 1 = 50 msec delay 3 = 150 msec delay
You must enter [0] for Transmitter Carrier Key Delay for any port that will be used with a shared
Modbus Type - Select the printer.
protocol type which matches
the Modbus master device. If {L1} Serial Port Type _______
the master can support either This entry corresponds to Serial Port #1 only. Enter one of the following options:
ASCII or RTU, choose RTU
0 = Printer
protocol as it is approximately
twice as efficient as the 1 = Modbus RTU
ASCII protocol. Serial Ports
#3 and #4 have additional {L1} Modbus Protocol Type _______ _______ _______
protocol options. This entry does not apply to Serial Port #1. Enter the type of protocol to be used on this port:
0 = Modbus RTU
Modicon Compatible - 1 = Modbus ASCII
OmniCom will not operate if 2 = Modbus RTU (modem).
downloading configuration
with this entry set to Y. Serial Port #4 has the following additional options:
3 = Allen Bradley Full Duplex
4 = Allen Bradley Half Duplex
Mixed protocols are not allowed on a communication link. All devices must use the same protocol
type. The RTU protocol is preferred as it is twice the speed of the ASCII. Selecting 'Modbus RTU
Modem' provides RTU protocol with relaxed timing which is usually needed when communicating
via smart modems. These modems have been found to insert inter-character delays which cause
a premature end of message to be detected by the flow computer.
IMPORTANT: You must select either 'Modbus RTU' or 'Modbus RTU Modem' protocol for the
port that will be used to communicate with OmniCom PC configuration software.
{L1} Modbus ID _______ _______ _______

This entry does not apply to Serial Port #1 when a printer is selected as the port type. Enter the
Modbus slave ID number that this serial port will respond to (1 through 247 acceptable). This entry
will be disabled for Serial Port #1 if a printer is selected as the port type.
2-24 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Port #1 Port #2 Port #3 Port #4

INFO - Characters in { } {L1} Modicon Compatible (Y/N) _______ _______ _______ _______
Enter [Y] to configure these Modbus ports to be compatible with Modicon PLC equipment (e.g.:
984 series) and DCS systems (e.g.: Honeywell TDC3000 systems using the Advanced Process
presses.
Manager APM-SI). This entry will be disabled for Serial Port #1 if a printer is selected as the port
type.
TIP - Use the blank lines In this mode the point number indexes requested and transmitted while using the Modbus RTU
provided next to each modes are actually one less than the index number documented in this manual. ASCII mode
configuration option to write transmissions use the address documented in this manual. Data is counted in numbers of 16 bit
down the corresponding registers rather than points. i.e., To request two 4 byte IEEE floating point variables, index
settings you entered in the numbers 7101 and 7102, would require the host to ask for 4 registers starting at index 7100. IEEE
flow computer. Floating Point data bytes are transmitted in swapped format:
not appear on the display or NORMAL IEEE FLOAT FORMAT ORDER TRANSMITTED
Byte #1 Byte #2 Byte #3 Byte #4 Byte #1 Byte #2 Byte #3 Byte #4
settings of your specific Biased MS LS LS Biased MS
Mantissa Mantissa
metering system, only those Exponent Mantissa Mantissa Mantissa Exponent Mantissa
displayed. {L1} CRC Enabled _______ _______ _______ _______
Many protocols use either a CRC, LRC or BCC error check to ensure that data received is not
corrupted. The flow computer can be configured to ignore the error checking on incoming
Skip CRC/LCR Check - If messages. This allows software developers an easy means of debugging communications
you have disabled the error software. Error checking should only be disabled temporarily when debugging the master
checking on incoming slave communication link. The computer expects dummy characters in place of the CRC, LRC
messages, you must or BCC.
substitute dummy bytes in Enter [Y] to perform error checking on incoming messages. For maximum data integrity always
the message string. enter [Y] during normal running conditions. Enter [N] to disable error checking on incoming
Outgoing messages will messages. This entry will be disabled for Serial Port #1 if a printer is selected as the port type.
always include the error
checking bytes.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-25

2.5.17. Custom Modbus Data Packet Settings

INFO - Packets defined are Custom Modbus Data Packets are provided to reduce the number of polls
usually read-only and must needed to read multiple variables which may be in different areas of the
always be retrieved as a
packet. When Modicon 984
database. Groups of data points of any type of data can be concatenated into
is selected these packet one packet by entering each data group starting index numbers 001, 201 and
setup entries are used to 401. The number of data bytes in a custom packet in non-Modicon compatible
define a logical array of mode cannot exceed 250 (RTU mode) or 500 (ASCII mode). When Modicon
variables which can be read compatible is selected, the number of data bytes in a custom packet cannot
or written in any grouping.
exceed 400 (RTU mode) or 800 (ASCII mode).
The number of data points is
always input in terms of Enter [1], [2] or [3] to select a data packet at Custom Packet n of the Misc
Omni logical elements; i.e.,
an IEEE floating point Setup menu to open the entries below. Under Index #, enter the database
number comprises two 16-bit address or Modbus index number for each start data point of each group. Under
words but is considered one Points, enter the number of consecutive data points to include in each data
logical element. group.
INFO - Characters in { } Custom Modbus Data Packet #1 (Addressed at 001)

Characters in [ ] refer to key {L1} Index # | Points Index # | Points Index # | Points Index # | Points
presses.
#1_______|_____ #2_______|_____ #3_______|_____ #4_______|_____
#5_______|_____ #6_______|_____ #7_______|_____ #8_______|_____
configuration option to write #9_______|_____ #10_______|_____ #11_______|_____ #12_______|_____
settings you entered in the #13_______|_____ #14_______|_____ #15_______|_____ #16_______|_____
flow computer.
Some of these entries may #17_______|_____ #18_______|_____ #19_______|_____ #20_______|_____
the various configuration Custom Modbus Data Packet #2 (Addressed at 201)
metering system, only those {L1} Index # | Points Index # | Points Index # | Points Index # | Points
are applicable will be #1_______|_____ #2_______|_____ #3_______|_____ #4_______|_____
displayed.
#5_______|_____ #6_______|_____ #7_______|_____ #8_______|_____
Custom Modbus Data Packet #3 (Addressed at 401)

{L1} Index # | Points Index # | Points Index # | Points Index # | Points
#1_______|_____ #2_______|_____ #3_______|_____ #4_______|_____
#5_______|_____ #6_______|_____ #7_______|_____ #8_______|_____
#9_______|_____ #10_______|_____ #11_______|_____ #12_______|_____
#13_______|_____ #14_______|_____ #15_______|_____ #16_______|_____
#17_______|_____ #18_______|_____ #19_______|_____ #20_______|_____
2-26 22/26.71+ w 05/99

2.5.18. Programmable Logic Controller Setup

INFO - Characters in { } Note: See Technical Bulletin TB-960702 Communicating with Allen-
refer to password levels. Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers in Volume 5 for
presses.
information on the PLC Group n submenu.

configuration option to write 2.5.19. Archive File Setup
settings you entered in the Note: See Technical Bulletin TB-960703 Storing Archive Data within the
flow computer.
Flow Computer in Volume 5 for information on the Archive File n
submenu.
displayed.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-27

2.5.20. Peer-to-Peer Communications Settings

INFO - Characters in { } Serial Port #2 of the flow computer can be configured to act as a simple
refer to password levels. Modbus slave port or as a peer-to-peer communication link. Using the peer-to-
presses.
peer link allows multiple flow computers to be interconnected and share data.
Enter [Y] at Peer / Peer Comm (Y) ? of the Misc Setup menu to open the
TIP - Use the blank lines following submenu:
configuration option to write {L1} Activate Redundancy Mode _______________
settings you entered in the The active redundancy mode feature allows two flow computers to operate as a pair. Each flow
flow computer. computer receives the same process signals and performs the same calculations; i.e., in
Some of these entries may redundancy. This mode is typically used in critical applications where failure of a flow computer
not appear on the display or cannot be tolerated.
in OmniCom. Depending on Enter [Y] to allow both flow computers to manage the peer-to-peer link between them and
the various configuration automatically switch between being the master or slave computer. Important data such as meter
settings of your specific factors and PID control settings can be continually exchanged between flow computers ensuring
metering system, only those that at any time, should a failure occur to one, the other unit would be able to assume control of the
configuration options which PID and ticketing functions.
are applicable will be The redundancy mode requires that four digital I/O ports be cross-connected to sense watchdog
displayed. failure modes using the following points 2714=Input master status, 2864=Output Master status,
2713 Input watchdog status, 2863 = Output of watchdog status. (See Technical Bulletin TB-
980402 in Volume 5.)
TIP - For maximum
efficiency, always start {L1} Next Master in Sequence _______________
Modbus ID numbers from 1.
Enter the slave number of the next flow computer in sequence in the peer-to-peer communication
sequence to pass over control. After the flow computer completes all of it's transactions it will
attempt to pass over master control of the Modbus link to this Modbus ID. For maximum
efficiency, always start Modbus ID definitions from 1.
Enter the Modbus ID of this flow computer if there are no other peers in sequence on the
communication link.
Enter [0] to disable the peer-to-peer feature and use Serial Port #2 as a standard Modbus
slave port.
{L1} Last Master in Sequence ID # _______________

Enter the slave number of the last Omni (the highest Modbus ID number) in the peer-to-peer
communication sequence. This is required for error recovery. Should this flow computer be unable
to hand over control to the 'next master in sequence' (see previous entry), it will attempt to
establish communications with a Modbus slave with a higher Modbus ID. It will keep trying until
the ID number exceeds this entry. At that point the flow computer will start at Modbus ID #1.
Enter the Modbus ID of this flow computer if it is the only master on the link.
{L1} Retry Timer _______________

Should any slave device fail to respond to a communication request, the master device will retry to
establish communications several times. Enter the number of 50 millisecond ticks that the flow
computer should wait for a response from the slave device. To ensure fast recovery from
communication failures, set this entry to as low a number as possible. Enter [3] for peer-to-peer
links involving only Omni flow computers. Other Modbus devices may require more time to
respond.
2-28 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Transaction #1
{L1} Target Slave ID # _______________
Each transfer of data is called a transaction. Enter the Modbus ID # of the other slave involved in
the transaction. Modbus ID 0 can be used to broadcast write to all Modbus slave devices
connected to the peer-to-peer link. Other valid IDs range from 1-247.
presses. {L1} Read/Write ? _______________
Enter [R] if data will be read from the slave. Enter [W] if data will be written to the slave.
INFO - The Omni Flow {L1} Source Index # _______________
Computer determines what
Modbus function code and Enter the database index number or address of the Modbus point where the data is to be obtained,
what data type is involved by corresponding to the first data point of the transaction. This is the slaves database index number
the Modbus index number of when the transaction is a read, and the masters database index number when the transaction is
the data within the Omnis a write. Refer to Volume 4 for a list of available database addresses or index numbers.
database. The Source Index {L1} Number of Points _______________
determines the data type for
a write. The Destination Enter the number of contiguous points to transfer. Each transaction can transfer multiple data
Index determines the data points that can be any valid data type recognized by the Omni. The maximum number of points
type for a read. that can be transferred depends on the type of data:
Function codes used are: q IEEE floats (4bytes each) 63 max
01=Read Multiple Booleans q 32-bit Integers (4 bytes each) 63 max
15=Write Multiple Booleans q 16-bit integers (2 bytes each) 127 max
03=Read Multiple Variables q Packed coils or status (8 to a byte) 2040 max.
16=Write Multiple Variables
The Omni automatically knows what Modbus function to use and what data types are involved by
the Modbus index number of the data within the flow computer database. The destination index
number determines the data type when the transaction is a read. The source index number
determines the data type when the transaction is a write.
{L1} Destination Index # _______________

Enter the database index number or address of where the data is to be stored (destination index or
address). If the transaction is a read, this will be the index number within the master Omnis
database. If the transaction is a write, this will be the register number within the remote slaves
database.
Transaction #2
Target Slave ID # _______________
Read/Write ? _______________
Source Index # _______________
Number of Points _______________
Destination Index # _______________
Transaction #3
Target Slave ID # _______________
Read/Write ? _______________
Source Index # _______________
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-29

Transaction #4
TIP - Use the blank lines Target Slave ID # _______________
configuration option to write Read/Write ? _______________
settings you entered in the Source Index # _______________
flow computer.
Some of these entries may Number of Points _______________
Transaction #5
are applicable will be Target Slave ID # _______________
displayed.
Read/Write ? _______________
Source Index # _______________
Transaction #6
Target Slave ID # _______________
Read/Write ? _______________
Source Index # _______________
Transaction #7
Target Slave ID # _______________
Read/Write ? _______________
Source Index # _______________
Transaction #8
Target Slave ID # _______________
Read/Write ? _______________
Source Index # _______________
2-30 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Transaction #9
INFO - Characters in { } Target Slave ID # _______________
Characters in [ ] refer to key Read/Write ? _______________
presses.
Source Index # _______________
TIP - Use the blank lines Number of Points _______________
configuration option to write Destination Index # _______________
flow computer. Transaction #10
not appear on the display or Target Slave ID # _______________
the various configuration Read/Write ? _______________
metering system, only those Source Index # _______________
are applicable will be Number of Points _______________
displayed.
INFO - The Omni Flow Transaction #11

Computer determines what
Modbus function code and
what data type is involved by Target Slave ID # _______________
the Modbus index number of
the data within the Omnis
Read/Write ? _______________
database. The Source Index Source Index # _______________
determines the data type for
a write. The Destination Number of Points _______________
Index determines the data
type for a read. Destination Index # _______________
Function codes used are:
01=Read Multiple Booleans
15=Write Multiple Booleans Transaction #12
03=Read Multiple Variables
16=Write Multiple Variables Target Slave ID # _______________
Read/Write ? _______________
Source Index # _______________
Transaction #13
Target Slave ID # _______________
Read/Write ? _______________
Source Index # _______________
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-31

Transaction #14
TIP - Use the blank lines Target Slave ID # _______________
configuration option to write Read/Write ? _______________
settings you entered in the Source Index # _______________
flow computer.
Some of these entries may Number of Points _______________
Transaction #15
are applicable will be Target Slave ID # _______________
displayed.
Read/Write ? _______________
Source Index # _______________
Transaction #16
Target Slave ID # _______________
Read/Write ? _______________
Source Index # _______________
2-32 22/26.71+ w 05/99

2.6. Setting Up the Time and Date

INFO - The first menu, 'Misc
be completed first as these 2.6.1. Accessing the Time/Date Setup Submenu
and type of input and output Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the Select Group Entry
devices connected to the flow screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the
computer; i.e., the menus following will be displayed:
following the 'Misc
Configuration' menu do not
ask for configuration data *** SETUP MENU ***
unless a transducer has
been defined.
Misc Configuration
Time/Date Setup _
Flow Computer
Station Setup
Configuration via the
Menu Selection Method - It
is best to use this method Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Time/Date Setup
when programming an and press [Enter] to access the submenu.
as every possible option and
Once a computer is in 2.6.2. Time and Date Settings
operation and you become
familiar with the application {L1} Omni Time ____:____:____
you can decide to use the
Enter Current Time using the correct method 'hh:mm:ss'. To change only the hour, minutes or
seconds, move cursor to the respective position and enter the new setting.
Method described below.
Once you have finished {L1} Omni Date ____/____/____
entering data in a setup
submenu, press the [Prog] Enter Current Date using the correct method 'mm/dd/yy' or dd/mm/yy. To change only the month,
key to return to the Select day or year, move cursor to the respective position and enter the new setting.
Group Entry screen.
Proceed as described in this {L1} Select Date Format Type _____________
manual for each setup Select date format required by entering [Y] or [N]:
option.
Y = month/day/year
N = day/month/year
Time and Date Setup via
the Random Access
Method - Setup entries
require that you be in the
Program Mode. In the
Display Mode press the
[Prog] key. The Program
LED will glow green and the
Select Group Entry screen
will appear. Then press
[Time] [Enter] and use [ ] /
[ ] keys to scroll.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-33

2.7. Configuring the Meter Station

Meter Station Setup via
the Random Access
Method - Setup entries 2.7.1. Accessing the Station Setup Submenu
Program Mode. In the Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the Select Group Entry
Display Mode press the screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the
[Prog] key. The Program following will be displayed:
LED will glow green and
will appear. Then press *** SETUP MENU ***
[Meter] [Enter] and use [ ]
Misc Configuration
/ [ ] keys to scroll.
Time/Date Setup
Meter Station Run
Station Setup _
Switching Flow Rate
Thresholds - The Omni
flow computer has 3 Boolean Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Station Setup
flags which are set or reset and press [Enter] to access the submenu.
depending on the station flow
rate:
q Run Switching Flag #1 at
Modbus database point
2.7.2. Meter Station Settings
1824.
q Run Switching Flag #2 at {L1} Station ID _______________
Modbus database point Enter 8 alphanumeric characters maximum. This string variable usually appears in user custom
1825. reports (Modbus database point 4815).
q Run Switching Flag #3 at
Modbus database point Flow Low Alarm Limit _______________
1826.
Enter the flow rate below which the Station Low Flow Alarm activates (Modbus database point
Each of these flags has a low 1810). Flow rates 5% below this value activate the Low Low Alarm (Modbus database point 1809).
threshold and high threshold
flow rate. Each flag is set
when the station flow rate
Flow High Alarm Limit _______________
exceeds the corresponding Enter the flow rate above which the Station High Flow Alarm activates (Modbus database point
high threshold value. These 1811). Flow rates 5% above this value activate the High High Alarm (Modbus database point
flags reset when the station 1812).
flow rate falls below the
respective low threshold limit. {L1} Gross Flow Rate at Full Scale _______________
See Chapter 3 for more Enter the gross flow rate at full scale for the meter station. Sixteen-bit integer variables
information on how to include representing station gross and net flow rate are included in the database at 3802 and 3804. These
these flags in Boolean variables are scaled using this entry and stored as percentage of full scale with a resolution of
statements to automatically 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 999 = 0% to 99.9%)
switch meter runs depending
on flow rates.
{L1} Mass Flow Rate at Full Scale _______________
Enter the mass flow rate at full scale for the meter station. A 16-bit integer variable representing
station mass flow rate is included in the database at 3806. This variable is scaled using this entry
and stored as percentage of full scale with a resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 1000 = 0% to 100.0%)
Flag #1 Flag #2 Flag #3

{L1} Run Switching Threshold Low _________ _________ _________
Enter the flow rate Low Threshold value which resets each Station Run Switching Flag when the
station gross flow rate falls below this limit (see sidebar).
{L1} Run Switching Threshold High _________ _________ _________

Enter the flow rate High Threshold value which sets each Station Run Switching Flag when the
station gross flow rate exceeds this limit (see sidebar).
2-34 22/26.71+ w 05/99

{L1} Use Common Batch Stack? _______________

Enter [Y] to set up the flow computer to use a common product on all four meter runs; i.e., to run
the same product at the same time on all 4 meter runs. Enter [N] to run different products at the
same time on each meter run. (See Volume 2b on Batching Operations.)
presses.
{L1} Batch Preset Warning _______________
TIP - Use the blank lines Enter the quantity of barrels for the Batch Preset Warning. This entry displays only when Common
provided next to each Batch Stack is selected. The Batch preset counters are activated when a non-zero number is
configuration option to write entered for batch size on the batch sequence stack (see Volume 2b on Batching Operations).
down the corresponding The batch preset reached flag (database point 1819) will be activated whenever the batch preset
settings you entered in the counter counts down to zero. The batch warning flag (database point 1818) will be activated when
flow computer. the batch preset counter is equal or less than this entry.
not appear on the display or {L1} Relative Density (Gravity) / Density Rate of Change_______________
in OmniCom. Depending on This entry displays only when a Station Density I/O Point has been assigned. It is used to detect
the various configuration product changes in the pipeline (product interface).
settings of your specific Enter the Gravity or Density Rate of Change in relative density units per barrel (US units) or in
metering system, only those 3
Kgs/m per cubic meter (metric units) for this limit. The Relative Density/Density Rate of Change
configuration options which Flag (database point 1813) is activated if the flowing gravity/density measured by the station
are applicable will be densitometer exceeds this preset rate of change.
displayed.
{L1} Line Pack Delay _______________
INFO - See the previous This entry displays only when a Station Density I/O Point has been assigned. In many cases, the
chapter for a description of station densitometer that detects the product interfaces is installed many net barrels in advance of
batching features of the the metering skid to provide prior warning of a product change.
3
Omni flow computer. Enter the Line Pack Delay as the quantity of net barrels or net m between the product interface
detector densitometer or gravitometer and the valve manifold used to end the batch. A Delayed
3
Gravity Rate of Change Flag (database point 1814) is set when this number of barrels or m has
been measured after the Product Interface Flag (database point 1813) is activated; i.e., a line pack
delay is counted down to zero when a product interface is detected.
{L1} Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Sample Time _______________

This entry displays only when a Station Density I/O Point has been assigned. It is used with the
previous entry to determine the relative density rate of change.
Estimate the minimum amount of time in seconds it takes for a product change to be complete and
set this timer by entering approximately 1/4 to 1/3 of that time. False triggering of the product
interface detection flag can be eliminated by ensuring that any density change must exist for at
least this many seconds.
{L1} Gross Batch Preset Counter Units? _______________

Enter [Y] to select gross (actual) volume units (IV). Enter [N] to select net volume units (GSV).
{PL} Select Volume Units _______________

This entry corresponds to metric units only and applies globally to all volumes within the flow
computer. Enter the volume units:
3
0 = Cubic meters (m )
1 = Liters (lts)
Prove Report Batch Report
{PL} Number of Decimal Places for Factors __________ __________
Enter the number of decimal places to use for correction factors appearing on prove and batch
reports (4, 5 or 6 decimal places). These settings correspond to the following factors: CTLM,
CTLP, CPLM, CPLP, CTSP, CPSP, CCF.
The density pycnometer factor remains fixed at four decimal places. For strict adherence to API
MPMS 12.2 (default) select 4 decimal places. This is the recommend selection. Selecting 5
decimal places causes the flow computer to perform the normal API internal rounding and
truncating rules with the exception of the last round which is to 5 places. Selecting 6 decimal
places causes the flow computer to perform no internal rounding and truncating and rounds the
final result to 6 decimal places.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-35

Auxiliary Inputs
Auxiliary Input Setup via Input #1 Input #2 Input #3 Input#4
the Random Access
Method - Setup entries Low Alarm Limits _______ _______ _______ _______
Program Mode. In the Enter the auxiliary input signal value below which the Low Alarm activates. The low low alarm
Display Mode press the activates when the auxiliary Input signal falls 5% below this value.
LED will glow green and High Alarm Limits _______ _______ _______ _______
Select Group Entry screen Enter the auxiliary input signal value above which the High Alarm activates. The high high alarm
will appear. Then press will activate when the auxiliary Input signal rises 5% above this value.
[Analysis] [Input] [Enter] or
[Analysis] [Input] [n] {L2} Override Values _______ _______ _______ _______
[Enter] (n = Auxiliary Input #
1, 2, 3 or 4). Use [ ] / [ ] Enter the value (in engineering units) which will be substituted for the transducer value, depending
keys to scroll. on the override code selected. An * displayed along side of the value indicates that the override
value is substituted.
Note: {L2} Override Codes _______ _______ _______ _______

* Not Valid when a RTD Enter the Override Code which represents the strategy used regarding each auxiliary input
Probe is specified. override value:
0 = Never use override value
1 = Always use override value
2 = On transmitter failure, use override value
3 = On transmitter failure, use last hour's average
{L1} at 4mA* _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the value in engineering units that produces a transducer output of 4mA or 1volt, or the
lower range limit (LRV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
{L1} at 20mA* _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the value in engineering units that produces a transducer output of 20mA or 5 Volts, or
upper range limit (URV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
{L1} Damping Code _______ _______ _______ _______

This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H type combo module.
The process variable (i.e., temperature/pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to
the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.
For Pressure Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code:
0 = 0 seconds 5 = 2 seconds
1 = 0.16 seconds 6 = 4 seconds
For Temperature Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code:
0 = 0 seconds 5 = 6.3 seconds
1 = 0.3 seconds 6 = 12.7 seconds
2-36 22/26.71+ w 05/99

2.8. Configuring Meter Runs

be completed first as these 2.8.1. Accessing the Meter Run Setup Submenu
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Time/Date Setup
Station Setup
Flow Computer
Meter Run Setup _
is best to use this method Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Meter Run Setup
Once a computer is in 2.8.2. Meter Run Settings
familiar with the application Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
faster Random Access {L1} Meter ID ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the ID of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters) for each meter run. This ID
Once you have finished usually appears on reports.
submenu, press the [Prog]
key to return to the Select
Flow Low Alarm Limit ________ ________ ________ ________
Group Entry screen. Enter the flow rate for each meter run below which the Flow Low Alarm (database point 1n21)
Proceed as described in this activates. The Low Low Alarm (database point 1n20) activates when the flow rate falls 5% below
manual for each setup this limit.
option.
Flow High Alarm Limit ________ ________ ________ ________
Meter Run Setup via the Enter the flow rate for each meter run above which the Flow High Alarm (database point 1n22)
Random Access Method - activates. The High High Alarm (database point 1n23) activates when the flow rate rises 5% above
Setup entries require that you this limit.
be in the Program Mode. In
the Display Mode press the {L1} Gross Flow Rate at Full Scale________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the gross flow rate at full-scale for each meter run. Sixteen-bit integer variables representing
meter run gross and net flow rate are included in the database at 3n42 and 3n40 respectively.
These variables are scaled using this entry and stored as percentage of full scale with a resolution
of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 1000 = 0% to 100.0%)
[Meter] [n] [Enter] (n =
Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4).
Use [ ] / [ ] keys to scroll.
{L1} Mass Flow Rate at Full Scale ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the mass flow rate at full-scale for each meter run. A 16-bit integer variable representing
meter run mass flow rate is included in the database at 3n44. This variable is scaled using this
Alternate Access to Meter
entry and stored as percentage of full scale with a resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 1000 = 0% to
Run Settings from Meter
100.0%)
Station Setup - After
entering the Meter Station
Settings, without exiting, {L1} Active Frequency Threshold ________ ________ ________ ________
press the [ ] key and you Enter the Active Frequency Threshold for each meter run. Flow meter pulse frequencies equal or
will scroll down through each greater than this threshold will cause the Meter Active Flag (1n05) to be set.
Meter Run setup entry. By using any Boolean statement you can use this flag bit to enable and disable totalizing by
controlling the Disable Meter Run Totalizer Flags (Modbus database points 1736, 1737, 1738 &
1739).
Example: 1030 1736=/1105 Turn off Meter #1 flow if not greater than Active Frequency.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-37


INFO - Characters in { } {L1} Error Check Threshold ________ ________ ________ ________
Characters in [ ] refer to key This entry will display only when Dual Pulse is selected under Config Meter Runs (Misc Setup).
presses. It applies only when a 'E' combo module is fitted and 'Pulse Fidelity Checking' is enabled.
Enter the Pulse Fidelity Error Check Threshold (in Hz) for each meter run. To eliminate bogus
TIP - Use the blank lines alarms and error count accumulations, the dual pulse error checking functions are disabled until
provided next to each the sum of both pulse trains exceeds the pulses per seconds entered for this setting.
configuration option to write Example: Entering 50 for this threshold means that the dual pulse error checking will be disabled
down the corresponding until both A and B channels of the flowmeter pick-offs are providing 25 pulses per second each.
flow computer. {L1} Max Error Counts per Batch ________ ________ ________ ________
Some of these entries may This entry will display only when Dual Pulse is selected under Config Meter Runs (Misc Setup).
not appear on the display or It applies only when a 'E' combo module is fitted and 'Pulse Fidelity Checking' is enabled.
the various configuration Enter the maximum number of error pulses allowed in one transaction for each meter run. The
settings of your specific alarm points are:
metering system, only those q 1n48 A/B Comparitor Error Detected
configuration options which q 1n49 A Channel Failed
are applicable will be q 1n50 B Channel Failed
displayed. q 1n51 A and B Channels not equal
The dual pulse A/B Comparitor Error Alarm (1n48) is activated when the accumulated error
counts between the flowmeter channels exceeds this count threshold. Accumulated error counts
are cleared for every batch.
{L1A} Meter K-Factor ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the number of pulses per unit volume that the flowmeter produces; i.e., pulses/barrel (US
3
units), or pulses/m or pulses/liter (metric units). The K factor is used to calculate the gross flow
rate.
{L1} Prove Base Flow Rate ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the base prove flow rate. This should be the normal flow rate of the flowmeter. For
comparison and historical averaging purposes, the flow computer will normalize all meter factors to
this flow rate using the base meter factor curve entered in the Product Setup submenu (see
Configuring Products this chapter).
{L1} Upstream Prover Volume? ________ ________ ________ ________

This entry displays only when the prover type selected is a Uni-Compact (see Configuring
Provers in this chapter). Enter [Y] to select upstream volume as the prove volume. Enter [N] to
select downstream volume as the prove volume.
Certain models of compact provers (such as the Brooks compact prover) have different water
draw volumes depending on whether the flowmeter is upstream or downstream of the prover. This
entry has no meaning when you are using a normal full-sized prover with one water draw volume.
{L1} Use Meter Factor in Net? (Y) ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter [Y] to apply the meter factor in the net and mass flow equations. Enter [N] to ignore the
meter factor in flow calculations; nonetheless, it will still appear on all reports.
{L1} Temperature Compensated? ________ ________ ________ ________

In some cases, the flowmeter may be fitted with a mechanical or electronic temperature
compensator. Enter [Y] for the Omni Flow Computer to set the temperature correction (VCF) to
1.0000 in all equations. Enter [N] if the meter provides gross uncompensated pulses.
2-38 22/26.71+ w 05/99


INFO - Characters in { } {L1} BS&W as Aux n ________ ________ ________ ________
Characters in [ ] refer to key Select the auxiliary input or other source to be used to input the S&W % for each meter run:
presses. 0 = None 3 = Use Auxiliary Input #3
1 = Use Auxiliary Input #1 4 = Use Auxiliary Input #1
TIP - Use the blank lines 2 = Use Auxiliary Input #2 5 = Modbus Direct
provided next to each The flow computer will use this input to determine Net Standard Volume (S&W corrected volume).
down the corresponding {L1} Meter Model ________ ________ ________ ________
flow computer. Enter the model number of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters). This entry usually
appears on the prove report.
in OmniCom. Depending on {L1} Meter Size ________ ________ ________ ________
the various configuration Enter the size of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters). This entry usually appears on
settings of your specific the prove report.
configuration options which {L1} Meter Serial Number ________ ________ ________ ________
displayed. Enter the serial number of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters). This entry usually
appears on the prove report.
Meter Run Setup via the

Random Access Method -
Setup entries require that you
the Display Mode press the
[Meter] [n] [Enter] (n =
Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4).
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-39

2.9. Configuring Temperature

be completed first as these 2.9.1. Accessing the Temperature Setup Submenu
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Station Setup
Meter Run Setup
Flow Computer
Temperature Setup _
is best to use this method Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Temperature
when programming an Setup and press [Enter] to access the submenu.
Once a computer is in 2.9.2. Station and Meter Run Temperature Settings
familiar with the application Station Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
faster Random Access Low Alarm Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature below which the flowmeter low alarm activates. Transducer values
Once you have finished approximately 5% below this entry fail to low.
High Alarm Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Group Entry screen. Enter the temperature above which the flowmeter high alarm activates. Transducer values
Proceed as described in this approximately 5% above this entry fail to high.
manual for each setup
option. {L2} Override ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the
Meter Temperature Setup override code. An * displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is
via the Random Access substituted.
require that you be in the {L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the Override Code strategy:
[Prog] key. The Program 0 = Never use override code
LED will glow green and the 1 = Always use override code
Select Group Entry screen 2 = Use override code on transmitter failure
will appear. Then press 3 = On transmitter failures use last hour's average
[Temp] [Enter], or [Temp]
[Meter] [n] [Enter] or {L1} at 4mA* ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
[Meter] [n] [Temp] [Enter]
(n = Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or Enter the temperature engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or lower
4). Use [ ] / [ ] keys to range limit (LRV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
scroll.
{L1} at 20mA* ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5 Volts, or upper
Note: range limit (URV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
* Not Valid when a RTD
Probe is specified.
2-40 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Station Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4

INFO - Characters in { } {L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Characters in [ ] refer to key This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module.
presses. The process variable (i.e., temperature) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flow
computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.
TIP - Use the blank lines For Temperature Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code:
provided next to each 0 = 0 seconds 5 = 6.3 seconds
configuration option to write 1 = 0.3 seconds 6 = 12.7 seconds
down the corresponding 2 = 0.7 seconds 7 = 25.5 seconds
settings you entered in the 3 = 1.5 seconds 8 = 51.5 seconds
flow computer. 4 = 3.1 seconds 9 = 102.5 seconds
2.9.3. Station and Meter Run Density Temperature
settings of your specific Settings
configuration options which Station Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
displayed.
Low Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature below which the densitometer low alarm activates. Transducer values
Meter Density approximately 5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.
Temperature Setup via the
Random Access Method - High Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
To access these settings, in Enter the temperature above which the densitometer high alarm activates. Transducer values
the Program Mode press approximately 10% above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.
[Density] [Temp] [Enter].
{L2} Override ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
INFO - The Density
Temperature sensor is used
override code. An * displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is
to compensate for
substituted.
temperature expansion
effects which effect the
periodic time of oscillation of {L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
the densitometer. It is also Enter the Override Code strategy:
used when desired to 0 = Never use override code
calculate the density of the
1 = Always use override code
liquid to reference
temperature using API 2540; 2 = Use override code on transmitter failure
Table 23, 23A or 23B. 3 = On transmitter failures use last hour's average
{L1} at 4mA* ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Note: Enter the temperature engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or lower
* Not Valid when a RTD range limit (LRV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
Probe is specified.
{L1} at 20mA* ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volts, or upper
range limit (URV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________

This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module.
The process variable (i.e., temperature) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flow
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-41

2.9.4. Prover Temperature Settings

Prover Temperature Setup Inlet Outlet
via the Random Access
Low Alarm Limit ___________ ___________
Program Mode. In the Enter the temperature below which the prover low alarm activates. Transducer values
Display Mode press the approximately 5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.
LED will glow green and the High Alarm Limit ___________ ___________
Enter the temperature above which the prover high alarm activates Transducer values
approximately 10% above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.
[Prove] [Temp] [Enter] or
[Temp] [Prove] [Enter].
Use [ ] / [ ] keys to scroll. {L2} Override ___________ ___________
substituted.
{L2} Override Code ___________ ___________

0 = Never use override code
2 = Use override code on transmitter failure
3 = On transmitter failures use last hour's average
{L1} @ 4mA* ___________ ___________

Enter the temperature engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or lower
range limit (LRV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
{L1} @ 20mA* ___________ ___________

range limit (URV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
{L1} Damping Code ___________ ___________

2-42 22/26.71+ w 05/99

2.9.5. Prover Density Temperature Settings

INFO - Characters in { } Inlet Outlet
Low Alarm Limit ___________ ___________
Enter the temperature below which the prover low alarm activates. Transducer values
approximately 5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.
settings you entered in the High Alarm Limit ___________ ___________
flow computer. Enter the temperature above which the prover high alarm activates. Transducer values
{L2} Override ___________ ___________

substituted.
{L2} Override Code ___________ ___________

{L1} at 4mA* ___________ ___________

Enter the temperature engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or lower
range limit (LRV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
{L1} at 20mA* ___________ ___________

range limit) URV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
{L1} Damping Code ___________ ___________

22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-43

2.10. Configuring Pressure

be completed first as these 2.10.1. Accessing the Pressure Setup Submenu
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Meter Run Setup
Temperature Setup
Flow Computer
Pressure Setup _
is best to use this method Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Pressure Setup
Once a computer is in 2.10.2. Station and Meter Run Pressure Settings
familiar with the application Station Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
faster Random Access Low Alarm Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure below which the flowmeter low alarm activates. Transducer values
Once you have finished approximately 5% below this entry fail to low.
High Alarm Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Group Entry screen. Enter the pressure above which the flowmeter high alarm activates. Transducer values
Proceed as described in this approximately 10% above this entry fail to high.
option. {L2} Override ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the override
Meter Pressure Setup via code. An * displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is substituted.
the Random Access
Method - Setup entries {L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Display Mode press the 0 = Never use override code
[Prog] key. The Program 1 = Always use override code
LED will glow green and the 2 = Use override code on transmitter failure
Select Group Entry screen 3 = On transmitter failures use last hour's average
[Press] [Enter], or [Press] {L1} at 4mA* ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
[Meter] [n] [Enter] or
[Meter] [n] [Press] [Enter] Enter the pressure engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or lower range
(n = Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or limit (LRV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
4). Use [ ] / [ ] keys to
scroll. {L1} at 20mA* ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5volts, or upper range
limit (URV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
2-44 22/26.71+ w 05/99


INFO - Characters in { } {L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________
The process variable (i.e., pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flow
TIP - Use the blank lines computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.
configuration option to write For Pressure Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code:
down the corresponding 0 = 0 seconds 5 = 2 seconds
settings you entered in the 1 = 0.16 seconds 6 = 4 seconds
flow computer. 2 = 0.32 seconds 7 = 8 seconds
Meter Density Pressure
Setup via the Random
Access Method - To access
these settings, in the 2.10.3. Station and Meter Run Density Pressure Settings
Program Mode press
[Density] [Press] [Enter]. Station Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
INFO - The Density Pressure Low Alarm Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
sensor is used to Enter the pressure below which the densitometer low alarm activates. Transducer values
compensate for pressure approximately 5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.
periodic time of oscillation of High Alarm Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
the densitometer. It is also
used when desired to Enter the pressure above which the densitometer high alarm activates. Transducer values
calculate the density of the approximately 10% above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.
liquid at the densitometer to
equilibrium pressure using {L2} Override ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
API 2540 MPMS 11.2.1 or Enter the pressure value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the override
11.2.2. code. An * displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is substituted.
{L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Note:
* Not Valid when a RTD
Probe is specified.
{L1} at 4mA* ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or lower range
limit (LRV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
{L1} at 20mA* ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volts, or upper range
{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________

22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-45

2.10.4. Prover Pressure Settings

Prover Pressure Setup via Inlet Outlet
the Random Access
Low Alarm Limit ___________ ___________
require that you be in the Enter the pressure below which the prover low alarm activates. Transducer values approximately
Program Mode. In the 5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.
[Prog] key. The Program High Alarm Limit ___________ ___________
LED will glow green and the Enter the pressure above which the prover high alarm activates Transducer values approximately
Select Group Entry screen 10% above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.
[Prove] [Press] [Enter] or {L2} Override ___________ ___________
[Press] [Prove] [Enter].
code. An * displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is substituted.
{L2} Override Code ___________ ___________

{L1} at 4mA ___________ ___________
{L1} at 20mA* ___________ ___________

Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volts, or upper range
{L1} Damping Code ___________ ___________

{L1} Plenum Pressure at 4mA ___________

The plenum pressure applies only to Brooks compact provers. Enter the engineering units that the
transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt or lower range limit (LRV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
{L1} Plenum Pressure at 20mA ___________

The plenum pressure applies only to Brooks compact provers. Enter the engineering units that the
transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5volts or upper range limit (URV) of Honeywell Smart
Transmitters..
{L1} Plenum Pressure Damping Code ___________

2-46 22/26.71+ w 05/99

2.10.5. Prover Density Pressure Settings

INFO - Characters in { } Inlet Outlet
Low Alarm Limit ___________ ___________
Enter the pressure below which the prover densitometer low alarm activates. Transducer values
approximately 5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.
settings you entered in the High Alarm Limit ___________ ___________
flow computer. Enter the pressure above which the prover densitometer high alarm activates. Transducer values
Prover Density Pressure {L2} Override ___________ ___________

Setup via the Random
Access Method - To access
code. An * displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is substituted.
these settings, in the
Program Mode press
[Prove] [Density] [Press] {L2} Override Code ___________ ___________
[Enter]. Enter the Override Code strategy:
INFO - The Density Pressure 1 = Always use override code
sensor is used to 2 = Use override code on transmitter failure
compensate for pressure 3 = On transmitter failures use last hour's average
periodic time of oscillation of {L1} at 4mA ___________ ___________
the densitometer. It is also
used when desired to
calculate the density of the
liquid at the densitometer to
equilibrium pressure using {L1} at 20mA* ___________ ___________
API 2540 MPMS 11.2.1 or Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volts, or upper range
11.2.2. limit (URV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
{L1} Damping Code ___________ ___________

Note:
* Not Valid when a RTD The process variable (i.e., pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flow
Probe is specified. computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-47

2.11. Configuring Meter Relative Density / API

Relative Density
be completed first as these 2.11.1. Accessing the Gravity/Density Setup Submenu
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Temperature Setup
Pressure Setup
Flow Computer
Grav/Density Setup _
is best to use this method Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Grav/Density
when programming an Setup and press [Enter] to access the submenu.
Once a computer is in 2.11.2. Meter Relative Density / Density Settings
you can decide to use the Relative Density, API Gravity or Density
Method described below. Station Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
Once you have finished
entering data in a setup {L1A} Corr Factor ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
submenu, press the [Prog] These entries apply if an analog gravitometer or densitometer is specified during the 'Config
key to return to the Select Meter Run' in 'Misc. Setup'. They are not available when using API or Specific Gravity
Group Entry screen. gravitometers. Enter the Pycnometer Density Correction Factor (Limit: 0.8 to 1.2). (Usually very
Proceed as described in this close to 1.0000).
option. Low Alarm Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the gravity/density below which the prover densitometer low alarm activates. Transducer
values approximately 5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.
High Alarm Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the gravity/density above which the prover densitometer high alarm activates. Transducer
values approximately 10% above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.
{L2} Override ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the gravity/density value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the
substituted.
{L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

4 = On transmitter failure use station transducer value
5 = On transmitter failure use absolute value of override SG/API of the running product.
{L1} at 4 mA ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
These entries apply if an analog gravitometer or densitometer is specified during the 'Config
Meter Run' in 'Misc. Setup'. Engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or
lower range limit (LRV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
2-48 22/26.71+ w 05/99


Meter Specific {L1} at 20 mA ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Gravity/Density Setup via
the Random Access These entries apply if an analog gravitometer or densitometer is specified during the 'Config
Method - Setup entries Meter Run' in 'Misc. Setup'. Engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5 Volts, or
require that you be in the upper range limit (URV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
[Prog] key. The Program Digital Densitometers
Select Group Entry screen The following entries are required if a digital densitometer is specified during
will appear. Then enter the the 'Config Meter Run' in the 'Misc. Setup' menu. There are three selections
key press sequence that which refer to digital densitometers: 4 = Solartron, 5 = Sarasota, 6 = UGC. ({L1}
corresponds to the options Password Level required, except for the Correction Factor.)
you want to configure:
Specific Gravity/API:
To access these settings, Solartron Station Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
press [S.G./API] [Enter] or
[S.G./API] [Meter] [n] {L1A} Corr Factor A________ ________ ________ ________ ________
[Enter] or [Meter] [n]
Pycnometer Density correction factor (usually very close to 1.0000). An A and B factor are
[S.G./API] [Enter].
provided to cover differing products (limit: 0.8 to 1.2). Meter Station only applies Factor A.
Density:
To access these settings, {L1A} Corr Factor B________ ________ ________ ________ ________
press [Density] [Enter] or
[Density] [Meter] [n]
[Enter] or [Meter] [n]
{L1} K0 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
[Density] [Enter]. {L1} K1 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Digital Densitometers:
To access these settings, {L1} K2 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
press [Factor] [Density]
[Meter] [n] [Enter] or {L1} K18 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
[Density] [Factor] [Meter] {L1} K19 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
[n] [Enter].
(n represents the meter run {L1} K20A ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
# 1, 2, 3 or 4).
Note: Digital densitometers {L1} K20B ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
can only be configured via {L1} K21A ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
the Random Access Method.
{L1} K21B ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
INFO - Densitometer
constants are usually on a
{L1} KR ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
calibration certificate {L1} KJ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
supplied by the densitometer
manufacturer. Usually they
are based on SI or metric Sarasota Station Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
units. For US customary
applications you must ensure
that the constants entered
{L1B} Corr Factor A________ ________ ________ ________ ________
are based on gr/cc, F and Pycnometer Density correction factor (usually very close to 1.0000). An A and B factor are
PSIG. Constants are always provided to cover differing products (limit: 0.8 to 1.2).
displayed using scientific
notation; e.g.: {L1B} Corr Factor B________ ________ ________ ________ ________
K0=-1.490205E+00 (gr/cc)
To enter K0, press [Clear] {L1} D0 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
and press [-1.490205]
[Alpha Shift] [E] [+00] {L1} T0 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
[Enter].
{L1} Tcoef ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1} Tcal ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1} Pcoef ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1} Pcal ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-49

UGC Station Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4

INFO - Characters in { } {L1A} Corr Factor A________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Pycnometer Density correction factor (usually very close to 1.0000). An A and B factor are
provided to cover differing products (limit: 0.8 to 1.2).
{L1A} Corr Factor B________ ________ ________ ________ ________
settings you entered in the {L1} K0 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
flow computer.
{L1} K1 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Digital Densitometer Setup {L1} K2 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Method - To access these {L1} TC ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
settings, in the Program
Mode press [Factor]
{L1} Kt1 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
[Density] [Meter] [n] {L1} Kt2 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
[Enter] or [Density]
[Factor] [Meter] [n] [Enter] {L1} Kt3 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
(n = Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or
4). {L1} Pc ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1} Kp1 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1} Kp2 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1} Kp3 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
2-50 22/26.71+ w 05/99

2.12. Configuring PID Control Outputs

2.12.1. Accessing the PID Control Setup Submenu
TIP - Use the blank lines Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the Select Group Entry
screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the
down the corresponding following will be displayed:
flow computer.
*** SETUP MENU ***
not appear on the display or Pressure Setup
in OmniCom. Depending on Grav/Density Setup
the various configuration PID Control Setup _
are applicable will be Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to PID Control
displayed. Setup and press [Enter] to access the submenu.
Flow Computer
2.12.2. PID Control Output Settings
Menu Selection Method - It Loop #1 Loop #2 Loop #3 Loop #4
is best to use this method
when programming an
application for the first time Operating Mode
Manual Valve Open (Y/N) _______ _______ _______ _______
Once a computer is in Enter [Y] to adjust the valve open % and adjust using the [ ]/[ ] keys. Enter [N] to change to
operation and you become AUTO mode.
you can decide to use the Local Setpoint (Y/N) _______ _______ _______ _______
faster Random Access Enter [Y] to use a local set point and adjust using the [ ]/[ ] keys. Enter [N] for Remote set
Method described below. point mode.
entering data in a setup Secondary Setpoint Value _______ _______ _______ _______
submenu, press the [Prog] Enter the value in engineering units for the set point of the secondary variable. The primary
key to return to the Select variable will be the controlled variable until the secondary variable reaches this set point. The
Group Entry screen. secondary variable will not be allowed to drop below or rise above this set point, depending on the
Proceed as described in this "Error Select" entry in the Config PID menu.
option.
Tuning Adjustments
PID Control Output Setup
{L1} Primary Gain Factor _______ _______ _______ _______
Method - Setup entries Enter a value between 0.01 to 99.99 for the Primary Gain Factor (Gain=1/Proportional Band).
Program Mode. In the {L1} Primary Integral Factor _______ _______ _______ _______
Display Mode press the Enter a value between 0.0 and 40.00 for the Primary Integral Factor (Repeats/Min=1/Integral
[Prog] key. The Program Factor the reciprocal of the reset period).
Select Group Entry screen {L1} Secondary Gain Factor _______ _______ _______ _______
Enter a value between 0.01 to 99.99 for the Secondary Gain Factor (Gain=1/Proportional Band).
[Control] [n] [Enter] (n =
PID Control Loop # 1, 2, 3 or The actual controller gain factor used when controlling the secondary variable is the product of
4). Use [ ] / [ ] keys to this entry and the 'Primary Gain Factor'. Tune the primary control variable first and then use this
scroll. entry to adjust for stable control of the secondary variable.
{L1} Secondary Integral Factor _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter a value between 0 and 40.00 for the Secondary Integral Factor (Repeats/Min=1/Integral
Factor the reciprocal of the reset period).
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-51

Loop #1 Loop #2 Loop #3 Loop #4

INFO - The first menu, 'Misc {L1} Deadband % _______ _______ _______ _______
be completed first as these Enter the dead band percent range. PID Control will only compensate for setpoint deviations out of
entries specify the number this range. The control output will not change as long as the process input and the setpoint error
and type of input and output (deviation) is within this dead band percentage limit range.
devices connected to the flow
computer; i.e., the menus {L1} Startup Ramp % _______ _______ _______ _______
following the 'Misc Enter the maximum percentage to which the valve movement is limited per 500 msec at start-up.
Configuration' menu do not st
The control output is clamped at 0% until the 1 PID Permissive (PID #1-#4 database points
ask for configuration data 1722-1725) is set true. The control output % is then allowed to increase at the start-up ramp rate.
been defined.
{L1} Shutdown Ramp % _______ _______ _______ _______
Enter the maximum percentage to which the valve movement is limited per 500 msec at shutdown.
st
PID Startup, Stop and When the 1 PID Permissive is lost, the control output will ramp-down towards 0% at the
Shutdown Ramp shutdown ramp rate.
nd
Command Points - These During the ramp-down phase, a 2 PID Permissive (PID #1-#4 database points 1752-1755) is
nd
have been added to eliminate used to provide a ramp hold function. If this 2 permissive is true, 100 msec before entering the
the need to manipulate the ramp-down phase, the control output % will ramp-down and be held at the minimum ramp-down
PID permissives directly. limit % (see the following entry) until it goes false. The control output will then immediately go to
Using these command points 0% (see sidebar).
greatly simplifies operation of
the PID ramping functions. {L1} Minimum Ramp to % _______ _______ _______ _______
(See database points 1727-
1730, 1788-1791, 1792-1795 Enter the minimum percentage that the control output will be allowed to ramp down to. In many
respectively.) cases, it is important to deliver a precise amount of product. This requires that the control output
be ramped to some minimum % and held there until the required delivery is complete. The control
output is then immediately set to 0%.
Primary Controlled (Remote Setpoint) Variable

{L1} Low Limit _______ _______ _______ _______
Enter the engineering unit value below which the primary setpoint variable is not allowed to drop
while in the remote setpoint mode.
{L1} High Limit _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the engineering unit value above which the primary setpoint variable is not allowed to rise
while in the remote setpoint mode.
Secondary Controlled (Setpoint) Variable

{L1} Zero Value _______ _______ _______ _______
If a secondary controlled variable is used, enter the value in engineering units of the variable which
will represent zero.
{L1} Full Scale Value _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the value in engineering units of the secondary variable at controller full scale, which is
usually 2 times the normal operating setpoint setting.
2-52 22/26.71+ w 05/99

2.13. Configuring Provers

be completed first as these 2.13.1. Accessing the Prover Setup Submenu
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Grav/Density Setup
PID Cont`rol Setup
Flow Computer
Prover Setup _
is best to use this method Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Prover Setup and
when programming an press [Enter] to access the submenu.
Once a computer is in 2.13.2. Prover Settings
familiar with the application {L2} Number of Runs to Average _______________
Enter the number of consecutive runs required to be considered a complete prove sequence This
number must be between 2 and 10.
Once you have finished {L2} Maximum Number of Runs _______________
submenu, press the [Prog] Enter the maximum number of runs that will be attempted to achieve a complete prove sequence.
key to return to the Select This number must be between 2 and 99.
Group Entry screen.
Proceed as described in this {L1} Prover Type _______________
manual for each setup Enter the type of prover in use:
option.
0 = Unidirectional Pipe Prover
1 = Bi-directional Pipe Prover
Prover Setup via the 2 = Unidirectional Compact Prover
Random Access Method - 3 = Bi-directional Small Volume Prover
4 = Master Meter
5 = Two-Series Bi-directional Pipe Prover.
[Prog] key. The Program Select the Unidirectional Compact [2] if you are using a Brooks Compact Prover.
LED will glow green and the Select the Master Meter Method to compare meter 1, 2 or 3 against the master meter. Meter #4 is
Select Group Entry screen always the master meter.
For Double Chronometry Proving use type 2 or 3.
[Prove] [Setup] [Enter] and
use [ ] / [ ] keys to scroll.
{L1} Prover Volume _______________
This entry does not apply when the prover type selected is a Uni-Compact. Enter the water draw
volume of the prover at base temperature and pressure.
Certain models of compact provers have different water draws, depending on whether the meters
are upstream or downstream. This entry represents the round-trip volume for bi-directional
provers and the downstream volume for compact provers. When using the Master Meter Method,
enter the minimum volume that must flow through the master meter (Meter #4) for each prove run.
{L2} Number of Passes per Run to Average _______________

This entry applies to Unidirectional and Bi-directional compact provers only. Enter the number of
single passes that will be averaged to make each run when using the pulse interpolation method.
Valid entries are 1 through 25. A pass is round trip when using a bi-directional prover.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-53

{L1} Linear Thermal Expansion Coeff of Switch Rod _______________

This entry applies to unidirectional compact provers only (except Brooks SVP see following
setting). Enter the squared coefficient of thermal expansion for any switch rod components which
may affect the water draw volume of the compact prover. This Thermal Expansion Coefficient is
used to calculate the CTSP factor for the compact prover:
TIP - Use the blank lines q For US Units: Carbon Steel = 0.0000124; Stainless Steel = 0.0000177.
q For Metric Units: Carbon Steel = 0.0000223; Stainless Steel = 0.0000319.
settings you entered in the {L1} Coefficient of Invar Rod _______________
flow computer. This entry applies to Brooks Compact Provers only. This prover uses an invar rod to separate the
optical detector switches. The rod has a coefficient of 0.0000008 per F (US units) or 0.0000014
per C (metric units).
{L1} Plenum Pressure Constant _______________

This entry applies to Brooks Compact Provers only. Enter the Nitrogen Spring Plenum Pressure
Constant used to calculate the plenum pressure needed to operate the Brooks Compact Prover.
This pressure is related to the prover line pressure at the time of proving:
Plenum Pressure = (Line Pressure / Plenum Constant) + 60 Psig
The plenum constant depends on the size of the Brooks Compact Prover. Valid values are:
SIZE PLENUM CONSTANT SIZE PLENUM CONSTANT

8-inch 3.50 18-inch 5.00
12-inch Mini 3.20 24-inch 5.88
12-inch Standard 3.20 Larger Refer to Brooks
{L2} Plenum Pressure Deadband % _______________

This entry applies to Brooks Compact Provers only. Enter the Plenum Pressure Deadband %. The
Brooks Compact Prover requires that the plenum pressure be maintained within certain limits. The
flow computer calculates the correct plenum pressure at the beginning of each prove sequence
and will charge or vent nitrogen until the measured plenum pressure is within the specified
deadband %.
{L1} Prover Upstream Volume _______________

This entry applies to uni-compact provers only. Enter the upstream water draw volume at base
temperature and pressure, if applicable.
{L1} Prover Downstream Volume _______________

This entry applies to uni-compact provers only. Enter the downstream water draw volume at base
temperature and pressure, if applicable.
{L1} Over-travel _______________

This entry does not apply to Master Meter proving. Enter the estimated amount of flow that the
sphere or piston displaces after activating the first detector switch, multiplied by 1.25.
{L2} Inactivity Timer _______________

Enter the time in seconds before the prove is aborted due to prover inactivity. Make sure you allow
enough time for the sphere or piston to travel between detector switches at the lowest flow rate
expected. When using the Master Meter Method, allow enough time for the amount of flow to pass
through the master meter at the lowest expected flow rate.
{L1} Prover Diameter _______________

This entry is not applicable to Master Meter proving. Enter the internal diameter of the prover tube
in inches or mm.
{L1} Prover Wall Thickness _______________

This entry is not applicable to Master Meter proving. Enter the wall thickness of the prover tube in
inches or mm, which is used to calculate the CPSP factor
2-54 22/26.71+ w 05/99

{L1} Modulus of Elasticity _______________

This entry is not applicable to Master Meter proving. Enter the Prover Tube Modulus of Elasticity
Prover Setup via the
used to calculate the CPSP factor.
Setup entries require that you q For US Units: Mild Steel = 3.0E7; Stainless Steel = 2.8E7 to 2.9E7.
be in the Program Mode. In q For Metric Units: 2.07E8 or 1.93E8 to 2.0E8.
[Prog] key. The Program {L1} Cubical Thermal Expansion Coefficient of Tube _______________
This entry is not applicable to Compact Provers and Master Meter proving. Enter the Prover Tube
Cubical Coefficient of Thermal Expansion for full sized pipe provers, used to calculate the CTSP
factor.
Prove] [Setup] [Enter] and
use [ ] / [ ] keys to scroll. q For US Units: Mild Steel = 0.0000186; Stainless Steel = 0.0000265.
q For Metric Units: Mild Steel = 0.0000335; Stainless Steel = 0.00000477.
{L1} Base Pressure _______________

This entry is not applicable to Master Meter proving. Enter the atmospheric pressure in PSIg or
kPag, at which the prover was water drawn.
{L1} Base Temperature _______________

This entry is not applicable to Master Meter proving. Enter the Base Temperature in F or C at
which the prover was water drawn. This entry is used to calculate CTSP.
{L2} Stability Check Sample Time _______________

Enter the Stability Check Sample Time in seconds, used to calculate the rate of change of
temperature and flow rate at the prover or master meter. The prove sequence will not start until the
temperature and flow rate are stable.
{L2} Sample Time Temperature Change ( Temp) _______________

Enter the temperature change allowed during the stability sample time (see previous entry). The
change in temperature per sample period must be less than this value for the temperature to be
considered stable enough to start a prove.
{L2} Sample Time Flow Rate Change ( Flow) _______________

Enter the change in flow rate allowed during the stability sample time (see previous two entries).
The change in flow rate per sample period must be less than this value before the flow rate is
considered to be stable enough to start a prove.
{L2} Prover-to-Meter Temperature Deviation Range _______________

Enter the prover-to-meter temperature range (C or F) allowable after the temperature and flow
rate have stabilized. The temperature at the meter and the prover must be within this limit or the
prove sequence attempt will be aborted.
{L2} Prove Run Meter Factor / Counts Repeatability _______________

Enter for the run repeatability calculation based on:
0 = Run Counts
1 = Run Calculated Meter Factor
Run counts repeatability is a more stringent test but may be difficult to achieve due to changing
temperature and pressure during the prove sequence. Calculating repeatability based upon the
calculated meter factor takes into account variations in temperature and pressure, and may be
easier to achieve.
{L2} Run Repeatability Maximum Deviation % _______________

Enter the maximum allowable percentage deviation between run counts or run meter factors
(depending on selection of previous entry). The deviation is calculated by comparing the high/low
meter counts or meter factors based on their low point, as follows:
Deviation = 100 (High - Low) / Low Point
This deviation is always calculated using the meter factor when the Master Meter Method of
proving is selected.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-55

{L2} Meter Factor Deviation % from Meter Factor Curve _______________

The maximum % deviation allowed between the new calculated meter factor and the interpolated
meter factor obtained from the 'meter factor curve' for the current product (see Product Setup
this chapter).
TIP - Use the blank lines {L2} Number of Meter Factors in Historical Average _______________
configuration option to write A maximum of 10 previous meter factors (normalized to base prove flow rate) can be stored and
down the corresponding averaged for comparison with the new (normalized) meter factor just calculated.
flow computer. {L2} Meter Factor Deviation % from Historical Average _______________
The maximum % deviation allowed between the average of all stored historical meter factors for
the current product and the new calculated meter factor (normalized to the base prove flow rate).
{L2} Automatic Meter Factor Implementation? _______________

Enter [Y] to automatically implement the new meter factor and store in the appropriate product file.
Enter [N] to select not to automatically implement the meter factor determined from the prove.
{L2} Apply Meter Factor Retroactively? _______________

If you selected to auto-implement the meter factor for the previous entry, enter [Y] to retroactively
apply the Meter Factor from the beginning of the batch. The old meter factor will be back
calculated out of the current batch and daily totals. The batch and daily totals will be recalculated
using the new meter factor. Enter [N] to have the Meter Factor applied from this point on.
{L2} Manual Implementation Time Limit _______________

In cases where 'Automatic Meter Factor Implementation' is not selected, the meter factor just
calculated can be implemented manually by activating Modbus point 1787 within this number of
minutes after the prove is completed. Activating point 1787 after the time limit will have no effect.
2-56 22/26.71+ w 05/99

2.14. Configuring Products

be completed first as these 2.14.1. Accessing the Product Setup Submenu
following the 'Misc
been defined.
PID Control Setup
Prover Setup
Flow Computer
Product Setup _
is best to use this method Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Product Setup
Once a computer is in 2.14.2. Product Settings
you can decide to use the Product #1
Method described below. {L1} Name _______________
Once you have finished Enter the name of the product (up to 8 alphanumeric characters), right justified.
{L1} Table Select _______________
Group Entry screen. Enter the number that corresponds to the API or GPA table to use for the product:
Proceed as described in this 0= API 2540 Table 24A (US units) / Table 54A (metric units).
manual for each setup 1= API 2540 Table 24B (US units) / Table 54B (metric units).
option. 2= Table 24C (US units) / Table 54C (metric units).
3= GPA TP16 (US units) / TP16M (metric units).
Product Setup via the 4= Table 24 - 1952 Edition (US units) / Table 54 - 1952 Edition (metric units)
Random Access Method - 5= E/P Mixture
be in the Program Mode. In {L2} API Relative Density (Gravity) Override _______________
[Prog] key. The Program This entry applies only to US units (Revision 22). It will appear depending on which table is
LED will glow green and the selected above. Enter the API Gravity at reference conditions. It is used to calculate the Volume
Select Group Entry screen Correction Factor (VCF) and the Pressure Correction Factor (CPL). The flow computer will accept
will appear. Then press any positive override value and use it as the API in calculations. The override gravity can also be
[Product] [Enter] or entered as specific gravity (see next entry).
[Product] [n] [Enter] (n = To use the live measured density or gravity value (obtained from a densitometer/gravitometer) in
Product # 1 through 8). Use the equations, enter any minus number. The flow computer will then correct the signal from the
[ ] / [ ] keys to scroll. densitometer or gravitometer to 60F, if required (this may be flowing at flowing or reference
conditions - see Meter Run I/O Point Configuration).
Should the gravitometer fail, the flow computer can be made to use the absolute value of the API
Gravity Override. If the override code in Grav/Density Setup is set to 5 = On transmitter failure,
use absolute value of override SG/API for this product.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-57

{L2} Relative Density (SG) Override _______________

This entry applies only to US units (Revision 22). It will appear depending on which table is
selected above. You may enter an override gravity as either API or SG units when measuring
crude oil or generalized refined products. The Computer will accept any positive override value and
use it in the calculations.
TIP - Use the blank lines To use the live measured density or gravity value (obtained from a densitometer/gravitometer) in
provided next to each the equations, enter any minus number. The flow computer will then correct the signal from the
configuration option to write densitometer or gravitometer to 60F, if required (this may be flowing at flowing or reference
down the corresponding conditions - see Meter Run I/O Point Configuration).
flow computer. Should the gravitometer fail, the flow computer can be made to use the absolute value of the API
Gravity Override. If the override code in Grav/Density Setup is set to 5=On transmitter failure, use
absolute value of override SG/API for this product.
INFO - The following data,
rounded to 4 digits, is from {L2} Reference Density Override _______________
GPA 2145-92 and TP16:
Product S.G. kg/m
3 This entry applies only to metric units (Revision 26) depending on which table is selected above.
3
Ethane .3562 355.85
This is the density at reference conditions (kg/m at reference temperature). It is used to calculate
Propane .5070 506.90
the volume correction factor VCF and the pressure correction factor CPL.
HD5 .5010 500.50 Using a Live Densitometer Signal - Entering a value with a minus sign ahead of it causes the
.5050 504.50 flow computer to use the live density signal to calculate the density at reference temperature.
.5100 509.50 Using the Product Override if the Densitometer Fails - Selecting 'fail code 5' at the
Propylene .5228* 522.28*
densitometer setup menu will cause the flow computer to stop using the live density signal should
Iso Butane .5629 562.34
it fail, and substitute the absolute value of the density override entry as the reference density. E.g.:
.5650 564.44
Entering -750 causes the computer to ignore the override and use the live densitometer signal as
n-Butane .5840 583.42 3
long as the transducer is OK. A reference density of 750 kg/m will be used if the densitometer
.5850 584.42
should fail.
Iso Pentane .6247 624.08
n-Pentane .6311 630.48
n-Hexane .6638 663.14 {L2} Reference Temperature _______________
Natural Gasolines This entry applies only to metric units (Revision 26). Enter the base or reference temperature in C
.6650 664.34 at which net corrected volumes represent equivalent volumes of liquid.
n-Heptane .6882 687.52
n-Octane .7070 706.30
n-Nonane .7219 721.19
{L2} Alpha Coefficient
n-Decane .7342 733.48 This entry applies depending on which table is selected above. API 2540, Tables 24C/54C
* Propylene figures are equations require you to enter a value for 'alpha'. This alpha value is used to calculate the volume
derived from API 11.3.3.2. correction factor 'VCF'. Enter the thermal expansion coefficient at reference temperature as
0.000xxxx.
INFO - API 2540; Tables {L2} F Factor Override _______________

23A or 23B (US), or 53A or
53B (metric); are also This entry applies depending on which table is selected above. Enter 0.0 if you wish the flow
automatically used when computer to use API 11.2.1 or 11.2.2 to calculate the compressibility factor 'F' used in the Cpl
applicable. equation. Enter the compressibility factor 'F' if you wish to override the API calculated value.
Tables 24A and 53A apply to
Generalized Crude Oils (SG {L2} Vapor Pressure at 100 F (37.8 C) _______________
range: 1.076-.6110; Dens This entry applies only when GPA TP16 (or TP16M) is entered for table select. The GPA TP16
range: 1075-610.4). standard specifies that the equilibrium pressure of the flowing fluid be calculated according to
Tables 24B and 53B apply to GPA TP15. Two equations are specified. The first designed for mainly pure products such as
Generalized Products (SG propanes, butanes and natural gasolines requires no input data other than the temperature at
range: 1.076-.6535; Dens flowing conditions and the specific gravity at reference conditions. The second improved
range: 1075-652.8). correlation is suitable for use with more varied NGL mixes where different product mixes could
GPA TP16 and TP16M apply have the same specific gravity but different equilibrium pressures. If you wish to use the improved
to LPG/NGL Products (SG second method enter the vapor pressure at 100F or 37.8C. Enter a minus number to use the
range: .637-.495 on Version normal TP15 method for propanes, butanes and natural gasolines.
20, and 636.4-494.5 on
Version 24 of the Omni. {L1A} Density Factor A/B _______________
These calculation methods Density correction factor. Enter [0] to select Density Factor A to correct the densitometer. Enter
use API Chapter 11.2.1 or [1] to select Density Factor B to correct the densitometer.
11.2.2, and 11.2.1M or
11.2.2M to calculate the
pressure correction factor
CPL.
2-58 22/26.71+ w 05/99


INFO - Characters in { } {L1A} Date of Meter Factor Curve ________ ________ ________ ________
Use this entry to record the date which helps identify when the meter factor curve was determined.

{L1A} Meter Factor #1 ________ ________ ________ ________
configuration option to write Up to twelve meter factors per product / per meter can be entered. The flow computer dynamically
down the corresponding interpolates the curve to determine the correct factor to apply at any flow rate.
flow computer. {L1A} Flow Rate #1 ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the flow rate that existed when the meter factor was determined. Up to twelve meter
Product Setup via the factor/flow rates can be entered per meter per product. Data sets must be entered lowest flow rate
Random Access Method - first working up to maximum flow rate last.
be in the Program Mode. In {L1A} Meter Factor #2 ________ ________ ________ ________
[Prog] key. The Program {L1A} Flow Rate #2 ________ ________ ________ ________
Select Group Entry screen {L1A} Meter Factor #3 ________ ________ ________ ________
[Product] [Enter] or {L1A} Flow Rate #3 ________ ________ ________ ________
[Product] [n] [Enter] (n =
Product # 1 through 8). Use {L1A} Meter Factor #4 ________ ________ ________ ________
[ ] / [ ] keys to scroll.
{L1A} Flow Rate #4 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #5 ________ ________ ________ ________

{L1A} Flow Rate #5 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #6 ________ ________ ________ ________

{L1A} Flow Rate #6 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #7 ________ ________ ________ ________

{L1A} Flow Rate #7 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #8 ________ ________ ________ ________

{L1A} Flow Rate #8 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #9 ________ ________ ________ ________

{L1A} Flow Rate #9 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #10 ________ ________ ________ ________

{L1A} Flow Rate #10 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #11 ________ ________ ________ ________

{L1A} Flow Rate #11 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #12 ________ ________ ________ ________

{L1A} Flow Rate #12 ________ ________ ________ ________
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-59

Product #2
INFO - The following data, {L1} Name _______________
rounded to 4 digits, is from
GPA 2145-92 and TP16: {L1} Table Select _______________
3
Product S.G. kg/m
Ethane .3562 355.85
{L2} API Relative Density (Gravity) Override _______________
Propane .5070 506.90 {L2} Relative Density (SG) Override _______________
HD5 .5010 500.50
.5050 504.50 {L2} Reference Density Override _______________
.5100 509.50
Propylene .5228* 522.28* {L2} Reference Temperature _______________
Iso Butane .5629 562.34
.5650 564.44 {L2} Alpha Coefficient _______________
n-Butane .5840 583.42
.5850 584.42 {L2} F Factor Override _______________
n-Pentane .6311 630.48 {L2} Vapor Pressure at 100 F (37.8 C) _______________
n-Hexane .6638 663.14
Natural Gasolines
{L1A} Density Factor A/B _______________
.6650 664.34 Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
n-Heptane .6882 687.52
n-Octane .7070 706.30 {L1A} Date of Meter Factor Curve ________ ________ ________ ________
n-Nonane .7219 721.19
n-Decane .7342 733.48 {L1A} Meter Factor #1 ________ ________ ________ ________
* Propylene figures are
{L1A} Flow Rate #1 ________ ________ ________ ________
derived from API 11.3.3.2.
{L1A} Meter Factor #2 ________ ________ ________ ________
INFO - API 2540; Tables
23A or 23B (US), or 53A or
{L1A} Flow Rate #2 ________ ________ ________ ________
53B (metric); are also {L1A} Meter Factor #3 ________ ________ ________ ________
automatically used when
applicable. {L1A} Flow Rate #3 ________ ________ ________ ________
Generalized Crude Oils (SG {L1A} Meter Factor #4 ________ ________ ________ ________
range: 1.076-.6110; Dens
range: 1075-610.4). {L1A} Flow Rate #4 ________ ________ ________ ________
Tables 24B and 53B apply to {L1A} Meter Factor #5 ________ ________ ________ ________
Generalized Products (SG
range: 1.076-.6535; Dens {L1A} Flow Rate #5 ________ ________ ________ ________
range: 1075-652.8).
GPA TP16 and TP16M apply {L1A} Meter Factor #6 ________ ________ ________ ________
to LPG/NGL Products (SG
range: .637-.495 on Version
{L1A} Flow Rate #6 ________ ________ ________ ________
20, and 636.4-494.5 on {L1A} Meter Factor #7 ________ ________ ________ ________
Version 24 of the Omni.
These calculation methods {L1A} Flow Rate #7 ________ ________ ________ ________
use API Chapter 11.2.1 or
11.2.2, and 11.2.1M or {L1A} Meter Factor #8 ________ ________ ________ ________
pressure correction factor {L1A} Flow Rate #8 ________ ________ ________ ________
CPL.
{L1A} Meter Factor #9 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #9 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #10 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #10 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #11 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #11 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #12 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #12 ________ ________ ________ ________
2-60 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Product #3
INFO - Characters in { } {L1} Name _______________
{L1} Table Select _______________
TIP - Use the blank lines {L2} API Relative Density (Gravity) Override _______________
configuration option to write {L2} Relative Density (SG) Override _______________
settings you entered in the {L2} Reference Density Override _______________
flow computer.
{L2} Reference Temperature _______________
Product Setup via the {L2} Alpha Coefficient _______________
Setup entries require that you {L2} F Factor Override _______________
the Display Mode press the {L2} Vapor Pressure at 100 F (37.8 C) _______________
Select Group Entry screen Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
[Product] [Enter] or {L1A} Date of Meter Factor Curve ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #1 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #2 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #2 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #3 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #3 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #4 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #4 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #5 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #5 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #6 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #6 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #7 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #7 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #8 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #8 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #9 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #9 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #10 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #10 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #11 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #11 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #12 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #12 ________ ________ ________ ________
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-61

Product #4
3
Product S.G. kg/m
Ethane .3562 355.85
HD5 .5010 500.50
.5100 509.50
Iso Butane .5629 562.34
n-Butane .5840 583.42
n-Hexane .6638 663.14
Natural Gasolines
n-Heptane .6882 687.52
n-Nonane .7219 721.19
derived from API 11.3.3.2. {L1A} Flow Rate #1 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #2 ________ ________ ________ ________
23A or 23B (US), or 53A or {L1A} Flow Rate #2 ________ ________ ________ ________
53B (metric); are also
automatically used when {L1A} Meter Factor #3 ________ ________ ________ ________
applicable.
{L1A} Flow Rate #3 ________ ________ ________ ________
range: 1.076-.6110; Dens
Tables 24B and 53B apply to
{L1A} Meter Factor #5 ________ ________ ________ ________
range: 1075-652.8).
range: .637-.495 on Version {L1A} Flow Rate #6 ________ ________ ________ ________
20, and 636.4-494.5 on
Version 24 of the Omni. {L1A} Meter Factor #7 ________ ________ ________ ________
CPL.
{L1A} Meter Factor #9 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #9 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #10 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #10 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #11 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #11 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #12 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #12 ________ ________ ________ ________
2-62 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Product #5
{L1} Table Select _______________
flow computer.
{L1A} Flow Rate #1 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #2 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #2 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #3 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #3 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #4 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #4 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #5 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #5 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #6 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #6 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #7 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #7 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #8 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #8 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #9 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #9 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #10 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #10 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #11 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #11 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #12 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #12 ________ ________ ________ ________
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-63

Product #6
3
Product S.G. kg/m
Ethane .3562 355.85
HD5 .5010 500.50
.5100 509.50
Iso Butane .5629 562.34
n-Butane .5840 583.42
n-Hexane .6638 663.14
Natural Gasolines
n-Heptane .6882 687.52
n-Nonane .7219 721.19
{L1A} Meter Factor #2 ________ ________ ________ ________
applicable.
{L1A} Flow Rate #3 ________ ________ ________ ________
range: 1.076-.6110; Dens
{L1A} Meter Factor #5 ________ ________ ________ ________
range: 1075-652.8).
20, and 636.4-494.5 on
CPL.
{L1A} Meter Factor #9 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #9 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #10 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #10 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #11 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #11 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #12 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #12 ________ ________ ________ ________
2-64 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Product #7
{L1} Table Select _______________
flow computer.
{L1A} Flow Rate #1 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #2 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #2 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #3 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #3 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #4 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #4 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #5 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #5 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #6 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #6 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #7 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #7 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #8 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #8 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #9 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #9 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #10 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #10 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #11 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #11 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #12 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #12 ________ ________ ________ ________
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-65

Product #8
3
Product S.G. kg/m
Ethane .3562 355.85
HD5 .5010 500.50
.5100 509.50
Iso Butane .5629 562.34
n-Butane .5840 583.42
n-Hexane .6638 663.14
Natural Gasolines
n-Heptane .6882 687.52
n-Nonane .7219 721.19
{L1A} Meter Factor #2 ________ ________ ________ ________
applicable.
{L1A} Flow Rate #3 ________ ________ ________ ________
range: 1.076-.6110; Dens
{L1A} Meter Factor #5 ________ ________ ________ ________
range: 1075-652.8).
20, and 636.4-494.5 on
CPL.
{L1A} Meter Factor #9 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #9 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #10 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #10 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #11 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #11 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Meter Factor #12 ________ ________ ________ ________
{L1A} Flow Rate #12 ________ ________ ________ ________
2-66 22/26.71+ w 05/99

2.15. Configuring Batches

INFO - Characters in { } Note: See Chapter 3 Computer Batching Operations in Volume 2 for
refer to password levels. information on configuring your flow computer for batches.

flow computer.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-67

2.16. Configuring Miscellaneous Factors

be completed first as these 2.16.1. Accessing the Factor Setup Submenu
following the 'Misc
been defined.
Batch Preset Setup
Batch Sequence
Flow Computer
Factor Setup _
is best to use this method Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Factor Setup and
when programming an press [Enter] to access the submenu.
Once a computer is in 2.16.2. Factor Settings
familiar with the application {L1} Weight of Water _______________
Also known as absolute density of water. Weight of a barrel of water at 60F or 15C, and 14.696
PSIa or 101.325 kPa(a). Used to convert from specific gravity units to mass. (From GPA 2145-92
= 8.3372 Lbm/Gal = 350.162 Lbs/Bbl).
Note: This is the true weight of water, NOT the conversion factor used to convert grs/cc to
Lbs/Bbl sometimes given as 350.507. For metric versions (Revision 26), the default value
submenu, press the [Prog] 3
is 999.012 kg/m .
Group Entry screen.
Proceed as described in this
{L1} Flow Average Factor _______________
manual for each setup The flow averaging factor is the number of calculation cycles used to smooth the displayed flow
option. rate. A number 1-99 will be accepted. (A calculation cycle is 500msec).
Factor Setup via the {L1A} Alarm Deadband % _______________

Random Access Method - Nuisance alarms can occur when input variables spend any amount of time near the high or low
Setup entries require that you alarm set points. These nuisance alarms can swamp the alarm log with useless alarms leaving no
be in the Program Mode. In room for real alarms. This entry sets a percentage limit based on the 'high alarm' entry. A variable
the Display Mode press the must return within the high/low alarm limits by more than this amount before the alarm is cleared.
[Prog] key. The Program E.g.: High limit is 100F, Low limit is 20F, Alarm deadband is set to 2 percent. A transducer input
LED will glow green and the which exceeded 100F will set the 'high alarm'. The transducer signal must drop 2 percent below
Select Group Entry screen the high alarm setpoint (98F) before the alarm will clear.
[[Factor] [Enter], or {L1} Atmospheric Pressure (ABS) _______________
[Factor] [Meter] [n] [Enter],
or [Meter] [n] [Factor](n = This setting is used to convert flowing pressure readings in Psig to absolute pressure units PSIa
Meter Run # 1, 2, 3, or 4). for US Units, and for the metric version in absolute units in conformance to pressure (metric) units
selected.
2-68 22/26.71+ w 05/99

2.17. Configuring Printers

2.17.1. Accessing the Printer Setup Submenu
TIP - Use the blank lines Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the Select Group Entry
screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the
down the corresponding following will be displayed:
flow computer.
*** SETUP MENU ***
Printer Setup via the
Batch Sequence
Random Access Method - Factor Setup
Setup entries require that you Printer Setup _
[Prog] key. The Program Use the [ ]/[ ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to Printer Setup
Select Group Entry screen and press [Enter] to access the submenu.
[Print] [Setup] [Enter] and
use [ ] / [ ] keys to scroll. 2.17.2. Printer Settings
{L1} Computer ID _______________
Appears on all reports. Enter up to 8 alphanumeric characters to identify the flow computer.
{L1} Print Interval in Minutes _______________

Enter the number of minutes between each interval report. Entering [0] will disable interval reports.
The maximum allowed is 1440 minutes which will provide one interval report per 24-hour period.
{L1} Print Interval Start Time _____:_____

Enter the start time from which the interval report timer is based (e.g.: Entering 01:00 with a Print
Interval of 120 minutes will provide an interval report every odd hour only).
{L1} Daily Report Time _____:_____

Enter the hour at which the daily report will print at the beginning of the contract day (e.g.: 07:00).
{L1} Disable Daily Report? _______________

Enter [Y] to disable the Daily Report (default is 'N'). This simply blocks the report from printing.
Data will still be sent to the historical buffers (last 8) and archive if archive is setup.
{L1} Daylight Savings Time Start _____/_____/_____

Enter the Day/Month/Year that daylight savings time begins.
{L1} Daylight Savings Time End _____/_____/_____

Enter the Day/Month/Year that daylight savings time ends.
{L1} Clear Daily Totals at Batch End? _______________

Enter [N] to provide 24 hour totals of all flow through the flowmeter regardless of what product is
run. Select [Y] to clear the totalizers at the end of each batch. This would mean that the daily
totalizers would not necessarily represent 24 hours of flow but the amount of flow since the last
batch end or the daily report
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-69

{L1} Automatic Hourly Batch Select? _______________

Enter [Y] to automatically cause a batch end every hour on the hour. If customized reports are
selected a batch end report will be printed. If default reports are selected no batch end report will
be printed.
settings you entered in the {L1} Automatic Weekly Batch Select? _______________
flow computer. Enter a number 1 through 7 to automatically print a batch end report in addition to a daily report on
a specific day of the week (0=No batch end, 1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, etc.).
{L1} Automatic Monthly Batch Select? _______________

Enter a number 1 through 31 to automatically print a batch end report in place of a daily report on a
specific day of the month (0=No batch end).
{L1} Print Priority _______________

Enter [0] when the computer is connected to a dedicated printer. If several computers are sharing
a common printer, one computer must be designated as the master and must be assigned the
number 1. The remaining computers must each be assigned a different Print Priority number
between 2 and 12.
{L1} Number of Nulls _______________

For slow printers without an input buffer, a number of null characterss can be sent after each
carriage return or line feed. A number between 0-255 will be accepted. Set this to 0 if your printer
supports hardware handshaking and you have connected pin 20 of the printer connector to
terminal 6 of the flow computer (see Chapter 3).
{L1} Use Default Report Templates? _______________

Entering [Y] instructs the flow computer to use the default report formats for Daily Batch End,
Snapshot and Prover Reports. Enter [N] if you have downloaded your own custom report
templates using the OmniCom program.
Common Printer Control {L1} Condensed Print Mode Control String _______________
Codes -
Certain default report templates exceed 80 columns when the computer is configured for 4 meter
Epson, IBM & Compatible:
runs and a station. Enter the hexadecimal character string which will put the printer into the
Condensed Mode= 0F condensed print mode. Data must be in sets of 2 characters (i.e., 05 not 5). A maximum of 5
Cancel Condensed= 12 control characters are allowed.
OKI Data Models:
Condensed Mode= 1D {L1} Cancel Condensed Print Mode Control String _______________
Cancel Condensed= 1E Uncondensed Print Mode. Enter the hexadecimal character string which when sent to the printer
HP Laser Jet II & will cancel the condensed print mode. Data must be in sets of 2 characters (i.e., 05 not 5). A
Compatible: maximum of 5 control characters are allowed.
Condensed= 1B266B3253
Cancel Cond= 1B266B3053 {L1} Company Name _____________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Two lines of the display allow entry of the Company Name. On each line enter a maximum of 19
characters and press [Enter]. Both lines are concatenated and appear on all reports.
{L1} Location ___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Two lines of the display allow entry of the station location Name. On each line enter a maximum of
19 characters and press [Enter]. Both lines are concatenated and appear on all reports.
2-70 22/26.71+ w 05/99

3. User-Programmable Functions
3.1. Introduction
The computer performs many functions, displays and prints large amounts of
data, but there are always some application-specific control functions,
calculations or displays that cannot be anticipated.
The Omni Flow Computer incorporates several programmable features that
enable the user to easily customize the computer to fit a specific application.
o User-programmable Boolean Flags and Statements
o User-programmable Variables and Statements
o User-configurable Display Screens
o User-customized Report Templates
The first three Items are explained here. The last item requires the use of the
OmniCom PC configuration software that comes with the flow computer.
3.2. User-Programmable Boolean Flags and

Statements
3.2.1. What is a Boolean?

A Boolean point is simply a single bit register within the computer (sometimes
called a flag) which has only two states, On or Off (True or False, 1 or 0). These
Boolean flags or points are controlled and/or monitored by the flow computer
and represent alarms, commands and status points. Each Boolean point is
given an identifying number within the data base of the computer allowing the
state (On or Off) to be monitored or modified by assigning that Boolean point to
a physical digital I/O point or accessing it via a communication port. A
maximum of 24 physical digital I/O points are available for monitoring limit
switches, status signals or controlling relays or lamps.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 3-1

Chapter 3 User-Programmable Functions
Boolean points are numbered as follows:

INFO - The 4-digit point 1001 through 1024 Physical Digital I/O Points 1 through 24
numbers referred to in this 1025 through 1088 Programmable Boolean Points (64 total)
chapter are Modbus index
numbers used to identify 1089 through 1099 Programmable Pulse outputs (11 total)
each variable (Boolean or 1100 through 1199 Meter Run #1 Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.)
other) within the Modbus
database. A complete listing 1200 through 1299 Meter Run #2 Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.)
and descriptions of database 1300 through 1399 Meter Run #3 Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.)
points is included in Volume
4. 1400 through 1499 Meter Run #4 Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.)
1500 through 1699 Scratchpad Storage for Results of Boolean Statements
1700 through 1799 Command or Status Inputs
1800 through 1899 Station Boolean Flags (Alarms, Status etc.)
2100 through 2199 Meter Run #1 Totalizer Roll-over Flags
2600 through 2623 Miscellaneous Station Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.)
2700 through 2759 Miscellaneous Boolean Command and Status Points
2800 through 2876 Station Totalizer Roll-over Flags
2877 through 2899 More Miscellaneous Boolean Command and Status Points
Physical Digital I/O Points (1001 1024)

Each of the physical digital I/O points is assigned to a valid Boolean point
number as detailed above. Points 1700 through 1799 are command inputs
which are described later, all other point assignments indicate that the I/O point
is to be set up as an output point. Output points which are dedicated as flow
accumulator outputs can be set up for pulse widths ranging from 10 msec to
100 sec in 10 msec increments. All other output point assignments have
associated 'time ON delay' and 'time OFF delay' timers which are adjustable
from 0.0 to 1000 sec in 100 msec increments.
Programmable Boolean Points (1025 1088)

There are 64 user flags or Boolean points are available and are controlled by 64
Boolean statements or equations. These are provided to perform sequencing
and control functions. Each statement or equation is evaluated every 100 msec.
starting at point 1025 and ending at point 1088. The results of these Boolean
statements can then assigned to physical digital I/O points. There are no
restrictions as to what Boolean points can be used in a Boolean statement
including the results of other Boolean statements or the status of physical I/O
points.
Programmable Accumulator Points (1089 1099)

There are 11 Programmable points that are used with Variable Points 7089
through 7099 for programming pulse outputs for Digital I/O or Front Panel
Counters.
3-2 22/26.71+ w 05/99

One-Shot Boolean Points (1501 1649)

The 149 Boolean flags located between 1501 and 1650 are used to store
temporary data that has been received via the Modbus link or put there by a
Boolean statement. These Boolean variables can be sent to a digital output or
used in the Boolean statements described above.
Scratch Pad Boolean Points (1650 1699)

The 50 Boolean flags located between 1650 and 1699 can be use as
momentary commands. When set true they remain on for two seconds.
3.2.2. Sign (+, -) of Analog or Calculated Variables

(5001 8999)
The sign of analog or calculated variables can also be used in a Boolean
statements by simply specifying the point number. The Boolean value of the
variable is 'true ' if it is positive and 'false' if it has a negative value.
3.2.3. Boolean Statements and Functions

Each Boolean statement consists of up to 3 variables optionally preceded by
the Boolean 'NOT' function and separated by one of the Boolean functions
'AND', 'OR', 'Exclusive OR' or 'EQUAL' . The following symbols are used to
represent the functions:
Function Symbol
NOT /
AND &
OR +
EX OR *
EQUAL =
IF )
GOTO 'G'
MOVE :
COMPARE %
The '=' function allows a statement to be used to change the state of the
Boolean point on the left of the equal sign (usually a command point).
Evaluation precedence is left to right.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 3-3

To program the Boolean points proceed as follows:

From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] and the following
menu will be displayed:
*** Misc. Setup ***

Password Maint?(Y)
Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station?(Y)
Config Meter "n"
Config PID ? "n"
Config D/A Out "n"
Front Pnl Counters
Program Booleans ? _
Program Variables ?
User Display ? "n"
Scroll down to 'Set Boolean ? (Y)' and enter [Y]. Assuming that no Booleans
are as yet programmed, the display shows:
Boolean Point #10xx

25: _
Rmk
26:
Note that the cursor is on the line labeled 25: At this point enter the Boolean
equation that will cause Boolean point 1025 to be ON (True) / OFF (False).
INFO - Points 1005 and 1006 For example, to turn Boolean 1025 ON whenever Boolean 1005 is OFF, OR
reflect the current status of whenever 1006 is ON, enter [/1005+1006] (note the use of the '/' to indicate the
physical I/O Points 05 and 06
which could be inputs 'NOT' function).
connected to the outside
world or outputs controlling
relays, etc. Boolean Point #10XX
25: /1005+1006
Rmk
26: _
Boolean 1025 could then be used in the statement following which defines
Boolean 1026. For example, by including Boolean 1205 which indicates that
Meter #2 is active and flowing (see following page), Boolean 1026 will be ON
whenever 'Meter 2 is active and flowing' AND (1005 is NOT ON OR 1006 is
ON).
TIP - Leave plenty of empty
statements between Boolean Point #10xx
programmed ones. This will 25: /1005+1006
allow you to modify the
execution order of your Rmk
program if you need to later. 26: 1205&1025
Use the 'Up/Down' arrow keys to scroll though all 64 programmable Boolean
points.
3-4 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Remember that the Boolean statements are evaluated in order starting from
1025 proceeding to 1088 . For maximum speed always ensure that statements
used in other statements are evaluated ahead of time by placing them in the
correct order.
Example 1: Meter Failure Alarm for Two-Meter Run Application

INFO - Use the Exclusive OR Object: Using signals from 'flow sensing switches' inserted into the pipeline,
function * to compare 2 provide an alarm output which activates whenever the signals from the flow
points. The result of an
Exclusive OR of 2 points is
switches and flow meter signals differ, also provide a snapshot report by setting
true only if both points are command point 1719.
different states.
How the hardware is configured:
INFO - Booleans 1025, 1026
and 1027 are only used as an Physical I/O points 02 and 03 are setup as inputs by assigning them to 1700
example here. Any unused (see the Command and Status Booleans on a later page). They are connected
programmable Booleans can
be used for this function.
to flow sensing switches on meter runs 1 and 2 respectively. The switches
activate with flow.
Physical I/O point 04 is connected to a 'meter fail alarm bell'. The output is
assigned to Programmable Boolean 1027. A 'delay ON' of 5 seconds is selected
to eliminate spurious alarms which would occur during startup and shutdown. A
'delay OFF' of 5 seconds is selected to ensures that the alarm bell remains on
for at least 5 seconds.
The Booleans are programmed as follows:
True if Meter #1 fails.

BOOLEAN POINT #10xx
True if Meter #2 fails.
25: 1105*1002
26: 1205*1003
Request snapshot if either 27: 1719=1025+1026
meter fails. 28:
Notes:
q Boolean Point 1025 is true
(Meter 1 failed) whenever
'Meter 1 Active' (Point
1105) differs from 'Flow
Detected' Flow Switch 1
(Point 02).
(Meter 2 failed) whenever
'Meter 2 Active' (Point
1205) differs from 'Flow
Detected' Flow Switch 2
(Point 03).
(Meter 1 OR 2 failed)
whenever point 1025 OR
0126 are true. The
Boolean Command Bit
1719 is set when Boolean
Point 1027 is true.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 3-5

Example 2: Automatic Run Switching for 4-Meter Run Application

Object: To improve metering accuracy by automatically selecting the correct
flow meter run to be active in a multi run application. Small turbines need to be
protected from over-speeding while for best accuracy larger turbines should be
valved off when the flow drops below their minimum rate. In the example
shown, except when switching from one flow meter to the other, only one flow
meter run is active at one time. This is one example only. The number of runs
open for a given application at any flow rate obviously depends on the size of
the flow meters used.
Fig. 3-1. Figure Showing Automatic Four-Meter Flow Zone Thresholds
Switching is based on the station flow gross flow rate which is compared to
preset switching thresholds entered by the user (See 'Meter Station Settings'
in Chapter 2). Threshold Flags 1, 2 and 3 are set and reset according to the
actual station flow rate.
The first task is identify the 4 zones and assign programmable Boolean points
to them. This allows us to include them in further Boolean statements.
Zone 1 = NOT Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3
Zone 2 = Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3
Zone 3 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND NOT Flag3
Zone 4 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND Flag 3
3-6 22/26.71+ w 05/99

As each statement can have only 3 terms in it we must pre-process some part
of the equations. The term 'NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3' appears in Zone 1
and 2 equations.
Now we assign valid point numbers to our statements and rewrite them the way
they will be input.
First one term needs to be pre-processed to simplify:
1025 = NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3 25: /1825&/1826
Next the flow Zones are defined:
Zone 1 = NOT Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3 26: /1824&1025
Zone 2 = Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3 27: 1824&1025
Zone 3 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3 28: 1824&1825&/1826
Zone 4 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND Flag 3 29: 1824&1825&1826
The program thus far looks like:
/ Flag 2 & / Flag 3

BOOLEAN POINT #10xx
Zone 1 25: 1105*1002
26: 1205*1003
Zone 2 27: 1719=1025+1026
28: 1824&1825&/1826
Zone 3 29: 1824&1825&1826
Zone 4
In our example each meter run valve (V1, V2, V3 and V4) fails closed,
energizes to open. A limit switch mounted on each valve indicates the fully
open position (SW1, SW2, SW3 and SW4).
Fig. 3-2. Figure Showing Four-Meter Run Valve Switching
22/26.71+ w 05/99 3-7

3.2.4. How the Digital I/O Assignments are Configured

We will use Physical I/O Points 11, 12, 13 and 14 to connect to valve limit
switches SW1, SW2, SW3 and SW4 respectively. The switches activate when
the appropriate valve is fully open. The points are designated as inputs by
assigning them to the dummy input Boolean Point 1700 (see the Command and
Status Booleans on a later page). Their data base point numbers are simply
their I/O point number preceded by 10 (e.g.: I/O Point 11 = 1011).
Physical I/O points 15, 16, 17 and 18 are wired so as to open the meter run
valves V1, V2, V3 and V4. They will be assigned to the Boolean Flags 32 (Point
1032) through 35 (Point 1035) which represent the required state of V1 through
V4 as explained below.
The Boolean equations are as follows:
V1 = (NOT SW2 AND NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 1
Valve #1 is opened when the flow is in Zone 1 and will remain open until at least
1 of the other 3 valves is fully open.
Valves V2, V3 and V4 are programmed in a similar fashion.
To simplify we pre-process the common terms. The term 'NOT SW3 AND NOT
SW4' is used to determine V1 and V2. The term 'NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2' is
used to determine V3 and V4.
Assigning the next valid point numbers to our statements and re-write them the
way they will be input.
1030 = NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4 30: /1013&/1014
1031 = NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2 31: /1011&/1012
The final Equations to determined the state of V1, V2, V3 and V4 are as follows:
V1= NOT SW2 AND (NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 1 32: /1012&1030+1026
V2 =NOT SW1 AND (NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 2 33: /1011&1030+1027
V3= (NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2) AND NOT SW4 OR Zone 3 34: 1031&/1014+1028
V4 =(NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2) AND NOT SW3 OR Zone 4 35: 1031&/1013+1029
The computer evaluates each expression from left to right, so the order of the
variables in the above statements is critical. The logic requires that the OR
variable comes last.
3-8 22/26.71+ w 05/99

The final program consists of 11 statements:
Zone 1
BOOLEAN POINT #10xx

Zone 2
25: /1825&/1826
Zone 3 26: /1824&1025
27: 1824&1025
Zone 4 28: 1824&1825&/1826
29: 1824&1825&1826
30: /1013&/1014
31: /1011&/1012
32: /1012&1030+1026
V1 33: /1011&1030+1027
34: 1031&/1014+1028
V2
35: 1031&/1013+1029
V3
V4
The only thing left to do now is assign Booleans 1032, 1033, 1034 and 1035 to
the appropriate digital I/O points which control V1, V2, V3 and V4. Here is a
summary of all of the digital I/O as assigned:
PHYSICAL I/O ASSIGNED TO

WIRED T O SYMBOL
POINT BOOLEAN
11 1700 Valve 1 Fully Open Switch SW1
15 1032 Valve 1 Actuator V1
INFO - A list of Modbus
database addresses and
index numbers is included in
Volume 4 of the Omni User
Any pulse signal can be latched by using a small program similar to the
Manual. following:
BOOLEAN POINT #10xx

1026 is set by 1834 and 25: /1834&/1026
cleared by 1835. 26: /1835&/1025
27:
22/26.71+ w 05/99 3-9

3.3. User Programmable Variables and

Statements
There are 64 user-programmable floating point variables within the flow
computer numbered 7025 through 7088. The value stored in each of these
variables depends on an associated equation or statement. These statements
are evaluated every 500 msec and the resultant variable values can be
displayed on the LCD display, printed on a report, output to a D-A output, or
accessed via one of the communication ports. Typical uses for the variables
and statements include providing measurement units conversions, special
averaging functions, limit checking and comparisons.
3.3.1. Variable Statements and Mathematical Operators

Allowed
Each statement can contain up to 3 variables or constants. The following
symbols are used to represent the functions:
Operator Symbol Description

TIP - The order of ADD + Add the two variables or constants
precedence is: ABSOLUTE, SUBTRACT - Subtract the RH variable or constant from LH
POWER, MULTIPLY &
DIVIDE, ADD & MULTIPLY * Multiply the two variables or constants
SUBTRACT. Where DIVIDE / Divide the two variables or constants
operators have the same
precedence the order is left CONSTANT # The number following is interpreted as a
to right. constant
POWER & Raise the LH variable to the power of the RH
ABSOLUTE $ Use the abs. unsigned value of variable following
EQUAL = Make the variable on left equal to the expression
IF STATEMENT ) Compares the variable to another (What if?)
GOTO STATEMENT G Go to a different variable
MOVE : Move statement or result to another variable.
COMPARE % Compare a value with or equal to
To program the user variables proceed as follows: From the Display Mode
press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] and the following menu will be displayed:
*** Misc. Setup ***

Password Maint?(Y)
Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station?(Y)
Config Meter "n"
Config PID ? "n"
Config D/A Out"n"
Front Pnl Counters
Program Booleans ?
Program Variables? _
3-10 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Scroll down to 'Program Variables ? (Y)' and enter [Y]. Assuming that no
variables are as yet programmed, the display shows:
PROG. VARIABLE #70xx

25: _
26:
27:
Note that the cursor is on the line labeled 25:. At this point enter the variable
equation that will calculate the value of variable 7025.
Example 1:
To provide a variable (7025) which represents Meter Run #1 gross flow rate in
MCF per day' in place of the usual MCF per hour, multiply the 'MCF per hour'
variable (7101) by the constant 24.

bbls/hr x 24 = bbls/day 25: 7101*#24
26:
27:
Example 2:
To provide a variable that represents 'gallons per minute' (7026) we can convert
the 'barrels per hour' variable (7101) to gallons by multiplying by 0.7 (0.7 =
42/60 which is the number of gallons in a barrel / divided by the number of
minutes in an hour).

bbls/hr x 24 = bbls/day
25: 7101*#24
bbls/hr x 0.7 = gal/min 26: 7101*#.7_
27:
Example 3:
To provide a variable (7028) that represents meter run #1 temperature in
'degrees Celsius' we subtract 32 from the 'degrees Fahrenheit' variable (7105)
and divide the result (7027) by 1.8.
bbls/hr x 24 = bbls/day PROG. VARIABLE #70xx

25: 7101*#24
bbls/hr x 0.7 = gal/min
26: 7101*#.7_
F - 32.0 27: 7105-#32
28: 7027/#1.8
(F - 32.0) / 1.8 = C
22/26.71+ w 05/99 3-11

Example 4:
Gross barrels within the flow computer are simply flow meter counts divided by
the flow meter 'K-Factor' (pulses per barrel); i.e., gross barrels are not meter
factored. To provide a variable (7029) which represents Meter Run #1 gross
meter factored barrels, multiply the batch gross barrel totalizer (5101) by the
batch flow weighted average meter factor (5114).
bbls/hr x 24 = bbls/day
bbls/hr x 0.7 = gal/min 25: 7101*#24
26: 7101*#.7_
F - 32.0 27: 7105-#32
28: 7027/#1.8
(F - 32.0) / 1.8 = C 29: 5101*5114
Gross bbls x Mtr Factor
3.3.2. Using Boolean Variables in Variable Statements

Boolean points used in a programmable variable statement are assigned the
value 1.0 when the Boolean value is TRUE and 0.0 when the Boolean value is
FALSE. By multiplying by a Boolean the user can set a variable to 0.0 when the
Boolean point has a value FALSE.
Example:
Provide a variable (7025) which functions as a 'Report Number'. The report
number which will appear on each 'batch end report' must increment
automatically after each batch and reset to zero at the contract day start hour
on January 1 of each year.
Add 1.0 at Batch End PROG. VARIABLE #70xx

25: 7025+1835
Clear batch report number
on Jan 1 Contract Hour 26: 1834)7025=#0
27:
Boolean 1835 is true one calculation cycle at the end of a batch. Boolean point
1834 is equal to 1.0 for one calculation cycle on the contract day start hour on
January 1. If statement 1834 is true we reset counter 7025.
3-12 22/26.71+ w 05/99

3.3.3. Entering Values Directly into the User Variables

In some cases it may be necessary to enter data directly into a user variable
(not the expression, just the variable). For example, to preset the 'Report
Number' Variable 7025 in the example above we proceed as follows. While in
the Display Mode press [Prog] [Input] [Enter], the following will display:
Current value (can be USER VARIABLE #7025

changed by the user). Value 1234
7025+1835
Expression for this
variable (cannot be
changed from this entry).
3.3.4. Using the Variable Expression as a Prompt

Entering plain text into the expression associated with the variable causes the
computer no problems. It ignores the text and leaves the variable unchanged.
For example:
USER VARIABLE 7025

Value ? .00018
Enter Lbs to SCF ?
3.3.5. Password Level Needed to Change the Value of a

User Variable
The first four variables, 7025, 7026, 7027 and 7028 require Level 2 password.
the remaining variables require Level 1.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 3-13

3.3.6. Using Variables in Boolean Expressions

Note: See the beginning of In some cases it is also necessary to trigger some type of an event based on
this chapter on how to the value of a calculated variable. Boolean variables used in the Boolean
program a Boolean
expression if necessary:
expressions and described in the previous text can have only one of two values,
ON or OFF (TRUE or FALSE). How can the floating point numbers described in
this chapter be used in a Boolean expression? Simply using the fact that a
variable can be either positive (TRUE) or negative (FALSE). Any variable or
floating point can be used in a Boolean expression.
Example:
Provide an alarm and snapshot report which will occur when the absolute
difference in net flow rate between Meter Runs #1 and #2 exceeds 10 bbls/hr,
but only when Meter Run #1 flow rate is greater than 1000 bbls/hr.
Result can be positive or

negative.
30: 7102-7202
Absolute flow difference
minus 10. 31: $7030-#10
32: 7102-#1000
Positive if flow rate is
greater than 1000.
Variable 7031 will be positive (TRUE) if Meter Runs #1 and #2 flow rates differ
by more than 10 bbls/hr. Variable 7032 will be positive (TRUE) when Meter Run
#1 flow rate exceeds 1000 bbls/hr .
User variables 7031 and 7032 shown above must both be positive for the alarm
to be set. In addition, we will require that the condition must exist for 5 minutes
to minimize spurious alarms. The alarm will be activated by Physical I/O Point
#02 and we will use Boolean statements 1025 and 1026.
Enter the following Boolean statements (1025 and 1026 used as example only):
True when both are

positive. BOOLEAN POINT #10xx
25: 7031&7032
26: 1719=1002
Snapshot report when 27:
alarm active.
To complete the example we assign Digital I/O Point #02 (Point # 1002) to 1025
and select a 'delay on' of 3000 to provide a 5 minute delay on activate (3000
ticks = 3000 x 100 msec = 300 seconds). Set the delay off to 0.
3-14 22/26.71+ w 05/99

3.4. User Configurable Display Screens

The user can specify up to eight display screen setups. Each display screen can
be programmed to show four variables, each with a descriptive tag. Any
variable within the data base can be selected for display.
Steps needed to configure a display screen are:
INFO - The computer checks 1) Specify a sequence of up to four key presses that will be used to recall
for the user display key the display. Key presses are identified by the A through Z character on
presses first so you may
override an existing display
each key. For each variable (four maximum):
screen by selecting the same 2) Specify the eight character string to be used to identify the variable. Any
key press sequence.
valid characters on the keypad can be used.
3) Specify the database index or point number.
4) Specify the display resolution of the variable (i.e., how many digits to the
right of the decimal point).
Should the number exceed the display capacity, the decimal will be
automatically shifted right to counter the overflow. The computer will shift to
scientific display mode if the integer part of the number exceeds +/- 9,999,999.
To configure the user display screens proceed as follows:
From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] and the following
menu will be displayed:
*** Misc. Setup ***

Password Maint?(Y)
Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station?(Y)
Config Meter "n"
Config PID ? "n"
Config D/A Out"n"
Front Pnl Counters
Program Booleans ?
Program Variables?
User Display ? "n" _
Scroll down to 'User Display ? "n" and enter 1 through 8 to specify which
screen you wish to configure.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 3-15

The screen for Display #1 shows:
USER DISPLAY #1
Key Press _
Var #1 Tag
Var #1 Index
Var #1 Dec.
Var #2 Tag
Var #2 Index
Var #2 Dec.
Var #3 Tag
Var #3 Index
Var #3 Dec.
Var #4 Tag
Var #4 Index
Var #4 Dec.
Use the 'UP/DOWN' arrows to scroll through the screen. For 'Key Press' enter
the key press sequence (up to 4 keys) that will be used to recall this display.
The keys are identified by the letters A through Z.
Fig. 3-3. Keypad Layout - A through Z Keys
3-16 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Example:
You wish to recall 'User Display #1' by pressing [Gross] [Meter] [1], select the
key sequence [A] [L] [O] as shown below.
USER DISPLAY #1
Key Press A L O
Var #1 Tag
Var #1 Index
Var #1 Dec.
Continue configuring User Display #1 by entering the description tag, index

number and decimal position required for each variable.
Press [Gross] [Meter]

[1]
Description Tag
Index # for Meter #1 Flow

Rate
Display XXXX.XX USER DISPLAY #1

Key Press A L O
Description Tag
Var #1 Tag M1 MSCF
Var #1 Index 7101
Index # for Meter #1 Batch
Barrels Var #1 Dec. 2
Var #2 Tag M1 MMSCF
Display XXXX.XX Var #2 Index 5101
Var #2 Dec. 0
Description Tag Var #3 Tag M1 PRSET
Var #3 Index 5116
Index # for Meter #1
Preset Count
Var #3 Dec. 0
Var #4 Tag M1 MFACT
Var #4 Index 5114
Display XXXX.XX
Var #4 Dec. 4
Description Tag Var #4 Tag _
Index # for Meter #1 Batch

F.W.A. M/F
Display XXXX.XX
Description Tag
22/26.71+ w 05/99 3-17

In the preceding example, User Display #1 is used to display Meter Run #1:
Variable #1 Flow rate in MSCF per Hour
Variable #2 Accumulated Batch MSCF
Variable #3 Meter Factor for the Batch
Variable #4 Not Used
The screen is recalled by pressing [Gross] [Meter] [1] [Enter] and displays:
USER DISPLAY # 1
M1 MSCF 1234.56
M1 MMSCF 123456789
M1 MFACT 1.0000
3-18 22/26.71+ w 05/99

4. Flow Equations and Algorithms for US

Customary Units (Revision 22.71+)
4.1. Liquid Flow Rate for Flowmeters

The calculations performed for liquid helical turbine, positive displacement and
mass flowmeters are as follows:
4.1.1. Volumetric Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions Qv

(Bbls/hr)
f Hz
Qv = 3600
(IV) K F nom
4.1.2. Volumetric Flow Rate at Base Conditions Qb

(Bbls/hr)
Q b(GSV) = Q v (IV) VCF CPL MF
Qb = Q b(GSV) C S&W
(NSV)
4.1.3. Mass Flow Rate Qm (KLbs/hr)
Q v(IV) f MF
Qm =
1000
Q v(GSV) b
Qm =
1000
22.71+ w 05/99 4-1

Chapter 4 Flow Equations and Algorithms for US Customary Units (Revision 22.71+)
4.1.4. Nomenclature
Qv(IV) = gross indicated volumetric flow rate at flowing conditions, in
barrels per hour (Bbls/hr)
Qb(GSV) = gross standard volumetric flow rate at base conditions, in barrels
per hour (Bbls/hr)
Qb(NSV) = net standard volumetric flow rate at base conditions, in barrels
per hour (Bbls/hr)
Qm = mass flow rate at flowing conditions for gas turbine flowmeters,
in thousands of pounds mass per hour (Klbm/hr)
fHz = total number of pulses emitted from the flowmeter pulse train
per second.
KFnom = nominal K factor, in pulses per barrel (fHz/Bbl) supplied by the
flow transmitter manufacturer
MF = meter factor in use (dimensionless)
VCF = volume correction factor (dimensionless see 5.2.2 this
chapter)
CPL = correction factor for pressure on liquid (dimensionless see
5.2.3 this chapter)
CS&W = correction factor for percent of sediment and water (%S&W)
content in fluid (dimensionless see 5.2.4 this chapter)
f = fluid (live) density at flowing conditions (actual temperature and
pressure), in gm/cc (see 5.3 this chapter)
b = calculated reference density at base conditions (standard or
reference temperature and pressure), in gm/cc
= relative density at 60F and equilibrium pressure multiplied by
the weight in pounds of one cubic foot water at 60F and 14,696
pounds per square inch absolute (PSIa)
4-2 22.71+ w 05/99

4.2. Correction Factors for Liquid Flow

Dimensionless Values - The flow rate equations for flowmeters require calculating the following
The calculated correction correction factors:
factors for liquid flow
equations are dimensionless;
however, consistent units
q Meter Factor in Use MF
must be used when q Volume Correction Factor VCF
applicable.
q Correction Factor for Pressure on Liquid CPL
q Correction Factor for Sediment and Water Content CS&W
4.2.1. Meter Factor in Use MF
MF = MFBC +
MFPO
Where:
MFBC = meter factor interpolated from base meter factor curve
MFPO = meter factor offset from base meter factor curve obtained from
proving
22.71+ w 05/99 4-3

4.2.2. Volume Correction Factor VCF

VCF = e 1+ 0.8 r
Where:
VCF = volume correction factor
e = Napierian constant
= 2.71828
r = correction for expansion at reference temperature

K 0 + ( K 1 RHO r )
=
2
(RHO r )
Where:
K0 & K1 = physical constants derived from mathematical data
published in the API MPMS, as follows:
Product Type Crude Oil Fuel Oil Jet Group Gasoline

API Tables 6A, 23A 6B, 23B 6B, 23B 6B, 23B
API Gravity
0 to 100 0 to 37 37.1 to 47.9 52.1 to 85
Range
0.6110 0.8400 0.7890 0.6535
Relative
to to to to
Density Range
1.0760 1.0760 0.8395 0.7705
K0 341.0957 103.8720 330.3010 192.4571
K1 0 0.2701 0 0.2438
RHOTr = product density at reference temperature

141.5 H2 0
=
API60 + 131.5
Where:
H20 = density of water
API60 = API gravity, in degrees
When Product is between Jet Group and Gasoline:

B
r = A+
(RHO Tr )2
Where:
A & B are numerical constants obtained from API Standards as
follows:
Between Jet & Gasoline
API Tables 6B, 24B, 5B, 23B
API Gravity Range 48.0 to 52.0
Relative Density Range 0.7710 to 0.7885
A -0.0018684
B 1489.067
4-4 22.71+ w 05/99

T = differential temperature
= Ta -Tr
Where:
Ta = actual temperature, in F
Tr = reference temperature, in F
4.2.3. Correction Factor for Pressure on Liquid CPL
1
C PL =
1 - ( P - Pe ) F
Where:
CPL = correction factor for pressure on liquid (dimensionless)
P = flowing pressure in pounds per square inch gauge (PSIg)
Pe = equilibrium vapor pressure calculated from the correlations

developed by Dr. R. W. Hankinson, et al., of Phillips Petroleum
Company for members of the GPA, and published as GPA
Technical Publication NO 15.
F = Compressibility factor for hydrocarbons; using API MPMS 11.2.1

for liquids 0 to 90 API relative density; and using API MPMS
11.2.2 for hydrocarbons ranging 0.35 to 0.637 relative density
and -50F to 140F.
4.2.4. Correction Factor for Sediment and Water

Content CS&W
%S& W
C S&W = 1 -
100
Where:
CS&W = correction factor for percent of sediment and water (%S&W)
content in fluid (dimensionless)
%S&W = percent of sediment and water content in fluid
22.71+ w 05/99 4-5

4.3. Densities and Other Properties of

Liquids
The flow rate equations for flowmeters require determining the following
densities and other properties:
q Flowing Density f for Crude Oil and Refined Products
q Density of Ethane, Propane and Methane Mixes
q Density of Water
q Density and Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Calculated from Live
Digital Densitometer Output Frequency
4.3.1. Flowing Density f for Crude Oil and Refined

Products
f = b VCF C PL
Where:
f = fluid density at flowing conditions (actual temperature and
pressure), in gm/cc
b = fluid density at base conditions (standard/reference temperature

and pressure), in gm/cc
= relative density at 60F and equilibrium pressure multiplied by
the weight in pounds of one cubic foot water at 60F and 14,696
pounds per square inch absolute (PSIa)
VCF = volume correction factor (ASTM D1250)
CPL = correction factor for pressure on liquid
4.3.2. Density of Ethane, Propane and C3+ Mixes

The density of these mixes at flowing temperature and pressure is calculated
from a computer algorithm developed by Phillips Petroleum (August 1992). The
algorithm was based on data published in GPA TP1, TP2 and TP5.
4-6 22.71+ w 05/99

4.3.3. Density and Relative Density (Specific Gravity)

Calculated from Live Digital Densitometer Output
Frequency
Density and Relative The calculations expressed in this section are performed by the Omni to
Density Values Determined determine the density from frequency signals received from the following third
from Densitometer and
Gravitometer Frequency
party densitometers and gravitometers:
Signals - The equations q Sarasota / Peek
used to determine the density
and relative density via q UGC
density transducers are q Solartron
provided by the respective
manufacturers.
Densitometer Calibration Sarasota Density (gm/cc)

Constants - In many cases
the densitometer constants
Sarasota density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a
supplied by the Sarasota densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as
manufacturers are based on shown below:
SI or metric units. You must
ensure that the constants
entered are based on
D c = D CF
[ D0 ' (t - t 0 ' ) ] [ 2 + K (t - t 0 ' ) ]
grams/cc, F and PSIg.
Contact the densitometer t0' t0'
manufacturer or Omni if you
require assistance. Where:
Dc = corrected density
DCF = Density correction factor

Note:
D0 = calibration constant, in mass/volume*
* D0 must be expressed in
pounds per cubic foot
(gm/cc). t = densitometer oscillation period in microseconds (sec)
t0 = calibration constant, in microseconds
t0' = Tcoef x (Tf - Tcal) + Pcoef x (Pf - Pcal) + t0

where:
Tf = flowing temperature, in F
Tcoef = temperature coefficient, in sec/F
Pf = flowing pressure, in PSIg
Pcoef = pressure coefficient, in sec/PSIg
Pcal = calibration pressure, in PSIg
K = spool calibration constant
22.71+ w 05/99 4-7

UGC Density (grams/cc)

Density and Relative UGC density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a UGC
Density Values Determined densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as shown
below:
Signals - The equations
and relative density via UNCORRECTED DENSITY:
density transducers are
manufacturers. (
D = K 0 + (K 1 t) + K 2 t 2 )
Where:
D = uncorrected density, in grams/cc
K0

K 1 = calibration constants of density probe, entered via the keypad
K 2
t = densitometer oscillation time period, in microseconds (sec)
CORRECTED DENSITY:

( 2
K 3 D + )
K 2 D + K 1 ( f - c )

Dc = D CF
+ K
(
t 3
D2 )
+ K t 2 D + K t1 ( Tf - Tc ) + D

Where:
Dc = corrected density, in grams/cc
DCF = density correction factor

K 1

K 2 = pressure constants
K 3
f = flowing pressure, in PSIg

c = calibration pressure, in PSIg
K t1

K t2 = temperature constants
K t 3
Tf = flowing temperature, in F
Tc = calibration temperature, in F
4-8 22.71+ w 05/99

Solartron Density (grams/cc)

Densitometer Calibration Solartron density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a
Constants - In many cases Solartron frequency densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure
supplied by the
corrections as detailed below.
manufacturers are based on
SI or metric units. You must UNCORRECTED DENSITY:
entered are based on
grams/cc, F and PSIg.
Contact the densitometer
D = K 0 + (K 1 t) + K 2 t 2 ( )
manufacture or Omni if you
require assistance. Where:
K0

K 1 = calibration constants supplied by Solartron, in grams/cc and F
K 2
T EMPERATURE COMPENSATED DENSITY:
DT = D [1 + K 18 ( Tf - 68) ] + [ K 19 ( Tf - 68) ]
Where:
DT = temperature corrected density, in grams/cc
D = uncompensated density, in grams/cc

K 18
= calibration constants supplied by Solartron
K 19
Tf = Temperature in F
T EMPERATURE AND PRESSURE COMPENSATED DENSITY:
D PT = D T [ 1 + (K 20 Pf ) + (K 21 Pf ) ]
Where:
DPT = temperature and pressure compensated density, in grams/cc
DT = temperature compensated density, in grams/cc
K20 = K 20A + (K 20B Pf )
K21 = K 21A + (K 21B Pf )

K 20A
K 20B
K 21A
K 21B
Pf = flowing pressure in PSIg
22.71+ w 05/99 4-9

Additional Density Equation for Velocity of Sound Effects:

For LPG Products in the range of 0.350 - 0.550 grams/cc, the following term
can be applied to the temperature and pressure compensated density Dtp:
D VOS = D tp + K r (D tp - K j )
3
Where:
DVOS = density for velocity of sound effects, in grams/cc
Dtp = temperature and pressure compensated density, in grams/cc
Kr
K j
Users wishing to implement the above term are advised to contact Solartron to
obtain a reworked calibration sheet containing the coefficients 'Kr' and 'Kj'.
(Typically, Kr = 1.1 and Kj = 0.5). If you do not want to implement the above
term, enter 0.0 for Kr.
4-10 22.71+ w 05/99

4.4. Recalculation of Batch Ticket

The actual values of API60 and %S&W that correspond to a batch are obtained
after the batch has ended. The option to recalculate the batch ticket adjusts the
batch quantities to actual results when the new, actual values of API60 and
%S&W are entered. The calculations performed are:
q Recalculated Gross Standard Volume
q Recalculated Net Standard Volume
q Factored Gross Volume
q Net Weight Delivered
4.4.1. Recalculated Gross Standard Volume GSVRecalc

(Bbls)
GSVRecalc = BGF VCFa C PL a MF

Where:
GSVRecalc = recalculated gross standard volume, in barrels (Bbls)
BGF = batch gross volume
VCFa = recalculated volume correction factor (correction for temperature

on liquid; ASTM D1250) using batch average temperature and
entered (actual) API60a (see 5.2.2 this chapter)
CPLa = recalculated correction factor for pressure on liquid using batch

average pressure and entered (actual) API60a (see 5.2.3 this
chapter)
MF = average meter factor (see 5.2.1 this chapter)
4.4.2. Recalculated Net Standard Volume
Recalculated Net Standard Volume in US Customary Units NSV

(Bbls)
NSVRecalc = GSVRecalc C S&Wa

Where:
NSVRecalc = recalculated net standard volume at 60F and 0 PSIg, in barrels
(Bbls)
GSVRecalc = recalculated gross standard volume, in barrels (Bbls)
CS&Wa = actual correction factor for percent of sediment and water

(%S&W) content in fluid (dimensionless)
22.71+ w 05/99 4-11

Recalculated Net Standard Volume in Metric Units Nm3 (m3)
Nm 3 Recalc = NSVRecalc C API60
Where:
3
Nm Recalc = recalculated net standard volume at 15C and 101.325 kPa, in
3
cubic meters (m )
CAPI60 = correction factor for API60 (see table below)
API60 CAPI
60
0.0 - 12.0 0.15893

12.1 - 31.4 0.15892
31.5 - 44.2 0.15891
44.3 - 52.4 0.15890
52.5 - 59.9 0.15889
60.0 - 68.7 0.15888
4.4.3. Factored Gross Volume FGV (Bbls)
FGV = BGF MF
Where:
FGV = factored gross volume, in barrels (Bbls)
BGF = batch gross flow rate, in barrels per hour (Bbls/hr)
MF = average meter factor (see 5.2.1 this chapter)
4.4.4. Net Weight Delivered NWD
589.9483
NWD (l-ton) = NSVRecalc 0.0375 - 0.0050789
API60 + 131.5
NWD (m-ton) = NWD (l-ton) 1.01605
Where:
NWD(l-ton) = net weight delivered, in US customary units (long tons)
NWD(m-ton) = net weight delivered, in metric units (metric tons)
NSVRecalc = recalculated net standard volume at 60F and 0 PSIg, in barrels
(Bbls)
4-12 22.71+ w 05/99

4.5. Liquid Flow Rate for Provers

The calculations performed for unidirectional, bi-directional and small volume
(compact) provers are as follows:
4.5.1. Prove Gross Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions

(Bbls/hr)
Gross Flow Rate for Uni- and Bi-directional Provers PQv(U/B)
Pf Hz
PQ v = 3600
(U/B) K F nom
Gross Flow Rate for Small Volume (Compact) Provers PQv(SVP)
PVb
PQ v = 3600
(SVP) Td vol
4.5.2. Prove Flow Rate using Pulse Interpolation

Method
Td vol
Prove Interpoated Counts = Integer Counts

Td fmp
22.71+ w 05/99 4-13

4.5.3. Nomenclature
PQv(U/B) = prove gross flow rate at flowing conditions for uni- and bi-
directional provers, in barrels per hour (Bbls/hr)
PQv(SVP) = prove gross flow rate at flowing conditions for small volume
(compact) provers, in barrels per hour (Bbls/hr)
PVb = base prover volume at 60F and 0 PSIg, in barrels (Bbls)
PfHz = total number of flow pulses per second during the prove
KFnom = nominal K factor, in pulses per barrel (fHz/Bbl) supplied by the

Tdvol = timer pulses accumulated between detectors switches (each

pulse is 200 nanoseconds)
Tdfmp = timer pulses accumulated between first flow pulse after each
detector switches (each pulse is 200 nanoseconds)
4-14 22.71+ w 05/99

4.5.4. Meter Factors for Provers
Prove Meter Factor PMF
PVb C TSP CPSP C TLP C PLP

PMF =
Pf
C TLM C PLM
KF
Where:
PMF = prove meter factor (dimensionless)
PVb = base prover volume at 60F and 0 PSIg, in barrels (Bbls)
Pf = number of flow pulses during the prove
CTSP = correction factor for effects of temperature on steel at the prover
For Uni- and Bi-directional Provers:
C TSP = 1 + [( T - T b ) t coef ]
Where:
T = average prover temperature, in F
T b = average base prover temperature, in F
t coef = coefficient of cubical expansion per F of the prover tube
For Small Volume (Compact) Provers:

C TSP = 1+ ( T - T b ) t coef 1+ ( T i - T b ) t coef

P i
Where:
T = average prover temperature, in F
T i = average prover switch rod temperature, in F
T b = average base prover temperature, in F
t coef = square coefficient of expansion per F of the prover tube

P
t coef = linear coefficient of cubical expansion per F of the

i
prover switch rod
22.71+ w 05/99 4-15

CPSP = correction factor for effects of pressure on steel at the prover

(P - Pb ) D
= 1 +
E t
Where:
P = internal prover pressure, in PSIg
Pb = base prover pressure, in PSIg
D = internal prover tube diameter, in inches
E = modulus of elasticity for prover tube
t = wall thickness of prover tube, in inches
CTLP = correction factor for effects of temperature on liquid (volume

correction factor) at the prover
= volume correction factor VCF, where the actual temperature
Ta is replaced by the average temperature during the prove, at
the prover (see 5.2.2 this chapter)
CPLP = correction factor for effects of pressure on liquid at the prover

= correction factor for pressure on liquid CPL, where the flowing
pressure P is replaced by average pressure during the prove, at
CTLM = correction factor for effects of temperature on liquid (volume

correction factor) at the flowmeter
the flowmeter (see 5.2.2 this chapter)
CPLM = correction factor for effects of pressure on liquid at the

flowmeter
4-16 22.71+ w 05/99

Prove Meter Factor at Base Prove Flow Rate PMFPQ

b

PMFPQ = PMF + MFBCPQ - MFBCPQ
b b v
Where:
MFPQ = meter factor at base prove flow rate
b
PMF = prove meter factor
MFBCPQ = meter factor interpolated from base flowmeter factor curve,

b
using base prove flow rate

v
using actual prove flow rate
Meter Factor Offset from Base Curve Obtained from Proving MFPO
MFPO = MFPQ MFBCPQ

b b
Where:
proving

b

b
22.71+ w 05/99 4-17

4.6. Calculations for PID Control
4.6.1. Primary Variable Error % ep
Forward Action
eP = Primary Setpoint % Span - Primary Variable %

Span
Reverse Action
eP = Primary Variable % Span - Primary Setpoint %
4.6.2. Secondary Variable Error % es
Forward Action
es = Secondary Gain (Sec. Setpoint % Span - Sec. Variable %

Span)
Reverse Action
es = Secondary Gain (Sec. Variable % Span - Sec. Setpoint %

Span)
4.6.3. Control Output % C0 (Before Startup Limit

Function)
Controlling on Primary Variable
C0 = Primary Gain (ep +

e)
Controlling on Secondary Variable
C0 = Primary Gain (es + e)
4-18 22.71+ w 05/99

4.6.4. Integral Error e
e = (Repeats per Minute of Primary Variable Sample Period ep) + e n-1
e = (Repeats per Minute of Sec Variable Sample period es) + e n-1
22.71+ w 05/99 4-19

5. Flow Equations and Algorithms for SI

(Metric) Units (Revision 26.71+)
5.1. Liquid Flow Rate for Flowmeters

The calculations performed for liquid helical turbine, positive displacement and
mass flowmeters are as follows:
5.1.1. Volumetric Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions Qv

(m3/hr)
f Hz
Qv = 3600
(IV) K F nom
5.1.2. Volumetric Flow Rate at Base Conditions Qb

(m3/hr)
Q b(GSV) = Q v (IV) VCF CPL MF
5.1.3. Mass Flow Rate Qm (Ton/hr)
v (IV) f MF
Qm =
Q v (GSV) b
m =
1000
26.71+ w 05/99 5-1

Chapter 5 Flow Equations and Algorithms for SI (Metric) Units (Revision 26.71+)
5.1.4. Nomenclature
Qv(IV) = gross indicated volumetric flow rate at flowing conditions, in
cubic meters per hour (m3/hr)
Qb(GSV) = gross standard volumetric flow rate at base conditions, in cubic
meters per hour (m3/hr)
Qm = mass flow rate at flowing conditions for gas turbine flowmeters,
in ton per hour (ton/hr)
fHz = total number of pulses emitted from the flowmeter pulse train
per second.
KFnom = nominal K factor, in pulses per cubic meter (fHz/m3) supplied
by the flow transmitter manufacturer
VCF = volume correction factor (dimensionless see 6.2.2 this
chapter)
CPL = correction factor for pressure on liquid (dimensionless see
6.2.3 this chapter)
f = fluid (live) density at flowing conditions (actual temperature and
pressure), in kilograms per cubic meter (Kgs/m3 see 6.3 this
chapter)
b = calculated reference density at base conditions (standard or
reference temperature and pressure), kilograms per cubic meter
(Kgs/m3 at 15F and equilibrium pressure)
5-2 26.71+ w 05/99

5.2. Correction Factors for Liquid Flow

Dimensionless Values - The flow rate equations for flowmeters require calculating the following
The calculated correction correction factors:
factors for liquid flow
equations are dimensionless;
however, consistent units
q Meter Factor in Use MF
must be used when q Volume Correction Factor VCF
applicable.
q Correction Factor for Pressure on Liquid CPL
q Correction Factor for Sediment and Water Content CS&W
5.2.1. Meter Factor in Use MF
MF = MFBC + MFPO
Where:
MFBC = meter factor interpolated from base meter factor curve
proving
w 05/99 5-3
Chapter 5
5.2.2. Volume Correction Factor VCF

VCF = e r 1+ 0.8 r
Where:
VCF = volume correction factor
e = Napierian constant
= 2.71828
r = correction for expansion at reference temperature

K 0 + ( K 1 RHO r )
=
2
(RHO r )
Where:
K0 & K1 = physical constants derived from mathematical data
published in the API MPMS, as follows:
Product Type Crude Oil Fuel Oil Jet Group Gasoline

API Table 54A 54B 54B 54B
Density Range 610.5 839 788 653
3
in Kgs/m to to to to
1075 1075 838.5 771
K0 613.9723 186.9696 594.5418 346.4228
K1 0 0.4862 0 0.4388
RHOTr = product density at reference temperature
When Product is between Jet Group and Gasoline:

B
r = A+
(RHO Tr )2
Where:
A & B are numerical constants obtained from API Standards as
follows:
Between Jet & Gasoline
API Tables 54B
3
Density Range (Kgs/m ) 770.5 to 787.5
A -0.00336312
B 2680.3206
5-4 26.71+ 05/99

T = differential temperature
= Ta -Tr
Where:
Ta = actual temperature, in C
Tr = reference temperature, in C
5.2.3. Correction Factor for Pressure on Liquid CPL
1
C PL =
1 - ( P - Pe ) F
Where:
CPL = correction factor for pressure on liquid (dimensionless)
P = flowing pressure in kiloPascals gauge (kPag)
Pe = equilibrium vapor pressure calculated from the correlations

developed by Dr. R. W. Hankinson, et al., of Phillips Petroleum
Company for members of the GPA, and published as GPA
Technical Publication NO 15.
F = Compressibility factor for hydrocarbons; using API Chapter

3
11.2.1M for Crude Oil (638 to 1075 kg/m density, -30OC to
O
90 C), using API Chapter 11.2.2M for Hydrocarbon Products
3
(350-637 kg/m density, -46OC to 60OC).
26.71+ w 05/99 5-5

5.3. Densities and Other Properties of

Liquids
The flow rate equations for flowmeters require determining the following
densities and other properties:
q Flowing Density f for Crude Oil and Refined Products
q Density of Ethane, Propane and Methane Mixes
q Density and Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Calculated from Live
Digital Densitometer Output Frequency
5.3.1. Flowing Density f for Crude Oil and Refined

Products
f = b VCF C PL
Where:
f = fluid density at flowing conditions (actual temperature and
pressure), in kilograms per cubic meter (Kgs/m3)
b = fluid density at base conditions (standard/reference temperature

and pressure), in kilograms per cubic meter (Kgs/m3)
= density at 15C and equilibrium pressure
VCF = volume correction factor (ASTM D1250)
CPL = correction factor for pressure on liquid
5.3.2. Density of Ethane, Propane and C3+ Mixes

The density of these mixes at flowing temperature and pressure is calculated
from a computer algorithm developed by Phillips Petroleum (August 1992). The
algorithm was based on data published in GPA TP1, TP2 and TP5.
5-6 26.71+ w 05/99

5.3.3. Density and Relative Density (Specific Gravity)

Calculated from Live Digital Densitometer Output
Frequency
Density and Relative The calculations expressed in this section are performed by the Omni to
Density Values Determined determine the density from frequency signals received from the following third
party densitometers and gravitometers:
Signals - The equations q Sarasota / Peek
and relative density via q UGC
density transducers are q Solartron
manufacturers.
Densitometer Calibration Sarasota Density (Kgs/m3)

Constants - In many cases
Sarasota density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a
supplied by the Sarasota densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as
manufacturers are based on shown below:
SI or metric units. You must
entered are based on Kg/m ,
3
D c = D CF
[ D0 ' (t - t 0 ' ) ] [ 2 + K (t - t 0 ' ) ]
C and kPa. Contact the
densitometer manufacturer or t0' t0'
Omni if you require
assistance. Where:
Dc = corrected density
DCF = Density correction factor

Note:
D0 = calibration constant, in mass/volume*
* D0 must be expressed in
kilograms per cubic meter
3
(Kg/m ). t = densitometer oscillation period in microseconds (sec)
t0 = calibration constant, in microseconds
t0' = Tcoef x (Tf - Tcal) + Pcoef x (Pf - Pcal) + t0

where:
Tf = flowing temperature, in C
Tcoef = temperature coefficient, in sec/C
Pf = flowing pressure, in kPag
Pcoef = pressure coefficient, in sec/ kPag
Pcal = calibration pressure, in kPag
K = spool calibration constant
26.71+ w 05/99 5-7

UGC Density (Kgs/m3)

Density and Relative UGC density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a UGC
Density Values Determined densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as shown
below:
Signals - The equations
and relative density via UNCORRECTED DENSITY:
density transducers are
manufacturers. (
D = K 0 + (K 1 t) + K 2 t 2 )
Where:
D = uncorrected density, in Kgs/m3
K0

K 1 = calibration constants of density probe, entered via the keypad
K 2
CORRECTED DENSITY:

( 2
K 3 D + )
K 2 D + K 1 ( f - c )

Dc = D CF
+ K
(
t 3
D2 )
+ K t 2 D + K t1 ( Tf - Tc ) + D

Where:
Dc = corrected density, in Kgs/m3
DCF = density correction factor

K 1

K 2 = pressure constants
K 3
f = flowing pressure, in kPag

c = calibration pressure, in kPag
K t1

K t2 = temperature constants
K t 3
Tf = flowing temperature, in C
Tc = calibration temperature, in C
5-8 26.71+ w 05/99

Solartron Density (Kgs/m3)

Densitometer Calibration Solartron density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a
Constants - In many cases Solartron frequency densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure
supplied by the
corrections as detailed below.
manufacturers are based on
SI or metric units. You must UNCORRECTED DENSITY:
3
entered are based on Kg/m ,
C and kPa. Contact the
densitometer manufacture or (
D = K 0 + (K 1 t) + K 2 t 2 )
Omni if you require
assistance. Where:
K0
3
K 1 = calibration constants supplied by Solartron, in Kgs/m and C
K 2
T EMPERATURE COMPENSATED DENSITY:
D T = D [ 1 + K 18 (Tf - 20 ) ] + [ K 19 (Tf - 20 ) ]
Where:
DT = temperature corrected density, in Kgs/m3
D = uncompensated density, in Kgs/m3

K 18
K 19
Tf = Temperature in C
T EMPERATURE AND PRESSURE COMPENSATED DENSITY:
D PT = D T [ 1 + (K 20 Pf ) + (K 21 Pf ) ]
Where:
DPT = temperature and pressure compensated density, in Kgs/m3
DT = temperature compensated density, in Kgs/m3
K20 = K 20A + (K 20B Pf )
K21 = K 21A + (K 21B Pf )

K 20A
K 20B
K 21A
K 21B
Pf = flowing pressure in kPag
26.71+ w 05/99 5-9

Additional Density Equation for Velocity of Sound Effects:

For LPG Products in the range of 350 to 550 Kgs/m3, the following term can be
applied to the temperature and pressure compensated density Dtp:
D VOS = D tp + K r (D tp - K j )
3
Where:
DVOS = density for velocity of sound effects, in Kgs/m3
Dtp = temperature and pressure compensated density, in Kgs/m3
Kr
K j
Users wishing to implement the above term are advised to contact Solartron to
obtain a reworked calibration sheet containing the coefficients 'Kr' and 'Kj'.
(Typically, Kr = 1.1 and Kj = 500). If you do not want to implement the above
term, enter 0.0 for Kr.
5-10 26.71+ w 05/99

5.4. Liquid Flow Rate for Provers

The calculations performed for unidirectional, bi-directional and small volume
(compact) provers are as follows:
5.4.1. Prove Gross Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions

(m3/hr)
Gross Flow Rate for Uni- and Bi-directional Provers PQv(U/B)
Pf Hz
PQ v = 3600
(U/B) K F nom
Gross Flow Rate for Small Volume (Compact) Provers PQv(SVP)
PVb
PQ v = 3600
(SVP) Td vol
5.4.2. Nomenclature
PQv(U/B) = prove gross flow rate at flowing conditions for uni- and bi-
directional provers, in cubic meters per hour (m3/hr)
PQv(SVP) = prove gross flow rate at flowing conditions for small volume
(compact) provers, in cubic meters per hour (m3/hr)
PVb = base prover volume at 15C and equilibrium pressure, in cubic

meters (m3)
PfHz = total number of flow pulses per second during the prove
KFnom = nominal K factor, in pulses per barrel (fHz/m3) supplied by the

Tdvol = timer pulses accumulated between detectors switches (each

pulse is 200 nanoseconds)
Tdfmp = timer pulses accumulated between first flow pulse after each
detector switches (each pulse is 200 nanoseconds)
26.71+ w 05/99 5-11

5.4.3. Meter Factors for Provers
Prove Meter Factor PMF
PVb C TSP CPSP C TLP C PLP

PMF =
Pf
C TLM C PLM
KF
Where:
PMF = prove meter factor (dimensionless)
PVb = base prover volume
Pf = number of flow pulses during the prove
CTSP = correction factor for effects of temperature on steel at the prover
For Uni- and Bi-directional Provers:
C TSP = 1 + [( T - T b ) t coef ]
Where:
T = average prover temperature, in C
T b = average base prover temperature, in C
t coef = coefficient of cubical expansion per C of the prover tube
For Small Volume (Compact) Provers:

C TSP = 1+ ( T - T b ) t coef 1+ ( T i - T b ) t coef

P i
Where:
T = average prover temperature, in C
T i = average prover switch rod temperature, in C
T b = average base prover temperature, in C
t coef = square coefficient of expansion per C of the prover tube

P
t coef = linear coefficient of cubical expansion per C of the

i
prover switch rod
5-12 26.71+ w 05/99

CPSP = correction factor for effects of pressure on steel at the prover

(P - Pb ) D
= 1 +
E t
Where:
P = internal prover pressure, in kPag
Pb = base prover pressure, in kPag
D = internal prover tube diameter, in mm
E = modulus of elasticity for prover tube
t = wall thickness of prover tube, in mm
CTLP = correction factor for effects of temperature on liquid (volume

correction factor) at the prover
CPLP = correction factor for effects of pressure on liquid at the prover

CTLM = correction factor for effects of temperature on liquid (volume

correction factor) at the flowmeter
CPLM = correction factor for effects of pressure on liquid at the

flowmeter
26.71+ w 05/99 5-13

Prove Meter Factor at Base Prove Flow Rate PMFPQ

b

PMFPQ = PMF + MFBCPQ - MFBCPQ
b b v
Where:
b
PMF = prove meter factor

b

v
using actual prove flow rate
Meter Factor Offset from Base Curve Obtained from Proving MFPO
MFPO = MFPQ MFBCPQ

b b
Where:
proving

b

b
5-14 26.71+ w 05/99

5.5. Calculations for PID Control
5.5.1. Primary Variable Error % ep
Forward Action
eP = Primary Setpoint % Span - Primary Variable %

Span
Reverse Action
eP = Primary Variable % Span - Primary Setpoint %
5.5.2. Secondary Variable Error % es
Forward Action
es = Secondary Gain (Sec. Setpoint % Span - Sec. Variable %

Span)
Reverse Action
es = Secondary Gain (Sec. Variable % Span - Sec. Setpoint %

Span)
5.5.3. Control Output % C0 (Before Startup Limit

Function)
C0 = Primary Gain (ep +

e)
C0 = Primary Gain (es + e)
26.71+ w 05/99 5-15

5.5.4. Integral Error e
e = (Repeats per Minute of Primary Variable Sample Period ep) + e n-1
e = (Repeats per Minute of Sec Variable Sample period es) + e n-1
5-16 26.71+ w 05/99

Volume 4C
User Manual
Modbus Database
Addresses and
Index Numbers

Effective May 1999

Protocol Implementation ...................................................................... 1-1

1. Modbus
1.1. Introduction .......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2. Modes of Transmission ....................................................................................... 1-1
1.2.1. ASCII Framing and Message Format.....................................................................1-2
1.2.2. Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) Framing and Message Format .................................1-2
1.3. Message Fields..................................................................................................... 1-2
1.3.1. Address Field ........................................................................................................1-2
1.3.2. Function Code Field ..............................................................................................1-3
1.3.3. Data Field..............................................................................................................1-3
1.3.4. Error Check Field ..................................................................................................1-3
1.4. Exception Response............................................................................................ 1-4
1.5. Function Codes .................................................................................................... 1-4
1.5.1. Function Codes 01 and 02 (Read Boolean Status).................................................1-4
1.5.2. Function Codes 03 and 04 (Read 16-Bit Register Sets) .........................................1-6
1.5.3. Function Code 05 (Write Single Boolean).............................................................1-7
1.5.4. Function Code 06 (Write Single 16-Bit Integer).....................................................1-8
1.5.5. Function Code 07 (Read Diagnoistic Status)..........................................................1-9
1.5.6. Function Code 08 (Loopback Test) ..................................................................... 1-10
1.5.7. Function Code 15 (Write Multiple Boolean ) ........................................................ 1-11
1.5.8. Function Code 16 (Write 16-Bit Register Sets) ................................................... 1-12
1.5.9. Function Code 65 (Read ASCII Text Buffer)........................................................ 1-14
1.5.10. Function Code 66 (Write ASCII Text Buffer)........................................................ 1-14
1.6. Custom Data Packets ........................................................................................ 1-15
Link .................................................................. 1-16
1.7. Peer-to-Peer on the Modbus
1.8. Half Duplex Wiring Configuration Required ..................................................... 1-16
1.9. Active Master...................................................................................................... 1-16
1.10. Error Recovery ................................................................................................... 1-16
ii 22/26.71+ w 05/99
Volume 4c Database Addresses and Index Numbers
Modbus
2. User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001 - 2999) ..................................... 2-1

2.1. Custom Data Packets or Modicon Compatible Register Arrays ....................2-1
2.2. Archive Control Flags...........................................................................................2-1
2.3. Status / Command Data .......................................................................................2-2
2.3.1. Reading and Writing the Physical Digital I/O......................................................... 2-2
2.3.2. Programmable Booleans....................................................................................... 2-2
2.3.3. Programmable Accumulator Points....................................................................... 2-2
2.3.4. Meter Run Status and Alarm Points ...................................................................... 2-3
2.3.5. User Scratchpad Boolean Points........................................................................... 2-6
2.3.6. User Scratchpad One-Shot Boolean Points........................................................... 2-6
2.3.7. Command Boolean Points/Variables ..................................................................... 2-7
2.3.8. Meter Station Alarm and Status Points................................................................ 2-10
2.3.9. Prover Alarm and Status Points .......................................................................... 2-14
2.3.10. Meter Totalizer Roll-over Flags ........................................................................... 2-17
2.3.11. Miscellaneous Meter Station Alarm and Status Points......................................... 2-18
2.3.12. Commands Which Cause Custom Data Packets to be Transmitted Without a
Poll ..................................................................................................................... 2-19
2.3.13. Commands Needed To Accomplish a Redundant Flow Computer System .......... 2-19
2.3.14. Commands to Recalculate and Print Selected Batch........................................... 2-20
2.3.15. Station Totalizer Roll-over Flags ......................................................................... 2-20
2.3.16. Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags ......................................................... 2-21
2.3.17. Status Booleans Relating to Redundant Flow Computer Systems ....................... 2-22
22/26.71+ w 05/99 iii

3. 16-Bit Integer Data (3001 - 3999) ........................................................................... 3-1

3.1. Custom Data Packet Definition Variables........................................................... 3-1
3.1.1. Custom Data Packet #1.........................................................................................3-1
3.2. Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data ...................................................................... 3-2
3.3. Meter Run 16-Bit Integer Data ............................................................................. 3-2
3.4. Scratchpad 16-Bit Integer Data ........................................................................... 3-4
3.5. User Display Definition Variables........................................................................ 3-4
3.5.1. User Display Number 1..........................................................................................3-4
3.6. Data Used to Access the Raw Data Archive Records........................................ 3-6
3.7. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data ............................................................. 3-8
3.8. Meter Station 16-Bit Integer Data ........................................................................ 3-8
3.9. Batch Stack Storage of Product Numbers to Run ........................................... 3-10
3.9.1. Meter #1 Batch Sequence ................................................................................... 3-10
3.10. Flow Computer Time and Date Variables ......................................................... 3-11
3.11. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data ........................................................... 3-12
3.12. Prover 16-Bit Integer Data ................................................................................. 3-12
iv 22/26.71+ w 05/99
Modbus
4. 8-Character ASCII String Data (4001 - 4999) ......................................................... 4-1

4.1. Meter Run ASCII String Data................................................................................4-1
4.2. Scratchpad ASCII String Data..............................................................................4-2
4.3. User Display Definition String Variables .............................................................4-2
4.4. String Variables Associated with the Station Auxiliary Inputs ..........................4-3
4.5. Product Meter Factor Curve 8-Character ASCII String Data..............................4-3
4.6. Meter Station 8-Character ASCII String Data ......................................................4-5
4.7. Batch Stack Storage 16-Character Batch Identification Strings .......................4-7
4.7.1. Meter #1 Batch ID................................................................................................. 4-7
4.7.2. Meter #2 Batch ID................................................................................................. 4-8
4.7.3. Meter #3 Batch ID................................................................................................. 4-8
4.7.4. Meter #4 Batch ID................................................................................................. 4-8
4.8. Prover ASCII String Data......................................................................................4-9
5. 32-Bit Integer Data (5001 - 5999)............................................................................ 5-1

5.1. Meter Run 32-Bit Integer Data..............................................................................5-1
5.2. Scratchpad 32-Bit Integer Data ...........................................................................5-4
5.3. Station 32-Bit Integer Data..................................................................................5-5
5.4. Batch Size 32-Bit Integer Data.............................................................................5-6
5.4.1. Meter #1 Batch Size.............................................................................................. 5-6
5.4.2. Meter #2 Batch Size.............................................................................................. 5-6
5.4.3. Meter #3 Batch Size.............................................................................................. 5-6
5.4.4. Meter #4 Batch Size.............................................................................................. 5-6
5.5. More Meter Station 32-Bit Integer Data ..............................................................5-7
5.6. Prover 32-Bit Integer Data....................................................................................5-9
22/26.71+ w 05/99 v
6. 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (6001 - 8999) ...................................................... 6-1

6.1. Meter Factor Flow Linearization Curve 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data.......... 6-1
6.1.1. Meter Factor..........................................................................................................6-1
6.1.2. Flow Rate - Meter Factor Flow Linearization Curve ...............................................6-5
6.1.3. Meter Factor Deviation - Meter Factor Flow Linearization Curve ..........................6-9
6.2. Digital-to-Analog Outputs 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ............................. 6-11
6.3. User Variables 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ............................................... 6-12
6.4. Programmable Accumulator 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Variables................. 6-12
6.5. Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ...................................................... 6-13
6.6. Scratchpad 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data .................................................... 6-16
6.7. PID Control 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data .................................................... 6-17
6.8. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ............................. 6-18
6.9. Miscellaneous Variables 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ............................... 6-20
6.10. Meter Station 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ................................................. 6-21
6.11. Prover 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ............................................................ 6-25
6.11.1. Configuration Data for Prover.............................................................................. 6-25
6.11.2. Last Prove Data .................................................................................................. 6-27
6.11.3. Data Rejected During Prove ................................................................................ 6-27
6.11.4. Prove Run Data................................................................................................... 6-28
6.11.5. Prove Average Data............................................................................................ 6-29
6.11.6. Master Meter Prove Run Data ............................................................................. 6-30
6.11.7. Proving Series Data ............................................................................................ 6-32
6.11.8. Proving Meter Data ............................................................................................. 6-33
6.12. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ............................. 6-34
6.12.1. Meter Run #1 - Previous Batch Averages ............................................................ 6-34
6.12.2. Meter Run #1 - Previous Hours Averages ........................................................... 6-35
6.12.3. Meter Run #1 - Previous Days Averages ............................................................ 6-35
6.12.4. Meter Run #1 - Statistical Moving Window Averages of Transducer Inputs.......... 6-36
6.12.5. Meter Run #1 - Miscellaneous In Progress Averages........................................... 6-36
6.12.6. Meter Run #1 - Previous Batch Quantities ........................................................... 6-38
6.12.7. Miscellaneous Live or Calculated Data ................................................................ 6-38
6.12.8. Station - Previous Batch Average Data ............................................................... 6-39
vi 22/26.71+ w 05/99
Modbus
7. ASCII Text Data Buffers (9001 - 9499) ................................................................... 7-1

7.1. Custom Report Templates ...................................................................................7-1
7.2. Previous Batch Reports .......................................................................................7-1
7.3. Previous Prove Reports .......................................................................................7-2
7.4. Previous Daily Reports.........................................................................................7-2
7.5. Last Snapshot Report ..........................................................................................7-2
7.6. Miscellaneous Report Buffer ...............................................................................7-3
8. Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001 - 18999) ........................................... 8-1

8.1. Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data .............................................8-1
8.1.1. Meter Run Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data......................................................... 8-1
8.1.2. Prover Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data .............................................................. 8-3
8.1.3. General Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data.................................... 8-4
8.1.4. Serial Port Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data ........................................................ 8-4
8.1.5. Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data ............... 8-6
8.1.6. Auxiliary Input I/O Point Assignment Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data................. 8-6
8.1.7. Programmable Logic Controller Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data ........................ 8-7
8.1.8. Auxiliary Input Type Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data .......................................... 8-8
8.1.9. Peer-to-Peer Setup Entries 16-Bit Integer Data..................................................... 8-9
8.1.10. Auxiliary Input Override Code Entries 16-Bit Integer Data................................... 8-11
8.1.11. Damping Factor Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data .............................................. 8-11
8.1.12. Insert/Delete Batch Stack 16-Bit Integer Data ..................................................... 8-13
8.1.13. Miscellaneous Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data................................................. 8-13
8.1.14. Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) Redundancy Configuration 16-Bit Integer
Data.................................................................................................................... 8-13
8.1.15. Raw Data Archive Files 16-Bit Integer Data ........................................................ 8-14
8.2. Flow Computer Configuration 16-Character ASCII String Data.......................8-18
8.3. Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit Long Integer Data..................................8-21
8.4. Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data.......................8-28
22/26.71+ w 05/99 vii

Modbus
1. Modbus Protocol Implementation
1.1. Introduction
Omni Flow Computers implement a superset of the Gould Modbus Protocol on
Serial Ports #1 (selectable), #2, #3 and #4 (selectable), thus allowing
simultaneous communications with two totally independent Modbus systems.
Maximum transmission baud rate is 38.4 kbps with an average answer
response time of 70 msec plus any modem warm-up time.
The Modbus Protocol specifies one master and up to 247 slaves on a common
communication line. Each slave is assigned a fixed unique device address in
the range of 1 to 247. The Master always initiates the transaction. Transactions
are either a query/response type (only one slave is accessed at a time) or a
broadcast / no response type (all slaves are accessed at the same time). A
transaction comprises a single query and single response frame or a single
broadcast frame.
1.2. Modes of Transmission

Two basic modes of transmission are available: ASCII or Remote Terminal Unit
(RTU). The mode selected depends on the equipment being used.
AVAILABLE T RANSMISSION MODES

T RANSMISSION MODE
ASCII RTU
Coding System Hexadecimal 8-bit binary
NUMBER OF BITS:
Start Bits 1 1
Data Bits 7 8
Parity (Optional) Odd, Even, None (1 or Odd, Even, None (1 or
0) 0)
Stop Bits 1 or 2 1 or 2
Error Checking LRC CRC
Baud Rate 300 bps to 38.4 kbps 300 bps to 38.4 kbps
22/26.71+ w 05/99 1-1

Chapter 1 Protocol Implementation
Modbus
1.2.1. ASCII Framing and Message Format

Framing in ASCII Transmission Mode is accomplished by the use of the colon
(:) character indicating the beginning of a frame and a carriage return (CR) line
feed (LF) to delineate end of frame. The line feed character also serves as a
synchronizing character which indicates that the transmitting station is ready to
receive an immediate reply.
ASCII MESSAGE FORMAT

BEGINNING END READY TO
FUNCTION ERROR
OF ADDRESS DATA OF RECEIVE
CODE CHECK
FRAME FRAME RESPONSE
: 2 Char 2 Char N x 2 Char 2 Char CR LF

Assuming 7 bits per
transmitted character. 7 Bits 14 Bits 14Bits N x 14 Bits 14 Bits 7 Bits 7 Bits
1.2.2. Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) Framing and

Message Format
Frame synchronization can be maintained in RTU Transmission Mode only by
simulating a synchronous message. The 'OMNI' monitors the elapsed time
between receipt of characters. If 3.5 character times elapse without a new
character or completion of the frame, then the frame is reset and the next bytes
will be processed looking for a valid address.
RTU MESSAGE FORMAT

ADDRESS FUNCTION DATA ERROR CHECK
8 Bits 8 Bits N x 8 Bits 16 Bits
1.3. Message Fields
1.3.1. Address Field

The address field immediately follows the beginning of the frame and consists
of 2 characters (ASCII) or 8 bits (RTU). These bits indicate the user assigned
address of the slave device that is to receive the message sent by the master.
Each slave must be assigned a unique address and only the addressed slave
will respond to a query that contains its address. When the slave sends a
response, the slave address informs the master which slave is communicating.
In broadcast mode, an address of zero (0) is used. All slaves interpret this as an
instruction to read and take action, but do not issue a response message.
1-2 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
1.3.2. Function Code Field

Note: See 4.5 for The function code field tells the addressed slave what function to perform. The
descriptions and examples of high order bit of the function code field is set by the slave device to indicate that
these function codes. See other than a normal response is being transmitted to the Master device. This bit
4.4 for a description of
exception responses.
remains 0 if the message is a query or a normal response message.
FUNCTION CODE ACTION

01/02 READ MULTIPLE BOOLEAN POINTS
03/04 READ STRINGS OR MULTIPLE 16 OR 32 BIT VARIABLES
05 WRITE SINGLE BOOLEAN POINT
06 WRITE SINGLE 16 BIT INTEGER
07 READ DIAGNOSTIC STATUS
08 LOOPBACK TEST
15 WRITE MULTIPLE BOOLEAN POINTS
16 WRITE STRINGS OR MULTIPLE 16 OR 32 BIT VARIABLES
65 READ ASCII TEXT BUFFER
66 WRITE ASCII TEXT BUFFER
1.3.3. Data Field

The data field contains the information needed by the slave to perform the
specific function or it contains data collected by the slave in response to a
query. This information may be text strings, values, exception code or text
buffers.
1.3.4. Error Check Field

This field allows the master and slave devices to check a message for errors in
transmission. A transmitted message may be altered slightly due to electrical
noise or other interference while it is on its way from one unit to another. The
error checking assures that the master and the slave do not react to messages
that have been changed during transmission. The error check field uses a
longitudinal redundancy check (LRC) in the ASCII Mode and a CRC-16 check in
the RTU Mode. The bytes checked include the slave address and all bytes up to
the error checking bytes. Checking is done with the data in the binary mode or
RTU mode.
The LRC Mode

The error check is an 8-bit binary number represented and transmitted as two
ASCII hexadecimal (hex) characters. The error check is produced by first
stripping the Colon, CR and LF and then converting the hex ASCII characters to
binary. Add the binary bytes (including slave address) discarding any carries,
and then two's complement the result. At the received end the LRC is
recalculated and compared to the LRC as sent. The colon, CR, LF, and any
imbedded non ASCII hex characters are ignored in calculating the LRC (see
page 1-7 of the Gould Modbus Reference Guide for more details).
22/26.71+ w 05/99 1-3

Modbus
The CRC Mode

The message is considered as one continuous binary number whose most
significant bit (MSB) is transmitted first. The message is pre-multiplied by x 16
(shifted left 16-bits), then divided by (x16+x15+x2+1) expressed as the binary
number (11000000000000101).The integer quotient digits are ignored and the
16-bit remainder (initialized to all ones at the start to avoid the case of all zeros
being an accepted message) is appended to the message (MSB first) as the two
CRC check bytes. The resulting message including CRC, when divided by the
same polynomial (x16 + x15 + x2 + 1) at the receiver will give a zero remainder
if no errors have occurred (see pages1-4 through 1-6 of the Gould Modbus
Reference Guide for more details).
1.4. Exception Response

Programming or operation errors are those involving illegal data in a message,
no response or difficulty in communicating with a slave. These errors result in
an exception response from the slave, depending on the type of error. When
such a message is received from the master the slave sends a response to the
master echoing the slave address, function code (with high bit set), exception
code and error check fields. To indicate that the response is a notification of an
error, the high order bit of the function code is set to 1.
EXCEPTION CODE DESCRIPTION

01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE
04 DATA CANNOT BE WRITTEN
05 PASSWORD NEEDED
1.5. Function Codes
1.5.1. Function Codes 01 and 02 (Read Boolean Status)

Note: These functions allow the user to obtain the on/off status of Booleans used to
Function Code 02 is identical control discrete outputs from the addressed slaves only. Broadcast mode is not
to Function Code 01. It can supported with this function code. In addition to the slave address and function
be used by communication
devices that do not support
field, the message requires that the information field contain the initial point
Function Code 01. number to be read (starting point) and the number of points that will be read to
obtain the Boolean data.
Boolean points are numbered as from 1001; (Boolean number 1= 1001). The
data is packed one bit for each Boolean flag variable. The response includes
the slave address, function code, quantity of data characters, the data
characters, and error checking. Data will be packed with one bit for each
Boolean flag
(1 = on, 0 = off). The low order bit of the first character contains the addressed
flag and the remainder follows. For Boolean quantities that are not even
multiples of eight, the last characters will be filled-in with zeros at high order
end.
1-4 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
Example: Read Booleans 1120 to 1131 from Slave Device #01.
POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : ASCII TRANSMISSION MODE

FUNCTION DATA STARTING POINT # NUMBER OF POINTS LCR CHECK
ADDRESS CODE HI LO HI LO 8-BIT
: 3031 3031 3034 3630 3030 3043 3845 CR LF
POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : RTU TRANSMISSION MODE

FUNCTION DATA STARTING POINT # NUMBER OF POINTS CRC CHECK
01 01 04 60 00 0C nn nn
SLAVE RESPONSE : ASCII Transmission Mode

FUNCTION BYTE DATA LCR CHECK
ADDRESS CODE COUNT HI LO 8-BIT
: 3031 3031 3032 3038 3030 4634 CR LF
SLAVE RESPONSE : RTU Transmission Mode

FUNCTION BYTE DATA LCR CHECK
ADDRESS CODE COUNT HI LO 8-BIT
01 01 02 08 00 nn nn
The status of Booleans 1120 through 1127 is shown as 08 (hex) = 0000 1000
(binary). Reading right to left, this shows that status 1123 is on. The other data
flags are decoded similarly. Due to the quantity of Boolean status requested,
the last data field, which is shown as 00 (hex) = 0000 0000 (binary), contains
the status of only four flags. The four left most bits are provided as zeros to fill
the 8-bit format.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 1-5

Modbus
1.5.2. Function Codes 03 and 04 (Read 16-Bit Register

Sets)
Note: Function Codes 03 and 04 allow the master to obtain the binary contents of
Function Code 04 is identical holding registers in the addressed slave. The protocol allows for a maximum of
to Function Code 03. It can 125 16-bit registers to be obtained at each request. Broadcast mode is not
be used by communication
devices that do not support
allowed for functions 03 and 04.
Function Code 03. These 16-bit registers are also grouped in sets of registers and accessed as one
variable. The numeric range of the point number defines the variable type and
indicates how many 16-bit registers make up that variable.
Register Groups for Long
Integer Variable Type -
REGISTER GROUPS FOR T YPES OF VARIABLES
Points 6XXX or 15XXX long
integers apply only to
POINT # VARIABLE 16-BIT REGS. / NO OF BYTES / M AX POINTS /
Revision 23 for US
customary units. RANGE TYPE POINT POINT M ESSAGE
3XXX or 13XXX Short Integer 1 Register 2 Bytes 125

4XXX 8-Char. ASCII String 4 Registers 8 Bytes 31
6XXX or 15XXX Long Integer 2 Registers 4 Bytes 62
17XXX or 18XXX IEEE Floating Point 2 Registers 4 Bytes 62
The addressed slave responds with its address and the function code, followed
by the information field. The information field contains a single byte indicating
the number of data bytes returned followed by the actual data bytes. The data is
returned in multiples of two bytes, with the binary content right justified. The
data is sent MS Byte first.
Example: Read Short Integer Message 3012 through 3013 from Slave #2.

FUNCTION DATA STARTING POINT # QUANTITY OF POINTS CRC CHECK
02 03 0B C4 00 02 nn nn

FUNCTION BYTE DATA DATA CRC CHECK
ADDRESS CODE COUNT HI LO HI LO 16-BIT
02 03 04 1F 40 1F 3E nn nn
The slave responds with its address and the function code, byte count of the
data field followed by the actual data field. In the example above, the data field
contains 4 bytes representing the value of the requested data.
1-6 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
1.5.3. Function Code 05 (Write Single Boolean)

This message forces a single Boolean variable either on or off. Boolean
variables are points numbered 1XXX or 2XXX. Writing the 16-bit value 65,280
(FF00 HEX) will set the Boolean on. Writing the value zero will turn it off. All
other values are illegal and will not effect the Boolean. Using a slave address
00 (Broadcast Mode) will force all slaves to modify the desired Boolean.
Example: Turn Single Boolean Point 1711 on - Slave #2.
FUNCTION BOOLEAN POINT # DATA CRC

ADDRESS CODE HI LO HI LO CHECK
02 05 06 AF FF 00 nn nn
FUNCTION BOOLEAN POINT # DATA CRC

02 05 06 AF FF 00 nn nn
The normal response to the command request is to retransmit the message as

received after the Boolean state has been altered.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 1-7

Modbus
1.5.4. Function Code 06 (Write Single 16-Bit Integer)

Any numeric variable that has been defined on the 16-bit integer index table
can have its contents changed by this message. The 16-bit integer points are
numbered from 3XXX or 13XXX.
When used with slave address zero (Broadcast Mode) all slaves will load the
specified points with the contents specified. The following example sets one
16-bit integer at address 3106 (0C22 HEX) of Slave #2 (i.e., load address 3106
with data 0003).
Example: Set Single 16-Bit Integer Slave #2.
FUNCTION POINT # DATA CRC

02 06 0C 22 00 03 nn nn
FUNCTION POINT # DATA CRC

02 06 0C 22 00 03 nn nn
The normal response to a Function 06 query is to retransmit the message as

received after the 16-bit integer has been altered.
1-8 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
1.5.5. Function Code 07 (Read Diagnostic Status)

This function allows the user to obtain basic diagnostic data and determines the
Omni communication port number (serial port number) being used to
communicate. This diagnostic data is hard programmed and cannot be
reconfigured. Following are the five status values reported:
q EPROM Checksum error flag
q Unit in Program mode
q Unit in Diagnostic mode
q Redundant Master status
q Power failed flag
Example: Request to Modbus ID # 13 (Address HEX: 0D) to respond with

event status and communication port number.

FUNCTION CRC CHECK
ADDRESS
CODE 8-Bit
0D 07 nn nn

FUNCTION CRC CHECK
ADDRESS DATA
CODE 8-Bit
0D 07 4C nn nn
The slave responds with the Modbus slave address (0D), the function code, and
the data, followed by the CRC check. The data field contains 1 byte
representing the value of the requested data. Following is the conversion of
hexadecimal data to binary, to determine the diagnostic status and
communication port number.
Hex 4C = 0100 1100 (Bit 7, Bit 6, Bit 5, Bit 4, Bit 3, Bit 2, Bit 1, Bit 0)
Bit 7, Bit 6, Bit 5 represent the communication port:
Omni Port # Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 7

1 0 0 1
2 0 1 0
3 0 1 1
4 1 0 0
Bit 4, Bit 3, Bit 2, Bit 1, Bit 0 represent the following event status:
Bit 4 Power failed flag (1=Yes, 0=No); Modbus database address = 1829
Bit 3 Master status (1=Yes, 0=No); Modbus database address = 2864
Bit 2 In diagnostic mode (1=Yes, 0=No)
Bit 1 In program mode (1=Yes, 0=No)
Bit 0 Invalid EPROM Checksum error flag (1=Yes, 0=No); Modbus database
address = 1837
22/26.71+ w 05/99 1-9

Modbus
1.5.6. Function Code 08 (Loopback Test)

Function Code 08 sends diagnostics test message to slave, to evaluate
communications processing. The purpose is to test the communication system
only; it does not perform any write function. The system (slave) responds with
an echo.
Example: Loopback Test Simple return of query message sent to Slave

Address Identification # 13.

DATA DIAGNOSTICS DATA DIAGNOSTICS
FUNCTION CODE CODE CRC
ADDRESS
CODE CHECK
HI LO HI LO
0D 08 00 00 A5 37 nn nn

DATA DIAGNOSTICS DATA DIAGNOSTICS
FUNCTION CODE CODE CRC
ADDRESS
CODE CHECK
HI LO HI LO
0D 08 00 00 A5 37 nn nn
The slave responds with an echo; i.e., identical Modbus ID (address), function
code, and data.
1-10 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
1.5.7. Function Code 15 (Write Multiple Boolean )

Function Code 0FHEX (15) writes to each Boolean variable in a consecutive
block of Boolean variables to a desired on or off state. Each Boolean is
packed in the data field, one bit for each Boolean flag (1 = on, 0 = off). The data
field consists of increments of 2 bytes and can be up to 250 bytes (2000 points).
Boolean points are packed right-to-left, 8 to a byte with unused bits set to '0'.
The use of slave address 00 (Broadcast Mode) will force all slaves to modify
the desired Boolean bits. The following example writes to 14 Boolean variables
starting at address 1703. The data field value 05, 1703 through 1710, and data
field value 20 represents the status of points 1711 through 1716. These data
values are transmitted as 0000 0101 and 0010 0000, indicating that Booleans
points 1703, 1705, 1716 are to be forced on and 1704 and 1706 through 1715
are to be forced off (the two most significant positions of the second byte are
unused and set to 0).
Example: Turn on Boolean points 1703, 1705, 1716 ON Slave #3.
FUNCTION STARTING QUANTITY BYTE DATA CRC

ADDRESS CODE ADDRESS OF POINTS COUNT HI LO CHECK
03 0F 06 A7 00 0E 02 05 20 nn nn

FUNCTION STARTING QUANTITY CRC
ADDRESS CODE ADDRESS OF POINTS CHECK
03 0F 06 A7 00 0E 'nn' 'nn'
The normal response to a Function 15 query is to echo the slave address,

function code, starting address, and quantity of points written.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 1-11

Modbus
1.5.8. Function Code 16 (Write 16-Bit Register Sets)

Function Code 10HEX (16) allows the master to change the binary contents of
holding registers in the addressed slave. The protocol allows for a maximum of
125 16-bit registers to be changed at each download. Using a slave address of
zero (00) allows the master to change registers in all slaves simultaneously
(Broadcast Mode).
These 16-bit registers are also grouped as sets of registers and accessed as
one variable. The numeric range of the point number defines the variable type
and indicates how many 16-bit registers make up that variable.
Register Groups for Long
Integer Variable Type -
REGISTER GROUPS FOR T YPES OF VARIABLES
Points 6XXX or 15XXX long
integers apply only to
POINT # VARIABLE 16-BIT REGS. / NO OF BYTES / M AX POINTS /
Revision 23 for US
customary units. RANGE TYPE POINT POINT M ESSAGE
3XXX or 13XXX Short Integer 1 Register 2 Bytes 125
6XXX or 15XXX Long Integer 2 Registers 4 Bytes 62
7XXX or 17XXX IEEE Floating Point 2 Registers 4 Bytes 62
The addressed slave responds with its address and the function code, followed
by the information field. The information field contains a single byte indicating
the number of data bytes returned and the actual data bytes. The data is sent
as multiples of two bytes, with the binary content right justified. The data is sent
MS Byte first.
Example: Write Short Integers 3012 through 3013 to Slave #2.

Byte Count: The Byte Count
will be increments of 2, 4, 8
or 16 bytes depending on the
address range of the points
FUNC STARTING QUANTITY BYTE DATA DATA CRC
downloaded.
ADDR CODE POINT # OF POINTS COUNT HI LO HI LO CHECK
02 10 0B C4 00 02 04 1F 40 1F 3E nn nn

02 10 0B C4 00 02 'nn' 'nn'
The slave responds with its address and the function code, starting point
number and quantity of points.
1-12 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
Example: Write a Long Integer 5101 to Slave #4
FUNC STARTING QUANTITY BYTE DATA DATA CRC

ADDR CODE POINT # OF POINTS COUNT HI LO HI LO CHECK
04 10 13 ED 00 01 04 00 4F 20 4E nn nn

04 10 13 ED 00 01 nn nn
The slave responds with its address and the function code, starting point
number and quantity of points.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 1-13

Modbus
1.5.9. Function Code 65 (Read ASCII Text Buffer)

Function Code 41HEX (65) allows the master to read the contents of an ASCII
text buffer within an addressed slave. Data is always sent and received in
packets containing 128 characters. Packets are numbered from 0 to 255. The
size of the text buffer is always an exact multiple of 128 bytes. The last buffer
will contain a HEX 1A (end of file character). The last buffer will contain an
ASCII ^Z (end of file character).
Example: Read 2nd packet of an ASCII Text Buffer Point 9001 from Slave # 5.
FUNCTION POINT # PACKET # CRC

05 41 23 29 00 01 nn nn
FUNC POINT # PACKET # DATA Data CRC

ADDR CODE HI LO HI Lo BYTE 0 BYTE 128 CHECK
05 41 23 29 00 01 30 41 nn nn
1.5.10. Function Code 66 (Write ASCII Text Buffer)

Function Code 42HEX (66) is used by the master to download an ASCII text
buffer to an addressed slave. Data is always sent and received in packets
containing 128 characters. Packets are numbered from 0 to 255. The size of the
text buffer is always an exact multiple of 128 bytes. The last buffer will contain
a HEX 1A (end of file character).
Example: Write 1st packet of an ASCII Text Buffer Point 9002 to Slave # 2.
FUNC POINT # PACKET # DATA DATA CRC

ADDR CODE HI LO HI Lo BYTE 0 BYTE 128 CHECK
02 42 23 2A 00 00 39 2F nn nn
FUNCTION POINT # PACKET # CRC

02 42 23 2A 00 00 nn nn
1-14 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
1.6. Custom Data Packets

Many point numbers were left unused when numbering the variables within the
database. This allows for future growth and different application data. Without
custom data packets many polls would be required to retrieve data distributed
throughout the database. The custom data packets allows you to concatenate or
join different groups or sets of data in any order and of any data type into 1
message response. These custom packets are a type 03 read and are located
at points 1, 201 and 401 in the database.
Example: Read Custom Data Packet #1 at Point 0001 from Slave #2.
FUNCTION STARTING POINT # QUANTITY OF POINTS CRC CHECK

02 03 00 01 00 00 nn nn
Dummy number
of points
FUNCTION BYTE DATA DATA CRC CHECK

ADDRESS CODE COUNT HI LO HI LO 16-BIT
02 03 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? nn nn
Depends on the size of Depends on the number

packet configured and type of data points
included
22/26.71+ w 05/99 1-15

Modbus
1.7. Peer-to-Peer on the Modbus Link

Serial Port #2 (Modbus Port #1) can be configured to allow peer-to-peer
communications. In this mode any Omni flow computer can act as a Modbus
master and communicate with any other Modbus device on the communication
link (see technical Bulletin TB-980401 Peer-to-Peer Basics).
1.8. Half Duplex Wiring Configuration

Required
The physical wiring of a Modbus link is usually full duplex, although the Modbus
communication protocol is a half duplex protocol (i.e., both devices never
transmit at the same time). For peer-to-peer communications the physical link
must be wired for half duplex operation with all transmit and receive terminals
wired in parallel (see 7.4 in Volume 1). This allows all devices to hear all
transmissions; even their own.
1.9. Active Master

Control of the communication link is passed from the current master to the next
master in the sequence by broadcasting the ID number of the next master in
sequence. When that flow computer has completed its transaction list (see 7.4
in Volume 1) it will in turn hand over control to the next master in the sequence.
1.10. Error Recovery

Should the next master in the sequence fail to take control of the link the
current master will search for an active master. To ensure best performance
and fastest recovery in the event of an error, always number Modbus masters
consecutively starting from 01.
1-16 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
2. User-Defined, Status and Command Data

(0001 - 2999)
2.1. Custom Data Packets or Modicon

Compatible Register Arrays
INFO - This data is accessed These three addresses specify reserved areas used to access user defined
using Modbus function code groups of data variables. Data can be accessed as read only blocks of data or
03 for reads and 16 for
writes. Boolean data bits are
the data is arranged as an array of adjacent 16-bit registers which can be read
packed 8 to a byte. or written independently, if the Modicon Compatible mode is selected when
setting up the serial port.
0001 Custom Data Packet / Array #1

Maximum 250 bytes using Modbus RTU mode (for Packet/Array definition see Index
3001-3040).
Maximum 250 bytes using Modbus RTU mode (for Packet/Array definition see Index
3041-3056).
Maximum 250 bytes using Modbus RTU mode (for Packet/Array definition see Indices
3057-3096).
2.2. Archive Control Flags

Data to be added into the Text Archive RAM is flagged by embedding Boolean
Point 1000 or 2000 within the appropriate custom report immediately preceding
the data to be archived. You may enable or disable the archiving of data by
resetting or setting this variable.
1000 Archive Control Flag

Report data following flag will be archived not printed.
2000 Archive Control Flag
Report data following flag is printed and archived.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-1

Chapter 2 User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001- 2999)
2.3. Status / Command Data
2.3.1. Reading and Writing the Physical Digital I/O

The current status of physical Digital I/O Points 01 through 12 (Omni 3000) or
IMPORTANT 01 through 24 (Omni 6000) can be accessed by reading Modbus Indexes 1001
Never set a physical I/O point through 1024.
which has been assigned as
an input as this could cause All points which are to be written to exclusively via the Modbus must first have
a DC voltage to appear on the point assigned to Modbus control by entering zero (0) for 'Digital Point
the input terminals of that
point which may conflict with Assign' (see Chapter 9). Assigning to '0' prevents the Omni application software
any voltage already present from overwriting the Modbus write.
on those terminals.
1001 Digital I/O Point #1

to
1024 Digital I/O Point #24
2.3.2. Programmable Booleans

INFO - Boolean data is Points 1025 through 1088 are updated every 100 msec with the current value of
accessed using Modbus the programmable Boolean statements (see Chapter 10). You may read from
function codes 01 for reads,
05 for single point writes and or write to these variables, but anything that you write may be overwritten by the
15 for multiple bit writes. flow computer depending upon the logic functions programmed into the logic
Boolean data is packed 8 statement.
points to a byte when
reading.
1025 Boolean Point #25
to
1088 Boolean Point #88
2.3.3. Programmable Accumulator Points

Points 1089 through 1099 are paired with Floating Point Variables 7089 through
7099. For example, numeric data placed in 7089 can be output as pulses by
assigning a Digital I/O Point to 1089.
1089 Programmable Accumulator #1

Used to pulse out data placed into 7089.
to
Used to pulse out data placed into 7099.
2-2 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
2.3.4. Meter Run Status and Alarm Points

Application Revision The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. For
22/26.71+ - This database example: Point 1105 is the Meter Active Flag for Meter Run #1. Point 1405
corresponds to Application
Revision 22/26.71+ for
would be the Meter Active Flag for Meter Run #4.
Turbine/Positive
Displacement Liquid Flow
Metering Systems, with * 1n01 Pulses - Gross Indicated Volume
Meter Factor Linearization. * 1n02 Pulses - Net Volume (GSV)
Both US and metric unit
versions are considered. * 1n03 Pulses - Mass
* 1n04 Pulses - Net Standard Volume
S&W corrected GSV.
Note:
* Used to assign
accumulator to the front 1n05 Meter Run Active Flag
panel counters or digital Flow pulses above threshold frequency.
I/O points)
1n06 Meter Being Proved
Activates during proving of this meter.
1n07 Any Meter Run Specific Alarm This Meter
Clears if acknowledged.
1n08 Batch End Acknowledge

Toggle ON/OFF.
1n09 Auto Prove Problem

Ten consecutive attempts to auto-prove have failed.
1n10 Batch Preset Reached

Batch total equal or exceeds the batch preset.
1n11 Batch Preset Warning Flag
Batch total is within X volume or mass units of the batch preset (X is stored at 5n38).
1n12 Batch End Acknowledge
500 msec pulse.
1n13 Calculation Out of Range Alarm

Usually temperature, pressure or density is outside of the range of the algorithm selected.
1n14 Override In Use - Density Pressure

Override in use for any reason.
1n15 Auto Prove Flag

Indicates that flowmeter n will be automatically proved based on changes in flow rate or
meter run time, etc. It is cleared if prove sequence is completed or prove is aborted.
1n16 Override In Use - Temperature

1n17 Override In Use - Pressure
1n18 Override In Use - Relative Density (Gravity) / Density Transducer
1n19 Override In Use - Density Temperature
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-3

1n20 Flow Rate - Low Low Alarm

For points 1n20-1n23, flow rate units are either gross volume or mass units (depending
INFO - Boolean data is
on which unit is selected) for all products.
accessed using Modbus
function codes 01 for reads, 1n21 Flow Rate - Low Alarm
05 for single point writes and
1n22 Flow Rate - High Alarm
15 for multiple bit writes.
Boolean data is packed 8 1n23 Flow Rate - High High Alarm
reading.
1n24 Meter Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
1n25 Meter Temperature - Low Alarm
INFO - Transducer and flow
rate alarms remain set while 1n26 Meter Temperature - High Alarm
the alarm condition exists. 1n27 Meter Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n28 Meter Pressure - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n29 Meter Pressure - Low Alarm
1n30 Meter Pressure - High Alarm
1n31 Meter Pressure - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n32 Relative Density (Gravity) / Density - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n33 Relative Density (Gravity) / Density - Low alarm
1n34 Relative Density (Gravity) / Density - High Alarm
1n35 Relative Density (Gravity) / Density - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n36 Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n37 Density Temperature - Low Alarm
1n38 Density Temperature - High Alarm
1n39 Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n40 Spare
to
1n43 Spare
1n44 Density Pressure - Transducer Failed Low

1n45 Density Pressure - Low Alarm
1n46 Density Pressure - High Alarm
1n47 Density Pressure - Transducer Failed High
1n48 Turbine - Meter Comparitor Alarm

Only when dual pulse fidelity check enabled.
1n49 Turbine - Channel A Failed
Total absence of pulses on Channel A.
1n50 Turbine - Channel B Failed
Total absence of pulses on Channel B.
1n51 Turbine - Difference Detected Between A & B Channel
Missing or added pulses.
2-4 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
1n52 Spare
Application Revision 1n53 Spare
22/26.71+ - This database
Turbine/Positive
1n54 Any Meter Run Specific Alarm This Meter
Clears only if acknowledged and alarm condition is cleared.
Metering Systems, with
Meter Factor Linearization. 1n55 Meter Off-line Flag
Both US and metric unit Pulses for 500 msec when Meter Active (1n05) goes false.
versions are considered.
1n56 Batch in Progress Flag
Set when flow occurs at start of batch. Reset at batch end command.
INFO - The second digit of 1n57 Batch Start Acknowledge
the index number defines the Pulses for 500 msec when 1727-1730 command is received.
number of the meter run. 1n58 Meter Not Active / Batch Suspended
True when batch is in progress but Meter Active (1n05) is false.
1n59 Spare
to
1n75 Spare
Note: See 2n00 area for
even more meter run alarms
and status points.
1n76 Batch Re-calculation Acknowledge Flag
Pulses for 500 msec when 2756 command received.
1n77 Spare
to
1n99 Spare
1500 Spare
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-5

2.3.5. User Scratchpad Boolean Points

There are two groups of user scratchpad flags which can be used to store the
results of Boolean statements or to group data to be transmitted or received
over a Modbus data link.
1501 Scratchpad - Point 01

to
1600 Reserved
DO NOT USE!

to
2.3.6. User Scratchpad One-Shot Boolean Points

Many times it is necessary to send a command which momentarily turns on a
Boolean point. The following one-shot Boolean points simplify this action. They
remain activated for exactly 2 seconds after they have been written to.
1650 Scratchpad One-Shot - Point 01

to
1699 Scratchpad One-Shot - Point 50
2-6 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
2.3.7. Command Boolean Points/Variables

Application Revision Unless indicated as being Level Sensitive, most commands are 'edge
22/26.71+ - This database triggered'. To activate a command simply write a '1' (1 = True) to that point. It is
not necessary to write a '0' (0 = False) after the command. The status of a
Turbine/Positive command may also be read or used as input in a Boolean or variable
Displacement Liquid Flow statement.
Meter Factor Linearization.
Both US and metric unit 1700 Dummy
versions are considered. Used only to reserve a digital I/O point to be used as an input. Point 1700 can be
assigned to as many I/O points as needed.
INFO - Unless indicated as 1701 Prover Seal is OK

being Level Sensitive, most Must be true when sphere is between detectors.
commands are 'edge
triggered'.
1702 End Batch - Station
End batch on all meter runs defined in station.
Hardware Interaction - 1703 End Batch - Meter #1
Unreliable operation will Points 1703-1706 individual end batch commands always work.
result if a command which
has been assigned to a
1704 End Batch - Meter #2
digital I/O point directly also 1705 End Batch - Meter #3
needs to be activated via a
Modbus write. This is
1706 End Batch - Meter #4
because the On/Off state of
the digital I/O point overwrites 1707 Station - Change Product Strobe
the command point every 100 Rising edge triggers batch end and change to product selected by 1743-1746. Used with
msec and most command Station Product ID Bit 0-3 (1820-1823).
point actions are only
triggered every 500 msec. 1708 Prove - Meter #1 Request
Edge triggered.
1709 Prove - Meter #2 Request
INFO- Notice that all write
commands have addresses 1710 Prove - Meter #3 Request
rd
with a 7 in the 3 digit from 1711 Prove - Meter #4 Request
the right.
1712 Station Alarm Acknowledge

Acknowledges all alarms.
1713 Reset Power Failed Flag
See power fail Flag 1829.
1714 Trial Prove - Meter #1 Request

Edge triggered.
1718 Abort the Prove in Progress

1719 Request Local Snapshot Report
Printed on local printer connected to flow computer.
1720 Snapshot Report to Modbus Buffer
Move Snapshot Report to buffer located at 9402.
1721 Alarm Report to Modbus Buffer
Move Alarm Report to buffer located at 9402.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-7

# 1722 1st PID Permissive - Loop #1

Points 1722-1725 enable PID startup and shutdown ramping for the respective meter
INFO - Unless indicated as
(see 1752-1755). Level sensitive.
being Level Sensitive, most
commands are 'edge # 1723 1st PID Permissive - Loop #2
triggered'. To activate a
# 1724 1st PID Permissive - Loop #3
command simply write a '1'
or 'True' to that point. It is not # 1725 1st PID Permissive - Loop #4
necessary to write a '0' or
'False' after the command is
given. The status of a # 1726 Prover Start Permissive
command may also be read Checked after temperature and flow are stable. Indicates that the meter divert valves are
or used as input in a Boolean lined up. Enables prover sequencing when set.
or variable statement.
1727 Start Ramp-up PID - Loop #1

st nd
Note: Initiates PID start up sequence by activating 1 and 2 PID Permissive (see 1n57 for
acknowledge pulse). These commands are edge triggered, simply turn on.
# These points are
defaulted to active and 1728 Start Ramp-up PID - Loop #2
need not be manipulated 1729 Start Ramp-up PID - Loop #3
unless the application
requires it. 1730 Start Ramp-up PID - Loop #4
1731 Compact Prover Piston Downstream

Applies only to Brooks small volume prover (SVP), must be false before the piston can be
re-launched.
1732 Alarm Acknowledge - Meter Run #1

Points 1732-1735 are meter run specific alarms only.
Note: * 1736 Disable Flow Totalizing - Meter Run #1

* These points also affect * 1737 Disable Flow Totalizing - Meter Run #2
station totalizing (see also
* 1738 Disable Flow Totalizing - Meter Run #3
point 1761). Level
sensitive. * 1739 Disable Flow Totalizing - Meter Run #4
1740 Spare
1741 Remote Up Arrow Key

Duplicates the keypad function. Level sensitive.
1742 Remote Down Arrow Key
Duplicates the keypad function. Level sensitive.
1743 Product Select - Bit 0

Points 1743-1746 represent the product number to change to as offset binary; i.e., 0000 =
product #1. 1111=product #16 (see 1707, 1747-1750).
2-8 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
1747 Change Product Strobe - Meter #1

For points 1747-1750, rising edge triggers a batch end and a change to the product
Application Revision
specified by points 1743-1746.
corresponds to Application 1748 Change Product Strobe - Meter #2
1749 Change Product Strobe - Meter #3
Turbine/Positive
Displacement Liquid Flow 1750 Change Product Strobe - Meter #4
Both US and metric unit 1751 Freeze Analog Inputs
versions are considered. Used when calibrating analog inputs. Freezes ALL analogs. Level sensitive.
1752 2nd PID Permissive - Meter #1

Points 1752-1755 limit the PID ramp-down to the minimum output % setting (see 1722-
1725). Level sensitive.
1756 Spare
to
1759 Spare
1760 Leak Detection Freeze Command

Stores totalizers, temperatures, pressures and density variables to temporary storage (see
5n66 and 7634). This command is usually broadcast to all RTUs simultaneously.
1761 Disable Flow Totalizing Station
This command has no effect in individual meter run totalizing (see also points 1736-
1739). Level sensitive.
1762 Remote Print - Previous Batch Report #1

At local printer.
to
1769 Remote Print - Previous Batch Report #8
INFO- Notice that all write 1770 Remote Print - Previous Daily Report #1
commands have indexes / At local printer.
point addresses with a 7 in
rd to
the 3 digit from the right.
1777 Remote Print - Previous Daily Report #8
1778 Remote Print - Previous Prove Report #1

At local printer.
to
1785 Remote Print - Previous Prove Report #8
1786 Remote Print - Alarm Report

At local printer.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-9

1787 Implement Last Prove Meter Factor

Causes the meter factor determined at the last complete prove to be implemented and
Note: More Command
saved. Edge triggered.
Boolean Points are located
at address 2701.
1788 Shutdown PID - Loop #1
st
Points 1788-1791 start ramp-down to top off valve setting by deactivating the 1 PID
permissive. These commands are edge triggered; simply turn on.
INFO - Unless indicated as 1789 Shutdown PID - Loop #2
being Level Sensitive, most
1790 Shutdown PID - Loop #3
commands are 'edge
triggered'. To activate a 1791 Shutdown PID - Loop #4
command simply write a '1'
1792 Stop Flow PID - Loop #1
or 'True' to that point. It is not st nd
Points 1792-1795 deactivate the 1 and 2 PID permissive, causing the valve to ramp to
necessary to write a '0' or
the top off setting, and then immediately closes the valve. If the valve is already at the
'False' after the command is
top off setting, the valve immediately closes.
given. The status of a
command may also be read 1793 Stop Flow PID - Loop #2
or used as input in a Boolean
or variable statement.
CAUTION 1796 Raw Data Archive Run

Level sensitive.
Stored archive data may be
lost! See chapter on Raw
Data Archive before 1797 Reconfigure Archive
Level sensitive.
manipulating these data
points. These functions are
duplicated using integers at
13920 and 13921.
1798 Recalculate and Print Selected Batch - Station
The previous batch selected by register 3879 is recalculated. Edge triggered.
2.3.8. Meter Station Alarm and Status Points

INFO - Boolean data is Data points not specifically connected to a particular meter run are grouped
accessed using Modbus here. These include flow computer general system alarms and metering group
alarms and status points.
Boolean data is packed 8
points to a byte when * 1801 Positive - Gross Volume Pulses (IV)
reading. * 1802 Positive - Net Volume Pulses (GSV)
* 1803 Positive - Mass Pulses
* 1804 Positive - S&W Corrected Net Volume Pulses (NSV)
Note: * 1805 Negative - Gross Volume Pulses (IV)
* Used to assign Points 1805-1808 refer to flow which occurs in the reverse direction.
accumulators to the front * 1806 Negative - Net Volume Pulses (GSV)
panel electromechanical
counters and digital I/O * 1807 Negative - Mass Pulses
points. * 1808 Negative - S&W Corrected Net Volume Pulses (NSV)
1809 Flow Rate - Low Low Alarm

For points 1809-1812, flow rate units are gross volume or mass units (depending on
which unit is selected) for all products.
1810 Flow Rate - Low Alarm
1811 Flow Rate - High Alarm
1812 Flow Rate - High High Alarm
2-10 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
1813 Relative Density (Gravity) Rate of Change Flag

Set when rate of change of flowing relative density (SG) exceeds the setting in 7889.
22/26.71+ - This database 1814 Delayed Reference Density (Gravity) Rate of Change
corresponds to Application Point 1813 delayed by volume specified in 7890.
Turbine/Positive
Displacement Liquid Flow 1815 Any System Alarm
Metering Systems, with Includes acknowledged alarms also.
1816 Any New System Alarm
Does not include acknowledged alarms.
1817 Batch End Acknowledge

Toggle state at batch end (see 1835).
1818 Batch Preset Warning Flag
Station batch total is within X volume or mass units of the batch preset (X is stored at
5815).
1819 Batch Preset Reached Flag
Station batch total equal or exceeds the batch preset
1820 Station - Current Product ID Bit 0

Points 1820-1823 are the offset binary representation of the current running product for
the station (0000=Product #1; 1111=Product #16).
1824 Run Switching - Threshold Flag 1

Flags 1824-1826 activate/deactivate depending on the run switching threshold settings
and are based on current station flow rates.
1827 Leak Detection Freeze Command was received

See point 1760.
Note: # 1828 Day Start Flag

# These points pulse high True at specified day start hour (e.g.: 07:00:00).
for one 500 msec cycle 1829 Power Fail Flag
time. True after power up (see 1713 for reset).
1830 Print Buffer Full Flag
Reports may be lost if 32K spooling buffer overflows due to the printer being off-line or
jammed with paper.
# 1831 Hour Start Flag
# 1832 Week Start Flag
True at specified day start hour Monday.
# 1833 Month Start Flag
True at specified day start hour on 1st day of month.
# 1834 Year Start Flag
True at specified day start hour on 1st January.
# 1835 Batch End Acknowledge
Pulses at batch end (see 1817).
# 1836 Snapshot Printed
Indicates snapshot report printed.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-11

1837 EPROM error Flag

Invalid checksum detected in EPROM memory.
1838 Peer-to-Peer Master Flag
Momentarily true when this computer is peer-to-peer master.
Boolean data is packed 8 1839 Zero Value
points to a byte when Always false.
reading.
~ 1840 Boolean Statement Alarm
Tried to execute more than 100 Boolean statements.
~ 1841 Variable Statement Alarm
Tried to execute more than 100 variable statements.
1842 Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #1 - Communication Error

Points 1842-1857 refer to an error occurred while communicating with the slave in the
appropriate transaction. If a slave is involved in multiple transactions which fail, only the
first will be flagged.
to
1857 Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #16 - Communication Error
Notes: # 1858 Calendar Day Start Flag

~ The system limits the Format: 00:00:00.
maximum number of # 1859 Calendar Week Start Flag
statement evaluations to Format: 00:00:00 Monday.
100 to protect against
possible lock-ups due to # 1860 Calendar Month Start Flag
recursive loops. Any Format: 00:00:00 1st day of month.
additional statement # 1861 Calendar Year Start Flag
evaluations are ignored. st
Format: 00:00:00 Jan 1 .
# These points pulse high
for one 500 msec. cycle
time. 1862 Station Density - Transducer Failed Low
* These flags are usually 1863 Station Density - Low Alarm
used to conditionally print 1864 Station Density - High Alarm
appropriate information
messages on the batch 1865 Station Density - Transducer Failed High
and daily reports.
1866 Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low
to
1869 Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High
1870 Density Pressure - Transducer Failed Low

to
1873 Density Pressure - Transducer Failed High
1874 Spare
* 1875 Net Standard Volumes (NSV) Appearing on Report Flag

1876 Batch Recalculation Acknowledge Flag
Pulses for 500 msec when the 1798 command is received.
1877 Spare
2-12 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
* 1878 Previous Batch - Station Alarm Flag

Set if any station alarm during the previous batch.
22/26.71+ - This database * 1879 Previous Batch - Station Totalizer Roll-over Flag
corresponds to Application Set if any station totalizer rolled during the previous batch.
* 1880 Previous Daily - Station Totalizer Roll-over Flag
Turbine/Positive
Set if any station totalizer rolled during the previous day.
1881 Spare
versions are considered. 1882 Spare
1883 Auxiliary Input #1 - Transducer Failed Low

1884 Auxiliary Input #1 - Low Alarm
1885 Auxiliary Input #1 - High Alarm
1886 Auxiliary Input #1 - Transducer Failed High

to

to

to
Note: See 2600 area and
2800 area for more station
1899 Net Volume @ 2nd Reference Temperature Appears on Reports Flag
Set when 7699 is assigned a non-zero value. Prints on reports.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-13

2.3.9. Prover Alarm and Status Points

INFO - Boolean data is Alarm and Status points connected with the meter proving system are grouped
accessed using Modbus here. The second digit 9 defines a prover. See the 1700 area for command
points associated with the prover.
points to a byte when 1901 Inlet (Left) Pressure - Transducer Low Alarm
reading.
1902 Inlet (Left) Pressure - Transducer High Alarm
1903 Outlet (Right) Pressure - Transducer Low Alarm
1904 Outlet (Right) Pressure - Transducer High Alarm
1905 Inlet (Left) Temperature - Transducer Low Alarm

1906 Inlet (Left) Temperature - Transducer High Alarm
1907 Outlet (Right) Temperature - Transducer Low Alarm
1908 Outlet (Right) Temperature - Transducer High Alarm
Note: # 1909 Prove Aborted - Temperature Unstable

# These alarms are active # 1910 Prove Aborted - Meter-to-Prover Temperature Deviation Exceeded
until the next prove
sequence is started. # 1911 Prove Sequence - Successfully Completed
# 1912 Prove Sequence Aborted - Did Not Complete
1913 1st Detector Sensed - Sphere in Flight Forward Direction

1914 3rd Detector Sensed - Sphere in Flight Reverse Direction
1915 2nd Detector Sensed - In Over-travel Forward Direction
1916 4th Detector Sensed - In Over-travel Reverse Direction
1917 Launch Sphere - Forward Direction
Two second pulse.
1918 Launch Sphere - Reverse Direction
Two second pulse.
# 1919 Prove Aborted - Run Repeatability Deviation Limit Exceeded

# 1920 Prove Aborted - Prover Seal Not OK - Sphere Between Detectors
See 1701.
# 1921 Prove Aborted - Flow Rate was Unstable
# 1922 Prove Aborted - No Prover Permissive Received
See 1726.
# 1923 Meter Factor Obtained was Not Implemented
# 1924 Prove Aborted - Meter Selected was not Flowing
See 1n05.
1925 Plenum - Charge Required

Points 1925 and 1926 refer to Brooks small volume provers only. Plenum pressure can be
automatically adjusted by adding or venting nitrogen.
1926 Plenum - Vent Required
1927 Brooks Small Volume Prover - Run Command Output
Active low output to launch piston.
1928 Prove Sequence - Successfully Completed Flag

500 msec pulse at end of prove.
2-14 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
1929 Using Fixed Override - Prover Inlet (Left) Temperature

Application Revision 1930 Using Fixed Override - Prover Outlet (Right) temperature
1931 Using Fixed Override - Prover Inlet (Left) Pressure
Revision 22/26.71+ for 1932 Using Fixed Override - Prover Outlet (Right) Pressure
Turbine/Positive
Metering Systems, with * 1933 Mass Prove Report - Flag 1
Meter Factor Linearization. Mass total and flow rates appear on prove report.
* 1934 Net Prove Report - Flag 1
Net total and flow rates appear on prove report.
* 1935 Mass Prove Report - Flag 2
Note: Lines 5, 7, 10 and 12 of prove report are mass related.
* These flags are used to * 1936 Net Prove Report - Flag 2
modify the prove report Lines 5, 7, 10 and 12 of prove report are volume related.
format and cause data to
be conditionally printed on
the prover report.
1937 Spare
to
1939 Spare
1940 Print Official Prove Report Flag

1941 Print Unofficial Prove Report Flag
1942 Spare
to
1956 Spare
1957 Proved Meter Factor - Out of Limits from Meter Factor Base Curve
1958 Proved Meter Factor - Out of Limits from Average of Historical Meter
Factor
* 1959 Prove Report - Print 4 Decimal Places for Correction Factors

1962 Spare
to
1979 Spare
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-15

1980 Inlet Pressure - Fail to Low

INFO - Boolean data is 1981 Inlet Pressure - Low Alarm
1882 Inlet Pressure - High Alarm
05 for single point writes and 1983 Inlet Pressure - Fail to High
1984 Outlet Pressure - Fail to Low
points to a byte when 1985 Outlet Pressure - Low Alarm
reading.
1986 Outlet Pressure - High Alarm
1987 Outlet Pressure - Fail to High
1988 Inlet Temperature - Fail to Low
1989 Inlet Temperature - Low Alarm
1990 Inlet Temperature - High Alarm
1991 Inlet Temperature - Fail to High
1992 Outlet Temperature - Fail to Low
1993 Outlet Temperature - Low Alarm
1994 Outlet Temperature - High Alarm
1995 Outlet Temperature - Fail to High
1996 Spare
to
2000 Spare
2-16 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
2.3.10. Meter Totalizer Roll-over Flags

Application Revision The following Boolean points are flags indicating that a totalizer has rolled-over
22/26.71+ - This database (i.e., reached maximum count and restarted from zero). These flags are used to
conditionally print characters (usually **) in front of the totalizer which has
Turbine/Positive rolled on the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni Custom Report
Displacement Liquid Flow Template will show how this is accomplished. The second digit of the index
Metering Systems, with number defines the number of the meter run. See also points at 2801 for station
versions of these flags.
2n01 Batch In Progress - Gross (IV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

Note: The In Progress flags 2n02 Batch In Progress - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
are those which the flow
computer uses when printing 2n03 Batch In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
the reports on the connected 2n04 Batch In Progress - Net (NSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
printer.
Use the Previous flags if the
report is being printed by 2n05 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Gross (IV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
another device such as a
SCADA or MMI. This is
2n06 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
necessary because the flow 2n07 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
computer clears the In
Progress data immediately 2n08 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net (NSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
after it prints the local report.
2n09 Daily In Progress - Gross (IV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n10 Daily In Progress - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n11 Daily In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n12 Daily In Progress - Net (NSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n13 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Gross (IV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n14 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n15 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n16 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Net (NSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n17 Previous Batch n - Gross (IV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n18 Previous Batch n - Net GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n19 Previous Batch n - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n20 Previous Batch n - Net (NSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n21 Previous Batch n - Cumulative - Gross (IV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n22 Previous Batch n - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n23 Previous Batch n - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n24 Previous Batch n - Cumulative - Net (NSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n25 Previous Daily - Gross (IV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n26 Previous Daily - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n27 Previous Daily - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n28 Previous Daily - Net (NSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-17

2n29 Previous Daily - Cumulative - Gross (IV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

INFO - Boolean data is 2n30 Previous Daily - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n31 Previous Daily - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
05 for single point writes and 2n32 Previous Daily - Cumulative - Net (NSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
points to a byte when 2n33 Batch In Progress - 2nd Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
reading.
2n34 Daily In Progress - 2nd Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n35 Previous Batch n - 2nd Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n36 Previous Daily - 2nd Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n37 Spare
Note: See 1800 area and to
2800 area for more station
2n99 Spare
2500 Spare
to
2600 Spare
2.3.11. Miscellaneous Meter Station Alarm and Status

Points
INFO - To differentiate
between normal message
2601 Auxiliary Input #1 - Override in Use
responses and unsolicited
transmissions, Modbus to
function code 67 appears in
2604 Auxiliary Input #4 - Override in Use
the transmitted message
rather than function code 03.
2605 Inlet Temperature - Override in Use
2606 Outlet Temperature - Override in Use
2607 Inlet Pressure - Override in Use
2608 Outlet Pressure - Override in Use
2620 Calibration Data Checksum Error

Correctable as secondary copy was OK.
2621 System Initialized Flag
True after power up or system reset, clears when reset power fail command is set (1713).
2622 Day Light Savings Time
On means that spring adjustment was made. Off means autumn adjustment was made.
2623 Archive Memory Alarm
0 = Ok; 1 = Fail.
2-18 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
2.3.12. Commands Which Cause Custom Data Packets

to be Transmitted Without a Poll
Application Revision Activating any of the edge triggered command points below causes the
22/26.71+ - This database appropriate Custom Data Packet to be transmitted out of the selected serial
port without the serial port being polled for data. This function can be useful
Turbine/Positive when communicating via VSAT satellite systems where operating cost is
Displacement Liquid Flow directly proportional to RF bandwidth used.
versions are considered. 2701 Data Packet #1 to Serial Port #1
2702 Data Packet #2 to Serial Port #1
Note: Notice that all write

commands have indexes /
point addresses with a 7 in
rd
the 3 digit from the right.


2.3.13. Commands Needed To Accomplish a Redundant

Flow Computer System
Accomplishing a redundant flow computer system requires two identically
configured flow computers to share input and output signals. In addition four
digital I/O points are cross connected to enable each flow computer to monitor
the other.
2713 Others - Watchdog Status

Assigned to a digital I/O point monitoring other flow computers watchdog (see 2863).
2714 Others - Master Status
Assigned to a digital I/O point monitoring other flow computers master status (see 2864).
2715 Assume Master Status Command
Set to take mastership. Edge triggered.
2716 Assume Slave Status Command
Set to relinquish mastership. Edge triggered.
2717 Spare
to
2255 Spare
22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-19

2.3.14. Commands to Recalculate and Print Selected

Batch
2756 Recalculate and Print Selected Batch - Meter #1
When one of the commands 2756-2759 is given, the previous batch selected by 3n51 is
recalculated. Edge triggered.
Boolean data is packed 8 2757 Recalculate and Print Selected Batch - Meter #2
reading.
INFO - Remember that the

station is defined as a group
of individual meter runs. 2760 Spare
to
In Progress Flags - The In 2800 Spare
Progress flags are the flags
which the flow computer
uses when printing the
reports on the connected
printer. 2.3.15. Station Totalizer Roll-over Flags
Use the Previous flags if the
report is being printed by The following Boolean points are flags indicating that a totalizer has rolled-over
another device such as an (i.e., reached maximum count and restarted from zero). These flags are used to
SCADA or MMI. This is conditionally print characters (usually ** ) in front of the totalizer which has
necessary because the flow
rolled on the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni Custom Report
computer clears the In
Progress data immediately Template will show how this is accomplished. See also points at 2n01 for meter
after it prints the local report. run versions of flags.
2801 Batch In Progress - Gross (IV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2802 Batch In Progress - Net (GSV)) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2803 Batch In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2804 Batch In Progress - Net (NSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2805 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Gross (IV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2806 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2807 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2808 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net (NSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2809 Daily In Progress - Gross (IV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2810 Daily In Progress - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2811 Daily In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2812 Daily In Progress - Net (NSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2813 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Gross (IV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2814 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - (GSV) Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover
Flag
2815 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2816 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Net (NSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2-20 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
2817 Previous Batch n - Gross (IV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

Application Revision 2818 Previous Batch n - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2819 Previous Batch n - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
Revision 22/26.71+ for 2820 Previous Batch n - Net (NSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
Turbine/Positive
Metering Systems, with 2821 Previous Batch n - Cumulative - Gross (IV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2822 Previous Batch n - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
versions are considered. 2823 Previous Batch n - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2824 Previous Batch n - Cumulative - Net (NSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2825 Previous Daily - Gross (IV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2826 Previous Daily - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2827 Previous Daily - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2828 Previous Daily - Net (NSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2829 Previous Daily - Cumulative - Gross (IV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2830 Previous Daily - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2831 Previous Daily - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2832 Previous Daily - Cumulative - Net (NSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2833 Batch In Progress - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net (GSV) Totalizer

Rollover Flag
2834 Daily In Progress - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover
Flag
2835 Previous Batch n - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net (GSV) Totalizer
Rollover Flag
2836 Previous Daily - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover
Flag
2837 Spare
to
2851 Spare
2.3.16. Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags

INFO - Remember that the All totalizers within the flow computer are long integer types. This data type
station is defined as a group uses an implied decimal position. The computer uses these flags internally to
of individual meter runs.
determine how to format all totalizers of the same type for printing purposes.
2852 Batch Report - Print 4 Decimal Places for Correction Factors

22/26.71+ w 05/99 2-21

2855 Spare
INFO - Boolean data is to
2862 Spare
points to a byte when 2.3.17. Status Booleans Relating to Redundant Flow
reading.
Computer Systems
2863 Watchdog Status Out

Normally High Watchdog. Monitored by other flow computer in a redundant system (see
2713).
2864 Master Status
Indicates mastership. Monitored by other flow computer in a redundant system (see 2714
area).
2865 Spare
to
2999 Spare
2-22 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
3. 16-Bit Integer Data (3001 - 3999)
3.1. Custom Data Packet Definition Variables

INFO - These short integers
are accessed using Modbus
function code 03 for reads, 3.1.1. Custom Data Packet #1
06 for single writes and 16
for multiple register writes. The 16-bit integers needed to define the 20 groups of data that make up
Custom Data Packet #1 which is accessed at database Index 0001 are listed
below.
3001 Group 1 - Starting Index Point Number

3002 Group 1 - Number of Index Points
to
3.1.2. Custom Data Packet #2

The 16-bit integers needed to define the 8 groups of data that make up Custom
Data Packet #2 which is accessed at database Index 0201 are listed below.

to
3.1.3. Custom Data Packet #3

The 16-bit integers needed to define the 20 groups of data that make up
Custom Data Packet #3 which is accessed at database Index 0401 are listed
below.

to
22/26.71+ w 05/99 3-1

Chapter 3 16-Bit Integer Data (3001- 3999)
3.2. Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data

3097 Spare
Turbine/Positive
3098 Number of Totalizer Digits
Totalizers roll at: 0=9 digits; 1=8 digits.
Meter Factor Linearization. 3099 Select Batch Preset Unit
Both US and metric unit 0=Net; 1= Gross; 2=Mass.
3.3. Meter Run 16-Bit Integer Data

The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. For
example: 3106 is the 'Meter Active Frequency' for Meter Run # 1. The same
point for Meter Run # 4 would be 3406.
3n00 Spare
3n01 Override Code - Temperature

For points 3n01-3n05: 0=Never use; 1=Always use; 2=Use if transmitter fails; 3=If
transmitter fails use last hours average.
3n02 Override Code - Pressure
3n03 Override Code - Relative Density (Gravity) / Density
3n04 Override Code - Density Temperature
3n05 Override Code - Density Pressure
3n06 Active Threshold Hz

Point 1n05 is set when flow pulses exceed this frequency.
3n07 Prover Volume Select
Brooks Small Volume Prover (SVP): 0=Use downstream; 1=Use upstream.
3n08 Spare
to
3n12 Spare
3n13 Meter Factor Used in Net and Mass

0=No; 1=Yes.
3n14 Is Meter Already Temperature Compensated?
0=No; 1=Yes.
3n15 Spare
3n16 S&W Source

0=None; 1=Auxiliary #1; 2=Auxiliary #2; 3=Auxiliary #3; 4=Auxiliary #4; 5=Modbus.
3-2 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
3n17 Spare
INFO - These short integers 3n18 Spare
function code 03 for reads,
06 for single writes and 16 3n19 PID Control Mode
for multiple register writes. Do not write if 3n20 is 1. 1=Manual; 0=Auto.
3n20 Setpoint Mode
Read only. DO NOT WRITE! 1=Local; 0=Remote.
3n21 PID Loop Status
Read only. 1=Secondary; 0=Primary.
3n22 Spare
to
3n39 Spare
Notes: # 3n40 Current Net (GSV) Flow Rate

# 2s complement numbers * 3n41 Net (GSV) Totalizer
based on span entries
17176 through 17189. # 3n42 Current Gross (IV) Flow Rate
Values expressed as * 3n43 Gross (IV) Totalizer
percentages of span in
tenth percent increments;. # 3n44 Current Mass Flow Rate
i.e., 1000 represents * 3n45 Mass Totalizer
100.0%
~ 3n46 Current Meter Run Pressure
* Unsigned integer
totalizers cumulative ~ 3n47 Current Meter Run Temperature
based. They roll at 65536. ~ 3n48 Current Transducer Density / Relative Density (Gravity)
~ 2s complement numbers
# 3n49 Current S&W Corrected Net (NSV) Flow Rate
based on the 4-20 mA
spans. Values are * 3n50 S&W Corrected Net (NSV) Totalizer
expressed as percentages
of span in tenth percent
increments; i.e., 1000 3n51 Comparitor Error Threshold
equals 100.0 %. When dual pulse error checking enabled only.
3n52 Previous Batch n - Number of Calculation Times
3n53 Spare
to
3n99 Spare
3500 Spare
22/26.71+ w 05/99 3-3

3.4. Scratchpad 16-Bit Integer Data

Application Revision Ninety-nine integer registers are provided for user scratch pad. These registers
22/26.71+ - This database are typically used to store and group data that will be moved via peer-to-peer
operations or similar operations.
Turbine/Positive
Metering Systems, with 3501 Scratchpad - Short Integer #1
Meter Factor Linearization. to
versions are considered. 3599 Scratchpad - Short Integer #99
3.5. User Display Definition Variables

The 16-bit integers needed to define the variables that appear in the eight User
Displays are listed below. Look in the 4601 area for string associated with
setting up User Displays.
3.5.1. User Display Number 1
3601 Database Index Number of 1st Variable

3602 Decimal Places for 1st Variable
3603 Database Index Number of 2nd Variable
3604 Decimal Places for 2nd Variable
3605 Database Index Number of 3rd Variable
3606 Decimal Places for 3rd Variable
3607 Database Index Number of 4th Variable
3608 Decimal Places for 4th Variable

to
th
3616 Decimal Places for 4 Variable

to
th
3-4 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus

06 for single writes and 16 to
for multiple register writes.

to

to

to

to
th
3665 Spare
to
3700 Spare
22/26.71+ w 05/99 3-5

3.6. Data Used to Access the Raw Data

Archive Records
Application Revision See the chapter describing how to use the raw data archiving features of the
22/26.71+ - This database flow computer including how to manipulate the pointers below.
Turbine/Positive
Displacement Liquid Flow 3701 Archive 701 - Maximum Records
Metering Systems, with Number of data records in archive file.
Meter Factor Linearization. 3702 Archive 701 - Current Record Number
Both US and metric unit Number of the last record updated.
3703 Archive 701 - Request Record Number
Write the number of the record you wish to read.
3704 Archive 702 - Maximum Records

Number of data records in archive file.
3705 Archive 702 - Current Record Number
Number of the last record updated.




3-6 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus

are accessed using Modbus 3720 Archive 707 - Current Record Number
function code 03 for reads, Number of the last record updated.





22/26.71+ w 05/99 3-7

3.7. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data

3737 Archive File System - Memory Allocation Status
0=OK; 1=Allocation Error.
Turbine/Positive
3738 Time Tag
MM/DD or DD/MM format.
Both US and metric unit 3739 Time Tag
versions are considered. YY/HH format
3740 Time Tag
MM/SS format.
3741 New Archive
Bit 0-Bit 9 for files 701-710
Notes:
* Unsigned integer 3742 Spare
totalizers cumulative
based. They roll at 65536. to
~ To avoid flushing the audit 3768 Spare
trail, audit events other
than complete downloads
to the flow computer are
usually not documented in 3769 Number of Historical Alarms to Send to Modbus Buffer
the audit trail unless The number of historical alarms indicated are written to the Modbus buffer (9402)
serial port passwords
have been enabled. If
passwords are enabled,
the target address is
recorded for single point 3770 Spare
writes. Rigorous auditing to
of a serial port or group of
serial ports can be 3799 Spare
activated by placing the
appropriate hexadecimal
code in 3800 (S = Serial
Port):
000A = Audit S1 3.8. Meter Station 16-Bit Integer Data
00A0 = Audit S2
0A00 = Audit S3
A000 = Audit S4 ~ 3800 Special Diagnostic Function
To monitor multiple ports; Used to enable rigorous Audit Trail reporting of all serial port transactions (see side
e.g.: bar note).
A0 A0 = Audit S4 & S2 3801 Running Product Number
# 2s complement numbers Common Batch Stack - Station.
based on span entries # 3802 Current Net (GSV) Flow Rate
17176 through 17189.
Values expressed as * 3803 Net (GSV) Totalizer
percentages of span in # 3804 Current Gross (IV)Flow Rate
tenth percent increments.
i.e. 1000 represents * 3805 Gross (IV) Totalizer
100.0% . No over range or # 3806 Current Mass Flow Rate
under range checking is
done. * 3807 Mass Totalizer
# 3808 Current Pressure
# 3809 Current Temperature
# 3810 Current Relative Density (Gravity) / Density
3811 Allen Bradley - CRC Error Counter
3812 Allen Bradley - Message Type Error Counter
3-8 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
3813 Algorithm Select - Product #1

Points 3813-3828 select the API, ASTM, NIST calculations that will be used when
selecting these products.
function code 03 for reads, 3814 Algorithm Select - Product #2
3821 Spare
to
3828 Spare
3829 Flow Average Factor

Number of 500 msec calculation cycles to average.
3830 Print Priority
0=Not sharing a printer; 1=Master; n=slaves 2-12.
3831 Number of Nulls After Carriage Return
Used to slow data to a printer if no hardware handshake.
3832 Print Interval in Minutes
Time interval between automatic snapshot reports.
3833 Automatic - Weekly Batch Select

0=None; 1=Monday; 7=Sunday.
3834 Automatic - Monthly Batch Select
st
0=None; 1=1 day of the month.
3835 Automatic - Hourly Batch Select
0=No; 1=Yes.
3836 Default Report Templates
0=Custom templates; 1=Default reports.
3837 Batch Stack Mode Select
0=Independent stacks; 1=Common stack.
3838 Clear Daily @ Batch End Select
0=24hr Totals; 1=Cleared at batch end.
3839 Spare
to
3841 Spare
3842 Select Date Type

Selects date format: 0=dd/mm/yy; 1=mm/dd/yy.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 3-9

3.9. Batch Stack Storage of Product

Numbers to Run
Application Revision The following 24 registers are treated as either one 24-position shift stack or, 4
22/26.71+ - This database separate 6-position shift stacks depending upon register 3837. Data in the
stack(s) is shifted automatically at the end of a batch. A new batch starts
Turbine/Positive after either a station batch end (1702) or meter batch end (1703 to 1706)
Displacement Liquid Flow command is received and meter pulses occur. Data on the top of a stack is the
Metering Systems, with current running product for the batch in progress. This entry is discarded
Both US and metric unit (popped off) and replaced with the entry below on receipt of a batch end. A
versions are considered. batch stack may be stopped from shifting by leaving the second entry 0. Note
that these entries are only part of the batch stack. Matching entries for other
data types such as long integers and strings can be found at 5819 and 4852. All
three data type stacks act as a single unit, they all synchronize and shift
together.
3.9.1. Meter #1 Batch Sequence
3843 Sequence #1 - Individual Batch Stack Current Running Product or

Common Batch Stack - Sequence #1

3-10 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus

06 for single writes and 16 Common Batch Stack - Sequence #13
for multiple register writes. 3856 Sequence #2 - Individual Batch Stack Current Running Product or

Common Batch Stack - Product #20
3.10. Flow Computer Time and Date Variables

Time and date can be read and written here. See also 4847 and 4848.
3867 Current - Hour

0-23.
3868 Current - Minute
0-59.
3869 Current - Second
0-59.
3870 Current - Month
1-12.
3871 Current - Day of Month
1-31.
3872 Current - Year
0-99; Year 2000=00.
3873 Current - Day of Week
Read only. 1=Monday; 7=Sunday.
3874 Disable Daily Report
0=print daily report; 1=no daily report.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 3-11

3.11. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data

3875 Move Previous Meter Factor Product n to View Area
See 4743 and 6785 areas.
3876 Override Code - Density
3877 Override Code - Density Temperature
3878 Override Code - Density Pressure
3879 Move Previous Batch n to Print Area

1 through 4; 1=last batch completed.
3880 Density Factor - Select A/B - Product #1

to
3887 Density Factor - Select A/B - Product #8
3888 Spare
to
3900 Spare
3.12. Prover 16-Bit Integer Data
3901 Prove Run

3902 Proving Meter Number
Current meter run in progress (1-4).
3903 Prover Outlet (Right) - Pressure %
0-999.
3904 Prover Outlet (Right) - Temperature %
0-999.
3905 Prover Inlet (Left) - Pressure %
0-999.
3906 Prover Inlet (Left) - Temperature %
0-999.
3907 Prove Counts
Current run (see 5901).
3908 Spare
to
3910 Spare
3911 Enable Trial Prove Report

0=No; 1=Yes.
3-12 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
3912 Number of Passes per Prover Run

1-25.
Application Revision 3913 Number of Prover Runs to Average
22/26.71+ - This database Maximum 10.
3914 Number of Total Prove Runs
Maximum 99.
Turbine/Positive
Displacement Liquid Flow 3915 Prove - Inactivity Timer
Metering Systems, with Seconds.
3916 Prove - Temperature Stability Sample Time
3917 Override Code - Prover Inlet (Left) Temperature
3918 Override Code - Prover Outlet (Right) Temperature
3919 Override Code - Prover Inlet (Left) Pressure
3920 Override Code - Prover Outlet (Right) Pressure
3921 Uni- or Bi-directional Prover

0=Uni, 1=Bi; 2=Uni-Compact; 3=Bi-SVP; 4=Master Meter Prove; 5=2 Series Bi-
directional.
3922 Automatic Implement Prove Meter Factor
0=No; 1=Yes.
3923 Apply Prove Meter Factor Retroactively
0=No; 1=Yes.
3924 Spare
3925 Prover Flow Stable Period

Minutes.
3926 Prove Meter Down Period
Hours.
3927 Compact Prover - Print Run Passes
0=No; 1=Yes.
3928 Prove Run Repeatability on Meter Factor
0=No; 1=Yes.
3929 Number of Historical Meter Factors to Average
3930 Proved Meter Temperature Compensated
3931 Prove Run # - 4th Last Rejected Run

rd
3932 Prove Run # - 3 Last Rejected Run
nd
3933 Prove Run # - 2 Last Rejected Run
3934 Prove Run # - Last Rejected Run
22/26.71+ w 05/99 3-13

3935 Prove Run # - 1st Accepted Run

INFO - These short integers 3936 Prove Run # - 2nd Accepted Run
3937 Prove Run # - 3rd Accepted Run
06 for single writes and 16 3938 Prove Run # - 4th Accepted Run
3939 Prove Run # -5th Accepted Run
3940 Prove Run # - 6th Accepted Run
3945 Current Prove Passes
3946 Prove - Manual Implementation Time Limit

Minutes; 0=disable time limit.
3947 Spare
to
4099 Spare
4n00 Spare
3-14 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
4. 8-Character ASCII String Data (4001 - 4999)
4.1. Meter Run ASCII String Data

INFO - These ASCII string The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. For
variables are accessed using example: 4114 is the 'Meter ID' for Meter Run #1. The same point for Meter
Modbus function codes 03
for all reads and 16 for all
Run #4 would be 4414. Each ASCII string is 8 characters occupying the
writes. equivalent of 4 short integer registers (see the side bar comments).
Note: The index number of 4n01 Running Batch - Start Date

each string refers to the
complete string which
4n02 Running Batch - Start Time
occupies the space of 4 # 4n03 Batch End - Date
registers. It must be
accessed as a complete unit.
# 4n04 Batch End - Time
You cannot read or write a 4n05 Running Product Name
partial string. Each point
counts as one point in the
4n06 Current Calculation Mode
normal Omni Modbus mode. Algorithm set used, in string format.
4n07 Current Batch ID
Characters 1-8.
Modicon Compatible 4n08 Current Batch ID
Mode - For the purpose of
Characters 9-16.
point count only, each string
counts as 4 registers. The 4n09 Meter Factor Used in Net / Mass
starting address of the string Used on reports. It contains Yes or No. Characters 1-8.
still applies.
4n10 Meter Factor Used in Net / Mass
Characters 9-16.
Note:
# Last batch end for this 4n11 Flowmeter - Serial Number
meter run. 4n12 Flowmeter - Size
4n13 Flowmeter - Model
4n14 Flowmeter - ID
4n15 Flowmeter Tag
4n16 Spare
4n17 Transmitter Tag - Temperature

4n18 Transmitter Tag - Pressure
4n19 Transmitter Tag - Densitometer
4n20 Transmitter Tag - Density Temperature
4n21 Transmitter Tag - Density Pressure
4n22 Output Tag - PID Control
22/26.71+ w 05/99 4-1

Chapter 4 8-Character ASCII String Data (4001- 4999)
4n23 Spare
Application Revision to
4n30 Spare
Turbine/Positive
4n31 Previous Batch n - Batch Start Date
Metering Systems, with 4n32 Previous Batch n - Batch Start Time
4n33 Previous Batch n - Batch End Date
versions are considered. 4n34 Previous Batch n - Batch End Time
4n35 Previous Batch n - Product Name
4n36 Previous Batch n - API Table
4n37 Previous Batch n - Batch ID
Characters 1-8.
4n38 Previous Batch n - Batch ID
Characters 9-16.
4n39 Previous Batch n - Meter Factor Used in Net/Mass
4.2. Scratchpad ASCII String Data

Storage for ninety-nine ASCII strings is provided for user scratch pad. These
registers are typically used to store and group data that will be moved via peer-
to-peer operations or similar operations.
4501 Scratchpad - ASCII String #1

to
4599 Scratchpad - ASCII String #99
4.3. User Display Definition String Variables

The string variables which define the descriptor tags that appear in the eight
User Displays and the key press combinations which recall the displays are
listed below.
INFO - See 3601 area for
more data points needed to st
4601 User Display #1 - Descriptor Tag 1 Variable
setup the user displays.
4602 User Display #1 - Descriptor Tag 2nd Variable
rd
th
st
to
4632 User Display #8 - Descriptor Tag 4th Variable
4633 User Display #1 - Key Press Sequence

to
4640 User Display #8 - Key Press Sequence
4-2 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
4.4. String Variables Associated with the

Station Auxiliary Inputs
INFO - These ASCII string
variables are accessed using
4641 Spare
for all reads and 16 for all to
writes.
4706 Spare
Note: The index number of

complete string which 4707 Auxiliary Tag - Input #1
occupies the space of 4 to
accessed as a complete unit. 4710 Auxiliary Tag - Input #4
You cannot read or write a
normal Omni Modbus mode.
4.5. Product Meter Factor Curve 8-Character
Modicon Compatible ASCII String Data
counts as 4 registers. The
starting address of the string 4711 Product #1 - Date of Meter Factor Curve - Meter #1
still applies. 4712 Product #1 - Date of Meter Factor Curve - Meter #2
4713 Product #1 - Date of Meter Factor Curve - Meter #3

to

to

to

to
22/26.71+ w 05/99 4-3


Turbine/Positive
Metering Systems, with 4735 Product #7 - Date of Meter Factor Curve - Meter #1
to
versions are considered. 4738 Product #7 - Date of Meter Factor Curve - Meter #4

to
4743 Product n- Meter #1 - Date of Last Proved Meter Factor Curve

4744 Product n- Meter #1 - Date of 2nd Last Proved Meter Factor Curve
4745 Product n- Meter #1 - Date of 3rd Last Proved Meter Factor Curve
4746 Product n- Meter #1 - Date of 4th Last Proved Meter Factor Curve

to

to

to
th
4782 Product n- Meter #4 - Date of 10 Last Proved Meter Factor Curve
4783 Spare
to
4800 Spare
4-4 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
4.6. Meter Station 8-Character ASCII String

Data
4801 Station - Batch Start Date
for all reads and 16 for all 4802 Station - Batch Start Time
writes.
4803 Station - Batch End Date
4804 Station - Batch End Time
Note: The index number of 4805 Station - Running Product Name
complete string which 4806 Station - Current Calculation Mode
occupies the space of 4
accessed as a complete unit. 4807 Date of Last Database Change
You cannot read or write a Updated each time the Audit Trail is updated.
partial string. Each point 4808 Time of Last Database Change
4809 Reserved
Modicon Compatible
Mode - For the purpose of 4810 Esc Sequence to Print Condensed
point count only, each string Raw ASCII characters sent to printer (see 14149 for Hex ASCII setup).
starting address of the string 4811 Esc Sequence to Print Normal
still applies. Raw ASCII characters sent to printer (see 14150 for Hex ASCII setup).
4812 Daylight Savings Starts

Date format field (**/**/**).
4813 Daylight Savings Ends
Date format field (**/**/**).
4814 Density / Relative Density (Gravity) Tag

4815 Station - ID
4816 Station - Density Temperature Tag
4817 Station - Density Pressure Tag
4818 Print Interval Timer Start Time
Time format field (**:**:**).
4819 Time to Print Daily Report
Time format field (**:**:**).
4820 Product #1 - Name

to
4827 Product #8 - Name
4728 Spare
to
4835 Spare
22/26.71+ w 05/99 4-5

4836 Flow Computer ID

4837 Company Name
Characters 1-8.
Turbine/Positive 4838 Company Name
Displacement Liquid Flow Characters 9-16.
4839 Company Name
Characters 17-24.
versions are considered. 4840 Company Name
Characters 25-32.
4841 Company Name
Characters 33-38. (Note: Last two characters are spares.)
4842 Station Location

Characters 1-8.
Characters 9-16.
Characters 17-24.
Characters 25-32.
Characters 33-38. (Note: Last two characters are spares.)
Note:
* The flow computer time * 4847 Current Date
and date can be set by Point 3842 selects date format (see also 3870-3872).
writing to these ASCII
variables. Be sure to * 4848 Current Time
include the colons ( : ) in See also 3867-3869.
the time string and the
slashes ( / ) in the date
string. 4849 Software Version Number
Example: 20.71
4850 Online Password / EPROM Checksum

Dual function point. Write password. Read provides EPROM Checksum.
4851 Spare
4-6 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
4.7. Batch Stack Storage 16-Character Batch

Identification Strings
INFO - These ASCII string The following 24 register pairs are treated as either one 24-position shift stack
variables are accessed using or, 4 separate 6-position shift stacks depending upon register 3837. Data in the
for all reads and 16 for all
stack(s) is shifted automatically at the end of a batch. A new batch starts
writes. after either a station batch end (1702) or meter batch end (1703-1706)
command is received and meter pulses occur. Data on the top of a stack is the
current running product for the batch in progress. This entry is discarded
Note: The index number of (popped off) and replaced with the entry below on receipt of a batch end. A
complete string which batch stack may be stopped from shifting by leaving the second entry 0. Note
occupies the space of 4 that these entries are only part of the batch stack. Matching entries for other
registers. It must be data types such as integers and long integers can be found at 3843 and 5819.
accessed as a complete unit. All three data type stacks act as a single unit, they are all synchronized and
partial string. Each point shift together.
4.7.1. Meter #1 Batch ID
Modicon Compatible
Mode - For the purpose of 4852 Individual Batch Stack - Sequence #1 or Common Batch Stack -
counts as 4 registers. The Sequence #1
starting address of the string 4853 Batch ID
still applies.
4854 Individual Batch Stack - Sequence #2 or Common Batch Stack -

Sequence #2
4855 Batch ID

Sequence #3
4857 Batch ID

Sequence #4
4859 Batch ID

Sequence #5
4861 Batch ID

Sequence #6
4863 Batch ID
22/26.71+ w 05/99 4-7


Revision 22/26.71+ for Sequence #7
Turbine/Positive 4865 Batch ID
Metering Systems, with to
Meter Factor Linearization. 4874 Individual Batch Stack - Sequence #6 or Common Batch Stack -
Both US and metric unit Sequence #12
4875 Batch ID

Sequence #13
4877 Batch ID
to
Sequence #18
4887 Batch ID

Sequence #19
4889 Batch ID
to
Sequence #24
4899 Batch ID
4-8 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
4.8. Prover ASCII String Data

4901 Prove Meter - Product Name
for all reads and 16 for all 4902 Prove Meter - Calculation Mode Text
writes.
4903 Prove Meter - Batch ID
Characters 1-8.
Note: The index number of 4904 Prove Meter - Batch ID
each string refers to the Characters 9-16.
complete string which 4905 Prove Meter - Serial Number
occupies the space of 4 Manufacturers Number.
accessed as a complete unit. 4906 Prove Meter - Size
You cannot read or write a 4907 Prove Meter - Model
Manufacturer Model Number.
normal Omni Modbus mode. 4908 Prove Meter - ID
4909 Prove Meter - Tag
Modicon Compatible
counts as 4 registers. The 4910 Spare
starting address of the string
still applies.
4911 Prover - Inlet (Left) Temperature Tag

4912 Prover - Outlet (Right) Temperature Tag
4913 Prover - Inlet (Left) Pressure Tag
4914 Prover - Outlet (Right) Pressure Tag
4915 Compact Prover - Plenum Pressure Tag
4916 Spare
to
4919 Spare
4920 Reserved
4921 Prove - Date

4922 Prove - Time
4923 Selected Table Text
4924 Prove - Meter Product Name
4925 Prove - Meter ID
4926 Prove - Meter Serial #
4927 Prove - Meter Size
4928 Prove - Meter Model
4929 Previous Prove - Meter Factor Date
4930 Previous Prove - Meter Factor Time
22/26.71+ w 05/99 4-9

4931 Prove - Result String

Characters 1-8. Printed on Prove Report.
22/26.71+ - This database 4932 Prove - Result String
corresponds to Application Characters 9-16.
4933 Prove - Result String
Turbine/Positive
Characters 17-24.
Metering Systems, with 4934 Prove - Result String
Meter Factor Linearization. Characters 25-32.
4935 Prove - Reason String
Characters 1-8. Printed on Prove Report.
Characters 9-16.
Characters 17-24.
Characters 25-32.
4939 Master Meter - ID

4940 Master Meter - Serial Number
4941 Master Meter - Size
4942 Master Meter - Model
4943 Proving Meter - Initial Date of Meter Factor Curve
4944 Spare
to
4949 Spare
4950 Date of Last Meter Factor Implemented

4951 Date of 2nd Last Meter Factor Implemented
4952 Date of 3rd Last Meter Factor Implemented
th
4953 Date of 4 Last Meter Factor Implemented
4954 Date of 5th Last Meter Factor Implemented
th
th
4957 Date of 8th Last Meter Factor Implemented
th
th
4960 Spare
to
5099 Spare
5n00 Spare
4-10 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
5. 32-Bit Integer Data (5001 - 5999)
5.1. Meter Run 32-Bit Integer Data

INFO - These 32-bit long The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. For
integer variables are example: 5105 is the 'Cumulative Gross (IV) Totalizer' for Meter Run # 1. The
same point for Meter Run # 4 would be 5405.
for multiple writes. Note that
the index number for each 5n01 Batch in Progress - Gross (IV) Totalizer
variable refers to one Points 5n01-5n04 represent the total batch quantities measured so far for the batch in
complete long integer which progress. Results are moved to 5n50 area at the end of the batch.
occupies the space of two
* 5n02 Batch in Progress - Net (GSV) Totalizer
16-bit registers. It must be
accessed as a complete unit. * 5n03 Batch in Progress - Mass Totalizer
* 5n04 Batch in Progress - Net (NSV) Totalizer
partial 32-bit integer. Each
32-bit long integer counts as
one point in the normal Omni
* 5n05 Cumulative In Progress - Gross (IV) Totalizer
Modbus mode.
Points 5n05-5n08 are non-resetable totalizers which are snapshot for opening readings.
* 5n06 Cumulative In Progress - Net (GSV) Totalizer
Modicon Compatible * 5n07 Cumulative In Progress - Mass Totalizer
point count only, each 32-bit * 5n08 Cumulative In Progress - Net (NSV) Totalizer
integer counts as two
registers. The starting
address of the 32-bit integer * 5n09 Todays In Progress - Gross (IV) Totalizer
still applies. Points 5n09-5n12 are total daily quantities measured since the day start hour today.
These are moved to the 5n54 area at the start of a new day.
* 5n10 Todays In Progress - Net (GSV) Totalizer
* 5n11 Todays In Progress - Mass Totalizer
Notes: * 5n12 Todays In Progress - Net (NSV) Totalizer
* The increment for all
totalizers depends upon
the totalizer resolution # 5n13 Meter Factor in Use Now
settings shown in the # 5n14 Average Meter Factor - Batch in Progress
Factor Setup menu of
OmniCom. They can only # 5n15 Average Meter Factor - Todays In Progress
be changed via the
keypad entries made in
the Pass-word 5n16 Batch Preset Remaining
Maintenance menu after 5n17 Running Product Number
Resetting all Totalizers.
5n18 Dual Pulse (Comparitor) Error Counts for Batch
# These Variables are When pulse fidelity check enabled only.
stored with 4 places after
the implied decimal point. 5n19 In Progress Batch Report Number
i.e. 10000 is interpreted Increments each batch start.
as 1.0000 5n20 Raw Input Counts (500 msec)
Turbine counts this 500 msec cycle.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 5-1

5n21 Meter Factor - @ Base Flow Rate to Adjust Meter Factor Curve
Application Revision 5n22 Meter Factor - from Base Curve
5n23 Meter Factor - Adjustment
Turbine/Positive
Metering Systems, with 5n24 Spare
to
versions are considered. 5n36 Spare
# 5n37 Retroactive Meter Factor Change Volume

3
Bbls/m .
# 5n38 Batch Preset Warning Volume
3
Bbls/m .
5n39 Comparitor Error Threshold
5n40 Spare
to
5n42 Spare
5n43 In Progress - Raw Input Counts for Hour

Raw turbine counts for the hour so far.
5n44 In Progress - Gross (IV) Totalizer for Hour
Points 5n44-5n47 represent the total quantities for the current hour in progress. These
will be moved to 5n74 area at the start of the new hour.
5n45 In Progress - Net (GSV) Totalizer for Hour
5n46 In Progress - Mass Totalizer for Hour
5n47 In Progress - Net (NSV) Totalizer for Hour
5n48 In Progress - Raw Input Counts for Batch

Raw turbine counts; this batch.
5n49 In Progress - Raw Input Counts for Day
Raw turbine counts; today so far.
5n50 Previous Batch n - Gross (IV) Totalizer

Points 5n50-5n53 represent the total batch quantities for the previous batch.
5n51 Previous Batch n - Net (GSV) Totalizer
5n52 Previous Batch n - Mass Totalizer
5n53 Previous Batch n - Net (NSV) Totalizer
5-2 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
5n54 Previous Days - Gross (IV) Totalizer

Points 5n54-5n57 are the total quantities for the previous day; day start hour to day
INFO - These 32-bit long
start hour.
integer variables are
accessed using Modbus 5n55 Previous Days - Net (GSV) Totalizer
5n56 Previous Days - Mass Totalizer
for multiple writes. Note that 5n57 Previous Days - Net (NSV) Totalizer
the index number for each
variable refers to one
complete long integer which 5n58 Current Batch - Opening Gross (IV) Totalizer
occupies the space of two Points 5n58-5n61 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at the start of the batch in progress.
16-bit registers. It must be These variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous batch.
5n59 Current Batch - Opening Net (GSV) Totalizer
partial 32-bit integer. Each 5n60 Current Batch - Opening Mass Totalizer
5n61 Current Batch - Opening Net (NSV) Totalizer
Modbus mode.
5n62 Todays - Opening Gross (IV) Totalizer
Points 5n62-5n65 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at day start hour for today. These
Modicon Compatible
variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous day.
point count only, each 32-bit 5n63 Todays - Opening Net (GSV) Totalizer
5n64 Todays - Opening Mass Totalizer
address of the 32-bit integer 5n65 Todays - Opening Net (NSV) Totalizer
still applies.
5n66 Cumulative - Gross (IV) Totalizer @ Leak Detection Freeze Command

Points 5n66-5n69 are cumulative totalizers snapshot when the Leak Detection Freeze
Command (1760) is received (see also points 7634, 7644, 7654 & 7664).
5n67 Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
5n68 Cumulative - Mass Totalizer @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
5n69 Cumulative - Net (NSV) Totalizer @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
5n70 Increment - Gross (IV) Totalizer

Points 5n70-5n73 contains the incremental integer counts that were added to the
totalizers for this current cycle (500msec).
5n71 Increment - Net (GSV) Totalizer
5n72 Increment - Mass Totalizer
5n73 Increment - Net (NSV) Totalizer
5n74 Previous Hourly - Gross (IV) Totalizer

Points 5n74-5n77 represent the total quantities measured for the last hour. These are
moved here from 5n44 area at the end of hour.
5n75 Previous Hourly - Net (GSV) Totalizer
5n76 Previous Hourly - Mass Totalizer
5n77 Previous Hourly - Net (NSV) Totalizer
5n78 Previous Batch n - Opening Gross (IV) Totalizer

Data from 5n58 area gets moved to 5n78-5n81 at the end of each batch.
5n79 Previous Batch n - Opening Net (GSV) Totalizer
5n80 Previous Batch n - Opening Mass Totalizer
5n81 Previous Batch n - Opening Net (NSV) Totalizer
22/26.71+ w 05/99 5-3

5n82 Previous Days - Opening Gross (IV) Totalizer

Data from 5n62 area gets moved to 5n82-5n85 at the end/beginning of each day.
22/26.71+ - This database 5n83 Previous Days - Opening Net (GSV) Totalizer
5n84 Previous Days - Opening Mass Totalizer
Turbine/Positive 5n85 Previous Days - Opening Net (NSV) Totalizer
Meter Factor Linearization. 5n86 Previous Batch n - Closing Gross (IV) Totalizer
5n87 Previous Batch n - Closing Net (GSV) Totalizer
5n88 Previous Batch n - Closing Mass Totalizer
5n89 Previous Batch n - Closing Net (NSV) Totalizer
5n90 Previous Batch n - Batch Report Number

Use this value on Batch Report.
5n91 Previous Batch n - Gross Standard Volume (GSV)
Notes:
< Applicable only to < 5n92 Previous Batch n - Net (GSV) @ 60 F & 0 PSIg
Revision 22.71+ (US
> 5n93 Previous Batch n - Net (GSV) @ 15 C
customary units).
> Applicable only to < 5n94 Previous Batch n - Net Weight Long Tons
Revision 26.71+ (metric > 5n95 Previous Batch n - Net Weight Metric Tons
units).
5n96 Previous Batch n - Factored Gross Volume
5n97 Day In Progress - Net (GSV) @ 2nd Reference Temperature

5n98 Previous Batch n - Net (GSV) @ 2nd Reference Temperature
5n99 Previous Daily - Net (GSV) @ 2nd Reference temperature
5500 Spare
5.2. Scratchpad 32-Bit Integer Data

Ninety-nine 32-bit integer registers are provided for user scratch pad. These
registers are typically used to store the results of variable statement
calculations, to group data that will be moved via peer-to-peer operations or
similar types of operations.
5501 Scratchpad - 32-Bit Integer #1

to
5599 Scratchpad - 32-Bit Integer #99
5600 Spare
to
5800 Spare
5-4 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
5.3. Station 32-Bit Integer Data

* 5801 Station - Batch in Progress - Gross (IV) Totalizer
Points 5801-5804 are total batch quantities measured so far for the batch in progress.
These are moved to 5850 area at the end of the batch.
for multiple writes. Note that * 5802 Station - Batch in Progress - Net (GSV) Totalizer
* 5803 Station - Batch in Progress - Mass Totalizer
complete long integer which * 5804 Station - Batch in Progress - Net (NSV) Totalizer
accessed as a complete unit. * 5805 Station - Cumulative in Progress - Gross (IV) Totalizer
You cannot read or write a Points 5805-5808 are non-resetable totalizers which are snapshot for opening readings.
* 5806 Station - Cumulative in Progress - Net (GSV) Totalizer
one point in the normal Omni * 5807 Station - Cumulative in Progress - Mass Totalizer
Modbus mode.
* 5808 Station - Cumulative in Progress - Net (NSV) Totalizer
Modicon Compatible
* 5809 Station - Todays in Progress - Gross (IV) Totalizer
Points 5809-5812 are total daily quantities measured since the day start hour today.
point count only, each 32-bit
These are moved to the 5854 area at the start of a new day.
registers. The starting * 5810 Station - Todays in Progress - Net (GSV) Totalizer
address of the 32-bit integer
* 5811 Station - Todays in Progress - Mass Totalizer
still applies.
* 5812 Station - Todays in Progress - Net (NSV) Totalizer
Note:
* The increment for all
totalizers depends upon 5813 Spare
the totalizer resolution
settings shown in the
Factor Setup menu of
OmniCom. They can only
5814 Station - Line Pack Remaining
be changed via the
keypad entries made in 5815 Station - Batch Preset Warning
the Pass-word
Maintenance menu after
5816 Station - Batch Preset Remaining
Resetting all Totalizers. 5817 Station - Running Product ID
5818 Station - Batch Number
22/26.71+ w 05/99 5-5

5.4. Batch Size 32-Bit Integer Data

corresponds to Application 5.4.1. Meter #1 Batch Size
Turbine/Positive
Displacement Liquid Flow 5819 Current Batch or Common Batch Stack Sequence #1
Meter Factor Linearization. 5820 Batch Sequence #2 or Common Batch Stack Sequence #2
Both US and metric unit 5821 Batch Sequence #3 or Common Batch Stack Sequence #3
5822 Batch Sequence #4 or Common Batch Stack Sequence #4
5.4.2. Meter #2 Batch Size
5825 Current Batch or Common Batch Stack Sequence #7

to

to

to
5843 Spare
5-6 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
5.5. More Meter Station 32-Bit Integer Data

5844 Station - In Progress - Gross (IV) Total for Hour
Points 5844-5847 represent the total station quantities for the current hour in progress.
These will be moved to 5n74 area at the start of the new hour.
for multiple writes. Note that 5845 Station - In Progress - Net (GSV) Total for Hour
5846 Station - In Progress - Mass Total for Hour
complete long integer which 5847 Station - In Progress - Net (NSV) Total for Hour
accessed as a complete unit. 5848 Station - Time in hhmmss format
You cannot read or write a Read (e.g.: the number 103125 represents 10:31:25).
5849 Station - Date in yymmdd format
one point in the normal Omni Read (e.g.: the number 970527 represents May 27, 1997). The date format used here
Modbus mode. does not follow the US/European format selection.
5850 Station - Previous Batch n - Gross (IV) Totalizer

Modicon Compatible
Points 5850-5853 are total batch quantities for the previous batch. These are moved here
from 5801 area at the end of a batch.
integer counts as two 5851 Station - Previous Batch n - Net (GSV) Totalizer
5852 Station - Previous Batch n - Mass Totalizer
still applies. 5853 Station - Previous Batch n - Net (NSV) Totalizer
5854 Station - Previous Days - Gross (IV) Totalizer

Points 5854-5857 are total quantities for the previous day; day start hour to day start
hour. These are moved here from 5809 area at the end of the day.
5855 Station - Previous Days - Net (GSV) Totalizer
5856 Station - Previous Days - Mass Totalizer
5857 Station - Previous Days - Net (NSV) Totalizer
5858 Station - Current Batch - Opening Gross (IV) Totalizer

Points 5858-5861 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at the start of the batch in progress.
These variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous batch.
5859 Station - Current Batch - Opening Net (GSV) Totalizer
5860 Station - Current Batch - Opening Mass Totalizer
5861 Station - Current Batch - Opening Net (NSV) Totalizer
5862 Station - Todays - Opening Gross (IV) Totalizer

Points 5862-5865 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at day start hour for today. These
variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous day.
5863 Station - Todays - Opening Net (GSV) Totalizer
5864 Station - Todays - Opening Mass Totalizer
5865 Station - Todays - Opening Net (NSV) Totalizer
5866 Station - Cumulative - Gross (IV) Totalizer @ Leak Detection Freeze

Points 5866-5869 are cumulative totalizers snapshot when the Leak Detection Freeze
Command (1760) is received (see also points 7634, 7644, 7654 & 7664).
5867 Station - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer @ Leak Detection Freeze
5868 Station - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer @ Leak Detection Freeze
5869 Station - Cumulative - Net (NSV) Totalizer @ Leak Detection Freeze
22/26.71+ w 05/99 5-7

* 5870 Station - Increment - Gross (IV) Totalizer

Points 5870-5873 contain the incremental integer counts that were added to the totalizers
for this current cycle.
corresponds to Application * 5871 Station - Increment - Net (GSV) Totalizer
* 5872 Station - Increment - Mass Totalizer
Turbine/Positive
Displacement Liquid Flow * 5873 Station - Increment - Net (NSV) Totalizer
Both US and metric unit 5874 Station - Previous Hourly - Gross (IV)
versions are considered. Points 5874-5877 represent the total quantities measured for the last hour. These are
moved here from 5844 area at the end of hour.
5875 Station - Previous Hourly - Net (GSV) Total
Notes:
* The increment for all 5876 Station - Previous Hourly - Mass Total
totalizers depends upon 5877 Station - Previous Hourly - Net (NSV) Total
the totalizer resolution
settings shown in the
Factor Setup menu of # 5878 Station - Previous Batch n - Opening Gross (IV) Totalizer
OmniCom. They can only Data from 5858 area gets moved to points 5878-5881 at the end of each batch.
be changed via the
keypad entries made in
# 5879 Station - Previous Batch n - Opening Net (GSV) Totalizer
the Password # 5880 Station - Previous Batch n - Opening Mass Totalizer
Maintenance menu after
Resetting all Totalizers.
# 5881 Station - Previous Batch n - Opening Net (NSV) Totalizer
# See point 3879.
< Applicable only to 5882 Station - Previous Days - Opening Gross (IV) Totalizer
Revision 22.71+ (US Data from 5862 area gets moved to points 5882-5885 at the end/beginning of each day.
customary units). 5883 Station - Previous Days - Opening Net (GSV) Totalizer
> Applicable only to
5884 Station - Previous Days - Opening Mass Totalizer
Revision 26.71+ (metric
units). 5885 Station - Previous Days - Opening Net (NSV) Totalizer
# 5886 Station - Previous Batch n - Closing Gross (IV) Totalizer

# 5887 Station - Previous Batch n - Closing Net (GSV) Totalizer
# 5888 Station - Previous Batch n - Closing Mass Totalizer
# 5889 Station - Previous Batch n - Closing Net (NSV) Totalizer
# 5890 Station - Previous Batch n - Batch Number

# 5891 Station - Previous Batch n - Gross Standard Volume (GSV)
#< 5892 Station - Previous Batch n - Net (GSV) @ 60 F & 0 PSIg
#> 5893 Station - Previous Batch n - Net (GSV) @ 15 C
#< 5894 Station - Previous Batch n - Net Weight Long Tons
#> 5895 Station - Previous Batch n - Net Weight Metric Tons
# 5896 Station - Previous Batch n - Factored Gross Volume
# 5897 Station - Daily - Net (GSV) @ 2nd Reference Temperature

# 5898 Station - Previous Batch n - Net (GSV) @ 2nd Reference Temperature
nd
# 5899 Station - Previous Daily - Net (GSV) @ 2 Reference Temperature
5-8 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
5.6. Prover 32-Bit Integer Data

5901 Prove Counts
function code 03 for reads, 5902 Compact Prover - TDVOL Timer Pulses
06 for single writes and 16 Timer pulses accumulated between detectors switches (each pulse is 200nsec).
for multiple writes. Note that
5903 Compact Prover - TDFMP Timer Pulses
Timer pulses accumulated between first flow pulse after each detector switches (each
pulse is 200nsec).
complete long integer which
5904 Proved Meter Run Identifier - For Redundant Slave
You cannot read or write a Used to transfer the new meter factor after a prove to a redundant flow computer, using
partial 32-bit integer. Each the peer-to-peer link. Contains the number of the meter run just proved. In redundant
32-bit long integer counts as flow computer systems, this data is sent to the slave flow computer.
one point in the normal Omni 5905 New Proved Meter Factor - For Redundant Slave
Modbus mode. Used to transfer the new meter factor after a prove to a redundant flow computer, using
the peer-to-peer link. Contains the new just proved meter factor (5995). In redundant
flow computer systems, this data is sent to the slave flow computer.
Modicon Compatible 5906 Proved Meter Run Identifier - Echo from Redundant Slave
Used to transfer the new meter factor after a prove to a redundant flow computer, using
the peer-to-peer link. In redundant flow computer systems, the master flow computer
reads this data which is an echo of point 5904. At the end of a prove, the master detects
that the slave has accepted the new meter factor by reading back the meter number
proved.
still applies.
5907 Spare
to
5929 Spare
5930 Net Total since Last Prove

5931 Prove Report Number
5932 Previous Prove Totalizer
5933 Totalizer Reading This Prove
5934 Pulses - Forward - 4th Last Prove

5935 Pulses - Total - 4th Last Prove
rd
5936 Pulses - Forward - 3 Last Prove
rd
5937 Pulses - Total - 3 Last Prove
5938 Pulses - Forward - 2nd Last Prove
nd
5939 Pulses - Total - 2 Last Prove
5940 Pulses - Forward - Last Prove
5941 Pulses - Total - Last Prove
5942 Pulses - Forward - 1st Prove Run

st
5943 Pulses - Total - 1 Prove Run
to
5960 Pulses - Forward - Prove 10th Run
th
5961 Pulses - Total - Prove 10 Run
22/26.71+ w 05/99 5-9

5962 Spare
Revision 22/26.71+ for 5963 Calculated Meter Factor - Current Prove Sequence Result
Turbine/Positive The meter factor at actual flowing conditions at time of proving.
5964 Flowmeter Frequency - 1st Prove Run
to
5973 Flowmeter Frequency - 10th Prove Run
5974 Compact Prover - TDVOL Timer Pulses - 1st Run

Timer pulses accumulated between detector switches (each pulse is 200nsec).
5975 Compact Prover - TDFMP Timer Pulses 1st Run
Timer pulses accumulated between first flow pulse after each detector switch (each pulse
is 200nsec).
to
5992 Compact Prover - TDVOL Timer Pulses - 10th Run
5993 Compact Prover - TDFMP Timer Pulses - 10th Run
5994 Meter Factor - Trial Prove

5995 New Meter Factor - Normalized to the Base Proving Flow Rate
5996 Meter Factor - @ Base Proving Flow Rate Interpolated from Meter
Factor Base Curve
5997 Base Curve Meter Factor - @ Actual Prove Flow Rate - Interpolated
from Meter Factor Base Curve
The new calculated meter factor (5963) is compared against this value to determine the
current offset from the base curve of the new meter factor.
5995 (Implement)
8071
O FFSET Test 1
8072
5963 New Calculated MF Test 2
5996
O FFSET
Calculated Average of
5997 Last n Historical
Normalized MFs
(no database point
assigned)
Actual Proving Base Prove

Flow Rate (Reference) Flow
Rate
5998 Spare
to
6000 Spare
5-10 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
6. 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (6001 - 8999)
6.1. Meter Factor Flow Linearization Curve

32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data
corresponds to Application 6.1.1. Meter Factor
Turbine/Positive
Displacement Liquid Flow Product 1
Both US and metric unit 6001 Meter #1 - Meter Factor - Point #1
to
6012 Meter #1 - Meter Factor - Point #12
INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE
Floating Point variables are
accessed using Modbus 6013 Meter #2 - Meter Factor - Point #1
function code 03 for all
reads, 06 for single writes or
to
16 for single or multiple 6024 Meter #2 - Meter Factor - Point #12
writes. Note that the index
number for each variable
refers to the complete 6025 Meter #3 - Meter Factor - Point #1
floating point variable which
occupies the space of two to
16- bit registers. It must be 6036 Meter #3 - Meter Factor - Point #12
partial variable. Each floating 6037 Meter #4 - Meter Factor - Point #1
point variable counts as one
point in the normal Omni to
Modbus mode. 6048 Meter #4 - Meter Factor - Point #12
Modicon Compatible
point count only, each IEEE
float point counts as 2
address of the variable still
applies.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 6-1

Chapter 6 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (6001- 8999)
Product #2
Revision 22/26.71+ for to
Turbine/Positive
versions are considered. to

to

to
Product #3

to

to

to

to
6-2 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
Product #4
function code 03 for all to
16 for single or multiple
refers to the complete
floating point variable which to
16- bit registers. It must be
point variable counts as one to
point in the normal Omni

Modicon Compatible
Mode - For the purpose of to
applies.
Product #5

to

to

to

to
22/26.71+ w 05/99 6-3

Product #6
Turbine/Positive
6264 M7eter #2 - Meter Factor - Point #12

to

to
Product #7

to

to

to

to
6-4 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
Product #8

Modicon Compatible
applies.
6385 Spare
to
6400 Spare
6.1.2. Flow Rate - Meter Factor Flow Linearization

Curve
Product #1
6401 Meter #1 - Flow Rate - Point #1

to

to

to

to
22/26.71+ w 05/99 6-5

Product #2
Turbine/Positive

to

to
Product #3

to

to

to

to
6-6 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
Product #4
partial variable. Each floating 6569 Meter #3 - Flow Rate - Point #1
Modbus mode. 6580 Meter #3 - Flow Rate - Point #12

Modicon Compatible
applies.
Product #5

to

to

to

to
22/26.71+ w 05/99 6-7

Product #6
Turbine/Positive

to

to
Product #7

to

to

to

to
6-8 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
Product #8
partial variable. Each floating 6761 Meter #3 - Flow Rate - Point #1
Modbus mode. 6772 Meter #3 - Flow Rate - Point #12

Modicon Compatible
applies.
6.1.3. Meter Factor Deviation - Meter Factor Flow
Linearization Curve
Meter Run #1
6785 Meter #1 - Product n - Last Meter Factor

6786 Meter #1 - Product n - Last Deviation %
6787 Meter #1 - Product n - 2nd Last Meter Factor
6788 Meter #1 - Product n - 2nd Last Deviation %
6789 Meter #1 - Product n - 3rd Last Meter Factor
6790 Meter #1 - Product n - 3rd Last Deviation %
6791 Meter #1 - Product n - 4th Last Meter Factor
th
6792 Meter #1 - Product n - 4 Last Deviation %
th
6793 Meter #1 - Product n - 5 Last Meter Factor
6794 Meter #1 - Product n - 5th Last Deviation %
th
th
th
th
22/26.71+ w 05/99 6-9

Meter Run #2
Revision 22/26.71+ for 6806 Meter #2 - Product n - Last Deviation %
Turbine/Positive
to
Metering Systems, with 6823 Meter #2 - Product n - 10th Last Meter Factor
Meter Run #3

to
Meter Run #4

to
6-10 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
6.2. Digital-to-Analog Outputs 32-Bit IEEE

Floating Point Data
INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE Any analog output point which physically exists can be read via these point
Floating Point variables are numbers. Data returned is expressed as a percentage of the output value.
function code 03 for all Only those points which physically exist and have been assigned to Modbus
reads, 06 for single writes or control by assigning zero (0) at 'D/A Out Assign' (see Volume 3) should be
writes. Note that the index written to. Outputs which are not assigned to Modbus control will be overwritten
number for each variable every 500 msec by the flow computer. Data written should be within the range
refers to the complete of -5.00 to 110.00.
7001 Analog Output #1
You cannot read or write a to
partial variable. Each floating
7012 Analog Output #12
Modbus mode.
7013 Spare
Modicon Compatible to
Mode - For the purpose of 7024 Spare
applies.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 6-11

6.3. User Variables 32-Bit IEEE Floating

Point Data
INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE Database points 7025 through 7088 have been assigned as user variables (see
Floating Point variables are Volume 3). The value contained in the variable depends on the associated
program statement which is evaluated every 500 msec. You may read these
reads, 06 for single writes or variables at any time. You may also write to these variables but anything you
16 for single or multiple write may be overwritten by the flow computer depending on the evaluation of
writes. Note that the index the statement. Leave the statement blank or simply put a comment or prompt
into it to avoid having the flow computer overwrite it.
16- bit registers. It must be 7025 User-Programmable Variable #1
You cannot read or write a to
partial variable. Each floating 7088 User-Programmable Variable #64
Modbus mode.
Modicon Compatible
6.4. Programmable Accumulator 32-Bit IEEE
Floating Point Variables
Points 7089 through 7099 are paired with Boolean Point Variables 1089 through
address of the variable still 1099. Numeric data placed in 7089, for example, can be output as pulses by
applies. assigning a digital I/O point to 1089.

Data placed into 7089 is pulsed out using 1089.
to
Data placed into 7099 is pulsed out using 1099.
7n00 Spare
6-12 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
6.5. Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point

Data
Application Revision The second digit of the index number defines the meter run number. For
22/26.71+ - This database example: 7105 is the 'Temperature' variable for Meter Run #1. The same point
for Meter Run #4 would be 7405.
Turbine/Positive
Metering Systems, with < 7n01 Flow Rate - Gross (IV)
3
Meter Factor Linearization. Bbls/hr or m /hr.
< 7n02 Flow Rate - Net (GSV)
versions are considered. 3
Bbls/hr or m /hr.
< 7n03 Flow Rate - Mass
INFO - The second digit of Klbs or ton/hr.
the index number defines the < 7n04 Flow Rate - Net (NSV)
number of the meter run. 3
Bbls/hr or m /hr.
INFO - Calculated averages * 7n05 Temperature

are flow weighted.
* 7n06 Pressure
Notes:
< Current live values which
are updated every 7n07 Spare
500msec.
* Current values in use
now.
* 7n08 Flowing Transducer Density Before Factoring
Temperature and pressure corrected.
* 7n09 Flowing Transducer Density After Factoring
7n09=7n08 x 7n43.
* 7n10 Density Transducer Temperature

Corrects for transducer expansion effects.
* 7n11 Density Transducer Pressure
Corrects for transducer expansion effects.
* 7n12 API Flowing

* 7n13 API @ 60 F / API @ Reference Temperature
* 7n14 Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Flowing

* 7n15 Relative Density (Specific Gravity) @ 60 F / Density @ 15 C
* 7n16 Volume Correction Factor (VCF)

* 7n17 Correction Factor for Pressure on Liquids (CPL)
22/26.71+ w 05/99 6-13

7n18 Batch In Progress - Average Meter Run Temperature

INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE 7n19 Batch In Progress - Average Meter Run Pressure
7n20 Batch In Progress - Average Flowing Density
function code 03 for all 7n21 Batch In Progress - Average Density Transducer Temperature
7n22 Batch In Progress - Average Density Transducer Pressure
writes. Note that the index 7n23 Batch In Progress - Average API Flowing
7n24 Batch In Progress - Average API @ 60 F / API @ Reference
floating point variable which Temperature
occupies the space of two 7n25 Batch In Progress - Average Flowing Relative Density (Specific
16- bit registers. It must be Gravity)
You cannot read or write a 7n26 Batch In Progress - Average Relative Density (Specific Gravity) @ 60
partial variable. Each floating F / Density @ Reference Temperature
point in the normal Omni 7n27 Batch In Progress - Average Volume Correction Factor (VCF)
Modbus mode. 7n28 Batch In Progress - Average Correction Factor for Pressure on
Liquids (CPL)
Modicon Compatible
Mode - For the purpose of 7n29 Day In Progress - Average Temperature
float point counts as 2 7n30 Day In Progress - Average Pressure
registers. The starting 7n31 Day In Progress - Average Density Flowing
applies. 7n32 Day In Progress - Average Density Transducer Temperature
7n33 Day In Progress - Average Density Transducer Pressure
Notes:
7n34 Day In Progress - Average API Flowing
* Current values in use 7n35 Day In Progress - Average API @ 60 F / API @ Reference Temperature
now. 7n36 Day In Progress - Average Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Flowing
~ The data in these 7n37 Day In Progress - Average Relative Density (Specific Gravity) @ 60 F /
variables may be
Density @ Reference Temperature
calculated real time or the
same data as entered * ~ 7n38 Day In Progress - Average Volume Correction Factor (VCF)
elsewhere depending on
* ~ 7n39 Day In Progress - Average Correction Factor for Pressure on Liquids
the fluid type selected or
the equation of state (CPL)
selected.
* ~ 7n40 Current K Factor
7n41 Batch Flow Weighted Average - K Factor

7n42 Daily Flow Weighted Average - K Factor
7n43 Density Transducer- Factor in Use

7n44 Density Transducer - Correction Factor B
7n45 Spare
to
7n52 Spare
7n55 Meter K Factor
7n56 Prove Base Flow Rate
6-14 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
7n57 Spare
7n60 Spare
Turbine/Positive
Metering Systems, with # 7n61 Meter Run Gross/Mass Flow Rate - Low Limit
# 7n62 Meter Run Gross/Mass Flow Rate - High Limit
7n63 Meter Temperature - Low Limit
INFO - The second digit of 7n64 Meter Temperature - High Limit
the index number defines the 7n65 Meter Temperature - Override
number of the meter run
number. 7n66 Meter Temperature - @ 4mA
7n67 Meter Temperature - @ 20mA
Note:
# Indicates meter run gross
or mass flow rate 7n68 Meter Pressure - Low Limit
depending on which unit
is selected to
7n72 Meter Pressure - @ 20mA
7n73 Relative Density (Gravity) / Density Transducer - Low Limit

Indicated at either flowing or reference conditions, depending on which is selected.
to
7n77 Relative Density (Gravity) / Density Transducer - @ 20mA
7n78 Density Transducer Temperature - Low Limit

to
7n82 Density Transducer Temperature - @ 20mA
7n83 Density Transducer Pressure - Low Limit

to
7n87 Density Transducer Pressure - @ 20mA
7n88 Density Transducer - Correction Factor B

Used to correct densitometer.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 6-15

* 7n89 Densitometer - Constant #1

K0/D0.
Floating Point variables are * 7n90 Densitometer - Constant #2
accessed using Modbus K1/T0.
K2/Tcoef.
writes. Note that the index * 7n92 Densitometer - Constant #4
number for each variable K18/Tcal/Tc.
K19/Pcoef/Kt1.
16- bit registers. It must be * 7n94 Densitometer - Constant #6
accessed as a complete unit. K20A/Pcal/Kt2.
point variable counts as one K20B/Kt3.
point in the normal Omni * 7n96 Densitometer - Constant #8
Modbus mode. K21A/Pc.
K21B/Kp1.
Modicon Compatible
Mode - For the purpose of * 7n98 Densitometer - Constant #10
point count only, each IEEE Kr. (For UGC densitometers: Kr/KP2.)
float point counts as 2 * 7n99 Densitometer - Constant #11
Kj. (For UGC densitometers: Kj/KP3.)
applies.
Note:
* Various factors used by
6.6. Scratchpad 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point
various vendors of digital
densitometers.
Data
Ninety-nine IEEE 32-bit floating point registers are provided for user scratch
pad. These registers are typically used to store and group data that will be
moved via peer-to-peer operations or similar uses.
7501 Scratchpad - IEEE Float #1

to
7599 Scratchpad - IEEE Float #99
6-16 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
6.7. PID Control 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point

Data
# 7601 PID Control #1 - Local Primary Variable Setpoint Value
Revision 22/26.71+ for * 7602 PID Control #1 - Primary Setpoint Value in Use
Turbine/Positive
~ 7603 PID Control #1 - Remote Primary Setpoint Value
Metering Systems, with ^ 7604 PID Control #1 - Control Output Percent
< 7605 PID Control #1 - Secondary Variable Setpoint
# 7606 PID Control #2 - Local Primary Variable Setpoint Value
Notes: * 7607 PID Control #2 - Primary Setpoint Value in Use
# Do not write to these ~ 7608 PID Control #2 - Remote Primary Setpoint Value
variables. They are
provided for read only
^ 7609 PID Control #2 - Control Output Percent
information. < 7610 PID Control #2 - Secondary Variable Setpoint
* Writing to these variables
will have no effect as the
flow computer overwrites # 7611 PID Control #3 - Local Primary Variable Setpoint Value
these values with either * 7612 PID Control #3 - Primary Setpoint Value in Use
the remote or local
primary Setpoint value ~ 7613 PID Control #3 - Remote Primary Setpoint Value
depending on the ^ 7614 PID Control #3 - Control Output Percent
operating mode of the
control loop. < 7615 PID Control #3 - Secondary Variable Setpoint
~ Only writes made while in
the 'Remote' mode will be # 7616 PID Control #4 - Local Primary Variable Setpoint Value
meaningful. These
variables are overwritten * 7617 PID Control #4 - Primary Setpoint Value in Use
with the current value of ~ 7618 PID Control #4 - Remote Primary Setpoint Value
the primary controlled
variable when in all other ^ 7619 PID Control #4 - Control Output Percent
modes.
< 7620 PID Control #4 - Secondary Variable Setpoint
^ Only writes made while in
the 'Manual' mode will be
meaningful. These
variables are overwritten
by the flow computer in all 7621 Spare
other operating modes. to
< Writes to these variables 7623 Spare
are always accepted.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 6-17

6.8. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE

Floating Point Data
corresponds to Application 7624 Equilibrium Pressure - Meter Run #1
Revision 22/26.71+ for PSIg/kPa (current live values).
Turbine/Positive 7625 Equilibrium Pressure - Meter Run #2
PSIg or kPa.
Meter Factor Linearization. 7626 Equilibrium Pressure - Meter Run #3
Both US and metric unit PSIg or kPa.
versions are considered. 7627 Equilibrium Pressure - Meter Run #4
PSIg or kPa.
INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE 7628 Equilibrium Pressure - Prover

Floating Point variables are PSIg or kPa.
reads, 06 for single writes or 7629 Vapor Pressure @ 100 F - Meter Run #1
16 for single or multiple Current live values.
writes. Note that the index 7630 Vapor Pressure @ 100 F - Meter Run #2
refers to the complete 7631 Vapor Pressure @ 100 F - Meter Run #3
floating point variable which 7632 Vapor Pressure @ 100 F - Meter Run #4
16- bit registers. It must be 7633 Vapor Pressure @ 100 F - Prover
partial variable. Each floating # 7634 Meter Run #1 - Temperature @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
point variable counts as one See 1760 command.
point in the normal Omni # 7635 Meter Run #1 - Pressure @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
Modbus mode.
# 7636 Meter Run #1 - Density / Relative Density (Gravity) @ Leak Detection
Freeze Command
Modicon Compatible
float point counts as 2 7637 Spare
address of the variable still to
applies.
7639 Spare
INFO - See 7n01 through * 7640 Meter Run #1 - Gross (IV) Volume Increment
7n99 for more meter run
related data. * 7641 Meter Run #1 - Net (GSV) Increment Volume
* 7642 Meter Run #1 - Mass Increment
* 7643 Meter Run #1 - Net (NSV) Increment
# 7644 Meter Run #2 - Temperature @ Leak Detection Freeze Command

# 7645 Meter Run #2 - Pressure @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
Freeze Command
7647 Spare
to
7649 Spare
6-18 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
* 7650 Meter Run #2 - Gross (IV) Volume Increment

INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE * 7651 Meter Run #2 - Net (GSV) Volume Increment
function code 03 for all * 7653 Meter Run #2 - Net (NSV) Increment
writes. Note that the index # 7654 Meter Run #3 - Temperature @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
# 7655 Meter Run #3 - Pressure @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
floating point variable which # 7656 Meter Run #3 - Density / Relative Density (Gravity) @ Leak Detection
occupies the space of two Freeze Command
point variable counts as one 7657 Spare
point in the normal Omni to
Modbus mode.
7659 Spare
Modicon Compatible
point count only, each IEEE * 7660 Meter Run #3 - Gross (IV) Volume Increment
registers. The starting * 7661 Meter Run #3 - Net (GSV) Volume Increment
address of the variable still * 7662 Meter Run #3 - Mass Increment
applies.
INFO - See 7n01 through

7n99 for more meter run
# 7664 Meter Run #4 - Temperature @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
related data. # 7665 Meter Run #4 - Pressure @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
Notes:
Freeze Command
* These variables represent
the incremental flow
which is accumulated
each 500 msec. 7667 Spare
calculation cycle in float to
format (also see points
5n70 for integer format). 7669 Spare
# Flowing variables are
snapshot and stored here
when the Leak Detection
Freeze command (1760) * 7670 Meter Run #4 - Gross (IV) Volume Increment
is received (also see * 7671 Meter Run #4 - Net (GSV) Volume Increment
points 5n66).
# 7674 Station - Temperature @ Leak Detection Freeze Command

# 7675 Station - Pressure @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
# 7676 Station - Density / Relative Density (Gravity) @ Leak Detection Freeze
Command
7677 Spare
to
7679 Spare
22/26.71+ w 05/99 6-19

* 7680 Station - Gross (IV) Volume Increment

Application Revision * 7681 Station - Net (GSV) Volume Increment
* 7682 Station - Mass Volume Increment
Revision 22/26.71+ for * 7683 Station - Net (NSV) Volume Increment
Turbine/Positive
7684 Spare
7698 Spare
Notes:
* These variables represent
the incremental flow
which is accumulated
7699 2nd Reference Temperature
each 500 msec. Other than 60F or 15C.
calculation cycle in float
format (also see points
5n70 for integer format).
6.9. Miscellaneous Variables 32-Bit IEEE

Floating Point Data
The percentage of span for each of the 24 process input channels is available
as a floating point variable point.
INFO - The data is only
meaningful when the input
7701 Process Analog Input - Channel # 1
channel is used as an analog
input or a Honeywell digital to
transducer input. For pulse
7724 Process Analog Input - Channel # 24
type input channels see data
points located at 15131
through 15154.
7725 Spare
to
7782 Spare
7783 Sequence #2 Batch Size - Meter #1


7791 Batch Preset Warning - Meter #1

7795 Batch Preset Warning - Station
6-20 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
7796 Spare
INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE to
7800 Spare
number for each variable 6.10. Meter Station 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point
floating point variable which Data
accessed as a complete unit. 7801 Station - Gross Indicated Volume (IV) Flow Rate
You cannot read or write a 3
Bbls/hr or m /hr.
point variable counts as one 7802 Station - Net Gross Standard Volume (GSV) Flow Rate
3
point in the normal Omni Bbls/hr or m /hr.
Modbus mode. 7803 Station - Mass Flow Rate
Klbs/hr.
Modicon Compatible 7804 Station - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Flow Rate
3
Mode - For the purpose of Bbls/hr or m /hr.
registers. The starting 7805 Station - Relative Density (Gravity) / Density
address of the variable still 7806 Station - Density Temperature
applies.
7807 Station - Density Pressure
7808 Spare
7809 Station - Auxiliary Input #1

Points 7809-7812 represent miscellaneous live input signals provided for user-defined
functions.
7813 Station - Time - hhmmss

Read only (e.g.: the number 103125 represents 10:31:25).
7814 Station - Date - yymmdd
Read only (e.g.: the number 990527 represents May 27, 1999; the date format used here
does not follow the US/European format selection).
7815 Spare
to
7820 Spare
22/26.71+ w 05/99 6-21

7821 Station - Product #1 - API Override / Thermal Expansion Coefficient

Application Revision 7822 Station - Product #1 - Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Override /
22/26.71+ - This database Reference Density
Revision 22/26.71+ for 7823 Station - Product #2 - API Override / Thermal Expansion Coefficient
Turbine/Positive 7824 Station - Product #2 - Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Override /
Displacement Liquid Flow Reference Density
Meter Factor Linearization. 7825 Station - Product #3 - API Override / Thermal Expansion Coefficient
Both US and metric unit 7826 Station - Product #3 - Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Override /
Reference Density
7828 Station - Product #4 - Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Override /
Reference Density
Reference Density
Reference Density
Reference Density
Reference Density
7837 Spare
to
7852 Spare
7853 Station - Gross/Mass Flow Rate - Low Limit

Indicates flow rate low limit in gross or mass units, depending on which unit is selected.
7854 Station - Gross/Mass Flow Rate - High Limit
Indicates flow rate high limit in gross or mass units, depending on which unit is selected.
7855 Station - Flow Threshold - Run Switch Flag #1 - Decreasing Flow

See 1824.
7856 Station - Flow Threshold - Run Switch Flag #1 - Increasing Flow
See 1825.
See 1826.
6-22 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
7861 Station - Density Pressure - Low Limit

Points 7861-7865 are configuration settings used when the pressure is a live 4-20 mA.
Floating Point variables are 7862 Station - Density Pressure - High Limit
7863 Station - Density Pressure - Override
reads, 06 for single writes or 7864 Station - Density Pressure - @ 4mA
7865 Station - Density Pressure - @ 20mA
7866 Station - Relative Density (Gravity) / Density - Low Limit
occupies the space of two Points 7866-7870 are configuration settings used when the gravity/density is a live 4-20
16- bit registers. It must be mA.
accessed as a complete unit. 7867 Station - Relative Density (Gravity) / Density - High Limit
7868 Station - Relative Density (Gravity) / Density - Override
point variable counts as one 7869 Station - Relative Density (Gravity) / Density - @ 4mA
Modbus mode. 7870 Station - Relative Density (Gravity) / Density - @ 20mA
7871 Station - Density Temperature - Low Limit

Modicon Compatible
Points 7871-7875 are configuration settings used when the relative density
(gravity)/density is a live 4-20 mA.
float point counts as 2 7872 Station - Density Temperature - High Limit
7873 Station - Density Temperature - Override
applies. 7874 Station - Density Temperature - @ 4mA
7875 Station - Density Temperature - @ 20mA
7876 Station - Density Correction Factor

Notes:
* Various factors used by * 7877 Station - Densitometer - Constant #1
various vendors of digital K0/D0.
densitometers.
* 7878 Station - Densitometer - Constant #2
K1/T0.
K2/Tcoef.
K18/Tcal/Tc.
K19/Pcoef/Kt1.
K20A/Pcal/Kt2.
K20B/Kt3.
K21A/Pc.
K21B/KP1.
Kr. (For UGC densitometers: Kr/KP2.)
Kj. (For UGC densitometers: Kj/KP3.)
22/26.71+ w 05/99 6-23

# 7888 Weight of Water

3
Lbm/Bbl or Kg/m .
22/26.71+ - This database # 7889 Relative Density (Gravity) Rate of Change
# 7890 Line Pack Delay
Revision 22/26.71+ for 3
Net Bbls or m .
Turbine/Positive
Displacement Liquid Flow # 7891 Local Atmospheric Pressure
Metering Systems, with Absolute pressure units.
7892 Spare
Notes: to
# Miscellaneous conversion 7900 Spare
factors and constants.
6-24 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
6.11. Prover 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data

7901 Prover - Inlet (Left) Temperature
function code 03 for all 7902 Prover - Outlet (Right) Temperature
7903 Prover - Temperature in Use
writes. Note that the index 7904 Prover - Inlet (Left) Pressure
7905 Prover - Outlet (Right) Pressure
floating point variable which 7906 Prover - Pressure in Use
7907 Prover - Plenum Pressure
accessed as a complete unit. Compact Prover.
You cannot read or write a 7908 Prover - Run Time
point in the normal Omni 7909 Prove Volume - Master Prove
Modbus mode.
7910 Prove Volume - Test Meter
7911 Compact Prover - Calculated Plenum Pressure
Modicon Compatible
7912 Spare
address of the variable still to
applies.
7916 Spare
7917 Compact Prover - Invar Rod Temperature

Small Volume Prover.
7918 Prove - Overtravel
3
Bbls/m .
6.11.1. Configuration Data for Prover
7919 Prover - Volume

3
Bbls/m .
7920 Prover - Diameter
Inches/mm.
7921 Prover - Wall Thickness
Inches/mm.
7922 Prover - Modulus of Elasticity
7923 Prover - Coefficient of Cubic Expansion
7924 Prover - Base Pressure
7925 Prover - Temperature Stability Limits
7926 Prove & Meter - Temperature Deviation
7927 Prove Run - Count Deviation %
Counts or meter factor [(Maximum Deviation - Minimum Deviation) / Minimum Deviation] x
100%.
7928 Prove Meter Factor - Deviation % from Average of Historical Meter
Factors
22/26.71+ w 05/99 6-25

7929 Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - Low Limit

Application Revision 7930 Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - High Limit
7931 Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - Override
Revision 22/26.71+ for 7932 Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - @ 4mA
Turbine/Positive
7933 Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - @ 20mA
versions are considered. 7934 Prover - Temperature Outlet (Right) - Low Limit
to
7938 Prover - Temperature Outlet (Right) - @ 20mA
7939 Prover - Pressure Inlet (Left) - Low Limit

to
7943 Prover - Pressure Inlet (Left) - @ 20mA
7944 Prover - Pressure Outlet (Right) - Low Limit

to
7948 Prover - Pressure Outlet (Right) - @ 20mA
7949 Prove Meter Factor - Deviation % from Base Curve

7950 Prover - Linear Thermal Coefficient
7951 Compact Prover - Plenum Pressure Constant

7952 Compact Prover - Plenum Deadband %
7953 Compact Prover - Plenum Pressure @ 4mA
7954 Compact Prover - Plenum Pressure @ 20mA
7955 Prover - Volume Upstream

7956 Prover - Relative Density (Specific Gravity) @ 60 F / Density @
Reference Temperature
7957 Meter Temperature - @ Time of Last Implemented Meter Factor

7958 Meter Pressure - @ Time of Last Implemented Meter Factor
6-26 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
6.11.2. Last Prove Data

7959 Prover - Volume
function code 03 for all 7960 Prover - Diameter
reads, 06 for single writes or Inches/mm.
7961 Prover - Wall Thickness
Inches/mm.
refers to the complete 7962 Prover - Modulus of Elasticity
7963 Prover - Coefficient of Cubic Expansion
16- bit registers. It must be 7964 Prover - K Factor
7965 Prover - Master Meter K Factor
point in the normal Omni 7966 Prover - Previous Flowrate @ Previous Meter Factor
Modbus mode.
Modicon Compatible 6.11.3. Data Rejected During Prove

point count only, each IEEE The following refers to the data rejected during Prove Run #3. The same data is
float point counts as 2 st nd
available for the Last, 1 and 2 Prove Runs at the following addresses:
applies.
7967 Prove - 3rd Run - Meter Temperature
7968 Prove - 3rd Run - Meter Pressure
7969 Prove - 3rd Run - Prover Temperature
7970 Prove - 3rd Run - Prover Pressure
7971 Prove - 3rd Run - Prove Time
Seconds.
7972 Prove - 3rd Run - Meter Factor
nd
7973 Prove - 2 Run - Meter Temperature
to
7978 Prove - 2nd Run - Meter Factor
st
to
7984 Prove - 1st Run - Meter Factor
7985 Prove - Last Run - Meter Temperature

to
7990 Prove - Last Run - Meter Factor
22/26.71+ w 05/99 6-27

6.11.4. Prove Run Data

Application Revision The following data refers to Prove Run #1. The same data is available for all 10
22/26.71+ - This database prove runs at the following addresses:
Turbine/Positive
Displacement Liquid Flow 7991 Prove - 1st Run - Meter Temperature
Metering Systems, with 7992 Prove - 1st Run - Meter Pressure
Both US and metric unit 7993 Prove - 1st Run - Prover Temperature
versions are considered. 7994 Prove - 1st Run - Prover Pressure
7995 Prove - 1st Run - Prove Time
Seconds
7996 Prove - 1st Run - Meter Factor
7997 Prove - 2nd Run - Meter Temperature

to
8002 Prove - 2nd Run - Meter Factor
8003 Prove - 3rd Run - Meter Temperature

to
8008 Prove - 3rd Run - Meter Factor
8009 Prove - 4th Run - Meter Temperature

to
8014 Prove - 4th Run - Meter Factor

to

to
th
8026 Prove - 6 Run - Meter Factor
th
to

to
6-28 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus

writes. Note that the index 8045 Prove - 10th Run - Meter Temperature
to
floating point variable which 8050 Prove - 10th Run - Meter Factor
partial variable. Each floating 6.11.5. Prove Average Data
Modbus mode. 8051 Prove - Average Counts
8052 Prove - Average Meter Temperature
Modicon Compatible 8053 Prove - Average Meter Pressure
8054 Prove - Average Prover Temperature
float point counts as 2 8055 Prove - Average Prover Pressure
address of the variable still 8056 Prove - Average Relative Density (SG) @ 60 F / Density @ Reference
applies. Temperature
8057 Prove - Average Flow Rate
8058 Prove - % Deviation Between Runs
8059 Prove - CTSP

Prover Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on Steel.
8060 Prove - CPSP
Prover Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on Steel.
8061 Prove - CTLP
Prover Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on Liquid.
8062 Prove - CPLP
Prover Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on Liquid.
8063 Prove - CCFP
Prover Combined Correction Factor.
8064 Prove - Corrected Prover Volume
Base Volume of Prover x [8063].
8065 Prove - Metered Volume
8066 Prove - CTLM
Meter Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on Liquid.
8067 Prove - CPLM
Meter Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on Liquid.
8068 Prove - CCFM
Meter Combined Correction Factor.
8069 Prove - Corrected Meter Volume

Meter Volume [8065] x [8068].
8070 Prove - Meter Base Flow Rate
22/26.71+ w 05/99 6-29

8071 Prove - Out of Limits Meter Factor - Deviation % from Base Meter
Factor Curve - Test 1
Maximum percent of deviation allowed between the calculated meter factor normalized to
the prove base flow rate and the meter factor obtained from the base meter factor curve.
corresponds to Application 8072 Prove - Out of Limits Meter Factor - Deviation % from Average
Revision 22/26.71+ for Historical Meter Factor - Test 2
Turbine/Positive Maximum percent of deviation allowed between the calculated meter factor normalized to
Displacement Liquid Flow the prove base flow rate and the average of the historical meter factors.
Both US and metric unit 8073 Prove - Average Flowmeter Frequency
versions are considered. Hertz.
8074 Prove - Prover Compressibility F Factor
8075 Prove - Meter Compressibility F Factor
8076 Prove - Average Observed Density
8077 Prove - Average Relative Density (SG) @ 60 F / Density @ Reference
Temperature
8078 Prove - Average Meter Factor of Runs
8079 Prove - Average Time for Runs
6.11.6. Master Meter Prove Run Data

The following data refers to Master Meter Prove Run #1. The same data is
available for all 10 prove runs at the following addresses:
8080 Master Meter Prove - 1st Run - Volume -

8081 Master Meter Prove - 1st Run - Meter Factor
8082 Master Meter Prove - 1st Run - CTL
Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on Liquid.
8083 Master Meter Prove - 1st Run - CPL
Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on Liquid.
8084 Master Meter Prove - 1st Run - CCF
Combined Correction Factor.
8085 Master Meter Prove - 1st Run - Corrected Volume
8086 Master Meter Prove - 1st Run - Proved Meter - Volume
st
8087 Master Meter Prove - 1 Run - Proved Meter - CTL
Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on Liquid.
st
8088 Master Meter Prove - 1 Run - Proved Meter - CPL
Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on Liquid.
st
8089 Master Meter Prove - 1 Run - Proved Meter - CCF
Combined Correction Factor.
8090 Master Meter Prove - 1st Run - Corrected Meter Volume
8091 Master Meter Prove - 1st Run - Meter Factor
nd
8092 Master Meter Prove - 2 Run - Volume
to
nd
8103 Master Meter Prove - 2 Run - Meter Factor
6-30 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
8104 Master Meter Prove - 3rd Run - Volume

8115 Master Meter Prove - 3rd Run - Meter Factor
writes. Note that the index 8116 Master Meter Prove - 4th Run - Volume
to
floating point variable which 8127 Master Meter Prove - 4th Run - Meter Factor
partial variable. Each floating 8128 Master Meter Prove - 5th Run - Volume
Modbus mode. 8139 Master Meter Prove - 5th Run - Meter Factor
Modicon Compatible
Mode - For the purpose of 8140 Master Meter Prove - 6th Run - Volume
to
registers. The starting 8151 Master Meter Prove - 6th Run - Meter Factor
applies.
8152 Master Meter Prove - 7th Run - Volume

to
8163 Master Meter Prove - 7th Run - Meter Factor

to
8175 Master Meter Prove - 8th Run - Meter Factor

to
th
8187 Master Meter Prove - 9 Run - Meter Factor
th
8188 Master Meter Prove - 10 Run - Volume
to
8199 1 Master Meter Prove - 0th Run - Meter Factor
22/26.71+ w 05/99 6-31

6.11.7. Proving Series Data

Application Revision This data applies when Two-Series Bi-directional Pipe Prover (Prover Type =
22/26.71+ - This database 5) is selected (see 2.13.2. Prover Settings in Volume 3). A completed prove is
the result of two consecutive prove sequences. The resultant meter factor is the
Turbine/Positive average of the meter factor obtained from the first series and the meter factor
Displacement Liquid Flow obtained from the second series.
Both US and metric unit 8200 Proving Series #1 - Average Counts
8201 Proving Series #1 - Average Meter Temperature
8202 Proving Series #1 - Average Meter Pressure
8203 Proving Series #1 - Average Prover Temperature
8204 Proving Series #1 - Average Prover pressure
8205 Proving Series #1 - Average Relative Density (Gravity) @ 60 F or
8206 Proving Series #1 - Average Flow Rate
8207 Proving Series #1 - CTSP

Prover Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on Steel.
8208 Proving Series #1 - CPSP
Prover Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on Steel.
8209 Proving Series #1 - CTLP
Prover Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on Liquid.
8210 Proving Series #1 - CPLP
Prover Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on Liquid.
8211 Proving Series #1 - Average Net Prover Volume
8212 Proving Series #1 - CTLM
Meter Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on Liquid.
8213 Proving Series #1 - CPLM
Meter Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on Liquid.
8214 Proving Series #1 - Average Gross Meter Volume
8215 Proving Series #1 - Net Meter Volume
8216 Proving Series #1 - Prover Volume @ Prover Pressure

8217 Proving Series #2 - Prover Volume @ Prover Pressure
8218 Proving Series #1 - Meter Factor

8219 Proving Series #2 - Meter Factor
6-32 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
6.11.8. Proving Meter Data

8220 Proving Meter - Relative Density (Specific Gravity)
function code 03 for all 8221 Proving Meter - Density Temperature
8222 Proving Meter - API Relative Density (SG) @ 60 F / API Relative
writes. Note that the index Density (SG) @ Reference Temperature
number for each variable 8223 Proving Meter - Relative Density (Specific Gravity) @ 60 F
occupies the space of two 8224 Proving Meter - Temperature
accessed as a complete unit. 8225 Proving Meter - Pressure
You cannot read or write a 8226 Proving Meter - Flow Rate
point variable counts as one 8227 Proving Meter - Transducer Density
point in the normal Omni 8228 Proving Meter - Relative Density (Specific Gravity) @ 60 F / Density @
Modbus mode.
8229 Proving Meter - API Relative Density (SG) @ 60 F / API Relative
Modicon Compatible Density (SG) @ Reference Temperature
8230 Proving Meter - Gross Flow Rate
8231 Proving Meter - Meter Factor - Last
applies. 8232 Proving Meter - Meter Factor - Last Deviation
8233 Proving Meter - Meter Factor - 2nd Last
8234 Proving Meter - Meter Factor - 2nd Last Deviation
8235 Proving Meter - Meter Factor - 3rd Last
8236 Proving Meter - Meter Factor - 3rd Last Deviation
8237 Proving Meter - Meter Factor - 4th Last
8238 Proving Meter - Meter Factor - 4th Last Deviation
th
8248 Proving Meter - Meter Factor - 9 Last Deviation
th
8249 Proving Meter - Meter Factor - 10 Last
8251 Spare
to
8500 Spare
22/26.71+ w 05/99 6-33

6.12. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE

Floating Point Data
Application Revision The following data refers to Meter Run #1. The same data is available for all
22/26.71+ - This database meter runs at the following addresses:
Revision 22/26.71+ for o Meter Run #1 @ 8501 through 8599
Turbine/Positive
Displacement Liquid Flow o Meter Run #2 @ 8601 through 8699
Metering Systems, with o Meter Run #3 @ 8701 through 8799
Both US and metric unit o Meter Run #4 @ 8801 through 8899
Note: See 5n50 and 5850

for matching totalizer data. 6.12.1. Meter Run #1 - Previous Batch Averages
8501 Previous Batch n - Average Temperature

Previous Batch Average - 8502 Previous Batch n - Average Pressure
Refers to data stored at the
8503 Previous Batch n - Average Density
time of the last Batch End
command. It will remain valid 8504 Previous Batch n - Average Volume Correction Factor
until the next batch end. This
is the data that should be
8505 Previous Batch n - Average Correction Factor for Pressure on Liquid
used by SCADA or MMIs to 8506 Previous Batch n - Average Meter factor
build Monthly or Batch
Reports.
8507 Previous Batch n - Average Relative Density (Specific Gravity)
8508 Previous Batch n - Average Relative Density (SG) @ 60 F / Density
@ Reference Temperature
Note: See 3n34 and out of
order points at 8586.
8509 Previous Batch n - Average Density Temperature
8510 Previous Batch n - Average Density Pressure
8511 Previous Batch n - Average Density Correction Factor
8512 Previous Batch n - Average Unfactored Density
8513 Previous Batch n - Average K Factor
8514 Previous Batch n - Average %BS&W
Percent of Brine, Sediment and Water (%BS&W)
8515 Previous Batch n - Average API60
8516 Previous Batch n - Average Gross Flow Rate
8517 Spare
to
8519 Spare
6-34 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
6.12.2. Meter Run #1 - Previous Hours Averages

8520 Previous Hours - Average Temperature
function code 03 for all 8521 Previous Hours - Average Pressure
8522 Previous Hours - Average Density
writes. Note that the index 8523 Previous Hours - Average Relative Density (Specific Gravity) @ 60 F /
number for each variable Density @ Reference Temperature
floating point variable which 8524 Previous Hours - Average K Factor
occupies the space of two 8525 Previous Hours - Average Meter Factor
accessed as a complete unit. 8526 Previous Hours - Average %S&W
You cannot read or write a Percent of Sediment and Water (%S&W)
Modbus mode. 8527 Spare
to
Modicon Compatible 8530 Spare
address of the variable still 6.12.3. Meter Run #1 - Previous Days Averages
applies.
8531 Previous Days - Average Temperature

Previous Hours Average -
Refers to data stored at the 8532 Previous Days - Average Pressure
end of the last hour. It is valid 8533 Previous Days - Average Density
for one hour and is then
overwritten. This is the data 8534 Previous Days - Average Volume Correction Factor
that should be used by 8535 Previous Days - Average Correction Factor for Pressure on Liquid
SCADA or MMIs which need
hourly averages. 8536 Previous Days - Average Meter Factor
8537 Previous Days - Average Relative Density (Specific Gravity)
8538 Previous Days - Average Relative Density (SG) 60 F / Density @
Previous Days Average -
Refers to data stored at the Reference Temperature
end of the contract day. It is 8539 Previous Days - Average Density Temperature
valid for 24 hours and
overwritten at the day start 8540 Previous Days - Average Density Pressures
hour. This is the data that 8541 Previous Days - Average Density Correction Factor
should be used by SCADA or
MMIs to build daily reports. 8542 Previous Days - Average Unfactored density
8543 Previous Days - Average K Factor
8544 Spare
8545 Spare
8546 Previous Days - Average Gross Flow Rate

8547 Previous Days Flow Weighted Average BS&W
8548 Spare
22/26.71+ w 05/99 6-35

8549 Previous Days - Gross (IV) in Float Format

3
Bbls/m .
22/26.71+ - This database 8550 Previous Days - Net (GSV) in Float Format
3
corresponds to Application Bbls/m .
8551 Previous Days - Mass in Float Format
Turbine/Positive
Klbs/ton.
Metering Systems, with 8552 Previous Days - Net (NSV) in Float Format
3
Meter Factor Linearization. Bbls/m .
8553 Previous Days - Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature in Float Format
INFO - The indicated data

(8501-8599) refers to Meter 8554 Spare
Run #1. The same data is 8555 Spare
available for all meter runs at
the following addresses:
Meter Run #1:
8501 through 8599
Meter Run #2:
6.12.4. Meter Run #1 - Statistical Moving Window
8601 through 8699 Averages of Transducer Inputs
Meter Run #3:
8701 through 8799
Meter Run #4: 8556 Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Temperature
8801 through 8899 8557 Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Pressure
8558 Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Density
Note: See 5n50 and 5850 8559 Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Density Temperature
for matching totalizer data.
8560 Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Density Pressure
6.12.5. Meter Run #1 - Miscellaneous In Progress

Averages
8561 In Progress - Density Correction Factor - Batch Average

8562 In Progress - Density Correction Factor - Daily Average
8563 In Progress - Unfactored Density - Batch Average

8564 In Progress - Unfactored Density - Daily Average
8565 Spare
to
8569 Spare
6-36 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
8570 In Progress - Hourly Average - Temperature

INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE 8571 In Progress - Hourly Average - Pressure
8572 In Progress - Hourly Average - Density
function code 03 for all 8573 In Progress - Hourly Average - Relative Density (Specific Gravity) @
reads, 06 for single writes or 60 F / Density @ Reference Temperature
writes. Note that the index 8574 In Progress - Hourly Average - K Factor
number for each variable 8575 In Progress - Hourly Average - Meter Factor
floating point variable which 8576 In Progress - Hourly Average - %S&W
occupies the space of two Percent of Sediment and Water content in product (%S&W)
partial variable. Each floating 8577 Spare
point in the normal Omni 8578 Spare
Modbus mode.
Modicon Compatible 8579 In Progress - Batch Average - Gross Flow Rate

address of the variable still 8580 Spare
applies. 8581 Spare
8582 In Progress - Daily Average - Gross Flow Rate

8583 In Progress - Daily Average - %S&W
Percent of Sediment and Water content in product (%S&W)
8584 In Progress - Batch Average - %S&W

Percent of Sediment and Water content in product (%S&W)
8585 Spare
22/26.71+ w 05/99 6-37

6.12.6. Meter Run #1 - Previous Batch Quantities

8586 Previous Batch n - Gross (IV) in Float Format
Revision 22/26.71+ for 8587 Previous Batch n - Net (GSV) in Float Format
Turbine/Positive
8588 Previous Batch n - Mass in Float Format
Metering Systems, with 8589 Previous Batch n - Net (NSV) in Float Format
8590 Previous Batch n - Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature
versions are considered. 8591 Previous Batch n - Correction Factor for Percent of Sediment and
Water Content (CSW)
INFO - The indicated data

8592 Previous Batch n - Flowing Time
(8501-8599) refers to Meter 8593 Previous Batch n - Average Flow Rate
Run #1. The same data is
available for all meter runs at
the following addresses:
Meter Run #1: 8594 Current Density @ Meter Conditions
8501 through 8599 This point corresponds to Miscellaneous Live or Calculated Data (see below). See
Meter Run #2: point 7n09 for density at densitometer conditions.
8601 through 8699
Meter Run #3:
8701 through 8799
Meter Run #4: 8595 Previous Batch n - Combined Correction Factor (CCF)
8801 through 8899
Previous Batch 8596 Spare

Quantities - Refers to data
stored at the time of the last
Batch End command. It will
remain valid until the next
batch end. These variables
are floating point duplicates 6.12.7. Miscellaneous Live or Calculated Data
of integer data at 5n50 area.
These points are for MMI or
SCADA retrieval, not for
Batch Recalculation.
8597 Meter - Current Percent of Sediment and Water Content (%S&W)
8598 Meter - Current Correction Factor for Percent of Sediment and Water
Content (CSW)
Note: See 8501 area for
other Previous Batch data.
8599 Meter - Current Volume Correction Factor (VCF) @ 2nd Reference
Temperature
8600 Spare
to
8948 Spare
6-38 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
6.12.8. Station - Previous Batch Average Data

8949 Station - Previous Daily - Gross (IV) in Float Format
function code 03 for all 8950 Station - Previous Daily - Net (GSV) in Float Format
8951 Station - Previous Daily - Mass in Float Format
writes. Note that the index 8952 Station - Previous Daily - Net (NSV) in Float Format
8953 Station - Previous Daily - 2nd Net @ Reference Temperature in Float
floating point variable which Format
You cannot read or write a 8954 Spare
Modbus mode.
Modicon Compatible
Mode - For the purpose of 8986 Station - Previous Batch - Gross (IV) in Float Format
point count only, each IEEE 8987 Station - Previous Batch - Net (GSV) in Float Format
registers. The starting 8988 Station - Previous Batch - Mass in Float Format
address of the variable still 8989 Station - Previous Batch - Net (NSV) in Float Format
applies.
8990 Station - Previous Batch - Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature
8991 Spare
to
9000 Spare
22/26.71+ w 05/99 6-39

Modbus
7. ASCII Text Data Buffers (9001 - 9499)
7.1. Custom Report Templates

INFO - These ASCII text These are ASCII text files which serve as a format template for certain printed
buffers are accessed using reports.
for reads and 66 for writes.
The index number for each 9001 Report Template - Snapshot / Interval
9000 type variable refers to
the complete text buffer 9002 Report Template - Batch
which may be as big as 8192
9003 Report Template - Daily
bytes. Data is transmitted or
received as multiple 9004 Report Template - Prove
transmissions of 128 byte
packets (see Volume 3,
Chapter 4)
9005 Spare
to
9100 Spare
7.2. Previous Batch Reports

Copies of the last 8 Batch Reports are stored.
9101 Batch Report - Last

9102 Batch Report - 2nd Last
9103 Batch Report - 3rd Last
9104 Batch Report - 4th Last
th
9105 Batch Report - 5 Last
th
9106 Batch Report - 6 Last
9109 Spare
to
9200 Spare
22/26.71+ w 05/99 7-1

Chapter 7 ASCII Text Data Buffers (9001- 9499)
7.3. Previous Prove Reports

Application Revision Copies of the last 8 Prove Reports are stored.
Revision 22/26.71+ for 9201 Prove Report - Last
Turbine/Positive
Displacement Liquid Flow 9202 Prove Report - 2nd Last
Metering Systems, with 9203 Prove Report - 3rd Last
Both US and metric unit 9204 Prove Report - 4th Last
9205 Prove Report - 5th Last
9209 Spare
to
9300 Spare
7.4. Previous Daily Reports

Copies of the last 8 Daily Reports are stores
9301 Previous Days Report - Last

9302 Previous Days Report - 2nd Last
9303 Previous Days Report - 3rd Last
9304 Previous Days Report - 4th Last
9309 Spare
to
9400 Spare
7.5. Last Snapshot Report
9401 Last Local Snapshot / Interval Report
7-2 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
7.6. Miscellaneous Report Buffer

INFO - These ASCII text The following buffer is used to retrieve miscellaneous reports. Report data is
buffers are accessed using loaded into this buffer depending on which bit is written to integer point 15129.
for reads and 66 for writes.
Reports which are retrieved using this buffer are:
The index number for each o Current Snapshot Report
9000 type variable refers to
the complete text buffer o Alarm Report
which may be as big as 8192 o Audit Trail Report
bytes. Data is transmitted or
received as multiple o Status Report
transmissions of 128 byte
packets (see Volume 3,
o Product File Report
Chapter 4) Text Archive Data defined by integers 15127 and 15128 is also retrieved using
this buffer.
9402 Miscellaneous Report Buffer
9403 Spare
to
13000 Spare
22/26.71+ w 05/99 7-3

Modbus
8. Flow Computer Configuration Data

(13001 - 18999)
The following data is especially critical to the correct operation of the flow
CAUTION! computer. Any modifications to this data while operating the flow computer
Flow computer configuration could cause unpredictable results which could cause measurement or control
data is especially critical to errors. Users are encouraged to consult with Omni before manipulating
the correct operation of the configuration data directly via a serial port or programmable variable
flow computer. Any
modifications to this data statements.
while operating the flow
computer could cause
unpredictable results which
could cause measurement or 8.1. Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit
control errors. Users are
encouraged to consult with Integer Data
before manipulating
configuration data directly via
a serial port or programmable
8.1.1. Meter Run Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data
variable statements.
13001 Meter Run #1 - Flow I/O Point

are accessed using Modbus 13002 Meter Run #1 - Temperature I/O Point
function code 03 for reads, 13003 Meter Run #1 - Temperature Type
06 for single writes and 16 0=DIN RTD; 1=Amer RTD; 2=4-20mA/Honeywell.
13004 Meter Run #1 - Pressure I/O Point
13005 Meter Run #1 - Density I/O Point
13006 Meter Run #1 - Density Type
corresponds to Application 1=API Relative Density (SG); 2=Relative Density (SG); 3=gr/cc; 4=Solartron; 5=Sarasota;
Revision 22/26.71+ for 6=UGC.
Turbine/Positive 13007 Meter Run #1 - Density Temperature I/O Point
Metering Systems, with 13008 Meter Run #1 - Density Temperature Type
Meter Factor Linearization. 0=DIN RTD; 1=Amer RTD; 2=4-20mA/Honeywell.
Both US and metric unit 13009 Meter Run #1 - Density Press I/O Point
13010 Meter Run #1 - Density
0=Flowing; 1=Reference.
13011 Spare
13012 Spare
13013 Meter Run #1 - Flowmeter Dual Pulse Fidelity

0=No; 1=Yes.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 8-1

Chapter 8 Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001- 18999)

to
CAUTION! 13023 Meter Run #2 - Density
Flow computer configuration
data is especially critical to
the correct operation of the
flow computer. Any
13024 Spare
modifications to this data
while operating the flow 13025 Spare
could cause measurement or
encouraged to consult with
before manipulating
a serial port or programmable 13027 Meter Run #3 - Flow I/O Point
to
13037 Spare
13038 Spare

to
13050 Spare
13051 Spare
8-2 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
8.1.2. Prover Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data
13053 Prover - Inlet (Left) Temperature - I/O Point

13054 Prover - Inlet (Left) Temperature - Type
0=DIN RTD; 1=Amer RTD; 2=4-20mA/Honeywell.
13055 Prover - Outlet (Right) Temperature - I/O Point
13056 Prover - Outlet (Right) Temperature - Type
13057 Prover - Inlet (Left) Pressure - I/O Point
13058 Prover - Outlet (Right) Pressure - I/O Point
13059 Compact Prover - Plenum Pressure - I/O Point
13060 Spare
to
13062 Spare
13063 Relative Density (Gravity) Sample Time

Seconds.
13064 Station - Pressure - I/O Point
13065 Station - Density - I/O Point
13066 Station - Density - Type
1=API Relative Density (SG); 2=Relative Density (SG); 3=grams/cc; 4=Solartron;
5=Sarasota; 6=UGC.
13067 Station - Density Temperature - I/O Point
13068 Station - Density Temperature - Type
13069 Spare
to
13073 Spare
22/26.71+ w 05/99 8-3

8.1.3. General Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit

Integer Data
corresponds to Application 13074 Flow Computer Type
Revision 22/26.71+ for 0=3000; 1=6000.
Turbine/Positive 13075 Number of A Combo Modules Installed
Metering Systems, with 13076 Number of B Combo Modules Installed
Meter Factor Linearization. 13077 Number of C Combo Modules Installed
versions are considered. 13078 Number of Digital Modules Installed
13079 Number of Serial Modules Installed
13080 Number of E Combo Modules Installed
13081 Number of H Combo Modules Installed
13082 Number of ED Combo Modules Installed
13083 Spare
13084 Spare
8.1.4. Serial Port Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data
13085 Serial Port #1 - Port Type

0=Printer; 1=Modbus.
13086 Serial Port #1 - ID
Read only point which reports back the number of the port you are connected to.
13087 Serial Port #1 - Baud Rate
300-38400 bps.
13088 Serial Port #1 - Data Bits
7 or 8.
13089 Serial Port #1 - Stop Bits
0, 1 or 2.
13090 Serial Port #1 - Parity
O, E, N.
13091 Serial Port #1 - Transmit Key Delay
0=Ohms; 1=50 msec; 2=100 msec; 3=150 msec.
13092 Serial Port #1 - Modbus ID
0-247.
13093 Serial Port #1 - Protocol Type
0=RTU; 1=ASCII; 2=RTU Modem.
13094 Serial Port #1 - Enable CRC Checking
0=No CRC, 1=CRC check.
13095 Serial Port #1 - Modicon Compatible
0=Omni Normal Mode; 1=Modicon 984 Mode.
8-4 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus

CAUTION! 13098 Serial Port #2 - Stop Bits
the correct operation of the 13100 Serial Port #2 - Transmit Key Delay
flow computer. Any
13101 Serial Port #2 - Modbus ID
while operating the flow 13102 Serial Port #2 - Protocol Type
computer could cause 0=Modbus RTU; 1=Modbus ASCII; 2=Modbus RTU Modem (Relaxed Timing).
control errors. Users are 13104 Serial Port #2 - Modicon Compatible
encouraged to consult with 0=Omni Normal Mode; 1=Modicon 984 Mode.
before manipulating
configuration data directly via 13105 Spare
13106 Number of Decimal Places on Prove Report for Factors
13107 Number of Decimal Places on Batch Report for Factors
for multiple register writes. 13109 Serial Port #3 - Data Bits
13112 Serial Port #3 - Transmit Delay
13113 Serial Port #3 - Modbus or Node ID
0=Modbus RTU; 1=Modbus ASCII; 2=Modbus RTU Modem (Relaxed Timing).
0=Omni Normal Mode; 1=Modicon 984 Mode.
13117 Spare
to
13119 Spare

13124 Serial Port #4 - Transmit Delay
13126 Serial Port #4 - Modbus or Node ID
0=Modbus RTU; 1=Modbus ASCII; 2=Modbus RTU Modem (Relaxed Timing); 3=Allen-
Bradley Full Duplex DF1; 4=Allen-Bradley Half Duplex.
0=Omni, 1=984 compatible.
or
13128 Serial Port #4 Allen Bradley Error Check Type
If Allen-Bradley Protocol selected above as protocol type: 0=CRC; 1=BCC error checking.
22/26.71+ w 05/99 8-5

8.1.5. Proportional Integral Derivative (PID)

Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data
corresponds to Application 13129 PID Loop #1 - I/O Point Assignment - Remote Setpoint
Revision 22/26.71+ for 13130 PID Loop #1 - I/O Point Assignment - Primary Variable
Turbine/Positive
Displacement Liquid Flow 13131 PID Loop #1 - I/O Point Assignment - Secondary Variable
Metering Systems, with 13132 PID Loop #1 - Primary Action
0=Forward; 1=Reverse.
versions are considered. 13133 PID Loop #1 - Secondary Action
0=Forward; 1=Reverse.
13134 PID Loop #1 - Error Select
0=Low; 1=High.
13135 PID Loop #1 - Startup Mode
0=Last state; 1=Manual.
13136 PID Loop #2 - I/O Point Assignment - Remote Setpoint

to

to

to
8.1.6. Auxiliary Input I/O Point Assignment

Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data
13157 Auxiliary Input #1 - I/O Point Assignment

8-6 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
8.1.7. Programmable Logic Controller Configuration 16-

Bit Integer Data
CAUTION!
13161 PLC Group #1 - Starting Address
Flow computer configuration Allen-Bradley PLC-2 Translation Tables.
the correct operation of the 13162 PLC Group #1 - Index 1
flow computer. Any 13163 PLC Group #1 - Number of Points 1
while operating the flow 13164 PLC Group #1 - Index 2
computer could cause 13165 PLC Group #1 - Number of Points 2
could cause measurement or 13166 PLC Group #1 - Index 3
control errors. Users are 13167 PLC Group #1 - Number of Points 3
Omni Flow Computers, Inc. 13168 PLC Group #1 - Index 4
before manipulating
13169 PLC Group #1 - Number of Points 4
a serial port or programmable 13170 PLC Group #1 - Index 5
13172 PLC Group #1 - Index 6
INFO - These short integers 13173 PLC Group #1 - Number of Points 6
function code 03 for reads, 13174 PLC Group #1 - Index 7
06 for single writes and 16 13175 PLC Group #1 - Number of Points 7

to
22/26.71+ w 05/99 8-7


Application Revision 13228 PLC Group #3 - Index 1
to
Revision 22/26.71+ for 13258 PLC Group #3 - Index 16
Turbine/Positive
versions are considered. 13260 PLC Group #4 - Starting Address
to

to
13286 Spare
to
13292 Spare
8.1.8. Auxiliary Input Type Configuration 16-Bit Integer

Data
13293 Auxiliary Input #1 - Input Type

For points 13293-13296: 0=DIN; 1=Amer; 2=4-20mA.
13297 Spare
to
13299 Spare
8-8 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
8.1.9. Peer-to-Peer Setup Entries 16-Bit Integer Data
CAUTION!
13300 Peer-to-Peer - Current Master ID
Flow computer configuration Real-time. Shows current peer-to-peer master.
flow computer. Any
while operating the flow 13301 Reserved
computer could cause Used for debugging only.
encouraged to consult with 13302 Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #1 - Slave ID
before manipulating 13303 Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #1 - Read / Write
13304 Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #1 - Source Index
variable statements. 13305 Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #1 - Number of Points
13306 Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #1 - Destination Index
06 for single writes and 16 13307 Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #2 - Slave ID
for multiple register writes. to
13312 Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #3 - Slave ID

to

to

to

to

to
22/26.71+ w 05/99 8-9


Turbine/Positive
Metering Systems, with 13342 Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #9 - Slave ID
to
versions are considered. 13346 Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #9 - Destination Index

to

to

to

to

to

to

to
8-10 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
13382 Peer-to-Peer - Next Master ID

A non zero entry here turns on peer-to-peer mode.
CAUTION! 13383 Peer-to-Peer - Last Master In Sequence ID
Highest Modbus ID of the peer-to-peer masters, which represents the maximum number
of interlinked units.
the correct operation of the 13384 Peer-to-Peer - Retry Timer
flow computer. Any Number of 50 msec ticks between retries; default=3.
computer could cause 13385 Redundancy Mode Active
unpredictable results which 0=No; 1=Yes.
before manipulating
13386 Spare
configuration data directly via to
13395 Spare

are accessed using Modbus 8.1.10. Auxiliary Input Override Code Entries 16-Bit
06 for single writes and 16 Integer Data
13396 Auxiliary Input #1 - Override Code

13400 Spare
13401 Spare
8.1.11. Damping Factor Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data
13402 Damping Factor - Meter Run #1 - Temperature

13403 Damping Factor - Meter Run #1 - Pressure
13404 Damping Factor - Meter Run #1 - Density Temperature
13405 Damping Factor - Meter Run #1 - Density Pressure
13406 Spare
13407 Spare

22/26.71+ w 05/99 8-11

13412 Spare
Application Revision 13413 Spare
Turbine/Positive
Metering Systems, with 13415 Damping Factor - Meter Run #3 - Pressure
versions are considered. 13417 Damping Factor - Meter Run #3 - Density Pressure
13418 Spare
13419 Spare

13424 Damping Factor - Station - Density Temperature

13425 Damping Factor - Station - Density Pressure
13426 Damping Factor - Prover - Inlet (Left) Temperature

13427 Damping Factor - Prover - Outlet (Right) Temperature
13428 Damping Factor - Prover - Inlet (Left) Pressure
13429 Damping Factor - Prover - Outlet (Right) Pressure
13430 Damping Factor - Compact Prover - Plenum Pressure
13431 Spare
13432 Spare
13433 Damping Factor - Auxiliary Input #1

13437 Spare
to
13449 Spare
8-12 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
8.1.12. Insert/Delete Batch Stack 16-Bit Integer Data
CAUTION! 13450 Insert Batch Stack - Meter #1

13451 Insert Batch Stack - Meter #2
the correct operation of the 13452 Insert Batch Stack - Meter #3
flow computer. Any
13453 Insert Batch Stack - Meter #4
while operating the flow 13454 Insert Batch Stack - Station
could cause measurement or 13455 Delete Batch Stack - Meter #1
13456 Delete Batch Stack - Meter #2
Omni Flow Computers, Inc. 13457 Delete Batch Stack - Meter #3
before manipulating
13458 Delete Batch Stack - Meter #4
a serial port or programmable 13459 Delete Batch Stack - Station

are accessed using Modbus 8.1.13. Miscellaneous Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data
for multiple register writes. 13460 Remote Key Press
13461 Beep Counts
8.1.14. Proportional Integral Derivative (PID)

Redundancy Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data
13462 Redundancy - Master PID #1 - Valve Mode

Slave keeps copy of primary units settings in points 13462-13469 in case it becomes
master.
13463 Redundancy - Master PID #1 - Setpoint Mode
13470 Redundancy - Slave PID #1 - Valve Mode

13471 Redundancy - Slave PID #1 - Setpoint Mode
22/26.71+ w 05/99 8-13

13478 Spare
13499 Spare
Turbine/Positive
Metering Systems, with 8.1.15. Raw Data Archive Files 16-Bit Integer Data
Both US and metric unit The following entries are used to define the record structure of each Raw Data
Archive file.
13500 Archive 701 #1 - Starting Index

13501 Archive 701 #1 - Number of Points
to
13531 Archive 701 #16 - Number of points
13532 Spare
to
13539 Spare

to
13572 Spare
to
13579 Spare

to
13612 Spare
to
13619 Spare
8-14 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus

CAUTION! to
the correct operation of the 13651 Archive 704 #16 - Number of Points
flow computer. Any
13652 Spare
could cause measurement or to
13659 Spare
before manipulating
a serial port or programmable 13660 Archive 705 #1 - Starting Index
to
function code 03 for reads, 13691 Archive 705 #16 - Number of Points
13692 Spare
to
13699 Spare

to
13732 Spare
to
13739 Spare

to
13772 Spare
to
13779 Spare
22/26.71+ w 05/99 8-15


Application Revision 13781 Archive 708 #1 - Number of Points
to
Revision 22/26.71+ for 13810 Archive 708 #16 - Starting Index
Turbine/Positive
versions are considered. 13812 Spare
to
13819 Spare

to
13852 Spare
to
13859 Spare

to
13892 Spare
to
13899 Spare
8-16 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
13900 Archive 701 - Trigger Boolean

Points 13900-13909 contain the point numbers of the trigger points which cause the data
CAUTION! to be stored when the trigger goes from low to high.
data is especially critical to 13902 Archive 703 - Trigger Boolean
flow computer. Any
modifications to this data 13904 Archive 705 - Trigger Boolean
unpredictable results which 13906 Archive 707 - Trigger Boolean
encouraged to consult with 13908 Archive 709 - Trigger Boolean
before manipulating
13910 Spare
to
are accessed using Modbus 13919 Spare
*13920 Archive Run ?

* CAUTION! * 0=Stops archiving; 1=Starts archiving.
POTENTIAL FOR DATA *13921 Reconfigure Archive?

LOSS! Read Archive 0=No configuration allowed; 1=Configuration changes allowed.
documentation before
manipulating points 13920
and 13921.
13930 Alarm Archive 711 - #1 Starting Index
Points 13930-13961 are dummy read-only points which show the structure of the Alarm
Archive.
13931 Alarm Archive 711 - #1 Number of Points
to
13960 Alarm Archive 711 - #16 Starting Index
13961 Alarm Archive 711 - #16 Number of Points
13962 Audit Trail Archive 712 - #1 Starting Index

Points 13962-13993 are dummy read-only points which show the structure of the Audit
Trail.
13963 Audit Trail Archive 712 - #1 Number of Points
to
13992 Audit Trail Archive 712 - #16 Starting Index
13993 Audit Trail Archive 712 - #16 Number of Points
13994 Spare
to
14000 Spare
22/26.71+ w 05/99 8-17

8.2. Flow Computer Configuration 16-

Character ASCII String Data
Modbus function codes 03 14001 Boolean Statement #1025
for reads, and 16 for writes. to
Note that the index number
for each string refers to the 14048 Boolean Statement #1072
occupies the space of eight
accessed as a complete unit. 14049 OmniCom - Download Serial Number & File Name
partial string. Each string 14050 OmniCom - Download PC ID
14051 Variable Statement #7025

Modicon Compatible
Mode - For the purposes of to
point count only, each string 14098 Variable Statement #7072
still applies.
14099 Spare
14100 Station Total and Flow Rate Definition
14101 Comment String (Remarks) - Boolean Statement #1025

to
14148 Comment String (Remarks) - Boolean Statement #1072
14149 Printer Condense Mode String

Points 14149 & 14150 represent the hexadecimal ASCII version of what is actually sent to
the printer.
14150 Printer Uncondensed Mode String
14151 Comment String - Variable Statement #7025

to
14199 Spare
to
14200 Spare
8-18 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
14201 Boolean Statement #1073

to
CAUTION! 14216 Boolean Statement #1088
flow computer. Any
14217 Spare
while operating the flow to
14220 Spare
Omni Flow Computers, Inc. 14221 Variable Statement #7073
before manipulating
to
a serial port or programmable 14236 Variable Statement #7088

14237 Spare
Modbus function codes 03 to
for reads, and 16 for writes.
14240 Spare
for each string refers to the
occupies the space of eight
16-bit registers. It must be 14241 Comment String - Boolean Statement #1073
accessed as a complete unit. to
partial string. Each string 14256 Comment String - Boolean Statement #1088
14257 Spare
Modicon Compatible
Mode - For the purposes of to
point count only, each string 14260 Spare
still applies.

to
14277 Spare
to
14300 Spare
14301 Comment String - Assign - Digital to Analog Output #1

to
14312 Comment String - Assign - Digital to Analog Output #12
22/26.71+ w 05/99 8-19

14313 Spare
14320 Spare
Turbine/Positive
Metering Systems, with 14321 Comment String - Assign - Digital I/O Point #1
to
versions are considered. 14344 Comment String - Assign - Digital I/O Point #24
14360 Comment String - Assign - PID #1 - Primary Variable

14361 Comment String - Assign - PID #1 - Secondary Variable



14380 Comment String - Assign - Front Panel Counter A

14381 Comment String - Assign - Front Panel Counter B
14382 Comment String - Assign - Front Panel Counter C
14383 Spare
to
15000 Spare
8-20 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
8.3. Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit

Long Integer Data
15001 Assign - Analog Output #1
function code 03 for reads, to
15012 Assign - Analog Output #12
for multiple writes.
for each variable refers to
one complete long integer
which occupies the space of 15013 Digital Point #1 - Assignment
two 16-bit registers. It must 15014 Digital Point #1 - Timer - Delay On
be accessed as a complete 100 msec ticks.
unit. You cannot read or write
a partial 32-bit integer. Each 15015 Digital Point #1 - Timer - Delay Off
32-bit long integer counts as 100 msec ticks.
one point in the normal Omni 15016 Digital Point #1 - Timer - Pulse Width
Modbus mode.
10 msec ticks.
Modicon Compatible
point count only, each 32-bit 15017 Digital Point #2 - Assignment
integer counts as two to
address of the 32-bit integer 15020 Digital Point #2 - Timer - Pulse Width
still applies.
15021 Digital Point #3 - Assignment

to
15024 Digital Point #3 - Timer - Pulse Width
22/26.71+ w 05/99 8-21


to
CAUTION! 15028 Digital Point #4 - Timer - Pulse Width
flow computer. Any
Omni Flow Computers, Inc. 15033 Digital Point #6 - Assignment
before manipulating
to
a serial port or programmable 15036 Digital Point #6 - Timer - Pulse Width

accessed using Modbus to
for each variable refers to
one complete long integer 15041 Digital Point #8 - Assignment
which occupies the space of to
two 16-bit registers. It must
be accessed as a complete 15044 Digital Point #8 - Timer - Pulse Width
unit. You cannot read or write
a partial 32-bit integer. Each
one point in the normal Omni 15045 Digital Point #9 - Assignment
Modbus mode.
to
Modicon Compatible
registers. The starting 15049 Digital Point #10 - Assignment
address of the 32-bit integer to
still applies.

to

to
8-22 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus

Turbine/Positive
Metering Systems, with 15065 Digital Point #14 - Assignment
to
versions are considered. 15068 Digital Point #14 - Timer - Pulse Width

to

to

to

to

to

to

to
22/26.71+ w 05/99 8-23


to
CAUTION! 15100 Digital Point #22 - Timer - Pulse Width (10msec Ticks)
flow computer. Any
Omni Flow Computers, Inc. 15105 Digital Point #24 - Assignment
before manipulating
to
a serial port or programmable 15108 Digital Point #24 - Timer - Pulse Width

15109 Assign - Front Panel Counter A
accessed using Modbus 15110 Assign - Front Panel Counter B
15111 Assign - Front Panel Counter C
Note that the index number 15112 Max Comparitor - Error Counts per Batch - Meter #1
for each variable refers to Points 15112-15115 represent dual pulse error checks.
one complete long integer
which occupies the space of 15113 Max Comparitor - Error Counts per Batch - Meter #2
two 16-bit registers. It must 15114 Max Comparitor - Error Counts per Batch - Meter #3
be accessed as a complete
unit. You cannot read or write 15115 Max Comparitor - Error Counts per Batch - Meter #4
a partial 32-bit integer. Each
Modbus mode. 15116 Spare
to
Modicon Compatible 15119 Spare
address of the 32-bit integer 15120 Input / Output Status of Digital Points
still applies. Real-time, read-only! Indicates which points are inputs (1) and which are outputs (0).
Digital Point #1=Bit 0; Digital Point #24=Bit 23.
15121 Spare
15122 On/Off Status of Digital Points

Real-time, read-only! Digital Point #1=Bit 0; Digital Point #24=Bit 23: 0=Off, 1=On.
15123 Prove Run Number

15124 Proving Meter Number
15125 Prove Counts
8-24 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
15126 32-Bit Packed Status Word

Exclusively for OmniCom use (see Bit Layout below).
corresponds to Application LSB
Turbine/Positive B0 Not Proving B16 Flow Rate Unstable
Displacement Liquid Flow B1 Overtravel Forward B17 No Prove Permissive
Metering Systems, with B2 Launch Forward B18 Prover Seal Not OK
Meter Factor Linearization. st
B3 1 Detector B19 Meter Not Active
versions are considered. B4 In Flight Forward B20 Piston Downstream
nd
B5 2 Detector B21 Checking Plenum
B6 Overtravel Reverse B22 Master Meter Proving
B7 Launch Reverse B23 Check Stability Master Meter
B8 In Flight Reverse B24 Spare
B9 Prove Aborted B25 Spare
B10 Prove Complete B26 Power Fail Flag
B11 Checking Stability B27 End Batch #4
B12 Prover/Meter Temp/Press Limits B28 End Batch #3
B13 Prover Inactivity B29 End Batch #2
B14 Bad Repeatability B30 End Batch #1
B15 Prove Temperature Unstable B31 End Batch Station
MSB
15127 Text Archive Data - Number of Days to Retrieve

Exclusively for OmniCom use.
15128 Text Archive Data - Starting Date of Requested
Fixed date format (YYDDMM).
15129 32-Bit Command Word #1

LSB
B0 Prove Seal OK B16 Trial Prove Meter #4
B1 End Batch Station B17 Abort Prove in Progress
B2 End Batch Meter #1 B18 Send Snapshot to Printer
B3 End Batch Meter #2 B19 Load Snapshot to 9402
B4 End Batch Meter #3 B20 Load Alarms to 9402
B5 End Batch Meter #4 B21 Load Product File to 9402
B6 Spare B22 Load Status to 9402
B7 Request Prove Meter #1 B23 Load Audit Trail to 9402
B8 Request Prove Meter #2 B24 Spare
B11 Alarm Acknowledge B27 Spare
B12 Reset Power Fail Flag B28 Spare
B13 Trial Prove Meter #1 B29 Spare
MSB
22/26.71+ w 05/99 8-25

15130 32-Bit Command Word #2

CAUTION!
Flow computer configuration LSB
data is especially critical to Decrease PID #1 Setpoint @ 1% Decrease PID #1 Valve @ 1%
the correct operation of the B0 B16
Rate Rate
flow computer. Any
Increase PID #1 Setpoint @ 1% Increase PID #1 Valve @ 1%
modifications to this data B1 B17
Rate Rate
computer could cause Decrease PID #1 Setpoint @ Decrease PID #1 Valve @ 0.1%
B2 B18
unpredictable results which 0.1% Rate Rate
could cause measurement or Increase PID #1 Setpoint @ 0.1% Increase PID #1 Valve @ 0.1%
control errors. Users are B3 B19
Rate Rate
Omni Flow Computers, Inc. Decrease PID #2 Setpoint @ 1% Decrease PID #2 Valve @ 1%
B4 B20
before manipulating Rate Rate
configuration data directly via Increase PID #2 Setpoint @ 1% Increase PID #2 Valve @ 1%
B5 B21
a serial port or programmable Rate Rate
variable statements. Decrease PID #2 Setpoint @ Decrease PID #2 Valve @ 0.1%
B6 B22
0.1% Rate Rate
INFO - These 32-bit long Increase PID #2 Setpoint @ 0.1% Increase PID #2 Valve @ 0.1%
integer variables are B7 B23
Rate Rate
function code 03 for reads, Decrease PID #3 Setpoint @ 1% Decrease PID #3 Valve @ 1%
B8 B24
06 for single writes and 16 Rate Rate
for multiple writes. Increase PID #3 Setpoint @ 1% Increase PID #3 Valve @ 1%
B9 B25
Note that the index number Rate Rate
for each variable refers to Decrease PID #3 Setpoint @ Decrease PID #3 Valve @ 0.1%
one complete long integer B10 B26
0.1% Rate Rate
which occupies the space of
Increase PID #3 Setpoint @ 0.1% Increase PID #3 Valve @ 0.1%
two 16-bit registers. It must B11 B27
Rate Rate
be accessed as a complete
unit. You cannot read or write Decrease PID #4 Setpoint @ 1% Decrease PID #4 Valve @ 1%
B12 B28
a partial 32-bit integer. Each Rate Rate
32-bit long integer counts as Increase PID #4 Setpoint @ 1% Increase PID #4 Valve @ 1%
one point in the normal Omni B13 B29
Rate Rate
Modbus mode.
Decrease PID #4 Setpoint @ Decrease PID #4 Valve @ 0.1%
B14 B30
0.1% Rate Rate
Modicon Compatible Increase PID #4 Setpoint @ 0.1% Increase PID #4 Valve @ 0.1%
Mode - For the purpose of B15 B31
Rate Rate
integer counts as two MSB
still applies.
15131 Raw Process Input - Input #1

Real-time, read-only! 1kHz~1mA.
to
15154 Raw Process Input - Input #24
15155 Spare
to
15199 Spare
8-26 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
Archive Data File Size

Application Revision Information Only Data!
Revision 22/26.71+ for * 15200 Size of Text Archive File
Turbine/Positive
Displacement Liquid Flow * 15201 Size of Archive - File 701
Metering Systems, with * 15202 Size of Archive - File 702
Both US and metric unit * 15203 Size of Archive - File 703
* 15204 Size of Archive - File 704
Note: * 15206 Size of Archive - File 706
* Archive Data File Size - * 15207 Size of Archive - File 707
These variables contain
the number of bytes each * 15208 Size of Archive - File 708
archive file uses within
memory. They are
updated when the * 15210 Size of Archive - File 710
archiving process is
started and memory is
allocated. The maximum
memory that can be
15211 Spare
allocated to this group of
variables is a total of 15212 Spare
229359 bytes.
15213 Archive File n Failed

Indicates which archive file failed; e.g.: if archive files 1-4 occupy allocated memory, this
point will read 5 (n=1-10). (See points 2623, 15200-15210, and 15214.)
15214 Total Number of Archive Files Allocated
15215 Spare
to
17000 Spare
22/26.71+ w 05/99 8-27

8.4. Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit

IEEE Floating Point Data
17001 Analog Output #1 - @ 4mA

CAUTION! Engineering units which equal to 0%.
Flow computer configuration 17002 Analog Output #1 - @ 20mA
data is especially critical to Engineering units which equal to 100%.
to
flow computer. Any
modifications to this data 17023 Analog Output #12 - @ 4mA
17024 Analog Output #12 - @ 20mA
encouraged to consult with 17025 Pulses per Unit - Digital I/O #1
before manipulating
to
configuration data directly via 17048 Pulses per Unit - Digital I/O #24
17049 Pulses per Unit - Front Panel Counter A

Floating Point variables are 17050 Pulses per Unit - Front Panel Counter B
17051 Pulses per Unit - Front Panel Counter C
# 17052 PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - Low Limit
Setpoint download will be limited to this setting.
refers to the complete # 17053 PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - High Limit
floating point variable which Setpoint download will be limited to this setting.
# 17054 PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - @ 4mA
Sets the zero of the controller.
You cannot read or write a # 17055 PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - @ 20mA
partial variable. Each floating Sets the maximum span of the controller.
Modbus mode. 17056 PID #1 - Primary Gain
17057 PID #1 - Primary Repeats per Minute
Modicon Compatible
Mode - For the purpose of # 17058 PID #1 - Secondary Value - @ Zero
float point counts as 2 # 17059 PID #1 - Secondary Value - @ Full Scale
registers. The starting 17060 PID #1 - Secondary Gain
applies. 17061 PID #1 - Secondary Repeats per Minute
Note: 17062 PID #1 - Maximum Ramp Up Rate % - Per 500 msec

Limits rate of valve movement at startup only.
# Input expected is
engineering units. # 17063 PID #1 - Secondary Setpoint
17064 PID #1 - Maximum Ramp Down Rate % - Per 500 msec
Limits the rate of valve movement at shutdown only.
17065 PID #1 - Minimum Output % - To Ramp To
Top-up valve % open.
17066 PID #1 - Deadband %
No change in output if the % error is less than this
8-28 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
17067 PID #2 - Remote Setpoint - Low Limit

Turbine/Positive
Metering Systems, with 17082 PID #3 - Remote Setpoint - Low Limit
to
versions are considered. 17096 PID #3 - Deadband %
17097 PID #4 - Remote Setpoint - Low Limit

to
17112 Output in Percent - Digital to Analog #1

Read-only, Live Value.
to
17123 Output in Percent - Digital to Analog #12
Read-only, Live Value.
17124 Spare
to
17135 Spare
17136 PID #1 - Primary Controlled Variable Value

17137 PID #1 - Secondary Controlled Variable Value
17138 PID #1 - Control Output %
17139 PID #1 - Primary Setpoint Value
17140 PID #1 - Secondary Setpoint Value
17141 Spare
to
17145 Spare

to
17150 PID #2 - Secondary Setpoint Value
17151 Spare
to
17155 Spare
22/26.71+ w 05/99 8-29


to
CAUTION! 17160 PID #3 - Secondary Setpoint Value
flow computer. Any
17161 Spare
17165 Spare
Omni Flow Computers, Inc. 17166 PID #4 - Primary Controlled Variable Value
before manipulating
to
a serial port or programmable 17170 PID #4 - Secondary Setpoint Value

17171 Spare
accessed using Modbus to
17175 Spare
refers to the complete 17176 Meter #1 - Full Scale - Gross Flow Rate
floating point variable which Used to scale integer volume flow rate variables 3140 & 3142.
17177 Meter #1 - Full Scale - Mass Flow Rate
Used to scale integer mass flow rate variable 3144.
Modbus mode.
17179 Spare
Modicon Compatible
point count only, each IEEE 17180 Meter #2 - Full Scale - Gross Flow Rate
applies.
17182 Spare
17183 Spare
17184 Meter #3 - Full Scale - Gross Flow Rate

17186 Spare
17187 Spare
8-30 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Modbus
17188 Meter #4 - Full Scale - Gross Flow Rate

Application Revision 17189 Meter #4 - Full Scale - Mass Flow Rate
Revision 22/26.71+ for 17190 Spare
Turbine/Positive
17191 Spare
17192 Station - Full Scale - Gross Flow Rate
versions are considered. (Used to scale integer volume flow rate variables 3802 & 3804.
17193 Station - Full Scale - Mass Flow Rate
Used to scale integer mass flow rate variable 3806.
17194 Spare
to
17202 Spare
17203 F Factor - Product #1

to
17210 F Factor - Product #8
17211 Spare
to
17379 Spare
17380 Auxiliary Input #1 - Low limit

17381 Auxiliary Input #1 - High Limit
17382 Auxiliary Input #1 - Override Value
17383 Auxiliary Input #1 - @ 4mA

to

to

to
22/26.71+ w 05/99 8-31

17400 Reserved
Note: to
These addresses are 20000 Reserved
reserved for product
development.
20001 Reserved
to
30000 Reserved
30001 Reserved
to
40000 Reserved
40001 Reserved
to
50000 Reserved
8-32 22/26.71+ w 05/99

Volume 5
User Manual
Technical Bulletins
960701 Overview of OmniCom Configuration PC Software
960702 Communicating with Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers
960703 Storing Archive Data within the Flow Computer
960704 Communicating with Honeywell ST3000 Smart Transmitters
970701 Stability Requirements: Final Calibration of Flow Computer
970702 Secondary Totalizers Provide Net Volume at Temperatures Other than 15C or 60F
970801 Using Boolean Statements to Provide Custom Alarms in the Flow Computer
970802 Omni Flow Computer Modbus Database: Overview
970803 Meter Factor Linearization
970804 Calculation of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy: Using Gas Chromatograph, Product Overrides or Live 4-20mA
Analyzer Inputs of Specific Gravity and Heating Value
970901 Dual Pulse Flowmeter Pulse Fidelity Checking
980201 Communicating with Honeywell TDC3000 Systems
980202 Recalculating a Previous Batch within the Flow Computer
980401 Peer-to-Peer Basics
980402 Using the Peer-to-Peer Function in a Redundant Flow Computer Application
980501 Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Sensor Interface Issues
980502 Communicating with Honeywell SMV3000 Multivariable Transmitters
980503 Serial I/O Modules: Installation Options
980504 Multivariable Flow Transmitter Interfaces: Serial Connectivity and Data Transfer Issues
980701 Using the Totalizer Maintenance Mode
980801 Unsolicited Transmissions of Custom Modbus Data Packets
980802 Digital I/O Modules: Installation Options
980803 Upgrading the Flow Computer Firmware
981101 Using the Audit Trail (Event Logger) Feature and Sealing of the Flow Computer
990101 Communicating with Instromet Q-Sonic Ultrasonic Gas Flowmeters
Effective May 1999

Date: 07 23 96 Author(s): Kenneth D. Elliott / Robert L. Stallard TB # 960701
Overview of OmniCom Configuration PC

Software
Contents
User Manual Reference - Scope .............................................................................................................. 2
This technical bulletin
complements the information Abstract........................................................................................................... 2
contained in Volume 3,
Configuring the Flow Computer.................................................................... 2
Chapter 2 Flow Computer
Configuration, and is Report Configurator ....................................................................................... 3
applicable to all firmware
revisions. Operations Utilities and Help......................................................................... 3
This bulletin was previously Dial-up Access................................................................................................ 3
published as an appendix to
user manuals of firmware Passwords Using OmniCom.......................................................................... 3
revisions Version .70 and
Local Keypad Access ................................................................................................4
earlier.
Changing Passwords at the Keypad ..........................................................................4
Setting Up the Initial 'Level B' and 'Level C' Passwords for each Modbus Port............5
OmniCom Configuration Maintaining the Modbus Port Password Using OmniCom ........................................5
PC Software - This powerful
software package allows you Disabling Modbus Port Passwords ............................................................................6
to setup, copy or modify, and Getting Started ............................................................................................... 6
save to disk entire
configurations for Omni flow Installation Requirements..........................................................................................6
computers. It also allows you Installation Procedure ...............................................................................................6
to create custom reports and Opening a File ..........................................................................................................7
displays. You can work
online, offline and remotely. View .........................................................................................................................7
Off-line......................................................................................................................7
On-line......................................................................................................................7
Reports.....................................................................................................................8
Utilities......................................................................................................................8
I/O Point Assignment List ................................................................................................................ 8
OmniCom Setup ........................................................................................................................... 8
OmniCom Application .................................................................................................................... 9
Archive Start/Stop Command .......................................................................................................... 9
Prover Commands......................................................................................................................... 10
Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................... 10
Omni Front Panel Emulator ........................................................................................................... 10
Help........................................................................................................................10
Registration of License and Software Support .........................................................11
TB-960701 w ALL REVS 1

Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 Flow Computers Technical Bulletin
Scope
OmniCom Software is compatible with all firmware revisions of Omni
6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers. It is installed in a personal computer from
which you can configure your flow computer.
Abstract
OmniCom is a simple-to-use yet sophisticated PC-based configuration program
that can be used to setup, copy or modify, and save to disk entire configurations
for Omni flow computers. You can also select custom report options and modify
report templates and Omni display screens that are resident within the program,
or create new ones. These can then be uploaded to the flow computer. Default
reports provide standard data and formats for most requirements.
Major application programming has already been developed by Omni and is
resident in EPROM. This is of particular importance in custody transfer
measurement contracts. They require that the relevant API, AGA, GPA or ISO
standards are fully implemented and not exposed to tampering.
The OmniCom program allows you to develop your own system requirements
by a simple process of menu selection and table completion. This replicates the
data entry tables which can be accessed through the front panel keypad of your
Omni Flow Computer.
Configuring the Flow Computer

For Further Help - If you Configuring the flow computer involves specifying what transducers are going to
require further help, call be used, their calibrated ranges and the physical I/O points being assigned.
Omnis technical support at:
Other data needed by the flow computer relates to the flowing product to be
( +1-281-240-6161
measured, the type of calculations to be used, and communication and control
features.
You will usually configure the flow computer in the Off-line Mode and then
upload your data. You do not have to be connected to the flow computer at this
time. You will usually go to the Online Menu only when you need to
communicate directly with the flow computer. Any changes made are
immediately reflected in the flow computer.
2 TB-960701 w ALL REVS

TB-960701 Configuration PC Software
Overview of OmniCom
Report Configurator
One of OmniCom's indispensable features is the ability to reformat default
reports by using OmniCom's report templates. This is the ONLY feature not
available through the front panel keypad. Any variable defined in the Modbus
database, or programmed as a variable can be inserted into a report with
accompanying text. Reports can be created in languages other than English to
suit local needs.
Operations Utilities and Help

Accessing Help in Operational tools such as remotely proving meters, and reading hardware
OmniCom - At the 'Using diagnostics are provided. Diagrams are also provided for communications cable
Help' feature, press [Enter]
hook-up. Application Programs and PC Setup for OmniCom can also be
and [F1] for editing
keystrokes. selected. As you work through the entries, you will find entry-sensitive Help that
explains the meaning of the particular entry. Whether at the flow computer
keypad or at a PC there is always assistance.
For Further Help - If you
require further help, call
( +1-281-240-6161 Dial-up Access
Omni Flow Computers encourages the installation of a telephone dial-up
modem as a ready means of providing installation and maintenance support for
customer and vendor alike. Serial communication passwords provide enhanced
security. Three levels of password pre-exist within Omni flow computers to
provide privileged or restricted access to critical configuration and calibration
data.
The OmniCom program allows you to upload/download data to and from the
flow computer in an on-line mode at a range of baud rates by direct-wire or by
telephone dial-up modem access. This is particularly useful when the flow
computer is in use. Occasionally, you will want to modify configuration or
calibration data, or just monitor activity. You can do all this without interfering
with pipeline or process operations or with communication links to host SCADA
or DCS systems.
Passwords Using OmniCom

Except when changing transducer high/low alarm limits, a password is usually
asked for when changing the configuration data within the computer.
The flow computer has independent password protection of the following:
INFO - For Firmware 1) Local Keypad access
Revisions 70+, Physical
Serial Port #1 is selectable 2) Modbus Port #1 (Physical serial Port #1)
as a Modbus RTU, Modbus 3) Modbus Port #2 (Physical serial Port #2)
RTU (modem), or printer
port. This serial port on 4) Modbus Port #3 (Physical serial Port #3)
previous revisions was only a 5) Modbus Port #4 (Physical serial Port #4)
printer port.

Local Keypad Access

Three password levels are provided:
a) Privileged Level - Allows complete access to all entries within the flow
computer including keypad passwords (b) and (c) below. The initial
privileged password for each Modbus port is selected via this password
level.
b) Level 1 - This level allows technician access to most entries within the
flow computer with the exception of I/O Points assignments,
programmable variables and Boolean statements.
c) Level 1A - Allows access to the following entries:

Meter factors and K Factors
Densitometer correction factors (pycnometer factor)
d) Level 2 - Allows access to the operator type entries. These entries
include:
Transducer manual overrides
Product gravity overrides
Prover operations
Batching operations
Changing Passwords at the Keypad

1) At the keypad press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter]
2) With the cursor blinking on 'Misc Configuration' press [Enter]
3) With the cursor blinking on 'Password Main?'
press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter]
4) Enter the 'Privileged Level' Password (up to 6 characters) press [Enter]
5) The 'Level 1',Level 1A and 'Level 2' passwords can now be viewed and
changed if required.
INFO - Level B and Level C 6) Scroll down to access each of the Modbus serial port 'Level A'
passwords for each Modbus passwords. These are labeled 'Ser1Passwd', Ser2 Passwd', 'Ser3
port cannot be viewed or
changed from the keypad.
Passwd' and Ser4 Passwd corresponding to the physical port numbering
for Modbus Ports 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively.

Overview of OmniCom
Setting Up the Initial 'Level B' and 'Level C' Passwords for
each Modbus Port
7) Enter an initial 'Level A' Password for the appropriate physical serial port
at the keypad of the Omni Flow Computer as described above.
8) Connect a PC running OmniCom Software to the selected serial port of
the Omni Flow Computer. Open a file and 'Receive Omni Configuration
Data'.
9) A red pop-up screen will appear which notes that a password is required
to proceed. If any other screen appears at this point, check wiring and
communication settings, Modbus ID, baud rate, etc.
10) Do not enter the 'Level A' password at this point. Keep pressed [Alt] as
you press [E] to edit the passwords. A second red pop-up screen will
appear asking for the 'current valid password'. A good practice would be
to use uppercase letters (activate [CapsLock] on the keyboard) because
when setting passwords from the flow computers keypad, they are
always entered in uppercase.
11) Enter the 'Level A' password that was selected for this serial port.
12) You are asked if you would like to change the 'Level A', 'Level B' and
'Level C' passwords. Select to change 'Level B' at this point. You will be
asked to enter a password. As you enter the password, asterisks will
show in place of the characters you typed. You will be asked to re-enter
the password to ensure that what you typed was correct.
13) To setup a Level C password, repeat Steps 2 and 6 substituting Level
C for Level B at Step 6.
Maintaining the Modbus Port Password Using OmniCom

After the initial passwords have been setup for each of the Modbus serial ports
as shown above, they may be changed at any time while logged on with
OmniCom.
1) While keeping pressed the [Alt] key, press [E] at any time and the pop-
up screen appears asking for a password. This screen can be forced to
appear by keeping pressed [Alt][Ctrl] as you press [P] while viewing
any editing screen; i.e., any screen with data fields that can be edited.
2) When asked, enter your current password. Password Level B and
Level C users are allowed to change only their own password levels.
Level A password users can change levels A, B and C.

Disabling Modbus Port Passwords

INFO - Level B and Level C Level B and Level C passwords should be disabled via OmniCom (see
passwords for each Modbus sidebar) before disabling the privileged Level A password at the keypad.
(serial) port cannot be viewed
or changed from the keypad; 1) To disable each password proceed as though you are going to change or
i.e., you must use OmniCom set-up the password.
to view, change or delete
these password levels. 2) Press the [Delete] key six (6) times where the initial password was
entered followed by the [Enter] key (no asterisks will show).
3) When asked to re-enter the password, re-enter six [Delete] key presses
followed by the [Enter] key.
4) Repeat this procedure for both Level B and Level C passwords.
5) From the Omni flow computer keypad, delete the 'Level A' password for
the appropriate Modbus serial port (see Volume 3). To do this, move the
cursor to the serial Level A password to disable and press the [Clear]
key and then the [Enter] key.
Getting Started
CAUTION!
Terminate and Stay Resident
Installation Requirements
(TSR) programs such as
To properly run OmniCom, and have sufficient memory for report templates
SideKick and Keyboard
Macro processors can affect and copies of the database, you will require the following:
the operation of high speed
communication programs IBM PC (or compatible)
such as OmniCom. They do MS DOS, V3.3 or later (excepting 4.01)
this by 'stealing' processor
cycles or turning off the 640Kb RAM
hardware interrupt system of
the personal computer.
20Mb Free Hard Disk Space with a minimum of one floppy disk drive,
These programs may have to 3" 1.44 Mb
be disabled when you are in Monochrome or color monitor with EGA or VGA graphics capability
the 'On-line' Mode, if you
encounter difficulties One RS-232 serial port
communicating with the
Omni flow computer. One LPT port (optional)
One RS-232 modem (optional at various supported baud rates)
Installing OmniCom
Revisions Previous to 70 -
Before you install earlier Installation Procedure
revisions of OmniCom
software, you must save your OmniCom is delivered on 1.44 Mb, 3" diskettes in an archived format. To
existing phone directory install, do the following:
entries and setup. For
instructions and any other
assistance you may need, 1) Insert the diskette into your PC's corresponding floppy disk drive.
please contact our technical
support staff at the following 2) Type the respective drive letter followed by a colon (e.g.: A: or B:).
phone number:
3) Type Install and press [Enter].
( +1-281-240-6161
The OmniCom installation program will guide you through the rest of the
installation.

Overview of OmniCom
Opening a File
Accessing Help in First open an existing Omni-supplied file. Each application and derived files
OmniCom - At the 'Using come with their own set of templates. You can then 'SAVE AS' to create a new
file to commence your configuration. Each file that you create will occupy
keystrokes. approximately 60 Kbytes of disk space. This includes 36 Kbytes for the
configuration file and 6 Kbytes for each of the four custom report templates.
For Further Help - If you All menu selections are supported by entry-sensitive Help. No matter where
require further help, call you are, by pressing [F1] you can obtain an explanation of the requirements for
Omnis technical support at: your entry selection.
( +1-281-240-6161
View
Files can be viewed separately or in parallel with a file that is currently being
edited. This allows you to compare various numeric entries in similar files. This
can be helpful if you are maintaining historical files that track changes you have
made. You may not be able to use the View feature with certain variations of
flow computer configuration files because newer firmware include additional
entry fields not available in earlier revisions.
Off-line
You will usually begin in the Off-line Mode to configure your flow computer. It
naturally leads in to the 'Omni Configuration' Menu selections. Only when you
complete this section will you be able to activate the various 'Setup' options and
proceed to establish your calibration ranges and other related data. Before you
begin the configuration of I/O, be sure you know what number and type of
physical I/O has been installed in the flow computer. A mismatch between your
off-line configuration and physical hardware will not make a data upload to the
flow computer meaningful in key areas of your configuration data.
On-line
When you have completed building your configuration database, you are then
ready to upload data to your Omni flow computer. The OmniCom program uses
the Modbus RTU binary protocol which mandates the use of 8 data bits. Be
sure that the serial I/O parameters in both devices have been properly setup
before attempting to communicate. Baud rate and parity settings are less critical
but must also be the same.
With a direct-connect to a PC, OmniCom will perform an auto baud rate search
and display an error if baud rates are incompatible (see 2.5.16. Serial
Input/Output Settings in Volume 3). Baud rates from 1.2 kbps to 38.4 kbps
are supported. When using a modem, the auto baud rate search is not
performed. In this case, the baud rate is that at which the modem is setup.
Some personal computers may not have the processing power to support the
higher baud rates. Note also that modems are capable of using a higher baud
rate at the RS-232 connector than they are communicating on the telephone
line. If the modems connect but the flow computer does not respond, try
adjusting the flow computers baud rate.

Reports
The 'Report' Menu allows you to retrieve snapshot and historical reports from
the flow computer or from your hard disk. These are pre-formatted default
reports that are included in the Omni application software. You can also
customize your own reports from standard templates. By using the on-screen
report editor, you can add or delete text and data character strings which
identify the variable in the computer's Modbus database. [F1] for help
describes the control functions to enable you to format the report easily. Bring
up a report template and move the cursor onto the 'XXXX.XX' fields. Press
[Enter] and a pop-up menu defines the variable being used. Type or edit text
anywhere, move the cursor and keeping pressed [Shift] as you press [$]
enables you to enter or delete any database address from the report.
Utilities
The Utilities Menu has several useful tools for setting up and maintaining
OmniCom. The utilities available are:
q I/O Point Assignment List q Prover/Batch End
q OmniCom Setup Commands
q OmniCom Application q Diagnostics
q Archive Maintenance q Omni Panel
I/O Point Assignment List

When the configuration of your flow computer is complete, you should review
your assignment of physical I/O by accessing the display under 'I/O Point
Assignment List'. An I/O mismatch can result in erroneous calibration ranges
and consequential errors in measurement and control of your metering system!
This utility shows a summary list that indicates what physical I/O points are
assigned to which variables. Point numbers with asterisks '*' next to them are
used for more than one variable. Check the list to ensure you have not assigned
a physical I/O point to more than one transducer type; e.g.: An I/O point cannot
be assigned to a temperature and pressure transmitter at the same time. The
flow computer will not allow this to happen in the On-line mode, but OmniCom
does not check for this in the Off-line mode.
OmniCom Setup
This utility allows you to:
q Select the type of video monitor.
q Turn the sound effects on/off.
q Setup the modem command strings.

Overview of OmniCom
OmniCom Application
Use this utility before you start to select the software version of OmniCom that
matches the firmware version number of your Omni flow computer. The
firmware versions are:
US VERSIONS M ETRIC VERSIONS
Turbine / Positive Displacement / Turbine / Positive Displacement /

Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering
20 24
Systems (with K Factor Systems (with K Factor
Linearization) Linearization)
Orifice / Differential Pressure Orifice / Differential Pressure
21 25
Liquid Flow Metering Systems Liquid Flow Metering Systems
Turbine / Positive Displacement Turbine / Positive Displacement
22 Liquid Flow Metering Systems 26 Liquid Flow Metering Systems
(with Meter Factor Linearization) (with Meter Factor Linearization)
Orifice / Turbine Gas Flow Orifice / Turbine Gas Flow

23 27
Metering Systems Metering Systems
Archive Start/Stop Command
WARNING! When this menu is entered, OmniCom tries to establish communications with
the flow computer using the comm parameter settings currently selected in the
Warning: The flow computer 'Start Comm' submenu of the 'Online' menu. It does this to establish the status
will not accept changes made
to the archive setup at the
of the 'Archive' flag and 'Archive Config Enable' flag. Check comm settings if all
time of a 'Transmit Omni items on the menu are inactive; i.e., OmniCom is unable to communicate with
Configuration' upload unless the target computer.
the archiving feature has
been turned off. Any changes made to the flow computers configuration which involves the
format of the data record, number of records in an archive file, or the total
number of archive files within the flow computer, will cause the memory used to
Accessing Help in store the archive data to be reinitialized. This would cause all data stored in
OmniCom - At the 'Using
Help' feature, press [Enter] archive to be lost. Therefore, no changes to the target flow computers archive
and [F1] for editing configuration will be allowed unless automatic data archiving has been disabled
keystrokes. and the 'Archive Config Enable' flag is on.
For Further Help - If you

require further help, call
( +1-281-240-6161

Prover Commands
Proving features displayed here can only be viewed when communicating
directly with an Omni Flow Computer.
You may monitor or control the operation of a meter prover which is controlled
by a remote Omni flow computer. You must have already established
communications with the flow computer before making this selection. If you
have not established communications with a flow computer you will receive one
of the following error messages:
Byte count does not match expected - OmniCom is confused and thinks
your modem is connected to a flow computer. Try dialing out first.
No response from Omni - You are either not connected to anything or the
slave ID number of the flow computer you are trying to talk to does not
match OmniCom's setting.
Use the 'Shift' key with the appropriate 'Function' key to select the flowmeter
you wish to remote prove.
The 'Status Window' shows the event history and the 'Omni Display' echoes
data shown locally at the Omni flow computer.
Diagnostics
You must be connected and online with a flow computer for this selection to
work. The screen displays diagnostic information about the flow computer
such as number and type of I/O modules fitted, status of digital I/O, current
output percent of analog outputs and raw input signals coming into the flow
computer.
Omni Front Panel Emulator

When this feature is selected, an illustration of the Omni front panel is displayed
by which all the functions of an Omni Flow computer are emulated. Use the
mouse to click on simulated buttons to access real time displays and make
entries. OmniCom is actually displaying the same LCD display buffer
information and the mouse click are actually sending data into the same key
stroke buffer as the front panel keypad. Performance is much better at 9600
baud or higher. You must have setup the baud rate and other communication
settings in the 'Start Comm' menu before you can use Omni Panel.
Help
Accessing Help in You can further customize your Help screens by making use of an on-screen
OmniCom - At the 'Using editor. Via this feature you can modify Help text by additions or deletions to suit
your own needs and operations. Windows can be resized and repositioned to
keystrokes. suit your own personal preference. This can be particularly useful as an
additional memory aid, if the Operations Manual is not available to you, or if
additional information is required for other users of this program.

Overview of OmniCom
Registration of License and Software Support

For Further Help - If you Remember to mail in the registration of your distribution diskette to Omni flow
require further help, call computers. OmniCom is provided with each Omni flow computer on a single-
user license basis. Any additional installations of this program will require re-
( +1-281-240-6161
registration by the user. This will ensure that you will have the opportunity to
receive free telephone support, and notice of program revisions and new add-
on programs for your installation.


Communicating with Allen-Bradley
Programmable Logic Controllers
Contents
contained in the User
Protocol and Error Checking......................................................................... 2
Manuals, and is applicable
to all firmware revisions. PLC Supported ............................................................................................... 2
This bulletin was previously
published as an appendix to Flow Computer Database............................................................................... 2
user manuals of firmware 4th and 5th Digit from the Right Identifies Type of Variable........................................2
revisions Version .70 and 3rd Digit from Right Identifies which Area within the Application .................................3
earlier.
Accesses the Omni Flow Computer Database..... 3
How the Allen-Bradley
PLC-2 .......................................................................................................................3
Allen-Bradley
Communications - This PLC-3 .......................................................................................................................3
feature allows PLC-5 .......................................................................................................................3
communicating with Allen- Valid Starting Addresses of PLC-5 Files ....................................................................4
Bradley PLCs. However,
16-Bit Integers ................................................................................................................................. 4
Omni Flow Computers is not
8-Character Strings ......................................................................................................................... 4
responsible for the operation,
32-Bit Integers ................................................................................................................................. 4
connectivity or compatibility
32-Bit IEEE Floating Points ............................................................................................................. 4
of Allen-Bradley products,
Bit Integers ...................................................................................................................................... 4
and furthermore, we do not
16-Character Strings ....................................................................................................................... 4
warrant these products.
32-Bit Integers ................................................................................................................................. 4
32-Bit IEEE Floating Points ............................................................................................................. 4
Scope
All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers allow
communications with Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs).
This technical bulletin refers to communication aspects specific to the Omni
Flow Computer and serves as information only. Please refer to the
manufacturer for any support or information on Allen-Bradley products.

Abstract
The Omni 6000 flow computer provides serial communications between the
flow computer and an Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controller (PLC),
usually via a KE or KF Communication Module connected to the Data Highway.
Data is transmitted serially at a maximum rate of 38.4 kbps using 8 data bits, 1
stop bit and no parity bit. Average speed of response to a message request is
approximately 75 msec.
Protocol and Error Checking

Both the DFI full duplex protocol and the half duplex protocol are supported.
CRC or BCC error checking can be utilized when using either full duplex or half
duplex.
PLC Supported
The Omni computer supports the following Allen-Bradley PLC types and
messages. Note that bit level operations are not supported.
PLC-2 Unprotected Block Reads and Writes
PLC-3 Word Range Reads and Writes
PLC-5 Typed Reads and Writes
SLC-502/3 Unprotected Typed Reads and Writes
Flow Computer Database

Serial Ports #1, #2, #3 and #4 in .71+ firmware revisions support
communications using superset of Modbus Protocol. This is the native
communications language of the flow computer. Several thousand variables are
available within the Database. The primary numbering system used to identify
these variables is their 'index number'. The actual digits of the index number
indicate the type of variable and in many cases application area within the
computer.
4th and 5th Digit from the Right Identifies Type of

Variable
1??? Variable is a digital status or command bit
3??? Variable is a 16 bit signed integer
4??? Variable is a 8 character ASCII string
7??? Variable is a 32 bit IEEE floating point
14??? Variable is a 16 character ASCII string

TB-960702 Programmable Logic Controllers
Communicating with Allen-Bradley
3rd Digit from Right Identifies which Area within the

Application
?1?? Variable relates to Meter Run #1
?5?? Variable is scratchpad
?6?? Variable is PID related or scratchpad
?7?? Variable is a command write.
?8?? Variable is related to station functions
?9?? Variable is related to prover functions
Accesses the Omni

How the Allen-Bradley
Flow Computer Database
PLC-2
This family is usually limited as to the type of data and address range. Data is
always transferred as block reads and writes.
Five translation tables are provided where the user can specify what data within
the database will be concatenated into read or write groups. The starting
address of each data block is selectable.
Note: The PLC2 does not o Translation Tables #1 through #3 are used to set up block reads which
understand 32-bit integer or can contain status points packed 16 to a word, 16-bit or 32-bit integers
32-bit IEEE floating points
but can pass these variable
and IEEE floating points.
types to devices that do o Translation Table #4 is used for block writes of status and command bits
understand them. only. Data is packed 16 to a word.
o Translation Table #5 provides for block writes to any selected data.
PLC-3
This family can use the methods described above as well as 'word range reads
and writes' of any variable within the database (see PLC-5 list for starting
addresses).
PLC-5
This family utilizes 'typed reads and writes' of the complete Database. To
accommodate the PLC-5 'file system method of addressing, the Modbus index
numbers serve as the basis of the internal file system of the computers as it
appears to a PLC-5 device. Table below shows typical examples:

MODBUS INDICES VERSUS PLC-5 ADDRESSES

M ODBUS INDEX # PLC-5 ADDRESS ELEMENT SIZE COMMENT
1101 N11:01 1 Word (16 Flags) Meter #1 Status Flags
1217 N12:17 1 Word (16 Flags) Meter #2 Status Flags
1701 N17:01 1 Word (16 Flags) Command Flags
3201 N32:01 1 Word (Integer) Meter #1 Data
3210 N32:10 1 Word (Integer) Offsets track
3901 N39:01 1 Word (integer) Prover Data
4101 B41:01 1 Byte (ASCII) 4 Words per Variable
4102 B41:02 1 Byte (ASCII) 1 Byte per element
5101 N51:01 1 Word (Long Integer) 2 Words per variable
5102 N51:02 1 Word (Long Integer) 2 Words per variable
5103 N51:03 1 Word (Long Integer) Same again
7401 F74:01 2 Words (IEEE Float) 2 Words per variable
7405 F74:05 2 Words (IEEE Float) Offsets track
Valid Starting Addresses of PLC-5 Files
16-Bit Integers
N10:01 N11:01 N12:01 N13:01 N14:01 N15:01 N16:01 N17:01 N18:01 N19:01
N30:01 N31:01 N32:01 N33:01 N34:01 N35:01 N36:01 N37:01 N38:01 N39:01
8-Character Strings
B41:01 B42:01 B43:01 B44:01 B45:01 B46:01 B47:01 B48:01 B49:01
32-Bit Integers
N51:01 N52:01 N53:01 N54:01 N55:01 N58:01 N59:01
32-Bit IEEE Floating Points

F70:01 F71:01 F72:01 F73:01 F74:01 F75:01 F76:01 F77:01 F78:01 F79:01
Bit Integers
N130:01 N134:01
16-Character Strings
B140:01
32-Bit Integers
N150:01
32-Bit IEEE Floating Points

F170:01

Storing Archive Data within the Flow

Computer
Contents
contained in Volume 2 and
Raw Data Archiving........................................................................................ 2
Volume 3, and is applicable
to all firmware revisions 71+. Retrieving Data .........................................................................................................3
This bulletin was previously Raw Data Archive Point Addresses ...........................................................................4
published as an appendix to Archive Configuration Changes .................................................................................5
user manuals of firmware
Setting the 'Reconfig Archive' Flag .................................................................................................. 6
Possible Loss of Data when Starting and Stopping the Archive ...................................................... 6
earlier.
Defining the Archive Records .......................................................................................................... 6
How The Available Memory Is Allocated....................................................................7
Data Archiving - The Checking The Archive File Memory Status Screens ...................................................8
archiving feature allows you Summary 0f Raw Data Archiving Features ................................................................9
to store raw data, ASCII text
data and historical reports. Raw Data Archive Definition: Alarm/Event Log and Audit Event Log....... 10
Alarm/Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address 711 ..................................10
Audit Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address 712. ..................................10
Using The Custom Reports to Access the Text Archive Feature .............. 11
Custom Report Templates ........................................................................... 12
Scope
All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the
archiving feature. This feature allows you to archive raw data, ASCII data and
historical reports.

Abstract
Definitions & Terminology The flow computer provides three distinct methods of storing data. These are as
follows:
Archive Address - A unique
Modbus address used to
read a data record from an
1) Raw Data Archive Data records are defined and stored in raw binary
archive file. These addresses format in circular files of 'n' records per file. Ten
are in the 700 series; i.e., user configurable files are provided as well as an
701, 702, 703, etc. alarm file and audit trail file. This data can be
Archive Record - A retrieved using standard Modbus Function Codes
structure containing a fixed
set of data variables which 3 and 6.
cannot exceed 250 bytes in
length. Data within the record
2) Text Archive Data ASCII data which is captured and saved whenever a
can be of any valid data type Snapshot, Daily, Batch End or Prove report is
in any order. printed. Data is stored chronologically. To retrieve
Archive Trigger Boolean - this data you must use OmniCom, OmniView or
The actual event which a custom Modbus driver which understands the
causes the flow computer to
capture and store a record proprietary Omni Modbus Function Codes 64 and
within the archive file. The 65.
trigger can be any Boolean
variable within the database 3) Historical Reports These are exact copies of data that was sent to the
including the result of a local printer in ASCII format. The flow computer
Boolean statement. stores the last eight copies of each of the following
Block Read - Modbus reports: Daily, Batch End and Prove.
protocol block read requires
that Function Code 03 (read
multiple registers) be used to Method 3 is limited to storing the last eight reports and is therefore not
retrieve data. considered archive data. Therefore this chapter will be limited to describing how
Circular Archive File - A file Methods 1 and 2 are used to store archive data within the flow computer.
of n records arranged as a
circular buffer which always
contains the most recent n
records; i.e., the oldest data
record is overwritten by each
Raw Data Archiving
new record as it is added.
A maximum of ten archive files can be user configured. Two additional
Current Record Pointer - A
16-bit read-only integer archive files, the alarm archive and audit trail archive are also included but are
register containing a number fixed in format and cannot be user configured.
between 0 and n,
representing the position of Each user configurable archive file consists of 'n' archive records, where 'n' is
the most recently added defined by the user. A record consists of a time and date stamp followed by a
record within the archive file. number of user defined variables of any valid data type as described by its
The pointer is adjusted after
each complete record is
archive record definition table. The amount of memory an archive consumes is
added. A value of 0 indicates calculated by multiplying the record size in bytes times the number of records in
that no data records have the archive. Associated with each archive file is an archive trigger Boolean.
been added since the last Data is captured and stored in each of the archive files whenever the
initialization of the archive
appropriate trigger occurs; e.g., at the end of a batch or beginning of the day,
memory.
etc. Three additional registers per archive file serve to indicate (a) maximum
(Continues) number of records, (b) current record pointer and (c) requested record to read
pointer.

TB-960703 Storing Archive Data within the Flow Computer
Retrieving Data
Definitions & Terminology Data records are retrieved one record at a time by writing the number of the
record required, to the requested record pointer register. The data can then
(Continued)
be accessed immediately by a block read of the archive address. Data must
be read as one complete block. Also, because the flow computer always
Maximum Records responds with a complete record, the 'number of registers' field of the Modbus
Register - A 16-bit read- poll request is ignored by the flow computer.
only integer adjacent to the
Current Record Pointer The following record retrieval method is simple and efficient; it works well
which contains the number
n, indicating the maximum
assuming that there is only one host device retrieving data. The method
number of records within the assumes that the number of the last record retrieved is left in the requested
archive file. record pointer within the flow computer. This will not be the case when more
Requested Record Pointer than one host device will be retrieving data; in this case each host device must
- A 16-bit read/write integer know the number of the last record it retrieved.
used to select a specific
record within an archive file. 1) Read the maximum records register, current record pointer and
Time and Date Stamp - Six requested record pointer. These registers are adjacent to each other in
bytes of binary data
representing the date and
the flow computers database.
time that the archive record 2) A current record pointer value of 0 indicates that the archive file has
was stored. The byte order is been initialized (i.e. cleared to binary zeroes/ASCII Nulls) and no trigger
as follows:
event has occurred since initialization).
q Byte 1 = Month (1-12) or
Day (1-31) 3) Compare the contents (just read) of the current record pointer with the
q Byte 2 = Day (1-31) or requested record pointer.
Month (1-12)
4) If the records numbers are equal no additional records have been added
q Byte 3 = Year (0-99)
since the last read and no further action is needed.
q Byte 4 = Hour of Day (0-
23) 5) If the record numbers are not equal, increment the value of requested
q Byte 5 = Minute (0-59) record pointer.
q Byte 6 = Seconds (0-59) 6) If the resultant value is greater than the value obtained from the
q European Format maximum record pointer, roll-over has occurred and record number
Selected (dd/mm/yy)
one should be retrieved by writing '1' to the requested record pointer
Valid Data Types -
register. Otherwise write the incremented value to the requested record
q 32-bit IEEE floating point
data pointer register.
q 32-bit long integer data 7) After writing to the requested record pointer register in the flow
q 16-bit integer data computer, the selected archive record can be read immediately using
q 8-byte ASCII string data; Modbus function '3' (read multiple registers). Archive file addresses are in
byte packed Boolean
the 700 area of the flow computers database (i.e., archive file 1 = 701,
status data
archive file 2 = 702 etc.).
8) Repeat steps 3 through 7 until all records are read.
During the normal course of events, the host attempts to read the next record in
sequence based on the number of the last record it retrieved. An archive
record containing binary 0s indicates that the archive has been initialized since
the last read and that the host should restart by reading record number one
(assuming that the current record pointer is not 0).

Raw Data Archive Point Addresses
Archive #1 Record Access Address Read Only 0701

Access Record Date/Time Only Read Only 0751
Maximum # of Records Read Only 3701
Last Record Updated Pointer Read Only 3702
Record Req To Read Pointer Read/Write 3703


Record Req To Read Pointer4 Read/Write 3730
Alarm Archive Record Access Address Read Only 0711
Audit Archive Record Access Address Read Only 0712
Archive Configuration Changes

Archive configuration changes can be made via OmniCom or directly from the
key-pad of the flow computer. As the OmniCom program includes extensive
help screens which document this subject, this appendix will concentrate on
configuring the archive features via the keypad.
From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter]. The LCD screen
displays:
*** SETUP MENU ***

Misc Configuration _
Time/Date Setup
Station Setup
Select 'Misc. Configuration' and press [Enter]. The following displays:
*** MISC SETUP ***

Password Maint?(Y) _
Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station?(Y)
Select 'Password Maint' and press [Enter]. Enter the privileged password
when prompted and scroll down the screen until the following is displayed:
PASSWORD MAINTENANCE
Reconfig Archive ? Y
Archive Run?(Y/N) N
Reset All Totals ?

Setting the 'Reconfig Archive' Flag

Any configuration changes that are made to any of the archive files such as
changes to the size or number of records will force the flow computer to
reallocate and clear to zero the RAM memory used to store archive data. To
avoid accidental data loss, the flow computer requires that two entries are
manipulated correctly before changes to the archive configuration can be made.
The 'Reconfig Archive' flag must be set to 'Y and the Archive Run' flag must
be set to 'N'.
Possible Loss of Data when Starting and Stopping the Archive

To conserve archive storage, the user may on some occasions wish to set the
'Archive Run' flag to 'N' . This can be done at any time without loss of existing
data as long as the 'Reconfig Archive' flag is not set to 'Y'. If the 'Reconfig
Archive' flag is accidentally set to 'Y' no data will be lost until the 'Archive Run'
flag is set to 'Y' (this allows the user to retrieve data before it is lost).
Defining the Archive Records

After setting the 'Reconfig Archive' flag to 'Y' as described above, press the
[Prog] key once to return to the 'Misc Setup' menu. It will be possible to define
or change any archive file configuration by scrolling down the display until the
following screen is displayed:
*** MISC SETUP ***

Archive File "n" _
Enter a number between 1 and 10 to select a specific archive file to modify (1

for example). The following screen will display:
ARCHIVE 701 RECORD

#1 Index 0
#1 Points 0
#2 Index 0
#2 Points 0
Begin entering the data that you require to be archived. The example below will
cause variables 7101, 7102, 7103, 5101, 5102 and 5103 to be archived.
INFO - The Alarm and
Audit Trail archive files are ARCHIVE 701 RECORD
fixed format and cannot be #1 Index 7101
changed.
#1 Points 3
#2 Index 5101
#2 Points 3

A maximum of 16 groups of variables may be included in an archive record.

Data can be of any valid type. The record is limited to a total of 250 data bytes
remembering that the time and date stamp included in each record occupies 6
bytes. Scrolling down the screen displays the following:
ARCHIVE 701 RECORD

Max Records 0
Trig Boolean 0
Circular Archive File - A file Enter the maximum number of archive records to be contained within this
of n records arranged as a circular archive file.
circular buffer which always
contains the most recent n At the 'Trig Boolean' entry, enter the database address of the Boolean trigger
records; i.e., the oldest data
which will cause the flow computer to store the archive data record. For
record is overwritten by each
new record as it is added. example, entering 1831 (the 'hour start flag) would cause the flow computer to
store data at hourly intervals.
Once you have entered all the necessary data for all of the archive records
return to the following screen which is in the 'Password Maintenance' menu.
Reconfig Archive ? Y
Archive Run (Y/N) N
INFO - Redefining the Set 'Reconfig Archive' to 'N' and 'Archive Run' to 'Y'. At this point the flow
archive Boolean trigger does computer will reinitialize archive RAM memory and attempt to allocate memory
not cause the archive RAM
to be cleared.
as configured.
How The Available Memory Is Allocated

Approximately 250,000 bytes of memory are available for the storage of
archived data, this includes 'Raw Data' and 'ASCII Text Data'. Archive memory
is allocated dynamically, i.e. the memory required to satisfy the 'Raw Data
Archive' is allocated first, one archive file at a time. The memory remaining
after the Raw Data Archive files are setup is what is used by the Text Archive
described later.

Checking The Archive File Memory Status Screens

The 'Archive File Memory Status' screens display automatically whenever the
user attempts to re-start data archiving for the first time after reconfiguring the
archive structure. These screens can also be accessed at any time by pressing
'Setup' 'Status' 'Display' while in the display mode. A correctly configured
archive structure is indicated by the following screen.
INFO - The number of files
allocated changes depending ARCHIVE FILE STATUS
on how many archive files Archive Memory OK
have been configured
Files Allocated 3
An incorrectly configured archive structure is indicated by the following screen.
ARCHIVE FILE STATUS

Archive Memory Error
Files Allocated 3
Archive memory errors are caused when RAM memory is insufficient for the
number and size of archive files configured. In this case the 'Start Archive'
command is ignored and the flow computer allocates memory to as many
archive files as possible. The number on the 'Files Allocated' line of the display
shows how many files were allocated before the memory ran out.
Scroll down the screen to see the actual number of bytes allocated to each
archive file. All remaining memory not allocated to the 'Raw Data Archive Files'
is allocated to the 'Text Archive' buffer. The display below is typical.
ARCHIVE FILE STATUS

709 ArcSize 10000
710 ArcSize 8192
TextArcSize 100256

Summary 0f Raw Data Archiving Features

o Ten independent archive files are available for user configuration.
o Two additional archive files, the 'alarm event log' and 'audit trail log' are
provided.
o Archive files consist of multiple records in a circular array.
o Mixed types of variable data can be stored in records of 250 bytes
maximum.
o Except for the 'alarm log' and 'audit trail log', content and maximum
number of records in an archive file are configurable.
o Data is read in block form one record at a time.
o Each archive has a unique address (701, 702, 703, etc.).
o Each archive has a set of integer registers used to indicate most current
record pointer, maximum number of records, and required record pointer.
o Data is captured and stored in an archive file whenever the appropriate
trigger event occurs.
o Multiple archive files can be controlled by the same trigger event.
o Empty archive records contain binary 0s / ASCII Null characters.
o To avoid errors, host devices reading archive data should dynamically
determine the record pointer roll over value based on the number of
record integers read each time from the flow computer.
o Any configuration changes made to the archive setup such as redefinition
of any record or change in the number of records within any archive will
cause all data stored in the entire archive system to be reset. To prevent
accidental erasure of all archived data the user must first halt all
archiving by setting the Archive Run/Halt Flag' to false (0), and setting
the 'Config Archive Flag' to true (1).

Raw Data Archive Definition: Alarm/Event Log

and Audit Event Log
Alarm/Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address

711
Note: Alarm types are:
0 = Log event, sound beeper Field #1 3-Byte Date (MM, DD, YY or DD, MM, YY)
and display in LCD any
edge change in bit Field #2 3-Byte Time (HH, MM, SS)
identified by field #3.
Field #3 16-Bit Integer (Modbus Index # of alarm or event)
1 = Log event, sound beeper
and display in LCD rising Field #4 1 Byte (Alarm Type - see sidebar)
edge changes in bit
identified by field #3 Field #5 1 Byte (Boolean Value, 1 or 0 representing Alarm or
2 = Event log any edge OK)
change in bit identified
by field #3. No beeper or Field #6 IEEE Float (Value of transducer variable at the time of alarm
LCD display action. or event)
3 = Event log rising edge
changes in bit identified Field #7 32-Bit Integer (Volume totalizer at time of event or alarm)
by field #3. No beeper or
LCD display action. Field #8 32-Bit Integer (Mass totalizer at the time of the event or alarm)
Rising edge change means 0
to1 transition.
Audit Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address
712.
Field #1 3-Byte Date (MM, DD, YY or DD, MM, YY)

Field #2 3-Byte Time (HH, MM, SS)
Field #3 16-Bit Integer (Event number, increments for each event, rolls
at 65535)
Field #4 16-Bit Integer (Modbus index of variable changed)
Note: Fields 5 and 6 are set Field #5 IEEE Float (Numeric variable value before change - old
to 0.0 when the variable type value)
changed is String. Fields 7
and 8 contain null characters Field #6 IEEE Float (Numeric variable value after change - new
when the variable type value)
changed is NOT a string.
When fields 7 and 8 contain Field #7 16-Char ASCII (String variable value before change - old value)
8 character strings the
remaining 8 characters are Field #8 16-Char ASCII (String variable value after change - new value)
padded with nulls.
Field #9 32-Bit Integer (Volume totalizer at time of change)
Field #10 32-Bit Integer (Mass totalizer at the time of the change)

Using The Custom Reports to Access the Text

Archive Feature
The actual data which will be archived in the 'Text Archive' buffer is identified
within the body of a 'User Custom Report Template'. This is done by enclosing
the data in question between braces '{}' and preceding the opening brace '{'
character with either Boolean 1000 (archive the data identified between the
braces) or Boolean 2000 (print and archive the data identified between the
braces). In the example 'Batch End' report shown below, the first half of the
report will be printed and stored in the 'Text Archive' while the second half of
the report will not print but will be stored in the 'Text Archive'.
X{ Company Name
The user has embedded a Batch Report
Boolean point address 2000
to indicate that the following Date : XX/XX/XX Time : XX:XX:XX Computer ID : XXXXXXX
data enclosed by the {}
characters is to be printed Meter ID XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
Product ID XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
and archived.
API Table Selected XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
When embedding the point, Batch Start Date XX/XX/XX XX/XX/XX
set the width=1 Batch Start Time XX:XX:XX XX:XX:XX
and number of decimal Batch End Date XX/XX/XX XX/XX/XX
places=0. Batch End Time XX:XX:XX XX:XX:XX
Batch Gross (IV) BBL XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX
Batch Net (GSV) BBL XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX
Batch Mass LB XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX}
X{
Opening Gross (IV) BBL XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX
The User has embedded a Opening Net (GSV) BBL XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX
Boolean point address 1000 Opening Mass LB XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX
to indicate that the following Closing Gross (IV) BBL XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX
Closing Net (GSV) BBL XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX
data enclosed by the {}
Closing Mass LB XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX
characters is to be archived Batch Flow Weighted Averages:
only and not printed. Gross Flow (IV) BBL/HR XXXXXX.X XXXXX.X
When embedding the point, Temperature Deg.F XXXXXX.X XXXXX.X
set the width=1 Pressure PSIG XXXXXX.X XXXXX.X
and number of decimal Flowing Density GM/CC XXXXXX.X XXXXX.X
places=0. API @ 60 Deg.F XXXXXX.X XXXXX.X
VCF X.XXXX X.XXXX
CPL X.XXXX X.XXXX
Meter Factor X.XXXX X.XXXX
}
INFO - Data is archived only The template files shown below can be used to archive text data whenever the
when the report is processed report is processed.
for the first time. Reprinting a
stored report does not cause 1) 'FILENAME.TP1' Snapshot Report
any data to be stored in the
archive. 2) 'FILENAME.TP2' Batch Report
3) 'FILENAME.TP3' Daily Report
4) 'FILENAME.TP4' Prover Report

Custom Report Templates

A default selection of files with the extension 'TP?' are created automatically
when OmniCom is installed, They can be found in the 'OMNI2?' subdirectories.
For example the OMNI20 subdirectory contains the following template files:
REV20A.TP1 Interval Report Independent Products

REV20A.TP2 Batch Report Independent Products
REV20A.TP3 Daily Report Independent Products
REV20A.TP4 Prove Report Independent Products Double Chronometry
REV20B.TP1 Interval Report Independent Products
REV20B.TP2 Batch Report Independent Products
REV20B.TP3 Daily Report Independent Products
REV20B.TP4 Prove Report Independent Products Normal Pipe Prover
REV20C.TP1 Interval Report Common Product
REV20C.TP2 Batch Report Common Product
REV20C.TP3 Daily Report Common Product
REV20C.TP4 Prove Report Common Product Double Chronometry
REV20D.TP1 Interval Report Common Product
REV20D.TP2 Batch Report Common Product
REV20D.TP3 Daily Report Common Product
REV20D.TP4 Prove Report Common Product Normal Pipe Prover
REV20E.TP4* Prove Report Master Meter Method
REV20M.TP4* Prove Report Mass Meter Proving Normal Pipe Prover
REV20MC.TP4* Prove Report Mass Meter Proving Double Chronometry
REV20LC.TP4* Prove Report Double Chronometry Viscosity Linearization
REV20LP.TP4* Prove Report Pipe Prover Viscosity Linearization
Note: Templates can only be accessed if they exist; i.e., if you are currently working
* To avoid duplication and on 'FILENAME.OMI' opening the custom templates will just create an empty
conserve disk space file. You must first create a set of templates by copying the appropriate sample
these templates do not templates as follows:
have matching TP1, TP2
and TP3 templates.
Select TP1 though TP3
1) At the OmniCom File menu select 'Shell to DOS'.
from the appropriate set
2) Type the following to create a set of custom templates for a common
(A, B, C or D) above
depending on product system using a full sized pipe prover (assumes Rev. 20.xx
independent or common application):
product.
COPY OMNI20\REV20D.TP? OMNI20\filename.TP?
3) Type EXIT to return to OmniCom.
In the above example OMNI20 is the sub directory which contains all files
related to Application Revision 20. Likewise OMNI24 refers to Revision 24
applications.

Communicating with Honeywell

ST3000/STT3000 Smart Transmitters
Contents
contained in the User Digitally Enhanced (DE) Protocol Overview ................................................. 2
Manual, and is applicable to
all firmware revisions. Transmitter Database..................................................................................... 2
published as an appendix to
Handheld Communicator......................................... 3
Using the Honeywell
user manuals of firmware Combo Module LED Status Indicators.......................................................... 3
earlier. Switching Between Analog and Digital Mode............................................... 4
Auto Mode ................................................................................................................4
Communication with
Manual Operation .....................................................................................................4
Honeywell Viewing the Status of the Honeywell Transmitter from the Omni Front
ST3000/STT3000 Smart Panel ............................................................................................................... 4
Transmitters - This feature
allows you to communicate
with Honeywell Smart
Temperature and Pressure
Transmitters, via Omnis H
type Process I/O Combo
Module and using
Honeywells DE Protocol. Scope
All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the
feature of communicating with Honeywell ST3000 Smart Transmitters. This
feature uses Honeywells Digitally Enhanced (DE) Protocol and requires that an
H Combo I/O Module be installed in your flow computer.
Abstract
Using 'H' Combo I/O Modules, the Omni Flow Computer can communicate with
Honeywell Smart Temperature and Pressure Transmitters using Honeywells
DE Protocol. Up to 4 transmitters can be connected to each 'H' Type Combo
Module, with loop power being provided by the combo module.

Digitally Enhanced (DE) Protocol Overview

Digital data is transmitted serially between the flow computer and Honeywell
Smart Transmitters by modulating the current in the two wire loop connecting
the devices. Power for the transmitter is also taken from this current loop. Data
is transmitted at 218.47 bits per second with a digital '0' = 20 mA and a digital
'1 = 4 mA.
In normal operation, the Honeywell transmitter operates in the '6-byte Broadcast
Mode'. In this mode, the transmitter transmits the following data to the flow
computer every 366 msec:
Byte #1 Status Flags
Byte #2-#4 Process Variables % Span Value (3-byte floating point)
Byte #5 Database ID (indicates where in the transmitters database Byte
#6 below belongs)
Byte #6 Database Data Value
Transmitter Database
By using the data contained in Bytes #5 and #6, the flow computer builds and
maintains an exact copy of the smart transmitters configuration database. A
transmitter database varies in size from about 90 bytes for a pressure
transmitter to 120 bytes for a temperature transmitter. It takes between 30 and
45 seconds to completely build a copy of the transmitter database within the
flow computer. The transmitter database is continuously compared against the
flow computer configuration settings for that transmitter. The flow computer
automatically corrects any differences between the databases by writing the
correct configuration data to the transmitter.

TB-960704 ST3000 Smart Transmitters
Handheld
Using the Honeywell
Communicator
The flow computer is responsible for configuring the following entries within the
transmitter:
1) Lower Range Value (LRV) or Zero
2) Transmitter Span or Upper Range Limit (URL)
3) Damping Factor
4) Tag Name
Any changes made to 1, 2 and 3 using the handheld communicator will be
overwritten by the flow computer. In the digital mode it is not necessary to
calibrate the transmitter output using the handheld communicator. The digital
signal can be calibrated using the normal Omni analog input method described
in Chapter 8 of Volume 1.
Combo Module LED Status Indicators

Each I/O channel of the 'H' Combo module has a set of two LED indicators, one
green and one red. The green LED shows all communication activity taking
place on the channel (flow computer, transmitter and handheld communicator if
connected). The Red LED lights only when the flow computer is transmitting
data to the transmitter.
Normal digital operation is indicated by a regular pulsation of the green LED
(about 3 per second). The red LED will be seen to blink whenever a
configuration change is made in the flow computer which affects that particular
transmitter.

Switching Between Analog and Digital Mode.
Auto Mode
Connecting an analog mode Honeywell smart transmitter to the computer will
cause the flow computer to automatically switch the transmitter to the digital DE
mode, sending out a communication request to the Honeywell transmitter. A
switch over to the digital mode by the transmitter will cause the green LED on
the H combo module to pulse steadily indicating that communications have
been established.
Manual Operation
For manual operation, do the following:
1. Disable communications between the Honeywell transmitter and the flow
computer by deleting all I/O point assignments within the flow computer
to that I/O point.
2. Using the Honeywell SFC, SCT or any Honeywell handheld
communicator, press [Shift] [A/D] and wait till the handheld displays
'Change to Analog?'
3. Answer (Yes) by pressing [Enter]. SFC Working will be displayed. The
'H' Combo modules green LED on that channel will stop pulsing.
4. Re-enter the I/O point to cause the Omni to send the communication
request command to the Honeywell and after three command sends the
green LED on the Honeywell module will pulse at a steady 3Hz rate.

Viewing the Status of the Honeywell
Transmitter from the Omni Front Panel
To verify the data being received from the smart transmitter, press [Input]
[Status] and [Enter] from the front panel. The following displays:
H1-2 Transmitter
PV% - 25.00
Status IDLE
LRV .0
SPAN 150.0
Damp Sec. .00
Conformity bit 0
SW Revision 2.1
Serial # xxxxxxxx
Transmitter Type GP
URL 3000
ID/TAG PT202
SV .00

H1-2 Transmitter : Indicates the Honeywell Combo Module (H1) and the
channel number on that module (Channel 2 in this case).
PV% : Process variable value in percentage of the transmitters

span. A -25.00 displayed on the Omni could mean that
the transmitter is not communicating (see Status
definition below).
Status : There are five status states.
1) OK : Communications between the flow

computer and smart Honeywell transmitter
are OK. The database within the
transmitter matches the flow computer.
2) Idle : This flow computer I/O point has been

assigned to a Honeywell transmitter but is
not receiving data from the transmitter.
Possible cause is a wiring problem such as
reversal of wiring. If you observe the
status LEDs you will note that the flow
computer attempts to establish
communications by sending a wake-up
command every 10 seconds or so.
3) Bad PV : Communications between the flow

are OK but the transmitter has determined
that a critical error has occurred within the
transmitter meaning the value of the
process variable cannot be trusted. The
flow computer will set the transducer
failure alarm and follow the fail code
strategy selected by the user for this
transducer.
4) DB Error : Communications between the flow

are OK but the flow Computer has
determined that the database within the
flow computer does not agree with the
database within the transmitter. If you
observe the status LEDs you will note that
the flow computer attempts to correct the
transmitters database by writing the
correct data to the transmitter once every
30-45 seconds or so.

5) 4 Byte : The transmitter is operating in the 4-Byte

Broadcast Mode. Because the flow
computer will not tolerate this mode of
operation, this status display should only
be displayed momentarily as the flow
computer will automatically switch the
transmitter into the 6-Byte Broadcast
Mode.
LRV : Lower Range Value of the transmitter in engineering

units. Engineering units are degrees Celsius for
temperature transmitters, inches of water for differential
pressure transmitters, and pounds per square inch for
pressure transmitters.
Span : The Span of the transmitter in engineering units (the

Span is the difference between the lower and upper
ranges of the transmitter). Engineering units are degrees
Celsius for temperature transmitters, inches of water for
differential pressure transmitters, and pounds per square
inch for pressure transmitters. The flow computer will
display DB Error if the user tries to enter a span of 0%
or a span which would exceed the transmitters upper
range limit' (URL).
Damp Seconds : Damping Time of the transmitter output in seconds.
Conformity Bit : Meaningful only with differential pressure transmitters.

Conformity Bit 0 = linear output; Conformity Bit 1 =
square root output. This bit should always be 0 for smart
temperature transmitters.
Software Revision : Current Software installed within the smart device.
Serial # : Serial Number of the smart transmitter.
Transmitter Type : Valid transmitter types are:
TT = Temperature Transmitter
DP = Differential Pressure Transmitter
GP = Gauge Pressure Transmitter

URL : Upper Range Limit of the transmitter in engineering

units. The transmitter will not accept configuration entries
which exceed this value.
ID/TAG : ASCII string used to identify the transmitter.
SV : Secondary Process Variable Value expressed in C. This

represents sensor temperature for pressure transmitters,
and junction temperature for temperature transmitters.
The flow computer may or may not have a value in this
field, depending upon whether the SV is included in the
part of the transmitters database which is sent to the
Omni.

Stability Requirements: Final Calibration of

Flow Computer
Contents
contained in Volume 1, and Instructions .................................................................................................... 1
is applicable to Revision
20.70/24.70+.
published with a different Scope
page layout.
All Omni 6000/3000 Flow Computers have calibration stability requirements.
Abstract
Because of the temperature sensitivity and bit resolutions of the A/D and D/A
converters, and the high accuracy requirements, it is important that the
following procedures are followed when calibrating flow computer I/O circuits.
Instructions
(1) Adjust the power supply to give 5.05-5.10 volts at backplane test points.
(2) All final calibrations must be performed using the matching set of combo
modules and power supply module (i.e. changing the power supply or
adjusting the voltage during the final calibration requires that a sample
calibration made up to that point be checked. If there is a noticeable
change, all calibrated points should be rechecked).
(3) Before calibrating, eliminate temperature gradient errors by closing the
box and allowing at least 20 minutes for temperature stabilization to
occur. Ensure that unit is not in a high air draft area (i.e. in the path of a
fan or AC duct) Make adjustments such as jumper repositioning quickly.
Wherever possible keep the unit closed to retain internal heat. Board
replacements will require that sufficient time be allowed to achieve
temperature stability.
(4) Observe temperature stability requirements of any equipment used in
the calibration process (i.e., current and voltage generators, digital
voltmeters etc.).
TB-970701 w ALL.70+ 1
Secondary Totalizers Provide Net Volume at

Temperatures Other than 15C or 60F
Contents
contained in Volumes 2, 3 Database Location of Second Set of Net Totalizer Data Points .................. 2
and 4, applicable to firmware
revisions 20/24.71+ and Keypad Entries Needed to Display the Extra Totalizers .............................. 2
21/25.71+.
published with a different
page layout.
Scope
All firmware Versions 20/24 and 21/25, Revisions.70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000
Flow Computers have secondary net totalizers for when more than one
reference temperature is required.
Abstract
Some times it is necessary to provide net totalizers at more than one reference
temperature.
Following are the Modbus data points that are used to provide secondary net
totalizers in the Omni. Secondary totalizers are calculated real time just like the
normal totalizers.
The secondary totalizers are activated by setting up floating point data point
7699 with the secondary reference temperature required. This data point is
initialized to 0 at a cold start up which effectively disables the extra totalizers
and their appearance on the Omni default reports (obviously, 0 cannot be used
as a second reference temperature).
You may set up 7699 with a simple variable statement. For example: 7699=#68
will provide a second set of net totalizers corrected to 68 degrees. You may also
initialize point 7699 via a one time Modbus write. If you choose to use the
statement method you may remove the statement immediately after you enter
it, but you should probably leave it to serve as a document trail.
Note that the Omni initializes point 7699 to 0.0 on a cold boot. A cold boot
occurs after a Clear All Ram command is executed.
TB-970702 w ALL.70+ 1
Database Location of Second Set of Net

Totalizer Data Points
CURRENT PREVIOUS CURRENT PREVIOUS
BATCH BATCH DAILY DAY
Meter #1 5196 5198 5197 5199
Meter #2 5296 5298 5297 5299
Meter #3 5396 5398 5397 5399
Meter #4 5496 5498 5497 5499
Station 5896 5898 5897 5899
Keypad Entries Needed to Display the Extra

Totalizers
Secondary totalizers are viewed using the same key presses used to view the
normal net totalizers. For example: pressing [Meter] [n] [Net] or [Net] [Meter]
[n] will display meter n net flow rates and totalizers followed by the secondary
net totalizers. Pressing [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Net] will display the batch net
totalizer followed by the secondary batch net totalizer. Likewise, the Station
secondary totals are viewed using the same key presses that are used to view
the normal station net total. Pressing [Net] will display the station net totalizer
followed by the secondary net totalizer. Pressing [Batch] [Net] will display the
station batch net totalizer followed by the secondary batch net totalizer.
2 TB-970702 w ALL.70+
Using Boolean Statements to Provide

Custom Alarms in the Flow Computer
Contents
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract........................................................................................................... 1
Example: ..................................................................................................................2
Scope
User Manual Reference - All firmware revisions Version .70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers
This technical bulletin have the feature of customizing alarms with Boolean statements.
complements the information
all firmware revisions Version
.70+.
Abstract
This bulletin was previously The flow computer automatically records and logs many important alarm events
page layout.
and status changes. These events include transducer Low Alarm and High
Alarm states and failure of any transducer connected to the flow computer
which is measurement related.
There are instances however where the flow computer user would like to
monitor other internal or external status events that may have nothing to do with
the measurement functions. These alarms may be the result of a digital I/O
point changing state, or the result of a Boolean logic statement or a variable
statement comparison.
Because of this requirement, the last 16 Boolean statements of the flow
computer serve the dual function of evaluating normal logic expressions, and
also providing user configurable alarm messages. The alarm message text to
be logged and displayed can be entered into the expression fields in any of
these last 16 Boolean statements. These statement numbers are, 1057 through
1072 for flow computers with 48 Boolean statements, and 1073 through 1088
for computers with 64 statements.
Each Boolean statement has an associated status point which is accessed using
the same address as the statement number (Modbus Point 1072 for instance).
The logic state of this status bit normally reflects the logical result of the
statement (1 or 0, true or false). When the statement is used to provide a
custom alarm message it functions in a different manner. To cause an alarm
message to be logged, simply turn on the status point associated with the
message.
TB-970801 w ALL.70+ 1
Example:
In this example, the user wishes to monitor a tank level switch that is connected
to Digital I/O Point #1. When the tank level is high, the level switch applies 24
volts to the digital I/O point.
Digital I/O Point #1 is first assigned to the Dummy Boolean 1700, this reserves
the Point as a digital Input . Modbus Point 1001 will simply follow the digital
level applied to the terminals of digital point #1. Had it been Digital Point #22,
Modbus Point 1022 would be affected.
1025: 1072=1001
Move logic value of Digital I/O #1 into Point 1072.

1072: High Level Alarm
Actual alarm text which appears in alarm log.
Statement 1025 (above) is used to transfer the logic state of Digital I/O Point #1
to Point 1072, activating the user alarm whenever 24 volts is applied to the
input terminals by the tank high level switch contacts.
2 TB-970801 w ALL.70+
Database:
Omni Flow Computer Modbus
Overview
Contents
contained in Volume 4 Database Extents...................................... 4
Modbus Database
Address and Index I/O Driver Concerns When Interfacing to Omni Equipment....................... 12
Numbers, applicable to all For Example:.................................................................................................................................. 12
firmware revisions .70+.
Write Single Variable - Modbus Function 06 ............................................................12
published with a different Address Ranges - Future Expansion .......................................................................12
page layout.
Modbus Database -
Modbus function codes are
shown in hexadecimal
Scope
th
notation. The 4 digit (from All firmware revisions Versions 70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers
the right) of the data point
address defines the data
are characterized by a Modbus database structured as described in this
type. technical bulletin.
TB-970802 w ALL.70+ 1
Abstract
The following are the data types within the database:
Digital Flag Bits : Also known as Boolean bits, status bits and
command bits. All data points of this type can
be read via Modbus function code 01 and
written to using function codes 05 and 0F .
Function codes 01 and 0F transfer byte
packed data that is sent in the byte order they
are prepared (not word order). Points are
packed eight to a byte, packing from least
significant to most significant Unused bit
positions within a byte are cleared on
transmission from the Omni and ignored by
the Omni when receiving.
Writing to status points is allowed but
normally is pointless as the status point will
be refreshed by the Omni every 500 ms.
Valid addresses for this type of data are:
1XXX i.e. 1101, 1705, 1921 etc.
16-bit Integer Registers : All data points of this type can be read via
Modbus function code 03 and written to using
function codes 06 and 10.
Byte order transmitted is: MS byte then LS
byte.
X3XXX i.e. 3121, 13133 etc.
8-character ASCII Strings : All data points of this type can be read via
function code 10 (note that function code 06
is not available on this data type).
Byte order transmitted is as you would type it.
4XXX i.e. 4101, 4502 etc.
32-bit Integer Registers : Formatted as twos complement. All data

points of this type can be read via Modbus
function 03 and written to using function
codes 06 and 10.
Byte order transmitted is: MS byte of MS
word, LS byte of MS word, MS byte of LS
word then LS byte of LS word.
Valid addresses for this data type are: X5XXX
i.e. 5101, 15205 etc.
2 TB-970802 w ALL.70+
TB-970802 Database: Overview
32-bit IEEE Floating Point : All data points of this type can be read via
Modbus function 03 and written to using
function codes 06 and 10.
Byte order transmitted is: Mantissa Sign
bit/Exponent byte, LS Exponent bit/MS
mantissa byte, middle significant mantissa
byte then LS mantissa byte.
Valid addresses for this data type are: X7XXX
i.e. 7210, 17006 etc.
16-character ASCII Strings : All data points of this type can be read via
function code 10 (note that function code 06
is not available for this data type).
Byte order transmitted is as you would type it.
14XXX i.e. 14001, 14022 etc.
TB-970802 w ALL.71+ 3
Database
Extents
Data within the Omni Flow Computer data base is organized in logical groups.
Certain data written to the Omni requires special processing to occur in the
Omni before it is stored in the data base. Other data is grouped together
because it is related in function i.e. a collection of real-time data for a specific
process.
The list that follows shows the extent of each table or set of data points within
the data base. Because the sets of data are not connected, data from adjacent
sets cannot be read or written in the same poll.
Database Extents
APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
DATA POINT
DATA TYPE FUNCTION CODES COMMENTS
ADDRESS
(HEX)
Used to Read/Write
03 User-defined read only packet - Omni
native mode.
00001 Mixed
03 (06) (10) User-defined array - Modicon
compatible.
native mode.
00201 Mixed
03 (06) (10) User defined array - Modicon
compatible.
native mode.
00401 Mixed
03 (06) (10) User defined array - Modicon
compatible.
#1 User defined data archive record -
0701 Mixed 03
Firmware Revisions .70+.
0702 Mixed 03
0703 Mixed 03
0704 Mixed 03
0705 Mixed 03
0706 Mixed 03
0707 Mixed 03
0708 Mixed 03
0709 Mixed 03
#10 User defined data archive record
0710 Mixed 03
- Firmware Revisions .70+.
4 TB-970802 w ALL.70+
Database Extents (Continued)

APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
DATA POINT FUNCTION CODES
DATA TYPE (HEX) COMMENTS
ADDRESS
Used to
Read (Write)
Alarm/Event Log archive record -

0711 Mixed 03
Audit Log archive record - Firmware
0712 Mixed 03
Revision Versions .70+.
1001
Status &
to 01, (05), (OF)
Command
1099
1101
to Status 01
1199
1201
to Status 01
1299
1301
to Status 01
1399
1401
to Status 01
1499
1501 Point 1600 is a dummy point
Status &
to 01, (05), (OF) included to concatenate tables 15XX
Command
1699 and 16XX.
1701
Status &
to 01, (05), (OF)
Command
1799
1801
to Status 01
1899
1901
to Status 01
1999
1301
to Status 01
1399
2001 Reserved for Future Expansion -
to Status 01 currently will return error exception
2100 02 (illegal data address).
2101
to Status 01
2199
2201
to Status 01
2299
2301
to Status 01
2399
TB-970802 w ALL.71+ 5

APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
ADDRESS
Used to
Read (Write)
2401
to Status 01
2499
2701
Status &
to 01, (05), (OF)
Command
2799
2801
to Status 01
2899
3001
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Register
3099
3101
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Register
3199
3201
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Register
3299
3301
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Register
3399
3401
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Register
3499
3501
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Register
3599
3601
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Register
3699
3701
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Register
3799
3801
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Register
3899
3901
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Register
3999
6 TB-970802 w ALL.70+

APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
ADDRESS
Used to
Read (Write)

8-character
to 03, (10) currently will return error exception
ASCII String
4101
8-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
4199
4201
8-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
4299
4301
8-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
4399
4401
8-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
4499
4501
8-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
4599
4601
8-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
4699
4701
8-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
4799
4801
8-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
4899
4901
8-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
4999
32-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10) currently will return error exception
2s Complement
5101
32-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
2s Complement
5199
5201
32-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
2s Complement
5299
5301
32-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
2s Complement
5399
5401
32-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
2s Complement
5499
TB-970802 w ALL.71+ 7

APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
ADDRESS
Used to
Read (Write)
5501
32-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
2s Complement
5599
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
5801
32-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
2s Complement
5899
5901
32-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
2s Complement
5999
6001
32-bit IEEE Applicable to Firmware Revisions
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point 22/26.71+ only.
6099
6101
32-bit IEEE 32-bit, 2s Complement (Firmware
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point Revision 23.70+ only).
6199
6201
to 03, (06), (10)
6299
6301
to 03, (06), (10)
6399
6401 32-bit, 2s Complement (Firmware
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10) Revisions 23.70+ and 22/26.71+
Floating Point
6499 only).
6501
to 03, (06), (10)
6799
6801
to 03, (06), (10)
6899
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
7001
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
7099
7101
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
7199
8 TB-970802 w ALL.70+

APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
ADDRESS
Used to
Read (Write)
7201
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
7299
7301
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
7399
7401
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
7499
7501
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
7599
7601
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
7699
7701
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
7799
7801
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
7899
7901
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point 20/24.71+ and 22/26.71+ only.
8499
8501
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
8599
8601
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
8699
8701
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
8799
8801
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
8899
8901
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point 20.71+ and 22/26.71+ only.
8999
9001
ASCII Text Maximum of sixty-four 128-byte
to 41, (42)
Buffers buffers per data point .
9499
9500
Reserved for Future Expansion - currently will return error exception 02
to
(illegal data address).
13000
TB-970802 w ALL.71+ 9

APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
ADDRESS
Used to
Read (Write)
13001
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Registers
13299
13301
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Registers
13399
13401
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Registers
13499
13501
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Registers
13599
13601
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Registers
13699
13701
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Registers
13799
13801
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Registers
13899
13901
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Registers
13999
14001
16-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
14099
14101
16-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
14199
14201
16-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
14299
14301
16-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
14399
14400
to
15000
15001
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
15299
15300
to
17000
10 TB-970802 w ALL.70+

APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
ADDRESS
Used to
Read (Write)
17001
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
17399
17401
32-bit IEEE Not applicable to Firmware Revisions
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point 22 & 26.
17499
17501
32-bit IEEE Not applicable to Firmware Revisions
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point 21/25 & 22/26.
17899
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
18101
to 03, (06), (10)
18199
18200
to
49999
TB-970802 w ALL.71+ 11
I/O Driver Concerns When Interfacing to Omni

Equipment
Most but not all of the data is grouped in blocks of 100 or so data points. These
blocks in many cases are not connected.
Limit requests for contiguous data across different blocks by examining the third
digit from the right of the data point start and end addresses. If the digit is
different break up the poll request.
For Example:
An application requires data from points 7188, 7201 and 7210 to be read and
displayed on screen. An intelligent I/O driver may determine that it is more
efficient to read 23 data points starting with point 7188 and discard the unused
data. In this particular example the Omni will transmit the data for points 7188
through 7199 and blank data will be returned for data points 7200 through 7210
because the data requested is in two different blocks within the Omni. To obtain
the data correctly the I/O driver should determine that point 7188 and point
7201 are in different data blocks (because the third digit from the right changed
from a 1 to a 2) and send out two data requests; one request for point 7188 and
another for points 7201 through 7210.
Write Single Variable - Modbus Function 06

Omni software revisions 20.44 and greater implement this function on all 16-bit
and 32-bit data points. Revisions prior to 20.44 implement function 06 on 16-bit
integers only. To maintain compatibility with early Omni software revisions it
may be advisable to use function 10 to write to single data points as well as
multiple data points.
Address Ranges - Future Expansion

Some of the address ranges specified in this document encompass more data
than may be available on all applications at this time, Omni advises that for
future compatibility any software driver developed should be able to support
these address ranges.
12 TB-970802 w ALL.70+
Meter Factor Linearization
Contents
contained in Volume 2 and Meter Factor Linearization Function...........................................................................2
Volume 3, applicable to
Firmware Revision
Meter Factor Validation and Control Chart Functions.................................................3
22.70+/26.70+. This bulletin
was previously published
with a different page layout.
Scope
Firmware Revisions 22.70+ and 26.70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow
Computers have the feature of Meter Factor Linearization. This feature applies
to Turbine/Positive Displacement Liquid Flow Metering Systems (with Meter
Factor Linearization).
TB-970803 w 22/26.70+ 1
Abstract
Meter Factor Linearization Function

Flowmeter performance varies depending upon flow rate and fluid viscosity.
The flow computer can compensate for this variation in performance by
applying a meter factor which is determined by interpolation of a base meter
factor curve. The user develops this base meter factor curve by proving the
flowmeter at various flow rates and determining the meter factors for those flow
rates.
A base meter factor curve must be developed for each product or fluid
viscosity. The curve can consist of from one to twelve meter factor / flow rate
points.
The MF is continuously adjusted for Prove Base

flowrate during a delivery. The MF is Flowrate
flow weight averaged for the batch.
Meter Factor
The flow computer lifts or lowers MFs are normalized to the

the MF curve based on the MF Prove Base Flowrate for
obtained at the latest official validation / comparison and
flowmeter proving. historical archival purposes.
Flowrate
Fig. 1. Base Meter Factor Curve
2 TB-970803 w 22/26.70+
TB-970803 Meter Factor Linearization
Meter Factor Validation and Control Chart Functions

The second purpose of the base meter factor curve is also to act as a reference
against which any meter factors developed during subsequent provings of the
flowmeter can be compared. As an aid to this comparison the user specifies the
base proving flow rate. This value is the flow rate which is considered to be the
normal for the flowmeter concerned. For comparison purposes, each
subsequent meter factor is normalized to the base proving flow rate and must
pass two tests before it can be implemented. The first test checks that the
calculated meter factor is within some maximum percentage deviation from the
base curve.
The second test verifies that the meter factor when normalized to the base
proving flow rate is within some maximum percentage deviation from the
historical average of the last n meter factors. Only normalized and
implemented meter factors are included in the historical average. The number
n can be one through 10.
Test 2 - Maximum Deviation Meter Factor at

Allowed From The Average Actual Flowrate
of The Last n Meter Factors (Passes Test 1)
Historical Average of
Last n Meter Factors
Base MF Curve
Test 1 - Maximum Deviation Meter Factor Normalized to

Allowed From Base Curve Prove Base Flowrate
(Fails Test 2)
Fig. 2. The Function of the Meter Factor Base Curve
TB-970803 w 22/26.71+ 3
Calculation of Natural Gas Net Volume and

Energy: Using Gas Chromatograph, Product
Overrides or Live 4-20mA Analyzer Inputs of
Specific Gravity and Heating Value
Contents
complements the information Abstract ........................................................................................................... 2
contained i nVolume 3 ,
Basic Calculation
s ......................................................................................... 2
applicable to Revision
23.71/27.71. Critical Configuration Entries Which Affect the Calculation of Net Volume
This bulletin was previously and Energy ..................................................................................................... 2
page format. Density of Air at Base Condition ..............................................................................2
s
Gas Relative Density (SG .).......................................................................................3
Gas Heating Value (HV )............................................................................................3
Natural Gas Net Volume
Key Analyzer Setup Menu Entries Neede .................................................................3
d
and Energy Calculation -
Natural gas net volume and No Gas Chromatograph Used - Manual Overrides Require ...........................................................
d 3
energy calculations apply to Component Analysis Data Obtained From a Gas Chromatograp ..................................................
h 4
all gas flow computers, Using Manual Overrides for Component Analysis Dat ...................................................................
a 4
(firmware Revisions Component Analysis Data via a Serial Data Lin .............................................................................
k 4
23/27.71) shipped after July Using Live Inputs for Heating Value, Specific Gravity, Nitrogen or Carbon Dioxid .........................e 4
1997. These calculations are
considered using a gas
chromatograph, product
overrides, or live 4-20 mA
analyzer inputs of specific
gravity (SG) and heating
Scope
value (HV). Firmware Revisions 23.71+ and 27.71+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow
Computers have the feature of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy
Calculation. This feature applies to Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems.
This bulletin covers natural gas net volume and energy calculations using a gas
chromatograph, product overrides, or live 4-20 mA analyzer inputs of specific
gravity (SG) and heating value HV).(
TB-970804 w 23/27.71+ 1
Abstract
Gas compositional data needed by the flow computer to calculate flowing
density, mass flow and energy flow of natural gas can be obtained from various
sources. The following describes how the flow computer should be configured
for each possible scenario.
Basic Calculations
The basic calculations are:
q Net Volume = Mass Flow / Density @ Base Conditions (1)
q Energy = Net Volume x Heating Value (2)
Density at Base Conditions can be obtained by one of the following methods:

q (GC Relative Density) x (Density of Air @ Base Conditions) (3)
q (Override Relative Density) x (Density of Air @ Base Conditions) (4)
q (Live 4-20mA Relative Density) x (Density of Air @ Base Conditions) (5)
q Calculated using Detailed Method of AGA 8 (6)
Heating Value is obtained using one of the following methods:

Heating Value Calculation - q GC Analysis HV (7)
The flow computer always
calculates Heating Value q Manual Override HV (8)
using one of the mentioned q Live 4-20mA HV (9)
standards, even if it is
instructed not to use it. q Calculated using AGA 5, GPA 2172 or ISO 6976
These calculated values are (component analysis required) (10)
stored in the data base and
can be used to compare
against the values obtained Component Analysis Data is obtained from one of the following sources:
from the GC or calorimeter.
7629=Mtr #1 calculated HV q Online Danalyzer or Applied Automation Gas Chromatograph (11)
7630=Mtr #2 calculated HV q Manual Overrides in the Fluid Data Analysis menu (12)
7631=Mtr #3 calculated HV
7632=Mtr #4 calculated HV q Serial Communication Link (13)
q Live 4-20mA SG, HV, N2 and CO2
(AGA 8 gross calculation methods only) (14)
Critical Configuration Entries Which Affect the

Calculation of Net Volume and Energy
Density of Air at Base Conditions

This entry is in the Factor Setup menu. Setting this entry to 0 ensures that
gas density at base conditions is calculated using AGA 8. (method (6) previous
page). Entering the density of air at base conditions assuming a valid gas
relative density (SG) is available (see next paragraph) will override the AGA 8
calculation of gas density at base conditions. In this case gas density at base
conditions is calculated using either method (3), (4) or (5) (previous page).
2 TB-970804 w 23/27.71+
TB-970804 Calculation of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy
Gas Relative Density (SG)

This entry is located in the Fluid Analysis Data menu. One entry per active
product is required. It is mandatory that this field contain a valid value of SG
for all AGA 8 gross calculation methods except for 1985 method #4. The data
in this field can be manually entered or, automatically overwritten by a live 4-
20mA input of SG if it exists. This entry also serves as the GC SG override if
a GC is providing gas relative density (SG) and a GC failure occurs.
Entering a minus value in this field will force the flow computer to calculate gas
density at base conditions using AGA 8. (method (6) previous page). Entering
the gas relative density (SG) assuming a non zero Density of Air @ Base
Conditions is entered (see above) will override the AGA 8 calculation of gas
density at base conditions. In this case gas density at base conditions is
calculated using either method (3), (4) or (5) (previous page).
When an AGA 8 detailed method is selected and a GC is used to provide gas
relative density (SG), this entry field is ignored unless a GC failure occurs and
the GC Fail Code entry is set to Use Override on GC Failure.
Gas Heating Value (HV)

This entry is located in the Fluid Analysis Data menu. One entry per active
product is required. It is mandatory that this field contain a valid value of HV
for AGA 8 gross calculation method #1 and also AGA 8 1985 methods #2 and
#4. The data in this field can be manually entered or, automatically overwritten
by a live 4-20mA input of HV if it exists. This entry also serves as the GC HV
override if a GC is providing gas heating value (HV) and a GC failure occurs.
Entering a minus value in this field will force the flow computer to use a
calculated gas heating value (HV) calculated using either AGA 5, GPA 2172 or
ISO 6976 ( method (10) previous page). Entering a positive value into the gas
heating value (HV) entry will override the AGA 5, GPA 2172 or ISO 6976
calculation of gas heating value (HV).
When an AGA 8 detailed method is selected and a GC is used to provide gas
heating value (HV), this entry field is ignored unless a GC failure occurs and
the GC Fail Code entry is set to Use Override on GC Failure.
Key Analyzer Setup Menu Entries Needed

The following text discusses only those key entries that must be made to ensure
that the right values for component analysis are used in the calculation of Net
Volume and Energy Flow.
No Gas Chromatograph Used - Manual Overrides Required

Select Always Use Fluid Data Overrides for GC Fail Code in the Analyzer
Setup menu. No other entries are needed.
TB-970804 w 23/27.71+ 3
Component Analysis Data Obtained From a Gas Chromatograph

Select either Never Use Fluid Data Overrides or On Fail Use Fluid Data
Overrides for GC Fail Code in the Analyzer Setup menu to ensure that the
GC data is used in place of the Fluid Data & Analysis Data overrides.
Using the GC Heating Value and Relative Density. To ensure that the
heating value and relative density calculated by GC are used in the
calculations, make sure that component numbers are assigned for the
Heating Value and Specific Gravity entries in the Analyzer Setup menu.
The number entered is not critical, simply use the next consecutive numbers
after all the other components are numbered.
Ignoring the GC Heating Value and Relative Density. Entering 0 for the
component number for Heating Value and Specific Gravity entries in the
Analyzer Setup menu causes the flow computer to ignore the heating value
and relative density sent by the GC and to use the override values entered
in the Fluid Data & Analysis Data menu.
Using Manual Overrides for Component Analysis Data

Activate the Fluid Data & Analysis entries by selecting Always Use Fluid Data
Overrides for GC Fail Code in the Analyzer Setup menu. No other entries are
needed in the Analyzer Setup menu.
Enter the compositional analysis data values into the appropriate fields in the
Fluid Data & Analysis menu.
Component Analysis Data via a Serial Data Link

Compositional analysis data values should be written into the appropriate
Modbus points normally containing the manual overrides in the Fluid Data &
Analysis menu.
Using Live Inputs for Heating Value, Specific Gravity, Nitrogen or

Carbon Dioxide
In the Station Configure menu, assign valid I/O points where 4-20mA and/or
Solartron 3096 gravitometer signals will be connected. Input valid scaling
factors in the Station N2 / SG Setup menu.
Note that override data fields in Product #1 entries of the Fluid Data &
Analysis Data menu are overwritten by live data values when 4-20mA inputs
are used for HV, SG, N2 or CO2.
4 TB-970804 w 23/27.71+
Dual Pulse Flowmeter Pulse Fidelity

Checking
Contents
contained in Volumes 1, 3
Installation Practices...................................................................................... 2
and 4, and is applicable to
firmware revisions 20/24, How the Flow Computer Performs Fidelity Checking .................................. 3
22/26 and 23/27 Versions
.71+, relating to helical Correcting Errors ........................................................................................... 3
turbine flowmeters. Common Mode Electrical Noise and Transients.........................................................3
This bulletin was previously Noise Pulse Coincident with an Actual Flow Pulse.....................................................3
page layout. Total Failure of a Pulse Channel ...............................................................................4
Alarms and Displays ...................................................................................... 4
Pulse Fidelity Checking -
The dual pulse fidelity
checking feature allows you
to reduce flowmeter
measurement uncertainty Scope
caused by added or missing
pulses due to electrical Firmware Revisions 20/24, 22/26 and 23/27 Versions.70+ of Omni 6000/Omni
transients or equipment 3000 Flow Computers have the feature of Dual Pulse Fidelity Checking. This
failure.
feature applies to Turbine/Positive Displacement Liquid and Gas Flow Metering
Systems.
TB-970901 w 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+ 1
Abstract
The object of dual pulse fidelity checking is to reduce flowmeter measurement
uncertainty caused by added or missing pulses due to electrical transients or
equipment failure. Correct totalizing of flow must be maintained whenever
possible. This is achieved by correct installation practices and by using turbine
or positive displacement flowmeters which provide two pulse train outputs. In
addition, an E Combo I/O Module must be installed and the correct
configuration settings entered in the Omni Flow Computer.
The two pulse trains are called the A pulse and the B pulse. In normal
operation, both signals are equal in frequency and count but are always
separated in phase or time. The API Manual of Petroleum Measurement
Standards (Chapter 5, Section 5) describes several levels of pulse fidelity
checking ranging from Level E to Level A. Level A is the most stringent
method, requiring automatic totalizer corrections whenever the pulse trains are
different for any reason.
For all practical purposes, Level A as described in the API document is
probably unachievable. The Omni Flow Computer implements a significantly
enhanced Level B pulse security method by not only continuous monitoring and
alarming of error conditions but also correcting for obvious error situations, such
as a total failure of a pulse train or by rejecting simultaneous transient pulses.
No attempt is made to correct for ambiguous errors, such as missing or added
pulses. These errors are detected, alarmed and quantified only.
Installation Practices
When using pulse fidelity checking, it is assumed that the user begins with and
maintains a perfect noise free installation. The user must ensure that each
pulse train input to the flow computer is a clean, low impedance signal which
will not be subject to extraneous noise or electromagnetic transients. Any
regular occurrence of these types of events must cause the equipment and/or
wiring to be suspect and investigated. Pulse fidelity check circuitry is not
intended to facilitate continued operation with a poor wiring installation which is
prone to noise or transient pickup.
2 TB-970901w 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+
TB-970901 Dual Pulse Flowmeter Pulse Fidelity Checking
How the Flow Computer Performs Fidelity

Checking
Hardware on the E Combo I/O Module of the Omni Flow Computer continuously
monitors the phase and sequence of the two pulse trains. It also monitors the
frequency of the pulse trains. The flow computer determines the correct
sequence of flowmeter pulses based on the time interval between pulses rather
than the absolute phase difference. It does this by comparing the leading edges
of both pulse trains at a set clock interval of 16 microseconds. Maintaining a
minimum phase shift between the pulse trains (as indicated below) ensures that
related pulse edges of each channel are, in worst case, at least 5 clock samples
apart.
M AXIMUM PULSE M AXIMUM PHASE

INPUT FREQUENCY SHIFT REQUIRED
1.5 kHz 45 degrees

3.0 kHz 90 degrees
6.0 kHz 180 degrees
Correcting Errors
Missing or added pulses to either pulse train are considered ambiguous errors
and cannot be corrected. However, they are detected with a 100% certainty and
will be counted, eventually causing an alarm. Totalizing will continue using the
A Pulse Train.
Common Mode Electrical Noise and Transients

INFO - A certainty of 85% is Common mode electrical noise and transients occur at the same instant in time
a conservative specification. (during the same clock period) on each pulse channel. They are detected with a
Tests on production units
show that a 95% detection is
certainty of 85%*. The certainty can never be 100% because of the slight
a more typical proportion. differences in time (approximately 2 microseconds) that it takes each pulse to
This is due to the time skew travel through its associated input circuitry. These simultaneous pulses are not
between pulse channels used to totalize flow but are counted and will cause an alarm.
being closer to 1 sec than 2
sec.
Noise Pulse Coincident with an Actual Flow Pulse

It is possible that a common mode noise pulse can occur during the same
sample period as an actual flow pulse. In this case, the pulse would be
detected, alarmed and rejected for totalizing, causing a missing pulse.
Statistically though, worst case at 3 kHz pulse input frequency, the odds are
approximately 20:1 that the pulse should be rejected. To not reject the pulse
would mean accepting 20 times as many extra flow pulses. The 20:1 ratio is
based on the ratio of the periodic time of the flow pulses divided by the periodic
time of the sample period (e.g.: 333.3sec / 16sec approximately equals 21).
TB-970901w 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+ 3
Total Failure of a Pulse Channel

A total failure of either pulse train will be detected with a 100% certainty. The
flow computer will alarm this condition and continue totalizing with the
remaining pulse train as recommended in API MPMS (Chapter 5, Section 5).
Alarms and Displays

To avoid spurious nuisance alarms such as can occur when flow begins, pulse
fidelity checking is disabled until the incoming frequency exceeds a user preset
frequency. Any differences in the two pulse trains will then be accumulated and
used to trigger an alarm when a user preset value is exceeded. Error
accumulations can be displayed or printed at any time. They are reset only at
the start of a new batch. Alarms are time tagged and recorded in the historical
alarm log.
4 TB-970901w 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+
TDC3000
Systems
Contents
Communication Method 1: APM / HPM - SIO................................................ 2
all firmware revisions FTA Array Points ......................................................................................................3
Versions .71+. 32-Bit Long Integer Variables .......................................................................................................... 3
Configuring The Omni Flow Computer ......................................................................4
Data Grouping Option (a) Custom Data Packet Setup ...............................................4
Communication Options
with Honeywell TDC3000 Modbus Function Codes Used to Access Custom Packet Data Within The Omni.......4
Systems - The Omni flow Data Grouping Option (b) Variable Statement Moves to Scratchpad Variables...........6
computer can communicate
with Honeywell TDC3000 Communication Method 2: Programmable Logic Gateway (PLCG) ............ 6
Systems via SIO modules in Selection of Communication Method............................................................ 8
combination with APM or
HPM modules. PLCG or
CLM modules communicate
directly with the Omni.
Scope
MVIP Testing - The Omni
flow computer has been All firmware revisions Version .71+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 flow computers
tested by Honeywell Phoenix
have the capability of communicating with Honeywell TDC3000 Systems. This
as part of their MVIP
certification program. is a new feature that requires specified communication modules.
Contact Honeywell at:
( (602) 313-5830
TB-980201 w ALL.71+ 1
Abstract
This technical bulletin addresses the various serial communication options that
can be used to transfer data between Omni flow computers and Honeywell
TDC3000 systems. The hardware equipment used and the limitations of each
method are also discussed.
Three types of serial communication modules are available:
1) Serial I/O (SIO) module in combination with either an Advanced Process
Manager (APM) or High Performance Process Manager (HPM) module.
2) Programmable Logic Controller Gateway (PLCG)
3) Communication Link Module (CLM)
MVIP testing was performed using an Omni 6000 and Honeywell module types
(1) and (2) above. Due to the unavailability of equipment and time constraints,
tests were not performed using the CLM module. After MVIP testing it was the
opinion of the Honeywell engineer that communications with the more powerful
and flexible CLM module would pose no problem to the Omni. The nature of the
types of tasks performed by the CLM module usually mean that a certain
amount of custom I/O driver programming is the norm. This being the case, the
CLM is the most flexible but also most expensive connectivity option.
Communication Method 1: APM / HPM - SIO

Honeywell engineers state that with regard to serial communication there are no
differences between the APM-SIO connection and the HPM-SIO connection.
This document will target the APM system but all discussion will also apply to
the HPM system.
The APM is a I/O rack system used to get I/O signals into the DCS system. It is
comprised of a plug in APM processor module and various other serial I/O,
analog I/O and digital I/O plug in modules. The APM rack system can be
expanded by adding one or more additional racks. Assuming open slots are
available, up to 16 SIO modules can be connected to each APM system. Each
SIO module is connected to the target equipment via a Field Termination
Assembly (FTA). Each FTA has 2 serial ports with each port individually
configurable as either an RS232 port or 2 wire RS485 port. Port characteristics
are as follows:
q Modicon compatible Modbus RTU protocol
q Maximum baud rate of 19200 kbps
q Data bits 8
q Stop bits and parity selectable
2 TB-980201 w ALL.71+
TB-980201 TDC3000 Systems
FTA Array Points

Each FTA has a maximum amount of memory space allocated by the APM.
This memory is organized in 16 blocks called Array Points. In addition, each
HPM or APM is limited to 80 Array points in total that must be shared between
all the SIO modules in its rack system. Each Array Point can therefore hold 512
bits of data and can hold one type of data variable.
Each Array Point can therefore be configured as one of the following:
512 Coils or Status points.
32 16 bit Short Integer registers
16 IEEE Floating point variables
16 32 bit Long Integer variables (see below)
With a maximum of 16 array points available per FTA it can be seen that data
consolidation and grouping becomes very important. Typical TDC3000-Omni
systems will require a mixture of data types to be exchanged, this further
complicates the configuration process. The user must take care not to waste
valuable memory space by partially filling array points. Try to minimize the
types of variable (e.g.: if you only need to read a few short integers consider
converting them to long integers within the flow computer using variable
statements). The limited number of array points also impacts how many Omni
flow computers can be connected (multi dropped) to each FTA for example:
Most applications require long integer totalizers, IEEE floating point values and
also alarm statuses. This means that at least 3 array points will be needed per
Omni and that assumes that 16 IEEE floats, 16 totalizers and 512 alarms will be
sufficient to transfer all the data needed by the TDC3000 system (extremely
unlikely, as there could be up to 4 meter runs configured).
32-Bit Long Integer Variables

Long integer types are not supported directly by the TDC3000 system. They can
be read as 2 concatenated 16-bit short integers and combined within the
TDC3000 system. The Honeywell cannot write to Omni long integer types
because the Honeywell SIO Modbus protocol does not support Modbus function
code 16 (write multiple registers) for integer registers. The protocol does
however support writing to IEEE Floating point variables. Omnis experience
has shown that there are very few instances where the TDC3000 system needs
to write long integers within the flow computer. Typical long integer data that
there has been a need to write in the past has been duplicated in IEEE floats as
shown below and on following page.
Long Integer IEEE Float
Meter #1 - Current MF in Use 5113 7796
Station Running Batch Size 5819 7787

Station Next Batch Size 5820 7783
TB-980201 w ALL.71+ 3
Long Integer IEEE Float

Meter #1 - Next Batch Size 5820 7783
Meter #2 - Running Batch Size 5825 7788



Configuring The Omni Flow Computer

Setup the flow computer serial port settings to match the Honeywell FTA
settings and make sure to select Modicon Compatible.
In view of the Honeywell array point limitation it is important to group the data
as efficiently as possible within the Omni flow computer. Two options are
available:
1) Custom data packet arrays
2) Move data to flow computer scratchpad variables using Variable
Statements
Method 1 must be used if it will be necessary to both read and write into the
variables. Method 2 can only be used when it is only necessary to read data.
Data Grouping Option (a) Custom Data Packet Setup

The Omni flow computer has 3 custom data packet areas where data can be
grouped. These 3 data areas are addressed starting at Modbus addresses
0001, 0201 and 0401. Configure these data areas by completing the custom
packet setup menus in the flow computer.
When the Omni serial port is set as being Modicon Compatible the custom
packet data is read / write accessible by the TDC3000 system. Unlike the FTA
arrays, the Omni does allow mixed data types within a custom data
packet/array. This means that multiple FTA array points can be associated with
one custom packet.
Modbus Function Codes Used to Access Custom Packet

Data Within The Omni
The Omni supports the following Modbus function codes to access custom
packet data:
Read Multiple Registers 03
Write Multiple Registers 16
Write Single Register 06
4 TB-980201 w ALL.71+
From the above it can be seen that Boolean variables must be handled
differently when grouped within a custom array. They cannot be accessed using
the normal Modbus function codes 01, 05 and 15. They can be read and written
but as byte packed bits within Registers not as Coils and Status bits. For this
reason it is recommended that writes to Boolean coils be accomplished by using
the normal Modbus function code 05 and writing directly to the database
Boolean point address.
CAUTION! Here is an example showing a typical setup using the custom packet located at
address 0001:
Because Boolean data is byte
packed the user must ensure ADDRESS FTA ARRAY # USED
that the number of Booleans
included in the custom
Packet #01 Point # 7101 0001 - 0016 1
packet are grouped in such a # of Points 8 Total 16 Floats
way as to ensure that the Packet #02 Point # 7201 0017 - 0032 1
packet always contains an # of Points 8
even number of bytes (i.e. Packet #03 Point # 7301 0033 - 0048 2
the function codes we are # of Points 8 Total 16 Floats
using expect to be dealing Packet #04 Point # 7401 0049 - 0064 2
with registers and you cant
# of Points 8
have half a register).
Packet #05 Point # 5101 0065 - 0072 3
# of Points 4
Packet #06 Point # 5201 0073 - 0080 3
# of Points 4 Total 16 Long Int.
Packet #07 Point # 5301 0081 - 0088 3
# of Points 4
Packet #08 Point # 5401 0089 - 0096 3
# of Points 4
Packet #09 Point # 3101 0097 - 0100 4
# of Points 4
Packet #10 Point # 3201 0101 - 0104 4
# of Points 4 Total 16 Short
Int.
Packet #11 Point # 3301 0105 - 0108 4
# of Points 4
Packet #12 Point # 3401 0109 - 0112 4
# of Points 4
Packet #13 Point # 1105 0113 - 0115 5
# of Points 48
Packet #14 Point # 1205 0116 - 0118 5 Total 24 Packed
# of Points 48 Bytes
Packet #15 Point # 1305 0119 - 0121 5
# of Points 48
Packet #16 Point # 1405 0122 - 0124 5
# of Points 48
Packet #17 Point # 0
# of Points 0
# of Points 0 These packets are available but
Packet #19 Point # 0 are not used in this example.
# of Points 0
# of Points 0
The above shows a total of 32 floating points,16 long integers, 16 short integers
and 192 Boolean status bits packed in 24 bytes being mapped in 1 custom data
packet and 5 FTA arrays.
TB-980201 w ALL.71+ 5
Data Grouping Option (b) Variable Statement Moves to

Scratchpad Variables
Option (b) is limited to when data needs to be read but not written to. Non
contiguous data is moved into the flow computer scratchpad variables located
at:
Boolean Scratchpad Variables 1501 through 1699
Integer Scratchpad Variables 3501 through 3599
String Scratchpad Variables 4501 through 4599
Long Integer Scratchpad Variables 5501 through 5599
Floating Point Scratchpad Variables 7501 through 7599
User Boolean statements are used to group Boolean bits as follows:
Example:
1025: 1501=1105:1169 Move 64 bits to 1501 through 1564
1026: 1565=1205:1269 Move 64 bits to 1565 through 1628
User variable statements are used to move all of the remaining data types as
follows:
Example:
7025: 7501=7101:7103 Move 3 floats to 7501 through 7503
7026: 7504=7201:7203 Move 3 floats to 7504 through 7506
Communication Method 2: Programmable

Logic Gateway (PLCG)
The PLCG is meant to receive register data from PLCs representing unscaled
analog values and 16-bit counters. Functionality is built into the PLCG which
allows the user to easily scale analog inputs of 0-9999 or 0-4095 into
engineering units. Alarm points can also be entered and monitored. This
philosophy is at odds with the Omni flow computer as the vast majority of the
variables within the flow computer are in engineering units requiring no scaling
or alarm checking in the PLCG. In addition most of the data is contained in
IEEE floating point format or 32-bit long integer values.
The Modbus protocol supported by the PLCG unlike the APM-SIO module does
not support reads or writes of IEEE floating point data. The protocol also does
not support multiple register writes which would be required to write data to a
flow computer long integer type.
The PLCG can however be configured to scale other nominal ranges such as 0-
999 of which there are some variables of this type within the flow computer as
shown below:
Mtr#1 Mtr#2 Mtr#3 Mtr#4 Station
Current Gross Flow Rates 3142 3242 3342 3442 3804
Current Net Flow Rates 3140 3240 3340 3440 3802
Current Mass Flow Rates 3144 3244 3344 3444 3806
Current S&W Corrected Flow Rates 3149 3249 3349 3449
Current Temperature 3147 3247 3347 3447 3809
Current Pressure 3146 3246 3346 3446 3808
Current Analog Density 3148 3248 3348 3448 3810
6 TB-980201 w ALL.71+
Counter inputs ranging from 0-65535 are treated more generically requiring no
scaling and are usually used for display purposes or are passed to an
Application Module (AM) for processing.
There are two options to monitor totalizing within the Omni flow computer:
1) Read long integer totalizers as two consecutive counter inputs and
combine in the Application Module (AM) as follows:
Totalizer = (high register * 65536) + low register
2) Read specially provided 16 bit integer non-resetable totalizers that roll at
65536 within the Omni data base shown below.
Mtr#1 Mtr#2 Mtr#3 Mtr#4 Station
Gross Totalizer 3143 3243 3343 3443 3805
Net Totalizer 3141 3241 3341 3441 3803
Mass Totalizer 3145 3245 3345 3445 3807
S&W Corrected Net Totalizer 3150 3250 3350 3450
The advantage of option (1) above is that any of the internal totalizers of the
flow computer can be read in this manner and the results displayed by the
TDC3000 system will match the flow computer displayed values. Option (2) is
limited to one set of non-resetable totals which are not normally displayed at the
flow computer and are of limited use.
Using Variable Statements within the Omni flow computer makes it easy to
convert just about any variable within the flow computers data base into a 16-
bit register that can be read by the PLCG as either a counter or an analog
(assuming the data will fit), the only problem being the availability of enough
variable statements (64 are provided).
Example 1: Variable read as counter for display only

7025: 3501=7105*#10 3501 contains M #1 temperature in tenths of
degrees
Example 2: Variable read as unscaled analog 0-4095 representing 50 to 150 F

7026: 7105-#50 Adjust for 50 degree zero point
7027: 3502=7026*#40.95 100 degree span = 4095, move to scratch
integer 3502
Note that in Example 2 above, no attempt was made to limit the impact of over
or under range values passed to the PLCG. It is the authors understanding that
inputs outside of the expected range cause bad process value alarms in the
PLCG.
TB-980201 w ALL.71+ 7
Selection of Communication Method

Analysis of the various methods available shows that communications via the
APM-SIO or HPM-SIO are most likely to provide the best solution, providing
reasonable access to the flow computers database and requiring no custom
driver programming in the TDC3000 system. Because of the awkward
philosophical fit between the PLCG and flow computer type devices, many of
the built in features of the PLCG (such as scaling and alarming) cannot be
used. For this reason the use of a PLCG is not recommended except for
instances where one already exists in a system and has an open port and an
APM or HPM is not available. The CLM module is potentially the most flexible
solution but the cost impact of any custom software driver development must
be determined. Omni does not know whether a compatible protocol driver
exists at this time, please contact Honeywell for more information in this regard.
8 TB-980201 w ALL.71+
Date: 02 23 98 Author(s): Kenneth D. Elliott / T.J. Tajani / R.L. Stallard TB # 980202
Recalculating a Previous Batch within the

Flow Computer
Contents
contained in Volume 2, Calculations Performed ................................................................................. 2
Chapter 3 Computer
Batching Operations, Using the Flow Computer Keypad to Recalculate a Previous Batch
applicable to Revision Ticket .............................................................................................................. 3
20.71/24.71+.
Step 1.......................................................................................................................3
Step 2.......................................................................................................................3
Batch Recalculation - The Step 3.......................................................................................................................3
batch recalculation feature
allows you to adjust
Step 4.......................................................................................................................4
quantities of the previous 4 Step 5.......................................................................................................................4
batches at measurement
locations where SG60/API60
How the Flow Computer Manages the Modbus Database ........................... 5
and S&W values only Previous Batch Data that Is Writable .........................................................................6
become available after the
batch has been delivered.
Conclusion ..................................................................................................... 7
Scope
Firmware Revisions 20.71+ and 24.71+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow
Computers have the feature of Batch Recalculation. This feature applies to
Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems (with K
Factor Linearization.
TB-980202 w 20/24.71+ 1
Abstract
The purpose of recalculating a previous batch is to make batch quantity
corrections based on SG60/API60 and Sediment and Water data becoming
available via sample analysis performed after a batch delivery is complete. At
measurement locations where SG60/API60 and S&W values are not available
online, sampler devices continuously extract a representative sample of fluid
during a batch. At the end of the batch the sample container is sent for lab
analysis. The data obtained from the analysis report can then be used to
recalculate the batch correction factors and therefore batch quantities. Historical
data from these analysis reports is also used to determine what values of
SG60/API60 should be used for real time calculation of future batches that are
known to have similar characteristic. These batches ultimately can also be
recalculated when their actual analysis is determined.
Calculations Performed
q The liquid correction factors Ctl and Cpl are first recalculated using the
sample analysis SG60/API60 and the batch flow weighted average
temperature and pressure calculated during the batch.
q Gross Standard Volume (GSV) is recalculated using the newly calculated
Ctl and Cpl.
q The Sediment and Water correction factor Csw is calculated using the
sample analysis S&W%.
q Net Standard Volume (NSV) is recalculated using the recalculated GSV
and Csw factor.
2 TB-980202 w 20/24.71+
TB-980202 Recalculating a Previous Batch within the Flow Computer
Using the Flow Computer Keypad to

Recalculate a Previous Batch Ticket
CAUTION!
To ensure that previous Step 1
batch data is correctly
recalculated do not Press [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n] [Enter] (n = meter run number). The Omni
recalculate a batch close to LCD screen will display:
ending a current batch in
progress.
TIP - Note that only 4 lines METER #1 BATCH

can be displayed at one time.
Use the scroll up or down Print & Reset ?
arrows keys to display Select Prev# Batch 1
additional text. Enter API60 .0
Enter SG60 .0000
Enter %S&W .00
Recalculate&Print?
Step 2
Select which previous batch you wish to recalculate. The Omni stores the last 4
completed batches numbered as:
1 = last batch completed

to
4 = oldest batch completed.
] to scroll down to Select Prev # Batch and enter a number between

Press [
1 and 4, depending upon which batch is to be recalculated.
The flow computer moves the selected previous batch data to the previous
batch data points within the database (see explanation later in this document)
Step 3
Enter Password when requested.
TB-980202 w 20/24.71+ 3
Step 4
Scroll to either Enter API60 or Enter SG60. Type in a valid value and press
[Enter].
Step 5
Scroll to Recalculate & Print?. Press [Y] and then [Enter].
At this time the flow computer will recalculate the batch data and send the
report to the printer and the Historical Batch Report Buffer in RAM memory.
Batch report data can also be captured in Raw Data Archive RAM using the
trigger Boolean 1n76. The default batch report shows the batch number as
XXXXXX-XX where the number ahead of the - is the batch number (5n90) and
the number after the - is the number of times that the batch has been
recalculated (3n52). Variable (3n52) is reset to 0 at the end of a batch and
increments each time the batch is recalculated.
4 TB-980202 w 20/24.71+
How the Flow Computer Manages the Modbus

Database
A pointer mechanism has been utilized which avoids having to have duplicate
data points for every batch report variable for each of the four previous batches.
Only one set of data points for previous batch data are mapped within the
Modbus database. A pointer register is used to determine which set of previous
batch data will be available by accessing the previous batch data points within
the Modbus database.
Using the batch gross totalizer variable as an example, we have:
Note: The second digit of the q Modbus address of Current Batch in Progress Gross Totalizer is 5n01
index number (indicated as
n) defines which meter run q Modbus address of Previous Batch Gross Totalizer is 5n50
you are working with (i.e., n q Modbus address of Pointer register to select which previous batch is
= 1, 2, 3 or 4).
mapped is 3n51
As the batch progresses, the gross totalizer (5n01) accumulates flow. At the end
of the batch the flow computer performs the following actions:
1) #3 previous batch data replaces #4 previous batch data
4) Current batch data replaces #1 previous batch data
5) Pointer register 3n51 is set to the value 1 so that the Modbus database
addresses for previous batch will access data for the batch just ended.
This ensures that the batch report which prints immediately at the end of
a batch and gets its data from the Modbus database, includes the
correct information.
The following table (using the batch gross totalizer as an example) shows
typical data that would be read by accessing Modbus points 5n01 and 5n50.
The data read depends upon the value of pointer register 3n51.
TB-980202 w 20/24.71+ 5
CURRENT 1ST PREV. 2ND PREV. 3RD PREV. 4TH PREV.

STEP DESCRIPTION BATCH BATCH BATCH BATCH BATCH
5n01 5n50 5n50 5n50 5n50
Value contained in
Pointer register 1 2 3 4
3n51.
1 First batch running. 12340 0 0 0 0
2 First batch ended. 23450 12340 0 0 0
Second batch
3 34560 23450 12340 0 0
ended.
4 Third batch ended. 45670 34560 23450 12340 0
Fourth batch ended.

5 56780 45670 34560 23450 12340
Fifth batch ended

6 with sixth batch 6123 56780 45670 34560 23450
running.
Previous Batch Data that Is Writable

Except for the data listed below, all data points for previous batch transactions
are read only for reasons of data integrity.
M ETER #1 M ETER #2 M ETER #3 M ETER #4 STATION

SG 60 or Reference
Density (Rev. 24.71)
8508 8608 8708 8808 8908
API 60 Gravity 8519 8619 8719 8819 8919

Sediment and Water
Percentage (BS&W)
8517 8617 8717 8817 8917
Command Boolean which
triggers the recalculation
2756 2757 2758 2759 1798
6 TB-980202 w 20/24.71+
Conclusion
Note: Setting these registers The flow computer retains data for the last four completed batches. Only one
via Variable Statements is set of this data can be accessed at a time. Pointer registers, 3151 Meter Run
not allowed and will not
produce the expected results
#1, 3251 Meter Run #2, 3351 Meter Run #3, 3451 Meter Run #4n and 3879 for
Meter Station are used to determine what set of batch data will be accessed.
API60/SG60 and S&W data can be adjusted and the batch recalculated by
writing a 1 to points, 2756 for Meter Run #1, 2757 for Meter Run #2, 2758 for
Meter Run #3, 2759 for Meter Run #4 and 1798 for Meter Station.
TB-980202 w 20/24.71+ 7
Peer-to-Peer Basics
Contents
contained in User Manual, Determining Which Computer Will Be Master .............................................. 2
and is applicable to all
firmware revisions Version Communication Settings for the Peer-to-Peer Link ..................................... 3
.70+.
This is an updated edition
Foreign Modbus Devices and Single Master Systems................................. 3
that replaces previously Wiring Options ............................................................................................... 4
published bulletins under the
same title. RS-232-C Wiring Requirements ................................................................................4
See also the following: RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Wiring Requirements ...................................................5
q TB-980402 - Using the RS-485 Wiring Requirements....................................................................................6
Peer-to-Peer Function in a
Setting up Transactions ................................................................................ 8
Redundant Flow
Computer Application What Modbus Function Codes Are Used...................................................... 8
q Volume 1 - 1.6.3. Serial
Communication Modules Special Considerations when Modicon Compatible is Selected for Port
#2..................................................................................................................... 8
Peer-to-Peer
Coriolis Mass Meters ................... 9
Using Peer-to-Peer with Micro Motion
Communications - The The Micro Motion Meter is a Modicon Compatible Device ........................................11
peer-to-peer communication
feature allows you to multi-
Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer Transactions .................................................. 11
drop up to 32 flow computers
and other devices in RS-485
serial communications mode,
and up to 12 using RS-232-C
communications.
Scope
Peer-to-Peer Redundancy
Schemes - Redundancy All firmware revisions Version .70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers
schemes allows for have the Peer-to-Peer Communication feature.
uninterrupted measurement
and control functionality by
interconnecting two
configured flow computers.
TB-980401 w ALL.70+ 1
Abstract
Communications between Omni flow computers is accomplished using the
peer-to-peer function. This function is available only on Serial Port #2 with data
being transmitted and received using Modbus RTU protocol. A data transaction
list within each flow computer defines each Read or Write operation to be
transacted for that computer. A maximum of 16 transactions per flow computer
are available. The transaction list must be contiguous (i.e., an empty
transaction will be treated as the end of list).
Two optional serial communication I/O modules are available with your flow
computer: the RS-232-C (compatible) Model #68-6005, and the RS-232-C/RS-
485 Model #68-6205. The older Model #68-6005 is only capable of RS-232
compatible serial communications. The newer Model #68-6205 is capable of
either RS-232 or RS-485 communications via a selection jumper. When
jumpered for RS-232, the characteristics and functionality of this module is
identical to that of the older RS-232-C module.
Determining Which Computer Will Be Master

Each flow computer wishing to communicate must temporarily become a
Modbus Master so that messages may be initiated and its transaction list
processed. This is accomplished when the current Modbus Master completes its
transaction list and broadcasts the Modbus address of the next computer to be
the master. The computer with the Modbus ID which matches the broadcast
then assumes mastership and proceeds to process its transaction list. A time-
out occurs whenever the next master in sequence does not take mastership and
the broadcast will be retried once. Should the computer still fail to respond, the
current master will attempt to pass mastership to the next computer in
sequence by incrementing the Modbus ID by one and re-broadcasting the new
Modbus ID. Each flow computer needing to process a transaction list (i.e., be a
master) requires the following three entries: (1) Next Master in Sequence; (2)
Last Master in Sequence; and (3) Retry Timer (50mS ticks).
These entries are in the Peer-to-Peer Setup menu and function as follows:
Entry 1 : This entry is the Modbus ID for the next flow computer master. A
non zero entry here is what actually turns on the peer-to-
peer function. Modbus IDs for master devices in the link must
be assigned starting at 1, and for maximum efficiency not contain
any missing IDs (i.e., 1, 2, 3, 4, Not 1, 3, 6, 10, for instance).
Entry 2 : This entry is the Modbus ID for the last flow computer master.
Any master failing to find the next master will keep trying
Modbus IDs until it reaches this ID, it will then start the search
again at Modbus ID 1.
Entry 3 : This entry is used to setup the communication retry rate. When
the peer-to-peer link is solely comprised of Omni flow computers
this entry should be set to 3 ticks (150 msec).
2 TB-980401 w ALL.70+
TB-980401 Peer-to-Peer Basics
Communication Settings for the Peer-to-Peer

Link
The following settings must be used:
q Modbus RTU Protocol
q 8 Data Bits
q 1 Stop Bit
q No Parity
While slower baud rates can be used, 38.4 kbps or 19.2 kbps will provide
maximum performance.
Foreign Modbus Devices and Single Master

Systems
INFO - It is important to note The peer-to-peer function is not limited to multiple Omni flow computers. Some
that in a peer-to-peer system, applications simply require a single flow computer master to communicate with
only the flow computers that
have a non-zero entry for
a variety of Modbus slave devices which may be flow computers, PLCs etc. In
Next Master in Sequence these cases, the entries 1 and 2 above would be set to 1 in the master flow
are limited to using Serial computer only, signifying only one master is in the system. Entry 3 above would
Port #2, all of the other flow normally be set to 3 but may need to be increased depending upon the
computers are simply acting message response time of any foreign Modbus devices in the system.
as Modbus slaves and can
use any valid Modbus serial
port.
TB-980401 w ALL.70+ 3
Wiring Options
RS-232-C Wiring Requirements

The following diagram shows the wiring requirements using the RS-232-C
termination option. When multiple flow computers are used as peer-to-peer
masters, they are connected in two-wire, multi-drop mode.
INFO - The Omni Flow
Computer uses a proprietary
tristatable
RS-232-Compatible serial
port, which unlike a normal
RS-232 port, can be multi- Omni #1 Omni #2 Omni #3 Omni #4
dropped, interconnecting up TB3 TB3 TB3 TB3
to 12 flow computers or other (TB2) (TB2) (TB2) (TB2)
serial devices.
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12
Fig. 1. Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements using the

RS-232-C Termination Option
4 TB-980401 w ALL.70+
RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Wiring Requirements

The following diagram shows a typical installation where two flow computers are
connected to a PLC via an RS-232 to RS-485 converter module.
Omni #1 Omni #2
TB3 TB3
(TB2) (TB2)
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4 RS-232 to 485
5 5 Converter
(Disable Echo) PLC
6 6
R
7 7 R TX-A A S
8 8 S TX-B B 4
2 8
9 9 RX-A
3 5
10 10 2 RX-B
11 11
12 12
Fig. 2. Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with PLC

using a Standard RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Module
TB-980401 w ALL.70+ 5
RS-485 Wiring Requirements

Multivariable Transmitting The diagram below shows a typical peer-to-peer installation using RS-485
Devices - In addition to the communications, where four flow computers are interconnected in a two-wire,
multi-drop mode.
have an MV Module to
communicate with
multivariable transmitters.
This serial module is
jumpered to IRQ 3 when
used in combination with an
MV Module. Without an MV Omni #1 Omni #2 Omni #3 Omni #4
Module, the jumper is placed TB3 TB3 TB3 TB3
at IRQ 2. The MV Module (TB2) (TB2) (TB2) (TB2)
can only be used with this
serial module (68-6205) and 1 1 1 1
is not compatible with the 2 2 2 2
Serial I/O Module # 68-6005.
For more information, see 3 3 3 3
Technical Bulletin # TB- 4 4 4 4
980303.
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
(B) (B) (B) (B)
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10
(A) (A) (A) (A)
11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12
RS-485 Two-wire RS-485 Two-wire RS-485 Two-wire RS-485 Two-wire

Terminated Non-terminated Non-terminated Terminated

RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop
6 TB-980401 w ALL.70+
The peer-to-peer communication link may also be used to transfer data to and
from any other Modbus slave device such as a PLC. The following diagram
shows a typical installation using RS-485 where two flow computers are
connected to a PLC in a two-wire, multi-drop mode.
Omni #1 Omni #2
TB3 TB3
(TB2) (TB2)
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
PLC
6 6
(B) (B) R
7 7 B
S
8 8 A 4
9 9 8
10 10 5
(A) (A)
11 11
12 12
RS-485 Two-wire RS-485 Two-wire

Terminated Non-terminated
Fig. 4. Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with PLC

using the RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop
TB-980401 w ALL.70+ 7
Setting up Transactions
To process a transaction the flow computer requires the following data for each
transaction:
Modbus Broadcast Slave ID : The Modbus address of the target device.
Address 0 - This address This can be any valid Modbus address
only applies to write
transactions.
including the broadcast address 0.
Read or Write : Select the appropriate operation.
Source Point Number : Specifies the data base address of the
variable in the source device. For a read
operation the slave is the source. For a write
operation the source is the Omni flow
computer master.
Number of Points : The number of consecutive data variables to
transfer between devices, starting at the
source point number or address.
Destination Point Number : Specifies the data base address of the
variable in the destination device. For a write
operation the slave is the destination. For a
read operation the destination is the Omni
flow computer master.
What Modbus Function Codes Are Used

The flow computer decides what Modbus function code will be used depending
upon the Omni flow computer data type specified in the transaction.
Transactions involving short or long integers or IEEE floats will use Modbus
function codes 03H for reads and 10H for writes. Boolean variables are packed 8
to a byte starting at LS bit and use function codes 01H for reads and 0FH for
writes.
Special Considerations when Modicon

Compatible is Selected for Port #2
Some adjustments to the previous entries are needed when communicating
with devices that require Modicon Compatible to be selected for the peer-to-
peer port.
1) All data base point addresses (whether source or destination) referring to

the foreign Modicon compatible device, should be entered as one less
than the point address listed. This is needed because the Modicon device
automatically adds one to the address received over the data link and
subtracts one from the address before transmitting. References to data
base point addresses within the Omni flow computer master still use the
normal point address as shown in the Omni documentation.
2) The number of points entry becomes the number of 16 bit registers to

transfer, rather than the number of data variables.
8 TB-980401 w ALL.70+

Using Peer-to-Peer with Micro Motion
Coriolis Mass Meters
The Omni flow computer can be configured to accept mass or volume pulses
from a Micro Motion (MM) Coriolis Meter RFT transmitter as well as
communicate via Modbus to the device and obtain variables such as fluid
density and MM transducer alarm status.
The flow computer is equipped with special firmware code to make the interface
to the Micro Motion meter more useful and hopefully simpler. The
communication link between the Micro Motion meter and the flow computer is
via the peer-to-peer link. It is possible to have multiple Micro Motion meters
connected to multiple flow computers as shown below.
Omni #1 Omni #2
TB3 TB3 Micro
(TB2) (TB2) Motion
RFT #2
1 1 R
2 2 S
3 3 27 (Z22) 4
4 4 RS-232 to 485 26 (D22) 8
Converter 5
5 5
(Disable Echo)
6 6 R
R TX-A 27 (Z22)
7 7 S
8 8 S TX-B 26 (D22) 4
2 8
9 9 3 RX-A 5
10 10 2 RX-B
Micro
11 11 Motion
12 12 RFT #1
Note: Termination Points 26 & 27

correspond to the explosion-proof
field-mount RFT9739; and (D22)
& (Z22) to the rack-mount version
of the model.
Fig. 5. Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with Micro

Motion RFT Transmitters using a RS-232 to RS-485 Converter
TB-980401 w ALL.70+ 9
The following diagram shows a typical peer-to-peer installation using RS-485,

where two flow computers are connected to two Micro Motion RFT9739
transmitters via a proprietary RS-232/485 Serial I/O Module #68-6205.
Micro Motion Elite Model
RFT9739 Transmitter
Connectivity - Both field-
mount (explosion-proof) and
rack-mount models of the
RFT9739 transmitter have
the A and B channels
reversed to the industry Omni #1 Omni #2
standard applied to Omni Note: Termination resistors
TB3 TB3 may be required with some
flow computers; i.e., the flow
computers A channel
(TB2) (TB2) installations.
connects to Micro Motions B 1 1
channel. Omni has tested
this connectivity with the 2 2
Micro Motion RFT9739 Field- 3 3 Micro Micro
Mount Transmitter, but Motion Motion
connecting to the rack-mount 4 4 RFT9739 RFT9739
version has not yet been 5 5
tested. Information on this
#1 #2
connectivity has been 6 6
(B) (B)
provided by Micro Motion, 7 (B) 7 (B) 26 (D22) 26 (D22)
Inc. Please contact Micro
Motion for further 8 8
Y
information. 9 9 120
10 10 (A) (A)
(A) (A)
11 11 27 (Z22) 27 (Z22)
12 12
Note: Termination Points 26 & 27
RS-485 Two-wire RS-485 Two-wire correspond to the explosion-proof
Terminated Non-terminated field-mount RFT9739; and (D22)
& (Z22) to the rack-mount version
of the model.
Fig. 6. Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with Micro

Motion RFT9739 Transmitters using the RS-485 Two-wire Multi-
drop.
10 TB-980401 w ALL.70+
The Micro Motion Meter is a Modicon Compatible Device

Some adjustments to the peer-to-peer entries are needed when communicating
with devices that require Modicon Compatible to be selected for the peer-to-
peer port (Serial Port #2).
1) All data base point addresses (whether source or destination) referring to

the foreign Modicon compatible device, should be entered as one less
than the point address listed. This is needed because the Modicon device
automatically adds one to the address received over the data link and
subtracts one from the address before transmitting. References to data
base point addresses within the Omni flow computer master still use the
normal point address as shown in the Omni documentation.
2) The number of points entry becomes the number of 16 bit registers to

transfer, rather than the number of data variables.
Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer Transactions

Note: Meter Run #1 Density The following peer-to-peer transaction reads the flowing density of the fluid
I/O point must be assigned to from the Micro Motion device (Modbus ID #2) and stores it in data base point
99 and Serial Port #2 must
be assigned to be Modicon
7108 (unfactored density, meter run #1).
Compatible for this to work
correctly. Note also that the Transaction #1 Target Slave ID ........ 2
MM Modicon documentation
manual lists the flowing Read/Write ? ........ R
density as point number Source Point # ........ 248
20249. This is common with
Modicon compatible devices. # of Points ........ 2
Where there is a 5 digit Destination Pnt # ........ 7108
address, drop the first digit
and subtract 1 from the point
address before using it in a The next transaction reads a 16-bit integer register from the MM meter which
transaction. contains packed alarm status bits. These are stored in a special register within
the flow computer which causes them to be time and date tagged, printed and
logged just as though they were flow computer alarms.
Transaction #2 Target Slave ID ........ 2

Read/Write ? ........ R
Source Point # ........ 0
# of Points ........ 1
Destination Pnt # ........ 3118
The examples above refer to Meter #1 transactions that the flow computer is
requesting. More transactions may be needed depending upon what data is
required and how many meter runs are being used.
TB-980401 w ALL.70+ 11
Date: 04 07 98 Author(s): Kenneth E. Elliott / Robert L. Stallard TB # 980402
Using the Peer-to-Peer Function in a

Redundant Flow Computer Application
Contents
contained in User Manual, RS-232-C Wiring Requirements ..................................................................... 2
firmware revisions Versions RS-485 Wiring Requirements......................................................................... 3
.70+.
This is an updated edition of
Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer for Redundant Flow Computer Applications . 3
the bulletin previously Sensing Failures and Switching between Redundant Computers.............. 5
published under the same
title. Changing the Master / Slave Status via a Modbus Serial Port .................... 6
Redirecting the Control Signals .................................................................... 6
Peer-to-Peer Redundancy Sharing Input Signals Between Primary and Secondary Flow Computers 7
Schemes - Redundancy
schemes allows for Re-Calibration of Analog Inputs.................................................................... 7
uninterrupted measurement
Sharing Digital I/O Signals Between Primary and Secondary Flow
and control functionality by
interconnecting two Computers ...................................................................................................... 7
configured flow computers.
Scope
All firmware revisions Versions .70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers
have the Peer-to-Peer Communications feature, which is available only on
Serial Port #2. This features includes the capability of setting-up redundant flow
computer schemes.
TB-980402 w ALL.70+ 1
Abstract
Redundancy involves using two identically equipped flow computers and
connecting them in such a way to ensure uninterrupted measurement and
control functionality in the event of failure of one of the units. This requires that
all input and output signals are connected to both computers. During normal
operation, one computer is designated the primary and the other computer the
secondary or backup. To ensure synchronization between both devices,
important variables such as PID controller settings, control valve positions and
proving meter factors must be transmitted from the primary flow computer via
the peer-to-peer link to the secondary flow computer. Should a failure of the
primary flow computer occur, the secondary flow computer is automatically
promoted to primary and assumes all control and measurement functions. In
this case the data flow on the peer-to-peer link reverses automatically and the
new master begins to transmit critical data to the slave, assuming that it is
functioning. Peer-to-peer communication errors can occur during the switch
over and are normal. They are cleared by pressing the [Ack] key on the flow
computer keypad or writing to point 1712 (acknowledge station alarms). If the
other flow computer is non-operational, the peer-to-peer communication errors
cannot be cleared.
RS-232-C Wiring Requirements

The following diagram shows the wiring needed when flow computers are
applied in a redundancy scheme via the peer-to-peer feature and using the
proprietary RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005. They are connected
in a two-wire multi-drop mode.
Omni #1 Omni #2
TB3 TB3
(TB2) (TB2)
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
Fig. 1. Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements (RS-232-C

Serial Port)
2 TB-980402 w ALL.70+
TB-980402 Using the Peer-to-Peer Function in a Redundant Flow Computer Application
RS-485 Wiring Requirements

The diagram below shows the wiring needed when flow computers are applied
in a redundancy scheme via the peer-to-peer feature and using the proprietary
RS-232/485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205. They are connected in a multi-
drop mode using the RS-485 two-wire termination option.
Omni #1 Omni #2
TB3 TB3
(TB2) (TB2)
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
(B) (B)
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
(A) (A)
11 11
12 12
RS-485 Two-wire RS-485 Two-wire

Terminated Terminated

RS-485 Two-wire Termination Mode in a Redundant Flow
Computer Scheme
Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer for Redundant

Flow Computer Applications
The Activate Redundancy Mode entry is found in the peer-to-peer setup menu.
Answering Yes causes the Next Master and Last Master entries to disappear
from the menu. They no longer need to be entered as the two flow computers
now manage these two entries automatically. Any data needing to be
synchronized between the flow computers will need to be setup by the user as
transactions in the peer-to-peer menu.
TB-980402 w ALL.70+ 3
Two transactions are needed to handle redundant PID control:

Transactions #1 & #2 -
Both primary and secondary Transaction #1 Target Slave ID ........ 2
flow computers must have
these entries if they will be
Read/Write ? ........ W
used for PID control. Source Point # ........ 13462
q Transaction #1: Sends NO of Points ........ 8
the primary flow computer
PID control mode settings
(Auto/Manual,
Local/Remote) to the Transaction #2 Target Slave ID ........ 2
secondary flow computer.
q Transaction #2: Sends
the primary flow computer Source Point # ........ 7601
PID set points and valve NO of Points ........ 20
position values to the
More peer-to-peer transactions are needed if additional data needs to be

transferred, meter factors for example.
Flow computers containing firmware Revisions 22 or 26 handle meter factor
implementation differently than Revisions 20 or 24. These applications
maintain historical meter factor entries which are triggered and stored when the
meter factor is accepted and implemented at the end of a meter proving. As
only the primary flow computer will be doing the actual proving, three special
variables with associated firmware code have been added to the data base of
revisions 22 and 26. By writing to and reading from these variables via the
peer-to-peer link, the secondary flow computer can implement the meter factor
result obtained when the primary computer completes and accepts a prove
result.
The following two transactions are required:
Transactions #3 & #4
(Applicable to Firmware Transaction #3 Target Slave ID ........ 2
Versions 22 & 26 Only) -
Both primary and secondary
flow computers must have Source Point # ........ 5904
these entries. NO of Points ........ 2
q Transaction #3: Used to
send the prove meter
factor (5904) and the
number of the meter last Transaction #4 Target Slave ID ........ 2
proved (5905) to the
Read/Write ? ........ R
q Transaction #4: Source Point # ........ 5906
O
Confirms that the meter N of Points ........ 1
factor has been
implemented in the
secondary flow computer
by reading back a copy of
the number of the meter
run just proved (5906).
4 TB-980402 w ALL.70+
Sensing Failures and Switching between

Redundant Computers
Setting Up Peer-to-Peer When Activate Redundancy is selected in the peer-to-peer menu, data base
Transactions - For each variables are activated to provide a redundancy switching mechanism which is
transaction, the flow
computer requires the
accomplished by cross connecting 4 digital I/O points from each flow computer
following data (see TB# (primary and secondary).
980401, Peer-to-Peer
Basics): These database variables are:
q Target Slave ID: Modbus 2863 Watchdog status for this computer. Goes true 5 seconds after
database address of
target device.
initialization and remains true as long as the flow computer is
q Read/Write?: Read (R) functioning correctly.
selects slave as source 2864 Mastership status for this flow computer. True whenever this flow
device and master as computer is the primary or master computer in the redundancy
destination device. Write
(W) selects master as scheme.
source device and slave 2713 Watchdog status input from the other flow computer. This flow
as destination device. computer will assume mastership if it sees this point go false.
q Source Point #:
Specifies database 2714 Mastership status input from the other flow computer. This flow
address (or first address computer will relinquish mastership if it sees this point go true.
in sequence) of data to
transfer from source to
destination device.
O
q N of Points: Total
number of consecutive
database addresses in
sequence to transfer.
q Destination Point #:
Specifies database Omni #1 Omni #2
address (or first address TB1 TB1
in sequence) in 1 1
destination device of data 2 2
received from source
3 3
device.
4 4
5 5
Redundancy Failover 6 6
Wiring - Any 4 digital I/O
7 7
points may be used to
provide a failover switching 8 8
Other Master Status (2714) Others Master Status (2714)
mechanism. Fig. III.8-3 is an 9 9
example that shows digital Master Status (2864) Master Status (2864)
10 10
I/O 9 through 12 being used Others Watchdog (2713) Others Watchdog (2713)
11 11
Watchdog Out (2863) Watchdog Out (2863)
12 12
TB11 TB11
+ +
- -
Fig. 3. Omni 6000 / 3000 Redundancy Failover Wiring
TB-980402 w ALL.70+ 5
Changing the Master / Slave Status via a

Modbus Serial Port
Sometimes it may be necessary to force a swap of primary (master) and
secondary (slave) flow computers. For example, if both primary and secondary
flow computers are functioning correctly (i.e. watchdogs are OK) but the MMI
serial communication link to the primary flow computer was lost, it would be
necessary to make the secondary flow computer the primary. Two special data
base points are available to provide this function, they are:
2715 Be Master - writing a one to this point automatically promotes this
flow computer to master. This in turn causes the digital I/O point
which is assigned point 2864 ( Mastership Status ) to go true.
Assuming the digital I/O are cross connected as shown in the
preceding figure, the other flow computer will automatically
relinquish mastership when this happens.
Note: The 2716 command 2716 Be Slave - writing a one to this point automatically demotes this flow
will not work if the other flow computer to slave. This in turn causes the digital I/O point which is
computers watchdog status assigned point 2864 ( Mastership Status ) to go false. Assuming the
is not active (i.e., the other
digital I/O are cross connected as shown in the preceding figure, the
computer must be
functioning correctly before other flow computer will automatically assume mastership when this
this flow computer can give happens.
up mastership).
Both the above commands are edge triggered needing only to be turned on,
they do not need to be turned off.
Redirecting the Control Signals

In the event of a primary/secondary flow computer swap, a method is needed to
redirect the appropriate 4-20 mA signals to control valves and other functions.
One way of doing this is to use a DC relay with type C contacts. Suitable relays
are available with multiple sets of contacts. The relay can be energized by the
digital output assigned to indicate Mastership Status from one of the flow
computers.
6 TB-980402 w ALL.70+
Sharing Input Signals Between Primary and

Secondary Flow Computers
In a redundant system all input signals must be connected to both primary and
secondary flow computers. Voltage pulse signals such as flowmeters and
densitometer devices must be connected in parallel to the appropriate inputs of
both flow primary and secondary computers. Current pulse signals must first be
converted to voltage pulses by suitable input shunt resistor or source resistor.
As a general rule, follow the wiring recommendations shown for a normal single
flow computer installation (see Volume 1 of the User Manual) and then simply
wire the second flow computer terminals in parallel with the first computer.
Analog 4-20 mA signals should be converted to 1-5 volt signals by using a low
temperature coefficient precision 250 ohm resistor. For each signal, configure
the combo modules of both flow computers for 1-5 volt inputs and wire them in
parallel across an appropriate 250 ohm resistor mounted externally to the flow
computers.
Re-Calibration of Analog Inputs

Each flow computer input channel which is configured for 1 - 5 volt input signals
will need to be verified for accuracy. Re-calibration may be necessary
depending upon the accuracy of the 250 ohm resistor used and how well it
matches the internal 250 ohm resistor that was used when the input channel
was originally calibrated. The system wiring between the flow computer and the
250 ohm resistor can also slightly affect the input calibration.
Sharing Digital I/O Signals Between Primary

and Secondary Flow Computers
Digital I/O channels configured as status inputs should be simply wired in
parallel (ORed) with the other flow computer. Digital I/O channels configured as
outputs may possibly require relay isolation similar to that needed for analog
outputs described previously. Typical output signals that need to be relay
isolated are sampler pulse outputs. Prover control signals do not usually need
to be relay isolated as the secondary computer will never be attempting to
control the prover while it is the slave or secondary computer. The user will
need to determine which outputs need to be isolated based on whether it is
possible or likely that the slave computer would activate the output when not in
control.
TB-980402 w ALL.70+ 7
3095FB Multivariable Sensor

Rosemount
Interface Issues
Contents
contained in User Manual, Important Omni Flow Computer Compatibility Issues When Using SV
applicable to Firmware
Revision 21.72+/25.72+ and Combo Modules ............................................................................................. 3
23/72.+/27.72+. Serial Communication Module Compatibility .............................................................3
Other Known System Incompatibilities ......................................................................3
Equipment Ordering Limitations ................................................................................3
Connectivity Issues When Connecting to the 3095FB Multivariable
Transmitters: Multi-drop versus Point-to-Point ........................................... 4
Advantages of Multi-drop Configurations ...................................................................4
Disadvantages of Multi-drop Configurations ..............................................................4
Jumper Settings for the Omni SV Combo Module ....................................... 5
Setting the Address of the SV Combo Module ...........................................................6
Setting the Termination Jumpers for the Each of the SV RS-485 Ports ......................6
3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter.......... 8
Initial Setup of the Rosemount
Connecting the 3095FB to the Omni Flow Computer .................................. 9
3095FB Transmitter RS-485 Connections ...............................................................10
3095FB Transmitter Power Connections and Requirements ....................................10
Isolation and Transient Protection Issues ................................................................11
Wiring Considerations When Replacing a Multi-dropped 3095FB Transmitter..........11
Configuring the Omni Flow Computer to use the 3095FB Multi Variable
Transmitter ................................................................................................... 12
Configuring the Meter Run I/O.................................................................................12
Selecting the Device Type ............................................................................................................. 12
Selecting the SV Combo Module Port............................................................................................ 12
Select Modbus Address for 3095FB.............................................................................................. 12
What I/O Points are Used and Why .............................................................................................. 12
DP, Pressure and Temperature Setup Entries Needed.............................................14
Data Transferred between the 3095FB Transmitter and the Omni Flow
Computer ...................................................................................................... 14
Polling Intervals for Process Variables and Critical Alarms ......................................15
Critical 3095FB Alarms Monitored By The Flow Computer.......................................15
Synchronizing the 3095FB and the Flow Computer Configurations......... 16
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+ 1

Viewing the 3095FB Data at the Flow Computer Front Panel .................... 16
Installing, Replacing and Calibrating 3095FB Transmitters....................... 17
Wiring Issues ......................................................................................................... 17
Using the Omni Flow Computer to Set the Modbus Address of the 3095FB ............. 18
Using a Laptop PC to Trim the 3095FB Calibration ................................................. 19
Scope
Firmware Revisions 21.72+/25.72+ and 23.72+/27.72+ of Omni 6000/Omni
3000 Flow Computers are affected by the issues contained in this technical
bulletin. This Bulletin applies to Orifice/Differential Pressure Liquid Flow
Metering Systems and to Orifice Gas Flow Metering Systems.
Abstract
The Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable sensor assembly is used to measure
differential pressure (DP), static pressure (SP) and line temperature (T).
Application of the 3095FB is limited to flow computer revisions 21, 23, 25 and
27 which work with differential head devices such as orifice meters, nozzles and
venturi meters. Because the flow computer is limited to a maximum of four
meter runs it is also limited to a maximum of four 3095FB multivariable
transmitters.
Data is accessed from the 3095FB transmitter via a 2 wire RS-485 data link at
9600 baud using Modbus protocol. Technically, it would have been possible to
use one of the flow computers standard serial ports to communicate with the
3095FB but this would have caused several problems:
q Reduced the number of serial ports available for use with SCADA, PLCs
and OmniCom etc.
q Extra 'A type combo modules would have to be purchased simply to
provide analog outputs in a minimum system requiring just the
multivariables.
Omni chose to design a special SV combo module which includes two 2 wire
RS-485 ports and six 4-20 mA analog outputs. With this module it becomes
possible to provide a powerful Omni 3000 system with the following specs:
q Four meter runs with Differential Pressure, Static Pressure and
Temperature inputs.
q Four communication ports for SCADA, PLC, Printer, OmniCom etc.
q Twelve Digital I/O for logic control
q Six digital to analog outputs.
This SV module is capable of connecting to one to four 3095FBs in various
multi-drop configurations. A second SV combo module can be utilized in
applications where point to point operation of more than two multivariable
transmitters is desirable.
2 TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

TB-980501 3095FB Multivariable Sensor Interface Issues
Rosemount
Important Omni Flow Computer Compatibility

Issues When Using SV Combo Modules
The SV combo modules are effectively serial I/O modules which have been
specially designed to communicate with various multivariable transmitters.
Changes have been made to the IRQ priorities to accommodate these SV
combo modules. These IRQ changes also involve the Serial I/O Combo
Modules that are used to connect to printers, OmniCom, PLCs and SCADA
devices.
Serial Communication Module Compatibility

SV combo modules cannot be installed in flow computer systems containing
RS-232-C Serial I/O Combo modules model type 68-6005. The IRQ settings on
the 68-6005 serial combo module are not jumper selectable and are
incompatible with the 'SV combo modules. The flow computer will not be able
to initialize or boot up if this module is installed (this will be evident by a blank
LCD screen which flashes its backlighting on and off every 1.5 seconds).
The more recent 68-6205 serial module which is both RS-232-C and RS-485
compatible, has jumper selectable IRQ settings, these must be installed in the
IRQ 3 position when an SV combo module is present (see technical bulletin
TB-980503 for more details).
Other Known System Incompatibilities

At the time this bulletin was prepared, it was not possible to install both an SV
combo module and an HV (Honeywell multivariable) combo module.
Equipment Ordering Limitations

Because of the compatibility issues raised in the above paragraphs, it is not
possible for the customer to retrofit existing flow computer installations with SV
combo modules. Any system which requires SV combo modules, must be
purchased new from Omni, or the system must be returned to Omni to be
modified (contact a sales person at Omni for upgrade details and pricing).
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+ 3

Connectivity Issues When Connecting to the

3095FB Multivariable Transmitters: Multi-drop
versus Point-to-Point
The 3095 FB multivariable transmitter is a four wire device, two power wires
and two wires for the RS-485 serial communication link. It can be connected in
a point-to-point or multi-drop wiring configuration.
Advantages of Multi-drop Configurations

The advantages of multi-drop configurations are:
q Possibly less wire may be needed to connect devices under certain
conditions. This may or may not be the case depending upon
equipment placement.
q One Omni SV Combo module can handle up to four 3095 FB
multivariable transmitters. An Omni 3000 can be used in place of an
Omni 6000 and handle four meter runs.
Disadvantages of Multi-drop Configurations

Disadvantages of multi-drop configurations are:
q Multiple Modbus IDs required. Each multi-dropped transmitter must
have a unique Modbus ID which matches the Modbus ID selected within
the flow computer for that meter run multivariable.
q Possibility of errors when replacing multivariable transmitters.
Because of the multiple Modbus addresses it is not possible to simply
take a transmitter off the shelf and install it in a multi-drop configuration.
This is because transmitters come from Rosemount with the Modbus
address defaulted to 1 and there may already be a transmitter in the loop
using that address. Adding a second transmitter with the same address
as an existing transmitter would effectively cause a loss of signal on both
transmitters (existing and new). Depending upon where the transmitter is
in the wiring, termination jumpers may or may not be required on the
replacement transmitter (see below).
q Transmitter interaction is possible. While not likely, a hardware failure
in one transmitter could compromise the integrity of the shared RS-485
link causing a loss of flow signals for all meter runs. Calibrating a
transmitter via a laptop computer requires the wiring to be disturbed, care
must be taken not to disconnect other transmitters in the same multi-drop
loop.
4 TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

Rosemount
q RS-485 termination requirements more complex. RS-485

transmission wires must have only one beginning and one end (they
cannot be used in a star configuration). Both ends of the wire must be
terminated, meaning only two devices in the loop need terminating. In a
point-to-point configuration, this simply means both the flow computer
and transmitter are terminated. In a multi-drop configuration, the user
must ensure that only the end devices have the termination jumpers in.
This means that some transmitters may have the terminating jumpers in
while others may have them out. Remember that the Omni may or may
not be at the end of the wire so it may or may not be one of the
terminated devices.
q Process variable update time may exceed the flow computers 500
msec cycle time. Critical measurement or control systems require that
the process variables be input to the flow computer as fast as possible for
best performance.
Jumper Settings for the Omni SV Combo

Module
The Multi Variable SV Combo module contains several sets of jumpers which
must be installed correctly (see figure below).
Port 1 (3) Port 2 (4)

Tx/RTS Leds Red Tx/RTS Leds Red
Recv Led Grn Recv Led Grn
RTS GND
T T
SV RS-485 Termination Jumpers E E
R R SV Port 1 ( 3 )
Both Jmpers In = Port Terminated M M
Both Jmpers Out = Port Non-Terminated
Always RTS RTS GND

T T
E E
SV Address Jumper R R SV Port 2 ( 4 )
Jmp In = 1st SV Combo M M
Jmp Out = 2nd SV Combo
Port Numbers in ( ) are for 2nd SV Module

Always IRQ 2 BRD SEL
2 4 IRQ
Fig. 1. Omni Model 68-6203 Multivariable Interface Module - SV Combo

Module
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+ 5

Setting the Address of the SV Combo Module

The flow computer can accept up to two SV Combo modules, each with a
unique address determined by the BRD SEL jumper shown in Figure 1. With
this jumper fitted the flow computer will report that a SV1 module is installed
and SV ports 1 and 2 will be available. Without this jumper in the BRD SEL
position the flow computer will report that a SV2 module is installed and SV
ports 3 and 4 will be available. Note that a system can have a SV2 module
without a SV1 being installed, in this case only SV ports 3 and 4 would be
available.
Setting the Termination Jumpers for the Each of the SV

RS-485 Ports
Multivariable RS-485 communication circuits must have two ends only, a star
configuration with more than two ends or a loop configuration with no
ends is not allowed. The devices at both ends of the circuit must be jumpered
to provide termination.
3095 FB 3095 FB 3095 FB 3095 FB

MV MV MV MV
ID #1 ID #2 ID #3 ID #4
Omni
Flow
Computer
This Device This Device
Must Be Must Be
Terminated Terminated
Fig. 2. Multi-drop Configuration with Flow Computer Terminated
Both jumpers marked TERM must be installed to terminate a flow computer

SV port (see Fig. 1 previous page). Termination settings for the 3095FB are
shown later in this document.
3095 FB This Device 3095 FB

MV Must Be MV
ID #1 Terminated ID #4
Omni
Flow
Computer
This Device
Must Be
3095 FB 3095 FB
MV MV
Terminated
ID #2 ID #3
Fig. 3. Multi-drop Configuration with Flow Computer Non-terminated
6 TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

Rosemount
3095 FB 3095 FB 3095 FB 3095 FB

MV MV MV MV
ID #1 ID #2 ID #3 ID #4
Omni
Flow
Computer
Star Configuration Not Allowed!
Fig. 4. Unacceptable Configuration - Five Termination Points
All 4 MV Ports of 3095 FB 3095 FB 3095 FB 3095 FB

Flow Computer MV MV MV MV
Must Be Terminated ID #1 ID #1 ID #1 ID #1
Omni
Flow
Computer
Using
Independent
MV Ports Modbus IDs of 3095FBs All Four 3095FB
Can Be The Same In This Transmitters
Point to Point Configuration Must Be Terminated
Fig. 5. Point-to-Point Wiring Configuration
In the point-to-point configuration each 3095FB transmitter is connected to an

independent SV port of the flow computer. Because each SV port is now
connected to only one 3095FB, each 3095FB can now use the default Modbus
address 1, greatly simplifying transmitter replacement issues discussed later in
this document.
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+ 7

3095FB Multi
Initial Setup of the Rosemount
Variable Transmitter
The 3095FB module has two sets of DIP switches and a jumper set which must
be setup according to the wiring configuration used to connect to the Omni Flow
Computer.
All ON = Terminated Security OFF to

All OFF = Un-Terminated allow configuration
OFF o o
AC TERMINATION
PULL DOWN (B)
o o
ON
o o
PULL UP (A)
SECURITY o o
o o
ON
1 2 3
S1 S2
ON
1 2
All ON For 9600 Baud
Fig. 6. Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Setup Switches and Jumpers
Place the security jumper in the OFF position, this allows the Omni flow
computer to write to the 3095FB registers ensuring that the internal
configuration matches the flow computer. Both baud rate switches S1 and S2
must be set to 9600; i.e., in the ON position. The termination switches should
be all ON or all OFF depending upon whether device termination is required.
8 TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

Rosemount
Connecting the 3095FB to the Omni Flow

Computer
TERMINAL SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
1 Port #1(3) RS 485 B wire

2 Port #1(3) RS 485 A wire
3 Port #2(4) RS 485 B wire
4 Port #2(4) RS 485 A wire
5 Signal Return for 4-20mA Outputs

6 Signal Return for 4-20mA Outputs
7 4-20mA Analog Output # 5
Fig. 7. Back Panel Termination Assignments - SV Combo Module
A
RS-485
B
+
PWR
-
Fig. 8. Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Wiring Terminals
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+ 9

3095FB Transmitter RS-485 Connections

Two terminals are provided marked A and B, these are connected to the A and
B terminals of other multi-dropped 3095FBs and to the Omni SV Combo
module terminals. These connections should be made using twisted pair
unshielded wire with a minimum gauge dependent upon the distance to be run.
Use 22 AWG minimum, 18 AWG maximum for runs less than 1000 ft. Use 20
AWG minimum, 18 AWG maximum for runs of 1000 to 4000 ft. Shielded
twisted pair cable can be used but may have an attenuating effect due to a
higher capacitance per foot thereby limiting the maximum wire run length to
less than 4000 ft.
3095FB Transmitter Power Connections and

Requirements
Terminals marked + and - are provided to connect the 3095FB to a 7.5 VDC.
to 24 VDC. power supply. This power supply must be able to provide 10 mA per
installed 3095FB plus an additional 100 mA which is needed when any 3095FB
in the system is transmitting data to the flow computer. Ripple on this power
supply must be less than 2%. Wiring gauge should be selected as per the
previous paragraph and can be unshielded un-twisted pair, but for best
performance should be shielded and twisted.
4000 Ft. Maximum
Termination ON
Omni Flow Computer
No Stubs over 6 ft.
RS 485 Bus
A
MV Port #1
B
A
MV Port #2
B
A
MV Port #3
B A A A
RS-485 RS-485 RS-485
A B B B
MV Port #4
B + + +
PWR PWR PWR
- - -
7.5 VDC to 24 VDC

Termination OFF Termination OFF Termination ON
Power Supply
150 mA Minimum
+
-
Fig. 9. Connecting The Flow Computer to Multi-dropped 3095

Transmitters
10 TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

Rosemount
Isolation and Transient Protection Issues

The design of the 3095FB transmitter does not provide any DC isolation
between the power connections and the RS-485 connections. Applying voltages
between the power wiring and RS-485 wiring greater than the allowable
common mode voltage of a RS-485 driver circuit could damage the 3095FB.
The Omni flow computer SV port is optically isolated and can handle common
mode voltages of +/- 250 VDC with respect to chassis ground.
Inductive base transient protectors including the Rosemount Model 470, can
adversely affect the output of the 3095FB. Do not use the Model 470 for
transient protection with the 3095FB. If transient protection is desired, install
the optional Transient Protection Terminal Block described in Appendix B of
the Rosemount 3095FB Manual (pub. 00809-0100-4738).
Wiring Considerations When Replacing a Multi-dropped

3095FB Transmitter
If downtime of other 3095FB transmitters in a multi-dropped system cannot be
tolerated, make sure to provide a suitable and safe means of disconnecting
power and signal from each individual 3095FB transmitter. Because of the
power requirements of the RS-485 the 3095FB cannot be made
intrinsically safe. This means that proper safety procedures must be
followed before any covers are removed from any devices or junction
boxes located in hazardous areas. Refer to Rosemount 3095FB Manual
(publication 00809-0100-4738) for correct installation of the 3095FB
transmitter.
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+ 11

Configuring the Omni Flow Computer to use

the 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter
Configuring the Meter Run I/O
Selecting the Device Type

The existing Select Turbine Y/N entry in the Config Meter Run menu has
been changed to Select Device Type. Valid selections at this point are:
0 = DP Sensor
1 = Turbine Meter
2 = 3095FB Multivariable
3 = SMV 3000 Multivariable
When 2 is selected above the following entries appear:
Selecting the SV Combo Module Port

The number of ports available depends upon what SV Combo Modules are
fitted in the flow computer. Ports 1 and 2 are available when SV Combo Module
#1 is fitted, ports 3 and 4 when SV Combo Module #2 is present. It is possible to
have SV ports 3 and 4 without SV ports 1 and 2 assuming SV Combo Module
#2 is the only SV module fitted.
Select Modbus Address for 3095FB

In point-to-point mode (i.e., each SV port is connected to a single 3095FB) it is
recommended that you select Modbus ID 1 at this point. This is the default ID
used by Rosemount when the 3095 is shipped. In multi-drop mode each
3095FB connected to a SV port must have its own address which can be
between 1 and 247.
What I/O Points are Used and Why

Even though the multivariable data is obtained serially and not via analog input
channels, the flow computer must have a storage structure in RAM to place the
data. Omni has chosen to treat the data as closely as possible to that obtained
by conventional means and use the same physical I/O RAM structure as is used
for analog inputs. The main difference being that with analog and pulse inputs
you would manually assign the I/O points to be used for each input. When using
the 3095FB multi variable, the flow computer automatically assigns three I/O
point assignments for the DP, temperature and pressure sensors within the
3095FB. The I/O point numbers are allocated in the order that the 3095FBs are
configured using the above three entries (it has nothing to do with SV port or SV
module numbers). The starting I/O point for the first 3095FB configured is the
first point immediately after the last I/O point used by any other A, B, E/D, E or
H combo modules in the system (see examples on facing page).
12 TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

Rosemount
EXAMPLE 1 CONFIGURATION 6000 - 2A - 1B 1SV
A1 Combo Module I/O Points 1-4

B1 Combo Module I/O Points 9 - 12
st
1 3095FB Configured Uses DP=13, T=14, P=15
nd
rd
4th 3095FB Configured Uses DP=22, T=23, P=24
Fig. 10. I/O Points Used by SV Combo Modules - Example 1
EXAMPLE 2 CONFIGURATION 6000 - 1A - 1E/D 1SV

E/D1 Combo Module I/O Points 5-8
st
2nd 3095FB Configured Uses DP=12, T=13, P=14
rd
th
Fig. 11. I/O Points Used by SV Combo Modules - Example 2
Bi-directional Flow and 3095FB Transmitters

Sometimes it is necessary to use a process variable obtained from a 3095FB in
more than one meter run. For example, When measuring bi-directional flow it is
customary to configure one meter run within the Omni flow computer as
forward flow and a second meter run as reverse flow. To do this, simply
configure both meter runs as Device Type = 2 (3095FB Multi Variable), select
the same SV port and Modbus ID, the Omni flow computer will recognize that
both meter runs are using the same 3095FB device and allocate only one set of
I/O assignments.
Referencing 3095FB Variables Elsewhere in the Configuration

While the DP, temperature and pressure obtained from the 3095FB multi
variable are used to calculate flow, it may also be necessary to use either the
temperature and/or the pressure to correct a densitometer device mounted in
close proximity. To do this simply note the I/O point numbers automatically
assigned to the 3095FB when it was configured and reuse these point numbers
as needed.
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+ 13

DP, Pressure and Temperature Setup Entries Needed

Once I/O points have been assigned to the 3095FB multi variable transmitter by
the flow computer the Differential Pressure, Temperature and Pressure setup
menus become active. Data entries in these menus are:
q Low Alarm Setpoint

q High Alarm Setpoint
q Override Value
q Override Code
0 = Never Use Override Value
1 = Always Use Override Value
2 = Use Override on a 3095FB Communication Failure or Critical Error
3 = Use Last Hours Average on a 3095FB Communication Failure or
Critical Error
q 4mA Value (read only)
q 20mA Value (read only)
q Damping Code
0 = 0.108 Seconds 5 = 3.456 Seconds
1 = 0.216 Seconds 6 = 6.912 Seconds
2 = 0.432 Seconds 7 = 13.824 Seconds
3 = 0.864 Seconds (Default) 8 = 27.648 Seconds
4 = 1.728 Seconds
All of these data entries are changeable when using analog transmitters but
when using the 3095FB multi variable transmitter the 4mA and 20mA scaling
values cannot be changed. The upper and lower range of the 3095FB sensors
are fixed by design. The Omni flow computer simply reads these values and
displays them in the 4mA and 20mA fields for information only.
While the 3095FB transmitter has internal alarm setpoints and alarm status
points, Omni has chosen to ignore the 3095FB integral alarming functions and
use the existing flow computer alarm setpoints and alarm status points. The
Low and High Alarm Setpoints of the flow computer therefore behave exactly as
they would with an analog transmitter. The 3095FB Critical Alarm states are
monitored continuously.
Data Transferred between the 3095FB

Transmitter and the Omni Flow Computer
In operation the Omni flow computer automatically sets up the 3095FB
transmitter to use the correct floating point format and units of measure needed
to match the flow computers configuration. The Omni continuously reads the
following data:
q Process Variables DP, Pressure and Temperature

q Individual Transmitter Sensor Ranges
q Critical Transmitter Alarms (Sensor failures etc)
q Transmitter Information (Body and Fill material etc)
q Manufacturers Code
q Transmitter Tags
14 TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

Rosemount
Polling Intervals for Process Variables and Critical

Alarms
The message poll scheme comprises regular reads of the process variable
values and critical alarms every 200msec per 3095FB connected to a flow
computer SV port. This means that in a multi-drop system with four transmitters
the process variable update time will be 4 x 200msec or 800msec.
Critical 3095FB Alarms Monitored By The Flow Computer

Critical alarm points within the 3095FB are monitored and mapped into the
Omni flow computer Modbus database as follows:
Alarms Associated with the 3095FB Providing Data to Meter Run n

M ODBUS ACTION TAKEN IF ALARM IS ACTIVE
ALARM POINT DESCRIPTION
ADDRESS (SEE ALSO FAILURE CODE SETTING)
DP signal 10% above upper

1n83 DP transmitter failure flagged
range limit
DP signal 10% below lower
1n84 DP transmitter failure flagged
range limit
Pressure signal 10% above
1n85 Pressure transmitter failure flagged
upper range limit
Pressure signal 10% below
lower range limit
1n87 Pressure sensor is shorted Pressure transmitter failure flagged
Pressure sensor bridge is

open circuit
Temperature signal 10%
1n89 Temperature transmitter failure flagged
above upper range limit
Temperature signal 10%
below lower range limit
Temperature RTD is
disconnected
Sensor internal temperature DP, P and T, transmitter failures
1n92
above upper range limit flagged
Sensor internal temperature DP, P and T, transmitter failures
1n93
below upper range limit flagged
Critical 3095FB sensor DP, P and T, transmitter failures
1n94
electronics failure flagged
Security jumper of 3095FB is DP, P and T transmitter failures flagged
1n95
set to Write Protect if write to 3095FB is attempted and fails.
Note: No Communications between DP, P and T, transmitter failures

^ 1n96
^ 1n96 is flow computer the Omni and 3095FB unit flagged
generated.
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+ 15

Synchronizing the 3095FB and the Flow

Computer Configurations
To ensure that the flow computer correctly interprets the 3095FB data, the flow
computer continuously verifies that the configuration of the 3095FB transmitter
matches that required by the flow computer. Additional message polls verifying
this data are interleaved with the normal message polls used to retrieve the
process variables and alarms.
Notes: Numbers in ( ) are Critical 3095FB configuration data which is checked every 10 seconds are:
Modbus addresses within the
3095FB database q Floating Point Number Format ** (0132)
** The flow computer will
q Measurement Engineering Units of Measure ** (0060 - 0062)
attempt to correct the
database of the 3095FB q Minimum and Maximum Ranges of each Signal * (7407 - 7416)
transmitter if miss
matches are detected for q Transmitter Identification (Information Only) (0001 - 0011)
these variables. q Damping Factors ** (7421, 7424, 7427)
* The flow computer will q Transmitter ASCII Tags (3x8 characters) ** (0032 - 0047)
adjust its database to
agree with the 3095FB q Transmitter Information (Materials of Construction) (0017 - 0029)
database if miss matches
are detected for these
variables.
Viewing the 3095FB Data at the Flow
Computer Front Panel
Differential Pressure, Temperature and Pressure variables and averages are
viewed using the normal key press combinations as described in the Omni Flow
Computer User Manual.
A display list of 3095FB transmitter information can be displayed by pressing
Setup n Enter. Data is organized by SV port number n and in the order that
the transmitters were configured. The following information and diagnostic data
is displayed (example shows first transmitter on the #1 SV port as an example):
st
1 digit is the SV port
nd
number, 2 digit is the
Modbus Address of the SV Port 1 - 1
3095FB Manufactur Rosemount
Model 3095/Modbus
Out Board Rev 108.0
16 TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

Rosemount
If you continue to scroll down, the following data will be displayed:
Sensor Mod Rev 142

Sensor Serial 839193
Xmtr Ser 19644
H/W Rev 3
Modbus Rev 5
Sensor Type GP
DP Range -250 to 250
SP Range 0-800 psi
PT Range-40 to 1200F
Isolator Matl 316SS
Fill Fluid Silicone
Flange Mtrl 316SS
Flange Type Coplaner
Drain/Vent 316SS
O-Ring PTFE(Teflon)
Seal Type None
Seal Fill None
Seal Isolator None
NumberofSeals None
Installing, Replacing and Calibrating 3095FB

Transmitters
Wiring Issues
If downtime of other 3095FB transmitters in a multi-dropped system cannot be
tolerated, make sure to provide a suitable and safe means of disconnecting
power and signal from each individual 3095FB transmitter. Because of the
power requirements of the RS-485 the 3095FB cannot be made
intrinsically safe. This means that proper safety procedures must be
followed before any covers are removed from any devices or junction
boxes located in hazardous areas. Refer to Rosemount 3095FB Manual
(publication 00809-0100-4738) for correct installation of the 3095FB
transmitter.
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+ 17

Using the Omni Flow Computer to Set the Modbus

Address of the 3095FB
The 3095FB transmitter will normally be shipped with a default Modbus address
of 1. While this is fine for a point to point installation, it will cause a problem if
two or more devices have the same Modbus ID in a multi-drop scheme. The
Modbus ID of a transmitter can be set using the Configurator User Interface PC
Software available from Rosemount. It is anticipated though that some
situations may arise where a 3095FB transmitter must be installed or replaced
without this software being available. In this case the Omni flow computer can
be connected to a 3095FB in the point to point mode using any available SV
port and the Modbus ID changed to what is required in the flow computer
configuration.
CAUTION! Proceed as follows:
This procedure involves 1. Setup the 3095FB as described previously in the section titled Initial
broadcast transmitting a Setup of the Rosemount 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter.
Modbus address out of a SV
port. All devices connected to
this SV port will have their 2. Setup the 3095FB to be RS-485 terminated.
Modbus address set to the
ID broadcast. This would 3. Connect the transmitter to any open SV port (terminal A to A, B to B).
cause data collisions and a
complete loss of
The SV port should be jumpered for RS-485 termination. If this SV
communication when more channel is not an open channel, all 3095FB transmitters except the one
than one 3095FB transmitter needing the address change must be disconnected.
is connected. Be sure to
temporarily disconnect any
3095FB transmitters which
4. Apply power to the 3095FB transmitter.
addresses you do not want to
change. 5. At the flow computer front panel press the following keys:
[Alpha Shift] [Diag] The computer will enter the Diagnostic mode.
[Setup] [n] [Enter] Where n is the SV port number that the 3095FB
is connected to.
6. The following warning screen may display ( SV port 1 is used as an

example) or the screen in (7) below will display.
SV Port # 1
This Port Currently
Configured For Use!
Continue (Y/N)?
This means that the flow computer has detected that this SV port is
currently configured to communicate with one or more transmitters. You
may or may not have selected the wrong SV port (see the cautions in
sidebar).
7. If you wish to continue with the address broadcast operation enter Y

and the following screen will display.
SV Port # 1
Change Xmtr Address
New Address _
Idle
18 TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

Rosemount
8. Scroll down to New Address and enter the address required. Press
Enter and the following message will display.
Sending New Address
9. The flow computer will wait a short time and then attempt to
communicate with the 3095FB using the new address. If
communications are established the following message will be displayed
for a few seconds.
Address Changed
The following message will display for a second or two should the
transmission fail.
Failed to Change
Should this message appear check your wiring, switch and jumper
settings and repeat the procedure.
10. Disconnect and reinstall 3095FB to the appropriate SV port for normal
operation making sure to observe the termination requirements of only
two devices at the end of a loop being terminated.
Using a Laptop PC to Trim the 3095FB Calibration

The flow computer provides no way of calibrating or trimming the output of the
3095FB multi variable transmitter. To calibrate the transmitter use the
Configurator User Interface PC Software available from Rosemount. The user
must disconnect the 3095FB needing calibrating and connect it in point to point
mode with the Laptop or PC running the Rosemount Interface Software.
Remember to follow all correct safety procedures when removing
transmitter covers or junction boxes. Read the manufactures warnings
and recommendations as printed in the 3095FB manual. Be aware that
when removing a transmitter from a multi-drop installation, wiring may be
disturbed and disruption of the circuit may cause a loss of all measurement
signals due to loss of power, signal or RS-485 termination.
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+ 19

SMV3000
Multivariable Transmitters
Contents
contained in the User DE Protocol Overview .................................................................................... 2
all firmware revisions .72+. Transmitter Database..................................................................................... 2
Handheld Communicator .................................................. 3
The Honeywell
Communication with Combo Module LED Status Indicators.......................................................... 3
Honeywell SMV3000
Smart Transmitters - This Switching Between Analog and Digital Mode............................................... 3
feature allows you to
communicate with Honeywell Viewing the Status of the Honeywell Transmitter from the Keypad............ 4
SMV3000 Smart Transmitter from the Keypad......... 5
Multivariable Transmitters
which provide Differential Obtaining More Detailed Status Information from the Keypad.................... 8
Pressure , Temperature and
Static Pressure, via Omnis Transducer Alarms Logged by the Flow Computer ................................... 12
HV type Process I/O Combo
HV Combo Module Address Jumpers ......................................................... 13
Modules and using
Honeywells DE Protocol. How the I/O Points are Assigned................................................................. 14
OmniCom Revision ...................................................................................... 15
Getting Tech Support -
Technical support is available
at:
( (281) 240-6161
Email should be sent via the Scope
WEB Page at:
www.omniflow.com All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers containing
or email to: firmware 21.72+, 23.72+, 27.72+ are able to communicate with Honeywell
techsupport@omniflow.com SMV3000 Smart Multivariable Transmitters. This feature uses Honeywells DE
Protocol and requires that an HV Combo I/O Module be installed in your flow
computer.
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+ 1
Abstract
Using an HV Combo I/O Module, the Omni Flow Computer can communicate
with up to 4 Honeywell SMV3000 Smart Multivariable transmitters. These
transmitters provide Differential Pressure, Temperature and Pressure signals
using Honeywells DE Protocol. Only one HV Type Combo Module can be
installed in the flow computer. Loop power is provided by the HV combo
module.
DE Protocol Overview
Digital data is transmitted serially between the flow computer and Honeywell
Smart Transmitters by modulating the current in the two wire loop connecting
the devices. Power for the transmitter is also taken from this current loop. Data
is transmitted at 218.47 bits per second with a digital 0 = 20 mA and a digital
1 = 4 mA.
In normal operation, the Honeywell transmitter operates in the 6-byte Burst
Mode. In this mode, the transmitter transmits the following data to the flow
computer every 366 msec:
Byte #1 Status Flags
Byte #2-#4 Process Variables % Span Value (3-byte floating point)
Byte #5 Database ID (indicates where in the transmitters database Byte #6
below belongs)
Byte #6 Database Data Value
Transmitter Database
By using the data contained in Bytes #5 and #6, the flow computer builds and
maintains an exact copy of the multivariable transmitters configuration
database. The transmitter database which is sent to the Omni flow computer is
about 132 bytes. Based on the burst rate of the transmitter it can take about 45
to 55 seconds to completely build a copy of the transmitter database within the
flow computer. The transmitter database is continuously compared against the
flow computer configuration settings for that transmitter. The flow computer
automatically corrects any differences between the databases by writing the
correct configuration data to the transmitter.
2 TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
TB-980502 SMV3000 Multivariable Transmitters
Handheld Communicator
The Honeywell
The flow computer is responsible for configuring the following entries within the
transmitter:
(1) Lower Range Value or Zero
(2) Transmitter Span or Max Range
(3) Damping Factor
(4) Tag Name
(5) DP, SP and Temperature conformance bits
Any changes made to 1, 2, 3 and 5 using the handheld communicator will be
overwritten by the flow computer. In the digital mode it is not absolutely
necessary to calibrate the transmitters outputs using the handheld
communicator. The user can however trim the transmitters output calibration
using the handheld communicator if he so desires without interference from the
flow computer (see Honeywell documentation for details of trimming corrects).
Whether the transmitter is trimmed with the handheld or not, the digital signals
should be final calibrated end to end using the normal analog input method
described in Chapter 8 of Volume 1.
Combo Module LED Status Indicators

Each I/O channel of the HV Combo module has a set of two LED indicators,
one green and one red. The green LED shows all communication activity taking
place on the channel (flow computer, transmitter and handheld communicator if
connected). The Red LED lights only when the flow computer is transmitting
data to the transmitter.
Normal digital operation is indicated by a regular pulsation of the green LED
(about 3 per second). The red LED will be seen to blink whenever a
configuration change is made in the flow computer which affects that particular
transmitter.
Switching Between Analog and Digital Mode.

Connecting an analog mode Honeywell multivariable transmitter to the
computer will cause the flow computer to automatically switch the transmitter to
the digital DE mode sending out a series of Wake up commands to the
Honeywell transmitter. A switch over to the digital mode by the transmitter will
cause the green LED on the combo module to pulse steadily indicating that
communications have been established.
To disable the wake up command and initialize communications between the
Honeywell transmitter and the flow computer, delete all I/O point assignments
within the flow computer to that I/O point. Using the Honeywell handheld
communicator press [Shift] [A/D] and wait till the handheld displays Change to
Analog? Answer by pressing [Enter] (Yes). SFC Working will be displayed.
The green LED on the HV Combo module on that channel will stop pulsing.
Re-entering the I/O point will cause the Omni to send the wake up command to
the Honeywell and after three command sends the green LED on the Honeywell
module will pulse at a steady 3Hz rate.
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+ 3

Transmitter from the Keypad
To verify the data being received from the smart transmitter, press [Input]
[Status] and [Enter] from the front panel. The following data displays:
HV-1 Transmitter
DB Status OK
Gstatus NON-CRITICAL
DP% 25.00
SP% 76.50
TT% 32.13
DP LRV 0.0
DP Span 400.0
DP Damp Secs. .16
DP Conformity bit 0
SP LRV 406.8
SP Span 27680.2
SP Damp Secs .16
SP Conformity bit 0
TT LRV .0
TT Span 100.0
TT Damp Secs .3
TT Conformity bit 0
SW Revision 2.1
Serial # xxxxxxxxxx
DP Range 400.0
SP Range 20760.5
TT Range 850.0
ID/TAG SMV-3000
Filter Hertz 60
SensorType RTD-PT100
4 TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+

Transmitter from the Keypad
HV-1 Transmitter : Indicates the Honeywell Multivariable Combo Module
(HV) and the channel number on that module. As there
can be only one HV module installed, this number can
only be 1 through 4.
DB Status : There are five status states.
1) OK : Communications between the flow
are OK. The database within the
transmitter matches the flow computer.
2) Idle : This flow computer I/O point has been
assigned to a Honeywell transmitter but is
not receiving data from the transmitter.
Possible cause is a wiring problem such as
reversal of wiring. If you observe the
status LEDs you will note that the flow
computer attempts to establish
communications by sending a wake-up
command every 10 seconds or so.
3) Bad PV : Communications between the flow
are OK but the transmitter has determined
that a critical error has occurred within the
transmitter meaning the value of the
process variable cannot be trusted. The
flow computer will set the transducer
failure alarm and follow the fail code
strategy selected by the user for this
transducer.
4) DB Error : Communications between the flow
are OK but the flow Computer has
determined that the database within the
flow computer does not agree with the
database within the transmitter. If you
observe the status LEDs you will note that
the flow computer attempts to correct the
transmitters database by writing the
correct data to the transmitter once every
30-45 sec or so.
5) 4 Byte : The transmitter is operating in the 4-Byte
Burst Mode. Because the flow computer
will not tolerate this mode of operation,
this status display should only be
displayed momentarily as the flow
computer will automatically switch the
transmitter into the 6-Byte Burst Mode.
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+ 5
Gstatus : Gross Status Flag value:

1) OK : No errors are reported by the SMV
transmitter.
2) Critical Critical error reported by the SMV
transmitter.
3) Non-Critical : An error of a non critical nature has
been reported by the SMV transmitter.
4) Reserved : Consult Honeywell if this status value is
returned.
DP% : Differential pressure variable value in percentage of the
transmitter span. A -25.00 could mean that the
transmitter is not communicating (see Status definition
previous).
SP% : Static pressure variable value in percentage of the
previous).
TT% : Temperature variable value in percentage of the
previous).
DP LRV : Lower Range Value of the DP variable in engineering
units. Engineering units are inches of water at 39
degrees Fahrenheit.
DP Span : The Span of the Differential pressure variable in
engineering units (the span is the difference between the
lower and upper ranges of the transmitter). Engineering
units are inches of water at 39 degrees Fahrenheit. The
flow computer will display DB Error if the user tries to
enter a span of 0% or a span which would exceed the DP
sensor range (described later).
DP Damp Secs : Damping Time of the DP transmitter output in seconds.
DP Conformity Bit : Meaningful only with differential pressure transmitters.

Conformity Bit 0 = linear output; Conformity Bit 1 =
square root output. The flow computer requires linear
output and will automatically set this bit to 0 should it be
set to a 1.
SP LRV : Lower Range Value of the Static Pressure variable in
engineering units. Engineering units are inches of water
at 39 degrees Fahrenheit.
SP Span : The Span of the Static Pressure variable in engineering
units (the span is the difference between the lower and
upper ranges of the transmitter). Engineering units are
inches of water at 39 degrees Fahrenheit. The flow
computer will display DB Error if the user tries to enter a
span of 0% or a span which would exceed the static
pressure sensor range (described later).
6 TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
SP Damp Secs : Damping Time of the Static Pressure transmitter output

in seconds.
SP Conformity Bit : Meaningful only with differential pressure transmitters.
TT LRV : Lower Range Value of the temperature variable in
engineering units. Engineering units are degrees Celsius.
TT Span : The Span of the Temperature variable in engineering
units (the span is the difference between the lower and
upper ranges of the transmitter). Engineering units are
degrees Celsius. The flow computer will display DB
Error if the user tries to enter a span of 0% or a span
which would exceed the temperature sensor range
(described later).
TT Damp Secs : Damping Time of the Temperature transmitter output in
seconds.
TT Conformity Bit : Meaningful only with differential pressure transmitters.

Software Revision : Current Software installed within the smart multivariable
device.
Serial # : Serial Number of the smart multivariable device.
DP Range : Maximum range of the DP sensor in inches of water at
39 degrees Fahrenheit. The transmitter will not accept
configuration entries which exceed this value.
SP Range : Maximum range of the Static Pressure sensor in inches
of water at 39 degrees Fahrenheit. The transmitter will
not accept configuration entries which exceed this value.
TT Range : Maximum range of the Temperature sensor in degrees
Celsius. The transmitter will not accept configuration
entries which exceed this value.
ID/TAG : ASCII string used to identify the SMV DP transmitter.
Filter Hertz : Frequency used to filter sensor signals to minimize AC
mains interference. Selections are 50 or 60 Hertz.
Sensor Type : Temperature sensor types are:
1) RTD-PT100
2) J type Thermocouple
3) K type Thermocouple
4) T type Thermocouple
5) E type Thermocouple
Note: Thermocouples can be internally or externally
compensated.
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+ 7
Obtaining More Detailed Status Information

from the Keypad
Additional data based upon the Primary, Secondary and Tertiary Detailed
Status bytes which are retrieved from the SMV data base is available by
pressing [Input] [Status] [Alarm] and [Enter]. The display will approximate the
following messages depending upon certain bits being ON in the appropriate
detailed status byte. Some of these status bits also cause alarm status points
within the flow computer data base to be activated. When this happens, these
alarm events are time and date tagged and logged in the alarm log as any other
flow computer alarm.
OMNI
HONEYWELL
ALARM
DETAILED STATUS T EXT IN BOLD DISPLAYED
POINT(S)
BYTE-BIT
ACTIVATED
Meter Body Fault: Communication 2n44 CR
1-0 between sensor board and SMV main board 2n47 CR
electronics is suspect. 2n50 CR
Characterization PROM Fault or Checksum 2n44 CR
1-1
Error 2n47 CR
Suspect Input: Possibly Meter Body or 2n44 CR
1-2
Electronics Failure 2n47 CR
1-3 DAC Compensation: Fault Detected 2n52 CR
1-4 NVM Fault: Non Volatile Memory Error 2n52 CR

Detected
1-5 RAM Fault: RAM Memory Error Detected 2n52 CR
1-6 ROM Fault: ROM Memory Error Detected 2n52 CR
1-7 2n44 CR
PAC Fault Detected
2n47 CR
2-0 MB OverTemp: Meter Body Sensor Over 2n51 NC
Temperature
2-1 DP Zero Correction Value is Outside of 2n42 NC
Acceptable Limits
2-2 DP Span Correction Value is Outside of 2n42 NC
Acceptable Limits
Status 2-3 (Consult with Honeywell for
2-3
meaning)
2-4 MB Overload or : (Always with next 2n47 CR
message)
NC = None Critical Alarm. CR = Critical Alarm Override Action Considered.
Note: The n in the Modbus address refers to the number of the meter run.
8 TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
HONEYWELL OMNI
DETAILED STATUS T EXT IN BOLD DISPLAYED ALARM
BYTE-BIT POINT(S)
ACTIVATED
2-5 Meter Body Fault: Pressure input is twice 2n47 CR
the URL
DP Cal Corr Default: Reset Corrects
2-6 command issued or Calibrate and Power 2n42 NC
Cycle performed
2-7 DAC Tempco Data Bad: Analog mode only.
2n44 CR
Invalid Database: Some error detected in
3-0 2n47 CR
the SMVs configuration. All PVs are suspect.
2n50 CR
3-1 Suspect SP Input: Static pressure input 2n47 CR
suspect
3-2
meaning)
3-3
meaning)
3-4 DP Term Out of Range
V-T Term Out of Rng: Viscosity
3-5
temperature term out of range
D-T Term Out of Rng: Density temperature
3-6
term out of range
Ind Var Out of Range: Independent
3.7
variable out of range
4-0
meaning)
4-1 Excess Zero Corr SP: Excess zero 2n45 NC
correction for static pressure
4-2 Excess Span Corr SP: Excess span 2n45 NC
correction for static pressure
SP is Absolute: Static pressure sensor is
4-3
absolute
SP is Gauge: Static pressure sensor is
4-4
gauge
4-5
meaning)
4-6 SP Corrects Reset: Static pressure 2n45 NC
corrections reset
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+ 9
HONEYWELL OMNI
BYTE-BIT POINT(S)
ACTIVATED
4-7
meaning)
5-0
meaning)
5-1
meaning)
5-2
meaning)
5-3
meaning)
5-4 DP in Input Mode 2n43 CR
5-5 SP in Input Mode 2n46 CR
5-6 Temp in Input Mode 2n49 CR
5-7 PV4 in Input Mode
6-0 2 Wire RTD Used
6-1 3 Wire RTD Used
6-2 4 Wire RTD Used
6-3 2 Wire TC Used
6-4 DP in Output Mode 2n43 CR
6-5 SP in Output Mode 2n46 CR
6-6 Temp in Output Mode 2n49 CR
6-7 PV4 in Output Mode
7-0 Temp A/D Fault : Temperature A to D 2n50 CR
failure
7-1 Temp Char Fault: Temperature 2n50 CR

characterization fault
7-2 Temp Input Suspect: Temperature input 2n50 CR
signal is suspect
7-3
meaning)
7-4 Temp NVM Fault: Temperature non-volatile 2n50 CR
memory fault detected
7-5
meaning)
10 TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
HONEYWELL OMNI
BYTE-BIT POINT(S)
ACTIVATED
7-6
meaning)
7-7
meaning)
Delta Temperature : (FUTURE - Consult
8-0
with Honeywell for meaning)
8-1 Excess Zero Cor Temp 2n48 NC
8-2 Excess Span Cor Temp 2n48 NC
8-3 Temp Input Open : Open circuit 2n50 CR

temperature sensor
8-4 Temp Over Range : Process temperature is 2n50 CR
over range
Redun Backup Temp : (FUTURE - Consult
8-5
with Honeywell for meaning)
8-6 Temp Corrects Active 2n48 NC
8-7 Temp Sensor Mismatch 2n50 CR
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+ 11
Transducer Alarms Logged by the Flow

Computer
The following alarm points are automatically updated with data contained in the
detailed status bytes within the flow computers copy of the SMVs data base
(see the previous table). These alarms are time and date tagged and logged by
the flow computer whenever the respective bit changes state. Other than the
logging function, non critical alarms cause no other action to occur. Critical
alarms are alarms which are considered to adversely impact the credibility of
the measurement reading, these alarms cause the flow computer to examine
the Override Code strategy and apply an override if so configured.
ADDRESS OF ALARM T ITLE ALARM T YPE

ALARM POINT
2n42 Meter n DP: Invalid Corrects or Corrects NC
Reset
2n43 Meter n DP is in the Input or Output Mode CR
2n44 Meter n DP Signal is Suspect CR
Meter n Pressure: Invalid Corrects or Corrects
2n45 NC
Reset
Meter n Pressure is in the Input or Output
2n46 CR
Mode
2n47 Meter n Pressure Signal is Suspect CR
Meter n Temperature - Invalid Corrects or
2n48 NC
Corrects Reset
Meter n Temperature is in the Input or Output
2n49 CR
Mode
2n50 Meter n Temperature Signal is Suspect CR
2n51 Meter n Body Fault - Over Temperature NC
2n52 Meter n Critical Failure of SMV Electronics CR
2n53 Meter n SMV Not Communicating CR
12 TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
HV Combo Module Address Jumpers

The HV Combo Module actually uses the same physical PCB module as a
regular H type combo module, except it uses a different address jumper setting.
Module Address
Jumpers
In * Position
Green LED
Indicates Any
Activity
* * *
Red LED Indicates

OMNI is
Transmitting
SMV Channel #1
SMV Channel #2
Transmitter Loop
Status LEDs
SMV Channel #3
SMV Channel #4
Figure 1. Setting the Address Jumpers of the HV Combo Module
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+ 13
How the I/O Points are Assigned

When the flow computer detects that an HV combo module is installed it
automatically allocates 12 of its 24 process inputs to the HV module. The
presence or absence of combo modules is checked after a RESET ALL RAM or
after a CHECK I/O MODULES command is executed.
Although the HV combo has only 4 physical Honeywell DE ports, each SMV-
3000 provides 3 variables for a total I/O requirement of 4 x 3 = 12. As the total
process input count of the flow computer is limited to 24 it is obvious that if an
HV combo module is fitted there can only be 3 other combo modules of type A,
B, E/D, E or H. The HV combo module is always the last module in the list,
and the I/O assignments reflect this fact (see the following example).
Example 1: Omni 6000 - 2A - H1 HV ( Flow computer contains - 2 A

combos, 1 H combo, and an HV combo).
The 1st A combo is allocated: Input points 1, 2, 3 & 4

Output points 1&2
The 2nd A combo is allocated: Input points 5, 6, 7 & 8

Output points 3&4
The H combo is allocated: Input points 9, 10, 11 & 12

Output points 5&6
The HV combo is allocated: Input points 13, 14, 15 & 16 Diff. Pressure
17, 18, 19 & 20 Temperature
21, 22, 23 & 24 Pressure
Output points 7&8
While the example shown above employs 4 combo modules in total, it uses all
24 process input assignments, this means that 2 physical I/O module slots will
be unusable on the backplane.
To configure an HV combo module it is only necessary to configure the
Diff-Pressure I/O points in the Meter Run Config menu, the I/O points for
the temperature and pressure variables are automatically assigned by the flow
computer and cannot be changed by the user.
14 TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
Using the above example the following table identifies the I/O point
assignments that will occur.
Technical support is available
at: DIFFERENTIAL
( (281) 240-6161
T EMPERATURE PRESSURE
PRESSURE
Email should be sent via the
WEB Page at: METER RUN # 1 13 17 21
www.omniflow.com
METER RUN # 2 14 18 22
or email to:
techsupport@omniflow.com 19 23
METER RUN # 3 15
METER RUN # 4 16 20 24
Numbers in bold are entered by the user. Numbers in italics are assigned
automatically by the flow computer and cannot be changed.
OmniCom Revision
OmniCom revision ??.72 or later is required to support the SMV-3000
multivariable transmitter.
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+ 15
Serial I/O Modules: Installation Options
Contents
contained in Volume 1, and Features and Specifications .......................................................................... 2
is applicable to all firmware
revisions. Dual Channel RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model #68-6005 ......................... 3
RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model #68-6205-A .............................. 4
RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model #68-6205-B .............................. 6
RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial Port Jumper Options ............................................ 8
Scope
All Omni 6000/3000 Flow Computers have serial communications capabilities
via proprietary serial I/O modules.
Abstract
Omni flow computers can come equipped with serial I/O modules that
communicate with RS-232-Compatible or RS-485 devices. Omni manufactures
three models of serial modules:
q Dual Channel RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005

q RS-232-C/RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205-A
q RS-232-C/RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205-B
Each serial module has 2 ports. Omni 6000 flow computers can have up to two
serial modules installed for a maximum of 4 ports. Omni 3000 flow computers
typically use one serial module providing 2 ports. Each serial communication
port is individually optically isolated for maximum common-mode and noise
rejection. Jumpers are provided for selection of module address and serial port
communication standards. Communication parameters such as protocol type,
baud rate, stop bits and parity settings are software selectable.

Features and Specifications

Proprietary serial modules and multi-bus serial I/O interface specifications are:
Omni Serial I/O Modules

M ODEL # TYPE BASIC COMMUNICATION FEATURES
q Dual channel serial communications
providing two RS-232-Compatible
Dual Channel RS-232- ports.
68-6005
Compatible q Communications protocol, baud rate,
stop bits and parity settings are
software selectable.
q Port #1 is factory-set as RS-232-
Compatible mode (jumper blocks are
soldered in place).
q Port #2 is factory set to RS-485
mode.
RS-232-Compatible / RS-485 q RS-485 communications are jumper-
68-6205-A selectable as:
(Non-selectable Ports)
2-wire terminated or non-
terminated
terminated
q Communications protocol, baud rate,
q Both Ports #1 and #2 are jumper-
selectable as either RS-232-C or RS-
485 modes.
q RS-485 communications are jumper-
RS-232-Compatible / RS-485 selectable as:
68-6205-B 2-wire terminated or non-
(Selectable Ports)
terminated
terminated
q Communications protocol, baud rate,
INFO - Up to 12 flow
computers and/or other
Omni Multi-bus Serial I/O Interface
RS-232-COMPATIBLE RS-485
Omnis proprietary RS-232-
Compatible serial port. DATA OUTPUT VOLTAGE 7.5 volts (typical) 5 volts (differential driver)
Thirty-two devices may be
connected when using the LOAD IMPEDANCE 1.5 k ohm 120 ohm
RS-485 mode.
SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT 10 mA (limited) 20 mA
Typically, one serial I/O
module is used on the Omni INPUT LOW THRESHOLD -3.0 volts 0.8 volts (differential input)
3000, providing two ports. A
maximum of two serial INPUT HIGH THRESHOLD +3.0 volts 5.0 volts (differential input)
modules can be installed in
BAUD RATES 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, & 38.4 k bps (software selectable)
the Omni 6000, providing
four ports. COMMON M ODE VOLTAGE 250 Volts to chassis ground
LEDS channel inputs/outputs & handshaking signals

TB-980503 Serial I/O Module: Installation Options
Dual Channel RS-232-C Serial I/O Module

Model #68-6005
INFO - Up to 12 flow Dual channel serial communication modules can be installed providing two RS-
computers and/or other 232-Compatible ports. Although providing RS-232-C signal levels, the tristate
output design allows multiple flow computers to share one RS-232 device. This
Omnis proprietary RS-232-C serial module is the oldest model manufactured by Omni.
serial port.
module is used on the Omni
maximum of two serial
four ports.
Address Selection
Jumpers
Jumper Settings - For
information on setting the
jumpers of serial I/O modules Address S1 (1)
refer to 1.6.3. Serial
1 Selected for Serial
Communication Modules
in Volume 1, Chapter 1 of Ports 1 & 2
the User Manual.
Address S2 (0)
Selected for Serial
0
Ports 3 & 4
RTS Out
Chan. B
TX Out
RTS Out
Chan. A
TX Out
LED Indicators
RX In
Chan. A
RDY In
RX In
Chan. B
RDY In
Fig. 1. Dual RS-232 Serial I/O Module Model Showing Selection Jumper
and Indicator LEDs

RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model

#68-6205-A
INFO - Up to 12 flow Serial I/O Module # 68-6205-A (manufactured 1997) has two communication
computers and/or other ports. The first serial port (Ports #1 and #3 if two 68-6205 modules are installed)
is factory set in the RS-232-C mode (jumpers are soldered into place and
Omnis proprietary RS-232-C cannot be moved). The second serial port (Ports #2 and #4) is configurable for
serial port. Up to 32 devices RS-485 communications only. Although the first serial port provides RS-232-C
may be connected when signal levels, the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share
using the RS-485 mode. one serial link.
Refer to technical bulletin
TB980401 Peer-to-Peer
Basics for more information.
Typically, one serial I/O Address Selection
module is used on the Omni Jumpers
the Omni 6000, providing Address S1 Selected Address S2 Selected
four ports. for Serial Ports 1 & 2 for Serial Ports 3 & 4

jumpers of serial I/O modules IRQ Select Jumper
refer to 1.6.3. Serial
in Volume 1, Chapter 1 of IRQ 2 Selected
the User Manual. For serial (If using an SV
port jumper settings see also Module, select
Fig. 6 in this bulletin. IRQ 3)
LED Indicators
68-6205 REV: A
Port #2 (#4) Jumpers Port #1 (#3) Jumpers

(RS-485 Options Only) (Hard-wired to RS-232-C Only)
Fig. 2. RS-232/485 Module #68-6205-A Showing Selection Jumpers and

Indicator LEDs

The first serial port jumpers are factory hard-wired for RS-232-C mode. This
port is non-selectable and cannot be changed by the user. The second serial
port jumpers are factory preset in the RS-485 two-wire, terminated positions.
This port is user-selectable for RS-485 two-wire/four-wire terminated/non-
terminated jumper positions (see Fig. 6). Back panel wiring is shown below.
Micro Motion RFT 9739
Devices - Users of Micro
Motion RFT 9739 devices
connected to the peer-to-peer
port (Port #2) of the Omni,
networks should be
positioned for 2-wire RS-485
and that Terminal A from the
RFT 9739 should be wired to
Omni Terminal B (7), and B
from the RFT must be wired
to Omni Terminal A (11). Omni 6000
TB980401 Peer-to-Peer
(Omni 3000)
Basics for more information. Terminal RS-485 RS-485
RS-232-C
1 TX
2 TERM
First 3 RX RS-232-C
Serial
Port 4 GND Hard-wired
5 RTS
6 RDY
7 B TX-B
8
Second 9 RX-A
Serial N/A
Port 10 GND GND
11 A TX-A
12 RX-B
Fig. 3. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232-C/RS-485 Module #68-6205-A

RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model

#68-6205-B
INFO - Up to 12 flow Serial I/O Module # 68-6205-B is the latest serial module manufactured by
computers and/or other Omni (1998). It is capable of handling two communication ports. Each serial
port is jumper-selectable for either RS-232-Compatible or RS-485
Omnis proprietary RS-232-C communications. Although providing RS-232-C signal levels when in this mode,
serial port. Up to 32 devices the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share one serial link.
may be connected when In addition to the RS-232 mode, jumper selections have been provided on each
using the RS-485 mode. port to allow selection of RS-485 format. With this option, a total of two RS-485
TB980401 Peer-to-Peer ports are available on this model.
module is used on the Omni Address Selection
Jumpers
four ports. Address S1 Selected Address S2 Selected
for Serial Ports 1 & 2 for Serial Ports 3 & 4

jumpers of serial I/O modules
refer to 1.6.3. Serial IRQ Select Jumper
in Volume 1, Chapter 1 of
the User Manual. For serial IRQ 2 Selected
port jumper settings see also (If using an SV
Fig. 6 in this bulletin. Module, select
IRQ 3)
LED Indicators
68-6205 REV: B
Port #2 (#4)Jumpers Port #1 (#3) Jumpers
Fig. 4. RS-232-C/RS-485 Module #68-6205-B Showing Selection Jumpers

and Indicator LEDs

Jumpers for both serial ports are user-selectable to RS-232-C or RS-485

formats (see Fig. 6). The RS-485 options are either 2-wire or 4-wire mode; each
mode can be set as terminated or non-terminated connections. Back panel
wiring is shown below.
Micro Motion RFT 9739
Devices - Users of Micro
Motion RFT 9739 devices
connected to the peer-to-peer
port (Port #2) of the Omni,
networks should be
positioned for 2-wire RS-485
and that Terminal A from the
RFT 9739 should be wired to
Omni Terminal B (7), and B
from the RFT must be wired
to Omni Terminal A (11).
Refer to technical bulletin Omni 6000
TB980401 Peer-to-Peer (Omni 3000)
Terminal RS-485 RS-485
RS-232-C
1 TX B TX-B
2 TERM
First 3 RX RX-A
Serial
Port 4 GND GND GND
5 RTS A TX-A
6 RDY RX-B
7 TX B TX-B
8 TERM
Second 9 RX RX-A
Serial
Port 10 GND GND GND
11 RTS A TX-A
12 RDY RX-B
Fig. 5. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232-C/RS-485 Module #68-6205-B

RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial Port Jumper Options

Serial Port I/O Software The RS-232-C/RS-485 serial port has been designed so that RS-232 or RS-485
Settings - Each serial port is communications standards can be selected by placement of 16-pin resistor
configurable via OmniCom
networks into the correct blocks. The following diagrams show the locations of
software or the Omni front
panel. Detailed information blocks JB1, JB2, JB3 for the first serial port (Model #68-6205-B only), and JB4,
on how to configure these JB5, JB6 for the second serial port (Models #68-6205-A and #68-6205-B) for
and other flow computer each format. Serial I/O Module #68-6205-A only has the RS-485 options
settings is available in available for the second serial port, and the first port is hard-wired to the RS-
Volume 3, Chapter 2 of the
User Manual and in 232-C position and cannot be changed by the user.
OmniCom Help.
RS-232
JB1 or JB4 JB2 or JB5 JB3 or JB6
RS-485 RS-485 2-WIRE
RS-485
TERMINATED

RS-232/485
NON-TERMINATED
RS-485
RS-232 RS-232/485 4-WIRE RS-232 RS-232/485 4-WIRE
TERMINATED
Terminated/Non-
terminated RS-485 - The
RS-485 devices located at
each extreme end of an RS-
485 run should be
terminated. Note that the RS-485 4-WIRE TERMINATED RS-485 4-WIRE NON-TERMINATED
device located at an extreme JB1 or JB4 JB2 or JB5 JB3 or JB6 JB1 or JB4 JB2 or JB5 JB3 or JB6
end may or may not be an
Omni Flow Computer. RS-232/485
RS-485 2-WIRE NON-TERMINATED RS-485 2-WIRE
RS-232 RS-485
RS-232 TERMINATED
Fig. 6. Layout of Jumper Blocks Showing RS-232/485 Formats

Multivariable Flow Transmitter Interfaces:

Connectivity and Data Transfer Issues
Contents
contained in the User Improving Accuracy and Performance.......................................................... 2
Manual, applicable to all
revision .72+. Multiple Sensors and Parameters..............................................................................2
Scan Interval.............................................................................................................2
Time Lag ..................................................................................................................2
Multivariable Flow
Transmitters - These are a Transferring Flow Rate and Totalizer Data ................................................... 3
special type of smart digital
instrumentation device that Serial Data Communications ......................................................................... 4
incorporates multiple The Flowmeter Device as a Communication Slave ....................................................4
sensors. The sensors are
The Flowmeter Device as a Communication Pseudo Master......................................4
controlled by
microprocessors. The Flowmeter Device as a Full Communication Master............................................4
Point-to-Point Configurations ....................................................................................5
Advantages and Disadvantages of a Serial Data Link ................................................6
Direct Pulse Train........................................................................................... 7
Scope
This technical bulletin applies to all firmware revisions versions .72+ of Omni
6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers.
Abstract
The term multivariable flow transmitter denominates a class of smart digital
instrumentation devices. This class of device incorporates multiple sensors
controlled by either one or more microprocessors. Coriolis and ultrasonic liquid
and gas flowmeters are examples of current multivariable transmitter
technology. These devices use some form of serial data communication link to
transfer data to and from the Omni flow computer, requiring an SV
multivariable communication combo module. In addition, the devices provide
an output pulse train which is proportional to the flow (either mass or volume).
TB-980504 w ALL.72+ 1
Improving Accuracy and Performance

Obtaining high accuracy is the primary goal of instrumentation designers. The
inclusion of one or more microprocessors gives the instrument designer the
ability to improve the performance of a device, by taking advantage of the fact
that the measurement sensor is far more repeatable than it is accurate. For
example, given the same set of operating conditions, the sensor is able to
reproduce its results in an extremely predictable manner within the range of its
sensors. At a different set of operating conditions, the sensor results may be
different but still extremely predictable.
Some considerations for improving measurement accuracy and instrument
performance are the use of multiple secondary sensors and parameters, and
the devices scan interval and the time lag it produces to calculate results from
a sensor measurement.
Multiple Sensors and Parameters

The microprocessor allows the manufacture to characterize and correct the
measurement sensor results by monitoring its electronic ambient conditions and
sensor operating conditions. This is done using secondary sensors or
calculating parameters such as temperature, pressure and density. The net
result is greatly improved accuracy of the measurement output, and the
availability of other measured or calculated parameters, which can be used by
tertiary devices such as flow computers. The flow computer uses these
parameters as values for input variables in equations of state and to diagnose
the condition of the transmitter.
Scan Interval
All microprocessor controlled multivariable flowmeter devices operate on some
scan interval; i.e., input parameters are measured on a scan interval (fixed or
variable). The measured parameters are then input into a calculation sequence
which produces a resultant flow rate, (either mass / unit time or volume / unit
time).
Time Lag
Note that sensor measurements must be taken before a result can be
calculated. The calculated flow rate represents that which existed for the
previous scan interval; i.e., there is a time lag from when the measurement is
taken to when the flow rate is calculated. Fast scan intervals are typically used
to minimize any uncertainty that may be introduced by this time lag.
2 TB-980504 w ALL.72+
TB-980504 MV Flow Transmitter Interfaces: Serial Connectivity vs. Direct Pulse Trains
Transferring Flow Rate and Totalizer Data

Multivariable flowmeters provide useful and important diagnostic data and
alarms which can be of great benefit to the user. This data could be processed
and used to warn the user of impending failures or operational problems before
they have had a major impact on the uncertainty of the measurement result.
There is no question that the integrity of the measurement is greatly enhanced
by providing this data to the flow computer and allowing the flow computer to
log and alarm any abnormalities detected.
Various multivariable flowmeter devices update their database with the most
recently calculated volume or mass flow rate. The Omni flow computer, which is
operating on a 500 msec calculation cycle, uses the last flow rate received from
the flowmeter to calculate the incremental flow quantity for the current
calculation cycle.
INFO - At the time that this Most flowmeter devices also provide internal totalizers. Using these totalizers
bulletin was being prepared, can be difficult unless they are provided in a numeric format which increments
certain manufacturers were
making firmware adjustments
and rolls over predictably. Floating point variables for example normally keep
to their products to provide increasing in value and do not roll over to zero at any point. This causes a
high resolution totalizers problem because as the totalizer increases in size, a point is reached when the
suitable for use by the Omni bit resolution of the mantissa portion of the number is exceeded, and the
flow computer. totalizer begins to increment using larger and larger steps. The flow computer
could compare the totalizer values received between successive serial
transmissions, but because of the totalizer roll over and resolution problems,
and the inability to synchronize the reading of successive totalizer readings with
the calculation cycle of the flow computer, it is better to use the instantaneous
flow rate value obtained via a direct connection to calculate and totalize the
flow in the flow computer. This has significance because it forms the basis for
the totalizer integration within the transmitter.
TB-980504 w ALL.72+ 3
Serial Data Communications

Each time the device performs its measurement scan and calculation process,
it typically updates the values of calculated variables, measured parameters
and alarm points in its database. Some flowmeter devices act as serial
communication slaves, allowing the database to be asynchronously read and,
in some cases, modified. Other devices act as serial communication pseudo
masters and simply transmit certain database points on a regular time interval,
while acting as a slave and accepting commands and configuration changes. At
least one device the Krohne Ultrasonic flowmeter can be both full
communication master and communication slave.
The Flowmeter Device as a Communication Slave

In this mode the flowmeter device transmits data as requested by the flow
computer communication master. When asked for data, the flowmeter will
transmit the most recently calculated data or block of data. In normal operation,
the flow computer requests flow and diagnostic data on a regular interval and
intersperses any other data transmissions (e.g., configuration data or
commands) between these regular flow update polls. Sometimes due to heavy
communications traffic, communication glitches or transmission retries, flow
update polls can be time-skewed or missed altogether.
The Flowmeter Device as a Communication Pseudo

Master
In this mode a fixed block of data is transmitted over and over on a regular
interval without requiring a response, (e.g., Instromet ultrasonic gas flowmeter
transmits a information data block every second). Any command or
configuration data that is needed to be sent to the flowmeter transmitter must
be interspersed between these regular data block transmissions. It is the job of
the flow computer acting as communication master to ensure that configuration
changes do not collide with information data block transmissions. Sometimes
due to flow computer task loading, communication glitches or transmission
retries, flow data blocks can be time-skewed.
The Flowmeter Device as a Full Communication Master

The Krohne ultrasonic flowmeter can be configured to act as a Modbus master.
In this mode the flowmeter can be configured to realize transactions of up to 20
predefined data blocks, which can be writes of data to a flow computer or reads
of data from a flow computer. Each transaction requires a response from the
slave flow computer. Update cycle time can be excessive if too many blocks
with too much data are transferred and, as with the other serial communication
methods, glitches and transmission retries can delay or time-skew the data
received.
4 TB-980504 w ALL.72+
Point-to-Point Configurations
Point-to-point configurations (Fig. 1), with both the flow computer and
transmitter terminated, is the only acceptable wiring configuration.. Each
flowmeter transmitter is connected to an independent SV port of the flow
computer. Because each SV port is connected to only one flowmeter
transmitter, each transmitter can now use a default communication address of
1, greatly simplifying flow transmitter replacement issues. Data transfers are
much faster then in a multi-drop mode and the likelihood of transmitter
interaction is greatly minimized.
All 4 MV Ports of Multivariable Multivariable Multivariable Multivariable

Flow Computer Device Device Device Device
must be Terminated ID #1 ID #2 ID #3 ID #1
Omni Flow
Computer
(Using
Independent
SV Ports)
Modbus IDs of Multivariable All Four Multivariable
Devices can be the same in this Devices must be
Point-to-Point Configuration Terminated
Fig. 1. Point-to-Point Wiring Configuration
TB-980504 w ALL.72+ 5
Advantages and Disadvantages of a Serial Data Link

The advantages of totalizing the flow in the flow computer using data obtained
via a serial data link are:
q Saving of two wires needed to transmit the pulse signal
q No need to setup the multivariable flowmeter to output a pulse signal
Disadvantages of totalizing the flow in the flow computer using data obtained
via a serial data link are:
q High level of instrumentation and technical expertise needed to maintain
and debug an installation; e.g., the average metering technician is
unlikely to be familiar with serial communication protocols, or able to
operate a serial data protocol analyzer needed to interpret the data
messages received from the flowmeter.
q A cyclic or rapid change in flow rate at the flowmeter may not be
captured correctly because of the relatively slow scan rate of the serial
transmission link.
q The flow rate update rate cannot be guaranteed to be regular in some
cases due to communication glitches requiring communication retries and
time-outs. Other factors which affect this are intermittent configuration
and calibration transactions which may occur on the serial link. (these
concerns are multiplied in a multi-dropped wiring system).
6 TB-980504 w ALL.72+
Direct Pulse Train

From the calculated flow rate obtained from each measurement scan, the
device calculates and outputs a pulse train of a certain frequency via a digital
output. Each pulse will represent an exact amount of incremental flow. In some
cases, a second digital output can be used to provide an exact copy of the
pulse train except that it will be out of phase with the original pulse. These two
pulse trains approximate the type of pulse output that is received from a dual
pickoff turbine meter and as such can satisfy many of the Pulse Fidelity
checking requirements expressed in API MPMS, Chapter 5.5. The flow
computer counts each and every pulse output by the flowmeter device and
applies a flowmeter K-Factor as it would for any other pulse producing
flowmeter. K-factors can be either in pulses per mass unit or pulses per volume
unit. Changes in flow rate are immediately reflected in the pulse output and
registered by the flow computer, within the cycle update limitations of both
devices.
The advantages of totalizing the flow in the flow computer via a direct pulse
train are:
q Flowmeter response time is as fast as the measurement and calculation
scan period; e.g., a sudden increase or loss of flow would be detected
within one calculation cycle.
q Individual device scan cycles have no impact on uncertainty. Signal
aliasing is not a problem.
q Easy to implement Dual Pulse Fidelity Checking using a second out of
phase pulse using existing flow computer technology.
q Low level of instrumentation and technical expertise needed to maintain
and debug an installation; e.g., a metering technician with simple digital
counter is all that is required to verify proper operation.
q Ability to prove the device using conventional pipe provers and compact
provers (applying double chronometry pulse interpolation methods).
Disadvantages of totalizing the flow in the flow computer via direct pulse train
are:
q Two extra wires are needed to transmit the pulse signal.
q Need to configure (scale) the digital I/O point pulse train frequency.
TB-980504 w ALL.72+ 7
Date: 07 22 98 Author(s): T.J. Tajani / Robert L. Stallard TB # 980701
Using the Totalizer Maintenance Mode
Contents
This technical bulletin is
applicable to Revisions Abstract........................................................................................................... 1
24.72+, 26.72+ and 27.72+ Procedure to Start and End Maintenance Mode........................................... 2
for metric units only.
Displaying the Maintenance Totals ............................................................... 3
Totalizer Maintenance
Totalizers ........................................................................................................ 3
Mode - This mode allows the Status.............................................................................................................. 3
operator to verify meter run
calculations by measuring Maintenance Mode Command ....................................................................... 4
meter run flow rate (gross,
net, mass, or energy) without Modbus Database Points Associated with the Totalizer Maintenance
impacting the custody Mode ............................................................................................................... 4
transfer totals.
Scope
The Maintenance Mode feature applies to the following application revisions:
q 24.72+ Turbine / Positive Displacement / Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering
Systems with K Factor Linearization (metric units only)
q 26.72+ Turbine / Positive Displacement Liquid Flow Metering Systems
with Meter Factor Linearization (metric units only)
q 27.72+ Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems (metric units only)
Abstract
The purpose of maintenance mode function is to allow operators to verify meter
run calculations. This function measures meter run flow rate (gross, net, mass,
and energy) without impacting the overall operation of the custody transfer
totals.
When in the maintenance mode, the flow measured by the target meter run will
not be accumulated in the meter run and/or station totalizers used for normal
operation. Furthermore, any D/A outputs configured to output flow rate will not
be impacted. While the specific meter is in the maintenance mode, the meter
will display zero flow in all the non-maintenance mode displays.
TB-980701 w 24/26/27.72+ 1
Procedure to Start and End Maintenance

Mode
The maintenance mode function requires a technician Level '1' password.
Following is the required procedure to Start and End the Maintenance Mode:
(1) Enter a positive value for low flow cutoff or active frequency (see
Meter Run Setup in Chapter 3 of the User Manual). A positive entry
must be made to ensure that the meter active flag operates correctly at
zero flow.
(2) Shutdown the meter (flow rate = Zero).
(3) In the display mode, press [Alpha Shift] [Prog] [Meter] [n] [Enter]. The
Omni LCD screen will display:
METER #1 MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Mode N
Reset Maint Totals
Toggle Maint Mode _
Maintenance Mode (4) Press [] (down arrow key) to place the cursor at Toggle Maint Mode
Active/Inactive - If there is a and press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter]. Depending on the maintenance
Y next to Maintenance
Mode in the display (see mode status, the Omni will toggle the mode. If the maintenance mode is
right), then the mode is active, then this step will end or turn off the mode; and vice versa.
active. The maintenance
mode is inactive when an N You will be prompted for the password. The LCD screen will display:
is displayed.
METER #1 MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Mode N
Reset Maint Totals
Password _
Configuration Settings - (5) Type the Level 1 password and press [Enter]. The Omni LCD screen
The maintenance mode uses will display a screen similar to the following:
current flow computer
configuration settings; i.e.,
additional configuration
entries are not required METER #1 MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Mode Y
Reset Maint Totals
INFO - When the Toggle Maint Mode _
maintenance mode starts
after selecting the type of
measurement (gross, net,
mass or energy), the flow (6) To end (deactivate) the totalizer maintenance mode, repeat steps (2)
rate and totalized flow are through (5).
zero.
2 TB-980701 w 24/26/27.72+
TB-980701 Using the Totalizer Maintenance Mode
Displaying the Maintenance Totals

INFO -Pressing [Gross] In the display mode, select the displays you want by entering the corresponding
[Enter] in the maintenance keypress sequence:
mode will display the station
and meter flow for this mode. q For Gross Flow Maintenance Totals, press [Meter] [n] [Gross].
q For Net Flow Maintenance Totals, press [Meter] [n] [Net].
q For Mass Flow Maintenance Totals, press [Meter] [n] [Mass].
q For Energy Flow Maintenance Totals (gas applications only Revision
27.72+), press [Meter] [n] [Energy].
The Omni LCD screen will display:
MaintenanceMode am3h
Current Flow Rate Meter Tag 0.000
MaintenanceMode am3
Totalized Value Meter Tag 0.000
Totalizers
Meter Run Database In the totalizer maintenance mode, the flow computer will realize all normal
Registers - The n in the calculations and accumulate resulting flow quantities into special maintenance
database point number
represents the meter run
totalizers. The special totalizer registers reset to zero upon entry to
number (n = 1, 2, 3 or 4). maintenance mode or can be manually reset while in the maintenance mode.
This reset will not affect the regular meter run totalizers. In this mode, the LCD
screen will display meter run current flow rate and accumulated flow rate for the
maintenance mode. Following are the Modbus database registers assigned as
special maintenance mode totalizers:
5n92 Gross Maintenance Total
5n93 Net Maintenance Total
5n94 Mass Maintenance Total
5n95 Energy (NSV) Maintenance Total
Status
The following status points are provided in the Omni flow computers Modbus
database to indicate when a meter run is in the totalizer maintenance mode:
1197 Meter Run #1 - Maintenance Mode Status
TB-980701 w 24/26/27.72+ 3
Maintenance Mode Command

The maintenance mode function can be activated/deactivated remotely,
providing that the flow rate is zero and the meter run is inactive (1n05 = 0). The
meter run totalizer maintenance mode is activated by setting one or all the
following Modbus database points to '1'; the mode will be ended by writing '0' to
these same database points.
2737 Meter Run #1 - Toggle Maintenance Mode Command
Modbus Database Points Associated with the

Totalizer Maintenance Mode
The following table comprises the database registers for the maintenance mode
function:
MODBUS DATABASE POINTS ASSOCIATED WITH THE MAINTENANCE MODE

Database Point Number
Database Point Description Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
Meter Run Maintenance Mode Status 1197 1297 1397 1497

Gross Maintenance Mode Totalizers 5192 5292 5392 5492
Net Maintenance Mode Totalizers 5193 5293 5393 5493
Mass Maintenance Mode Totalizers 5194 5294 5394 5494
Energy (NSV) Maintenance Mode Totalizers 5195 5295 5395 5495
Maintenance Mode Command 2737 2738 2739 2740
4 TB-980701 w 24/26/27.72+
Date: 08 17 98 Author(s): Robert L. Stallard TB # 980801
Unsolicited Transmissions of Custom

Modbus Data Packets
Contents
contained in the User Data Packets.................................................................... 2
Custom Modbus
Manual, specifically Volume
3, Chapter 4 Modbus Prerequisites for Using Unsolicited Transmissions of Custom Data
Protocol Implementation, Packets ........................................................................................................... 2
revisions .71+. User-customized Modbus Driver................................................................................2
Compatible Serial Communications ..........................................................................3
Unsolicited Transmissions
Modbus Protocol Implementation of Omni Proprietary Function
- These type of Code 67: Transmit Read Unsolicited Custom Data Packet.......................... 3
transmissions are used for
Omni flow computers to
Configuring Your Flow Computer for Unsolicited Transmissions of
transmit custom data packets Custom Data Packets ..................................................................................... 4
via an RS-232-C serial port Example ...................................................................................................................4
without a poll. This feature is
especially useful when
communicating via VSAT
satellite systems. Modbus
protocol Function Code 67
has been assigned to this Scope
function exclusively for Omni
flow computers. This technical bulletin applies to all firmware revisions versions .71+ of Omni
6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers.
TB-980801 w ALL.71+ 1
Abstract
Unsolicited transmissions are used to transmit a Custom Modbus Data Packet
from a selected flow computer RS-232-C serial port without it being polled for
data by the receiving device. Modbus protocol Function Code 67 was assigned
for this feature, which allows the receiving device to discriminate between a
transmission without a poll (unsolicited) and a normal Modbus read.
This function, among other uses, was designed for communicating via VSAT
satellite systems where operating cost is directly proportional to RF bandwidth
used. In communications via satellite, polled transmissions are much more
costly than unsolicited transmissions. Typically, the device requesting data
(master) would poll the flow computer to transmit the data to it through a
satellite link. This would require a signal from the master device to the flow
computer and yet another from the flow computer back to the requesting
device. Whereas with unsolicited transmissions, the flow computer can be
configured to transmit Modbus custom data packets at specified time intervals,
when a certain event occurs, or by some other transmission triggering cause,
without the master device having to poll the flow computer for such data. In this
manner, only one signal is transmitted via satellite; i.e., from the flow computer
to the master device.
Data Packets
Custom Modbus
Custom Modbus Data Custom Modbus Data Packets are provided to reduce the number of polls
Packets - Many point needed to read multiple variables which may be in different areas of the
numbers were left unused
database. Groups of consecutive database points of any type of data can be
when numbering the
variables within the database. joined together into one packet by entering each data groups starting database
This allows for future growth index number. The number of data bytes in a custom packet which will be used
and different application data. for unsolicited transmissions cannot exceed 248 in RTU mode or 496 in ASCII
Without custom data mode.
packets many polls would be
required to retrieve data
distributed throughout the
database. The custom data
packets allows you to
Prerequisites for Using Unsolicited
concatenate or join different
groups or sets of data in any
Transmissions of Custom Data Packets
order and of any data type
into 1 message response. Before you can configure your flow computer to realize unsolicited
These custom packets are transmissions of custom Modbus data packets, you must have the following:
located at points 0001, 0201
and 0401 in the database. q User-customized Modbus driver for receiving device
For more information refer to q Compatible serial communications capability
2.5.18 and 4.6 in Volume 3,
and 1.1, 1.3.14 and 2.1 in
Volume 4 of the User
Manual. User-customized Modbus Driver
Various communication master devices can be connected to the Omni flow
computer via Modbus serial link including, but not limited to, front-end
supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) system devices. In order for
these devices to be able to identify and read unsolicited transmissions of Omni
flow computer custom data packets, the user must develop a custom driver
capable of identifying the Modbus protocol Function Code 67; which is an Omni
proprietary function. The custom driver must then be installed in the SCADA or
other receiving device and verified for adequate performance.
2 TB-980801 w ALL.71+
TB-980801 Data Packets
Unsolicited Transmissions of Custom Modbus
Compatible Serial Communications

Both the Omni flow computer and the receiving device must be equipped with
appropriate RS-232 compatible or RS-485 serial ports configured for Modbus
protocol implementation. The Omni flow computer has several hardware and
software options for RS-232 or RS-485 compatible serial data links (refer to the
User Manual for details).
Modbus Protocol Implementation of Omni

Proprietary Function Code 67: Transmit
Unsolicited Custom Data Packet
A typical unsolicited transmission Modbus protocol message format using
Function Code 67 is as follows:
Modbus Protocol Message Format using Function Code 67

CUSTOM
DEVICE FUNCTION BYTE CRC ERROR
PACKET DATA
ADDRESS CODE 67 COUNT CHECK BYTES
ADDRESS
XX 43HEX XX XXXXHEX DD DD ... DD DD CRC CRC
Device Address : The address that identifies the Omni flow

computer that is transmitting unsolicited
data.
Function Code 67 : Represented in hexadecimal value as 43.
Byte Count : The number of bytes of the data field
(maximum of 248 bytes in RTU mode or
496 bytes in ASCII mode).
Custom Packet Address : The flow computer database address of the
custom Modbus data packet, represented in
hexadecimal value:
Custom Modbus Data Packet Addresses
Hexadecimal Equivalents
PACKET PACKET HEXADECIMAL
NUMBER ADDRESS EQUIVALENT
#1 0001 0001
#2 0201 00C9
#3 0401 0191
Data : The actual flow computer data transmitted

without a poll to the receiving device.
CRC Error Check Bytes : Used to check the message for errors.
For more information on Modbus protocol implementation, see Chapter 4 in

Volume 3 of the User Manual.
TB-980801 w ALL.71+ 3
Configuring Your Flow Computer for

Unsolicited Transmissions of Custom Data
Packets
User-programmable To activate unsolicited transmissions you must enable any of the following
Boolean Statements and edge triggered command points below which causes the appropriate custom
Variables - For more
information, see Volume 4
Modbus data packet to be transmitted out of the selected serial port without the
for addresses of Boolean serial port being polled for data:
statements and user-
programmable variables, and
Chapter 2 in Volume 3 on Flow Computer Modbus Database Points for
configuring Boolean Unsolicited Transmissions
statements and user-
programmable variables. ADDRESS UNSOLICITED TRANSMISSION TYPE
2701 Custom Data Packet #1 via Serial Port #1
Example
The following user-programmable variables are an example of programming a
timer for every 15 seconds which triggers the unsolicited transmission of a
custom Modbus data packet.
7025: 7026 ) 7026 = # -15

7026: 7026 + # 0.5
The following Boolean statement is an example of an unsolicited transmission

where every 15 seconds the data contained in Custom Modbus Data Packet #3
will be transmitted without a poll via the flow computers Serial Port #2 to the
receiving device:
1025: 2706 = 7026
4 TB-980801 w ALL.71+
Digital I/O Modules: Installation Options
Contents
complements the information Abstract ........................................................................................................... 1
contained i nVolume 1 , and Installation Options and Jumper Settings .................................................... 2
is applicable to all firmware
revisions. Digital I/O Module Model # 68-601 1..........................................................................2
Digital I/O Module Model # 68-621 1..........................................................................3
Scope
All Omni 6000/3000 Flow Computers have digital I/O capabilities via proprietary
digital I/O modules.
Abstract
Omni flow computers have digital I/O module options with user-selectable
jumpers for module address, sequence and interrupt request (IRQ). Omni
manufactures two models of digital modules:
q Digital I/O Module Model #68-6011

q Digital I/O Module Model #68-6211
Each digital module has 12 digital points. Each digital point can be individually
configured as either an input or an output, via the front panel keypad or a serial
port using OmniCom configuration PC software.
TB-980802 w ALL.71+ 1
Installation Options and Jumper Settings

Only 1 digital I/O module can be installed in the Omni 3000 and a maximum of
2 installed in the Omni 6000. This provides a total of 12 digital I/O points for the
Omni 3000 and a total of 24 digital I/O for the Omni 6000.
Digital I/O Module Model # 68-6011

I/O Point LEDs - Each digital Inputs and outputs are provided for control of prover functions, remote
I/O point has 2 LEDs (green totalizing, sampler operation, tube control, injection pump control, and other
and dual red/green) which
indicate its status. When the
miscellaneous functions. Each digital I/O module provides a total of 12 digital
single green LED is glowing, I/O points. Each point can be configured independently as an input or output.
the digital I/O point is active. Points are individually fused and include LEDs indicating that the point is active
The dual red/green LED and if the fuse is blown. The digital I/O module normally occupies I/O Slots 1
indicates a blown fuse, red and 2 on the Omni 6000 backplane, and I/O Slot 1 on Omni 3000. User-
indicating a source current
and green a sinking current. selectable jumper settings are shown in Figure 1 (below):
JP1 In = Dig. 1 Rising Edge Trigger

Interrupt Request (IRQ) JP2 In = Dig. 1 Falling Edge Trigger
Select Jumpers for JP3 In = Dig. 2 Rising Edge Trigger
Pipe Prover Detector JP4 In = Dig. 2 Falling Edge Trigger
NOTE: If D2 remove all jumpers
Module Address
Jumper
Select D1 Select D2
Green LED On
Point Active
I/O Point
#01
F3 F2 F1
Dual (Red/Green)
Fuse Blown LED
F6 F5 F4
F9 F8 F7 Red On = Sourcing
Current
Green On = Sinking
Current
Individual Fuses F12 F11 F10
for Each I/O Point
#12
Digital I/O Point

LED Indicators
Figure 1. Digital I/O Module Model # 68-6011 - Jumper Settings
2 TB-980802 w ALL.71+
TB-980802 Digital I/O Modules: Installation Options
Digital I/O Module Model # 68-6211

Digital Module # 68-6211 has the same features as the Model # 68-6011, plus
the following:
Surface-mounted circuitry
Individual resetable fuses for each digital I/O point
Redesigned user-selectable jumpers for IRQ polarity, channel assign, and
module address selection using 1 or 2 digital I/ O modules.
User-selectable jumper settings are shown in Figure 2 (below). When using a
second digital I/O (D2) module, no jumper is required on JP1 and JP2.
Interrupt Request (IRQ) Neither Jumper is Required for D2 Module

Select Jumpers for
Pipe Prover Detector Assign IRQ to Assign IRQ to
(Non-Double Chronometry) I/O Point #1 I/O Point #2
JP2 JP2
JP1 In = Rising Edge Trigger
JP1 Out = Falling Edge Trigger
JP1 JP2
JP4
JP5
Green LED On
Point Active
Module Address
Jumper I/O Point
I/O Point
#01 #01
F3 F2 F1
Dual (Red/Green)
ADDRESS JP4 JP5 Fuse Blown LED
D1 Out Out F6 F5 F4
D2 In Out
Red On = Sourcing
F9 F8 F7 Current
Green On = Sinking
Current
Individual Resetable F12 F11 F10
Fuses for Each I/O Point
#12
#12
Digital I/O Point

LED Indicators
Figure 2. Digital I/O Module Model # 68-6211 - Jumper Settings
TB-980802 ! All.71+ 3
Date: 08 27 98 Author(s): Richard Dojs / Isaac Perez / Robert L. Stallard TB # 980803
Upgrading Flow Computer Firmware
Contents
contained in Volume 1, Safety Considerations.................................................................................... 2
applicable to all firmware
revisions. This technical Instructions .................................................................................................... 3
bulletin replaces and
invalidates TB-980301 Installing New OmniCom PC Configuration Software..............................................3
Upgrading EPROM Replacing the Central Processor Module (CPU) and EPROM Chips ..........................4
Chips.
Resetting RAM..........................................................................................................5
Verifying and Updating Information of Installed Modules (Check I/O Modules) ...........6
IMPORTANT! Setting the Number of Digits and Decimal Places for Totalizers .................................7
Special Instructions If Upgrading from Revision 20.56 Firmware .................................................... 8
After Replacing CPU
Module or EPROMs and Downloading the Configuration File from OmniCom to the Flow Computer .............9
Before Downloading Returning the Old EPROMs ....................................................................................10
Configuration File - You
must perform the Check I/O Troubleshooting Tips .................................................................................. 10
Modules procedure (see Omni Display Does Not Come On After Resetting All RAM......................................10
page 6 in this bulletin) and
calibrate your analog I/Os
Omni Front Panel Display is Blinking and/or the Keypad is Locked..........................11
before downloading the Cannot Open File Message is Displayed when Trying to Transmit the Saved Report
configuration file to the Templates to the Omni............................................................................................11
upgraded flow computer. Incorrect Data in Printed Customized Reports .........................................................11
Also, you must reset RAM as
expressed in this technical Unable to Complete a Prove Sequence ...................................................................11
bulletin before downloading OmniCom Unable to Communicate to the Flow Computer.......................................12
the configuration file. These
procedures must be
performed whether or not a
corresponding message is
displayed on the front panel
LCD screen of the flow
Scope
computer. Failure to do so This technical bulletin is applicable to all firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni
may void the warranty and
cause future problems and
3000 Flow Computers. The information contained in this technical bulletin is
unpredictable results with targeted to qualified professionals only.
your flow computer.
TB-980803 w All Revs 1

Abstract
DANGER! Upgrading Omni flow computer firmware allows users to incorporate new
features and increase the capabilities of their flow metering system application.
An upgrade may also be necessary for system conformance to API standards
and Year 2000 (Y2K) requirements.
To upgrade your flow computer firmware you will need to perform certain critical
steps, such as:
Electrical Shock Hazard!
q Install new version of OmniCom Configuration PC Software.
Dangerous AC voltages are
present on the power supply q Save flow computer configuration file and report templates.
module and ribbon cable
when the unit is AC powered. q Replace Central Processor Module or EPROM chips.
To avoid electrical shock
which could be fatal, It is q Reset RAM.
imperative that you remove all
power before opening and q Set the number of digits and decimal places for totalizers and factors.
disassembling the flow
computer and take any other q Download and adjust flow computer configuration file and report
necessary precautions. templates.
Only qualified technicians
should work on any internal
circuitry. Omni Flow
Computers, Inc. is not Safety Considerations
responsible for personal
injuries or accidents that may Before removing any circuit boards from the flow computer, the following must
occur when working on flow be observed:
computer circuitry.
q Personal Safety : Although most of the internal circuits are powered

CAUTION! by relatively low voltages, dangerous AC voltages
Static electricity can damage are present on the power supply module and ribbon
flow computer circuitry. Take cable when the unit is AC powered. For this reason
approved static device it is important to remove all power before
handling precautions when disassembling the computer.
working on the flow
computer.
q Static Electricity : Static electricity can be generated simply by moving
around on certain surfaces or wearing certain types
of clothing. The flow computers printed circuits can
be damaged by this static electricity. Take approved
static device handling precautions when working on
the flow computer.
2 TB-980803 w All Revs

TB-980803 Upgrading Flow Computer Firmware
Instructions
Before removing the Central Processor Module (CPU) or old EPROMs, you
must install the new version of OmniCom Configuration PC Software supplied
with your new CPU or EPROMs and use this new version to retrieve the
configuration file from the flow computer.
Installing New OmniCom PC Configuration Software

Using OmniCom Help -
Context sensitive help is (1) With the old EPROMs still in the flow computer, install the new
available by pressing the [F1] OmniCom to your PC from the diskette shipped with the CPU or
key on your PC keyboard EPROMs. The diskette label provides installation instructions.
when running OmniCom.
(2) Create a new file from within the newly installed version of OmniCom
by opening File/New and entering the file name.
(3) When prompted for the EPROM version number of the file to create,
select the version number that corresponds to the NEW EPROMs you
will be installing.
(4) Upload the configuration file from the OLD set of EPROMs installed in
the flow computer by opening Online/Start Comm and selecting
Receive Omni Configuration Data.
(5) Subsequently, receive ALL the report templates by selecting Receive

Report Templates within the Online/Start Comm menu. As a
precautionary measure, this should be done regardless of whether or
not default report templates are being used.
(6) Print the configuration file from OmniCom by opening File/Print and
selecting your print option (Yes or No).
(7) Verify all settings indicated in the configuration file printout and make
any necessary adjustments to these settings that are appropriate for
your particular application.
(8) Close OmniCom by selecting Exit from the Print menu. You will be
prompted on whether to save the configuration file and each of the
report templates. Answer Yes to all.

Replacing the Central Processor Module (CPU) and

EPROM Chips
CAUTION! (9) If you are replacing ONLY the EPROM chips and NOT the CPU
When removing the CPU module, reset all RAM in the Omni via the front panel keypad. If you
Module, take extreme care will be replacing the entire CPU module, DO NOT reset the RAM.
not to bend or fold the
membrane keypad ribbon To reset RAM from the front panel keypad, press [Prog] [Setup]
cable too sharply, or the
metallic traces could be
[Enter] [Enter] [Enter], then type in your privileged password as
damaged. prompted. Scroll down by pressing the [ ] key to the Reset All Ram?
prompt and answer [Y] to answer yes. Answer Yes or OK to any
Location of EPROM Chips- warnings. (Go to Step 14 for detailed instruction on resetting Ram.)
The location of the EPROM
chips on the CPU Module is
shown in Fig. 1. The (10) Remove power from the Omni flow computer and remove the CPU
EPROMs are the two large module.
32-pin Integrated Circuits
(ICs or chips) with labels
marked U3 and U4. Note the (11) Make note of the new EPROM version and checksum indicated in the
position of the orientation label placed on the EPROM chips. You will need this information later.
notches at one end of each
EPROM.
(12) Either replace the old CPU module with a new CPU that has the new
IMPORTANT! set of EPROMs, or simply replace the old set of EPROMs with the new
set.
Replacing EPROM Chips -
Ensure that all pins plug into
there respective holes and (13) After replacing or reinstalling the CPU module, apply power to the Omni
that none are bent. flow computer. Make a note of what your LCD screen displays when
powering up. If you receive a display indicating loss of calibration data,
IMPORTANT! you will need to calibrate your analog I/Os after completing the EPROM
After Replacing CPU
upgrade. (Refer to Volume 1 System Architecture and Installation
Module or EPROMs and of the User Manual for more information.)
Before Downloading
must perform the Check I/O
Modules procedure (see
page 6 in this bulletin) and Math
Central Program Program Archive
calibrate your analog I/Os Processor
Processor EPROM RAM RAM
before downloading the
configuration file to the
upgraded flow computer.
Also, you must reset RAM as
expressed in this technical
bulletin before downloading
procedures must be
Backup
performed whether or not a Batttery
displayed on the front panel
LCD screen of the flow
computer. Failure to do so
may void the warranty and EPROM Size
cause future problems and 1 OR 4 Meg Bit System Watchdog
unpredictable results with Select 4 Meg J3 In = Enabled
your flow computer. As Shown J3 Out = Disabled
J1 J2 (Always Enabled)
J3
Figure 1. Layout of Central Processor Module Showing Location of

EPROM ICs and Jumpers J1, J2 and J3.

Resetting RAM
IMPORTANT! (14) You will need to reset RAM before and after replacing EPROM chips. If
After Replacing CPU you will be replacing the entire CPU module, reset RAM only AFTER
Module or EPROMs and replacing the CPU. DO NOT reset the RAM before replacing. When
Before Downloading
power is applied to the flow computer after replacing EPROM chips, the
must perform the Check I/O following screen is displayed:
Modules procedure (see
page 6 in this bulletin) and
calibrate your analog I/Os RAM Data Invalid
before downloading the Reconfigure System
configuration file to the Using OMNI as
upgraded flow computer.
Also, you must reset RAM as Initial Password
Enter the key press sequence [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] [Enter]
procedures must be and the following screen is displayed:
displayed on the front panel PASSWORD MAINTENANCE
LCD screen of the flow Privileged _
computer. Failure to do so Level 1
cause future problems and Level 1A
unpredictable results with
your flow computer.
Different screens will be displayed each time you press enter before
you reach the above screen.
Program Mode - Pressing
the [Prog] key will activate
the Program Mode. While in (15) At the Privileged prompt, enter the following key press sequence to
this mode, the Program LED use OMNI as the privileged password: [Alpha Shift] [Alpha Shift] [O]
above the keypad is lit red. [M] [N] [I] [Enter]. The cursor will move down to the next entry.
To exit the Program Mode,
press the [Prog] key
repeatedly until the Program PASSWORD MAINTENANCE
LED goes off. Privileged OMNI
Level 1 _
Level 1A
(16) Scroll down by pressing repeatedly the [ ] key to Reset All Ram?
and press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter] for Yes.
Archive Run?(Y/N)
Reset All Totals
Reset All Ram ? Y
The display will briefly go blank, the backlight will go off and come back
on. The following screen may then reappear:
RAM Data Invalid

Reconfigure System
Using OMNI as
Initial Password

(17) Press [Status] and a screen similar to the following will be displayed:
Module S-Ware H-Ware

B-1 Y Y
E-1 Y Y
D-1 Y Y
] key to the end to display the

(18) Scroll down by pressing repeatedly the [
Revision Number and EPROM Checksum.

S-1 Y Y
Revision No. 021.72
EPROM Checksum 2408
Verify that these match with what you previously noted in Step 11. If
they do not match and there is an EPROM Checksum alarm, stop at
this point and contact Omni technical support.
IMPORTANT!
After Replacing CPU
Verifying and Updating Information of Installed Modules
Module or EPROMs and (Check I/O Modules)
Before Downloading
must perform the Check I/O (19) If the EPROM Revision number and Checksum are correct, verify if
Modules procedure and both the S-Ware (Software) and H-Ware (Hardware) columns read Y
calibrate your analog I/Os (Yes) for all the installed modules before proceeding any further. Scroll
before downloading the
configuration file to the
up and down the screen in the previous step by using the [ ] / [
]
upgraded flow computer. arrow keys to view installed modules. If both columns read Y, go to
Also, you must reset RAM as Step 25. If not, proceed to the following step (20).
the configuration file. These Module S-Ware H-Ware
procedures must be B-1 Y Y
E-1 Y Y
displayed on the front panel D-1 Y N
LCD screen of the flow S-1 N Y
computer. Failure to do so Revision No. 021.72
cause future problems and EPROM Checksum 2408
unpredictable results with
your flow computer.

(20) If one or more of the installed modules reads N (No) under the S-
the [Prog] key will activate Ware (Software) and/or H-Ware (Hardware) columns, press [Prog]
the Program Mode. While in [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] and the following is displayed:
this mode, the Program LED
above the keypad is lit red.
To exit the Program Mode, *** MISC. SETUP ***
press the [Prog] key Password Maint?(Y) _
repeatedly until the Program
LED goes off. Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station?(Y)

] key to Check Modules?.

(21) Move the cursor down by pressing the [
*** MISC. SETUP ***

Password Maint?(Y)
Check Modules ?(Y) _
Config Station?(Y)
(22) Press [Enter] and a screen similar to the following is displayed:

B-1 Y Y
E-1 Y Y
D-1 Y N
(23) Scroll down by pressing repeatedly the [ ] key to Update S-Ware?

and press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter] to enter Y for Yes.

D-1 Y N
S-1 N Y
Update S_Ware ? Y
You will be prompted to enter your password. Also enter Y to answer

OK if cautioned that updating the software will cause the I/O
configurations to be cleared.
(24) Exit the Program Mode when you are done by pressing the [Prog] key
repeatedly until the Program LED above the keypad goes out. This
returns you to the Display Mode.
Setting the Number of Digits and Decimal Places for

Totalizers
(25) In newer versions of EPROMs, you are given an option to set the
number of digits for cumulative totalizer rollover (8 or 9 digits) and the
number of decimal places for volume and mass totalizers. Set these
options via keypad ONLY by pressing [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter]
[Enter]. The following screen is displayed:
Privileged _
Level 1
Level 1A

(26) At the Privileged prompt, enter the following key press sequence to
use OMNI as the privileged password: [Alpha Shift] [Alpha Shift] [O]
[M] [N] [I] [Enter]. The cursor will move down to the next entry.
Setting the Number of
Digits for Totalizers - PASSWORD MAINTENANCE
Totalizers within the flow Privileged OMNI
computer can be rolled at 8
or 9 significant digits. To set Level 1 _
totalizer rollover to 9 digits, Level 1A
press [0] [Enter]. To set
totalizer rollover to 8 digits,
press [1] [Enter].
] key to Reset All Totals?.
Setting Volume and Mass
Totalizer Resolution - PASSWORD MAINTENANCE
Gross and net volume and Reconfig Archive ? Y
mass totalizer values can be Archive Run?(Y/N) N
expressed with up to 3
decimal places. To set the Reset All Totals ? _
number of decimal places for
totalizer resolution, press the
corresponding number key
([0], [1], [2] or [3] decimal (28) Press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter] for Yes and a screen similar to the
places, where 0=Klbs, following is displayed:
1=100lbs, 2=10lbs, 3=lbs).
Then press the [Enter] key.
All firmware revisions, except All Totals Now Reset
for Version 20.56, provide Totalizer Resolution
Mass in pounds. # Digits, 0=9, 1=8 0
DecPlacesGross&Net 0
Help for Number of Digits DecimalPlaces Mass 3
and Decimal Place
Settings - You can view the
Help in OmniCom under Enter the respective values you want for each and every totalizer
Factor Setup & Sys resolution setting and press the [Enter] key after each entry (see
Constants by highlighting
sidebar).
each of the fields. Then use
F1 for a detailed explanation It is strongly recommended that you set these resolutions NOW
of each of your choices.
However, DO NOT set these because you will not be able to change these settings after configuring
options via OmniCom. your flow computer or during flow operations without resetting to zero
Context-sensitive help is also all your totalizers.
available via the Omni front
panel keypad by pressing the
[Help] key (same as the Special Instructions If Upgrading from Revision 20.56
[Enter] key) rapidly twice Firmware
while the cursor is at the
entry you want to set. Version 20.56 EPROMs provide Mass in hundreds of pounds. If you
want to continue receiving your Mass in hundreds of pounds, press [1]
[Enter] at the DecimalPlaces Mass entry.
(29) Exit the Program Mode when you are done by pressing the [Prog] key
repeatedly until the Program LED above the keypad goes out. This
returns you to the Display Mode.

Downloading the Configuration File from OmniCom to

the Flow Computer
the [Prog] key will activate (30) In the Display Mode, press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] to display
the Program Mode. While in the Misc. Setup menu.
this mode, the Program LED
above the keypad is lit red.
To exit the Program Mode, *** MISC. SETUP ***
press the [Prog] key
repeatedly until the Program
Password Maint?(Y) _
LED goes off. Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station?(Y)
] key to Serial I/O n.

*** MISC. SETUP ***

User Display ? n
Config Digitaln
Serial I/O n _
Enter the number of the flow computer serial port to which your
OmniCom PC is connected and press [Enter]. A screen similar to the
following will display:
SERIAL PORT #2
Baud Rate 38400
Number of Data Bit 8
Number of Stop Bit 1
IMPORTANT! (32) Scroll down to Modbus ID and then to Modbus Type and enter the
It is recommended that you corresponding settings indicated in the OmniCom configuration file you
select Modbus RTU printed earlier. Remember to press [Enter] after typing each setting.
(modem) protocol for the
Modbus Type in Step 32 if
it is available in your new SERIAL PORT #2
EPROM version. If you
decide to use this protocol,
TX Key Delay 1
ensure that you make this Modbus ID 1
same change in your Modbus Type 2
OmniCom configuration file
under Config Serial I/O
before proceeding to
download the configuration (33) Run OmniCom and open the configuration file you saved earlier which
file to the Omni pertains to this flow computer. Open the File Menu and select Print.
Print the file to a printer on your PC to have an updated printout of the
flow computer configuration.
(34) Open Offline/Omni Configuration/Config Serial I/O and ensure that

the Modbus Type is set correctly to match what you selected in Step
32.

(35) Open Online/Start Comm. Check the Modbus ID, Comm Port, Baud
Rate, and Comm Media settings to ensure that these are correct. If you
set the port in Step 32 to Modbus RTU (modem) protocol, ensure that
Comm Media is set to Modem.
(35) Transmit Omni Configuration Data.
(36) Transmit Omni Report Templates.
(37) Calibrate your analog I/Os if you are required to do so. For more
information on calibrating analog I/O, see Volume 1, Chapter 8 of the
User Manual.
Returning the Old EPROMs

You are now done. Remember to use the Business Reply Label supplied with
your new EPROMs. If you have not yet completed your EPROM Upgrade Form,
please do so now and return along with the old EPROMs to Omni Flow
Computers, Inc.
Troubleshooting Tips
Omni Display Does Not Come On After Resetting All RAM

Tech Support - If you If the Omni Display does not come on after resetting all RAM, proceed as
encounter any other follows:
difficulties, please contact
our technical staff.
(1) Disconnect all power to the Omni.
Phone: (281) 240-6161
Fax: (281) 240-6162 (2) Remove CPU Module and also remove the System Watchdog Jumper
E-mail: J3 (See Figure 1) on the CPU.
techsupport@omniflow.com
(3) Reinstall CPU Module with Jumper J3 removed.
(4) Power up the Omni and reset all RAM again. Display should be on.
IMPORTANT!
(5) Power down again the flow computer and remove CPU Board.
Replacing RAM and
EPROM Chips - Ensure that (6) Replace Jumper J3 and then reinstall the CPU Module.
all pins plug into there
respective holes and that (7) Once again, apply power to the flow computer.
none are bent.
The Omni display should now be normal. However, if problem persists, try
unplugging and reconnecting the RAM chips into the CPU board as follows:
(2) Remove CPU Module.
(3) Unplug and reconnect RAM chips to the CPU board
(4) Reinstall the CPU Module.
(5) Power up the Omni and reset all RAM again. Display should be normal.

Omni Front Panel Display is Blinking and/or the Keypad

is Locked
This problem may be solved by unplugging and reconnecting the RAM chips
into the CPU board as follows:
(2) Remove CPU Module.
(3) Unplug and reconnect RAM chips to the CPU board
(4) Reinstall the CPU Module.
(5) Power up the Omni and reset all RAM again. Display should be normal.
Cannot Open File Message is Displayed when Trying to

Transmit the Saved Report Templates to the Omni
Sometimes, when trying to transmit the saved report templates to the flow
computer, OmniCom will display a message indicating that it cannot open the
file. Simply go to the OmniCom pull-down Report menu and open each of the
reports individually, make the necessary changes and resave the reports. The
change can simply represent change to the same thing it was before.
Subsequently, save the template (usually ALT-S). Exit OmniCom and then
restart OmniCom. Open the file and try transmitting the templates to the Omni
again.
Incorrect Data in Printed Customized Reports

When upgrading EPROMs and using customized reports, the data in the printed
report may not be correct because some of the database registers may have
changed, moved or redefined in the new version with respect to the old version.
If you see that the printed data is not what you expected, then you should open
the report template files to check if you are retrieving the data from the correct
registers for the new EPROM version. Also verify with OmniCom that Use
Default Report Template under Printer Setup is set to No.
Unable to Complete a Prove Sequence

Sometimes you are unable to get through a prove sequence after an EPROM
upgrade. Open up the deviation percentages in the Prover Setup to establish
an initial prove sequence. Once a prove sequence has been established, you
can tighten up the deviation percentages to what you had set before the
EPROM upgrade.

OmniCom Unable to Communicate to the Flow Computer

Sometimes you are unable to communicate to an Omni after replacing the
EPROMs. This may be caused by the following:
q The OmniCom Start Comm/Comm Media setting differs from the Omni
flow computer Modbus Type setting in the serial port setup. In the newest
versions of EPROMs when the flow computer is powered-up, the
EPROMs default to Modbus RTU (modem) for Serial Port # 2. The
Modbus RTU (modem) protocol is the preferred protocol; therefore, make
this change in your OmniCom configuration file AND also set the Comm
Media to Modem in the Online/Start Comm menu.
q The new EPROMs default to Modbus ID 1 on power-up. Ensure that your
Modbus ID matches in both the Online/Start Comm menu and in the
serial port setup in the Omni. Also ensure the OmniCom configuration
file, Omni serial port, and OmniCom Start Comm screen are all set to
the same Modbus ID.

Using the Audit Trail (Event Logger) Feature

and Sealing of the Flow Computer
Contents
contained in Volumes 2 & 3 Activating the Audit Trail Feature ................................................................. 2
of the User Manual,
applicable to all firmware Password Protecting Serial Port Access ....................................................................3
revisions. Enabling Rigorous Auditing of Serial Ports ................................................................4
Printing and Viewing the Audit Trail Report................................................. 5
Audit Trail Feature - This Printing the Audit Trail Report via Front Panel Keypad ..............................................5
feature is an event logger that Viewing and Printing the Audit Trail Report via OmniCom .........................................5
records the last 150 changes
made to the flow computer Sealing the Flow Computer ........................................................................... 6
database. A fixed format Download Disabling (OmniCom Lockout) ..................................................................6
report provides an audit trail
of these changes. This report Serial Port Lockout Switch Enable Option .................................................................7
comprises time and date Program Inhibit (Keypad Lockout) Switch ..................................................................7
stamped changes made to Housing Sealing........................................................................................................8
the flow computer database,
either via the local keypad or
via password protected serial
port access.
Scope
All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 flow computers have the Audit
Trail feature. The information contained in this technical bulletin is for
intermediate users.

Abstract
All Omni flow computer firmware revisions include the Audit Trail feature. In
current revisions, this security feature consists of an archive file that stores 150
records of the most recent changes made to the flow computer database. The
flow computer always logs changes made to the database via the Omni front
panel keypad. It can also log changes made remotely via a Modbus port, using
OmniCom PC Configuration Software for instance, if passwords have been
activated on the serial port.
Each record consists of a unique event number, time and date tag, the
database index number of the affected variable, and the new and old value of
that variable. The value of gross and net totals at the moment of the event are
also stored in the record. Furthermore, the firmware can log events that involve
a group of consecutive database addresses. In this case, only the starting index
number and the number of consecutive index points appear in the audit trail.
The records comprise the Audit Trail Report which, when printed, lists the latest
150 records in time sequence starting with the most recent. You can view this
report in OmniCom and print it either with OmniCom or the front panel keypad.
The Audit Trail Report has a fixed format and is not customizable by the user.
Activating the Audit Trail Feature

The Omni flow computer will automatically log all changes made to the
configuration settings via the front panel keypad. However, to avoid flushing the
audit trail, the firmware does not log configuration changes made via serial
ports other then complete download events, unless rigorous auditing is enabled.
In order for the flow computer to log configuration changes made through a
serial port, whether remotely (via modem) or via direct connection, the
corresponding serial port must be password protected or enabled for rigorous
auditing.
With passwords activated, the firmware will fully log the target database
address old and new value only when single point writes occur. When blocks of
data are written, only the starting database index and total number of
consecutive points written to will be recorded in the audit trail log.
Enabling rigorous auditing does not require serial port passwords to be used.
The flow computer will archive all serial port transactions that represent
configuration changes.

TB-981101 Using the Audit Trail Feature (Event Logger) and Sealing the Flow Computer
Password Protecting Serial Port Access

Entering a Serial Port The flow computer will automatically log any single point writes to a specific
Password -
database address made via a password protected serial port. Assigning serial
Initially, you can only assign
serial port passwords via the port passwords for the first time can only be done via the front panel keypad of
Omni front panel keypad. the flow computer.
Choose up to 8
alphanumerical characters To assign passwords and restrict access to serial ports via the Omni front panel
for the password. Enter the
selected password at the
keypad, proceed as follows:
corresponding serial port
entry under the Password
Maintenance submenu: (1) Using the flow computers front panel keypad and in the normal display
q Ser1 Passwd for Serial mode, press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] [Enter]. This will display the
Port #1
q Ser2 Passwd for Serial
Password Maintenance submenu of the Miscellaneous
Port #2 Configuration menu.
Port #3
Port #4 Priveledged _
Note: If Serial Port #1 has a Level 1
printer connected to it, you Level 1A
need not assign a password
to this port. Ports #3 and #4
are available only if your flow
computer has a second serial
I/O module installed.
(2) Scroll down to place the cursor at the desired Sern Passwd prompt
and enter a password of your choice. The n in Sern represents the
serial port number (e.g., the display shows Ser2 for Serial Port #2 see
sidebar).
Ser1 Passwd
Lockout SW Active? N
Ser2 Passwd _
(3) Press [Enter] once you have keyed-in your password for the selected
serial port. The flow computer will prompt you to enter the privileged
password for the flow computer to validate the new serial port password.
If you have not yet assigned a privileged password, either use OMNI
as the default or scroll up and assign the password now. If you do the
latter, repeat the procedure for assigning the serial port password.
Once assigned, you have the option of changing the serial port passwords via
OmniCom PC configuration software. To do this, while on any field edit screen,
press [Ctrl] [Alt] [P] on your PC keyboard and follow the online instructions.
You will need to enter the current valid password before you can change it.

Enabling Rigorous Auditing of Serial Ports

Rigorous auditing is normally used only as a diagnostic tool to track down
unexpected changes made to the flow computer database. It allows you to log
all transactions of one or more non-password protected serial ports. Actually,
the only way to log all changes to the Omni database done through serial ports
is by enabling rigorous auditing.
To enable rigorous auditing you must define a user-programmable variable

statement. This statement places the decimal value of the serial ports
hexadecimal code into the database address the corresponds to the special
diagnostic function (Index # 3800).
To enable rigorous auditing to one or more serial ports, do the following:
(1) From the table below, select the hexadecimal codes of the serial ports to
which you want to apply rigorous auditing. Then determine the decimal
equivalent of the selected hexadecimal codes (indicated in the table).
(2) Formulate a variable statement that writes the desired decimal value to
Database Point # 3800 (Special Diagnostic Function) using the following
logic:
Address 3800 is EQUAL (=)to the CONSTANT (#) decimal value
Or simply select the respective variable statement from among those

provided in the table.
VARIABLE STATEMENTS FOR E N A B L I N G R I G O R O U S AU D I T I N G

TO SERIAL PORTS
Serial Port(s) # Hexadecimal Decimal Variable
1 2 3 4 Code Equivalent Statement
000A 10 3800=#10
00A0 160 3800=#160
0A00 2560 3800=#2560
A000 40960 3800=#40960
00AA 170 3800=#170
0A0A 2570 3800=#2570
A00A 40970 3800=#40970
0AA0 2720 3800=#2720
A0A0 41120 3800=#41120
AA00 43520 3800=#43520
0AAA 2730 3800=#2730
A0AA 41130 3800=#41130
AA0A 43530 3800=#43530
AAA0 43680 3800=#43680
AAAA 43690 3800=#43690

(3) Either via OmniCom or the front panel keypad, open the Program
Variable submenu under the Miscellaneous Configuration menu,
Verifying the Audit Trail select an available (empty) variable point, and key-in the variable
Feature - To verify that the statement. Press [Enter] when done to enable the rigorous auditing
audit trail feature and feature. In OmniCom, remember to download the variable statement to
rigorous auditing are active,
the flow computer when done if working offline.
make any necessary flow
computer configuration
changes and view or print the
Audit Trail Report (as
indicated in this technical
bulletin). If the changes you
made appear on the report,
Printing and Viewing the Audit Trail Report
the audit trail feature is
working fine. You can print the Audit Trail Report from either the flow computers front panel
keypad or from OmniCom. However, you can view this report only from
OmniCom.
Printing the Audit Trail Report via Front Panel Keypad

To print the Audit Trail Report from the flow computers keypad, do as follows:
(1) In the display mode, press [Prog] [Print] [Enter] to display the Print
Report Menu.
(2) Scroll down to place the cursor at the Audit Trail ? (Y) prompt and type
the number 150, indicating the total number of records to print. It is not
necessary to print all 150 records, unless you want to.
(3) Press [Enter] and the report will print.
Viewing and Printing the Audit Trail Report via OmniCom

To print the Audit Trail Report from OmniCom, do the following:
(1) With OmniCom running, select Audit Trail Report under the Report
menu and press [Enter].
(2) Select Load from Omni in the popup box and press [Enter]. OmniCom
will prompt you for a password to continue. It will allow you to change
the password if you want (for loading the Audit Trail report via OmniCom
only). In any case you will need to enter the password you assigned for
rigorous auditing.
(3) Type the password and press [Enter]. OmniCom will proceed to load the
audit trail data and display the Audit Trail Report.
(4) If you want to print the report, press [Alt] [P] and follow the online
instructions.
(5) Exit OmniCom when done.

Sealing the Flow Computer

TIP - You can set the In addition to the audit trail, Omni flow computers provide sealing features for
download disabling and serial
port lockout switches in one
added security. These security features prevent access to the circuitry and
session while in the tampering of configuration settings, protecting data and system integrity.
Password Maintenance
setup. You can set these The key sealing features are:
features only via the front
panel keypad or using the
Omni Panel Emulator q Download Disabling (OmniCom Lockout)
provided in OmniCom. The
recommended order for q Serial Port Lockout Switches
applying the sealing features
is as follows:
q Program Inhibit (Keypad Lockout) Switch
(1) Disable download to the q Housing Sealing
flow computer
(2) Select the serial port
lockout switch option
(3) Activate the program
inhibit switch Download Disabling (OmniCom Lockout)
(4) Seal the flow computer
housing enclosure Omni flow computer firmware allows you to block all complete downloads from
OmniCom to the flow computer. This feature protects against accidental
downloads that could occur due to incorrect logon. Once a flow computer is
configured, the correct way to log on is to Receive the configuration in
OmniCom.
You can set this feature only via the front panel keypad. To set the download
disabling feature, proceed as follows:
(1) In the normal display mode, press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter]
[Enter] to access Password Maintenance setup.
(2) At the Privileged Password prompt, type-in the corresponding

password and press [Enter]. The download disabling setting will not
appear if you do not enter the privileged password.
(3) Scroll down to the Disable Download? prompt. The LCD screen
displays as shown below.
Lockout SW Active? N
Model #? 0=3K,1=6K 1
Disable Download? N
(4) Press [Y] [Enter] to disable or [N] [Enter] to enable OmniCom

downloading of the configuration data to the Omni flow computer.
If desired, you can proceed to set the serial port lockout switches while in the
Password Maintenance setup. The following section describes this feature.

Serial Port Lockout Switch Enable Option

The flow computers configuration provides a lockout switch option for each
serial port. You can activate or deactivate the serial port lockout switch option
only via the front panel keypad, as follows:
(1) In the normal display mode, press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter]
[Enter] to access Password Maintenance settings.
(2) Scroll down to the Lockout SW Active? setting that corresponds to the
selected serial port. Press [Y] [Enter] to activate or [N] [Enter] to
deactivate the lockout switch for each serial port to which you want to
set this feature.
(3) Press the [Prog] several times to exit the Program Mode and return to
the Display Mode.
Program Inhibit (Keypad Lockout) Switch

Preventing Access to the The Program Inhibit Switch allows you to lock access to the Program and
Program Inhibit Switch -
To prevent unauthorized
Diagnostic/Calibration Modes via the front panel keypad. This prevents
activating or deactivating of configuration settings from being changed. Attempting to enter a configuration
the program inhibit switch, submenu will have no effect when the switch is in the inhibit position, and
seal the flow computer PROGRAM LOCKOUT will display on the bottom line of the LCD screen.
housing as indicated in this
technical bulletin.
Nonetheless, you can still enter key presses to only view data in the normal
Activating the program inhibit
Display Mode.
switch with firmware
revisions prior to .72 blocked Figure 1 (on following page) shows the location of the program inhibit switch;
all configuration changes. which is behind the front panel. To access and activate or deactivate, do the
This was subsequently
modified to allow
following:
configuration changes to
password level 2 operational (1) Hold the front panel from the bottom, gently lift it upwards to disengage
parameters such as PID the latching bezel, and withdraw the flow computer a couple of inches
setpoints, batch end
from its housing case.
commands, and prove
commands.
(2) Locate the red Program Inhibit Switch. It will be on the bottom right
(when facing the front panel) behind the front panel (see Figure 1).
(3) Using your right hand (recommended), place the switch to the downward
position to lock the keypad or place it to the upward position to unlock
the keypad.
(4) Reinsert the flow computer into its housing, making sure that the bezel
latches in place.
You can test the program inhibit switch by pressing the [Prog] [Setup] [Enter]
keys on the front panel keypad. This will take you to the Setup Menu in the
Program Mode. Place the cursor on any of the submenus listed and press
[Enter]. If the Program Lockout message flashes on the bottom line of the
LCD screen, the program inhibit switch is active.

CAUTION!
you must first disengage by
from the case.
Figure 1. The Program Inhibit Switch
Housing Sealing
You can lock or seal the inner enclosure of the flow computer within the outer
enclosure, blocking access to the 'Program Inhibit Switch' and to the circuitry.
To seal the flow computer, insert an instrument sealing wire through the holes
provided on the top-right and towards the back of the enclosures. Before
placing the sealing wire, make sure that the integral latching mechanism is in
place aligning the holes of both enclosures (inner and outer).

Communicating with Instromet Q-Sonic

Ultrasonic Gas Flowmeters
Contents
User Manual Reference - Scope....................................................................................................................1
complements the Abstract ................................................................................................................1
Q-Sonic Flowmeter Theory of Operation .......................................................2
information contained in the
User Manual, applicable to
Revision 23.73/27.73+. Omni Flow Computer Logic ...............................................................................2
Wiring Installation ...............................................................................................4
Communicating with
Instromet Q-Sonic Flow Computer Configuration ...........................................................................4
Ultrasonic Gas Miscellaneous Configuration Meter Run Settings.......................................................... 5
Flowmeters - The Meter Run Setup Entries ............................................................................................... 5
Instromet Q-Sonic
ultrasonic flowmeter Flow Computer Database Addresses and Index Numbers .............................6
measures gas flow with
acoustic pulse reflection Flow Computer User Displays .........................................................................10
paths by using the Absolute SV Module Serial Communications Port ..................................................................... 10
Digital Time Travel (ADTT) Meter Run Data ........................................................................................................... 11
method. This device
communicates with Omni
flow computers via Omnis
SV process I/O combo
module using a proprietary
protocol. To use the scaled Scope
pulse output of the
Instromet flowmeter, the This technical bulletin applies to firmware revisions 23.73+ and 27.73+ of Omni
flow computer must either 6000/Omni 3000 flow computers, for gas flow metering systems.
have an A, B or E
combo module installed.
Abstract
Omni Technical support is The Q-Sonic ultrasonic flowmeter determines the linear gas velocity through the
available at: meter tube by using multiple acoustic pulse reflection paths. The Q-Sonic
Phone: (281) 240-6161 analyzes these paths employing the Absolute Digital Time Travel (ADTT)
Fax: (281) 240-6162 measurement method. The Omni flow computer totalizes either the flowmeter
Technical information is pulse input signal or the profile corrected gas velocity data, received from the Q-
available on our website at: Sonic, to calculate the actual flow rate of gas. The Omni compensates
www.omniflow.com temperature expansion effects on the flowmeter tube by equaling the flow to the
or send email to: profile corrected gas velocity multiplied by the temperature compensated tube
techsupport@omniflow.com
area. If required, it can also directly use the non-compensated flow rate value
transmitted by the ultrasonic meter as the actual flow rate.
TB-990101 23/27.73+ 1
Q-Sonic Flowmeter Theory of Operation

Instromets ultrasonic gas flow metering technology incorporates multiple pairs
of transducers into a smart digital inferential instrumentation device. The device
is installed into a gas pipeline system to measure fluid flow. Each pair of
transducers emits ultrasonic (acoustic) pulses that travel bi-directionally, in either
a single (axial or diagonal) or double (swirl) reflection path, to and from each
transducer in the pair.
The flowmeters apply the Absolute Digital Time Travel (ADTT) method of
ultrasonic pulse analysis, which is based on the fact that pulses travel (between
a transducer pair) faster downstream with the flow than upstream against the
flow. The gas flow velocity is determined from this upstream/downstream travel
time differential of the ultrasonic pulses within the multiple reflection paths. When
there is no gas flow in the pipeline, the upstream and downstream travel times
are the same; i.e., the time differential is zero.
The Q-Sonic flowmeter employs 3 or 5 transducer pairs with a minimum of one
axial path and two swirl paths. This configuration allows for unique combinations
of reflection paths to best take into account the different effects of gas flow
profile variations, including swirl in the pipeline. The gas velocity can be
determined for bi-directional (forward or reverse) fluid flow.
Omni Flow Computer Logic

The Omni flow computer can determine the actual flow rate from either data
received serially from the Q-Sonic flowmeter or from a live pulse frequency
signal input, if one has been connected and assigned.
Totalization will be based on the flow pulse frequency input when the flow
transmitted by the Q-Sonic is in the correct direction (forward/reverse) and the
pulse frequency is within limits. This live signal will also be used in the event of a
communications failure between the Q-Sonic and the Omni. However, In order
for the Omni to use the pulse frequency signal, it must be wired to the Q-Sonic
and an I/O point assigned in the flow computer configuration.
The flow computer will temperature compensate the meter tube area and
calculate flow rate based on the profile corrected velocity of the gas transmitted
serially by the flowmeter. If the calculated flow rate is not within reasonable
limits, the Omni will directly use the transmitted flow rate as the actual flow rate.
2 TB-990101 23/27.73+
TB-990101 Communicating with Instromet Q-Sonic Ultrasonic Flowmeters
Start
No Q.Sonic
Comm unications
OK?
Yes
Set Q.Sonic Clear Q.Sonic

Comm unication Comm unication
Failed Alarm Failed Alarm
Is
Transm itted
No Flow Rate in
the Correct
Direction?
Yes
No Are Pulse I/O Are Pulse I/O No Clear Pulse Signal

Assigned? Assigned? Suspect Alarm
Yes Yes
Is the
Flow Based on No Set Pulse Signal
Pulses within Suspect Alarm
Limits?
Yes
Is the
No Flow Based on
Gas Velocity
Clear Pulse Signal within Limits?
Suspect Alarm
Yes
Disable Clear Flow Set Flow Clear Flow

Totalizing Delta Alarm Delta Alarm Delta Alarm
Calculate Actual Flow Calculate Actual Flow Calculate Actual Flow

Set Run as
Based on Pulse Based on Gas Velocity Based on Transm itted
Inactive
Input Signal & Temp Comp Area Flow Rate
End
Figure 1. Flow computer logic flow diagram for the Q-Sonic ultrasonic gas flowmeter.
TB-990101 23/27.73+ 3
Wiring Installation
Serial Data Figure 2 shows the typical wiring required for connecting a Q-Sonic flowmeter to
Communications - The the Omni flow computer. A 2-wire RS-485 interface can be wired to either port
serial interface between
(terminals 1 and 2 for port 1, or 3 and 4 for port 2) of the flow computer terminal
these devices is 2-wire RS-
485 mode utilizing a block that corresponds to the SV combo module. You can install up to two SV
proprietary protocol. modules in the Omni flow computer, which will give you an availability of 4 SV
RS-485 ports. Although not required, it is recommended that the flowmeter
frequency pulse signals also be wired to the Omnis input channel #3 (forward
Setting Up and Wiring to direction) and input channel # 4 (reverse direction) of an A combo module.
Omni Combo Modules - In
order to communicate with
Input channel #3 corresponds to terminals 5 and 6, and input channel #4 to
Q-Sonic ultrasonic terminals 7 and 8 of the back panel terminal block respective to the combo
flowmeters, the Omni flow module. The actual terminal block numbers depend upon which backplane
computer must be equipped connector or slot the module is plugged. The E combo module can also be
with at least one SV combo
module (Model 68-6203).
used in this configuration with slight variations in wiring connections (see
For instructions on jumper Volume I, Chapter 2-12).
settings and other process
I/O combination module
setup information, please
refer to Volume 1, Chapter
2 of the Omni User Manual
Figure 2. Example of wiring a Q-Sonic flowmeter to the Omni flow computers

RS-485 port #1 of an SV module with the recommended bi-directional
(forward/reverse) pulse output to input channels #3 and 4 of an A combo
module.
Flow Computer Configuration

The flow configuration settings that are specific to the Q-Sonic flowmeter are
entered in the miscellaneous configuration meter run menu and the meter run
setup menu. You must enter the miscellaneous configuration meter run settings
first and then proceed to the meter run setup entries. These configuration
settings can be entered either via the Omni flow computers front panel keypad
or using OmniCom configuration PC software (see Chapter 2 Flow Computer
Configuration in Volume 3 of the Omni User Manual, and the technical bulletin
TB-960701 Overview of OmniCom Configuration PC Software).
4 TB-990101 ! 23/27.73+
Miscellaneous Configuration Meter Run Settings

The following miscellaneous configuration meter run settings correspond to the
Q-Sonic ultrasonic gas flowmeter:
" Select Flowmeter Device Type Enter [4] for each meter run that you want
to select the Instromet Q-Sonic flowmeter as the device type.
" Select SV Module Port The Omni flow computer can accept two SV combo
modules. With one SV module you have two SV ports available, and with two SV
modules four ports are available. For each ultrasonic meter run, enter the SV port
number (1 to 4) to which the RS-485 serial interface input from the Q-Sonic
flowmeter is wired to the flow computer.
" Select Flow Direction Q-Sonic flowmeters allow for bi-directional fluid flow
measurement. You can setup the flow computer to totalize either forward or
reverse flow on any meter run with an ultrasonic flowmeter.
" Assign Flow Pulse Frequency I/O Point Flowmeter pulse signals can
only be assigned to Input Channels #3 and #4 of A and E combo modules, and
input channel #3 of a B combo module. Enter the input channel number, which
will be used to input the ultrasonic flowmeter pulse signal.
Meter Run Setup Entries

The following meter run setup entries are available for the Q-Sonic ultrasonic
gas flowmeter:
Enter the diameter of the ultrasonic flowmeter tube, in inches
" Tube Diameter
(firmware 23) or millimeters (firmware 27). This diameter is subsequently
corrected for expansion due to temperature, and used together with the 'corrected
gas velocity' through the meter to calculate flow rate.
Enter the temperature, as degrees
" Tube Reference Temperature
Fahrenheit (firmware 23) or degrees Celsius (firmware 27), at which the ultrasonic
meter tube was measured.
The ultrasonic meter tube will expand and
" Tube Expansion Coefficient
contract with temperature. The flow computer requires the linear coefficient of
thermal expansion for the meter tube material in order to correct the meter tube
area.
US Customary Units Metric Units

-100 to 300 F = 6.20 x e -73.3 to 148.9 C = 1.12 x e
-6 -5
Mild Carbon Steel Plate
-100 to 300 F = 9.25 x e -73.3 to 148.9 C = 1.67 x e
-6 -5
304/316 Stainless Steel
The actual user-

" Q-Sonic Maximum Flow Rate Deviation Percent
entered flow used by the flow computer to totalize depends upon several factors:
(1) If a pulse signal is available the flow computer will use it for calculations as
long as the calculated flow rate is within this 'flow rate deviation percentage'
of the flow transmitted serially by the Q-Sonic.
(2) If a pulse signal is not available or failed, the flow computer will use the
'corrected linear gas velocity' transmitted by the Q-Sonic and calculate flow
based on the 'temperature compensated area' of the meter tube. The flow
rate calculated by this method must also be within this 'flow rate deviation
percentage' of the flow transmitted serially by the Q-Sonic.
Summarizing, the flow computer first tries to use the pulse signal, then the
transmitted gas velocity value and finally the transmitted flow rate.
TB-990101 ! 23/27.73+ 5
" Minimum Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Ratio The flow computer
calculates the AGC ratio for each ultrasonic path in both path directions. An alarm
will occur if the AGC ration of any path drops below this ratio. Reasonable entries
are 1.5 to 2.
Difference Between Gas " Minimum Percent Sample Ratio This entry checks the ratio of good
Velocity and Velocity of received data pulses verses total transmitted pulses for each ultrasonic path in
Sound - The gas velocity both directions. A ratio below this setting will cause an alarm. Reasonable entries
through the meter tube is are 50% to 70%.
directly proportional to the
actual flow rate of the gas in " Velocity of Sound (VOS) in Gas Deviation Percent In some
the pipeline. The velocity of configurations, the flow computer can verify that the average VOS calculated for
sound (VOS) refers to the all paths agrees with the VOS of each individual path. This entry is the maximum
amount of time it takes a percent that any one path VOS varies from the average VOS of all the paths.
transmitted acoustic pulse
to travel through the gas
" Gas Velocity Low Cutoff Some gas movement can occur even when an
ultrasonic paths. The VOS ultrasonic meter is blocked-in. This is caused by convection currents within the
will vary depending upon meter tube. Enter a minimum gas velocity, in feet per second (Revision 23) or
gas quality and flowing meters per second (Revision 27), below which you do not want to totalize.
conditions. Consult with Instromet to determine this value.
Flow Computer Database Addresses and Index

Numbers
The following tables list the Modbus database addresses within the Omni have
been assigned to the Q-Sonic ultrasonic metering feature. These tables are
categorized per data type.
Meter Run Alarm Status Points Real Time Data

Database Address Database Address
Description for Meter Run Number Description for Meter Run Number
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Loss of communication 2154 2254 2354 2454 Path 1 - sample error alarm 2167 2267 2367 2467
Loss of pulse impulse 2155 2255 2355 2455 Path 2 - sample error alarm 2168 2268 2368 2468
Flow rate delta alarm 2156 2256 2356 2456 Path 3 - sample error alarm 2169 2269 2369 2469
Path 1a - AGC ratio alarm 2157 2257 2357 2457 Path 4 - sample error alarm 2170 2270 2370 2470
Path 1b - AGC ratio alarm 2158 2258 2358 2458 Path 5 - sample error alarm 2171 2271 2371 2471
Path 2a - AGC ratio alarm 2159 2259 2359 2459 Overall sample error alarm 2172 2272 2372 2472
Path 2b - AGC ratio alarm 2160 2260 2360 2460 Path 1 - gas VOS alarm 2173 2273 2373 2473
Path 3a - AGC ratio alarm 2161 2261 2361 2461 Path 2 - gas VOS alarm 2174 2274 2374 2474
Path 4a - AGC ratio alarm 2163 2263 2363 2463 Path 4 - gas VOS alarm 2176 2276 2376 2476
Path 5a - AGC ratio alarm 2165 2265 2365 2465 Notes: AGC # Automatic Gain Control
Path 5b - AGC ratio alarm 2166 2266 2366 2466 VOS # Velocity of Sound
6 TB-990101 ! 23/27.73+
16-bit Integer Registers Real Time Data

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Flow direction (0=frwd,1=rvrs) 3155 3255 3355 3455 Path 1a - AGC level 3180 3280 3380 3480
Path 1 - performance (%)* 3158 3258 3358 3458 Path 1b - AGC level 3181 3281 3381 3481
Path 2 - performance (%)* 3159 3259 3359 3459 Path 2a - AGC level 3182 3282 3382 3482
Path 4 - performance (%)* 3161 3261 3361 3461 Path 3a - AGC level 3184 3284 3384 3484
Path 1a - AGC ratio* 3163 3263 3363 3463 Path 4a - AGC level 3186 3286 3386 3486
Path 1b - AGC ratio* 3164 3264 3364 3464 Path 4b - AGC level 3187 3287 3387 3487
Path 2a - AGC ratio* 3165 3265 3365 3465 Path 5a - AGC level 3188 3288 3388 3488
Path 2b - AGC ratio* 3166 3266 3366 3466 Path 5b - AGC level 3189 3289 3389 3489
Path 3a - AGC ratio* 3167 3267 3367 3467 Path 1a - AGC limit 3190 3290 3390 3490
Path 3b - AGC ratio* 3168 3268 3368 3468 Path 1b - AGC limit 3191 3291 3391 3491
Number of paths 3173 3273 3373 3473 Path 4a - AGC limit 3196 3296 3396 3496
Number of samples taken 3174 3274 3374 3474 Path 4b - AGC limit 3197 3297 3397 3497
Path 1 - valid sample 3175 3275 3375 3475 Path 5a - AGC limit 3198 3298 3398 3498
Path 2 - valid sample 3176 3276 3376 3476 Path 5b - AGC limit 3199 3299 3399 3499
Path 3 - valid sample 3177 3277 3377 3477
Path 4 - valid sample 3178 3278 3378 3478 Notes: AGC # Automatic Gain Control
Path 5 - valid sample 3179 3279 3379 3479
* Integer with two inferred decimal places.
32-bit IEEE Floating Points Real Time Data
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Maximum flow deviation (%) 17513 17613 17713 17813 Path 1 - velocity of sound 17527 17627 17727 17827
Minimum AGC ratio (1 to 10) 17514 17614 17714 17814 Path 2 - velocity of sound 17528 17628 17728 17828
Minimum sample ratio (%) 17515 17615 17715 17815 Path 3 - velocity of sound 17529 17629 17729 17829
Max. VOS deviation (%) 17516 17616 17716 17816 Path 4 - velocity of sound 17530 17630 17730 17830
Gas velocity low cutoff 17517 17617 17717 17817 Path 5 - velocity of sound 17531 17631 17731 17831
Avg. path performance (%) 17520 17620 17720 17820 Path 1 - gas velocity 17532 17632 17732 17832
Velocity of sound (VOS) 17521 17621 17721 17821 Path 2 - gas velocity 17533 17633 17733 17833
Gas velocity 17522 17622 17722 17822 Path 3 - gas velocity 17534 17634 17734 17834
Pressure 17523 17623 17723 17823 Path 4 - gas velocity 17535 17635 17735 17835
Temperature 17524 17624 17724 17824 Path 5 - gas velocity 17536 17636 17736 17836
Gas flow rate 17525 17625 17725 17825 Notes: AGC # Automatic Gain Control
Net flow rate 17526 17626 17726 17826 VOS # Velocity of Sound
TB-990101 ! 23/27.73+ 7
32-bit IEEE Floating Points 32-bit IEEE Floating Points

Previous Hours Average Data Previous Days Average Data
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Number of samples taken 17537 17637 17737 17837 Number of samples taken 17568 17668 17768 17868
Path 1 - valid sample 17538 17638 17738 17838 Path 1 - valid sample 17569 17669 17769 17869
Path 1a - AGC level 17543 17643 17743 17843 Path 1a - AGC level 17574 17674 17774 17874
Path 1b - AGC level 17544 17644 17744 17844 Path 1b - AGC level 17575 17675 17775 17875
Path 1a - AGC limit 17553 17663 17773 17883 Path 1a - AGC limit 17584 17684 17784 17884
Path 1b - AGC limit 17554 17664 17774 17884 Path 1b - AGC limit 17585 17685 17785 17885
Path 1 - gas velocity 17563 17663 17763 17863 Path 1 - gas velocity 17594 17694 17794 17894
Notes: AGC Automatic Gain Control
8 TB-990101 23/27.73+
Flow Computer Configuration Data Miscellaneous Meter Run Configuration

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Flowmeter device type 3108 3208 3308 3408 Flow direction (0=frwd,1=rvrs) 3155 3255 3355 3455
SV module port # 3153 3253 3353 3453 Flow pulse freq. I/O point # 13001 13014 13027 13040
Flow Computer Configuration Data Meter Run Setup

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Tube diameter 7145 7245 7345 7445 Minimum AGC ratio (1 to 10) 17514 17614 17714 17814
Tube coefficient 7146 7246 7346 7446 Minimum sample ratio (%) 17515 17615 17715 17815
Tube reference temperature 7147 7247 7347 7447 Max. VOS deviation (%) 17516 17616 17716 17816
Maximum flow deviation (%) 17513 17613 17713 17813 Gas velocity low cutoff 17517 17617 17717 17817
TB-990101 23/27.73+ 9
Flow Computer User Displays

SV Module Serial Communications Port
You can view live data received via RS-485 communications on the flow
computer front panel LCD display only if a SV port is used to input the RS-485
interface from the Q-Sonic flowmeter. To view this data, press [Setup] [n]
[Display] on the Omni front panel keypad (where n equals the SV port
number, 1 to 4, you want to display) when in the Display Mode. The following
data will display:

!"#
" !"# $
" !"# $
" !"# %
&'()*+#,#"
-&'()*+#,#" .//
&)0()*+#,#" .
-&)0()*+#,#" $$
&'()*+#,#" $./
-&'()*+#,#" /
&'()*+ /
-&'()*+ /
&)0()*+ /
-&)0()*+ /
&'()*+ /
-&'()*+ /

1 2
3 #" 2.
# 4 $2$$$56$
7#*28 $2$$$56$
9 2/.
9 $2$$$56$
-":

1 2

1 2/

1 2.
3#" 2
3#" 2
3#" 2
10 TB-990101 23/27.73+
Meter Run Data

To view the meter run data on the flow computer LCD display, press [Meter] [n]
[Display] on the Omni front panel keypad (where n equals the meter run
number, 1 to 4, you want to display) when in the Display Mode. The following
data will display:
;55

# #< 2
2.
3 #" 2
="' 2/
# '"
# < 2
# < 2
# < 2
2
- 2/
2.
- 2%
2
- 2.
TB-990101 23/27.73+ 11
LIMITED WARRANTY. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. ( Omni Flow ) warrants all equipment
manufactured by it to be free from defects in workmanship and materials, provided that such
equipment was properly selected for the service intended, properly installed, and not misused.
Equipment which is returned, transportation prepaid, to Omnis assembly plant within three (3)
years after date of shipment, and is found after inspection by Omni Flow Computers, Inc. to be
defective in workmanship or materials, will be repaired or replaced, at the sole option of Omni
Flow Computers, Inc., free-of-charge, and return-shipped at lowest cost transportation, prepay
and add. Warranties on third-party manufactured devices supplied by Omni Flow or incorporated
by Omni Flow in the manufacture of equipment bearing an Omni label shall be extended by the
original device manufacturer.
This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the equipment has resulted from accident, abuse or
misapplication.
NO OTHER WARRANTIES. Omni Flow disclaims any and all warranties, either expressed or
implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantibility, fitness for a particular
purpose, and any other warranties which extend beyond the terms herein. No agreement varying
or extending the foregoing warranties or limitations will be binding upon Omni Flow unless in
writing, signed by a duly authorized officer.
LOSS OR DAMAGE. Omni Flow shall by liable only for loss or damage caused directly by its sole
negligence. Liability of Omni Flow for any claim of any kind for any loss or damage arising out of,
or connected with this warranty; or from the performance or breach hereof shall in no case exceed
the price allocated to the equipment or unit thereof which gives rise to the claim. The liability of
Omni Flow shall terminate three (3) years after the shipment of the equipment from Omni Flow.
NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Omni Flow shall not be liable in any
circumstance for any incidental or consequential damages whatsoever (including, without
limitation, loss of business profits or revenue, business interruption, loss of business information,
or other pecuniary loss, or claims of customers of the purchaser for any and such damages)
arising out of the use or inability to use Omni Flow equipment or devices manufactured by third
party manufacturers.
Copyright 1991-1999 by Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
No part of this manual may be used or reproduced in any form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval
system, without prior written consent of Omni Flow Computers, Inc., Stafford, Texas, USA. Making copies of any part of
this manual for any purpose other than your own personal use is a violation of United States copyright laws and
international treaty provisions.
Omni Flow Computers, Inc., pursuant to a policy of product development and improvement, may make any necessary
changes to this document without notice.
Omni 3000 and Omni 6000 are trademarks of Omni Flow Computers, Inc.
OmniCom is a registered trademark of Omni Flow Computers, Inc.
(SINGLE-USER PRODUCTS)
This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and Omni Flow Computers, Inc. By the
installation and use of accompanying equipment manufactured by Omni Flow Computers, Inc.,
you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of this Agreement.
OMNI FLOW COMPUTERS SOFTWARE LICENSE

1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. ( Omni Flow ) grants to you the right to
use one copy of Omni Flow software programs (the SOFTWARE) provided with the
accompanying equipment manufactured by Omni Flow.
2. COPYRIGHT. The SOFTWARE is owned by Omni Flow and is protected by United States
copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore, you must treat the SOFTWARE like
any other copyrighted material (e.g.: a book or recording on magnetic media).
3. OTHER RESTRICTIONS. You may not reverse engineer, duplicate, decompile, or
disassemble the SOFTWARE provided on magnetic media in the form of disks or erasable
programmable memory circuits ( EPROMs ). If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade and transferred by
Omni Flow over a modem connection to magnetic media, or a single hard disk, then you may use
the SOFTWARE for the sole purpose of permanent transfer to EPROMs. You may not retain a
copy for backup or archival purposes.
LIMITED WARRANTY
LIMITED WARRANTY. Omni Flow warrants that the SOFTWARE will perform substantially in
accordance with the accompanying written materials provided with the purchase of an Omni
manufactured product for a period of three (3) years from the date of shipment from Omnis
production facility.
Omni Flows entire liability shall be, at Omni Flows sole option, (a) remedy any defect and provide
you, at no charge, with replacement magnetic media or (b) download an upgrade via a dial-up
modem connection between Omni Flow and the end user, provided that equipment specified by
Omni Flow for that purpose is used.
This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the SOFTWARE has resulted from accident, abuse or
misapplication.
purpose, and any other warranties which extend beyond the terms herein, with respect to the
SOFTWARE and accompanying hardware. No agreement varying or extending the foregoing
warranties or limitations will be binding upon Omni Flow unless in writing, signed by a duly
authorized officer.
NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Omni Flow shall not be liable in any
circumstance for any damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, loss of business profits or
revenue, business interruption, loss of business information, or other pecuniary loss, or claims of
customers of the purchaser for any and such damages) arising out of the use or inability to use
the SOFTWARE.
(SINGLE-USER PRODUCTS)
This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and Omni Flow Computers, Inc. By the
installation and use of this product you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of this Agreement.
OMNICOM SOFTWARE LICENSE

1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. ( Omni Flow ) grants to you the right to
use one copy of the OmniCom software program and accompanying written materials (the
SOFTWARE) provided with the accompanying equipment manufactured by Omni Flow.
2. COPYRIGHT. The SOFTWARE and accompanying written materials is owned by Omni Flow
or its suppliers and is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty
provisions. Therefore, you must treat the SOFTWARE like any other copyrighted material (e.g.: a
book or recording on magnetic media) except that in the sole instance of SOFTWARE provided
on 5 or 3 magnetic media disks, you may (a) make one copy of the SOFTWARE solely for
backup or archival purposes, or (b) transfer the SOFTWARE to a single hard disk provided you
keep the original solely for backup or archival purposes.
3. OTHER RESTRICTIONS. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the
SOFTWARE provided on magnetic media. You may transfer the SOFTWARE and accompanying
written materials on a permanent basis provided you maintain no copies, and the recipient agrees
to the terms of this Agreement.
4. DUAL MEDIA SOFTWARE. If the SOFTWARE is provided on 5 or 3 magnetic media
disks, then you may use the disks appropriate for your single-user computer. You may not use the
other disks on another computer or loan or transfer them to another user except as part of the
permanent transfer (as provided above) of all SOFTWARE and written materials
LIMITED WARRANTY
LIMITED WARRANTY. Omni Flow warrants that the SOFTWARE will perform substantially in
accordance with the accompanying written materials provided with the purchase of an Omni
manufactured product for a period of three (3) years from the date of shipment from Omnis
production facility.
Omni Flows entire liability shall be, at Omni Flows sole option, (a) remedy any defect and provide
you, at no charge, with replacement magnetic media or (b) download an upgrade via a dial-up
modem connection between Omni Flow and the end user, provided that equipment specified by
Omni Flow for that purpose is used.
This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the SOFTWARE has resulted from accident, abuse or
misapplication.
purpose, and any other warranties which extend beyond the terms herein, with respect to the
SOFTWARE, the accompanying written materials and hardware.
NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Omni Flow or its suppliers shall not be liable
in any circumstance for any damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, loss of business
profits or revenue, business interruption, loss of business information, or other pecuniary loss, or
claims of customers of the purchaser for any and such damages) arising out of the use or inability
to use the SOFTWARE.

Flow Computer

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Flow Computer

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Guide

Volume 2C Basic Operation

Volume 4C Modbus Database

Effective May 1999

World-wide Web Site:

Getting User Support

About the Flow Computer Applications

About the User Manual

xii ALL.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 1. System Architecture and Installation

Volume 2. Basic Operation

ALL.71+ ! 05/99 xiii

Database Addresses and Index Numbers

Volume 5. Technical Bulletins

Conventions Used in this Manual

xiv ALL.71+ ! 05/99

Figure Captions Figure captions are numbered in sequence as they

Page Numbers Page numbering restarts at the beginning of every

Application Revision and The contents of Volume 1 and Volume 5 are

Copyright Information and Modifications Policy

Warranty, Licenses and Product Registration

Copyright 1991-1999 by Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

xvi ALL.71+ ! 05/99

Effective May 1999

1. Overview of Hardware and Software Features..................................................... 1-1

2. Process Input/Output Combination Module Setup ............................................. 2-1

3. Mounting and Power Options ................................................................................ 3-1

ALL.71+ w 05/99 iii

4. Connecting to Flowmeters..................................................................................... 4-1

5. Connecting to Transducers and Transmitters ..................................................... 5-1

6. Connecting Analog Outputs and Miscellaneous I/O Including Provers............. 6-1

7. Connecting to Serial Devices................................................................................. 7-1

8. Diagnostic and Calibration Features .................................................................... 8-1

9. Flow Computer Specifications .............................................................................. 9-1

ALL.71+ w 05/99 vii

Fig. 4-1. Connecting to a Turbine Pre-amp (A or B Combo Modules) ...............................................4-1

viii ALL.71+ w 05/99

1. Overview of Hardware and Software

ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-1

1.2. Operators Panel

1.2.2. Electromechanical Totalizers

1.2.3. Diagnostic and Program LEDs

1.2.4. Active Alarm LED

1.2.5. Alpha Shift LED

1-2 ALL.71+ w 05/99

DIAGNOSTIC LED LCD DISPLAY

OPERATOR KEYPAD Temp Press Density D.P. Orifice Meter

Fig. 1-1. Features of the Operator Front Panel

ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-3

1.3. Passive Backplane Mother Board

Fig. 1-2. Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 3000

1-4 ALL.71+ w 05/99

Fig. 1-3. Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 6000

ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-5

1.4. Back Panel Terminal Module

1.4.1. Back Panel Terminations

Back Panel Fuses - All DC

1-6 ALL.71+ w 05/99

1.4.2. Extended Back Panel

Extended Back Panel

ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-7

1.5. Central Processor Module

Fig. 1-6. Central Processor Module - Jumper Settings

1-8 ALL.71+ w 05/99